CELEX ID: 32021R0821

--- ENGLISH ---

Document:
11.6.2021
EN
Official Journal of the European Union
L 206/1
REGULATION (EU) 2021/821 OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL
of 20 May 2021
setting up a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items (recast)
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, and in particular Article 207(2) thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the European Commission,
After transmission of the draft legislative act to the national parliaments,
Acting in accordance with the ordinary legislative procedure 
(
1
)
,
Whereas:
(1)
Council Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 
(
2
)
 has been substantially amended several times. Since further amendments are to be made, that Regulation should be recast in the interests of clarity, effectiveness and efficiency.
(2)
This Regulation aims to ensure that in the area of dual-use items, the Union and its Member States fully take into account all relevant considerations. Relevant considerations include international obligations and commitments, obligations under relevant sanctions, considerations of national foreign and security policy including those contained in the Council Common Position 2008/944/CFSP 
(
3
)
, among them human rights, and considerations about intended end-use and the risk of diversion. Through this Regulation, the Union demonstrates its commitment to maintaining robust legal requirements with regard to dual-use items, as well as to strengthening the exchange of relevant information and greater transparency. With regard to cyber-surveillance items, the competent authorities of the Member States should consider in particular the risk of them being used in connection with internal repression or the commission of serious violations of human rights and international humanitarian law.
(3)
This Regulation also aims to strengthen the guidance to be given to exporters, in particular to small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), regarding responsible practices, yet without impairing the global competitiveness of exporters of dual-use items or other associated industry or academia which are resident or established in a Member State.
(4)
United Nations Security Council Resolution 1540 (2004), adopted on 28 April 2004, decided that all States are to take and enforce effective measures to establish domestic controls to prevent the proliferation of nuclear, chemical or biological weapons and their means of delivery, including by establishing appropriate controls over related materials, equipment and technology. Controls are also required under relevant international agreements, such as the Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production, Stockpiling and use of Chemical Weapons and on their Destruction (the ‘Chemical Weapons Convention’ or ‘CWC’) and the Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production and Stockpiling of Bacteriological (Biological) and Toxin Weapons and On Their Destruction (the ‘Biological and Toxin Weapons Convention’ or ‘BWC’), and in line with commitments agreed upon in multilateral export control regimes.
(5)
An effective common system of export controls on dual-use items is therefore necessary to ensure that the international commitments and responsibilities of the Member States and of the Union, in particular regarding non-proliferation, regional peace, security and stability and respect for human rights and international humanitarian law, are complied with.
(6)
The EU Strategy against proliferation of Weapons of Mass Destruction of 12 December 2003 (‘EU WMD Strategy’) emphasises the Union’s commitment to strong national and internationally coordinated export controls.
(7)
The contribution of exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance or other relevant stakeholders to the overall aim of trade controls is crucial. In order for them to be able to act in conformity with this Regulation, the assessment of risks related to transactions concerned by this Regulation is to be carried out through transaction-screening measures, also known as the due diligence principle, as a part of an Internal Compliance Programme (ICP). In that regard, in particular the size and organisational structure of exporters have to be taken into account when developing and implementing ICPs.
(8)
In order to address the risk that certain non-listed cyber-surveillance items exported from the customs territory of the Union might be misused by persons complicit in or responsible for directing or committing serious violations of human rights or international humanitarian law, it is appropriate to place the export of such items under control. Associated risks relate, in particular, to cases where cyber-surveillance items are specially designed to enable intrusion or deep packet inspection into information and telecommunications systems in order to conduct covert surveillance of natural persons by monitoring, extracting, collecting or analysing data, including biometrics data, from those systems. Items used for purely commercial applications such as billing, marketing, quality services, user satisfaction or network security are generally considered not to entail such risks.
(9)
With a view to strengthening the effective control of exports of non-listed cyber-surveillance items, it is essential to further harmonise the application of catch-all controls in that area. To that end, Member States are committed to supporting such controls by sharing information amongst themselves and with the Commission, in particular regarding technological developments of cyber-surveillance items, and by exercising vigilance in the application of such controls to promote an exchange at Union level.
(10)
In order to enable the Union to react rapidly to the serious misuse of existing technologies or to new risks associated with emerging technologies, a mechanism should be introduced to enable Member States to coordinate their responses when a new risk is identified. Such coordination should be followed by initiatives to introduce equivalent controls at the multilateral level in order to broaden the response to the identified risk.
(11)
Transmission of dual-use software and technology by means of electronic media, fax or telephone to destinations outside the customs territory of the Union should also be controlled. In order to limit the administrative burden for exporters and the competent authorities of the Member States, general or global licenses or harmonised interpretations of provisions should be provided for certain transmissions, such as transmissions to a cloud.
(12)
Considering the important role of customs authorities in the enforcement of export controls, the terms used in this Regulation should, to the extent possible, be consistent with the definitions set out in Regulation (EU) No 952/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council 
(
4
)
 (the ‘Union Customs Code’).
(13)
Various categories of persons can be involved in the export of dual-use items, including natural persons such as service providers, researchers, consultants and persons transmitting dual-use items electronically. It is essential that all such persons are aware of the risks associated with the export and the provision of technical assistance regarding sensitive items. In particular, academic and research institutions face distinct challenges in export control due to, inter alia, their general commitment to the free exchange of ideas, the fact that their research work often involves cutting edge technologies, their organisational structures and the international nature of their scientific exchanges. Member States and the Commission should, where necessary, raise awareness among the academic and research community and provide them with tailored guidance to address those distinct challenges. In alignment with multilateral export control regimes, the implementation of controls should provide, to the extent possible, for a common approach with respect to certain provisions, in particular regarding the academia related de-control notes ‘basic scientific research’ and ‘public domain’.
(14)
The definition of the term ‘broker’ should be revised to include legal persons and partnerships not resident or established in a Member State and that provide brokering services from the customs territory of the Union.
(15)
The Lisbon Treaty clarifies that the provision of technical assistance involving a cross-border movement falls under Union competence. It is therefore appropriate to introduce a definition of technical assistance and to specify the controls applicable to its provision. In addition, for reasons of effectiveness and consistency, controls on the provision of technical assistance should be harmonised.
(16)
As in Regulation (EC) No 428/2009, it should be possible for Member States’ authorities to prohibit the transit of non-Union dual-use items under certain circumstances where, through intelligence or other sources, they have reasonable grounds for suspecting that the items are or might be intended, in their entirety or in part, for a military end-use in a country that is subject to an arms embargo, or for the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction or their means of delivery.
(17)
Licensing conditions and requirements should be harmonised, where appropriate, in order to avoid distortions of competition and to ensure the consistent and effective application of controls throughout the customs territory of the Union. To that effect, it is also necessary that the competent authorities of the Member States are clearly identified in all control situations. The responsibility for deciding on individual, global or national general export authorisations, on authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance, on transits of non-Union dual-use items and on authorisations for the transfer within the customs territory of the Union of dual-use items listed in Annex IV, lies with national authorities.
(18)
Guidelines for Internal Compliance Programmes should be introduced in order to contribute to achieving the level-playing field between exporters and to enhance the effective application of controls. Such guidelines should take into account the differences in sizes, resources, fields of activity and other features and conditions of exporters and their subsidiaries, such as intra-group compliance structures and standards, thereby avoiding a ‘one model for all’ approach and helping each exporter to find its own solutions for compliance and competitiveness. Exporters using global export authorisations should implement an ICP unless the competent authority considers it unnecessary due to other circumstances it has taken into account when processing the application for a global export authorisation submitted by the exporter.
(19)
Additional Union general export authorisations should be introduced in order to reduce the administrative burden on companies, in particular SMEs, and authorities, while ensuring an appropriate level of control of the relevant items to the relevant destinations. Where necessary, Member States can provide guidance to exporters regarding the application of general authorisations. Member States can also introduce national general export authorisations for low-risk exports where they consider it necessary. An authorisation for large projects should also be introduced to adapt licensing conditions to the particular needs of industry.
(20)
The Commission, in close consultation with Member States and stakeholders, should develop guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices to support practical application of controls. When preparing the guidelines and/or recommendations, the Commission should have due regard to the information needs of SMEs.
(21)
Common lists of dual-use items, destinations and guidelines are essential elements for an effective export control regime.
(22)
Member States that establish national control lists pursuant to this Regulation should inform the Commission and the other Member States of such lists. Member States should also inform the Commission and the other Member States of all decisions to refuse an authorisation for an export for which an authorisation is required on the basis of a national control list.
(23)
In order to allow for a swift Union response to changing circumstances as regards the assessment of the sensitivity of exports under Union general export authorisations as well as technological and commercial developments, the power to adopt acts in accordance with Article 290 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union (TFEU) should be delegated to the Commission in respect of amending Annexes I, II and IV to this Regulation. Decisions to update the common list of dual-use items subject to export controls set out in Annex I should be in conformity with the obligations and commitments that Member States or the Union have accepted as members of the relevant international non-proliferation agreements and as members of multilateral export control regimes or by ratification of relevant international treaties. Where the amendment of Annex I concerns dual-use items which are also listed in Annex II or IV, those Annexes should be amended accordingly. Decisions to update the common lists of items and destinations set out in Sections A to H of Annex II should be made having regard to the assessment criteria set out in this Regulation. It is of particular importance that the Commission carry out appropriate consultations during its preparatory work, including at expert level, and that those consultations be conducted in accordance with the principles laid down in the Interinstitutional Agreement of 13 April 2016 on Better Law-Making 
(
5
)
. In particular, to ensure equal participation in the preparation of delegated acts, the European Parliament and the Council receive all documents at the same time as Member States’ experts, and their experts systematically have access to meetings of Commission expert groups dealing with the preparation of delegated acts.
(24)
The Commission should publish the updates to Annex I through delegated acts in all the official languages of the Union.
(25)
The Commission should publish and keep updated a compilation of national control lists in force in the Member States in all the official languages of the Union.
(26)
National provisions and decisions affecting exports of dual-use items should be taken in the framework of the common commercial policy, and in particular Regulation (EU) 2015/479 of the European Parliament and of the Council 
(
6
)
. Appropriate exchange of information and consultations on national provisions and decisions should ensure the effective and consistent application of controls throughout the customs territory of the Union.
(27)
The existence of a common control system is a prerequisite for establishing the free movement of dual-use items inside the customs territory of the Union.
(28)
Pursuant to and within the limits of Article 36 TFEU and in accordance with international obligations undertaken, Member States retain the right to carry out controls on transfers of certain dual-use items within the customs territory of the Union in order to safeguard public policy or public security. The list of items subject to intra-Union transfer controls set out in Annex IV should be periodically reviewed taking into account the further evolution of the underlying international obligations, as well as technological and commercial developments as regards the assessment of the sensitivity of transfers. Decisions to update the common list of dual-use items subject to export controls set out in Annex IV should be made having regard to Article 36 TFEU, namely the public policy and public security interests of the Member States.
(29)
On 22 September 1998, the Member States and the Commission signed Protocols additional to the respective safeguards agreements between the Member States, the European Atomic Energy Community and the International Atomic Energy Agency, which, among other measures, oblige the Member States to provide information on transfers of specified equipment and non-nuclear material. Intra-Union transfer controls should allow the Union and its Member States to fulfil their obligations under those agreements.
(30)
In order to achieve uniform and consistent application of controls throughout the Union, it is appropriate to broaden the scope of consultation and information exchange between the Member States and the Commission, and to introduce tools to support the development of a common export control network throughout the Union, such as electronic licensing procedures, technical expert groups and the setting up of an enforcement coordination mechanism. It is of particular importance to ensure that exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance and other relevant stakeholders concerned by this Regulation, including industry and civil society organisations, are consulted, where appropriate, by the Dual-Use Coordination Group and the technical expert groups.
(31)
While customs authorities share certain information with other customs authorities using a risk management system in accordance with Union customs rules, it is also appropriate to ensure close cooperation between licensing and customs authorities.
(32)
It is appropriate to clarify that, to the extent that it concerns personal data, the processing and exchange of information should comply with the applicable rules on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data laid down in Regulations (EU) 2016/679 
(
7
)
 and (EU) 2018/1725 
(
8
)
 of the European Parliament and of the Council.
(33)
Member States and the Commission should take all necessary measures to ensure the protection of confidential information in compliance with, in particular, Commission Decisions (EU, Euratom) 2015/443 
(
9
)
and (EU, Euratom) 2015/444 
(
10
)
 and the Agreement between the Member States of the European Union, meeting within the Council, regarding the protection of classified information exchanged in the interests of the European Union 
(
11
)
. This includes, in particular, the obligation not to downgrade or declassify classified information without the prior written consent of the originator. Any non-classified sensitive information or information which is provided on a confidential basis should be handled as such by the authorities.
(34)
Outreach to the private sector, in particular to SMEs, and transparency are essential elements for an effective export control regime. It is therefore appropriate to provide for the continued development of guidelines, where necessary, to support the application of this Regulation and for the publication of a Union annual report on the implementation of controls.
(35)
The Union annual report on the implementation of controls should include relevant information on the licensing and enforcement of controls under this Regulation, with due respect to the need to ensure the protection of the confidentiality of certain data, in particular where the publication of licensing data could affect national security concerns raised by Member States or jeopardise commercial confidentiality and allow non-Union suppliers to undercut restrictive licensing decisions by Member States.
(36)
In order to ensure that this Regulation is properly applied, each Member State should take measures to give the competent authorities appropriate powers.
(37)
In accordance with the EU WMD Strategy, each Member State should determine effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties applicable in the event of infringements of the provisions of this Regulation. It is also appropriate to introduce provisions to support the effective enforcement of controls, among other things through an enforcement coordination mechanism.
(38)
The Union Customs Code lays down, among other things, provisions relating to the export and re-export of goods. Nothing in this Regulation constrains any powers under and pursuant to the Union Customs Code and its implementing provisions.
(39)
Export controls contribute to international security and have an impact on trade with third countries. It is therefore appropriate to develop dialogue and cooperation with third countries in order to support a global level-playing field and enhance international security. In particular, Member States and the Commission should enhance their contribution to the activities of multilateral export control regimes. Member States and the Commission should also support those regimes in developing robust export controls as a global basis and model for international best practice, and an important tool for ensuring international peace and stability. Contributions should be made when a new risk has been identified by all Member States in the field of cyber-surveillance items in order to ensure a multilateral level playing field.
(40)
This Regulation applies without prejudice to the Commission Delegated Decision of 15 September 2015 supplementing Decision No 1104/2011/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council 
(
12
)
, which establishes specific rules for the control of the export of items for the Public Regulated Service under the Galileo Programme.
(41)
This Regulation respects the fundamental rights and observes the principles recognised in particular by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union,
HAVE ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
CHAPTER I
SUBJECT AND DEFINITIONS
Article 1
This Regulation establishes a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items.
Article 2
For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions apply:
(1)
‘dual-use items’ means items, including software and technology, which can be used for both civil and military purposes, and includes items which can be used for the design, development, production or use of nuclear, chemical or biological weapons or their means of delivery, including all items which can be used for both non-explosive uses and assisting in any way in the manufacture of nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices;
(2)
‘export’ means:
(a)
an export procedure within the meaning of Article 269 of the Union Customs Code;
(b)
a re-export within the meaning of Article 270 of the Union Customs Code; a re-export also occurs if, during a transit through the customs territory of the Union according to point (11) of this Article, an exit summary declaration has to be lodged because the final destination of the items has been changed;
(c)
an outward processing procedure within the meaning of Article 259 of the Union Customs Code; or
(d)
transmission of software or technology by electronic media, including by fax, telephone, electronic mail or any other electronic means to a destination outside the customs territory of the Union; it includes making available in an electronic form such software and technology to natural or legal persons or to partnerships outside the customs territory of the Union; it also includes the oral transmission of technology when the technology is described over a voice transmission medium;
(3)
‘exporter’ means:
(a)
any natural or legal person or any partnership that, at the time when the export declaration or the re-export declaration or an exit summary declaration is accepted, holds the contract with the consignee in the third country and has the power to determine the sending of the items out of the customs territory of the Union; where no export contract has been concluded or if the holder of the contract does not act on its own behalf, exporter means the person who has the power to determine the sending of the items out of the customs territory of the Union; or
(b)
any natural or legal person or any partnership that decides to transmit software or technology by electronic media, including by fax, telephone, electronic mail or by any other electronic means to a destination outside the customs territory of the Union or to make available in an electronic form such software and technology to natural or legal persons or to partnerships outside the customs territory of the Union.
Where the benefit of a right to dispose of the dual-use item belongs to a person resident or established outside the customs territory of the Union pursuant to the contract on which the export is based, the exporter shall be considered to be the contracting party resident or established in the customs territory of the Union;
(c)
where point (a) or (b) is not applicable, any natural person carrying the dual-use items to be exported where these dual-use items are contained in the person’s personal baggage within the meaning of point (a) of Article 1(19) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/2446 
(
13
)
;
(4)
‘export declaration’ means an act whereby any natural or legal person or any partnership indicates, in the prescribed form and manner, the wish to place dual-use items specified in point (1) under an export procedure;
(5)
‘re-export declaration’ means an act within the meaning of Article 5(13) of the Union Customs Code;
(6)
‘exit summary declaration’ means an act within the meaning of Article 5(10) of the Union Customs Code;
(7)
‘brokering services’ means:
(a)
the negotiation or arrangement of transactions for the purchase, sale or supply of dual-use items from a third country to any other third country; or
(b)
the selling or buying of dual-use items that are located in third countries for their transfer to another third country.
For the purposes of this Regulation, the sole provision of ancillary services is excluded from this definition. Ancillary services are transportation, financial services, insurance or re-insurance, or general advertising or promotion;
(8)
‘broker’ means any natural or legal person or any partnership that provides brokering services from the customs territory of the Union into the territory of a third country;
(9)
‘technical assistance’ means any technical support related to repairs, development, manufacture, assembly, testing, maintenance, or any other technical service, and may take forms such as instruction, advice, training, transmission of working knowledge or skills or consulting services, including by electronic means as well as by telephone or any other verbal forms of assistance;
(10)
‘provider of technical assistance’ means:
(a)
any natural or legal person or any partnership that provides technical assistance from the customs territory of the Union into the territory of a third country;
(b)
any natural or legal person or any partnership resident or established in a Member State that provides technical assistance within the territory of a third country; or
(c)
any natural or legal person or any partnership resident or established in a Member State that provides technical assistance to a resident of a third country temporarily present in the customs territory of the Union;
(11)
‘transit’ means a transport of non-Union dual-use items entering and passing through the customs territory of the Union with a destination outside the customs territory of the Union where those items:
(a)
are placed under an external transit procedure according to Article 226 of the Union Customs Code and only pass through the customs territory of the Union;
(b)
are trans-shipped within, or directly re-exported from, a free zone;
(c)
are in temporary storage and are directly re-exported from a temporary storage facility; or
(d)
were brought into the customs territory of the Union on the same vessel or aircraft that will take them out of that territory without unloading;
(12)
‘individual export authorisation’ means an authorisation granted to one specific exporter for one end-user or consignee in a third country and covering one or more dual-use items;
(13)
‘global export authorisation’ means an authorisation granted to one specific exporter in respect of a type or category of dual-use items which may be valid for exports to one or more specified end-users and/or in one or more specified third countries;
(14)
‘large project authorisation’ means an individual export authorisation or a global export authorisation granted to one specific exporter, in respect of a type or category of dual-use items which may be valid for exports to one or more specified end-users in one or more specified third countries for the purpose of a specified large-scale project;
(15)
‘Union general export authorisation’ means an export authorisation for exports to certain countries of destination that is available to all exporters who respect the conditions and requirements listed in Sections A to H of Annex II;
(16)
‘national general export authorisation’ means an export authorisation defined by national legislation in accordance with Article 12(6) and Section C of Annex III;
(17)
‘customs territory of the Union’ means the customs territory of the Union within the meaning of Article 4 of the Union Customs Code;
(18)
‘non-Union dual-use items’ means items that have the status of non-Union goods within the meaning of Article 5(24) of the Union Customs Code;
(19)
‘arms embargo’ means an arms embargo imposed by a decision or a common position adopted by the Council or a decision of the Organisation for Security and Cooperation in Europe (OSCE) or an arms embargo imposed by a binding resolution of the Security Council of the United Nations;
(20)
‘cyber-surveillance items’ means dual-use items specially designed to enable the covert surveillance of natural persons by monitoring, extracting, collecting or analysing data from information and telecommunication systems;
(21)
‘internal compliance programme’ or ‘ICP’ means ongoing effective, appropriate and proportionate policies and procedures adopted by exporters to facilitate compliance with the provisions and objectives of this Regulation and with the terms and conditions of the authorisations implemented under this Regulation, including, inter alia, due diligence measures assessing risks related to the export of the items to end-users and end-uses;
(22)
‘essentially identical transaction’ means a transaction concerning items with essentially identical parameters or technical characteristics and involving the same end-user or consignee as another transaction.
CHAPTER II
SCOPE
Article 3
1.   An authorisation shall be required for the export of dual-use items listed in Annex I.
2.   Pursuant to Article 4, 5, 9 or 10, an authorisation may also be required for the export to all or certain destinations of certain dual-use items not listed in Annex I.
Article 4
1.   An authorisation shall be required for the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(a)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(b)
for a military end-use if the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; for the purposes of this point, ‘military end-use’ means:
(i)
incorporation into military items listed in the military list of Member States;
(ii)
use of production, test or analytical equipment and components therefor, for the development, production or maintenance of military items listed in the military list of Member States; or
(iii)
use of any unfinished products in a plant for the production of military items listed in the military list of Member States;
(c)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of a Member State without authorisation or in violation of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State.
2.   Where an exporter is aware that dual-use items which he proposes to export, not listed in Annex I, are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, the exporter shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make the export concerned subject to authorisation.
3.   A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article.
4.   A Member State which imposes an authorisation requirement pursuant to paragraph 1, 2, or 3 shall immediately inform its customs authorities and other relevant national authorities and provide the other Member States and the Commission with relevant information on the authorisation requirement in question, in particular as regards the items and end-users concerned, unless it considers that it is not appropriate to do so in light of the nature of the transaction or the sensitivity of the information concerned.
5.   Member States shall give due consideration to information received pursuant to paragraph 4 and shall inform their customs authorities and other relevant national authorities thereof.
6.   In order to allow for an examination of all valid denials by the Member States, Article 16(1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall apply to cases concerning dual-use items not listed in Annex I.
7.   All exchanges of information required pursuant to this Article shall take place in accordance with the legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information. Such exchanges of information shall be made via secure electronic means, including through the system referred to in Article 23(6).
8.   This Regulation is without prejudice to the right of Member States to take national measures under Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2015/479.
Article 5
1.   An authorisation shall be required for the export of cyber-surveillance items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for use in connection with internal repression and/or the commission of serious violations of human rights and international humanitarian law.
2.   Where an exporter is aware, according to its due diligence findings, that cyber-surveillance items which the exporter proposes to export, not listed in Annex I, are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, the exporter shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make the export concerned subject to authorisation. The Commission and the Council shall make available guidelines for exporters, as referred to in Article 26(1).
3.   A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the export of cyber-surveillance items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article.
4.   A Member State which imposes an authorisation requirement pursuant to paragraph 1, 2 or 3 shall immediately inform its customs authorities and other relevant national authorities and shall provide the other Member States and the Commission with relevant information on the authorisation requirement in question, in particular as regards the items and entities concerned, unless it considers that it is not appropriate to do so in light of the nature of the transaction or the sensitivity of the information concerned.
5.   Member States shall give due consideration to information received pursuant to paragraph 4 and shall review it in light of the criteria set out in paragraph 1 within 30 working days. They shall inform their customs authorities and other relevant national authorities. In exceptional cases, any Member State may request the extension of that 30-day period. However, the extension shall not exceed 30 working days.
6.   Where all Member States notify each other and the Commission that an authorisation requirement should be imposed for essentially identical transactions, the Commission shall publish in the C series of the 
Official Journal of the European Union
 information regarding the cyber-surveillance items and, where appropriate, destinations subject to authorisation requirements as notified by Member States for that purpose.
7.   Member States shall review the information published pursuant to paragraph 6 at least annually, on the basis of relevant information and analyses provided by the Commission. Where all Member States notify each other and the Commission that the publication of an authorisation requirement should be amended or renewed, the Commission shall promptly and accordingly amend or renew the information published pursuant to paragraph 6 in the C series of the 
Official Journal of the European Union
.
8.   In order to allow for an examination of all valid denials by the Member States, Article 16(1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall apply to cases concerning cyber-surveillance items not listed in Annex I.
9.   All exchanges of information required pursuant to this Article shall take place in accordance with the legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information. Such exchanges of information shall be made via secure electronic means, including through the system referred to in Article 23(6).
10.   Member States shall consider supporting the inclusion of items published pursuant to paragraph 6 of this Article in the appropriate international non-proliferation regimes or export control arrangements with a view to extending controls. The Commission shall provide analyses of the relevant data gathered pursuant to Article 23(2) and to Article 26(2).
11.   This Regulation is without prejudice to the right of Member States to take national measures under Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2015/479.
Article 6
1.   An authorisation shall be required for the provision of brokering services of dual-use items listed in Annex I if the broker has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).
2.   Where a broker proposes to provide brokering services of dual-use items listed in Annex I and is aware that those items are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1), the broker shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make such brokering services subject to authorisation.
3.   A Member State may extend the application of paragraph 1 to non-listed dual-use items.
4.   A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the provision of brokering services of dual-use items if the broker has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).
5.   Article 9(2), (3) and (4) shall apply to the national measures referred to in paragraphs 3 and 4 of this Article.
Article 7
1.   The transit of non-Union dual-use items listed in Annex I may be prohibited at any time by the competent authority of the Member State where the items are situated if the items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).
2.   Before deciding whether or not to prohibit a transit the competent authority may, in individual cases, impose an authorisation requirement for the specific transit of dual-use items listed in Annex I if the items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1). If the transit takes place through the territory of multiple Member States, the competent authority of each affected Member State shall be able to prohibit such transit through its territory.
The competent authority may impose the authorisation requirement on the natural or legal person or the partnership that holds the contract with the consignee in the third country and has the power to determine the sending of the items passing through the customs territory of the Union.
If the natural or legal person or the partnership is not resident or established in the customs territory of the Union, the competent authority may impose the authorisation requirement on:
(a)
the declarant within the meaning of Article 5(15) of the Union Customs Code;
(b)
the carrier within the meaning of Article 5(40) of the Union Customs Code; or
(c)
the natural person carrying the dual-use items in transit where those dual-use items are contained in the personal baggage of that person.
3.   A Member State may extend the application of paragraph 1 to non-listed dual-use items.
4.   Article 9(2), (3) and (4) shall apply to the national measures referred to in paragraph 3 of this Article.
Article 8
1.   An authorisation shall be required for the provision of technical assistance related to dual-use items listed in Annex I if the provider of technical assistance has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).
2.   Where a provider of technical assistance proposes to provide technical assistance for dual-use items listed in Annex I and is aware that those items are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1), the provider of technical assistance shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make such technical assistance subject to authorisation.
3.   Paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not apply if the technical assistance:
(a)
is provided within or into the territory of a country listed in Part 2 of Section A of Annex II, or towards a resident of a country listed in Part 2 of Section A of Annex II;
(b)
takes the form of transferring information that is in the public domain or basic scientific research within the meaning of the General Technology Note or of the Nuclear Technology Note set out in Annex I;
(c)
is provided by authorities or agencies of a Member State in the context of their official tasks;
(d)
is provided for the armed forces of a Member State on the basis of the tasks assigned to them;
(e)
is provided for a purpose which is cited in the exceptions for items of the Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR technology) in Annex IV; or
(f)
is the minimum necessary for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those items for which an export authorisation has been issued.
4.   A Member State may extend the application of paragraph 1 to non-listed dual-use items.
5.   A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the provision of technical assistance where a provider of technical assistance who proposes to provide technical assistance for dual-use items has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).
6.   Article 9(2), (3) and (4) shall apply to the national measures referred to in paragraphs 4 and 5 of this Article.
Article 9
1.   A Member State may prohibit or impose an authorisation requirement on the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I for reasons of public security, including the prevention of acts of terrorism, or for human rights considerations.
2.   Member States shall notify the Commission and the other Member States of any measures adopted pursuant to paragraph 1 without delay and indicate the precise reasons for the measures. If the measure is the establishment of a national control list, Member States shall also inform the Commission and the other Member States of the description of the controlled items.
3.   Member States shall, without delay, notify the Commission and the other Member States of any amendment to measures adopted pursuant to paragraph 1, including any amendment to their national control lists.
4.   The Commission shall publish the measures notified to it pursuant to paragraphs 2 and 3 in the C series of the 
Official Journal of the European Union
. The Commission shall publish separately, without delay and in all the official languages of the Union, a compilation of national control lists in force in the Member States. The Commission shall, upon notification by a Member State of any amendment to its national control list, publish, without delay and in all the official languages of the Union, an update to the compilation of national control lists in force in the Member States.
Article 10
1.   An authorisation shall be required for the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if another Member State imposes an authorisation requirement for the export of those items on the basis of a national control list of items adopted by that Member State pursuant to Article 9 and published by the Commission pursuant to Article 9(4), and if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for uses of concern with respect to public security, including the prevention of acts of terrorism, or to human rights considerations.
2.   A Member State which refuses an authorisation required under paragraph 1 shall also inform the Commission and the other Member States of such decision.
3.   A Member State which imposes an authorisation requirement pursuant to paragraph 1 of this Article on the export of a dual-use item not listed in Annex I, shall inform its customs authorities and other relevant national authorities about the authorisation requirement without delay and, where appropriate, provide the other Member States and the Commission with the relevant information, in particular concerning the items and end-users concerned. The other Member States shall give due consideration to that information and shall inform their customs authorities and other relevant national authorities thereof.
Article 11
1.   An authorisation shall be required for intra-Union transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex IV. Dual-use items listed in Part 2 of Annex IV shall not be covered by a general authorisation.
2.   A Member State may impose an authorisation requirement for the transfer of other dual-use items from its territory to another Member State in cases where at the time of transfer:
(a)
the operator or the competent authority knows that the final destination of the items concerned is outside the customs territory of the Union;
(b)
the export of those items to that final destination is subject to an authorisation requirement pursuant to Article 3, 4, 5, 9 or 10 in the Member State from which the items are to be transferred, and such export directly from its territory is not authorised by a general authorisation or a global authorisation; and
(c)
no processing or working as defined in Article 60(2) of the Union Customs Code is to be performed on the items in the Member State to which they are to be transferred.
3.   The transfer authorisation referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be applied for in the Member State from which the dual-use items are to be transferred.
4.   In cases where the subsequent export of the dual-use items has already been accepted in the consultation procedures set out in Article 14 by the Member State from which the items are to be transferred, the transfer authorisation shall be issued to the operator immediately, unless the circumstances have substantially changed.
5.   A Member State which adopts legislation imposing an authorisation requirement as referred to in paragraph 2 shall, without delay, inform the Commission and the other Member States of the measures it has taken. The Commission shall publish that information in the C series of the 
Official Journal of the European Union
.
6.   The application of measures taken pursuant to paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not involve the application of internal frontier controls within the customs territory of the Union, but solely controls which are performed as part of the normal control procedures applied in a non-discriminatory fashion throughout the customs territory of the Union.
7.   The application of measures taken pursuant to paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not result in transfers from one Member State to another being subject to more restrictive conditions than those imposed for exports of the same items to third countries.
8.   A Member State may, by national legislation, require that, for any intra-Union transfers from that Member State of items listed in Annex I, Category 5, Part 2, which are not listed in Annex IV, additional information concerning those items shall be provided to the competent authority of that Member State.
9.   The relevant commercial documents relating to intra-Union transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex I shall indicate clearly that those items are subject to controls if exported from the customs territory of the Union. Such documents include, in particular, any sales contract, order confirmation, invoice or dispatch note.
CHAPTER III
EXPORT AUTHORISATION AND AUTHORISATION FOR BROKERING SERVICES AND TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
Article 12
1.   The following types of authorisations for export may be issued or are established under this Regulation:
(a)
individual export authorisations;
(b)
global export authorisations;
(c)
national general export authorisations;
(d)
Union general export authorisations for exports of certain items to certain destinations under specific conditions and requirements for use as set out in Sections A to H of Annex II.
Authorisations issued or established under this Regulation shall be valid throughout the customs territory of the Union.
2.   Individual and global export authorisations under this Regulation shall be granted by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established.
Without prejudice to point (3) of Article 2, where the exporter is not resident or established on the customs territory of the Union, individual export authorisations shall be granted under this Regulation by the competent authority of the Member State where the dual-use items are located.
All individual and global export authorisations shall be issued, whenever possible, by electronic means on forms containing at least all the elements of and in the order provided for in the models set out in Section A of Annex III.
3.   Individual export authorisations and global export authorisations shall be valid for up to two years, unless the competent authority decides otherwise.
Large project authorisations shall be valid for a duration to be determined by the competent authority, but no longer than four years, except in duly justified circumstances based on the duration of the project.
4.   Exporters shall supply the competent authority with all relevant information required for their applications for individual and global export authorisations so as to provide complete information in particular about the end-user, the country of destination and the end-use of the item exported.
Individual export authorisations shall be subject to an end-use statement. The competent authority may exempt certain applications from the obligation of providing an end-use statement. Global export authorisations may be subject to an end-use statement if appropriate.
Exporters using global export authorisations shall implement an ICP, unless the competent authority considers it unnecessary due to other information it has taken into account when processing the application for a global export authorisation submitted by the exporter.
Reporting and ICP requirements relating to the use of global export authorisations shall be defined by Member States.
At the request of exporters, global export authorisations that contain quantitative limitations shall be split.
5.   The competent authorities of the Member States shall process requests for individual or global authorisations within a period of time to be determined by national law or practice.
6.   National general export authorisations shall:
(a)
exclude from their scope items listed in Section I of Annex II;
(b)
be defined by national law or practice; they may be used by all exporters, resident or established in the Member State that issues those authorisations, if they meet the requirements set in this Regulation and in the complementary national legislation; they shall be issued in accordance with the indications set out in Section C of Annex III;
(c)
not be used if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1), or if the exporter is aware that the items are intended for such uses.
National general export authorisations may also apply to items and destinations listed in Sections A to H of Annex II.
Member States shall notify the Commission immediately of any national general export authorisations issued or modified. The Commission shall publish such notifications in the C series of the 
Official Journal of the European Union
.
7.   The competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established may prohibit the exporter from using Union general export authorisations if there is reasonable suspicion about the exporter’s ability to comply with such authorisation or with a provision of the export control legislation.
The competent authorities of the Member States shall exchange information on exporters which are prohibited from using a Union general export authorisation, unless the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established determines that the exporter will not attempt to export dual-use items through another Member State. The exchange of information shall be carried out using the electronic system referred to in Article 23(6).
Article 13
1.   Authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance under this Regulation shall be granted by the competent authority of the Member State where the broker or the provider of technical assistance is resident or established. Where the broker or the provider of technical assistance is not resident or established on the customs territory of the Union, authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance under this Regulation shall be granted by the competent authority of the Member State from where the brokering services or technical assistance will be provided.
2.   Authorisations for the provision of brokering services shall be granted for a set quantity of specific items and shall clearly identify the location of the items in the originating third country, the end-user and the exact location of the end-user.
Authorisations for technical assistance shall clearly identify the end-user and the exact location of the end-user.
The authorisations shall be valid throughout the customs territory of the Union.
3.   Brokers and providers of technical assistance shall supply the competent authority with all relevant information required for their application for authorisation under this Regulation, in particular details of the location of the dual-use items, a clear description of the items and the quantity involved, third parties involved in the transaction, the country of destination, the end-user in that country and its exact location.
4.   The competent authorities of the Member States shall process requests for authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance within a period of time to be determined by national law or practice.
5.   All authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance shall be issued, whenever possible, by electronic means on forms containing at least all the elements of and in the order provided for in the models set out in Section B of Annex III.
Article 14
1.   If the dual-use items in respect of which an application has been made for an individual export authorisation to a destination not listed in Part 2 of Section A of Annex II or to any destination in the case of dual-use items listed in Annex IV are or will be located in one or more Member States other than the one where the application has been made, that fact shall be indicated in the application. The competent authority of the Member State to which the application for authorisation has been made shall immediately consult the competent authorities of the Member States in question and provide the relevant information. That consultation may be carried out using the electronic system referred to in Article 23(6). The Member States consulted shall make known within 10 working days any objections they may have to the granting of such an authorisation, which shall bind the Member State in which the application has been made.
If no objections are received within 10 working days, the Member States consulted shall be regarded as having no objection.
In exceptional cases, any Member State consulted may request the extension of that 10-day period. However, the extension shall not exceed 30 working days.
2.   If an export might prejudice its essential security interests, a Member State may request another Member State not to grant an export authorisation or, if such authorisation has been granted, request its annulment, suspension, modification or revocation. The Member State receiving such a request shall immediately engage in consultations of a non-binding nature with the requesting Member State, to be terminated within 10 working days. In the event that the Member State receiving the request decides to grant the authorisation, that Member State shall notify the Commission and the other Member States thereof using the electronic system referred to in Article 23(6).
Article 15
1.   In deciding whether or not to grant an authorisation or to prohibit a transit under this Regulation, the Member States shall take into account all relevant considerations, including:
(a)
Union and Member States’ international obligations and commitments, in particular the obligations and commitments they have each accepted as members of the relevant international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, or by ratification of relevant international treaties;
(b)
their obligations under sanctions imposed by a decision or a common position adopted by the Council or by a decision of the OSCE or by a binding resolution of the Security Council of the United Nations;
(c)
considerations of national foreign and security policy, including those covered by Common Position 2008/944/CFSP;
(d)
considerations about intended end-use and the risk of diversion.
2.   In addition to the criteria set out in paragraph 1, when assessing an application for a global export authorisation, Member States shall take into consideration the implementation of an ICP by the exporter.
Article 16
1.   The competent authority acting in accordance with this Regulation, may refuse to grant an export authorisation and may annul, suspend, modify or revoke an export authorisation which it has already granted. Where the competent authority refuses, annuls, suspends, substantially limits or revokes an export authorisation or when it has determined that the intended export is not to be authorised, it shall notify the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission thereof and share the relevant information with them. In case the competent authority of a Member State has suspended an export authorisation, the final assessment shall be communicated to the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission at the end of the period of suspension.
2.   The competent authorities of the Member States shall review denials of authorisations notified under paragraph 1 within three years of their notification and revoke them, amend them or renew them. The competent authorities of the Member States shall notify the results of the review to the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission as soon as possible. Denials which are not revoked shall remain valid and shall be reviewed every three years. At the third review, the Member State concerned shall be required to explain the reasoning for maintaining such denial.
3.   The competent authority shall notify the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission of their decisions to prohibit a transit of dual-use items taken under Article 7 without delay. These notifications shall contain all relevant information including the classification of the item, its technical parameters, the country of destination and the end-user.
4.   Paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article shall also apply to authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance referred to in Article 13.
5.   Before the competent authority of a Member State decides whether or not to grant an authorisation or to prohibit a transit under this Regulation, it shall examine all valid denials or decisions to prohibit a transit of dual-use items listed in Annex I taken under this Regulation to ascertain whether an authorisation or a transit has been denied by the competent authorities of another Member State for an essentially identical transaction. It shall then consult the competent authorities of the Member States which issued such denials or decisions to prohibit the transit as provided for in paragraphs 1, 3 and 4 of this Article.
The competent authorities of the Member States consulted shall make known within 10 working days whether or not they consider the transaction in question to be an essentially identical transaction. If no reaction has been received within 10 working days, the competent authorities of the Member States consulted shall be regarded as not considering the transaction in question to be an essentially identical transaction.
If more information is required to correctly evaluate the transaction in question, the competent authorities of the Member States concerned shall agree on the extension of that 10-day period. However, the extension shall not exceed 30 working days.
If, following such consultation, the competent authority decides to grant an authorisation or allow the transit, it shall notify the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission, providing all relevant information to explain the decision.
6.   All notifications required pursuant to this Article shall be made via secure electronic means, including through the system referred to in Article 23(6).
7.   All information shared pursuant to this Article shall be in compliance with Article 23(5) concerning the confidentiality of such information.
CHAPTER IV
AMENDMENT OF LISTS OF DUAL
-
USE ITEMS AND DESTINATIONS
Article 17
1.   The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 18 in order to amend the list of dual-use items set out in Annexes I and IV, as follows:
(a)
the list of dual-use items set out in Annex I shall be amended in conformity with the relevant obligations and commitments, and any amendment thereof, that Member States and, where applicable, the Union have accepted as members of the international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, or by ratification of relevant international treaties;
(b)
where the amendment of Annex I concerns dual-use items which are also listed in Annex II or IV, those Annexes shall be amended accordingly.
2.   The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 18 in order to amend Annex II by removing items and by adding or removing destinations from the scope of Union general export authorisations in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group set up pursuant to Article 24 and taking into consideration obligations and commitments under the relevant non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, such as amendments to control lists, as well as relevant geopolitical developments. Where imperative grounds of urgency require a removal of particular destinations from the scope of a Union general export authorisation, the procedure provided for in Article 19 shall apply to delegated acts adopted pursuant to this paragraph.
Article 18
1.   The power to adopt delegated acts is conferred on the Commission subject to the conditions laid down in this Article.
2.   The power to adopt delegated acts referred to in Article 17 shall be conferred on the Commission for a period of five years from 9 September 2021. The Commission shall draw up a report in respect of the delegation of power not later than nine months before the end of the five-year period. The delegation of power shall be tacitly extended for periods of an identical duration, unless the European Parliament or the Council opposes such extension not later than three months before the end of each period.
3.   The delegation of power referred to in Article 17 may be revoked at any time by the European Parliament or by the Council. A decision to revoke shall put an end to the delegation of the power specified in that decision. It shall take effect the day following the publication of the decision in the 
Official Journal of the European Union
 or at a later date specified therein. It shall not affect the validity of any delegated acts already in force.
4.   Before adopting a delegated act, the Commission shall consult experts designated by each Member State in accordance with the principles laid down in the Interinstitutional Agreement of 13 April 2016 on Better Law-Making.
5.   As soon as it adopts a delegated act, the Commission shall notify it simultaneously to the European Parliament and to the Council.
6.   A delegated act adopted pursuant to Article 17 shall enter into force only if no objection has been expressed either by the European Parliament or by the Council within a period of two months of notification of that act to the European Parliament and the Council or if, before the expiry of that period, the European Parliament and the Council have both informed the Commission that they will not object. That period shall be extended by two months at the initiative of the European Parliament or of the Council.
Article 19
1.   Delegated acts adopted under this Article shall enter into force without delay and shall apply as long as no objection is expressed in accordance with paragraph 2. The notification of a delegated act to the European Parliament and to the Council shall state the reasons for the use of the urgency procedure.
2.   Either the European Parliament or the Council may object to a delegated act in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 18(6). In such a case, the Commission shall repeal the act immediately following the notification of the decision to object by the European Parliament or by the Council.
Article 20
The list of dual-use items set out in Annex IV, which is a subset of Annex I, shall be updated having regard to Article 36 TFEU, namely the public policy and public security interests of the Member States.
CHAPTER V
CUSTOMS PROCEDURES
Article 21
1.   When completing the formalities for the export of dual-use items at the customs office responsible for handling the export declaration, the exporter shall furnish proof that any necessary export authorisation has been obtained.
2.   A translation of any documents furnished as proof into an official language of the Member State where the export declaration is presented may be required of the exporter.
3.   Without prejudice to any powers conferred on it under, and pursuant to, the Union Customs Code, a Member State may also, for a period not exceeding the periods referred to in paragraph 4, suspend the process of export from its territory, or, if necessary, otherwise prevent the dual-use items which are or are not covered by a valid export authorisation from leaving the Union via its territory, where it has:
(a)
grounds for suspicion that:
(i)
relevant information was not taken into account when the authorisation was granted; or
(ii)
circumstances have materially changed since the grant of the authorisation; or
(b)
relevant information regarding the potential application of measures under Article 4(1).
4.   In the cases referred to in paragraph 3 of this Article, the Member State referred to in that paragraph shall consult the competent authority of the Member State which granted the export authorisation or which may take action pursuant to Article 4(1) without delay in order that the competent authority may take action pursuant to Article 4(1) or Article 16(1). If that competent authority decides to maintain the authorisation or not to take action pursuant to Article 4(1), it shall reply within 10 working days, which, at its request, may be extended to 30 working days in exceptional circumstances. In such case, or if no reply is received within 10 or 30 working days, as the case may be, the dual-use items shall be released immediately. The competent authority of the Member State which granted the authorisation shall inform the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission.
5.   The Commission, in cooperation with the Member States, may develop guidance to support interagency cooperation between licensing and customs authorities.
Article 22
1.   Member States may provide that customs formalities for the export of dual-use items may be completed only at customs offices empowered to that end.
2.   Member States availing themselves of the option set out in paragraph 1 shall inform the Commission of the duly empowered customs offices. The Commission shall publish the information in the C series of the 
Official Journal of the European Union
.
CHAPTER VI
ADMINISTRATIVE COOPERATION, IMPLEMENTATION AND ENFORCEMENT
Article 23
1.   Member States shall inform the Commission without delay of the laws, regulations and administrative provisions adopted in implementation of this Regulation, including:
(a)
a list of the competent authorities of the Member States empowered to:
—
grant export authorisations for dual-use items,
—
grant authorisations under this Regulation for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance,
—
prohibit the transit of non-Union dual-use items under this Regulation;
(b)
the measures referred to in Article 25(1).
The Commission shall forward the information to the other Member States and shall publish the information in the C series of the 
Official Journal of the European Union
.
2.   Member States, in cooperation with the Commission, shall take all appropriate measures to establish direct cooperation and exchange of information between the competent authorities with a view to enhance the efficiency of the Union export control regime and to ensure the consistent and effective implementation and enforcement of control throughout the customs territory of the Union. The information exchange may include:
(a)
relevant licensing data, provided for each authorisation issued (e.g. value and types of licence and related destinations, number of users of general authorisations);
(b)
additional information regarding the application of controls, including information on the application of criteria set out in Article 15(1), the number of operators with an ICP and, where available, data on exports of dual-use items carried out in other Member States;
(c)
information regarding the analysis underlying additions or planned additions to national control lists pursuant to Article 9;
(d)
information regarding the enforcement of controls, including risk-based audits, details of exporters deprived of the right to use the national or Union general export authorisations, and, where available, number of violations, seizures and application of other penalties;
(e)
data on sensitive end-users, actors involved in suspicious procurement activities, and, where available, routes taken.
3.   The exchange of licensing data shall take place at least annually in accordance with guidelines to be drawn up by the Dual-Use Coordination Group established pursuant to Article 24 and with due consideration to legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information.
4.   Member States and the Commission shall regularly examine the implementation of Article 15 based on information submitted pursuant to this Regulation and analyses of such data. All participants of these exchanges shall respect the confidentiality of the discussions.
5.   Council Regulation (EC) No 515/97 
(
14
)
, and in particular its provisions on the confidentiality of information, shall apply mutatis mutandis.
6.   A secure and encrypted system shall be developed by the Commission, in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group set up pursuant to Article 24, to support direct cooperation and exchange of information between the competent authorities of the Member States and, where appropriate, the Commission. The system shall, where feasible, be connected by the Commission to the electronic licensing systems of the competent authorities of the Member States to the extent necessary for the purpose of facilitating this direct cooperation and exchange of information. The European Parliament shall be informed about the system’s budget, development and functioning.
7.   The processing of personal data shall be in accordance with the rules laid down in Regulations (EU) 2016/679 and (EU) 2018/1725.
Article 24
1.   A Dual-Use Coordination Group chaired by a representative of the Commission shall be set up. Each Member State shall appoint a representative to this Group. It shall examine any question concerning the application of this Regulation which may be raised either by the chair or by a representative of a Member State.
2.   The Dual-Use Coordination Group shall, whenever it considers it to be necessary, consult exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance and other relevant stakeholders concerned by this Regulation.
3.   The Dual-Use Coordination Group shall, where appropriate, set up technical expert groups composed of experts from Member States to examine specific issues relating to the implementation of controls, including issues relating to the updating of the Union control lists set out in Annex I. Technical expert groups shall, where appropriate, consult exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance and other relevant stakeholders concerned by this Regulation.
4.   The Commission shall support a Union licensing and enforcement capacity-building programme, including by developing, in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group, common training programmes for officials of the Member States.
Article 25
1.   Each Member State shall take appropriate measures to ensure the proper enforcement of this Regulation. In particular, it shall lay down the penalties applicable to infringements of the provisions of this Regulation or of those adopted for its implementation. Those penalties shall be effective, proportionate and dissuasive.
2.   The Dual-Use Coordination Group shall set up an enforcement coordination mechanism to support exchange of information and direct cooperation between competent authorities and enforcement agencies of the Member States (the ‘Enforcement Coordination Mechanism’). Under the Enforcement Coordination Mechanism, the Member States and the Commission shall exchange relevant information, where available, including on the application, nature and effect of the measures, taken under paragraph 1, on enforcement of best practices and unauthorised exports of dual-use items and/or infringements of this Regulation and/or relevant national legislation.
Under the Enforcement Coordination Mechanism, the Member States and the Commission shall also exchange information on best practices of national enforcement authorities regarding risk-based audits, the detection and prosecution of unauthorised exports of dual-use items and/or possible other infringements of this Regulation and/or relevant national legislation.
Exchange of information under the Enforcement Coordination Mechanism shall be confidential.
CHAPTER VII
TRANSPARENCY, OUTREACH, MONITORING, EVALUATION
Article 26
1.   The Commission and the Council shall, where appropriate, make available guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices for the subjects referred to in this Regulation to ensure the efficiency of the Union export control regime and the consistency of its implementation. The provision of guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices to exporters, brokers and providers of technical assistance shall be the responsibility of the Member States where they are resident or established. In those guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices, the information needs of SMEs in particular shall be taken into account.
2.   The Commission shall, in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group, submit an annual report to the European Parliament and the Council on the implementation of this Regulation, and on the activities, examinations and consultations of the Dual-Use Coordination Group. That annual report shall be public.
The annual report shall include information on authorisations (in particular number and value by types of items and by destinations at Union and Member State levels), denials and prohibitions under this Regulation. The annual report shall also include information on the administration (in particular staffing, compliance and outreach activities, dedicated licensing or classification tools), and enforcement of controls (in particular the number of infringements and penalties).
With regard to cyber-surveillance items, the annual report shall include dedicated information on authorisations, in particular on the number of applications received by item, the issuing Member State and the destinations concerned by those applications, and on the decisions taken on those applications.
The information contained in the annual report shall be presented in accordance with the principles set out in paragraph 3.
The Commission and the Council shall make available guidelines on the methodology for data gathering and processing for the preparation of the annual report, including the determination of the types of items and the availability of enforcement data.
3.   Member States shall provide to the Commission all appropriate information for the preparation of the report with due consideration given to legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information. Regulation (EC) No 223/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council 
(
15
)
 on European statistics applies to information exchanged or published under this Article.
4.   Between 10 September 2026 and 10 September 2028, the Commission shall carry out an evaluation of this Regulation and report on the main findings to the European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee. After 10 September 2024, the Commission shall carry out an evaluation of Article 5 and report on the main findings to the European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee.
CHAPTER VIII
CONTROL MEASURES
Article 27
1.   Exporters of dual-use items shall keep detailed registers or records of their exports, in accordance with the national law or practice in force in the Member State concerned. Such registers or records shall include in particular commercial documents such as invoices, manifests and transport and other dispatch documents containing sufficient information to allow the following to be identified:
(a)
a description of the dual-use items;
(b)
the quantity of the dual-use items;
(c)
the name and address of the exporter and of the consignee;
(d)
where known, the end-use and end-user of the dual-use items.
2.   In accordance with national law or practice in force in the Member State concerned, brokers and providers of technical assistance shall keep registers or records for brokering services or technical assistance so as to be able to prove, on request, the description of the dual-use items that were the subject of brokering services or technical assistance, the period during which the items were the subject of such services, the destination of such items and services, and the countries concerned by those services.
3.   The registers or records and the documents referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be kept for at least five years from the end of the calendar year in which the export took place or the brokering services or technical assistance were provided. They shall be produced, on request, to the competent authority.
4.   Documents and records of intra-Union transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex I shall be kept for at least three years from the end of the calendar year in which a transfer took place and shall be produced, on request, to the competent authority of the Member State from which these items were transferred.
Article 28
In order to ensure that this Regulation is properly applied, each Member State shall take all necessary measures to permit its competent authorities:
(a)
to gather information on any order or transaction involving dual-use items;
(b)
to establish whether the export control measures are being properly applied, which may include in particular the power to enter the premises of persons with an interest in an export transaction or brokers involved in the provision of brokering services under circumstances set out in Article 6, or providers of technical assistance under the circumstances set out in Article 8.
CHAPTER IX
COOPERATION WITH THIRD COUNTRIES
Article 29
1.   The Commission and the Member States shall, where appropriate, maintain dialogues with third countries, with a view to promoting the global convergence of controls.
The dialogues may support regular and reciprocal cooperation with third countries, including exchange of information and best practices, as well as capacity-building and outreach to third countries. The dialogues may also encourage the adherence of third countries to robust export controls developed by multilateral export control regimes as a model for international best practice.
2.   Without prejudice to the provisions on mutual administrative assistance agreements or protocols in customs matters concluded between the Union and third countries, the Council may authorise the Commission to negotiate with third countries on agreements providing for the mutual recognition of export controls of dual-use items covered by this Regulation.
Those negotiations shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures established in Article 207(3) TFEU and in the Treaty establishing the European Atomic Energy Community, as appropriate.
CHAPTER X
FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 30
This Regulation applies without prejudice to the Commission Delegated Decision of 15 September 2015 supplementing Decision No 1104/2011/EU.
Article 31
Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 is repealed.
However, for authorisation applications made before 9 September 2021, the relevant provisions of Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 shall continue to apply.
References to the repealed Regulation shall be construed as references to this Regulation and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex VI.
Article 32
This Regulation shall enter into force on the ninetieth day following that of its publication in the 
Official Journal of the European Union
.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels, 20 May 2021.
For the European Parliament
The President
D. M. SASSOLI
For the Council
The President
A. P. ZACARIAS
(
1
)
  Position of the European Parliament of 25 March 2021 (not yet published in the Official Journal) and decision of the Council of 10 May 2021.
(
2
)
  Council Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 of 5 May 2009 setting up a Community regime for the control of exports, transfer, brokering and transit of dual-use items (
OJ L 134, 29.5.2009, p. 1
).
(
3
)
  Council Common Position 2008/944/CFSP of 8 December 2008 defining common rules governing control of exports of military technology and equipment (
OJ L 335, 13.12.2008, p. 99
).
(
4
)
  Regulation (EU) No 952/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 October 2013 laying down the Union Customs Code (
OJ L 269, 10.10.2013, p. 1
).
(
5
)
  
OJ L 123, 12.5.2016, p. 1
.
(
6
)
  Regulation (EU) 2015/479 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 2015 on common rules for exports (
OJ L 83, 27.3.2015, p. 34
).
(
7
)
  Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Directive 95/46/EC (
OJ L 119, 4.5.2016, p. 1
).
(
8
)
  Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC (
OJ L 295, 21.11.2018, p. 39
).
(
9
)
  Commission Decision (EU, Euratom) 2015/443 of 13 March 2015 on Security in the Commission (
OJ L 72, 17.3.2015, p. 41
).
(
10
)
  Commission Decision (EU, Euratom) 2015/444 of 13 March 2015 on the security rules for protecting EU classified information (
OJ L 72, 17.3.2015, p. 53
).
(
11
)
  
OJ C 202, 8.7.2011, p. 13
.
(
12
)
  Decision No 1104/2011/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 October 2011 on the rules for access to the public regulated service provided by the global navigation satellite system established under the Galileo programme (
OJ L 287, 4.11.2011, p. 1
).
(
13
)
  Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/2446 of 28 July 2015 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 952/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council as regards detailed rules concerning certain provisions of the Union Customs Code (
OJ L 343, 29.12.2015, p. 1
).
(
14
)
  Council Regulation (EC) No 515/97 of 13 March 1997 on mutual assistance between the administrative authorities of the Member States and cooperation between the latter and the Commission to ensure the correct application of the law on customs and agricultural matters (
OJ L 82, 22.3.1997, p. 1
).
(
15
)
  Regulation (EC) No 223/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 2009 on European statistics and repealing Regulation (EC, Euratom) No 1101/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council on the transmission of data subject to statistical confidentiality to the Statistical Office of the European Communities, Council Regulation (EC) No 322/97 on Community Statistics, and Council Decision 89/382/EEC, Euratom establishing a Committee on the Statistical Programmes of the European Communities (
OJ L 87, 31.3.2009, p. 164
).
ANNEX I
LIST OF DUAL-USE ITEMS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 3 OF THIS REGULATION
The list of dual-use items contained in this Annex implements internationally agreed dual-use controls, including the Australia Group 
(
1
)
, the Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR) 
(
2
)
, the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) 
(
3
)
, the Wassenaar Arrangement 
(
4
)
 and the Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC) 
(
5
)
.
CONTENTS
Part I -
General Notes, Acronyms and Abbreviations, and Definitions
Part II - Category 0
Nuclear materials, facilities and equipment
Part III -Category 1
Special materials and related equipment
Part IV - Category 2
Materials processing
Part V - Category 3
Electronics
Part VI - Category 4
Computers
Part VII - Category 5
Telecommunications and "information security"
Part VIII - Category 6
Sensors and lasers
Part IX - Category 7
Navigation and avionics
Part X - Category 8
Marine
Part XI - Category 9
Aerospace and propulsion
PART I -
General Notes, Acronyms and Abbreviations, and Definitions
GENERAL NOTES TO ANNEX I
1.
For control of goods which are designed or modified for military use, see the relevant list(s) of controls on military goods maintained by individual EU Member States. References in this Annex that state "SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS" refer to the same lists.
2.
The object of the controls contained in this Annex should not be defeated by the export of any non-controlled goods (including plant) containing one or more controlled components when the controlled component or components are the principal element of the goods and can feasibly be removed or used for other purposes.
N.B.
In judging whether the controlled component or components are to be considered the principal element, it is necessary to weigh the factors of quantity, value and technological know
-
how involved and other special circumstances which might establish the controlled component or components as the principal element of the goods being procured.
3.
Goods specified in this Annex include both new and used goods.
4.
In some instances, chemicals are listed by name and CAS number. The list applies to chemicals of the same structural formula (including hydrates) regardless of name or CAS number. CAS numbers are shown to assist in identifying a particular chemical or mixture, irrespective of nomenclature. CAS numbers cannot be used as unique identifiers because some forms of the listed chemical have different CAS numbers, and mixtures containing a listed chemical may also have different CAS numbers.
NUCLEAR TECHNOLOGY NOTE (NTN)
(To be read in conjunction with section E of Category 0.)
The "technology" directly associated with any goods controlled in Category 0 is controlled according to the provisions of Category 0.
"Technology" for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods under control remains under control even when applicable to non-controlled goods.
The approval of goods for export also authorises the export to the same end-user of the minimum "technology" required for the installation, operation, maintenance and repair of the goods.
Controls on "technology" transfer do not apply to information "in the public domain" or to "basic scientific research".
GENERAL TECHNOLOGY NOTE (GTN)
(To be read in conjunction with section E of Categories 1 to 9.)
The export of "technology" which is "required" for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods controlled in Categories 1 to 9, is controlled according to the provisions of Categories 1 to 9.
"Technology""required" for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods under control remains under control even when applicable to non-controlled goods.
Controls do not apply to that "technology" which is the minimum necessary for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those goods which are not controlled or whose export has been authorised.
Note:
This does not release such "technology" specified in 1E002.e., 1E002.f., 8E002.a. and 8E002.b.
Controls on "technology" transfers do not apply to information "in the public domain", to "basic scientific research" or to the minimum necessary information for patent applications.
NUCLEAR SOFTWARE NOTE (NSN)
(This note overrides any control within section D of Category 0)
Section D of Category 0 of this list does not control "software" which is the minimum necessary "object code" for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those items whose export has been authorised.
The approval of goods for export also authorises the export to the same end-user of the minimum necessary "object code" for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of the goods
Note:
The Nuclear Software Note does not release "software" specified in Category 5, Part 2 ("Information Security").
GENERAL SOFTWARE NOTE (GSN)
(This note overrides any control within section D of Categories 1 to 9.)
Categories 1 to 9 of this list do not control "software" which is any of the following:
a.
Generally available to the public by being:
1.
Sold from stock at retail selling points, without restriction, by means of:
a.
Over-the-counter transactions;
b.
Mail order transactions;
c.
Electronic transactions; 
or
d.
Telephone call transactions; 
and
2.
Designed for installation by the user without further substantial support by the supplier;
Note:
Entry a. of the General Software Note does not release "software" specified in Category 5, Part 2 ("Information Security").
b.
"In the public domain"; 
or
c.
The minimum necessary "object code" for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those items whose export has been authorised.
Note:
Entry c. of the General Software Note does not release "software" specified in Category 5, Part 2 ("Information Security").
GENERAL "INFORMATION SECURITY" NOTE (GISN)
"Information security" items or functions should be considered against the provisions in Category 5, Part 2, even if they are components, "software" or functions of other items.
EDITORIAL PRACTICES IN THE 
OFFICIAL JOURNAL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION
In accordance with the rules set out in the Interinstitutional style guide, for texts in English published in the 
Official Journal of the European Union
:
—
a comma is used to separate the whole number from decimals,
—
whole numbers are presented in series of three, each series being separated by a thin space.
The text reproduced in this Annex follows the above-described practice.
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS ANNEX
For acronyms and abbreviations used as defined terms, see 'Definitions of Terms used in this Annex'.
ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
ABEC
Annular Bearing Engineers Committee
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ADC
Analogue-to-Digital Converter
AGMA
American Gear Manufacturers’ Association
AHRS
Attitude and Heading Reference Systems
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
ALE
Atomic Layer Epitaxy
ALU
Arithmetic Logic Unit
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APP
Adjusted Peak Performance
APU
Auxiliary Power Unit
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
ATC
Air Traffic Control
BJT
Bipolar Junction Transistors
BPP
Beam Parameter Product
BSC
Base Station Controller
CAD
Computer-Aided-Design
CAS
Chemical Abstracts Service
CCD
Charge Coupled Device
CDU
Control and Display Unit
CEP
Circular Error Probable
CMM
Coordinate Measuring Machine
CMOS
Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CNTD
Controlled Nucleation Thermal Deposition
CPLD
Complex Programmable Logic Device
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CVD
Chemical Vapour Deposition
CW
Chemical Warfare
CW (for lasers)
Continuous Wave
DAC
Digital-to-Analogue Converter
DANL
Displayed Average Noise Level
DBRN
Data-Base Referenced Navigation
DDS
Direct Digital Synthesizer
DMA
Dynamic Mechanical Analysis
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
DMOSFET
Diffused Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
DS
Directionally Solidified
EB
Exploding Bridge
EB-PVD
Electron Beam Physical Vapour Deposition
EBW
Exploding Bridge Wire
ECM
Electro-Chemical Machining
EDM
Electrical Discharge Machines
EFI
Exploding Foil Initiators
EIRP
Effective Isotropic Radiated Power
EMP
Electromagnetic Pulse
ENOB
Effective Number of Bits
ERF
Electrorheological Finishing
ERP
Effective Radiated Power
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ETO
Emitter Turn-Off Thyristor
ETT
Electrical Triggering Thyristor
EU
European Union
EUV
Extreme Ultraviolet
FADEC
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FFT
Fast Fourier Transform
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
FPIC
Field Programmable Interconnect
FPLA
Field Programmable Logic Array
FPO
Floating Point Operation
FWHM
Full-Width Half-Maximum
GLONASS
Global Navigation Satellite System
GNSS
Global Navigation Satellite System
GPS
Global Positioning System
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communications
GTO
Gate Turn-off Thyristor
HBT
Hetero-Bipolar Transistors
HDMI
High-Definition Multimedia Interface
HEMT
High Electron Mobility Transistor
ICAO
International Civil Aviation Organization
IEC
International Electro-technical Commission
IED
Improvised Explosive Device
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IFOV
Instantaneous-Field-Of-View
IGBT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
IGCT
Integrated Gate Commutated Thyristor
IHO
International Hydrographic Organization
ILS
Instrument Landing System
IMU
Inertial Measurement Unit
INS
Inertial Navigation System
IP
Internet Protocol
IRS
Inertial Reference System
IRU
Inertial Reference Unit
ISA
International Standard Atmosphere
ISAR
Inverse Synthetic Aperture Radar
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
JT
Joule-Thomson
LIDAR
Light Detection and Ranging
LIDT
Laser Induced Damage Threshold
LOA
Length Overall
LRU
Line Replaceable Unit
LTT
Light Triggering Thyristor
MLS
Microwave Landing Systems
MMIC
Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MOCVD
Metal Organic Chemical Vapour Deposition
MOSFET
Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor
MPM
Microwave Power Module
MRF
Magnetorheological Finishing
MRF
Minimum Resolvable Feature size
MRI
Magnetic Resonance Imaging
MTBF
Mean-Time-Between-Failures
MTTF
Mean-Time-To-Failure
NA
Numerical Aperture
NDT
Non-Destructive Test
NEQ
Net Explosive Quantity
NIJ
National Institute of Justice
OAM
Operations, Administration or Maintenance
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection
PAI
Polyamide-imides
PAR
Precision Approach Radar
PCL
Passive Coherent Location
PDK
Process Design Kit
PIN
Personal Identification Number
PMR
Private Mobile Radio
PVD
Physical Vapour Deposition
ppm
parts per million
QAM
Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation
QE
Quantum Efficiency
RAP
Reactive Atom Plasmas
RF
Radio Frequency
rms
root mean square
RNC
Radio Network Controller
RNSS
Regional Navigation Satellite System
ROIC
Read-out Integrated Circuit
S-FIL
Step and Flash Imprint Lithography
SAR
Synthetic Aperture Radar
SAS
Synthetic Aperture Sonar
SC
Single Crystal
SCR
Silicon Controlled Rectifier
SFDR
Spurious Free Dynamic Range
SHPL
Super High Powered Laser
SLAR
Sidelooking Airborne Radar
SOI
Silicon-on-Insulator
SQUID
Superconducting Quantum Interference Device
SRA
Shop Replaceable Assembly
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
SSB
Single Sideband
SSR
Secondary Surveillance Radar
SSS
Side Scan Sonar
TIR
Total Indicated Reading
TVR
Transmitting Voltage Response
u
Atomic Mass Unit
UPR
Unidirectional Positioning Repeatability
UTS
Ultimate Tensile Strength
UV
Ultraviolet
VJFET
Vertical Junction Field Effect Transistor
VOR
Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range
WHO
World Health Organization
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network
DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THIS ANNEX
PART II –
Category 0
CATEGORY 0
 - 
NUCLEAR MATERIALS, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
0A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
0A001
"Nuclear reactors" and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor, as follows:
a.
"Nuclear reactors";
b.
Metal vessels, or major shop-fabricated parts therefor, including the reactor vessel head for a reactor pressure vessel, specially designed or prepared to contain the core of a "nuclear reactor";
c.
Manipulative equipment specially designed or prepared for inserting or removing fuel in a "nuclear reactor";
d.
Control rods specially designed or prepared for the control of the fission process in a "nuclear reactor", support or suspension structures therefor, rod drive mechanisms and rod guide tubes;
e.
Pressure tubes specially designed or prepared to contain both fuel elements and the primary coolant in a "nuclear reactor";
f.
Zirconium metal tubes or zirconium alloy tubes (or assembles of tubes) specially designed or prepared for use as fuel cladding in a "nuclear reactor", and in quantities exceeding 10 kg;
N.B.
For zirconium pressure tubes see 0A001.e. and for calandria tubes see 0A001.h.
g.
Coolant pumps or circulators specially designed or prepared for circulating the primary coolant of "nuclear reactors";
h.
'Nuclear reactor internals' specially designed or prepared for use in a "nuclear reactor", including support columns for the core, fuel channels, calandria tubes, thermal shields, baffles, core grid plates, and diffuser plates;
Technical Note:
In 0A001.h. 'nuclear reactor internals' means any major structure within a reactor vessel which has one or more functions such as supporting the core, maintaining fuel alignment, directing primary coolant flow, providing radiation shields for the reactor vessel, and guiding in-core instrumentation.
i.
Heat exchangers as follows:
1.
Steam generators specially designed or prepared for the primary, or intermediate, coolant circuit of a "nuclear reactor";
2.
Other heat exchangers specially designed or prepared for use in the primary coolant circuit of a "nuclear reactor";
Note:
0A001.i. does not control heat exchangers for the supporting systems of the reactor, e.g., the emergency cooling system or the decay heat cooling system.
j.
Neutron detectors specially designed or prepared for determining neutron flux levels within the core of a "nuclear reactor";
k.
'External thermal shields' specially designed or prepared for use in a "nuclear reactor" for the reduction of heat loss and also for the containment vessel protection.
Technical Note:
In 0A001.k. 'external thermal shields' means major structures placed over the reactor vessel which reduce heat loss from the reactor and reduce temperature within the containment vessel.
0B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
0B001
Plant for the separation of isotopes of "natural uranium", "depleted uranium" or "special fissile materials", and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor, as follows:
a.
Plant specially designed for separating isotopes of "natural uranium", "depleted uranium", or "special fissile materials", as follows:
1.
Gas centrifuge separation plant;
2.
Gaseous diffusion separation plant;
3.
Aerodynamic separation plant;
4.
Chemical exchange separation plant;
5.
Ion-exchange separation plant;
6.
Atomic vapour "laser" isotope separation plant;
7.
Molecular "laser" isotope separation plant;
8.
Plasma separation plant;
9.
Electro magnetic separation plant;
b.
Gas centrifuges and assemblies and components, specially designed or prepared for gas centrifuge separation process, as follows:
Technical Note:
In 0B001.b. 'high strength
-
to
-
density ratio material' means any of the following:
1.
Maraging steel capable of an ultimate tensile strength of 1,95 GPa or more;
2.
Aluminium alloys capable of an ultimate tensile strength of 0,46 GPa or more;
or
3.
"Fibrous or filamentary materials" with a "specific modulus" of more than 3,18 x 10
6
m and a "specific tensile strength" greater than 7,62 x 10
4
 m;
1.
Gas centrifuges;
2.
Complete rotor assemblies;
3.
Rotor tube cylinders with a wall thickness of 12 mm or less, a diameter of between 75 mm and 650 mm, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';
4.
Rings or bellows with a wall thickness of 3 mm or less and a diameter of between 75 mm and 650 mm and designed to give local support to a rotor tube or to join a number together, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';
5.
Baffles of between 75 mm and 650 mm diameter for mounting inside a rotor tube, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';
6.
Top or bottom caps of between 75 mm and 650 mm diameter to fit the ends of a rotor tube, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';
7.
Magnetic suspension bearings as follows:
a.
Bearing assemblies consisting of an annular magnet suspended within a housing made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
" containing a damping medium and having the magnet coupling with a pole piece or second magnet fitted to the top cap of the rotor;
b.
Active magnetic bearings specially designed or prepared for use with gas centrifuges;
8.
Specially prepared bearings comprising a pivot-cup assembly mounted on a damper;
9.
Molecular pumps comprised of cylinders having internally machined or extruded helical grooves and internally machined bores;
10.
Ring-shaped motor stators for multiphase AC hysteresis (or reluctance) motors for synchronous operation within a vacuum at a frequency of 600 Hz or more and a power of 40 VA or more;
11.
Centrifuge housing/recipients to contain the rotor tube assembly of a gas centrifuge, consisting of a rigid cylinder of wall thickness up to 30 mm with precision machined ends that are parallel to each other and perpendicular to the cylinder’s longitudinal axis to within 0,05 ° or less;
12.
Scoops consisting of specially designed or prepared tubes for the extraction of UF
6
 gas from within the rotor tube by a Pitot tube action and capable of being fixed to the central gas extraction system;
13.
Frequency changers (converters or inverters) specially designed or prepared to supply motor stators for gas centrifuge enrichment, having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:
a.
A multiphase frequency output of 600 Hz or greater; 
and
b.
High stability (with frequency control better than 0,2%);
14.
Shut-off and control valves as follows:
a.
Shut-off valves specially designed or prepared to act on the feed, product or tails UF
6
 gaseous streams of an individual gas centrifuge;
b.
Bellows-sealed valves, shut-off or control, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
", with an inside diameter of 10 mm to 160 mm, specially designed or prepared for use in main or auxiliary systems of gas centrifuge enrichment plants;
c.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for gaseous diffusion separation process, as follows:
1.
Gaseous diffusion barriers made of porous metallic, polymer or ceramic "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
" with a pore size of 10 to 100 nm, a thickness of 5 mm or less, and, for tubular forms, a diameter of 25 mm or less;
2.
Gaseous diffuser housings made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
";
3.
Compressors or gas blowers with a suction volume capacity of 1 m
3
/min or more of UF
6
, with a discharge pressure up to 500 kPa, and having a pressure ratio of 10:1 or less, and made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
";
4.
Rotary shaft seals for compressors or blowers specified in 0B001.c.3. and designed for a buffer gas in-leakage rate of less than 1 000 cm
3
/min.;
5.
Heat exchangers made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
", and designed for a leakage pressure rate of less than 10 Pa per hour under a pressure differential of 100 kPa;
6.
Bellows-sealed valves, manual or automated, shut-off or control, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
";
d.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for aerodynamic separation process, as follows:
1.
Separation nozzles consisting of slit-shaped, curved channels having a radius of curvature less than 1 mm, resistant to corrosion by UF
6
, and having a knife-edge contained within the nozzle which separates the gas flowing through the nozzle into two streams;
2.
Cylindrical or conical tubes, (vortex tubes), made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
" and with one or more tangential inlets;
3.
Compressors or gas blowers made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
", and rotary shaft seals therefor;
4.
Heat exchangers made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
";
5.
Separation element housings, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
" to contain vortex tubes or separation nozzles;
6.
Bellows-sealed valves, manual or automated, shut-off or control, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
", with a diameter of 40 mm or more;
7.
Process systems for separating UF
6
 from carrier gas (hydrogen or helium) to 1 ppm UF
6
 content or less, including:
a.
Cryogenic heat exchangers and cryoseparators capable of temperatures of 153K (-120
o
C) or less;
b.
Cryogenic refrigeration units capable of temperatures of 153 K (-120
o
C) or less;
c.
Separation nozzle or vortex tube units for the separation of UF
6
 from carrier gas;
d.
UF
6
 cold traps capable of freezing out UF
6
;
e.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for chemical exchange separation process, as follows:
1.
Fast-exchange liquid-liquid pulse columns with stage residence time of 30 s or less and resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. made of or protected by suitable plastic materials such as fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers or glass);
2.
Fast-exchange liquid-liquid centrifugal contactors with stage residence time of 30 s or less and resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. made of or protected by suitable plastic materials such as fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers or glass);
3.
Electrochemical reduction cells resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid solutions, for reduction of uranium from one valence state to another;
4.
Electrochemical reduction cells feed equipment to take U
+4
 from the organic stream and, for those parts in contact with the process stream, made of or protected by suitable materials (e.g. glass, fluorocarbon polymers, polyphenyl sulphate, polyether sulfone and resin-impregnated graphite);
5.
Feed preparation systems for producing high purity uranium chloride solution consisting of dissolution, solvent extraction and/or ion exchange equipment for purification and electrolytic cells for reducing the uranium U
+6
 or U
+4
 to U
+3
;
6.
Uranium oxidation systems for oxidation of U
+3
 to U
+4
;
f.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for ion-exchange separation process, as follows:
1.
Fast reacting ion-exchange resins, pellicular or porous macro-reticulated resins in which the active chemical exchange groups are limited to a coating on the surface of an inactive porous support structure, and other composite structures in any suitable form, including particles or fibres, with diameters of 0,2 mm or less, resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid and designed to have an exchange rate half-time of less than 10 s and capable of operating at temperatures in the range of 373 K (100
o
C) to 473 K (200
o
C);
2.
Ion exchange columns (cylindrical) with a diameter greater than 1 000 mm, made of or protected by materials resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. titanium or fluorocarbon plastics) and capable of operating at temperatures in the range of 373 K (100
o
C) to 473 K (200
o
C) and pressures above 0,7 MPa;
3.
Ion exchange reflux systems (chemical or electrochemical oxidation or reduction systems) for regeneration of the chemical reducing or oxidizing agents used in ion exchange enrichment cascades;
g.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for laser-based separation processes using atomic vapour laser isotope separation, as follows:
1.
Uranium metal vaporization systems designed to achieve a delivered power of 1 kW or more on the target for use in laser enrichment;
2.
Liquid or vapour uranium metal handling systems specially designed or prepared for handling molten uranium, molten uranium alloys or uranium metal vapour for use in laser enrichment, and specially designed components therefor;
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2A225.
3.
Product and tails collector assemblies for collecting uranium metal in liquid or solid form, made of or protected by materials resistant to the heat and corrosion of uranium metal vapour or liquid, such as yttria-coated graphite or tantalum;
4.
Separator module housings (cylindrical or rectangular vessels) for containing the uranium metal vapour source, the electron beam gun and the product and tails collectors;
5.
"Lasers" or "laser" systems specially designed or prepared for the separation of uranium isotopes with a spectrum frequency stabilisation for operation over extended periods of time;
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6A005 AND 6A205.
h.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for laser-based separation processes using molecular laser isotope separation, as follows:
1.
Supersonic expansion nozzles for cooling mixtures of UF
6
 and carrier gas to 150 K (-123
o
C) or less and made from "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
";
2.
Product or tails collector components or devices specially designed or prepared for collecting uranium material or uranium tails material following illumination with laser light, made of "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
";
3.
Compressors made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
", and rotary shaft seals therefor;
4.
Equipment for fluorinating UF
5
 (solid) to UF
6
 (gas);
5.
Process systems for separating UF
6
 from carrier gas (e.g. nitrogen, argon or other gas) including:
a.
Cryogenic heat exchangers and cryoseparators capable of temperatures of 153 K (-120
o
C) or less;
b.
Cryogenic refrigeration units capable of temperatures of 153 K (-120
o
C) or less;
c.
UF
6
 cold traps capable of freezing out UF
6
;
6.
"Lasers" or "laser" systems specially designed or prepared for the separation of uranium isotopes with a spectrum frequency stabilisation for operation over extended periods of time;
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6A005 AND 6A205.
i.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for plasma separation process, as follows:
1.
Microwave power sources and antennae for producing or accelerating ions, with an output frequency greater than 30 GHz and mean power output greater than 50 kW;
2.
Radio frequency ion excitation coils for frequencies of more than 100 kHz and capable of handling more than 40 kW mean power;
3.
Uranium plasma generation systems;
4.
Not used;
5.
Product and tails collector assemblies for uranium metal in solid form, made of or protected by materials resistant to the heat and corrosion of uranium vapour such as yttria-coated graphite or tantalum;
6.
Separator module housings (cylindrical) for containing the uranium plasma source, radio-frequency drive coil and the product and tails collectors and made of a suitable non-magnetic material (e.g. stainless steel);
j.
Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for electromagnetic separation process, as follows:
1.
Ion sources, single or multiple, consisting of a vapour source, ioniser, and beam accelerator made of suitable non-magnetic materials (e.g. graphite, stainless steel, or copper) and capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater;
2.
Ion collector plates for collection of enriched or depleted uranium ion beams, consisting of two or more slits and pockets and made of suitable non-magnetic materials (e.g. graphite or stainless steel);
3.
Vacuum housings for uranium electromagnetic separators made of non-magnetic materials (e.g. stainless steel) and designed to operate at pressures of 0,1 Pa or lower;
4.
Magnet pole pieces with a diameter greater than 2 m;
5.
High voltage power supplies for ion sources, having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Capable of continuous operation;
b.
Output voltage of 20 000 V or greater;
c.
Output current of 1 A or greater; 
and
d.
Voltage regulation of better than 0,01% over a period of 8 hours;
N.B.
SEE ALSO 3A227.
6.
Magnet power supplies (high power, direct current) having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Capable of continuous operation with a current output of 500 A or greater at a voltage of 100 V or greater; 
and
b.
Current or voltage regulation better than 0,01% over a period of 8 hours.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 3A226.
0B002
Specially designed or prepared auxiliary systems, equipment and components as follows, for isotope separation plant specified in 0B001, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
":
a.
Feed autoclaves, ovens or systems used for passing UF
6
 to the enrichment process;
b.
Desublimers or cold traps, used to remove UF
6
 from the enrichment process for subsequent transfer upon heating;
c.
Product and tails stations for transferring UF
6
 into containers;
d.
Liquefaction or solidification stations used to remove UF6 from the enrichment process by compressing, cooling and converting UF
6
 to a liquid or solid form;
e.
Piping systems and header systems specially designed or prepared for handling UF
6
 within gaseous diffusion, centrifuge or aerodynamic cascades;
f.
Vacuum systems and pumps as follows:
1.
Vacuum manifolds, vacuum headers or vacuum pumps having a suction capacity of 5 m
3
/minute or more;
2.
Vacuum pumps specially designed for use in UF
6
 bearing atmospheres made of, or protected by, "materials resistant to corrosion by UF
6
"; 
or
3.
Vacuum systems consisting of vacuum manifolds, vacuum headers and vacuum pumps, and designed for service in UF
6
-bearing atmospheres;
g.
UF
6
 mass spectrometers/ion sources capable of taking on-line samples from UF
6
 gas streams and having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Capable of measuring ions of 320 atomic mass units or greater and having a resolution of better than 1 part in 320;
2.
Ion sources constructed of or protected by nickel, nickel-copper alloys with a nickel content of 60% or more by weight, or nickel-chrome alloys;
3.
Electron bombardment ionisation sources; 
and
4.
Having a collector system suitable for isotopic analysis.
0B003
Plant for the conversion of uranium and equipment specially designed or prepared therefor, as follows:
a.
Systems for the conversion of uranium ore concentrates to UO
3
;
b.
Systems for the conversion of UO
3
 to UF
6
;
c.
Systems for the conversion of UO
3
 to UO
2
;
d.
Systems for the conversion of UO
2
 to UF
4
;
e.
Systems for the conversion of UF
4
 to UF
6
;
f.
Systems for the conversion of UF
4
 to uranium metal;
g.
Systems for the conversion of UF
6
 to UO
2
;
h.
Systems for the conversion of UF
6
 to UF
4
;
i.
Systems for the conversion of UO
2
 to UCl
4
.
0B004
Plant for the production or concentration of heavy water, deuterium and deuterium compounds and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor, as follows:
a.
Plant for the production of heavy water, deuterium or deuterium compounds, as follows:
1.
Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange plants;
2.
Ammonia-hydrogen exchange plants;
b.
Equipment and components, as follows:
1.
Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange towers with diameters of 1,5 m or more, capable of operating at pressures greater than or equal to 2 MPa;
2.
Single stage, low head (i.e., 0,2 MPa) centrifugal blowers or compressors for hydrogen sulphide gas circulation (i.e., gas containing more than 70% by weight hydrogen sulphide, H
2
S) with a throughput capacity greater than or equal to 56 m
3
/s when operating at pressures greater than or equal to 1,8 MPa suction and having seals designed for wet H
2
S service;
3.
Ammonia-hydrogen exchange towers greater than or equal to 35 m in height with diameters of 1,5 m to 2,5 m capable of operating at pressures greater than 15 MPa;
4.
Tower internals, including stage contactors, and stage pumps, including those which are submersible, for heavy water production utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;
5.
Ammonia crackers with operating pressures greater than or equal to 3 MPa for heavy water production utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;
6.
Infrared absorption analysers capable of on-line hydrogen/deuterium ratio analysis where deuterium concentrations are equal to or greater than 90% by weight;
7.
Catalytic burners for the conversion of enriched deuterium gas into heavy water utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;
8.
Complete heavy water upgrade systems, or columns therefor, for the upgrade of heavy water to reactor-grade deuterium concentration;
9.
Ammonia synthesis converters or synthesis units specially designed or prepared for heavy water production utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process.
0B005
Plant specially designed for the fabrication of "nuclear reactor" fuel elements and specially designed or prepared equipment therefor.
Technical Note:
Specially designed or prepared equipment for the fabrication of "nuclear reactor" fuel elements includes equipment which:
1.
Normally comes into direct contact with or directly processes or controls the production flow of nuclear materials;
2.
Seals the nuclear materials within the cladding;
3.
Checks the integrity of the cladding or the seal;
4.
Checks the finish treatment of the sealed fuel; 
or
5.
Is used for assembling reactor elements.
0B006
Plant for the reprocessing of irradiated "nuclear reactor" fuel elements, and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor.
Note:
0B006 includes:
a.
Plant for the reprocessing of irradiated "nuclear reactor" fuel elements including equipment and components which normally come into direct contact with and directly control the irradiated fuel and the major nuclear material and fission product processing streams;
b.
Fuel element decladding equipment and chopping or shredding machines, i.e., remotely operated equipment to cut, chop or shear irradiated "nuclear reactor" fuel assemblies, bundles or rods;
c.
Dissolver vessels or dissolvers employing mechanical devices specially designed or prepared for the dissolution of irradiated "nuclear reactor" fuel, which are capable of withstanding hot, highly corrosive liquids, and which can be remotely loaded, operated and maintained;
d.
Solvent extractors, such as packed or pulsed columns, mixer settlers or centrifugal contractors, resistant to the corrosive effects of nitric acid and specially designed or prepared for use in a plant for the reprocessing of irradiated "natural uranium", "depleted uranium" or "special fissile materials";
e.
Holding or storage vessels specially designed to be critically safe and resistant to the corrosive effects of nitric acid;
Technical Note:
Holding or storage vessels may have the following features:
1.
Walls or internal structures with a boron equivalent (calculated for all constituent elements as defined in the note to 0C004)
of at least two per cent;
2.
A maximum diameter of 175 mm for cylindrical vessels; 
or
3.
A maximum width of 75 mm for either a slab or annular vessel.
f.
Neutron measurement systems specially designed or prepared for integration and use with automated process control systems in a plant for the reprocessing of irradiated "natural uranium", "depleted uranium" or "special fissile materials".
0B007
Plant for the conversion of plutonium and equipment specially designed or prepared therefor, as follows:
a.
Systems for the conversion of plutonium nitrate to oxide;
b.
Systems for plutonium metal production.
0C   
Materials
0C001
"Natural uranium" or "depleted uranium" or thorium in the form of metal, alloy, chemical compound or concentrate and any other material containing one or more of the foregoing;
Note:
0C001 does not control the following:
a.
Four grammes or less of "natural uranium" or "depleted uranium" when contained in a sensing component in instruments;
b.
"Depleted uranium" specially fabricated for the following civil non
-
nuclear applications:
1.
Shielding;
2.
Packaging;
3.
Ballasts having a mass not greater than 100 kg;
4.
Counter
-
weights having a mass not greater than 100 kg;
c.
Alloys containing less than 5% thorium;
d.
Ceramic products containing thorium, which have been manufactured for non-nuclear use
.
0C002
"Special fissile materials"
Note:
0C002 does not control four "effective grammes" or less when contained in a sensing component in instruments.
0C003
Deuterium, heavy water (deuterium oxide) and other compounds of deuterium, and mixtures and solutions containing deuterium, in which the isotopic ratio of deuterium to hydrogen exceeds 1:5 000.
0C004
Graphite having a purity level better than 5 parts per million 'boron equivalent' and with a density greater than 1,50 g/cm
3
 for use in a "nuclear reactor", in quantities exceeding 1 kg.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1C107.
Note 1:
For the purpose of export control, the competent authorities of the EU Member State in which the exporter is established will determine whether or not the exports of graphite meeting the above specifications are for "nuclear reactor" use. 0C004 does not control graphite having a purity level better than 5 ppm (parts per million) boron equivalent and with a density greater than 1,50 g/cm
3
 not for use in a "nuclear reactor".
Note 2:
In 0C004, 'boron equivalent' (BE) is defined as the sum of BE
z
 for impurities (excluding BE
carbon
 since carbon is not considered an impurity) including boron, where:
BE
Z
 (ppm) = CF x concentration of element Z in ppm;
and
 σ
B
 and
 σ
Z
 are the thermal neutron capture cross sections (in barns) for naturally occurring boron and element Z respectively; and A
B
 and A
Z
 are the atomic masses of naturally occurring boron and element Z respectively.
0C005
Specially prepared compounds or powders for the manufacture of gaseous diffusion barriers, resistant to corrosion by UF
6
 (e.g. nickel or alloys containing 60% by weight or more nickel, aluminium oxide and fully fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers), having a purity of 99,9% by weight or more and a particle size less than 10 μm measured by ASTM B330 standard and a high degree of particle size uniformity.
0D   
Software
0D001
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods specified in this Category.
0E   
Technology
0E001
"Technology" according to the Nuclear Technology Note for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods specified in this Category.
PART III –
Category 1
CATEGORY 1 – SPECIAL MATERIALS AND RELATED EQUIPMENT
1A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
1A001
Components made from fluorinated compounds, as follows:
a.
Seals, gaskets, sealants or fuel bladders, specially designed for "aircraft" or aerospace use, made from more than 50% by weight of any of the materials specified in 1C009.b. or 1C009.c.;
b.
Not used;
c.
Not used.
1A002
"Composite" structures or laminates, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1A202, 9A010 and 9A110.
a.
Made from any of the following:
1.
An organic "matrix" and "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.c. or 1C010.d.: 
or
2.
Prepregs or preforms specified in 1C010.e.;
b.
Made from a metal or carbon "matrix", and any of the following:
1.
Carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" having all of the following:
a.
A "specific modulus" exceeding 10,15 x 10
6
 m; 
and
b.
A "specific tensile strength" exceeding 17,7 x 10
4
 m; 
or
2.
Materials specified in 1C010.c.
Note 1:
1A002 does not control "composite" structures or laminates made from epoxy resin impregnated carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" for the repair of "civil aircraft" structures or laminates, having all of the following:
a.
An area not exceeding 1 m
2
;
b.
A length not exceeding 2,5 m; 
and
c.
A width exceeding 15 mm.
Note 2:
1A002 does not control semi-finished items, specially designed for purely civilian applications as follows:
a.
Sporting goods;
b.
Automotive industry;
c.
Machine tool industry;
d.
Medical applications.
Note 3:
1A002.b.1. does not control semi-finished items containing a maximum of two dimensions of interwoven filaments and specially designed for applications as follows:
a.
Metal heat-treatment furnaces for tempering metals;
b.
Silicon boule production equipment.
Note 4:
1A002 does not control finished items specially designed for a specific application.
Note 5:
1A002.b.1. does not control mechanically chopped, milled, or cut carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" 25,0 mm or less in length.
1A003
Manufactures of non-"fusible" aromatic polyimides in film, sheet, tape or ribbon form having any of the following:
a.
A thickness exceeding 0,254 mm; 
or
b.
Coated or laminated with carbon, graphite, metals or magnetic substances.
Note:
1A003
 does 
not control manufactures when coated or laminated with copper and
designed for the production of electronic printed circuit boards.
N.B.
For "fusible" aromatic polyimides in any form, see 1C008.a.3.
1A004
Protective and detection equipment and components not specially designed for military use, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS, 2B351 AND 2B352.
a.
Full face masks, filter canisters and decontamination equipment therefor, designed or modified for defence against any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
Note:
1A004.a. includes Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR) that are designed or modified for defence against agents or materials, listed in 1A004.a.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 1A004.a.:
1.
Full face masks are also known as gas masks.
2.
Filter canisters include filter cartridges.
1.
"Biological agents";
2.
'Radioactive materials';
3.
Chemical warfare (CW) agents; 
or
4.
"Riot control agents", including:
a.
α-Bromobenzeneacetonitrile, (Bromobenzyl cyanide) (CA) (CAS 5798-79-8);
b.
[(2-Chlorophenyl) methylene] propanedinitrile, (o-Chlorobenzylidenemalononitrile) (CS) (CAS 2698-41-1);
c.
2-Chloro-1-phenylethanone, Phenylacyl chloride (ω-chloroacetophenone) (CN) (CAS 532-27-4);
d.
Dibenz-(b,f)-1,4-oxazephine (CR) (CAS 257-07-8);
e.
10-Chloro-5,10-dihydrophenarsazine, (Phenarsazine chloride), (Adamsite), (DM) (CAS 578-94-9);
f.
N-Nonanoylmorpholine, (MPA) (CAS 5299-64-9);
b.
Protective suits, gloves and shoes, specially designed or modified for defence against any of the following:
1.
"Biological agents";
2.
'Radioactive materials'; 
or
3.
Chemical warfare (CW) agents;
c.
Detection systems, specially designed or modified for detection or identification of any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
"Biological agents";
2.
'Radioactive materials'; 
or
3.
Chemical warfare (CW) agents.
d.
Electronic equipment designed for automatically detecting or identifying the presence of "explosives" residues and utilising 'trace detection' techniques (e.g., surface acoustic wave, ion mobility spectrometry, differential mobility spectrometry, mass spectrometry).
Technical Note:
'Trace detection' is defined as the capability to detect less than 1 ppm vapour, or 1 mg solid or liquid.
Note 1:
1A004.d. does not control equipment specially designed for laboratory use.
Note 2:
1A004.d. does not control non-contact walk-through security portals
.
Note:
1A004 does not control:
a.
Personal radiation monitoring dosimeters;
b.
Occupational health or safety equipment limited by design or function to protect against hazards specific to residential safety or civil industries, including:
1.
mining;
2.
quarrying;
3.
agriculture;
4.
pharmaceutical;
5.
medical;
6.
veterinary;
7.
environmental;
8.
waste management;
9.
food industry.
Technical Notes:
1.
1A004 includes equipment and components that have been identified, successfully tested to national standards or otherwise proven effective, for the detection of or defence against 'radioactive materials', "biological agents", chemical warfare agents, 'simulants' or "riot control agents", even if such equipment or components are used in civil industries such as mining, quarrying, agriculture, pharmaceuticals, medical, veterinary, environmental, waste management, or the food industry.
2.
'Simulant' is a substance or material that is used in place of toxic agent (chemical or biological) in training, research, testing or evaluation.
3.
For the purposes of 1A004, 'radioactive materials' are those selected or modified to increase their effectiveness in producing casualties in humans or animals, degrading equipment or damaging crops or the environment.
1A005
Body armour and components therefor, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
a.
Soft body armour not manufactured to military standards or specifications, or to their equivalents, and specially designed components therefor;
b.
Hard body armour plates providing ballistic protection equal to or less than level IIIA (NIJ 0101.06, July 2008), or "equivalent standards".
N.B.
For "fibrous or filamentary materials" used in the manufacture of body armour, see 1C010.
Note 1:
1A005 does not control body armour when accompanying its user for the user's own personal protection.
Note 2:
1A005 does not control body armour designed to provide frontal protection only from both fragment and blast from non-military explosive devices.
Note 3:
1A005 does not control body armour designed to provide protection only from knife, spike, needle or blunt trauma.
1A006
Equipment, specially designed or modified for the disposal of Improvised Explosive Devices (IEDs), as follows, and specially designed components and accessories therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
a.
Remotely operated vehicles;
b.
'Disruptors'.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 1A006.b. 'disruptors' are devices specially designed for the purpose of preventing the operation of an explosive device by projecting a liquid, solid or frangible projectile.
Note:
1A006 does not control equipment when accompanying its operator.
1A007
Equipment and devices, specially designed to initiate charges and devices containing "energetic materials", by electrical means, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS, 3A229 AND 3A232.
a.
Explosive detonator firing sets designed to drive explosive detonators specified in 1A007.b.;
b.
Electrically driven explosive detonators as follows:
1.
Exploding bridge (EB);
2.
Exploding bridge wire (EBW);
3.
Slapper;
4.
Exploding foil initiators (EFI).
Technical Notes:
1.
The word initiator or igniter is sometimes used in place of the word detonator.
2.
For the purpose of 1A007.b. the detonators of concern all utilise a small electrical conductor (bridge, bridge wire, or foil) that explosively vaporises when a fast, high-current electrical pulse is passed through it. In non-slapper types, the exploding conductor starts a chemical detonation in a contacting high explosive material such as PETN (pentaerythritoltetranitrate). In slapper detonators, the explosive vaporization of the electrical conductor drives a flyer or slapper across a gap, and the impact of the slapper on an explosive starts a chemical detonation. The slapper in some designs is driven by magnetic force. The term exploding foil detonator may refer to either an EB or a slapper-type detonator.
1A008
Charges, devices and components, as follows:
a.
'Shaped charges' having all of the following:
1.
Net Explosive Quantity (NEQ) greater than 90 g; 
and
2.
Outer casing diameter equal to or greater than 75 mm;
b.
Linear shaped cutting charges having all of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
An explosive load greater than 40 g/m; 
and
2.
A width of 10 mm or more;
c.
Detonating cord with explosive core load greater than 64 g/m;
d.
Cutters, other than those specified in 1A008.b., and severing tools, having a Net Explosive Quantity (NEQ) greater than 3,5 kg.
Technical Note:
'Shaped charges' are explosive charges shaped to focus the effects of the explosive blast.
1A102
Resaturated pyrolised carbon-carbon components designed for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
1A202
Composite structures, other than those specified in 1A002, in the form of tubes and having both of the following characteristics:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A010 AND 9A110.
a.
An inside diameter of between 75 mm and 400 mm; 
and
b.
Made with any of the "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.a. or b. or 1C210.a. or with carbon prepreg materials specified in 1C210.c.
1A225
Platinized catalysts specially designed or prepared for promoting the hydrogen isotope exchange reaction between hydrogen and water for the recovery of tritium from heavy water or for the production of heavy water.
1A226
Specialised packings which may be used in separating heavy water from ordinary water, having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Made of phosphor bronze mesh chemically treated to improve wettability; 
and
b.
Designed to be used in vacuum distillation towers.
1A227
High-density (lead glass or other) radiation shielding windows, having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed frames therefor:
a.
A 'cold area' greater than 0,09 m
2
;
b.
A density greater than 3 g/cm
3
; 
and
c.
A thickness of 100 mm or greater.
Technical Note:
In 1A227 the term 'cold area' means the viewing area of the window exposed to the lowest level of radiation in the design application.
1B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
1B001
Equipment for the production or inspection of "composite" structures or laminates specified in 1A002 or "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010, as follows, and specially designed components and accessories therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1B101 AND 1B201.
a.
Filament winding machines, of which the motions for positioning, wrapping and winding fibres are coordinated and programmed in three or more 'primary servo positioning' axes, specially designed for the manufacture of "composite" structures or laminates, from "fibrous or filamentary materials";
b.
'Tape-laying machines', of which the motions for positioning and laying tape are coordinated and programmed in five or more 'primary servo positioning' axes, specially designed for the manufacture of "composite" airframe or 'missile' structures;
Note:
In 1B001.b., 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 1B001.b., 'tape-laying machines' have the ability to lay one or more 'filament bands' limited to widths greater than 25,4 mm and less than or equal to 304,8 mm, and to cut and restart individual 'filament band' courses during the laying process.
c.
Multidirectional, multidimensional weaving machines or interlacing machines, including adapters and modification kits, specially designed or modified for weaving, interlacing or braiding fibres, for "composite" structures;
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 1B001.c., the technique of interlacing includes knitting.
d.
Equipment specially designed or adapted for the production of reinforcement fibres, as follows:
1.
Equipment for converting polymeric fibres (such as polyacrylonitrile, rayon, pitch or polycarbosilane) into carbon fibres or silicon carbide fibres, including special equipment to strain the fibre during heating;
2.
Equipment for the chemical vapour deposition of elements or compounds, on heated filamentary substrates, to manufacture silicon carbide fibres;
3.
Equipment for the wet-spinning of refractory ceramics (such as aluminium oxide);
4.
Equipment for converting aluminium containing precursor fibres into alumina fibres by heat treatment;
e.
Equipment for producing prepregs specified in 1C010.e. by the hot melt method;
f.
Non-destructive inspection equipment specially designed for "composite" materials, as follows:
1.
X-ray tomography systems for three dimensional defect inspection;
2.
Numerically controlled ultrasonic testing machines of which the motions for positioning transmitters or receivers are simultaneously coordinated and programmed in four or more axes to follow the three dimensional contours of the component under inspection;
g.
'Tow-placement machines', of which the motions for positioning and laying tows are coordinated and programmed in two or more 'primary servo positioning' axes, specially designed for the manufacture of "composite" airframe or 'missile' structures.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 1B001.g., 'tow-placement machines' have the ability to place one or more 'filament bands' having widths less than or equal to 25,4 mm, and to cut and restart individual 'filament band' courses during the placement process.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purpose of 1B001, 'primary servo positioning' axes control, under computer program direction, the position of the end effector (i.e., head) in space relative to the work piece at the correct orientation and direction to achieve the desired process.
2.
For the purposes of 1B001, a 'filament band' is a single continuous width of fully or partially resin-impregnated tape, tow or fibre. Fully or partially resin-impregnated 'filament bands' include those coated with dry powder that tacks upon heating.
1B002
Equipment designed to produce metal alloy powder or particulate materials, and having all of the following:
a.
Specially designed to avoid contamination; 
and
b.
Specially designed for use in one of the processes specified in 1C002.c.2.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1B102.
1B003
Tools, dies, moulds or fixtures, for "superplastic forming" or "diffusion bonding" titanium, aluminium or their alloys, specially designed for the manufacture of any of the following:
a.
Airframe or aerospace structures;
b.
"Aircraft" or aerospace engines; 
or
c.
Specially designed components for structures specified in 1B003.a. or for engines specified in 1B003.b.
1B101
Equipment, other than that specified in 1B001, for the "production" of structural composites as follows; and specially designed components and accessories therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1B201.
Note:
Components and accessories specified in 1B101 include moulds, mandrels, dies, fixtures and tooling for the preform pressing, curing, casting, sintering or bonding of composite structures, laminates and manufactures thereof.
a.
Filament winding machines or fibre placement machines, of which the motions for positioning, wrapping and winding fibres can be coordinated and programmed in three or more axes, designed to fabricate composite structures or laminates from "fibrous or filamentary materials", and coordinating and programming controls;
b.
Tape-laying machines of which the motions for positioning and laying tape and sheets can be coordinated and programmed in two or more axes, designed for the manufacture of composite airframe and "missile" structures;
c.
Equipment designed or modified for the "production" of "fibrous or filamentary materials" as follows:
1.
Equipment for converting polymeric fibres (such as polyacrylonitrile, rayon or polycarbosilane) including special provision to strain the fibre during heating;
2.
Equipment for the vapour deposition of elements or compounds on heated filament substrates;
3.
Equipment for the wet-spinning of refractory ceramics (such as aluminium oxide);
d.
Equipment designed or modified for special fibre surface treatment or for producing prepregs and preforms specified in entry 9C110.
Note:
1B101.d. includes rollers, tension stretchers, coating equipment, cutting equipment and clicker dies.
1B102
Metal powder "production equipment", other than that specified in 1B002, and components as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1B115.b.
a.
Metal powder "production equipment" usable for the "production", in a controlled environment, of spherical, spheroidal or atomised materials specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111.a.1., 1C111.a.2. or in the Military Goods Controls.
b.
Specially designed components for "production equipment" specified in 1B002 or 1B102.a.
Note:
1B102 includes:
a.
Plasma generators (high frequency arc-jet) usable for obtaining sputtered or spherical metallic powders with organization of the process in an argon-water environment;
b.
Electroburst equipment usable for obtaining sputtered or spherical metallic powders with organization of the process in an argon-water environment;
c.
Equipment usable for the "production" of spherical aluminium powders by powdering a melt in an inert medium (e.g. nitrogen).
1B115
Equipment, other than that specified in 1B002 or 1B102, for the production of propellant and propellant constituents, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:
a.
"Production equipment" for the "production", handling or acceptance testing of liquid propellants or propellant constituents specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls;
b.
"Production equipment" for the "production", handling, mixing, curing, casting, pressing, machining, extruding or acceptance testing of solid propellants or propellant constituents specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls.
Note:
1B115.b. does not control batch mixers, continuous mixers or fluid energy mills. For the control of batch mixers, continuous mixers and fluid energy mills see 1B117, 1B118 and 1B119.
Note 1:
For equipment specially designed for the production of military goods, see the Military Goods Controls.
Note 2:
1B115 does not control equipment for the "production", handling and acceptance testing of boron carbide.
1B116
Specially designed nozzles for producing pyrolitically derived materials formed on a mould, mandrel or other substrate from precursor gases which decompose in the 1 573 K (1 300
o
C) to 3 173 K (2 900
o
C) temperature range at pressures of 130 Pa to 20 kPa.
1B117
Batch mixers having all of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
a.
Designed or modified for mixing under vacuum in the range of zero to 13,326 kPa:
b.
Capable of controlling the temperature of the mixing chamber;
c.
A total volumetric capacity of 110 litres or more; 
and
d.
At least one 'mixing/kneading shaft' mounted off centre.
Note:
In 1B117.d. the term 'mixing/kneading shaft' does not refer to deagglomerators or knife-spindles.
1B118
Continuous mixers having all of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
a.
Designed or modified for mixing under vacuum in the range of zero to 13,326 kPa;
b.
Capable of controlling the temperature of the mixing chamber;
c.
any of the following:
1.
Two or more mixing/kneading shafts; 
or
2.
All of the following:
a.
A single rotating and oscillating shaft with kneading teeth/pins; 
and
b.
Kneading teeth/pins inside the casing of the mixing chamber.
1B119
Fluid energy mills usable for grinding or milling substances specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls, and specially designed components therefor.
1B201
Filament winding machines, other than those specified in 1B001 or 1B101, and related equipment, as follows:
a.
Filament winding machines having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Having motions for positioning, wrapping, and winding fibres coordinated and programmed in two or more axes;
2.
Specially designed to fabricate composite structures or laminates from "fibrous or filamentary materials"; 
and
3.
Capable of winding cylindrical tubes with an internal diameter between 75 and 650 mm and lengths of 300 mm or greater;
b.
Coordinating and programming controls for the filament winding machines specified in 1B201.a.;
c.
Precision mandrels for the filament winding machines specified in 1B201.a.
1B225
Electrolytic cells for fluorine production with an output capacity greater than 250 g of fluorine per hour.
1B226
Electromagnetic isotope separators designed for, or equipped with, single or multiple ion sources capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater.
Note:
1B226 includes separators:
a.
Capable of enriching stable isotopes;
b.
With the ion sources and collectors both in the magnetic field and those configurations in which they are external to the field.
1B228
Hydrogen-cryogenic distillation columns having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Designed for operation with internal temperatures of 35 K (-238°C) or less;
b.
Designed for operation at an internal pressure of 0,5 to 5 MPa;
c.
Constructed of either:
1.
Stainless steel of the Society of Automotive Engineers International (SAE) 300 series with low sulphur content and with an austenitic ASTM (or equivalent standard) grain size number of 5 or greater; 
or
2.
Equivalent materials which are both cryogenic and hydrogen (H
2
)-compatible; 
and
d.
With internal diameters of 30 cm or greater and 'effective lengths' of 4 m or greater.
Technical Note:
In 1B228 'effective length' means the active height of packing material in a packed-type column, or the active height of internal contactor plates in a plate-type column.
1B230
Pumps capable of circulating solutions of concentrated or dilute potassium amide catalyst in liquid ammonia (KNH
2
/NH
3
), having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Airtight (i.e., hermetically sealed);
b.
A capacity greater than 8,5 m
3
/h; 
and
c.
Either of the following characteristics:
1.
For concentrated potassium amide solutions (1% or greater), an operating pressure of 1,5 to 60 MPa; 
or
2.
For dilute potassium amide solutions (less than 1%), an operating pressure of 20 to 60 MPa.
1B231
Tritium facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows:
a.
Facilities or plants for the production, recovery, extraction, concentration, or handling of tritium;
b.
Equipment for tritium facilities or plants, as follows:
1.
Hydrogen or helium refrigeration units capable of cooling to 23 K (-250°C) or less, with heat removal capacity greater than 150 W;
2.
Hydrogen isotope storage or hydrogen isotope purification systems using metal hydrides as the storage or purification medium.
1B232
Turboexpanders or turboexpander-compressor sets having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Designed for operation with an outlet temperature of 35 K (-238°C) or less; 
and
b.
Designed for a throughput of hydrogen gas of 1 000 kg/h or greater.
1B233
Lithium isotope separation facilities or plants, and systems and equipment therefor, as follows:
a.
Facilities or plants for the separation of lithium isotopes;
b.
Equipment for the separation of lithium isotopes based on the lithium-mercury amalgam process, as follows:
1.
Packed liquid-liquid exchange columns specially designed for lithium amalgams;
2.
Mercury or lithium amalgam pumps;
3.
Lithium amalgam electrolysis cells;
4.
Evaporators for concentrated lithium hydroxide solution;
c.
Ion exchange systems specially designed for lithium isotope separation, and specially designed components therefor;
d.
Chemical exchange systems (employing crown ethers, cryptands, or lariat ethers), specially designed for lithium isotope separation, and specially designed components therefor.
1B234
High explosive containment vessels, chambers, containers and other similar containment devices designed for the testing of high explosives or explosive devices and having both of the following characteristics:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
a.
Designed to fully contain an explosion equivalent to 2 kg of trinitrotoluene (TNT) or greater; 
and
b.
Having design elements or features enabling real time or delayed transfer of diagnostic or measurement information.
1B235
Target assemblies and components for the production of tritium as follows:
a.
Target assemblies made of or containing lithium enriched in the lithium-6 isotope specially designed for the production of tritium through irradiation, including insertion in a nuclear reactor;
b.
Components specially designed for the target assemblies specified in 1B235.a.
Technical Note:
Components specially designed for target assemblies for the production of tritium may include lithium pellets, tritium getters, and specially-coated cladding.
1C   
Materials
Technical Note:
Metals and alloys:
Unless provision to the contrary is made, the words 'metals' and 'alloys'
in 1C001 to 1C012 cover crude and semi-fabricated forms, as follows:
Crude forms:
Anodes, balls, bars (including notched bars and wire bars), billets, blocks, blooms, brickets, cakes, cathodes, crystals, cubes, dice, grains, granules, ingots, lumps, pellets, pigs, powder, rondelles, shot, slabs, slugs, sponge, sticks;
Semi-fabricated forms (whether or not coated, plated, drilled or punched):
a.
Wrought or worked materials fabricated by rolling, drawing, extruding, forging, impact extruding, pressing, graining, atomising, and grinding, i.e.: angles, channels, circles, discs, dust, flakes, foils and leaf, forging, plate, powder, pressings and stampings, ribbons, rings, rods (including bare welding rods, wire rods, and rolled wire), sections, shapes, sheets, strip, pipe and tubes (including tube rounds, squares, and hollows), drawn or extruded wire;
b.
Cast material produced by casting in sand, die, metal, plaster or other types of moulds, including high pressure castings, sintered forms, and forms made by powder metallurgy.
The object of the control should not be defeated by the export of non-listed forms alleged to be finished products but representing in reality crude forms or semi-fabricated forms.
1C001
Materials specially designed for absorbing electromagnetic radiation, or intrinsically conductive polymers, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1C101.
a.
Materials for absorbing frequencies exceeding 2 x 10
8
 Hz but less than 3 x 10
12
 Hz;
Note 1:
1C001.a. does not control:
a.
Hair type absorbers, constructed of natural or synthetic fibres, with non-magnetic loading to provide absorption;
b.
Absorbers having no magnetic loss and whose incident surface is non-planar in shape, including pyramids, cones, wedges and convoluted surfaces;
c.
Planar absorbers, having all of the following:
1.
Made from any of the following:
a.
Plastic foam materials (flexible or non-flexible) with carbon-loading, or organic materials, including binders, providing more than 5% echo compared with metal over a bandwidth exceeding ±15% of the centre frequency of the incident energy, and not capable of withstanding temperatures exceeding 450 K (177°C); 
or
b.
Ceramic materials providing more than 20% echo compared with metal over a bandwidth exceeding ±15% of the centre frequency of the incident energy, and not capable of withstanding temperatures exceeding 800 K (527°C);
Technical Note:
Absorption test samples for 1C001.a. Note: 1.c.1. should be a square at least 5 wavelengths of the centre frequency on a side and positioned in the far field of the radiating element.
2.
Tensile strength less than 7 x 10
6
 N/m
2
; 
and
3.
Compressive strength less than 14 x 10
6
 N/m
2
;
d.
Planar absorbers made of sintered ferrite, having all of the following
:
1.
A specific gravity exceeding 4,4; 
and
2.
A maximum operating temperature of 548 K (275°C) or less;
e.
Planar absorbers having no magnetic loss and fabricated from 'open-cell foam' plastic material with a density of 0,15 g/cm
3
 or less.
Technical Note:
'Open-cell foams' are flexible and porous materials, having an inner structure open to the atmosphere. 'Open-cell foams' are also known as reticulated foams.
Note 2:
Nothing in Note 1 to 1C001.a. releases magnetic materials to provide absorption when contained in paint.
b.
Materials not transparent to visible light and specially designed for absorbing near-infrared radiation having a wavelength exceeding 810 nm but less than 2 000 nm (frequencies exceeding 150 THz but less than 370 THz);
Note:
1C001.b. does not control materials, specially designed or formulated for any of the following applications:
a.
"Laser" marking of polymers; 
or
b.
"Laser" welding of polymers.
c.
Intrinsically conductive polymeric materials with a 'bulk electrical conductivity' exceeding 10 000 S/m (Siemens per metre) or a 'sheet (surface) resistivity' of less than 100 ohms/square
,
 based on any of the following polymers:
1.
Polyaniline;
2.
Polypyrrole;
3.
Polythiophene;
4.
Poly phenylene-vinylene; 
or
5.
Poly thienylene-vinylene.
Note:
1C001.c. does not control materials in a liquid form.
Technical Note:
'Bulk electrical conductivity' and 'sheet (surface) resistivity' should be determined using ASTM D-257 or national equivalents.
1C002
Metal alloys, metal alloy powder and alloyed materials, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1C202.
Note:
1C002 does not control metal alloys, metal alloy powder and
alloyed materials, specially formulated for coating purposes.
Technical Notes:
1.
The metal alloys in 1C002 are those containing a higher percentage by weight of the stated metal than of any other element.
2.
'Stress-rupture life' should be measured in accordance with ASTM standard E-139 or national equivalents.
3.
'Low cycle fatigue life' should be measured in accordance with ASTM standard E-606 'Recommended Practice for Constant-Amplitude Low-Cycle Fatigue Testing' or national equivalents. Testing should be axial with an average stress ratio equal to 1 and a stress-concentration factor (Kt) equal to 1. The average stress ratio is defined as maximum stress minus minimum stress divided by maximum stress.
a.
Aluminides, as follows:
1.
Nickel aluminides containing a minimum of 15% by weight aluminium, a maximum of 38% by weight aluminium and at least one additional alloying element;
2.
Titanium aluminides containing 10% by weight or more aluminium and at least one additional alloying element;
b.
Metal alloys, as follows, made from the powder or particulate material specified in 1C002.c.:
1.
Nickel alloys having any of the following:
a.
A 'stress-rupture life' of 10 000 hours or longer at 923 K (650°C) at a stress of 676 MPa; 
or
b.
A 'low cycle fatigue life' of 10 000 cycles or more at 823 K (550°C) at a maximum stress of 1 095 MPa;
2.
Niobium alloys having any of the following:
a.
A 'stress-rupture life' of 10 000 hours or longer at 1 073 K (800°C) at a stress of 400 MPa; 
or
b.
A 'low cycle fatigue life' of 10 000 cycles or more at 973 K (700°C) at a maximum stress of 700 MPa;
3.
Titanium alloys having any of the following:
a.
A 'stress-rupture life' of 10 000 hours or longer at 723 K (450°C) at a stress of 200 MPa; 
or
b.
A 'low cycle fatigue life' of 10 000 cycles or more at 723 K (450°C) at a maximum stress of 400 MPa;
4.
Aluminium alloys having any of the following:
a.
A tensile strength of 240 MPa or more at 473 K (200°C); 
or
b.
A tensile strength of 415 MPa or more at 298 K (25°C);
5.
Magnesium alloys having all of the following:
a.
A tensile strength of 345 MPa or more; 
and
b.
A corrosion rate of less than 1 mm/year in 3% sodium chloride aqueous solution measured in accordance with ASTM standard G-31 or national equivalents;
c.
Metal alloy powder or particulate material, having all of the following:
1.
Made from any of the following composition systems:
Technical Note:
X in the following equals one or more alloying elements.
a.
Nickel alloys (Ni-Al-X, Ni-X-Al) qualified for turbine engine parts or components, i.e. with less than 3 non-metallic particles (introduced during the manufacturing process) larger than 100 μm in 10
9
 alloy particles;
b.
Niobium alloys (Nb-Al-X or Nb-X-Al, Nb-Si-X or Nb-X-Si, Nb-Ti-X or Nb-X-Ti);
c.
Titanium alloys (Ti-Al-X or Ti-X-Al);
d.
Aluminium alloys (Al-Mg-X or Al-X-Mg, Al-Zn-X or Al-X-Zn, Al-Fe-X or Al-X-Fe); 
or
e.
Magnesium alloys (Mg-Al-X or Mg-X-Al);
2.
Made in a controlled environment by any of the following processes:
a.
'Vacuum atomisation';
b.
'Gas atomisation';
c.
'Rotary atomisation';
d.
'Splat quenching';
e.
'Melt spinning' and 'comminution';
f.
'Melt extraction' and 'comminution';
g.
'Mechanical alloying'; 
or
h.
'Plasma atomisation'; 
and
3.
Capable of forming materials specified in 1C002.a. or 1C002.b.;
d.
Alloyed materials having all of the following:
1.
Made from any of the composition systems specified in 1C002.c.1.;
2.
In the form of uncomminuted flakes, ribbons or thin rods; 
and
3.
Produced in a controlled environment by any of the following:
a.
'Splat quenching';
b.
'Melt spinning'; 
or
c.
'Melt extraction'.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Vacuum atomisation' is a process to reduce a molten stream of metal to droplets of a diameter of 500 μm or less by the rapid evolution of a dissolved gas upon exposure to a vacuum.
2.
'Gas atomisation' is a process to reduce a molten stream of metal alloy to droplets of 500 μm diameter or less by a high pressure gas stream.
3.
'Rotary atomisation' is a process to reduce a stream or pool of molten metal to droplets to a diameter of 500 μm or less by centrifugal force.
4.
'Splat quenching' is a process to 'solidify rapidly' a molten metal stream impinging upon a chilled block, forming a flake-like product.
5.
'Melt spinning' is a process to 'solidify rapidly' a molten metal stream impinging upon a rotating chilled block, forming a flake, ribbon or rod-like product.
6.
'Comminution' is a process to reduce a material to particles by crushing or grinding.
7.
'Melt extraction' is a process to 'solidify rapidly' and extract a ribbon-like alloy product by the insertion of a short segment of a rotating chilled block into a bath of a molten metal alloy.
8.
'Mechanical alloying' is an alloying process resulting from the bonding, fracturing and rebonding of elemental and master alloy powders by mechanical impact. Non-metallic particles may be incorporated in the alloy by addition of the appropriate powders.
9.
'Plasma atomisation' is a process to reduce a molten stream or solid metal to droplets of 500 μm diameter or less, using plasma torches in an inert gas environment.
10.
'Solidify rapidly' is a process involving the solidification of molten material at cooling rates exceeding 1 000 K/sec.
1C003
Magnetic metals, of all types and of whatever form, having any of the following:
a.
Initial relative permeability of 120 000 or more and a thickness of 0,05 mm or less;
Technical Note:
Measurement of initial relative permeability must be performed on fully annealed materials.
b.
Magnetostrictive alloys having any of the following:
1.
A saturation magnetostriction of more than 5 x 10
-4
; 
or
2.
A magnetomechanical coupling factor (k) of more than 0,8; 
or
c.
Amorphous or 'nanocrystalline' alloy strips, having all of the following:
1.
A composition having a minimum of 75% by weight of iron, cobalt or nickel;
2.
A saturation magnetic induction (B
s
) of 1,6 T or more; 
and
3.
Any of the following:
a.
A strip thickness of 0,02 mm or less; 
or
b.
An electrical resistivity of 2 x 10
-4
 ohm cm or more.
Technical Note:
'Nanocrystalline' materials in 1C003.c. are those materials having a crystal grain size of 50 nm or less, as determined by X-ray diffraction.
1C004
Uranium titanium alloys or tungsten alloys with a "matrix" based on iron, nickel or copper, having all of the following:
a.
A density exceeding 17,5 g/cm
3
;
b.
An elastic limit exceeding 880 MPa;
c.
An ultimate tensile strength exceeding 1 270 MPa; 
and
d.
An elongation exceeding 8%.
1C005
"Superconductive""composite" conductors in lengths exceeding 100 m or with a mass exceeding 100 g, as follows:
a.
"Superconductive""composite" conductors containing one or more niobium-titanium 'filaments', having all of the following:
1.
Embedded in a "matrix" other than a copper or copper-based mixed "matrix"; 
and
2.
Having a cross-section area less than 0,28 x 10
-4
 mm
2
 (6 μm in diameter for circular 'filaments');
b.
"Superconductive""composite" conductors consisting of one or more "superconductive" 'filaments' other than niobium-titanium, having all of the following:
1.
A "critical temperature" at zero magnetic induction exceeding 9,85 K (-263,31°C); 
and
2.
Remaining in the "superconductive" state at a temperature of 4,2 K (-268,96°C) when exposed to a magnetic field oriented in any direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of conductor and corresponding to a magnetic induction of 12 T with critical current density exceeding 1 750 A/mm
2
 on overall cross-section of the conductor;
c.
"Superconductive""composite" conductors consisting of one or more "superconductive" 'filaments' which remain "superconductive" above 115 K (-158,16°C).
Technical Note:
For the purpose of 1C005 'filaments' may be in wire, cylinder, film, tape or ribbon form.
1C006
Fluids and lubricating materials, as follows:
a.
Not used;
b.
Lubricating materials containing, as their principal ingredients, any of the following:
1.
Phenylene or alkylphenylene ethers or thio-ethers, or their mixtures, containing more than two ether or thio-ether functions or mixtures thereof; 
or
2.
Fluorinated silicone fluids with a kinematic viscosity of less than 5 000 mm
2
/s (5 000 centistokes) measured at 298 K (25°C);
c.
Damping or flotation fluids having all of the following:
1.
Purity exceeding 99,8%;
2.
Containing less than 25 particles of 200 μm or larger in size per 100 ml; 
and
3.
Made from at least 85% of any of the following:
a.
Dibromotetrafluoroethane (CAS 25497-30-7, 124-73-2, 27336-23-8);
b.
Polychlorotrifluoroethylene (oily and waxy modifications only); 
or
c.
Polybromotrifluoroethylene;
d.
Fluorocarbon fluids designed for electronic cooling and having all of the following:
1.
Containing 85% by weight or more of any of the following, or mixtures thereof:
a.
Monomeric forms of perfluoropolyalkylether-triazines or perfluoroaliphatic-ethers;
b.
Perfluoroalkylamines;
c.
Perfluorocycloalkanes; 
or
d.
Perfluoroalkanes;
2.
Density at 298 K (25°C) of 1,5 g/ml or more;
3.
In a liquid state at 273 K (0°C); 
and
4.
Containing 60% or more by weight of fluorine.
Note:
1C006.d. does not control materials specified and packaged as medical products.
1C007
Ceramic powders, ceramic-"matrix""composite" materials and 'precursor materials', as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1C107.
a.
Ceramic powders of titanium diboride (TiB
2
) (CAS 12045-63-5) having total metallic impurities, excluding intentional additions, of less than 5 000 ppm, an average particle size equal to or less than 5 μm and no more than 10% of the particles larger than 10 μm;
b.
Not used;
c.
Ceramic-"matrix""composite" materials as follows:
1.
Ceramic-ceramic "composite" materials with a glass or oxide-"matrix" and reinforced with any of the following:
a.
Continuous fibres made from any of the following materials:
1.
Al
2
O
3
 (CAS 1344-28-1); 
or
2.
Si-C-N; 
or
Note:
1C007.c.1.a. does not control "composites" containing fibres with a tensile strength of less than 700 MPa at 1 273 K (1 000°C) or tensile creep resistance of more than 1% creep strain at 100 MPa load and 1 273 K (1 000°C) for 100 hours.
b.
Fibres being all of the following:
1.
Made from any of the following materials:
a.
Si-N;
b.
Si-C;
c.
Si-Al-O-N; 
or
d.
Si-O-N; 
and
2.
Having a "specific tensile strength" exceeding 12,7 x 10
3
m;
2.
Ceramic “matrix”"composite" materials, with a "matrix" formed of carbides or nitrides of silicon, zirconium or boron;
d.
Not used;
e.
'Precursor materials' specially designed for the "production" of materials specified in 1C007.c., as follows:
1.
Polydiorganosilanes;
2.
Polysilazanes;
3.
Polycarbosilazanes;
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 1C007, 'precursor materials' are special purpose polymeric or metallo-organic materials used for the "production" of silicon carbide, silicon nitride, or ceramics with silicon, carbon and nitrogen.
f.
Not used.
1C008
Non-fluorinated polymeric substances as follows:
a.
Imides, as follows:
1.
Bismaleimides;
2.
Aromatic polyamide-imides (PAI) having a 'glass transition temperature (T
g
)' exceeding 563 K (290°C);
3.
Aromatic polyimides having a 'glass transition temperature (T
g
)' exceeding 505 K (232°C);
4.
Aromatic polyetherimides having a 'glass transition temperature (T
g
)' exceeding 563 K (290°C);
Note:
1C008.a. controls substances in liquid or solid "fusible" form, including resin, powder, pellet, film, sheet, tape or ribbon.
N.B.
For non-"fusible" aromatic polyimides in film, sheet, tape or ribbon form, see 1A003.
b.
Not used;
c.
Not used;
d.
Polyarylene ketones;
e.
Polyarylene sulphides, where the arylene group is biphenylene, triphenylene or combinations thereof;
f.
Polybiphenylenethersulphone having a 'glass transition temperature (T
g
)' exceeding 563 K (290°C).
Technical Notes:
1.
The 'glass transition temperature (T
g
)' for 1C008.a.2. thermoplastic materials, 1C008.a.4. materials and 1C008.f. materials is determined using the method described in ISO 11357-2:1999 or national equivalents
2.
The 'glass transition temperature (T
g
)' for 1C008.a.2. thermosetting materials and 1C008.a.3. materials is determined using the 3-point bend method described in ASTM D 7028-07 or equivalent national standard. The test is to be performed using a dry test specimen which has attained a minimum of 90% degree of cure as specified by ASTM E 2160-04 or equivalent national standard, and was cured using the combination of standard- and post-cure processes that yield the highest T
g
.
1C009
Unprocessed fluorinated compounds as follows:
a.
Not used;
b.
Fluorinated polyimides containing 10% by weight or more of combined fluorine;
c.
Fluorinated phosphazene elastomers containing 30% by weight or more of combined fluorine.
1C010
"Fibrous or filamentary materials", as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1C210 AND 9C110.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purpose of calculating "specific tensile strength", "specific modulus" or specific weight of "fibrous or filamentary materials" in 1C010.a., 1C010.b., 1C010.c. or 1C010.e.1.b., the tensile strength and modulus should be determined by using Method A described in ISO 10618:2004 or national equivalents.
2.
Assessing the "specific tensile strength", "specific modulus" or specific weight of non-unidirectional "fibrous or filamentary materials" (e.g., fabrics, random mats or braids) in 1C010 is to be based on the mechanical properties of the constituent unidirectional monofilaments (e.g., monofilaments, yarns, rovings or tows) prior to processing into the non-unidirectional "fibrous or filamentary materials".
a.
Organic "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:
1.
"Specific modulus" exceeding 12,7 x 10
6
 m; 
and
2.
"Specific tensile strength" exceeding 23,5 x 10
4
 m;
Note:
1C010.a. does not control polyethylene.
b.
Carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:
1.
"Specific modulus" exceeding 14,65 x 10
6
 m; 
and
2.
"Specific tensile strength" exceeding 26,82 x 10
4
 m;
Note:
1C010.b. does not control:
a.
"Fibrous or filamentary materials", for the repair of "civil aircraft" structures or laminates, having all of the following:
1.
An area not exceeding 1 m
2
;
2.
A length not exceeding 2,5 m; 
and
3.
A width exceeding 15 mm.
b.
Mechanically chopped, milled or cut carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" 25,0 mm or less in length.
c.
Inorganic "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:
1.
Having any of the following:
a.
Composed of 50% or more by weight silicon dioxide and having a "specific modulus" exceeding 2,54 x 10
6
 m; 
or
b.
Not specified in 1C010.c.1.a. and having a "specific modulus" exceeding 5,6 x 10
6
 m; 
and
2.
Melting, softening, decomposition or sublimation point exceeding 1 922 K (1 649°C) in an inert environment;
Note:
1C010.c. does not control:
a.
Discontinuous, multiphase, polycrystalline alumina fibres in chopped fibre or random mat form, containing 3% by weight or more silica, with a "specific modulus" of less than 10 x 10
6
 m;
b.
Molybdenum and molybdenum alloy fibres;
c.
Boron fibres;
d.
Discontinuous ceramic fibres with a melting, softening, decomposition or sublimation point lower than 2 043 K (1 770°C) in an inert environment.
d.
"Fibrous or filamentary materials", having any of the following:
1.
Composed of any of the following:
a.
Polyetherimides specified in 1C008.a.; 
or
b.
Materials specified in 1C008.d. to 1C008.f.; 
or
2.
Composed of materials specified in 1C010.d.1.a. or 1C010.d.1.b. and 'commingled' with other fibres specified in 1C010.a., 1C010.b. or 1C010.c.;
Technical Note:
'Commingled' is filament to filament blending of thermoplastic fibres and reinforcement fibres in order to produce a fibre reinforcement "matrix" mix in total fibre form.
e.
Fully or partially resin-impregnated or pitch-impregnated "fibrous or filamentary materials" (prepregs), metal or carbon-coated "fibrous or filamentary materials" (preforms) or 'carbon fibre preforms', having all of the following:
1.
Having any of the following:
a.
Inorganic "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.c.; 
or
b.
Organic or carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:
1.
"Specific modulus" exceeding 10,15 x 10
6
 m; 
and
2.
"Specific tensile strength" exceeding 17,7 x 10
4
 m; 
and
2.
Having any of the following:
a.
Resin or pitch, specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.;
b.
'Dynamic Mechanical Analysis glass transition temperature (DMA T
g
)' equal to or exceeding 453 K (180
o
C) and having a phenolic resin; 
or
c.
'Dynamic Mechanical Analysis glass transition temperature (DMA T
g
)' equal to or exceeding 505 K (232
o
C) and having a resin or pitch, not specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b., and not being a phenolic resin;
Note 1:
Metal or carbon-coated "fibrous or filamentary materials" (preforms) or
'carbon fibre
preforms', not impregnated with resin or pitch, are specified by "fibrous or filamentary materials" in 1C010.a., 1C010.b. or 1C010.c.
Note 2:
1C010.e. does not control:
a.
Epoxy resin "matrix" impregnated carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" (prepregs) for the repair of "civil aircraft" structures or laminates, having all the following;
1.
An area not exceeding 1 m
2
;
2.
A length not exceeding 2,5 m; 
and
3.
A width exceeding 15 mm.
b.
Fully or partially resin-impregnated or pitch-impregnated mechanically chopped, milled or cut carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" 25,0 mm or less in length when using a resin or pitch other than those specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Carbon fibre preforms' are an ordered arrangement of uncoated or coated fibres intended to constitute a framework of a part before the "matrix" is introduced to form a "composite".
2.
The 'Dynamic Mechanical Analysis glass transition temperature (DMA T
g
)' for materials specified in 1C010.e. is determined using the method described in ASTM D 7028-07, or equivalent national standard, on a dry test specimen. In the case of thermoset materials, degree of cure of a dry test specimen shall be a minimum of 90% as defined by ASTM E 2160-04 or equivalent national standard.
1C011
Metals and compounds, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS AND 1C111.
a.
Metals in particle sizes of less than 60 μm whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground, manufactured from material consisting of 99% or more of zirconium, magnesium and alloys thereof;
Technical Note:
The natural content of hafnium in the zirconium (typically 2% to 7%) is counted with the zirconium.
Note:
The metals or alloys specified in 1C011.a.
are controlled whether or not the metals or alloys are encapsulated in aluminium, magnesium, zirconium or beryllium.
b.
Boron or boron alloys, with a particle size of 60 μm or less, as follows:
1.
Boron with a purity of 85% by weight or more;
2.
Boron alloys with a boron content of 85% by weight or more;
Note:
The metals or alloys specified in 1C011.b. are controlled whether or not the metals or alloys are encapsulated in aluminium, magnesium, zirconium or beryllium.
c.
Guanidine nitrate (CAS 506-93-4);
d.
Nitroguanidine (NQ) (CAS 556-88-7).
N.B.
See also Military Goods Controls for metal powders mixed with other substances to form a mixture formulated for military purposes.
1C012
Materials as follows:
Technical Note:
These materials are typically used for nuclear heat sources.
a.
Plutonium in any form with a plutonium isotopic assay of plutonium-238 of more than 50% by weight;
Note:
1C012.a. does not control:
a.
Shipments with a plutonium content of 1 g or less;
b.
Shipments of 3 "effective grammes" or less when contained in a sensing component in instruments.
b.
"Previously separated" neptunium-237 in any form.
Note:
1C012.b. does not control shipments with a neptunium-237 content of 1 g or less.
1C101
Materials and devices for reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures, other than those specified in 1C001, usable in 'missiles', "missile" subsystems or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a.
Note 1:
1C101 includes:
a.
Structural materials and coatings specially designed for reduced radar reflectivity;
b.
Coatings, including paints, specially designed for reduced or tailored reflectivity or emissivity in the microwave, infrared or ultraviolet regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Note 2:
1C101 does not include coatings when specially used for the thermal control of satellites.
Technical Note:
In 1C101 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
1C102
Resaturated pyrolised carbon-carbon materials designed for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
1C107
Graphite and ceramic materials, other than those specified in 1C007, as follows:
a.
Fine grain graphites with a bulk density of 1,72 g/cm
3
 or greater, measured at 288 K (15°C), and having a grain size of 100 μm or less, usable for rocket nozzles and re-entry vehicle nose tips, which can be machined to any of the following products:
1.
Cylinders having a diameter of 120 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater;
2.
Tubes having an inner diameter of 65 mm or greater and a wall thickness of 25 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater; 
or
3.
Blocks having a size of 120 mm x 120 mm x 50 mm or greater;
N.B.
See also 0C004.
b.
Pyrolytic or fibrous reinforced graphites, usable for rocket nozzles and reentry vehicle nose tips usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;
N.B.
See also 0C004.
c.
Ceramic composite materials (dielectric constant less than 6 at any frequency from 100 MHz to 100 GHz) for use in radomes usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;
d.
Bulk machinable silicon-carbide reinforced unfired ceramic, usable for nose tips usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;
e.
Reinforced silicon-carbide ceramic composites, usable for nose tips, reentry vehicles and nozzle flaps usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;
f.
Bulk machinable ceramic composite materials consisting of an 'Ultra High Temperature Ceramic (UHTC)' matrix with a melting point equal to or greater than 3 000°C and reinforced with fibres or filaments, usable for missile components (such as nose-tips, re-entry vehicles, leading edges, jet vanes, control surfaces or rocket motor throat inserts) in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or 'missiles'.
Note:
1C107.f. does not control 'Ultra High Temperature Ceramic (UHTC) ' materials in non-composite form.
Technical Note 1:
In 1C107.f. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
Technical Note 2:
'Ultra High Temperature Ceramics (UHTC)' includes:
1.
Titanium diboride (TiB
2
);
2.
Zirconium diboride (ZrB
2
);
3.
Niobium diboride (NbB
2
);
4.
Hafnium diboride (HfB
2
);
5.
Tantalum diboride (TaB
2
);
6.
Titanium carbide (TiC);
7.
Zirconium carbide (ZrC);
8.
Niobium carbide (NbC);
9.
Hafnium carbide (HfC);
10.
Tantalum carbide (TaC).
1C111
Propellants and constituent chemicals for propellants, other than those specified in 1C011, as follows:
a.
Propulsive substances:
1.
Spherical or spheroidal aluminium powder other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, in particle size of less than 200 μm and an aluminium content of 97% by weight or more, if at least 10% of the total weight is made up of particles of less than 63 μm, according to ISO 2591-1:1988 or national equivalents;
Technical Note:
A particle size of 63 μm (ISO R-565) corresponds to 250 mesh (Tyler) or 230 mesh (ASTM standard E-11).
2.
Metal powders, other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, as follows:
a.
Metal powders of zirconium, beryllium or magnesium, or alloys of these metals, if at least 90% of the total particles by particle volume or weight are made up of particles of less than 60 μm (determined by measurement techniques such as using a sieve, laser diffraction or optical scanning), whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground, consisting 97% by weight or more of any of the following:
1.
Zirconium;
2.
Beryllium; 
or
3.
Magnesium;
Technical Note:
The natural content of hafnium in the zirconium (typically 2% to 7%) is counted with the zirconium.
b.
Metal powders of either boron or boron alloys with a boron content of 85% or more by weight, if at least 90% of the total particles by particle volume or weight are made up of particles of less than 60 μm (determined by measurement techniques such as using a sieve, laser diffraction or optical scanning), whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground;
Note:
1C111a.2.a. and 1C111a.2.b. controls powder mixtures with a multimodal particle distribution (e.g. mixtures of different grain sizes) if one or more modes are controlled.
3.
Oxidiser substances usable in liquid propellant rocket engines as follows:
a.
Dinitrogen trioxide (CAS 10544-73-7);
b.
Nitrogen dioxide (CAS 10102-44-0)/dinitrogen tetroxide (CAS 10544-72-6);
c.
Dinitrogen pentoxide (CAS 10102-03-1);
d.
Mixed Oxides of Nitrogen (MON);
Technical Note:
Mixed Oxides of Nitrogen (MON) are solutions of Nitric Oxide (NO) in Dinitrogen Tetroxide/Nitrogen Dioxide (N
2
O
4
/NO
2
 ) that can be used in missile systems. There are a range of compositions that can be denoted as MONi or MONij, where i and j are integers representing the percentage of Nitric Oxide in the mixture (e.g., MON3 contains 3% Nitric Oxide, MON25 25% Nitric Oxide. An upper limit is MON40, 40% by weight).
e.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Inhibited Red Fuming Nitric Acid (IRFNA);
f.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS AND 1C238 FOR compounds composed of fluorine and one or more of other halogens, oxygen or nitrogen.
4.
Hydrazine derivatives as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
a.
Trimethylhydrazine (CAS 1741-01-1);
b.
Tetramethylhydrazine (CAS 6415-12-9);
c.
N,N-Diallylhydrazine (CAS 5164-11-4);
d.
Allylhydrazine (CAS 7422-78-8);
e.
Ethylene dihydrazine (CAS 6068-98-0);
f.
Monomethylhydrazine dinitrate;
g.
Unsymmetrical dimethylhydrazine nitrate;
h.
Hydrazinium azide (CAS 14546-44-2);
i.
1,1-Dimethylhydrazinium azide (CAS 227955-52-4) / 1,2-Dimethylhydrazinium azide (CAS 299177-50-7);
j.
Hydrazinium dinitrate (CAS 13464-98-7);
k.
Diimido oxalic acid dihydrazine (CAS 3457-37-2);
l.
2-hydroxyethylhydrazine nitrate (HEHN);
m.
See Military Goods Controls for Hydrazinium perchlorate;
n.
Hydrazinium diperchlorate (CAS 13812-39-0);
o.
Methylhydrazine nitrate (MHN) (CAS 29674-96-2);
p.
1,1-Diethylhydrazine nitrate (DEHN) / 1,2-Diethylhydrazine nitrate (DEHN) (CAS 363453-17-2);
q.
3,6-Dihydrazino tetrazine nitrate (1,4-dihydrazine nitrate) (DHTN);
5.
High energy density materials, other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, usable in 'missiles' or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a.;
a.
Mixed fuel that incorporate both solid and liquid fuels, such as boron slurry, having a mass-based energy density of 40 x 10
6
 J/kg or greater;
b.
Other high energy density fuels and fuel additives (e.g., cubane, ionic solutions, JP-10) having a volume-based energy density of 37,5 x 10
9
 J/m
3
 or greater, measured at 20°C and one atmosphere (101,325 kPa) pressure;
Note:
1C111.a.5.b. does not control fossil refined fuels and biofuels produced from vegetables, including fuels for engines certified for use in civil aviation, unless specially formulated for 'missiles' or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a..
Technical Note:
In 1C111.a.5. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
6.
Hydrazine replacement fuels as follows:
a.
2-Dimethylaminoethylazide (DMAZ) (CAS 86147-04-8);
b.
Polymeric substances:
1.
Carboxy-terminated polybutadiene (including carboxyl-terminated polybutadiene) (CTPB);
2.
Hydroxy-terminated polybutadiene (including hydroxyl-terminated polybutadiene) (HTPB) (CAS 69102-90-5), other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls;
3.
Polybutadiene-acrylic acid (PBAA);
4.
Polybutadiene-acrylic acid-acrylonitrile (PBAN) (CAS 25265-19-4 / CAS 68891-50-9);
5.
Polytetrahydrofuran polyethylene glycol (TPEG);
Technical Note:
Polytetrahydrofuran polyethylene glycol (TPEG) is a block co-polymer of poly 1,4-Butanediol (CAS 110-63-4) and polyethylene glycol (PEG)
(CAS 25322-68-3).
6.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR polyglycidyl nitrate (PGN or poly-GLYN) (CAS 27814-48- 8).
c.
Other propellant additives and agents:
1.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Carboranes, decaboranes, pentaboranes and derivatives thereof;
2.
Triethylene glycol dinitrate (TEGDN) (CAS 111-22-8);
3.
2-Nitrodiphenylamine (CAS 119-75-5);
4.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR trimethylolethane trinitrate (TMETN) (CAS 3032-55-1);
5.
Diethylene glycol dinitrate (DEGDN) (CAS 693-21-0);
6.
Ferrocene derivatives as follows:
a.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR catocene (CAS 37206-42-1);
b.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Ethyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-89-8);
c.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR n-Propyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-92-3)/iso-propyl ferrocene (CAS 12126-81-7);
d.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR n-butyl ferrocene (CAS 31904-29-7);
e.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Pentyl ferrocene (CAS 1274-00-6);
f.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dicyclopentyl ferrocene (CAS 125861-17-8);
g.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dicyclohexyl ferrocene;
h.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Diethyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-97-8);
i.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dipropyl ferrocene;
j.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dibutyl ferrocene (CAS 1274-08-4);
k.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dihexyl ferrocene (CAS 93894-59-8);
l.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Acetyl ferrocene (CAS 1271-55-2) / 1,1'-diacetyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-94-5);
m.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Ferrocene carboxylic acid (CAS 1271-42-7) / 1,1'-Ferrocenedicarboxylic acid (CAS 1293-87-4) ;
n.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR butacene (CAS 125856-62-4);
o.
Other ferrocene derivatives usable as rocket propellant burning rate modifiers, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls.
Note:
1C111.c.6.o. does not control ferrocene derivatives that contain a six carbon aromatic functional group attached to the ferrocene molecule.
7.
4,5-Diazidomethyl-2-methyl-1,2,3-triazole (iso-DAMTR), other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls.
d.
'Gel propellants', other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, specifically formulated for use in 'missiles'.
Technical Notes:
1.
In 1C111.d. a 'gel propellant' is a fuel or oxidiser formulation using a gellant such as silicates, kaolin (clay), carbon or any polymeric gellant.
2.
In 1C111.d. a 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
Note:
For propellants and constituent chemicals for propellants not specified in 1C111, see the Military Goods Controls.
1C116
Maraging steels, useable in 'missiles', having all of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1C216.
a.
Having an ultimate tensile strength, measured at 293 K (20°C), equal to or greater than:
1.
0,9 GPa in the solution annealed stage; 
or
2.
1,5 GPa in the precipitation hardened stage; 
and
b.
Any of the following forms:
1.
Sheet, plate or tubing with a wall or plate thickness equal to or less than 5,0 mm;
2.
Tubular forms with a wall thickness equal to or less than 50 mm and having an inner diameter equal to or greater than 270 mm.
Technical Note 1:
Maraging steels are iron alloy:
1.
Generally characterised by high nickel, very low carbon content and the use of substitutional elements or precipitates to produce strengthening and age-hardening of the alloy; 
and
2.
Subjected to heat treatment cycles to facilitate the martensitic transformation process (solution annealed stage) and subsequently age hardened (precipitation hardened stage).
Technical Note 2:
In 1C116 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
1C117
Materials for the fabrication of 'missiles' components as follows:
a.
Tungsten and alloys in particulate form with a tungsten content of 97% by weight or more and a particle size of 50 x 10
-6
 m (50 μm) or less;
b.
Molybdenum and alloys in particulate form with a molybdenum content of 97% by weight or more and a particle size of 50 x 10
-6
 m (50 μm) or less;
c.
Tungsten materials in solid form having all of the following:
1.
Any of the following material compositions:
a.
Tungsten and alloys containing 97% by weight or more of tungsten;
b.
Copper infiltrated tungsten containing 80% by weight or more of tungsten; 
or
c.
Silver infiltrated tungsten containing 80% by weight or more of tungsten; 
and
2.
Able to be machined to any of the following products:
a.
Cylinders having a diameter of 120 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater;
b.
Tubes having an inner diameter of 65 mm or greater and a wall thickness of 25 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater; 
or
c.
Blocks having a size of 120 mm by 120 mm by 50 mm or greater.
Technical Note:
In 1C117 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
1C118
Titanium-stabilised duplex stainless steel (Ti-DSS) having all of the following:
a.
Having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Containing 17,0 - 23,0% by weight of chromium and 4,5 - 7,0% by weight of nickel;
2.
Having a titanium content of greater than 0,10% by weight; 
and
3.
A ferritic-austenitic microstructure (also referred to as a two-phase microstructure) of which at least 10% by volume (according to ASTM E-1181-87 or national equivalents) is austenite; 
and
b.
Having any of the following forms:
1.
Ingots or bars having a size of 100 mm or more in each dimension;
2.
Sheets having a width of 600 mm or more and a thickness of 3 mm or less; 
or
3.
Tubes having an outer diameter of 600 mm or more and a wall thickness of 3 mm or less.
1C202
Alloys, other than those specified in 1C002.b.3. or .b.4., as follows:
a.
Aluminium alloys having both of the following characteristics:
1.
'Capable of' an ultimate tensile strength of 460 MPa or more at 293 K (20°C); 
and
2.
In the form of tubes or cylindrical solid forms (including forgings) with an outside diameter of more than 75 mm;
b.
Titanium alloys having both of the following characteristics:
1.
'Capable of' an ultimate tensile strength of 900 MPa or more at 293 K (20°C); 
and
2.
In the form of tubes or cylindrical solid forms (including forgings) with an outside diameter of more than 75 mm.
Technical Note:
The phrase alloys 'capable of' encompasses alloys before or after heat treatment.
1C210
'Fibrous or filamentary materials' or prepregs, other than those specified in 1C010.a., .b. or .e., as follows:
a.
Carbon or aramid 'fibrous or filamentary materials' having either of the following characteristics:
1.
A "specific modulus" of 12,7 x 10
6
 m or greater; 
or
2.
A "specific tensile strength" of 23,5 x 10
4
 m or greater;
Note:
1C210.a. does not control aramid 'fibrous or filamentary materials' having 0,25% by weight or more of an ester based fibre surface modifier;
b.
Glass 'fibrous or filamentary materials' having both of the following characteristics:
1.
A "specific modulus" of 3,18 x 10
6
 m or greater; 
and
2.
A "specific tensile strength" of 7,62 x 10
4
 m or greater;
c.
Thermoset resin impregnated continuous "yarns", "rovings", "tows" or "tapes" with a width of 15 mm or less (prepregs), made from carbon or glass 'fibrous or filamentary materials' specified in 1C210.a. or .b.
Technical Note:
The resin forms the matrix of the composite.
Note:
In 1C210, 'fibrous or filamentary materials' is restricted to continuous "monofilaments", "yarns", "rovings", "tows" or "tapes".
1C216
Maraging steel, other than that specified in 1C116, 'capable of' an ultimate tensile strength of 1 950 MPa or more, at 293 K (20
o
C).
Note:
1C216 does not control forms in which all linear dimensions are 75 mm or less.
Technical Note:
The phrase maraging steel 'capable of' encompasses maraging steel before or after heat treatment.
1C225
Boron enriched in the boron-10 (
10
B) isotope to greater than its natural isotopic abundance, as follows: elemental boron, compounds, mixtures containing boron, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.
Note:
In 1C225 mixtures containing boron include boron loaded materials.
Technical Note:
The natural isotopic abundance of boron-10 is approximately 18,5 weight per cent (20 atom per cent).
1C226
Tungsten, tungsten carbide, and alloys containing more than 90% tungsten by weight, other than that specified in 1C117, having both of the following characteristics:
a.
In forms with a hollow cylindrical symmetry (including cylinder segments) with an inside diameter between 100 mm and 300 mm; 
and
b.
A mass greater than 20 kg.
Note:
1C226 does not control manufactures specially designed as weights or gamma-ray collimators.
1C227
Calcium having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Containing less than 1 000 ppm by weight of metallic impurities other than magnesium; 
and
b.
Containing less than 10 ppm by weight of boron.
1C228
Magnesium having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Containing less than 200 ppm by weight of metallic impurities other than calcium; 
and
b.
Containing less than 10 ppm by weight of boron.
1C229
Bismuth having both of the following characteristics:
a.
A purity of 99,99% or greater by weight; 
and
b.
Containing less than 10 ppm by weight of silver.
1C230
Beryllium metal, alloys containing more than 50% beryllium by weight, beryllium compounds, manufactures thereof, and waste or scrap of any of the foregoing, other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls.
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
Note:
1C230 does not control the following:
a.
Metal windows for X
-
ray machines, or for bore
-
hole logging devices;
b.
Oxide shapes in fabricated or semi
-
fabricated forms specially designed for electronic component parts or as substrates for electronic circuits;
c.
Beryl (silicate of beryllium and aluminium) in the form of emeralds or aquamarines.
1C231
Hafnium metal, alloys containing more than 60% hafnium by weight, hafnium compounds containing more than 60% hafnium by weight, manufactures thereof, and waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.
1C232
Helium-3 (
3
He), mixtures containing helium-3, and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.
Note:
1C232 does not control a product or device containing less than 1 g of helium
-
3.
1C233
Lithium enriched in the lithium-6 (
6
Li) isotope to greater than its natural isotopic abundance, and products or devices containing enriched lithium, as follows: elemental lithium, alloys, compounds, mixtures containing lithium, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.
Note:
1C233 does not control thermoluminescent dosimeters.
Technical Note:
The natural isotopic abundance of lithium-6 is approximately 6,5 weight per cent (7,5 atom per cent).
1C234
Zirconium with a hafnium content of less than 1 part hafnium to 500 parts zirconium by weight, as follows: metal, alloys containing more than 50% zirconium by weight, compounds, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing, other than those specified in 0A001.f.
Note:
1C234 does not control zirconium in the form of foil having a thickness of 0,10 mm or less.
1C235
Tritium, tritium compounds, mixtures containing tritium in which the ratio of tritium to hydrogen atoms exceeds 1 part in 1 000, and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.
Note:
1C235 does not control a product or device containing less than 1,48 x 10
3
 GBq (40 Ci) of tritium.
1C236
'Radionuclides' appropriate for making neutron sources based on alpha-n reaction, other than those specified in 0C001 and 1C012.a., in the following forms:
a.
Elemental;
b.
Compounds having a total activity of 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg) or greater;
c.
Mixtures having a total activity of 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg) or greater;
d.
Products or devices containing any of the foregoing.
Note:
1C236 does not control a product or device containing less than 3,7 GBq (100 millicuries) of activity.
Technical Note:
In 1C236 'radionuclides' are any of the following:
– Actinium-225 (
225
Ac)
Actinium-227 (
227
Ac)
Californium-253 (
253
Cf)
Curium-240 (
240
Cm)
Curium-241 (
241
Cm)
Curium-242 (
242
Cm)
Curium-243 (
243
Cm)
Curium-244 (
244
Cm)
Einsteinium-253 (
253
Es)
Einsteinium-254 (
254
Es)
Gadolinium-148 (
148
Gd)
Plutonium-236 (
236
Pu)
Plutonium-238 (
238
Pu)
Polonium-208 (
208
Po)
Polonium-209 (
209
Po)
Polonium-210 (
210
Po)
Radium-223 (
223
Ra)
Thorium-227 (
227
Th)
Thorium-228 (
228
Th)
Uranium-230 (
230
U)
Uranium-232 (
232
U)
1C237
Radium-226 (
226
Ra), radium-226 alloys, radium-226 compounds, mixtures containing radium-226, manufactures thereof, and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.
Note:
1C237 does not control the following:
a.
Medical applicators;
b.
A product or device containing less than 0,37 GBq (10 millicuries) of radium
-
226.
1C238
Chlorine trifluoride (ClF
3
).
1C239
High explosives, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls, or substances or mixtures containing more than 2% by weight thereof, with a crystal density greater than 1,8 g/cm
3
 and having a detonation velocity greater than 8 000 m/s.
1C240
Nickel powder and porous nickel metal, other than those specified in 0C005, as follows:
a.
Nickel powder having both of the following characteristics:
1.
A nickel purity content of 99,0% or greater by weight; 
and
2.
A mean particle size of less than 10 μm measured by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B330 standard;
b.
Porous nickel metal produced from materials specified in 1C240.a.
Note:
1C240 does not control the following:
a.
Filamentary nickel powders;
b.
Single porous nickel sheets with an area of 1 000 cm
2
 per sheet or less.
Technical Note:
1C240.b. refers to porous metal formed by compacting and sintering the materials in 1C240.a. to form a metal material with fine pores interconnected throughout the structure.
1C241
Rhenium, and alloys containing 90% by weight or more rhenium; and alloys of rhenium and tungsten containing 90% by weight or more of any combination of rhenium and tungsten, other than those specified in 1C226, having both of the following characteristics:
a.
In forms with a hollow cylindrical symmetry (including cylinder segments) with an inside diameter between 100 and 300 mm; 
and
b.
A mass greater than 20 kg.
1C350
Chemicals, which may be used as precursors for toxic chemical agents, as follows, and "chemical mixtures" containing one or more thereof:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS AND 1C450.
1.
Thiodiglycol (CAS 111-48-8);
2.
Phosphorus oxychloride (CAS 10025-87-3);
3.
Dimethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 756-79-6);
4.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS for Methyl phosphonyl difluoride (CAS 676-99-3);
5.
Methyl phosphonyl dichloride (CAS 676-97-1);
6.
Dimethyl phosphite (DMP) (CAS 868-85-9);
7.
Phosphorus trichloride (CAS 7719-12-2);
8.
Trimethyl phosphite (TMP) (CAS 121-45-9);
9.
Thionyl chloride (CAS 7719-09-7);
10.
3-Hydroxy-1-methylpiperidine (CAS 3554-74-3);
11.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride (CAS 96-79-7);
12.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9);
13.
3-Quinuclidinol (CAS 1619-34-7);
14.
Potassium fluoride (CAS 7789-23-3);
15.
2-Chloroethanol (CAS 107-07-3);
16.
Dimethylamine (CAS 124-40-3);
17.
Diethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 78-38-6);
18.
Diethyl N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate (CAS 2404-03-7);
19.
Diethyl phosphite (CAS 762-04-9);
20.
Dimethylamine hydrochloride (CAS 506-59-2);
21.
Ethyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 1498-40-4);
22.
Ethyl phosphonyl dichloride (CAS 1066-50-8);
23.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS for Ethyl phosphonyl difluoride (CAS 753-98-0);
24.
Hydrogen fluoride (CAS 7664-39-3);
25.
Methyl benzilate (CAS 76-89-1);
26.
Methyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 676-83-5);
27.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-amino ethanol (CAS 96-80-0);
28.
Pinacolyl alcohol (CAS 464-07-3);
29.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS for O-Ethyl O-2-diisopropylaminoethyl methylphosphonite (QL) (CAS 57856-11-8);
30.
Triethyl phosphite (CAS 122-52-1);
31.
Arsenic trichloride (CAS 7784-34-1);
32.
Benzilic acid (CAS 76-93-7);
33.
Diethyl methylphosphonite (CAS 15715-41-0);
34.
Dimethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 6163-75-3);
35.
Ethyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 430-78-4);
36.
Methyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 753-59-3);
37.
3-Quinuclidone (CAS 3731-38-2);
38.
Phosphorus pentachloride (CAS 10026-13-8);
39.
Pinacolone (CAS 75-97-8);
40.
Potassium cyanide (CAS 151-50-8);
41.
Potassium bifluoride (CAS 7789-29-9);
42.
Ammonium hydrogen fluoride or ammonium bifluoride (CAS 1341-49-7);
43.
Sodium fluoride (CAS 7681-49-4);
44.
Sodium bifluoride (CAS 1333-83-1);
45.
Sodium cyanide (CAS 143-33-9);
46.
Triethanolamine (CAS 102-71-6);
47.
Phosphorus pentasulphide (CAS 1314-80-3);
48.
Di-isopropylamine (CAS 108-18-9);
49.
Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8);
50.
Sodium sulphide (CAS 1313-82-2);
51.
Sulphur monochloride (CAS 10025-67-9);
52.
Sulphur dichloride (CAS 10545-99-0);
53.
Triethanolamine hydrochloride (CAS 637-39-8);
54.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (CAS 4261-68-1);
55.
Methylphosphonic acid (CAS 993-13-5);
56.
Diethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 683-08-9);
57.
N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride (CAS 677-43-0);
58.
Triisopropyl phosphite (CAS 116-17-6);
59.
Ethyldiethanolamine (CAS 139-87-7);
60.
O,O-Diethyl phosphorothioate (CAS 2465-65-8);
61.
O,O-Diethyl phosphorodithioate (CAS 298-06-6);
62.
Sodium hexafluorosilicate (CAS 16893-85-9);
63.
Methylphosphonothioic dichloride (CAS 676-98-2);
64.
Diethylamine (CAS 109-89-7);
65.
N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5);
66.
Methyl dichlorophosphate (CAS 677-24-7);
67.
Ethyl dichlorophosphate (CAS 1498-51-7);
68.
Methyl difluorophosphate (CAS 22382-13-4);
69.
Ethyl difluorophosphate (CAS 460-52-6);
70.
Diethyl chlorophosphite (CAS 589-57-1);
71.
Methyl chlorofluorophosphate (CAS 754-01-8);
72.
Ethyl chlorofluorophosphate (CAS 762-77-6);
73.
N,N-Dimethylformamidine (CAS 44205-42-7);
74.
N,N-Diethylformamidine (CAS 90324-67-7);
75.
N,N-Dipropylformamidine (CAS 48044-20-8);
76.
N,N-Diisopropylformamidine (CAS 857522-08-8);
77.
N,N-Dimethylacetamidine (CAS 2909-14-0);
78.
N,N-Diethylacetamidine (CAS 14277-06-6);
79.
N,N-Dipropylacetamidine (CAS 1339586-99-0);
80.
N,N-Dimethylpropanamidine (CAS 56776-14-8);
81.
N,N-Diethylpropanamidine (CAS 84764-73-8);
82.
N,N-Dipropylpropanamidine (CAS 1341496-89-6);
83.
N,N-Dimethylbutanamidine (CAS 1340437-35-5);
84.
N,N-Diethylbutanamidine (CAS 53510-30-8);
85.
N,N-Dipropylbutanamidine (CAS 1342422-35-8);
86.
N,N-Diisopropylbutanamidine (CAS 1315467-17-4);
87.
N,N-Dimethylisobutanamidine (CAS 321881-25-8);
88.
N,N-Diethylisobutanamidine (CAS 1342789-47-2);
89.
N,N-Dipropylisobutanamidine (CAS 1342700-45-1).
Note 1:
For exports to "States not Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention", 1C350 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C350.1, .3, .5, .11, .12, .13, .17, .18, .21, .22, .26, .27, .28, .31, .32, .33, .34, .35, .36, .54, .55, .56, .57, .63 and .65 in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 10% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 2:
For exports to "States Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention", 1C350 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C350.1, .3, .5, .11, .12, .13, .17, .18, .21, .22, .26, .27, .28, .31, .32, .33, .34, .35, .36, .54, .55, .56, .57, .63 and .65 in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 3:
1C350 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C350.2, .6, .7, .8, .9, .10, .14, .15, .16, .19, .20, .24, .25, .30, .37, .38, .39, .40, .41, .42, .43, .44, .45, .46, .47, .48, .49, .50, .51, .52, .53, .58, .59, .60, .61, .62, .64, .66, .67, .68, .69, .70, .71, .72, .73, .74, .75, .76, .77, .78, .79, .80, .81, .82, .83, .84, .85, .86, .87, .88 and .89 in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 4:
1C350 does not control products identified as consumer goods packaged for retail sale for personal use or packaged for individual use.
1C351
Human and animal pathogens and "toxins", as follows:
a.
Viruses, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:
1.
African horse sickness virus;
2.
African swine fever virus;
3.
Andes virus;
4.
Avian influenza virus, which are:
a.
Uncharacterised; 
or
b.
Defined in Annex I(2) EC Directive 2005/94/EC (
OJ L 10 14.1.2006, p. 16
) as having high pathogenicity, as follows:
1.
Type A viruses with an IVPI (intravenous pathogenicity index) in 6 week old chickens of greater than 1,2; 
or
2.
Type A viruses of the subtypes H5 or H7 with genome sequences codified for multiple basic amino acids at the cleavage site of the haemagglutinin molecule similar to that observed for other HPAI viruses, indicating that the haemagglutinin molecule can be cleaved by a host ubiquitous protease;
5.
Bluetongue virus;
6.
Chapare virus;
7.
Chikungunya virus;
8.
Choclo virus;
9.
Crimean-Congo hemorrhagic fever virus;
10.
Not used;
11.
Dobrava-Belgrade virus;
12.
Eastern equine encephalitis virus;
13.
Ebolavirus: all members of the Ebolavirus genus;
14.
Foot-and-mouth disease virus;
15.
Goatpox virus;
16.
Guanarito virus;
17.
Hantaan virus;
18.
Hendra virus (Equine morbillivirus);
19.
Suid herpesvirus 1 (Pseudorabies virus; Aujeszky's disease);
20.
Classical swine fever virus (Hog cholera virus);
21.
Japanese encephalitis virus;
22.
Junin virus;
23.
Kyasanur Forest disease virus;
24.
Laguna Negra virus;
25.
Lassa virus;
26.
Louping ill virus;
27.
Lujo virus;
28.
Lumpy skin disease virus;
29.
Lymphocytic choriomeningitis virus;
30.
Machupo virus;
31.
Marburgvirus: all members of the Marburgvirus genus;
32.
Monkeypox virus;
33.
Murray Valley encephalitis virus;
34.
Newcastle disease virus;
35.
Nipah virus;
36.
Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus;
37.
Oropouche virus;
38.
Peste-des-petits-ruminants virus;
39.
Swine vesicular disease virus;
40.
Powassan virus;
41.
Rabies virus and all other members of the Lyssavirus genus;
42.
Rift Valley fever virus;
43.
Rinderpest virus;
44.
Rocio virus;
45.
Sabia virus;
46.
Seoul virus;
47.
Sheeppox virus;
48.
Sin Nombre virus;
49.
St. Louis encephalitis virus;
50.
Porcine Teschovirus;
51.
Tick-borne encephalitis virus (Far Eastern subtype);
52.
Variola virus;
53.
Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus;
54.
Vesicular stomatitis virus;
55.
Western equine encephalitis virus;
56.
Yellow fever virus;
57.
Severe acute respiratory syndrome-related coronavirus (SARS-related coronavirus);
58.
Reconstructed 1918 influenza virus;
59.
Middle East respiratory syndrome-related coronavirus (MERS-related coronavirus);
b.
Not used;
c.
Bacteria, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:
1.
Bacillus anthracis;
2.
Brucella abortus;
3.
Brucella melitensis;
4.
Brucella suis;
5.
Burkholderia mallei (Pseudomonas mallei);
6.
Burkholderia pseudomallei (Pseudomonas pseudomallei);
7.
Chlamydia psittaci (Chlamydophila psittaci);
8.
Clostridium argentinense (formerly known as Clostridium botulinum Type G), botulinum neurotoxin producing strains;
9.
Clostridium baratii, botulinum neurotoxin producing strains;
10.
Clostridium botulinum;
11.
Clostridium butyricum, botulinum neurotoxin producing strains;
12
Clostridium perfringens epsilon toxin producing types;
13.
Coxiella burnetii;
14.
Francisella tularensis;
15.
Mycoplasma capricolum subspecies capripneumoniae (strain F38);
16.
Mycoplasma mycoides subspecies mycoides SC (small colony);
17.
Rickettsia prowazekii;
18.
Salmonella enterica subspecies enterica serovar Typhi (Salmonella typhi);
19.
Shiga toxin producing Escherichia coli (STEC) of serogroups O26, O45, O103, O104, O111, O121, O145, O157, and other shiga toxin producing serogroups;
Note:
Shiga toxin producing Escherichia coli (STEC) includes inter alia enterohaemorrhagic E. coli (EHEC), verotoxin producing E. coli (VTEC) or verocytotoxin producing E. coli (VTEC).
20.
Shigella dysenteriae;
21.
Vibrio cholerae;
22.
Yersinia pestis;
d.
"Toxins", as follows, and "sub-unit of toxins" thereof:
1.
Botulinum toxins;
2.
Clostridium perfringens alpha, beta 1, beta 2, epsilon and iota toxins;
3.
Conotoxins;
4.
Ricin;
5.
Saxitoxin;
6.
Shiga toxins (shiga-like toxins, verotoxins and verocytotoxins)
7.
Staphylococcus aureus enterotoxins, hemolysin alpha toxin, and toxic shock syndrome toxin (formerly known as Staphylococcus enterotoxin F);
8.
Tetrodotoxin;
9.
Not used;
10.
Microcystins (Cyanginosins);
11.
Aflatoxins;
12.
Abrin;
13.
Cholera toxin;
14.
Diacetoxyscirpenol;
15.
T-2 toxin;
16.
HT-2 toxin;
17.
Modeccin;
18.
Volkensin;
19.
Viscumin (Viscum Album Lectin 1);
Note:
1C351.d. does not control botulinum toxins or conotoxins in product form meeting all of the following criteria:
1.
Are pharmaceutical formulations designed for human administration in the treatment of medical conditions;
2.
Are pre-packaged for distribution as medical products;
3.
Are authorised by a state authority to be marketed as medical products.
e.
Fungi, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:
1.
Coccidioides immitis;
2.
Coccidioides posadasii.
Note:
1C351 does not control "vaccines" or "immunotoxins".
1C353
'Genetic elements' and 'genetically-modified organisms', as follows:
a.
Any 'genetically-modified organism' which contains, or 'genetic element' that codes for, any of the following:
1.
Any gene or genes specific to any virus specified in 1C351.a. or 1C354.a.;
2.
Any gene or genes specific to any bacterium specified in 1C351.c. or 1C354.b. or fungus specified in 1C351.e. or 1C354.c., and which is any of the following:
a.
In itself or through its transcribed or translated products represents a significant hazard to human, animal or plant health; 
or
b.
Could 'endow or enhance pathogenicity'; 
or
3.
Any "toxins" specified in 1C351.d. or "sub-units of toxins" therefor;
b.
Not used.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Genetically-modified organisms' include organisms in which the nucleic acid sequences have been created or altered by deliberate molecular manipulation.
2.
'Genetic elements' include inter alia chromosomes, genomes, plasmids, transposons, vectors and inactivated organisms containing recoverable nucleic acid fragments, whether genetically modified or unmodified, or chemically synthesised in whole or in part. For the purposes of the genetic elements control, nucleic acids from an inactivated organism, virus, or sample are considered recoverable if the inactivation and preparation of the material is intended or known to facilitate isolation, purification, amplification, detection, or identification of nucleic acids.
3.
'Endow or enhance pathogenicity' is defined as when the insertion or integration of the nucleic acid sequence or sequences is/are likely to enable or increase a recipient organism’s ability to be used to deliberately cause disease or death. This might include alterations to, inter alia: virulence, transmissibility, stability, route of infection, host range, reproducibility, ability to evade or suppress host immunity, resistance to medical countermeasures, or detectability.
Note 1:
1C353 does not control nucleic acid sequences of shiga toxin producing Escherichia coli
of serogroups O26, O45, O103, O104, O111, O121, O145, O157, and other shiga toxin producing serogroups, other than those genetic elements coding for shiga toxin, or for its subunits.
Note 2:
1C353 does not control "vaccines".
1C354
Plant pathogens, as follows:
a.
Viruses, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:
1.
Andean potato latent virus (Potato Andean latent tymovirus);
2.
Potato spindle tuber viroid;
b.
Bacteria, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:
1.
Xanthomonas albilineans;
2.
Xanthomonas axonopodis pv. citri (Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri A) [Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri];
3.
Xanthomonas oryzae pv. oryzae (Pseudomonas campestris pv. oryzae);
4.
Clavibacter michiganensis subsp. sepedonicus (Corynebacterium michiganensis subsp. sepedonicum or Corynebacterium sepedonicum);
5.
Ralstonia solanacearum, race 3, biovar 2;
c.
Fungi, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:
1.
Colletotrichum kahawae (Colletotrichum coffeanum var. virulans);
2.
Cochliobolus miyabeanus (Helminthosporium oryzae);
3.
Microcyclus ulei (syn. Dothidella ulei);
4.
Puccinia graminis ssp. graminis var. graminis / Puccinia graminis ssp. graminis var. stakmanii (Puccinia graminis [syn. Puccinia graminis f. sp. tritici]);
5.
Puccinia striiformis (syn. Puccinia glumarum);
6.
Magnaporthe oryzae (Pyricularia oryzae);
7.
Peronosclerospora philippinensis (Peronosclerospora sacchari);
8.
Sclerophthora rayssiae var. zeae;
9.
Synchytrium endobioticium;
10.
Tilletia indica;
11.
Thecaphora solani.
1C450
Toxic chemicals and toxic chemical precursors, as follows, and "chemical mixtures" containing one or more thereof:
N.B.
SEE ALSO ENTRY 1C350, 1C351.d. AND MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
a.
Toxic chemicals, as follows:
1.
Amiton: O,O-Diethyl S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] phosphorothiolate (CAS 78-53-5) and corresponding alkylated or protonated salts;
2.
PFIB: 1,1,3,3,3-Pentafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-1-propene (CAS 382-21-8);
3.
SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR BZ: 3-Quinuclidinyl benzilate (CAS 6581-06-2);
4.
Phosgene: Carbonyl dichloride (CAS 75-44-5);
5.
Cyanogen chloride (CAS 506-77-4);
6.
Hydrogen cyanide (CAS 74-90-8);
7.
Chloropicrin: Trichloronitromethane (CAS 76-06-2);
Note 1:
For exports to "States not Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention", 1C450 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.a.1. and .a.2. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 1% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 2:
For exports to "States Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention", 1C450 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.a.1. and .a.2. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 3:
1C450 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.a.4., .a.5., .a.6. and .a.7. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 4:
1C450 does not control products identified as consumer goods packaged for retail sale for personal use or packaged for individual use.
b.
Toxic chemical precursors, as follows:
1.
Chemicals, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls or in 1C350, containing a phosphorus atom to which is bonded one methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso) group but not further carbon atoms;
Note:
1C450.b.1. does not control Fonofos: O
-
Ethyl S
-
phenyl ethylphosphonothiolothionate (CAS 944
-
22
-
9);
2.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] phosphoramidic dihalides, other than N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride;
N.B.
See 1C350.57. for N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride.
3.
Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] N,N-dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)]-phosphoramidates, other than Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate which is specified in 1C350;
4.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethyl-2-chlorides and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride or N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride which are specified in 1C350;
5.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-ols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0) and N,N-Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8) which are specified in 1C350;
Note:
1C450.b.5. does not control the following:
a.
N,N
-
Dimethylaminoethanol (CAS 108
-
01
-
0) and corresponding protonated salts;
b.
Protonated salts of N,N
-
Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100
-
37
-
8);
6.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-thiols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9) and N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5) which are specified in 1C350;
7.
See 1C350 for ethyldiethanolamine (CAS 139-87-7);
8.
Methyldiethanolamine (CAS 105-59-9).
Note 1:
For exports to "States not Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention", 1C450 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.b.1., .b.2., .b.3., .b.4., .b.5. and .b.6. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 10% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 2:
For exports to "States Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention", 1C450 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.b.1., .b.2., .b.3., .b.4., .b.5. and .b.6. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 3:
1C450 does not control "chemical mixtures" containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entry 1C450.b.8. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30% by the weight of the mixture.
Note 4:
1C450 does not control products identified as consumer goods packaged for retail sale for personal use or packaged for individual use.
1D   
Software
1D001
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment specified in 1B001 to 1B003.
1D002
"Software" for the "development" of organic "matrix", metal "matrix" or carbon "matrix" laminates or "composites".
1D003
"Software" specially designed or modified to enable equipment to perform the functions of equipment specified in 1A004.c. or 1A004.d.
1D101
"Software" specially designed or modified for the operation or maintenance of goods specified in 1B101, 1B102, 1B115, 1B117, 1B118 or 1B119.
1D103
"Software" specially designed for analysis of reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures.
1D201
"Software" specially designed for the "use" of goods specified in 1B201.
1E   
Technology
1E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of equipment or materials specified in 1A002 to 1A005, 1A006.b., 1A007, 1B or 1C.
1E002
Other "technology" as follows:
a.
"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of polybenzothiazoles or polybenzoxazoles;
b.
"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of fluoroelastomer compounds containing at least one vinylether monomer;
c.
"Technology" for the design or "production" of the following ceramic powders or non-"composite" ceramic materials:
1.
Ceramic powders having all of the following:
a.
Any of the following compositions:
1.
Single or complex oxides of zirconium and complex oxides of silicon or aluminium;
2.
Single nitrides of boron (cubic crystalline forms);
3.
Single or complex carbides of silicon or boron; 
or
4.
Single or complex nitrides of silicon;
b.
Any of the following total metallic impurities (excluding intentional additions):
1.
Less than 1 000 ppm for single oxides or carbides; 
or
2.
Less than 5 000 ppm for complex compounds or single nitrides; 
and
c.
Being any of the following:
1.
Zirconia (CAS 1314-23-4) with an average particle size equal to or less than 1 μm and no more than 10% of the particles larger than 5 μm; 
or
2.
Other ceramic powders with an average particle size equal to or less than 5 μm and no more than 10% of the particles larger than 10 μm;
2.
Non-"composite" ceramic materials composed of the materials specified in 1E002.c.1.;
Note:
1E002.c.2. does not control "technology" for abrasives.
d.
Not used;
e.
"Technology" for the installation, maintenance or repair of materials specified in 1C001;
f.
"Technology" for the repair of "composite" structures, laminates or materials specified in 1A002 or 1C007.c.;
Note:
1E002.f. does not control "technology" for the repair of "civil aircraft" structures using carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" and epoxy resins, contained in "aircraft" manufacturers' manuals.
g.
"Libraries" specially designed or modified to enable equipment to perform the functions of equipment specified in 1A004.c. or 1A004.d.
1E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of goods specified in 1A102, 1B001, 1B101, 1B102, 1B115 to 1B119, 1C001, 1C101, 1C107, 1C111 to 1C118, 1D101 or 1D103.
1E102
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of "software" specified in 1D001, 1D101 or 1D103.
1E103
"Technology" for the regulation of temperature, pressure or atmosphere in autoclaves or hydroclaves, when used for the "production" of "composites" or partially processed "composites".
1E104
"Technology" for the "production" of pyrolytically derived materials formed on a mould, mandrel or other substrate from precursor gases which decompose in the 1 573 K (1 300°C) to 3 173 K (2 900°C) temperature range at pressures of 130 Pa to 20 kPa.
Note:
1E104 includes "technology" for the composition of precursor gases, flow
-
rates and process control schedules and parameters.
1E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of goods specified in 1A002, 1A007, 1A202, 1A225 to 1A227, 1B201, 1B225 to 1B234, 1C002.b.3. or .b.4., 1C010.b., 1C202, 1C210, 1C216, 1C225 to 1C241 or 1D201.
1E202
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of goods specified in 1A007, 1A202 or 1A225 to 1A227.
1E203
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of "software" specified in 1D201.
PART IV –
Category 2
CATEGORY 2 - MATERIALS PROCESSING
2A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
N.B.
For quiet running bearings, see the Military Goods Controls.
2A001
Anti-friction bearings, bearing systems and components, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2A101.
a.
Ball bearings and solid roller bearings, having all tolerances specified by the manufacturer in accordance with ISO 492 Tolerance Class 4 or Class 2 (or national equivalents), or better, and having both 'rings' and 'rolling elements', made from monel or beryllium;
Note:
2A001.a. does not control tapered roller bearings.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Ring' - annular part of a radial rolling bearing incorporating one or more raceways (ISO 5593:1997).
2.
'Rolling element' - ball or roller which rolls between raceways (ISO 5593:1997).
b.
Not used;
c.
Active magnetic bearing systems using any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Materials with flux densities of 2,0 T or greater and yield strengths greater than 414 MPa;
2.
All-electromagnetic 3D homopolar bias designs for actuators; 
or
3.
High temperature (450 K (177°C) and above) position sensors.
2A101
Radial ball bearings, other than those specified in 2A001, having all tolerances specified in accordance with ISO 492 Tolerance Class 2 (or ANSI/ABMA Std 20 Tolerance Class ABEC-9 or other national equivalents), or better and having all of the following characteristics:
a.
An inner ring bore diameter between 12 mm and 50 mm;
b.
An outer ring outside diameter between 25 mm and 100 mm; 
and
c.
A width between 10 mm and 20 mm.
2A225
Crucibles made of materials resistant to liquid actinide metals, as follows:
a.
Crucibles having both of the following characteristics:
1.
A volume of between 150 cm
3
 and 8 000 cm
3
; 
and
2.
Made of or coated with any of the following materials, or combination of the following materials, having an overall impurity level of 2% or less by weight:
a.
Calcium fluoride (CaF
2
);
b.
Calcium zirconate (metazirconate) (CaZrO
3
);
c.
Cerium sulphide (Ce
2
S
3
);
d.
Erbium oxide (erbia) (Er
2
O
3
);
e.
Hafnium oxide (hafnia) (HfO
2
);
f.
Magnesium oxide (MgO);
g.
Nitrided niobium-titanium-tungsten alloy (approximately 50% Nb, 30% Ti, 20% W);
h.
Yttrium oxide (yttria) (Y
2
O
3
); 
or
i.
Zirconium oxide (zirconia) (ZrO
2
);
b.
Crucibles having both of the following characteristics:
1.
A volume of between 50 cm
3
 and 2 000 cm
3
; 
and
2.
Made of or lined with tantalum, having a purity of 99,9% or greater by weight;
c.
Crucibles having all of the following characteristics:
1.
A volume of between 50 cm
3
 and 2 000 cm
3
;
2.
Made of or lined with tantalum, having a purity of 98% or greater by weight; 
and
3.
Coated with tantalum carbide, nitride, boride, or any combination thereof.
2A226
Valves having all of the following characteristics:
a.
A 'nominal size' of 5 mm or greater;
b.
Having a bellows seal; 
and
c.
Wholly made of or lined with aluminium, aluminium alloy, nickel, or nickel alloy containing more than 60% nickel by weight.
Technical Note:
For valves with different inlet and outlet diameters, the 'nominal size' in 2A226 refers to the smallest diameter.
2B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
Technical Notes:
1.
Secondary parallel contouring axes, (e.g., the w-axis on horizontal boring mills or a secondary rotary axis the centre line of which is parallel to the primary rotary axis) are not counted in the total number of contouring axes. Rotary axes need not rotate over 360°. A rotary axis can be driven by a linear device
(e.g., a screw or a rack-and-pinion).
2.
For the purposes of 2B, the number of axes which can be co-ordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" is the number of axes along or around which, during processing of the workpiece, simultaneous and interrelated motions are performed between the workpiece and a tool. This does not include any additional axes along or around which other relative movement within the machine are performed such as:
a.
Wheel-dressing systems in grinding machines;
b.
Parallel rotary axes designed for mounting of separate workpieces;
c.
Co-linear rotary axes designed for manipulating the same workpiece by holding it in a chuck from different ends.
3.
Axis nomenclature shall be in accordance with International Standard ISO 841:2001, Industrial automation systems and integration - Numerical control of machines - Coordinate system and motion nomenclature.
4.
For the purposes of 2B001 to 2B009 a "tilting spindle" is counted as a rotary axis.
5.
'Stated "unidirectional positioning repeatability"' may be used for each machine tool model as an alternative to individual machine tests and is determined as follows:
a.
Select five machines of a model to be evaluated;
b.
Measure the linear axis repeatability (R↑,R↓) according to ISO 230-2:2014 and evaluate "unidirectional positioning repeatability" for each axis of each of the five machines;
c.
Determine the arithmetic mean value of the "unidirectional positioning repeatability"-values for each axis of all five machines together. These arithmetic mean values of "unidirectional positioning repeatability" (
) become the stated value of each axis for the model (
,
, …);
d.
Since the Category 2 list refers to each linear axis there will be as many 'stated "unidirectional positioning repeatability" values as there are linear axes;
e.
If any axis of a machine model not specified in 2B001.a. to 2B001.c. has a 'stated "unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less than the specified "unidirectional positioning repeatability" of each machine tool model plus 0,7 μm, the builder should be required to reaffirm the accuracy level once every eighteen months.
6.
For the purposes of 2B001.a. to 2B001.c., measurement uncertainty for the "unidirectional positioning repeatability" of machine tools, as defined in the International Standard ISO 230
-
2:2014 or national equivalents, shall not be considered.
7.
For the purpose of 2B001.a. to 2B001.c., the measurement of axes shall be made according to test procedures in 5.3.2. of ISO 230-2:2014. Tests for axes longer than 2 meters shall be made over 2 m segments. Axes longer than 4 m require multiple tests (e.g., two tests for axes longer than 4 m and up to 8 m, three tests for axes longer than 8 m and up to 12 m), each over 2 m segments and distributed in equal intervals over the axis length. Test segments are equally spaced along the full axis length, with any excess length equally divided at the beginning, in between, and at the end of the test segments. The smallest "unidirectional positioning repeatability"-value of all test segments is to be reported.
2B001
Machine tools and any combination thereof, for removing (or cutting) metals, ceramics or "composites", which, according to the manufacturer’s technical specification, can be equipped with electronic devices for "numerical control", as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B201.
Note 1:
2B001 does not control special purpose machine tools limited to the manufacture of gears. For such machines see 2B003.
Note 2:
2B001 does not control special purpose machine tools limited to the manufacture of any of the following:
a.
Crankshafts or camshafts;
b.
Tools or cutters;
c.
Extruder worms;
d.
Engraved or facetted jewellery parts; 
or
e.
Dental prostheses.
Note 3:
A machine tool having at least two of the three turning, milling or grinding capabilities (e.g., a turning machine with milling capability), must be evaluated against each applicable entry 2B001.a., b. or c.
Note 4:
A machine tool having an additive manufacturing capability in addition to a turning, milling or grinding capability must be evaluated against each applicable entry 2B001.a., .b. or .c.
N.B.
For optical finishing machines, see 2B002.
a.
Machine tools for turning having two or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following:
1.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1,0 m; 
or
2.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1,0 m;
Note 1:
2B001.a. does not control turning machines specially designed for producing contact lenses, having all of the following:
a.
Machine controller limited to using ophthalmic based software for part programming data input; 
and
b.
No vacuum chucking.
Note 2:
2B001.a. does not control bar machines (Swissturn), limited to machining only bar feed thru, if maximum bar diameter is equal to or less than 42 mm and there is no capability of mounting chucks. Machines may have drilling or milling capabilities for machining parts with diameters less than 42 mm.
b.
Machine tools for milling having any of the following:
1.
Three linear axes plus one rotary axis which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following:
a.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1,0 m; 
or
b.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1,0m;
2.
Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following;
a.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1,0 m;
b.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,4 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1 m and less than 4 m; 
or
c.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 6,0 μm (along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 4 m;
3.
A "unidirectional positioning repeatability" for jig boring machines, equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis; 
or
4.
Fly cutting machines having all of the following:
a.
Spindle "run-out" and "camming" less (better) than 0,0004 mm TIR; 
and
b.
Angular deviation of slide movement (yaw, pitch and roll) less (better) than 2 seconds of arc, TIR over 300 mm of travel;
c.
Machine tools for grinding having any of the following:
1.
Having all of the following:
a.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis; 
and
b.
Three or four axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; 
or
2.
Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following:
a.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1 m;
b.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,4 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1 m and less than 4 m; 
or
c.
"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 6,0 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 4 m.
Note:
2B001.c. does not control grinding machine as follows:
a.
Cylindrical external, internal, and external-internal grinding machines, having all of the following:
1.
Limited to cylindrical grinding; 
and
2.
Limited to a maximum workpiece capacity of 150 mm outside diameter or length.
b.
Machines designed specifically as jig grinders that do not have a z-axis or a w-axis, with a "unidirectional positioning repeatability" less (better) than 1,1 μm
c.
Surface grinders.
d.
Electrical discharge machines (EDM) of the non-wire type which have two or more rotary axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control";
e.
Machine tools for removing metals, ceramics or "composites", having all of the following:
1.
Removing material by means of any of the following:
a.
Water or other liquid jets, including those employing abrasive additives;
b.
Electron beam; 
or
c.
"Laser" beam; 
and
2.
At least two rotary axes having all of the following:
a.
Can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; 
and
b.
A positioning "accuracy" of less (better) than 0,003°;
f.
Deep-hole-drilling machines and turning machines modified for deep-hole-drilling, having a maximum depth-of-bore capability exceeding 5m.
2B002
Numerically controlled optical finishing machine tools equipped for selective material removal to produce non-spherical optical surfaces having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Finishing the form to less (better) than 1,0 μm;
b.
Finishing to a roughness less (better) than 100 nm rms.
c.
Four or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; 
and
d.
Using any of the following processes:
1.
Magnetorheological finishing ('MRF');
2.
Electrorheological finishing ('ERF');
3.
'Energetic particle beam finishing';
4.
'Inflatable membrane tool finishing'; 
or
5.
'Fluid jet finishing'.
Technical Notes:
For the purposes of 2B002:
1.
'MRF' is a material removal process using an abrasive magnetic fluid whose viscosity is controlled by a magnetic field.
2.
'ERF' is a removal process using an abrasive fluid whose viscosity is controlled by an electric field.
3.
'Energetic particle beam finishing' uses Reactive Atom Plasmas (RAP) or ion-beams to selectively remove material.
4.
'Inflatable membrane tool finishing' is a process that uses a pressurized membrane that deforms to contact the workpiece over a small area.
5.
'Fluid jet finishing' makes use of a fluid stream for material removal.
2B003
"Numerically controlled" machine tools, specially designed for the shaving, finishing, grinding or honing of hardened (Rc=40 or more) spur, helical and double-helical gears having all of the following:
a.
A pitch diameter exceeding 1 250 mm;
b.
A face width of 15% of pitch diameter or larger; 
and
c.
A finished quality of AGMA 14 or better (equivalent to ISO 1328 class 3).
2B004
Hot "isostatic presses" having all of the following, and specially designed components and accessories therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B104 and 2B204.
a.
A controlled thermal environment within the closed cavity and a chamber cavity with an inside diameter of 406 mm or more; 
and
b.
Having any of the following:
1.
A maximum working pressure exceeding 207 MPa;
2.
A controlled thermal environment exceeding 1 773 K (1 500°C); 
or
3.
A facility for hydrocarbon impregnation and removal of resultant gaseous degradation products.
Technical Note:
The inside chamber dimension is that of the chamber in which both the working temperature and the working pressure are achieved and does not include fixtures. That dimension will be the smaller of either the inside diameter of the pressure chamber or the inside diameter of the insulated furnace chamber, depending on which of the two chambers is located inside the other.
N.B.
For specially designed dies, moulds and tooling see 1B003, 9B009 and the Military Goods Controls.
2B005
Equipment specially designed for the deposition, processing and in-process control of inorganic overlays, coatings and surface modifications, as follows, for substrates specified in column 2, by processes shown in column 1 in the Table following 2E003.f., and specially designed automated handling, positioning, manipulation and control components therefor:
a.
Chemical vapour deposition (CVD) production equipment having all of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B105.
1.
A process modified for one of the following:
a.
Pulsating CVD;
b.
Controlled nucleation thermal deposition (CNTD); 
or
c.
Plasma enhanced or plasma assisted CVD; 
and
2.
Having any of the following:
a.
Incorporating high vacuum (equal to or less than 0,01 Pa) rotating seals; 
or
b.
Incorporating 
in situ
 coating thickness control;
b.
Ion implantation production equipment having beam currents of 5 mA or more;
c.
Electron beam physical vapour deposition (EB-PVD) production equipment incorporating power systems rated for over 80 kW and having any of the following:
1.
A liquid pool level "laser" control system which regulates precisely the ingots feed rate; 
or
2.
A computer controlled rate monitor operating on the principle of photo-luminescence of the ionised atoms in the evaporant stream to control the deposition rate of a coating containing two or more elements;
d.
Plasma spraying production equipment having any of the following:
1.
Operating at reduced pressure controlled atmosphere (equal to or less than 10 kPa measured above and within 300 mm of the gun nozzle exit) in a vacuum chamber capable of evacuation down to 0,01 Pa prior to the spraying process; 
or
2.
Incorporating 
in situ
 coating thickness control;
e.
Sputter deposition production equipment capable of current densities of 0,1 mA/mm
2
 or higher at a deposition rate of 15 μm/h or more;
f.
Cathodic arc deposition production equipment incorporating a grid of electromagnets for steering control of the arc spot on the cathode;
g.
Ion plating production equipment capable of the 
in situ
 measurement of any of the following:
1.
Coating thickness on the substrate and rate control; 
or
2.
Optical characteristics.
Note:
2B005 does not control chemical vapour deposition, cathodic arc, sputter deposition, ion plating or ion implantation equipment, specially designed for cutting or machining tools.
2B006
Dimensional inspection or measuring systems, equipment, position feedback units and "electronic assemblies", as follows:
a.
Computer controlled or "numerical controlled" Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMM), having a three dimensional (volumetric) maximum permissible error of length measurement (E
0,MPE
) at any point within the operating range of the machine (i.e., within the length of axes) equal to or less (better) than (1,7 + L/1 000) μm (L is the measured length in mm), according to ISO 10360-2:2009;
Technical Note:
The E
0,MPE
 of the most accurate configuration of the CMM specified by the manufacturer (e.g., best of the following: probe, stylus length, motion parameters, environment) and with "all compensations available" shall be compared to the 1,7+L/1 000 μm threshold.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B206.
b.
Linear displacement measuring instruments or systems, linear position feedback units, and "electronic assemblies", as follows:
Note:
Interferometer and optical-encoder measuring systems containing a "laser" are only specified in 2B006.b.3 and 2B206.c.
1.
'Non-contact type measuring systems' with a "resolution" equal to or less (better) than 0,2 μm within 0 to 0,2 mm of the 'measuring range';
Technical Notes:
For the purposes of 2B006.b.1.:
1.
'non-contact type measuring systems' are designed to measure the distance between the probe and measured object along a single vector, where the probe or measured object is in motion.
2.
'measuring range' means the distance between the minimum and maximum working distance.
2.
Linear position feedback units specially designed for machine tools and having an overall "accuracy" less (better) than (800 + (600 x L/1 000)) nm (L equals effective length in mm);
3.
Measuring systems having all of the following:
a.
Containing a "laser";
b.
A "resolution" over their full scale of 0,200 nm or less (better); 
and
c.
Capable of achieving a "measurement uncertainty" equal to or less (better) than (1,6 + L/2 000) nm (L is the measured length in mm) at any point within a measuring range, when compensated for the refractive index of air and measured over a period of 30 seconds at a temperature of 20±0,01°C; 
or
4.
"Electronic assemblies" specially designed to provide feedback capability in systems specified in 2B006.b.3.;
c.
Rotary position feedback units specially designed for machine tools or angular displacement measuring instruments, having an angular position "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 second of arc;
Note:
2B006.c. does not control optical instruments, such as autocollimators, using collimated light (e.g. "laser" light) to detect angular displacement of a mirror.
d.
Equipment for measuring surface roughness (including surface defects), by measuring optical scatter with a sensitivity of 0,5 nm or less (better).
Note:
2B006 includes machine tools, other than those specified in 2B001, that can be used as measuring machines if they meet or exceed the criteria specified for the measuring machine function.
2B007
"Robots" having any of the following characteristics and specially designed controllers and "end-effectors" therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B207.
a.
Not used;
b.
Specially designed to comply with national safety standards applicable to potentially explosive munitions environments;
Note:
2B007.b. does not control "robots" specially designed for paint-spraying booths.
c.
Specially designed or rated as radiation-hardened to withstand a total radiation dose greater than 5 x 10
3
 Gy (silicon) without operational degradation; 
or
Technical Note:
The term Gy (silicon) refers to the energy in Joules per kilogram absorbed by an unshielded silicon sample when exposed to ionising radiation.
d.
Specially designed to operate at altitudes exceeding 30 000 m.
2B008
'Compound rotary tables' and "tilting spindles", specially designed for machine tools, as follows:
a.
Not used;
b.
Not used;
c.
'Compound rotary tables' having all of the following:
1.
Designed for machine tools for turning, milling or grinding; 
and
2.
Two rotary axes designed to be coordinated simultaneously for “contouring control”;
Technical Note:
A 'compound rotary table' is a table allowing the workpiece to rotate and tilt about two non-parallel axes
d.
"Tilting spindles" having all of the following :
1.
Designed for machine tools for turning, milling or grinding; 
and
2.
Designed to be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control".
2B009
Spin-forming machines and flow-forming machines, which, according to the manufacturer's technical specification, can be equipped with "numerical control" units or a computer control and having all of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B109 AND 2B209.
a.
Three or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; 
and
b.
A roller force more than 60 kN.
Technical Note:
For the purpose of 2B009, machines combining the function of spin-forming and flow-forming are regarded as flow-forming machines.
2B104
"Isostatic presses", other than those specified in 2B004, having all of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B204.
a.
Maximum working pressure of 69 MPa or greater;
b.
Designed to achieve and maintain a controlled thermal environment of 873 K (600°C) or greater; 
and
c.
Possessing a chamber cavity with an inside diameter of 254 mm or greater.
2B105
Chemical vapour deposition (CVD) furnaces, other than those specified in 2B005.a., designed or modified for the densification of carbon-carbon composites.
2B109
Flow-forming machines, other than those specified in 2B009, usable in the "production" of propulsion components and equipment (e.g. motor cases and interstages) for "missiles", and specially designed components as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B209.
a.
Flow-forming machines having all of the following:
1.
Equipped with, or, according to the manufacturer's technical specification, are capable of being equipped with "numerical control" units or computer control; 
and
2.
More than two axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control".
b.
Specially designed components for flow-forming machines specified in 2B009 or 2B109.a.
Technical Note:
Machines combining the function of spin-forming and flow-forming are for the purpose of 2B109 regarded as flow-forming machines.
2B116
Vibration test systems, equipment and components therefor, as follows:
a.
Vibration test systems employing feedback or closed loop techniques and incorporating a digital controller, capable of vibrating a system at an acceleration equal to or greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz while imparting forces equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured 'bare table';
b.
Digital controllers, combined with specially designed vibration test software, with a 'real-time control bandwidth' greater than 5 kHz designed for use with vibration test systems specified in 2B116.a.;
Technical Note:
In 2B116.b., 'real
-
time control bandwidth' means the maximum rate at which a controller can execute complete cycles of sampling, processing data and transmitting control signals.
c.
Vibration thrusters (shaker units), with or without associated amplifiers, capable of imparting a force equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured 'bare table', and usable in vibration test systems specified in 2B116.a.;
d.
Test piece support structures and electronic units designed to combine multiple shaker units in a system capable of providing an effective combined force equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured 'bare table', and usable in vibration systems specified in 2B116.a.
Technical Note:
In 2B116, 'bare table' means a flat table, or surface, with no fixture or fittings.
2B117
Equipment and process controls, other than those specified in 2B004, 2B005.a., 2B104 or 2B105, designed or modified for densification and pyrolysis of structural composite rocket nozzles and reentry vehicle nose tips.
2B119
Balancing machines and related equipment, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B219.
a.
Balancing machines having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Not capable of balancing rotors/assemblies having a mass greater than 3 kg;
2.
Capable of balancing rotors/assemblies at speeds greater than 12 500 rpm;
3.
Capable of correcting unbalance in two planes or more; 
and
4.
Capable of balancing to a residual specific unbalance of 0,2 g mm per kg of rotor mass;
Note:
2B119.a. does not control balancing machines designed or modified for dental or other medical equipment.
b.
Indicator heads designed or modified for use with machines specified in 2B119.a.
Technical Note:
Indicator heads are sometimes known as balancing instrumentation.
2B120
Motion simulators or rate tables having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Two or more axes;
b.
Designed or modified to incorporate slip rings or integrated non-contact devices capable of transferring electrical power, signal information, or both; 
and
c.
Having any of the following characteristics:
1.
For any single axis having all of the following:
a.
Capable of rates of 400 degrees/s or more, or 30 degrees/s or less; 
and
b.
A rate resolution equal to or less than 6 degrees/s and an accuracy equal to or less than 0,6 degrees/s;
2.
Having a worst-case rate stability equal to or better (less) than plus or minus 0,05% averaged over 10 degrees or more; 
or
3.
A positioning "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 5 arc second.
Note 1:
2B120 does not control rotary tables designed or modified for machine tools or for medical equipment. For controls on machine tool rotary tables see 2B008.
Note 2:
Motion simulators or rate tables specified in 2B120 remain controlled whether or not slip rings or integrated non-contact devices are fitted at time of export.
2B121
Positioning tables (equipment capable of precise rotary positioning in any axes), other than those specified in 2B120, having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Two or more axes; 
and
b.
A positioning "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 5 arc second.
Note:
2B121 does not control rotary tables designed or modified for machine tools or for medical equipment. For controls on machine tool rotary tables see 2B008.
2B122
Centrifuges capable of imparting accelerations greater than 100 g and designed or modified to incorporate slip rings or integrated non-contact devices capable of transferring electrical power, signal information, or both.
Note:
Centrifuges specified in 2B122 remain controlled whether or not slip rings or integrated non-contact devices are fitted at time of export.
2B201
Machine tools and any combination thereof, other than those specified in 2B001, as follows, for removing or cutting metals, ceramics or "composites", which, according to the manufacturer’s technical specification, can be equipped with electronic devices for simultaneous "contouring control" in two or more axes:
Technical Note:
Stated positioning accuracy levels derived under the following procedures from measurements made according to ISO 230
-
2:1988
 
(
6
)
or national equivalents may be used for each machine tool model if provided to, and accepted by, national authorities instead of individual machine tests. Determination of stated positioning accuracy:
a.
Select five machines of a model to be evaluated;
b.
Measure the linear axis accuracies according to ISO 230
-
2:1988
1
;
c.
Determine the accuracy values (A) for each axis of each machine. The method of calculating the accuracy value is described in the ISO 230
-
2:1988
1
 standard;
d.
Determine the average accuracy value of each axis. This average value becomes the stated positioning accuracy of each axis for the model (Âx Ây...);
e.
Since item 2B201 refers to each linear axis, there will be as many stated positioning accuracy values as there are linear axes;
f.
If any axis of a machine tool not specified in 2B201.a., 2B201.b. or 2B201.c. has a stated positioning accuracy of 6 μm or better (less) for grinding machines, and 8 μm or better (less) for milling and turning machines, both according to ISO 230
-
2:1988
1
, then the builder should be required to reaffirm the accuracy level once every eighteen months.
a.
Machine tools for milling, having any of the following characteristics:
1.
Positioning accuracies with "all compensations available" equal to or less (better) than 6 μm according to ISO 230-2:1988
1
 or national equivalents along any linear axis;
2.
Two or more contouring rotary axes; 
or
3.
Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control";
Note:
2B201.a. does not control milling machines having the following characteristics:
a.
X-axis travel greater than 2 m; 
and
b.
Overall positioning accuracy on the x-axis more (worse) than 30 μm.
b.
Machine tools for grinding, having any of the following characteristics:
1.
Positioning accuracies with "all compensations available" equal to or less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230-2:1988
1
 or national equivalents along any linear axis;
2.
Two or more contouring rotary axes; 
or
3.
Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control";
Note:
2B201.b. does not control grinding machines as follows:
a.
Cylindrical external, internal, and external-internal grinding machines having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Limited to a maximum workpiece capacity of 150 mm outside diameter or length; 
and
2.
Axes limited to x, z and c;
b.
Jig grinders that do not have a z-axis or a w-axis with an overall positioning accuracy less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230
-
2:1988
1
 or national equivalents.
c.
Machine tools for turning, that have positioning accuracies with "all compensations available" better (less) than 6 μm according to ISO 230-2:1988
1
 along any linear axis (overall positioning) for machines capable of machining diameters greater than 35 mm;
Note:
2B201.c. does not control bar machines (Swissturn), limited to machining only bar feed thru, if maximum bar diameter is equal to or less than 42 mm and there is no capability of mounting chucks. Machines may have drilling and/or milling capabilities for machining parts with diameters less than 42 mm.
Note 1:
2B201 does not control special purpose machine tools limited to the manufacture of any of the following parts:
a.
Gears;
b.
Crankshafts or camshafts;
c.
Tools or cutters;
d.
Extruder worms.
Note 2:
A machine tool having at least two of the three turning, milling or grinding capabilities (e.g., a turning machine with milling capability), must be evaluated against each applicable entry 2B201.a., .b. or .c.
Note 3:
2B201.a.3. and 2B201.b.3. include machines based on a parallel linear kinematic design (e.g., hexapods) that have 5 or more axes none of which is a rotary axis.
2B204
"Isostatic presses", other than those specified in 2B004 or 2B104, and related equipment, as follows:
a.
"Isostatic presses" having both of the following characteristics:
1.
Capable of achieving a maximum working pressure of 69 MPa or greater; 
and
2.
A chamber cavity with an inside diameter in excess of 152 mm;
b.
Dies, moulds and controls, specially designed for "isostatic presses" specified in 2B204.a.
Technical Note:
In 2B204 the inside chamber dimension is that of the chamber in which both the working temperature and the working pressure are achieved and does not include fixtures. That dimension will be the smaller of either the inside diameter of the pressure chamber or the inside diameter of the insulated furnace chamber, depending on which of the two chambers is located inside the other.
2B206
Dimensional inspection machines, instruments or systems, other than those specified in 2B006, as follows:
a.
Computer controlled or numerically controlled coordinate measuring machines (CMM) having either of the following characteristics:
1.
Having only two axes and having a maximum permissible error of length measurement along any axis (one dimensional), identified as any combination of E
0x,MPE
, E
0y,MPE
, or E
0z,MPE
, equal to or less (better) than (1,25 + L/1 000) μm (where L is the measured length in mm) at any point within the operating range of the machine (i.e., within the length of the axis), according to ISO 10360-2:2009; 
or
2.
Three or more axes and having a three dimensional (volumetric) maximum permissible error of length measurement (E
0,MPE
) equal to or less (better) than (1,7 + L/800) μm (where L is the measured length in mm) at any point within the operating range of the machine (i.e., within the length of the axis), according to ISO 10360-2:2009;
Technical Note:
The E
0,MPE
 of the most accurate configuration of the CMM specified according to ISO 10360-2:2009 by the manufacturer (e.g., best of the following: probe, stylus, length, motion parameters, environments) and with all compensations available shall be compared to the (1,7 + L/800) μm threshold.
b.
Systems for simultaneous linear-angular inspection of hemishells, having both of the following characteristics:
1.
"Measurement uncertainty" along any linear axis equal to or less (better) than 3,5 μm per 5 mm; 
and
2.
"Angular position deviation" equal to or less than 0,02°;
c.
'Linear displacement' measuring systems having all of the following characteristics:
Technical Note:
For the purpose of 2B206.c. 'linear displacement' means the change of distance between the measuring probe and the measured object.
1.
Containing a "laser"; 
and
2.
Capable of maintaining, for at least 12 hours, at a temperature of ± 1 K (± 1°C); around a standard temperature and standard pressure, all of the following:
a.
A "resolution" over their full scale of 0,1 μm or better; 
and
b.
With a "measurement uncertainty" equal to or better (less) than (0,2 + L/2 000) μm (L is the measured length in mm).
Note:
2B206.c. does not control measuring interferometer systems, without closed or open loop feedback, containing a laser to measure slide movement errors of machine tools, dimensional inspection machines, or similar equipment.
d.
Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) systems having both of the following characteristics:
Technical Note:
For the purpose of 2B206.d. 'linear displacement' means the change of distance between the measuring probe and the measured object.
1.
Having any of the following:
a.
"Linearity" equal to or less (better) than 0,1% measured from 0 to the full operating range, for LVDTs with an operating range up to 5 mm; 
or
b.
"Linearity" equal to or less (better) than 0,1% measured from 0 to 5 mm for LVDTs with an operating range greater than 5 mm; 
and
2.
Drift equal to or better (less) than 0,1% per day at a standard ambient test room temperature ±1 K (± 1°C).
Note 1:
Machine tools that can be used as measuring machines are controlled if they meet or exceed the criteria specified for the machine tool function or the measuring machine function.
Note 2:
A machine specified in 2B206 is controlled if it exceeds the control threshold anywhere within its operating range.
Technical Notes:
All parameters of measurement values in 2B206 represent plus/minus i.e., not total band.
2B207
"Robots", "end-effectors" and control units, other than those specified in 2B007, as follows:
a.
"Robots" or "end-effectors" specially designed to comply with national safety standards applicable to handling high explosives (for example, meeting electrical code ratings for high explosives);
b.
Control units specially designed for any of the "robots" or "end-effectors" specified in 2B207.a.
2B209
Flow forming machines, spin forming machines capable of flow forming functions, other than those specified in 2B009 or 2B109, and mandrels, as follows:
a.
Machines having both of the following characteristics:
1.
Three or more rollers (active or guiding); 
and
2.
Which, according to the manufacturer's technical specification, can be equipped with "numerical control" units or a computer control;
b.
Rotor-forming mandrels designed to form cylindrical rotors of inside diameter between 75 mm and 400 mm.
Note:
2B209.a. includes machines which have only a single roller designed to deform metal plus two auxiliary rollers which support the mandrel, but do not participate directly in the deformation process.
2B219
Centrifugal multiplane balancing machines, fixed or portable, horizontal or vertical, as follows:
a.
Centrifugal balancing machines designed for balancing flexible rotors having a length of 600 mm or more and having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Swing or journal diameter greater than 75 mm;
2.
Mass capability of from 0,9 to 23 kg; 
and
3.
Capable of balancing speed of revolution greater than 5 000 r.p.m.;
b.
Centrifugal balancing machines designed for balancing hollow cylindrical rotor components and having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Journal diameter greater than 75 mm;
2.
Mass capability of from 0,9 to 23 kg;
3.
A minimum achievable residual specific unbalance equal to or less than 10 g mm/kg per plane; 
and
4.
Belt drive type.
2B225
Remote manipulators that can be used to provide remote actions in radiochemical separation operations or hot cells, having either of the following characteristics:
a.
A capability of penetrating 0,6 m or more of hot cell wall (through-the-wall operation); 
or
b.
A capability of bridging over the top of a hot cell wall with a thickness of 0,6 m or more (over-the-wall operation).
Technical Note:
Remote manipulators provide translation of human operator actions to a remote operating arm and terminal fixture. They may be of 'master/slave' type or operated by joystick or keypad.
2B226
Controlled atmosphere (vacuum or inert gas) induction furnaces, other than those specified in 9B001 and 3B001, and power supplies therefor, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 3B001 and 9B001.
a.
Furnaces having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Capable of operation above 1 123 K (850°C);
2.
Induction coils 600 mm or less in diameter; 
and
3.
Designed for power inputs of 5 kW or more;
Note:
2B226.a. does not control furnaces designed for the processing of semiconductor wafers.
b.
Power supplies, with a specified power output of 5 kW or more, specially designed for furnaces specified in 2B226.a.
2B227
Vacuum or other controlled atmosphere metallurgical melting and casting furnaces and related equipment as follows:
a.
Arc remelt furnaces, arc melt furnaces and arc melt and casting furnaces having both of the following characteristics:
1.
Consumable electrode capacities between 1 000 cm
3
 and 20 000 cm
3
; 
and
2.
Capable of operating with melting temperatures above 1 973 K (1 700
o
C);
b.
Electron beam melting furnaces, plasma atomisation furnaces and plasma melting furnaces, having both of the following characteristics:
1.
A power of 50 kW or greater; 
and
2.
Capable of operating with melting temperatures above 1 473 K (1 200
o
C);
c.
Computer control and monitoring systems specially configured for any of the furnaces specified in 2B227.a. or 2B227.b.;
d.
Plasma torches specially designed for furnaces specified in 2B227.b. having both of the following characteristics:
1.
Operating at a power greater than 50 kW; 
and
2.
Capable of operating above 1 473 K (1 200
o
C);
e.
Electron beam guns specially designed for the furnaces specified in 2B227.b. operating at a power greater than 50 kW.
2B228
Rotor fabrication or assembly equipment, rotor straightening equipment, bellows-forming mandrels and dies, as follows:
a.
Rotor assembly equipment for assembly of gas centrifuge rotor tube sections, baffles, and end caps;
Note:
2B228.a. includes precision mandrels, clamps, and shrink fit machines.
b.
Rotor straightening equipment for alignment of gas centrifuge rotor tube sections to a common axis;
Technical Note:
In 2B228.b. such equipment normally consists of precision measuring probes linked to a computer that subsequently controls the action of, for example, pneumatic rams used for aligning the rotor tube sections.
c.
Bellows-forming mandrels and dies for producing single-convolution bellows.
Technical Note:
In 2B228.c. the bellows have all of the following characteristics:
1.
Inside diameter between 75 mm and 400 mm;
2.
Length equal to or greater than 12,7 mm;
3.
Single convolution depth greater than 2 mm; 
and
4.
Made of high
-
strength aluminium alloys, maraging steel or high strength "fibrous or filamentary materials".
2B230
All types of 'pressure transducers' capable of measuring absolute pressures and having all of the following:
a.
Pressure sensing elements made of or protected by aluminium, aluminium alloy, aluminium oxide (alumina or sapphire), nickel, nickel alloy with more than 60% nickel by weight, or fully fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers;
b.
Seals, if any, essential for sealing the pressure sensing element, and in direct contact with the process medium, made of or protected by aluminium, aluminium alloy, aluminium oxide (alumina or sapphire), nickel, nickel alloy with more than 60% nickel by weight, or fully fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers; 
and
c.
Having either of the following characteristics:
1.
A full scale of less than 13 kPa and an 'accuracy' of better than 1% of full-scale; 
or
2.
A full scale of 13 kPa or greater and an 'accuracy' of better than 130 Pa when measured at 13 kPa.
Technical Notes:
1.
In 2B230 'pressure transducer' means a device that converts a pressure measurement into a signal.
2.
For the purposes of 2B230, 'accuracy' includes non
-
linearity, hysteresis and repeatability at ambient temperature.
2B231
Vacuum pumps having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Input throat size equal to or greater than 380 mm;
b.
Pumping speed equal to or greater than 15 m
3
/s; 
and
c.
Capable of producing an ultimate vacuum better than 13 mPa.
Technical Notes:
1.
The pumping speed is determined at the measurement point with nitrogen gas or air.
2.
The ultimate vacuum is determined at the input of the pump with the input of the pump blocked off.
2B232
High-velocity gun systems (propellant, gas, coil, electromagnetic, and electrothermal types, and other advanced systems) capable of accelerating projectiles to 1,5 km/s or greater.
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILTARY GOODS CONTROLS.
2B233
Bellows-sealed scroll-type compressors and bellows-sealed scroll-type vacuum pumps having all of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B350.i.
a.
Capable of an inlet volume flow rate of 50 m
3
/h or greater;
b.
Capable of a pressure ratio of 2:1 or greater; 
and
c.
Having all surfaces that come in contact with the process gas made from any of the following materials:
1.
Aluminium or aluminium alloy;
2.
Aluminium oxide;
3.
Stainless steel;
4.
Nickel or nickel alloy;
5.
Phosphor bronze; 
or
6.
Fluoropolymers.
2B350
Chemical manufacturing facilities, equipment and components, as follows:
a.
Reaction vessels or reactors, with or without agitators, with total internal (geometric) volume greater than 0,1 m
3
 (100 litres) and less than 20 m
3
 (20 000 litres), where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:
N.B.
For prefabricated repair assemblies, see 2B350.k.
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
3.
Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coating or glass lining);
4.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
5.
Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';
6.
Titanium or titanium 'alloys';
7.
Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; 
or
8.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';
b.
Agitators designed for use in reaction vessels or reactors specified in 2B350.a.; and impellers, blades or shafts designed for such agitators, where all surfaces of the agitator that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
3.
Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);
4.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
5.
Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';
6.
Titanium or titanium 'alloys';
7.
Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; 
or
8.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';
c.
Storage tanks, containers or receivers with a total internal (geometric) volume greater than 0,1 m
3
 (100 litres) where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:
N.B.
For prefabricated repair assemblies, see 2B350.k.
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
3.
Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);
4.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
5.
Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';
6.
Titanium or titanium 'alloys';
7.
Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; 
or
8.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';
d.
Heat exchangers or condensers with a heat transfer surface area greater than 0,15 m
2
, and less than 20 m
2
; and tubes, plates, coils or blocks (cores) designed for such heat exchangers or condensers, where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
3.
Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);
4.
Graphite or 'carbon graphite';
5.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
6.
Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';
7.
Titanium or titanium 'alloys';
8.
Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys';
9.
Silicon carbide;
10.
Titanium carbide; 
or
11.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';
e.
Distillation or absorption columns of internal diameter greater than 0,1 m; and liquid distributors, vapour distributors or liquid collectors designed for such distillation or absorption columns, where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
3.
Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);
4.
Graphite or 'carbon graphite';
5.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
6.
Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';
7.
Titanium or titanium 'alloys';
8.
Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; 
or
9.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';
f.
Remotely operated filling equipment in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight; 
or
2.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
g.
Valves and components, as follows:
1.
Valves, having both of the following:
a.
A 'nominal size' greater than DN 10 or NPS 3/8; 
and
b.
All surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being produced, processed, or contained are made from 'corrosion resistant materials';
2.
Valves, other than those specified in 2B350.g.1., having all of the following;
a.
A 'nominal size' equal to or greater than DN 25 or NPS 1 and equal to or less than DN 100 or NPS 4;
b.
Casings (valve bodies) or preformed casing liners;
c.
A closure element designed to be interchangeable; 
and
d.
All surfaces of the casing (valve body) or preformed case liner that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being produced, processed, or contained are made from 'corrosion resistant materials';
3.
Components, designed for valves specified in 2B350.g.1. or 2B350.g.2., in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being produced, processed, or contained are made from 'corrosion resistant materials', as follows:
a.
Casings (valve bodies);
b.
Preformed casing liners;
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 2B350.g., 'corrosion resistant materials' means any of the following materials:
a.
Nickel or alloys with more than 40% nickel by weight;
b.
Alloys with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
c.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
d.
Glass or glass-lined (including vitrified or enamelled coating);
e.
Tantalum or tantalum alloys;
f.
Titanium or titanium alloys;
g.
Zirconium or zirconium alloys;
h.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium alloys; 
or
i.
Ceramic materials as follows:
1.
Silicon carbide with a purity of 80% or more by weight;
2.
Aluminium oxide (alumina) with a purity of 99,9% or more by weight;
3.
Zirconium oxide (zirconia).
2.
The 'nominal size' is defined as the smaller of the inlet and outlet diameters.
3.
Nominal sizes (DN) of valves are in accordance with ISO 6708:1995. Nominal Pipe Sizes (NPS) are in accordance with ASME B36.10 or B36.19 or national equivalents.
h.
Multi-walled piping incorporating a leak detection port, in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
3.
Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);
4.
Graphite or 'carbon graphite';
5.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
6.
Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';
7.
Titanium or titanium 'alloys';
8.
Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; 
or
9.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';
i.
Multiple-seal and seal-less pumps, with manufacturer's specified maximum flow-rate greater than 0,6 m
3
/hour, or vacuum pumps with manufacturer's specified maximum flow-rate greater than 5 m
3
/hour (under standard temperature (273 K (0
o
C)) and pressure (101,3 kPa) conditions), other than those specified in 2B233; and casings (pump bodies), preformed casing liners, impellers, rotors or jet pump nozzles designed for such pumps, in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Ceramics;
3.
Ferrosilicon (high silicon iron alloys);
4.
Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);
5.
Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);
6.
Graphite or 'carbon graphite';
7.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
8.
Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';
9.
Titanium or titanium 'alloys';
10.
Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; 
or
11.
Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';
Technical Note:
In 2B350.i., the term seal refers to only those seals that come into direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed (or are designed to), and provide a sealing function where a rotary or reciprocating drive shaft passes through a pump body.
j.
Incinerators designed to destroy chemicals specified in entry 1C350, having specially designed waste supply systems, special handling facilities and an average combustion chamber temperature greater than 1 273 K (1 000
o
C), in which all surfaces in the waste supply system that come into direct contact with the waste products are made from or lined with any of the following materials:
1.
'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;
2.
Ceramics; 
or
3.
Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;
k.
Prefabricated repair assemblies having metallic surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed which are made from tantalum or tantalum alloys as follows, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Designed for mechanical attachment to glass-lined reaction vessels or reactors specified in 2B350.a.; 
or
2.
Designed for mechanical attachment to glass-lined storage tanks, containers or receivers specified in 2B350.c.
Note:
For the purposes of 2B350, the materials used for gaskets, packing, seals, screws, washers or other materials performing a sealing function do not determine the status of control, provided that such components are designed to be interchangeable.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Carbon graphite' is a composition consisting of amorphous carbon and graphite, in which the graphite content is eight percent or more by weight.
2.
For the listed materials in the above entries, the term 'alloy' when not accompanied by a specific elemental concentration is understood as identifying those alloys where the identified metal is present in a higher percentage by weight than any other element.
2B351
Toxic gas monitors and monitoring systems and their dedicated detecting components, other than those specified in 1A004, as follows; and detectors; sensor devices; and replaceable sensor cartridges therefor:
a.
Designed for continuous operation and usable for the detection of chemical warfare agents or chemicals specified in 1C350, at concentrations of less than 0,3 mg/m
3
; 
or
b.
Designed for the detection of cholinesterase-inhibiting activity.
2B352
Biological manufacturing and handling equipment, as follows:
a.
Containment facilities and related equipment as follows:
1.
Complete containment facilities that meet the criteria for P3 or P4 (BL3, BL4, L3, L4) containment as specified in the WHO Laboratory Biosafety Manual (3
rd
 edition, Geneva, 2004);
2.
Equipment designed for fixed installation in containment facilities specified in 2B352.a., as follows:
a.
Double-door pass-through decontamination autoclaves;
b.
Breathing air suit decontamination showers;
c.
Mechanical-seal or inflatable-seal walkthrough doors;
b.
Fermenters and components as follows:
1.
Fermenters capable of cultivation of "microorganisms" or of live cells for the production of viruses or toxins, without the propagation of aerosols, having a total internal volume of 20 litres or more;
2.
Components designed for fermenters specified in 2B352.b.1. as follows:
a.
Cultivation chambers designed to be sterilised or disinfected in situ;
b.
Cultivation chamber holding devices;
c.
Process control units capable of simultaneously monitoring and controlling two or more fermentation system parameters (e.g., temperature, pH, nutrients, agitation, dissolved oxygen, air flow, foam control);
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 2B352.b. fermenters include bioreactors, single-use (disposable) bioreactors, chemostats and continuous-flow systems.
2.
Cultivation chamber holding devices include single-use cultivation chambers with rigid walls.
c.
Centrifugal separators, capable of continuous separation without the propagation of aerosols, having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Flow rate exceeding 100 litres per hour;
2.
Components of polished stainless steel or titanium;
3.
One or more sealing joints within the steam containment area; 
and
4.
Capable of in-situ steam sterilisation in a closed state;
Technical Note:
Centrifugal separators include decanters.
d.
Cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment and components as follows:
1.
Cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment capable of separation of "microorganisms", viruses, toxins or cell cultures having all of the following characteristics:
a.
A total filtration area equal to or greater than 1 m
2
; 
and
b.
Having any of the following characteristics:
1.
Capable of being sterilised or disinfected in-situ; 
or
2.
Using disposable or single-use filtration components;
Technical Note:
In 2B352.d.1.b. sterilised denotes the elimination of all viable microbes from the equipment through the use of either physical (e.g. steam) or chemical agents. Disinfected denotes the destruction of potential microbial infectivity in the equipment through the use of chemical agents with a germicidal effect. Disinfection and sterilisation are distinct from sanitisation, the latter referring to cleaning procedures designed to lower the microbial content of equipment without necessarily achieving elimination of all microbial infectivity or viability.
Note:
2B352.d. does not control reverse osmosis and hemodialysis equipment, as specified by the manufacturer.
2.
Cross (tangential) flow filtration components (e.g. modules, elements, cassettes, cartridges, units or plates) with filtration area equal to or greater than 0,2 m
2
 for each component and designed for use in cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment specified in 2B352.d.;
e.
Steam, gas or vapour sterilisable freeze-drying equipment with a condenser capacity of 10 kg of ice or more in 24 hours and less than 1 000 kg of ice in 24 hours;
f.
Protective and containment equipment, as follows:
1.
Protective full or half suits, or hoods dependent upon a tethered external air supply and operating under positive pressure;
Note:
2B352.f.1. does not control suits designed to be worn with self-contained breathing apparatus.
2.
Biocontainment chambers, isolators, or biological safety cabinets having all of the following characteristics, for normal operation:
a.
Fully enclosed workspace where the operator is separated from the work by a physical barrier;
b.
Able to operate at negative pressure;
c.
Means to safely manipulate items in the workspace;
d.
Supply and exhaust air to and from the workspace is HEPA filtered;
Note 1:
2B352.f.2. includes Class III biosafety cabinets, as described in the latest edition of the WHO Laboratory Biosafety Manual or constructed in accordance with national standards, regulations or guidance.
Note 2:
2B352.f.2. does not include isolators specially designed for barrier nursing or transportation of infected patients.
g.
Aerosol inhalation equipment designed for aerosol challenge testing with "microorganisms", viruses or "toxins" as follows:
1.
Whole-body exposure chambers having a capacity of 1 m
3
 or more;
2.
Nose-only exposure apparatus utilising directed aerosol flow and having capacity for exposure of any of the following:
a.
12 or more rodents; 
or
b.
2 or more animals other than rodents;
3.
Closed animal restraint tubes designed for use with nose-only exposure apparatus utilising directed aerosol flow;
h.
Spray drying equipment capable of drying toxins or pathogenic "microorganisms" having all of the following:
1.
A water evaporation capacity of ≥ 0,4 kg/h and ≤ 400 kg/h;
2.
The ability to generate a typical mean product particle size of ≤10 μm with existing fittings or by minimal modification of the spray-dryer with atomisation nozzles enabling generation of the required particle size; 
and
3.
Capable of being sterilised or disinfected in situ;
i.
Nucleic acid assemblers and synthesisers, which are partly or entirely automated, and designed to generate continuous nucleic acids greater than 1,5 kilobases in length with error rates less than 5% in a single run.
2C   
Materials
None.
2D   
Software
2D001
"Software", other than that specified in 2D002, as follows:
a.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development" or "production" of equipment specified in 2A001 or 2B001
b.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of equipment specified in 2A001.c., 2B001 or 2B003 to 2B009.
Note:
2D001 does not control part programming "software" that generates "numerical control" codes for machining various parts.
2D002
"Software" for electronic devices, even when residing in an electronic device or system
,
 enabling such devices or systems to function as a "numerical control" unit, capable of co-ordinating simultaneously more than four axes for "contouring control".
Note 1:
2D002
does not control "software" specially designed or modified for the operation of items not specified in Category 2.
Note 2:
2D002 does not control "software" for items specified in 2B002. See 2D001 and 2D003 for "software" for items specified in 2B002.
Note 3:
2D002 does not control "software" that is exported with, and the minimum necessary for the operation of, items not specified in Category 2.
2D003
"Software", designed or modified for the operation of equipment specified in 2B002, that converts optical design, workpiece measurements and material removal functions into "numerical control" commands to achieve the desired workpiece form.
2D101
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of equipment specified in 2B104, 2B105, 2B109, 2B116, 2B117 or 2B119 to 2B122.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9D004.
2D201
"Software" specially designed for the "use" of equipment specified in 2B204, 2B206, 2B207, 2B209, 2B219 or 2B227.
2D202
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment specified in 2B201.
Note:
2D202 does not control part programming "software" that generates "numerical control" command codes but does not allow direct use of equipment for machining various parts.
2D351
"Software", other than that specified in 1D003, specially designed for "use" of equipment specified in 2B351.
2E   
Technology
2E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment or "software" specified in 2A, 2B or 2D.
Note:
2E001 includes "technology" for the integration of probe systems into coordinate measurement machines specified in 2B006.a.
2E002
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment specified in 2A or 2B.
2E003
Other "technology", as follows:
a.
Not used;
b.
"Technology" for metal-working manufacturing processes, as follows:
1.
"Technology" for the design of tools, dies or fixtures specially designed for any of the following processes:
a.
"Superplastic forming";
b.
"Diffusion bonding"; 
or
c.
'Direct-acting hydraulic pressing';
2.
Technical data consisting of process methods or parameters as listed below used to control:
a.
"Superplastic forming" of aluminium alloys, titanium alloys or "superalloys":
1.
Surface preparation;
2.
Strain rate;
3.
Temperature;
4.
Pressure;
b.
"Diffusion bonding" of "superalloys" or titanium alloys:
1.
Surface preparation;
2.
Temperature;
3.
Pressure;
c.
'Direct-acting hydraulic pressing' of aluminium alloys or titanium alloys:
1.
Pressure;
2.
Cycle time;
d.
'Hot isostatic densification' of titanium alloys, aluminium alloys or "superalloys":
1.
Temperature;
2.
Pressure;
3.
Cycle time;
Technical Notes:
1.
'Direct-acting hydraulic pressing' is a deformation process which uses a fluid-filled flexible bladder in direct contact with the workpiece.
2.
'Hot isostatic densification' is a process of pressurising a casting at temperatures exceeding 375 K (102°C) in a closed cavity through various media (gas, liquid, solid particles, etc.) to create equal force in all directions to reduce or eliminate internal voids in the casting.
c.
"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of hydraulic stretch-forming machines and dies therefor, for the manufacture of airframe structures;
d.
Not used;
e.
"Technology" for the "development" of integration "software" for incorporation of expert systems for advanced decision support of shop floor operations into "numerical control" units;
f.
"Technology" for the application of inorganic overlay coatings or inorganic surface modification coatings (specified in column 3 of the following table) to non-electronic substrates (specified in column 2 of the following table), by processes specified in column 1 of the following table and defined in the Technical Note.
Note:
The table and Technical Note appear after entry 2E301.
N.B.
This table should be read to specify the "technology" for a particular Coating Process only when the Resultant Coating in column 3 is in a paragraph directly across from the relevant Substrate under column 2. For example, Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) coating process technical data are included for the application of silicides to carbon-carbon, ceramic and metal "matrix""composites" substrates, but are not included for the application of silicides to 'cemented tungsten carbide' (16), 'silicon carbide' (18) substrates. In the second case, the resultant coating is not listed in the paragraph under column 3 directly across from the paragraph under column 2 listing 'cemented tungsten carbide' (16), 'silicon carbide' (18).
2E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment or "software" specified in 2B004, 2B009, 2B104, 2B109, 2B116, 2B119 to 2B122 or 2D101.
2E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment or "software" specified in 2A225, 2A226, 2B001, 2B006, 2B007.b., 2B007.c., 2B008, 2B009, 2B201, 2B204, 2B206, 2B207, 2B209, 2B225 to 2B233, 2D201 or 2D202.
2E301
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of goods specified in 2B350 to 2B352.
TABLE - DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES
1.
Coating Process
(
7
)
2.
Substrate
3.
Resultant Coating
A.
Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD)
"Superalloys"
Aluminides for internal passages
Ceramics (19) and Low expansion glasses (14)
Silicides
Carbides
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond
Diamond-like carbon (17)
Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"
Silicides
Carbides
Refractory metals
Mixtures thereof (4)
Dielectric layers (15)
Aluminides
Alloyed aluminides (2)
Boron nitride
Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18)
Carbides
Tungsten
Mixtures thereof (4)
Dielectric layers (15)
Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Beryllium and Beryllium alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond
Diamond-like carbon (17)
Sensor window materials (9)
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond
Diamond-like carbon (17)
B.
Thermal-Evaporation Physical Vapour Deposition (TE-PVD)
B.1.
Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): Electron-Beam (EB-PVD)
"Superalloys"
Alloyed silicides
Alloyed aluminides (2)
MCrAlX (5)
Modified zirconia (12)
Silicides
Aluminides
Mixtures thereof (4)
Ceramics (19) and Low expansion glasses (14)
Dielectric layers (15)
Corrosion resistant steel (7)
MCrAlX (5)
Modified zirconia (12)
Mixtures thereof (4)
Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"
Silicides
Carbides
Refractory metals
Mixtures thereof (4)
Dielectric layers (15)
Boron nitride
Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18)
Carbides
Tungsten
Mixtures thereof (4)
Dielectric layers (15)
Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Beryllium and Beryllium alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Borides
Beryllium
Sensor window materials (9)
Dielectric layers (15)
Titanium alloys (13)
Borides
Nitrides
B.2.
Ion assisted resistive heating Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD) (Ion Plating)
Ceramics (19) and Low-expansion glasses
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond-like carbon (17)
Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"
Dielectric layers (15)
Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide
Dielectric layers (15)
Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Beryllium and Beryllium alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Sensor window materials (9)
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond-like carbon (17)
B.3.
Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): "Laser" Vaporization
Ceramics (19) and Low expansion glasses (14)
Silicides
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond-like carbon (17)
Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"
Dielectric layers (15)
Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide
Dielectric layers (15)
Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Beryllium and Beryllium alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Sensor window materials (9)
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond-like carbon (17)
B.4.
Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): Cathodic Arc Discharge
"Superalloys"
Alloyed silicides
Alloyed aluminides (2)
MCrAlX (5)
Polymers (11) and Organic "matrix""composites"
Borides
Carbides
Nitrides
Diamond-like carbon (17)
C.
Pack cementation (see A above for out-of-pack cementation) (10)
Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"
Silicides
Carbides
Mixtures thereof (4)
Titanium alloys (13)
Silicides
Aluminides
Alloyed aluminides (2)
Refractory metals and alloys (8)
Silicides
Oxides
D.
Plasma spraying
"Superalloys"
MCrAlX (5)
Modified zirconia (12)
Mixtures thereof (4)
Abradable Nickel-Graphite
Abradable materials containing Ni-Cr-Al
Abradable Al-Si-Polyester
Alloyed aluminides (2)
Aluminium alloys (6)
MCrAlX (5)
Modified zirconia (12)
Silicides
Mixtures thereof (4)
Refractory metals and alloys (8)
Aluminides
Silicides
Carbides
Corrosion resistant steel (7)
MCrAlX (5)
Modified zirconia (12)
Mixtures thereof (4)
Titanium alloys (13)
Carbides
Aluminides
Silicides
Alloyed aluminides (2)
Abradable Nickel-Graphite
Abradable materials containing Ni-Cr-Al
Abradable Al-Si-Polyester
E.
Slurry Deposition
Refractory metals and alloys (8)
Fused silicides
Fused aluminides except for resistance heating elements
Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"
Silicides
Carbides
Mixtures thereof (4)
F.
Sputter Deposition
"Superalloys"
Alloyed silicides
Alloyed aluminides (2)
Noble metal modified aluminides (3)
MCrAlX (5)
Modified zirconia (12)
Platinum
Mixtures thereof (4)
Ceramics and Low- expansion glasses (14)
Silicides
Platinum
Mixtures thereof (4)
Dielectic layers (15)
Diamond-like carbon (17)
Titanium alloys (13)
Borides
Nitrides
Oxides
Silicides
Aluminides
Alloyed aluminides (2)
Carbides
Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"
Silicides
Carbides
Refractory metals
Mixtures thereof (4)
Dielectric layers (15)
Boron nitride
Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18)
Carbides
Tungsten
Mixtures thereof (4)
Dielectric layers (15)
Boron nitride
Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys
Dielectric layers (15)
Beryllium and Beryllium alloys
Borides
Dielectric layers (15)
Beryllium
Sensor window materials (9)
Dielectric layers (15)
Diamond-like carbon (17)
Refractory metals and alloys (8)
Aluminides
Silicides
Oxides
Carbides
G.
Ion Implantation
High temperature bearing steels
Additions of Chromium Tantalum or Niobium (Columbium)
Titanium alloys (13)
Borides
Nitrides
Beryllium and Beryllium alloys
Borides
Cemented tungsten carbide (16)
Carbides
Nitrides
TABLE - DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES - NOTES
1.
The term 'coating process' includes coating repair and refurbishing as well as original coating.
2.
The term 'alloyed aluminide coating' includes single or multiple-step coatings in which an element or elements are deposited prior to or during application of the aluminide coating, even if these elements are deposited by another coating process. It does not, however, include the multiple use of single-step pack cementation processes to achieve alloyed aluminides.
3.
The term 'noble metal modified aluminide' coating includes multiple-step coatings in which the noble metal or noble metals are laid down by some other coating process prior to application of the aluminide coating.
4.
The term 'mixtures thereof' includes infiltrated material, graded compositions, co-deposits and multilayer deposits and are obtained by one or more of the coating processes specified in the Table.
5.
'MCrAlX' refers to a coating alloy where M equals cobalt, iron, nickel or combinations thereof and X equals hafnium, yttrium, silicon, tantalum in any amount or other intentional additions over 0,01% by weight in various proportions and combinations, except:
a.
CoCrAlY coatings which contain less than 22% by weight of chromium, less than 7% by weight of aluminium and less than 2% by weight of yttrium;
b.
CoCrAlY coatings which contain 22 to 24% by weight of chromium, 10 to 12% by weight of aluminium and 0,5 to 0,7% by weight of yttrium; 
or
c.
NiCrAlY coatings which contain 21 to 23% by weight of chromium, 10 to 12% by weight of aluminium and 0,9 to 1,1% by weight of yttrium.
6.
The term 'aluminium alloys' refers to alloys having an ultimate tensile strength of 190 MPa or more measured at 293 K (20°C).
7.
The term 'corrosion resistant steel' refers to AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) 300 series or equivalent national standard steels.
8.
'Refractory metals and alloys' include the following metals and their alloys: niobium (columbium), molybdenum, tungsten and tantalum.
9.
'Sensor window materials', as follows: alumina, silicon, germanium, zinc sulphide, zinc selenide, gallium arsenide, diamond, gallium phosphide, sapphire and the following metal halides: sensor window materials of more than 40 mm diameter for zirconium fluoride and hafnium fluoride.
10.
Category 2 does not include "technology" for single-step pack cementation of solid airfoils.
11.
'Polymers', as follows: polyimide, polyester, polysulphide, polycarbonates and polyurethanes.
12.
'Modified zirconia' refers to additions of other metal oxides (e.g., calcia, magnesia, yttria, hafnia, rare earth oxides) to zirconia in order to stabilise certain crystallographic phases and phase compositions. Thermal barrier coatings made of zirconia, modified with calcia or magnesia by mixing or fusion, are not controlled.
13.
'Titanium alloys' refers only to aerospace alloys having an ultimate tensile strength of 900 MPa or more measured at 293 K (20°C).
14.
'Low-expansion glasses' refers to glasses which have a coefficient of thermal expansion of 1 x 10-7 K-1 or less measured at 293 K (20°C).
15.
'Dielectric layers' are coatings constructed of multi-layers of insulator materials in which the interference properties of a design composed of materials of various refractive indices are used to reflect, transmit or absorb various wavelength bands. Dielectric layers refers to more than four dielectric layers or dielectric/metal "composite" layers.
16.
'Cemented tungsten carbide' does not include cutting and forming tool materials consisting of tungsten carbide/(cobalt, nickel), titanium carbide/(cobalt, nickel), chromium carbide/nickel-chromium and chromium carbide/nickel.
17.
"Technology" for depositing diamond-like carbon on any of the following is not controlled:
magnetic disk drives and heads, equipment for the manufacture of disposables, valves for faucets, acoustic diaphragms for speakers, engine parts for automobiles, cutting tools, punching-pressing dies, office automation equipment, microphones or medical devices or moulds, for casting or moulding of plastics, manufactured from alloys containing less than 5% beryllium.
18.
'Silicon carbide' does not include cutting and forming tool materials.
19.
Ceramic substrates, as used in this entry, does not include ceramic materials containing 5% by weight, or greater, clay or cement content, either as separate constituents or in combination.
TABLE - DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES - TECHNICAL NOTE
Processes specified in Column 1 of the Table are defined as follows:
a.
Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) is an overlay coating or surface modification coating process wherein a metal, alloy, "composite", dielectric or ceramic is deposited upon a heated substrate. Gaseous reactants are decomposed or combined in the vicinity of a substrate resulting in the deposition of the desired elemental, alloy or compound material on the substrate. Energy for this decomposition or chemical reaction process may be provided by the heat of the substrate, a glow discharge plasma, or "laser" irradiation.
N.B.1
CVD includes the following processes: directed gas flow out-of-pack deposition, pulsating CVD, controlled nucleation thermal deposition (CNTD), plasma enhanced or plasma assisted CVD processes.
N.B.2
Pack denotes a substrate immersed in a powder mixture.
N.B.3
The gaseous reactants used in the out-of-pack process are produced using the same basic reactions and parameters as the pack cementation process, except that the substrate to be coated is not in contact with the powder mixture.
b.
Thermal Evaporation-Physical Vapour Deposition (TE-PVD) is an overlay coating process conducted in a vacuum with a pressure less than 0,1 Pa wherein a source of thermal energy is used to vaporize the coating material. This process results in the condensation, or deposition, of the evaporated species onto appropriately positioned substrates.
The addition of gases to the vacuum chamber during the coating process to synthesise compound coatings is an ordinary modification of the process.
The use of ion or electron beams, or plasma, to activate or assist the coating's deposition is also a common modification in this technique. The use of monitors to provide in-process measurement of optical characteristics and thickness of coatings can be a feature of these processes.
Specific TE-PVD processes are as follows:
1.
Electron Beam PVD uses an electron beam to heat and evaporate the material which forms the coating;
2.
Ion Assisted Resistive Heating PVD employs electrically resistive heating sources in combination with impinging ion beam(s) to produce a controlled and uniform flux of evaporated coating species;
3.
"Laser" Vaporization uses either pulsed or continuous wave "laser" beams to vaporize the material which forms the coating;
4.
Cathodic Arc Deposition employs a consumable cathode of the material which forms the coating and has an arc discharge established on the surface by a momentary contact of a ground trigger. Controlled motion of arcing erodes the cathode surface creating a highly ionised plasma. The anode can be either a cone attached to the periphery of the cathode, through an insulator, or the chamber. Substrate biasing is used for non line-of-sight deposition;
N.B.
This definition does not include random cathodic arc deposition with non-biased substrates.
5.
Ion Plating is a special modification of a general TE-PVD process in which a plasma or an ion source is used to ionise the species to be deposited, and a negative bias is applied to the substrate in order to facilitate the extraction of the species from the plasma. The introduction of reactive species, evaporation of solids within the process chamber, and the use of monitors to provide in-process measurement of optical characteristics and thicknesses of coatings are ordinary modifications of the process.
c.
Pack Cementation is a surface modification coating or overlay coating process wherein a substrate is immersed in a powder mixture (a pack), that consists of:
1.
The metallic powders that are to be deposited (usually aluminium, chromium, silicon or combinations thereof);
2.
An activator (normally a halide salt); 
and
3.
An inert powder, most frequently alumina.
The substrate and powder mixture is contained within a retort which is heated to between 1 030 K (757°C) and 1 375 K (1 102°C) for sufficient time to deposit the coating.
d.
Plasma Spraying is an overlay coating process wherein a gun (spray torch) which produces and controls a plasma accepts powder or wire coating materials, melts them and propels them towards a substrate, whereon an integrally bonded coating is formed. Plasma spraying constitutes either low pressure plasma spraying or high velocity plasma spraying.
N.B.1
Low pressure means less than ambient atmospheric pressure.
N.B.2
High velocity refers to nozzle-exit gas velocity exceeding 750 m/s calculated at 293 K (20°C) at 0,1 MPa.
e.
Slurry Deposition is a surface modification coating or overlay coating process wherein a metallic or ceramic powder with an organic binder is suspended in a liquid and is applied to a substrate by either spraying, dipping or painting, subsequent air or oven drying, and heat treatment to obtain the desired coating.
f.
Sputter Deposition is an overlay coating process based on a momentum transfer phenomenon, wherein positive ions are accelerated by an electric field towards the surface of a target (coating material). The kinetic energy of the impacting ions is sufficient to cause target surface atoms to be released and deposited on an appropriately positioned substrate.
N.B.1
The Table refers only to triode, magnetron or reactive sputter deposition which is used to increase adhesion of the coating and rate of deposition and to radio frequency (RF) augmented sputter deposition used to permit vaporisation of non-metallic coating materials.
N.B.2
Low-energy ion beams (less than 5 keV) can be used to activate the deposition.
g.
Ion Implantation is a surface modification coating process in which the element to be alloyed is ionised, accelerated through a potential gradient and implanted into the surface region of the substrate. This includes processes in which ion implantation is performed simultaneously with electron beam physical vapour deposition or sputter deposition.
PART V –
Category 3
CATEGORY 3 - ELECTRONICS
3A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
Note 1:
The control status of equipment and components described in 3A001 or 3A002, other than those described in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.10., or 3A001.a.12. to 3A001.a.14., which are specially designed for or which have the same functional characteristics as other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.
Note 2:
The control status of integrated circuits described in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.9., or 3A001.a.12. to 3A001.a.14., which are unalterably programmed or designed for a specific function for another equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.
N.B.
When the manufacturer or applicant cannot determine the control status of the other equipment, the control status of the integrated circuits is determined in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.9., and 3A001.a.12. to 3A001.a.14.
Note 3:
The status of wafers (finished or unfinished), in which the function has been determined, is to be evaluated against the parameters of 3A001.a., 3A001.b., 3A001.d., 3A001.e.4., 3A001.g., 3A001.h., or 3A001.i.
3A001
Electronic items as follows:
a.
General purpose integrated circuits, as follows:
Note:
Integrated circuits include the following types:
—
"Monolithic integrated circuits";
—
"Hybrid integrated circuits";
—
"Multichip integrated circuits";
—
"Film type integrated circuits", including silicon-on-sapphire integrated circuits;
—
"Optical integrated circuits";
—
"Three dimensional integrated circuits";
—
"Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits" ("MMICs").
1.
Integrated circuits designed or rated as radiation hardened to withstand any of the following:
a.
A total dose of 5 x 10
3
 Gy (silicon) or higher;
b.
A dose rate upset of 5 x 10
6
 Gy (silicon)/s or higher; 
or
c.
A fluence (integrated flux) of neutrons (1 MeV equivalent) of 5 x 10
13
 n/cm
2
 or higher on silicon, or its equivalent for other materials;
Note:
3A001.a.1.c. does not control Metal Insulator Semiconductors (MIS).
2.
"Microprocessor microcircuits", "microcomputer microcircuits", microcontroller microcircuits, storage integrated circuits manufactured from a compound semiconductor, analogue-to-digital converters, integrated circuits that contain analogue-to-digital converters and store or process the digitised data, digital-to-analogue converters, electro-optical or "optical integrated circuits" designed for "signal processing", field programmable logic devices, custom integrated circuits for which either the function is unknown or the control status of the equipment in which the integrated circuit will be used is unknown, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processors, Static Random-Access Memories (SRAMs), or 'non-volatile memories', having any of the following:
a.
Rated for operation at an ambient temperature above 398 K (125°C);
b.
Rated for operation at an ambient temperature below 218 K (-55°C); 
or
c.
Rated for operation over the entire ambient temperature range from 218 K (-55°C) to 398 K (125°C);
Note:
3A001.a.2. does not control integrated circuits designed for civil automobiles or railway train applications.
Technical Note:
'Non-volatile memories' are memories with data retention over a period of time after a power shutdown.
3.
"Microprocessor microcircuits", "microcomputer microcircuits" and microcontroller microcircuits, manufactured from a compound semiconductor and operating at a clock frequency exceeding 40 MHz;
Note:
3A001.a.3. includes digital signal processors, digital array processors and digital coprocessors.
4.
Not used;
5.
Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DAC) integrated circuits, as follows:
a.
ADCs having any of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 3A101
1.
A resolution of 8 bit or more, but less than 10 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,3 Giga Samples Per Second (GSPS);
2.
A resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 600 Mega Samples Per Second (MSPS);
3.
A resolution of 12 bit or more, but less than 14 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 400 MSPS;
4.
A resolution of 14 bit or more, but less than 16 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 250 MSPS; 
or
5.
A resolution of 16 bit or more with a "sample rate" greater than 65 MSPS;
N.B.
For integrated circuits that contain analogue-to-digital converters and store or process the digitised data, see 3A001.a.14.
Technical Notes:
1.
A resolution of n bit corresponds to a quantisation of 2
n
 levels.
2.
The resolution of the ADC is the number of bits of the digital output that represents the measured analogue input. Effective Number of Bits (ENOB) is not used to determine the resolution of the ADC.
3.
For "multiple channel ADCs", the "sample rate" is not aggregated and the "sample rate" is the maximum rate of any single channel.
4.
For "interleaved ADCs" or for "multiple channel ADCs" that are specified to have an interleaved mode of operation, the "sample rates" are aggregated and the "sample rate" is the maximum combined total rate of all of the interleaved channels.
b.
Digital-to-Analogue Converters (DAC) having any of the following:
1.
A resolution of 10 bit or more but less than 12 bit, with an 'adjusted update rate' exceeding 3 500 MSPS; 
or
2.
A resolution of 12 bit or more and having any of the following:
a.
An 'adjusted update rate' exceeding 1 250 MSPS but not exceeding 3 500 MSPS, and having any of the following:
1.
A settling time less than 9 ns to arrive at or within 0,024% of full-scale from a full scale step; 
or
2.
A 'Spurious Free Dynamic Range' (SFDR) greater than 68 dBc (carrier) when synthesising a full scale analogue signal of 100 MHz or the highest full scale analogue signal frequency specified below 100 MHz; 
or
b.
An 'adjusted update rate' exceeding 3 500 MSPS;
Technical Notes:
1.
'Spurious Free Dynamic Range' (SFDR) is defined as the ratio of the RMS value of the carrier frequency (maximum signal component) at the input of the DAC to the RMS value of the next largest noise or harmonic distortion component at its output.
2.
SFDR is determined directly from the specification table or from the characterisation plots of SFDR versus frequency.
3
A signal is defined to be full scale when its amplitude is greater than -3 dBfs (full scale).
4.
'Adjusted update rate' for DACs:
a.
For conventional (non-interpolating) DACs, the 'adjusted update rate' is the rate at which the digital signal is converted to an analogue signal and the output analogue values are changed by the DAC. For DACs where the interpolation mode may be bypassed (interpolation factor of one), the DAC should be considered as a conventional (non-interpolating) DAC.
b.
For interpolating DACs (oversampling DACs), the 'adjusted update rate' is defined as the DAC update rate divided by the smallest interpolating factor. For interpolating DACs, the 'adjusted update rate' may be referred to by different terms including:
—
input data rate
—
input word rate
—
input sample rate
—
maximum total input bus rate
—
maximum DAC clock rate for DAC clock input.
6.
Electro-optical and "optical integrated circuits", designed for "signal processing" and having all of the following:
a.
One or more than one internal "laser" diode;
b.
One or more than one internal light detecting element; 
and
c.
Optical waveguides;
7.
Field programmable logic devices having any of the following:
a.
A maximum number of single-ended digital input/outputs of greater than 700; 
or
b.
An 'aggregate one-way peak serial transceiver data rate' of 500 Gb/s or greater;
Note:
3A001.a.7. includes:
Complex Programmable Logic Devices (CPLDs)
Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs)
Field Programmable Logic Arrays (FPLAs)
Field Programmable Interconnects (FPICs)
N.B.
For integrated circuits having field programmable logic devices that are combined with an analogue-to-digital converter, see 3A001.a.14.
Technical Notes:
1.
Maximum number of digital input/outputs in 3A001.a.7.a. is also referred to as the maximum user input/outputs or maximum available input/outputs, whether the integrated circuit is packaged or bare die.
2.
'Aggregate one-way peak serial transceiver data rate' is the product of the peak serial one-way transceiver data rate times the number of transceivers on the FPGA.
8.
Not used;
9.
Neural network integrated circuits;
10.
Custom integrated circuits for which the function is unknown, or the control status of the equipment in which the integrated circuits will be used is unknown to the manufacturer, having any of the following:
a.
More than 1 500 terminals;
b.
A typical "basic gate propagation delay time" of less than 0,02 ns; 
or
c.
An operating frequency exceeding 3 GHz;
11.
Digital integrated circuits, other than those described in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.10. and 3A001.a.12., based upon any compound semiconductor and having any of the following:
a.
An equivalent gate count of more than 3 000 (2 input gates); 
or
b.
A toggle frequency exceeding 1,2 GHz;
12.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processors having a rated execution time for an N-point complex FFT of less than (N log
2
 N) /20 480 ms, where N is the number of points;
Technical Note:
When N is equal to 1 024 points, the formula in 3A001.a.12. gives an execution time of 500 μs.
13.
Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) integrated circuits having any of the following:
a.
A Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DAC) clock frequency of 3,5 GHz or more and a DAC resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit; 
or
b.
A DAC clock frequency of 1,25 GHz or more and a DAC resolution of 12 bit or more;
Technical Note:
The DAC clock frequency may be specified as the master clock frequency or the input clock frequency.
14.
Integrated circuits that perform or are programmable to perform all of the following:
a.
Analogue-to-digital conversions meeting any of the following:
1.
A resolution of 8 bit or more, but less than 10 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,3 Giga Samples Per Second (GSPS);
2.
A resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;
3.
A resolution of 12 bit or more, but less than 14 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;
4.
A resolution of 14 bit or more, but less than 16 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 400 Mega Samples Per Second (MSPS); 
or
5.
A resolution of 16 bit or more with a "sample rate" greater than 180 MSPS; 
and
b.
Any of the following:
1.
Storage of digitised data; 
or
2.
Processing of digitised data;
N.B.1.
For analogue-to-digital converter integrated circuits see 3A001.a.5.a.
N.B.2.
For field programmable logic devices see 3A001.a.7.
Technical Notes:
1.
A resolution of n bit corresponds to a quantisation of 2 
n
 levels.
2.
The resolution of the ADC is the number of bits of the digital output of the ADC that represents the measured analogue input. Effective Number of Bits (ENOB) is not used to determine the resolution of the ADC.
3.
For integrated circuits with non-interleaving "multiple channel ADCs", the "sample rate" is not aggregated and the "sample rate" is the maximum rate of any single channel.
4.
For integrated circuits with "interleaved ADCs "or with "multiple channel ADCs" that are specified to have an interleaved mode of operation, the "sample rates" are aggregated and the "sample rate" is the maximum combined total rate of all of the interleaved channels.
b.
Microwave or millimetre wave items as follows:
Technical Note:
For purposes of 3A001.b., the parameter peak saturated power output may also be referred to on product data sheets as output power, saturated power output, maximum power output, peak power output, or peak envelope power output.
1.
"Vacuum electronic devices" and cathodes, as follows:
Note 1:
3A001.b.1. does not control "vacuum electronic devices" designed or rated for operation in any frequency band and having all of the following:
a.
Does not exceed 31,8 GHz; 
and
b.
Is "allocated by the ITU" for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.
Note 2:
3A001.b.1. does not control non-"space-qualified""vacuum electronic devices" having all of the following:
a.
An average output power equal to or less than 50 W; 
and
b.
Designed or rated for operation in any frequency band and having all of the following:
1.
Exceeds 31,8 GHz but does not exceed 43,5 GHz; 
and
2.
Is "allocated by the ITU" for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.
a.
Travelling-wave "vacuum electronic devices", pulsed or continuous wave, as follows:
1.
Devices operating at frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz;
2.
Devices having a cathode heater with a turn on time to rated RF power of less than 3 seconds;
3.
Coupled cavity devices, or derivatives thereof, with a "fractional bandwidth" of more than 7% or a peak power exceeding 2,5 kW;
4.
Devices based on helix, folded waveguide, or serpentine waveguide circuits, or derivatives thereof, having any of the following:
a.
An "instantaneous bandwidth" of more than one octave, and average power (expressed in kW) times frequency (expressed in GHz) of more than 0,5;
b.
An "instantaneous bandwidth" of one octave or less, and average power (expressed in kW) times frequency (expressed in GHz) of more than 1;
c.
Being "space-qualified"; 
or
d.
Having a gridded electron gun;
5.
Devices with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than or equal to 10%, with any of the following:
a.
An annular electron beam;
b.
A non-axisymmetric electron beam; 
or
c.
Multiple electron beams;
b.
Crossed-field amplifier "vacuum electronic devices" with a gain of more than 17 dB;
c.
Thermionic cathodes designed for "vacuum electronic devices" producing an emission current density at rated operating conditions exceeding 5 A/cm
2
 or a pulsed (non-continuous) current density at rated operating conditions exceeding 10 A/cm
2
;
d.
"Vacuum electronic devices" with the capability to operate in a 'dual mode'.
Technical Note:
'Dual mode' means the "vacuum electronic device" beam current can be intentionally changed between continuous-wave and pulsed mode operation by use of a grid and produces a peak pulse output power greater than the continuous-wave output power.
2.
"Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits" ("MMIC") amplifiers that are any of the following:
N.B.
For "MMIC" amplifiers that have an integrated phase shifter see 3A001.b.12.
a.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 15%, and having any of the following:
1.
A peak saturated power output greater than 75 W (48,75 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;
2.
A peak saturated power output greater than 55 W (47,4 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;
3.
A peak saturated power output greater than 40 W (46 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; 
or
4.
A peak saturated power output greater than 20 W (43 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;
b.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 16 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 10%, and having any of the following:
1.
A peak saturated power output greater than 10 W (40 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz; 
or
2.
A peak saturated power output greater than 5 W (37 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 16 GHz;
c.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 3 W (34,77 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
d.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;
e.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 1 W (30 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
f.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 31,62 mW (15 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz up to and including 75 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
g.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 10 mW (10 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 75 GHz up to and including 90 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 5%; 
or
h.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 90 GHz;
Note 1:
Not used.
Note 2:
The control status of the "MMIC" whose rated operating frequency includes frequencies listed in more than one frequency range, as defined by 3A001.b.2.a. to 3A001.b.2.h., is determined by the lowest peak saturated power output threshold.
Note 3:
Notes 1 and 2 in 3A mean that 3A001.b.2. does not control "MMICs" if they are specially designed for other applications, e.g., telecommunications, radar, automobiles.
3.
Discrete microwave transistors that are any of the following:
a.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz and having any of the following:
1.
A peak saturated power output greater than 400 W (56 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;
2.
A peak saturated power output greater than 205 W (53,12 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;
3.
A peak saturated power output greater than 115 W (50,61 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; 
or
4.
A peak saturated power output greater than 60 W (47,78 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;
b.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz and having any of the following:
1.
A peak saturated power output greater than 50 W (47 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz;
2.
A peak saturated power output greater than 15 W (41,76 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 12 GHz;
3.
A peak saturated power output greater than 40 W (46 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 12 GHz up to and including 16 GHz; 
or
4.
A peak saturated power output greater than 7 W (38,45 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz;
c.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,5 W (27 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;
d.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 1 W (30 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz;
e.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz; 
or
f.
Other than those specified in 3A001.b.3.a. to 3A001.b.3.e and rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 5 W (37,0 dBm) at all frequencies exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz;
Note 1:
The control status of a transistor in 3A001.b.3.a. through 3A001.b.3.e. whose rated operating frequency includes frequencies listed in more than one frequency range, as defined by 3A001.b.3.a. to 3A001.b.3.e., is determined by the lowest peak saturated power output threshold.
Note 2:
3A001.b.3. includes bare dice, dice mounted on carriers, or dice mounted in packages. Some discrete transistors may also be referred to as power amplifiers, but the status of these discrete transistors is determined by 3A001.b.3.
4.
Microwave solid state amplifiers and microwave assemblies/modules containing microwave solid state amplifiers, that are any of the following:
a.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 15%, and having any of the following:
1.
A peak saturated power output greater than 500 W (57 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;
2.
A peak saturated power output greater than 270 W (54,3 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;
3.
A peak saturated power output greater than 200 W (53 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; 
or
4.
A peak saturated power output greater than 90 W (49,54 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;
b.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 10%, and having any of the following:
1.
A peak saturated power output greater than 70 W (48,54 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz;
2.
A peak saturated power output greater than 50 W (47 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 12 GHz;
3.
A peak saturated power output greater than 30 W (44,77 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 12 GHz up to and including 16 GHz; 
or
4.
A peak saturated power output greater than 20 W (43 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz;
c.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,5 W (27 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;
d.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 2 W (33 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
e.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 43,5 GHz and having any of the following:
1.
A peak saturated power output greater than 0,2 W (23 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz up to and including 75 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
2.
A peak saturated power output greater than 20 mW (13 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 75 GHz up to and including 90 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 5%; 
or
3.
A peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 90 GHz; 
or
f.
Not used
N.B.1.
For "MMIC" amplifiers see 3A001.b.2.
N.B.2.
For 'transmit/receive modules' and 'transmit modules' see 3A001.b.12.
N.B.3.
For converters and harmonic mixers, designed to extend the operating or frequency range of signal analysers, signal generators, network analysers or microwave test receivers, see 3A001.b.7.
Note 1:
Not used.
Note 2:
The control status of an item whose rated operating frequency includes frequencies listed in more than one frequency range, as defined by 3A001.b.4.a. to 3A001.b.4.e., is determined by the lowest peak saturated power output threshold.
5.
Electronically or magnetically tunable band-pass or band-stop filters, having more than 5 tunable resonators capable of tuning across a 1,5:1 frequency band (f
max
/f
min
) in less than 10 μs and having any of the following:
a.
A band-pass bandwidth of more than 0,5% of centre frequency; 
or
b.
A band-stop bandwidth of less than 0,5% of centre frequency;
6.
Not used;
7.
Converters and harmonic mixers that are any of the following:
a.
Designed to extend the frequency range of "signal analysers" beyond 90 GHz;
b.
Designed to extend the operating range of signal generators as follows:
1.
Beyond 90 GHz;
2.
To an output power greater than 100 mW (20 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;
c.
Designed to extend the operating range of network analysers as follows:
1.
Beyond 110 GHz;
2.
To an output power greater than 31,62 mW (15 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;
3.
To an output power greater than 1 mW (0 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 90 GHz but not exceeding 110 GHz; 
or
d.
Designed to extend the frequency range of microwave test receivers beyond 110 GHz;
8.
Microwave power amplifiers containing "vacuum electronic devices" specified in 3A001.b.1. and having all of the following:
a.
Operating frequencies above 3 GHz;
b.
An average output power to mass ratio exceeding 80 W/kg; 
and
c.
A volume of less than 400 cm
3
;
Note:
3A001.b.8. does not control equipment designed or rated for operation in any frequency band which is "allocated by the ITU" for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.
9.
Microwave power modules (MPM) consisting of, at least, a travelling wave "vacuum electronic device", a "monolithic microwave integrated circuit" ("MMIC") and an integrated electronic power conditioner and having all of the following:
a.
A 'turn-on time' from off to fully operational in less than 10 seconds;
b.
A volume less than the maximum rated power in Watts multiplied by 10 cm
3
/W; 
and
c.
An "instantaneous bandwidth" greater than 1 octave (f
max
 > 2f
min
) and having any of the following:
1.
For frequencies equal to or less than 18 GHz, an RF output power greater than 100 W; 
or
2.
A frequency greater than 18 GHz;
Technical Notes:
1.
To calculate the volume in 3A001.b.9.b., the following example is provided: for a maximum rated power of 20 W, the volume would be: 20 W x 10 cm
3
/W = 200 cm
3
.
2.
The' turn-on time' in 3A001.b.9.a. refers to the time from fully-off to fully operational, i.e., it includes the warm-up time of the MPM.
10.
Oscillators or oscillator assemblies, specified to operate with a single sideband (SSB) phase noise, in dBc/Hz, less (better) than -(126 + 20log
10
F - 20log
10
f) anywhere within the range of 10 Hz ≤ F ≤ 10 kHz;
Technical Note:
In 3A001.b.10., F is the offset from the operating frequency in Hz and f is the operating frequency in MHz.
11.
'Frequency synthesiser' "electronic assemblies" having a "frequency switching time" as specified by any of the following:
a.
Less than 143 ps;
b.
Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 4,8 GHz but not exceeding 31,8 GHz;
c.
Not used;
d.
Less than 500 μs for any frequency change exceeding 550 MHz within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz;
e.
Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 37 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz; 
or
f.
Not used;
g.
Less than 1 ms within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 90 GHz;
Technical Note:
A 'frequency synthesiser' is any kind of frequency source, regardless of the actual technique used, providing a multiplicity of simultaneous or alternative output frequencies, from one or more outputs, controlled by, derived from or disciplined by a lesser number of standard (or master) frequencies.
N.B.
For general purpose "signal analysers", signal generators, network analysers and microwave test receivers, see 3A002.c., 3A002.d., 3A002.e. and 3A002.f., respectively.
12.
'Transmit/receive modules', 'transmit/receive MMICs', 'transmit modules', and 'transmit MMICs', rated for operation at frequencies above 2,7 GHz and having all of the following:
a.
A peak saturated power output (in watts), P
sat
, greater than 505,62 divided by the maximum operating frequency (in GHz) squared [P
sat
>505,62 W*GHz
2
/f
GHz
2
] for any channel;
b.
A "fractional bandwidth" of 5% or greater for any channel;
c.
Any planar side with length d (in cm) equal to or less than 15 divided by the lowest operating frequency in GHz [d ≤ 15cm*GHz*N/f
GHz
] where N is the number of transmit or transmit/receive channels; 
and
d.
An electronically variable phase shifter per channel.
Technical Notes:
1.
A 'transmit/receive module': is a multifunction "electronic assembly" that provides bi-directional amplitude and phase control for transmission and reception of signals.
2.
A 'transmit module': is an "electronic assembly" that provides amplitude and phase control for transmission of signals.
3.
A 'transmit/receive MMIC': is a multifunction "MMIC" that provides bi-directional amplitude and phase control for transmission and reception of signals.
4.
A 'transmit MMIC': is a "MMIC" that provides amplitude and phase control for transmission of signals.
5.
2,7 GHz should be used as the lowest operating frequency (f
GHz
) in the formula in 3A001.b.12.c. for transmit/receive or transmit modules that have a rated operation range extending downward to 2,7 GHz and below [d≤15cm*GHz*N/2,7 GHz].
6.
3A001.b.12. applies to 'transmit/receive modules' or 'transmit modules' with or without a heat sink. The value of d in 3A001.b.12.c. does not include any portion of the 'transmit/receive module' or 'transmit module' that functions as a heat sink.
7.
'Transmit/receive modules', or 'transmit modules', or 'transmit/receive MMICs' or 'transmit MMICs' may or may not have N integrated radiating antenna elements where N is the number of transmit or transmit/receive channels.
c.
Acoustic wave devices as follows and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Surface acoustic wave and surface skimming (shallow bulk) acoustic wave devices, having any of the following:
a.
A carrier frequency exceeding 6 GHz;
b.
A carrier frequency exceeding 1 GHz, but not exceeding 6 GHz and having any of the following:
1.
A 'frequency side-lobe rejection' exceeding 65 dB;
2.
A product of the maximum delay time and the bandwidth (time in μs and bandwidth in MHz) of more than 100;
3.
A bandwidth greater than 250 MHz; 
or
4.
A dispersive delay of more than 10 μs; 
or
c.
A carrier frequency of 1 GHz or less and having any of the following:
1.
A product of the maximum delay time and the bandwidth (time in μs and bandwidth in MHz) of more than 100;
2.
A dispersive delay of more than 10 μs; 
or
3.
A 'frequency side-lobe rejection' exceeding 65 dB and a bandwidth greater than 100 MHz;
Technical Note:
'Frequency side-lobe rejection' is the maximum rejection value specified in data sheet.
2.
Bulk (volume) acoustic wave devices which permit the direct processing of signals at frequencies exceeding 6 GHz;
3.
Acoustic-optic "signal processing" devices employing interaction between acoustic waves (bulk wave or surface wave) and light waves which permit the direct processing of signals or images, including spectral analysis, correlation or convolution;
Note:
3A001.c. does not control acoustic wave devices that are limited to a single band pass, low pass, high pass or notch filtering, or resonating function.
d.
Electronic devices and circuits containing components, manufactured from "superconductive" materials, specially designed for operation at temperatures below the "critical temperature" of at least one of the "superconductive" constituents and having any of the following:
1.
Current switching for digital circuits using "superconductive" gates with a product of delay time per gate (in seconds) and power dissipation per gate (in watts) of less than 10
-14
 J; 
or
2.
Frequency selection at all frequencies using resonant circuits with Q-values exceeding 10 000;
e.
High energy devices as follows:
1.
'Cells' as follows:
a.
'Primary cells' having any of the following at 20°C;
1.
'Energy density' exceeding 550 Wh/kg and a 'continuous power density' exceeding 50 W/kg; 
or
2.
'Energy density' exceeding 50 Wh/kg and a 'continuous power density' exceeding 350 W/kg; 
or
b.
'Secondary cells' having an 'energy density' exceeding 350 Wh/kg at 20°C;
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purpose of 3A001.e.1., 'energy density' (Wh/kg) is calculated from the
 nominal 
voltage multiplied by the nominal capacity in ampere-hours (Ah) divided by the mass in kilograms. If the nominal capacity is not stated, energy density is calculated from the nominal voltage squared then multiplied by the discharge duration in hours divided by the discharge load in ohms and the mass in kilograms.
2.
For the purpose of 3A001.e.1., a 'cell' is defined as an electrochemical device, which has positive and negative electrodes, an electrolyte, and is a source of electrical energy. It is the basic building block of a battery.
3.
For the purpose of 3A001.e.1.a., a 'primary cell' is a 'cell' that is not designed to be charged by any other source.
4.
For the purpose of 3A001.e.1.b., a 'secondary cell' is a 'cell' that is designed to be charged by an external electrical source.
5.
For the purpose of 3A001.e.1.a., 'continuous power density' (W/kg) is calculated from the nominal voltage multiplied by the specified maximum continuous discharge current in ampere (A) divided by the mass in kilograms. 'Continuous power density' is also referred to as specific power.
Note:
3A001.e.1. does not control batteries, including single-cell batteries.
2.
High energy storage capacitors as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 3A201.a. and the Military Goods Controls.
a.
Capacitors with a repetition rate of less than 10 Hz (single shot capacitors) and having all of the following:
1.
A voltage rating equal to or more than 5 kV;
2.
An energy density equal to or more than 250 J/kg; 
and
3.
A total energy equal to or more than 25 kJ;
b.
Capacitors with a repetition rate of 10 Hz or more (repetition rated capacitors) and having all of the following:
1.
A voltage rating equal to or more than 5 kV;
2.
An energy density equal to or more than 50 J/kg;
3.
A total energy equal to or more than 100 J; 
and
4.
A charge/discharge cycle life equal to or more than 10 000;
3.
"Superconductive" electromagnets and solenoids, specially designed to be fully charged or discharged in less than one second and having all of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 3A201.b.
Note:
3A001.e.3. does not control "superconductive" electromagnets or solenoids specially designed for Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) medical equipment.
a.
Energy delivered during the discharge exceeding 10 kJ in the first second;
b.
Inner diameter of the current carrying windings of more than 250 mm; 
and
c.
Rated for a magnetic induction of more than 8 T or "overall current density" in the winding of more than 300 A/mm
2
;
4.
Solar cells, cell-interconnect-coverglass (CIC) assemblies, solar panels, and solar arrays, which are "space-qualified", having a minimum average efficiency exceeding 20% at an operating temperature of 301 K (28°C) under simulated 'AM0' illumination with an irradiance of 1 367 watts per square metre (W/m
2
);
Technical Note:
'AM0', or 'Air Mass Zero', refers to the spectral irradiance of sun light in the earth's outer atmosphere when the distance between the earth and sun is one astronomical unit (AU).
f.
Rotary input type absolute position encoders having an "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 1,0 second of arc and specially designed encoder rings, discs or scales therefor;
g.
Solid-state pulsed power switching thyristor devices and 'thyristor modules', using either electrically, optically, or electron radiation controlled switch methods and having any of the following:
1.
A maximum turn-on current rate of rise (di/dt) greater than 30 000 A/μs and off-state voltage greater than 1 100 V; 
or
2.
A maximum turn-on current rate of rise (di/dt) greater than 2 000 A/μs and having all of the following:
a.
An off-state peak voltage equal to or greater than 3 000 V; 
and
b.
A peak (surge) current equal to or greater than 3 000 A.
Note 1:
3A001.g. includes:
Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs)
Electrical Triggering Thyristors (ETTs)
Light Triggering Thyristors (LTTs)
Integrated Gate Commutated Thyristors (IGCTs)
Gate Turn-off Thyristors (GTOs)
MOS Controlled Thyristors (MCTs)
Solidtrons
Note 2:
3A001.g. does not control thyristor devices and 'thyristor modules' incorporated into equipment designed for civil railway or "civil aircraft" applications.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 3A001.g., a 'thyristor module' contains one or more thyristor devices.
h.
Solid-state power semiconductor switches, diodes, or 'modules', having all of the following:
1.
Rated for a maximum operating junction temperature greater than 488 K (215°C);
2.
Repetitive peak off-state voltage (blocking voltage) exceeding 300 V; 
and
3.
Continuous current greater than 1 A.
Note 1:
Repetitive peak off-state voltage in 3A001.h. includes drain to source voltage, collector to emitter voltage, repetitive peak
reverse voltage and peak repetitive off-state blocking voltage.
Note 2:
3A001.h. includes:
Junction Field Effect Transistors (JFETs)
Vertical Junction Field Effect Transistors (VJFETs)
Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors (MOSFETs)
Double Diffused Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (DMOSFET)
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)
High Electron Mobility Transistors (HEMTs)
Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)
Thyristors and Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs)
Gate Turn-Off Thyristors (GTOs)
Emitter Turn-Off Thyristors (ETOs)
PiN Diodes
Schottky Diodes
Note 3:
3A001.h. does not control switches, diodes, or 'modules', incorporated into equipment designed for civil automobile, civil railway or "civil aircraft" applications.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 3A001.h., 'modules' contain one or more solid-state power semiconductor switches or diodes.
i.
Intensity, amplitude, or phase electro-optic modulators, designed for analogue signals and having any of the following:
1.
A maximum operating frequency of more than 10 GHz but less than 20 GHz, an optical insertion loss equal to or less than 3 dB and having any of the following:
a.
A 'half-wave voltage' ('Vπ') less than 2,7 V when measured at a frequency of 1 GHz or below; 
or
b.
A 'Vπ' of less than 4 V when measured at a frequency of more than 1 GHz; 
or
2.
A maximum operating frequency equal to or greater than 20 GHz, an optical insertion loss equal to or less than 3 dB and having any of the following:
a.
A 'Vπ' less than 3,3 V when measured at a frequency of 1 GHz or below; 
or
b.
A 'Vπ' less than 5 V when measured at a frequency of more than 1 GHz.
Note:
3A001.i. includes electro-optic modulators having optical input and output connectors (e.g., fibre-optic pigtails).
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 3A001.i., a 'half-wave voltage' ('Vπ') is the applied voltage necessary to make a phase change of 180 degrees in the wavelength of light propagating through the optical modulator.
3A002
General purpose "electronic assemblies", modules and equipment, as follows:
a.
Recording equipment and oscilloscopes as follows:
1.
Not used;
2.
Not used;
3.
Not used;
4.
Not used;
5.
Not used;
6.
Digital data recorders having all of the following:
a.
A sustained 'continuous throughput' of more than 6,4 Gbit/s to disk or solid-state drive memory; 
and
b.
"Signal processing" of the radio frequency signal data while it is being recorded;
Technical Notes:
1.
For recorders with a parallel bus architecture, the 'continuous throughput' rate is the
 highest 
word rate multiplied by the number of bits in a word.
2.
'Continuous throughput' is the fastest data rate the instrument can record to disk or solid-state drive memory without the loss of any information while sustaining the input digital data rate or digitizer conversion rate.
7.
Real-time oscilloscopes having a vertical root-mean-square (rms) noise voltage of less than 2% of full-scale at the vertical scale setting that provides the lowest noise value for any input 3dB bandwidth of 60 GHz or greater per channel;
Note:
3A002.a.7. does not control equivalent-time sampling oscilloscopes.
b.
Not used;
c.
"Signal analysers" as follows:
1.
"Signal analysers" having a 3 dB resolution bandwidth (RBW) exceeding 40 MHz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz;
2.
"Signal analysers" having Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL) less (better) than -150 dBm/Hz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;
3.
"Signal analysers" having a frequency exceeding 90 GHz;
4.
"Signal analysers" having all of the following:
a.
'Real-time bandwidth' exceeding 170 MHz; 
and
b.
Having any of the following:
1.
100% probability of discovery with less than a 3 dB reduction from full amplitude due to gaps or windowing effects of signals having a duration of 15 μs or less; 
or
2.
A 'frequency mask trigger' function with 100% probability of trigger (capture) for signals having a duration of 15 μs or less;
Technical Notes:
1.
'Real-time bandwidth' is the widest frequency range for which the analyser can continuously transform time-domain data entirely into frequency-domain results, using a Fourier or other discrete time transform that processes every incoming time point, without a reduction of measured amplitude of more than 3 dB below the actual signal amplitude caused by gaps or windowing effects, while outputting or displaying the transformed data.
2.
Probability of discovery in 3A002.c.4.b.1. is also referred to as probability of intercept or probability of capture.
3.
For the purposes of 3A002.c.4.b.1., the duration for 100% probability of discovery is equivalent to the minimum signal duration necessary for the specified level measurement uncertainty.
4.
A 'frequency mask trigger' is a mechanism where the trigger function is able to select a frequency range to be triggered on as a subset of the acquisition bandwidth while ignoring other signals that may also be present within the same acquisition bandwidth. A 'frequency mask trigger' may contain more than one independent set of limits.
Note:
3A002.c.4. does not control those "signal analysers" using only constant percentage bandwidth filters (also known as octave or fractional octave filters).
5.
Not used;
d.
Signal generators having any of the following:
1.
Specified to generate pulse-modulated signals having all of the following, anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz:
a.
'Pulse duration' of less than 25 ns; 
and
b.
On/off ratio equal to or exceeding 65 dB;
2.
An output power exceeding 100 mW (20 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;
3.
A "frequency switching time" as specified by any of the following:
a.
Not used;
b.
Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 4,8 GHz but not exceeding 31,8 GHz;
c.
Not used;
d.
Less than 500 μs for any frequency change exceeding 550 MHz within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz; 
or
e.
Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 37 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;
f.
Not used;
4.
Single sideband (SSB) phase noise, in dBc/Hz, specified as being any of the following:
a.
Less (better) than -(126 + 20log
10
F - 20log
10
f) anywhere within the range of 10 Hz ≤ F ≤ 10 kHz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 3,2 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz; 
or
b.
Less (better) than -(206 - 20log
10
f) anywhere within the range of 10 kHz< F≤ 100 kHz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 3,2 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;
Technical Note:
In 3A002.d.4., F is the offset from the operating frequency in Hz and f is the operating frequency in MHz;
5.
An 'RF modulation bandwidth’ of digital baseband signals as specified by any of the following:
a.
Exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 4,8 GHz but not exceeding 31,8 GHz;
b.
Exceeding 550 MHz within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz; 
or
c.
Exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 37 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz; 
or
Technical Note:
'RF modulation bandwidth' is the Radio Frequency (RF) bandwidth occupied by a digitally encoded baseband signal modulated onto an RF signal. It is also referred to as information bandwidth or vector modulation bandwidth. I/Q digital modulation is the technical method for producing a vector-modulated RF output signal, and that output signal is typically specified as having an 'RF modulation bandwidth'.
6.
A maximum frequency exceeding 90 GHz;
Note 1:
For the purpose of 3A002.d., signal generators include arbitrary waveform and function generators.
Note 2:
3A002.d. does not control equipment in which the output frequency is either produced by the addition or subtraction of two or more crystal oscillator frequencies, or by an addition or subtraction followed by a multiplication of the result.
Technical Notes:
1.
The maximum frequency of an arbitrary waveform or function generator is calculated by dividing the sample rate, in samples/second, by a factor of 2,5.
2.
For the purposes of 3A002.d.1.a, 'pulse duration' is defined as the time interval from the point on the leading edge that is 50% of the pulse amplitude to the point on the trailing edge that is 50% of the pulse amplitude.
e.
Network analysers having any of the following:
1.
An output power exceeding 31,62 mW (15 dBm) anywhere within the operating frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;
2.
An output power exceeding 1 mW (0 dBm) anywhere within the operating frequency range exceeding 90 GHz but not exceeding 110 GHz;
3.
'Nonlinear vector measurement functionality' at frequencies exceeding 50 GHz but not exceeding 110 GHz; 
or
Technical Note:
'Nonlinear vector measurement functionality' is an instrument’s ability to analyse the test results of devices driven into the large-signal domain or the non-linear distortion range.
4.
A maximum operating frequency exceeding 110 GHz;
f.
Microwave test receivers having all of the following:
1.
A maximum operating frequency exceeding 110 GHz; 
and
2.
Being capable of measuring amplitude and phase simultaneously;
g.
Atomic frequency standards being any of the following:
1.
"Space-qualified";
2.
Non-rubidium and having a long-term stability less (better) than 1 x 10
-11
/month; 
or
3.
Non-"space-qualified" and having all of the following:
a.
Being a rubidium standard;
b.
Long-term stability less (better) than 1 x 10
-11
/month; 
and
c.
Total power consumption of less than 1 W;
h.
"Electronic assemblies", modules, or equipment, specified to perform all of the following:
1.
Analogue-to-digital conversions meeting any of the following:
a.
A resolution of 8 bit or more, but less than 10 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,3 Giga Samples Per Second (GSPS);
b.
A resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;
c.
A resolution of 12 bit or more, but less than 14 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;
d.
A resolution of 14 bit or more but less than 16 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 400 Mega Samples Per Second (MSPS); 
or
e.
A resolution of 16 bit or more with a "sample rate" greater than 180 MSPS; 
and
2.
Any of the following:
a.
Output of digitised data;
b.
Storage of digitised data; 
or
c.
Processing of digitised data;
N.B.
Digital data recorders, oscilloscopes, "signal analysers", signal generators, network
 analysers 
and microwave test receivers, are specified in 3A002.a.6., 3A002.a.7., 3A002.c., 3A002.d., 3A002.e. and 3A002.f., respectively.
Technical Notes:
1.
A resolution of n bit corresponds to a quantisation of 2
n
 levels.
2.
The resolution of the ADC is the number of bits of the digital output of the ADC that represents the measured analogue input. Effective Number of Bits (ENOB) is not used to determine the resolution of the ADC.
3.
For non-interleaved multiple-channel "electronic assemblies", modules, or equipment, the "sample rate" is not aggregated and the "sample rate" is the maximum rate of any single-channel.
4.
For interleaved channels on multiple-channel "electronic assemblies", modules, or equipment, the "sample rates" are aggregated and the "sample rate" is the maximum combined total rate of all the interleaved channels.
Note:
3A002.h. includes ADC cards, waveform digitizers, data acquisition cards, signal acquisition boards and transient recorders.
3A003
Spray cooling thermal management systems employing closed loop fluid handling and reconditioning equipment in a sealed enclosure where a dielectric fluid is sprayed onto electronic components using specially designed spray nozzles that are designed to maintain electronic components within their operating temperature range, and specially designed components therefor.
3A101
Electronic equipment, devices and components, other than those specified in 3A001, as follows:
a.
Analogue-to-digital converters, usable in "missiles", designed to meet military specifications for ruggedized equipment;
b.
Accelerators capable of delivering electromagnetic radiation produced by bremsstrahlung from accelerated electrons of 2 MeV or greater, and systems containing those accelerators.
Note:
3A101.b. above does not specify equipment specially designed for medical purposes.
3A102
'Thermal batteries' designed or modified for 'missiles'.
Technical Notes:
1.
In 3A102 'thermal batteries' are single use batteries that contain a solid non-conducting inorganic salt as the electrolyte. These batteries incorporate a pyrolytic material that, when ignited, melts the electrolyte and activates the battery.
2.
In 3A102 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
3A201
Electronic components, other than those specified in 3A001, as follows;
a.
Capacitors having either of the following sets of characteristics:
1.
a.
Voltage rating greater than 1,4 kV;
b.
Energy storage greater than 10 J;
c.
Capacitance greater than 0,5 μF; 
and
d.
Series inductance less than 50 nH; 
or
2.
a.
Voltage rating greater than 750 V;
b.
Capacitance greater than 0,25 μF; 
and
c.
Series inductance less than 10 nH;
b.
Superconducting solenoidal electromagnets having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Capable of creating magnetic fields greater than 2 T;
2.
A ratio of length to inner diameter greater than 2;
3.
Inner diameter greater than 300 mm; 
and
4.
Magnetic field uniform to better than 1% over the central 50% of the inner volume;
Note:
3A201.b. does not control magnets specially designed for and exported 'as parts of' medical nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) imaging systems. The phrase 'as part of' does not necessarily mean physical part in the same shipment; separate shipments from different sources are allowed, provided the related export documents clearly specify that the shipments are dispatched 'as part of' the imaging systems.
c.
Flash X-ray generators or pulsed electron accelerators having either of the following sets of characteristics:
1.
a.
An accelerator peak electron energy of 500 keV or greater but less than 25 MeV; 
and
b.
With a 'figure of merit' (K) of 0,25 or greater; 
or
2.
a.
An accelerator peak electron energy of 25 MeV or greater; 
and
b.
A 'peak power' greater than 50 MW.
Note:
3A201.c. does not control accelerators that are component parts of devices designed for purposes other than electron beam or X
-
ray radiation (electron microscopy, for example) nor those designed for medical purposes.
Technical Notes:
1.
The 'figure of merit' (K) is defined as:
K = 1,7 x 10
3
V
2,65
Q
V is the peak electron energy in million electron volts.
If the accelerator beam pulse duration is less than or equal to 1 μs, then Q is the total accelerated charge in Coulombs. If the accelerator beam pulse duration is greater than 1 μs, then Q is the maximum accelerated charge in 1 μs.
Q equals the integral of i with respect to t, over the lesser of 1 μs or the time duration of the beam pulse (Q =
 ∫ 
idt), where i is beam current in amperes and t is time in seconds.
2.
'Peak power' = (peak potential in volts) x (peak beam current in amperes).
3.
In machines based on microwave accelerating cavities, the time duration of the beam pulse is the lesser of 1 μs or the duration of the bunched beam packet resulting from one microwave modulator pulse.
4.
In machines based on microwave accelerating cavities, the peak beam current is the average current in the time duration of a bunched beam packet.
3A225
Frequency changers or generators, other than those specified in 0B001.b.13., usable as a variable or fixed frequency motor drive, having all of the following characteristics:
N.B.1.
"Software" specially designed to enhance or release the performance of a frequency changer or generator to meet the characteristics of 3A225 is specified in 3D225.
N.B.2.
"Technology" in the form of codes or keys to enhance or release the performance of a frequency changer or generator to meet the characteristics of 3A225 is specified in 3E225.
a.
Multiphase output providing a power of 40 VA or greater;
b.
Operating at a frequency of 600 Hz or more; 
and
c.
Frequency control better (less) than 0,2%.
Note:
3A225 does not control frequency changers or generators if they have hardware, "software" or "technology" constraints that limit the performance to less than that specified above, provided they meet any of the following:
1.
They need to be returned to the original manufacturer to make the enhancements or release the constraints;
2.
They require "software" as specified in 3D225 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 3A225;
or
3.
They require "technology" in the form of keys or codes as specified in 3E225 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 3A225.
Technical Notes:
1.
Frequency changers in 3A225 are also known as converters or inverters.
2.
Frequency changers in 3A225 may be marketed as Generators, Electronic Test Equipment, AC Power Supplies, Variable Speed Motors Drives, Variable Speed Drives (VSDs), Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs), Adjustable Frequency Drives (AFDs), or Adjustable Speed Drives (ASDs).
3A226
High-power direct current power supplies, other than those specified in 0B001.j.6., having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Capable of continuously producing, over a time period of 8 hours, 100 V or greater with current output of 500 A or greater; 
and
b.
Current or voltage stability better than 0,1% over a time period of 8 hours.
3A227
High-voltage direct current power supplies, other than those specified in 0B001.j.5., having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Capable of continuously producing, over a time period of 8 hours, 20 kV or greater with current output of 1 A or greater; 
and
b.
Current or voltage stability better than 0,1% over a time period of 8 hours.
3A228
Switching devices, as follows:
a.
Cold-cathode tubes, whether gas filled or not, operating similarly to a spark gap, having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Containing three or more electrodes;
2.
Anode peak voltage rating of 2,5 kV or more;
3.
Anode peak current rating of 100 A or more; 
and
4.
Anode delay time of 10 μs or less;
Note:
3A228 includes gas krytron tubes and vacuum sprytron tubes.
b.
Triggered spark-gaps having both of the following characteristics:
1.
An anode delay time of 15 μs or less; 
and
2.
Rated for a peak current of 500 A or more;
c.
Modules or assemblies with a fast switching function, other than those specified in 3A001.g. or 3A001.h., having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Anode peak voltage rating greater than 2 kV;
2.
Anode peak current rating of 500 A or more; 
and
3.
Turn-on time of 1 μs or less.
3A229
High-current pulse generators as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
a.
Detonator firing sets (initiator systems, firesets), including electronically-charged, explosively-driven and optically-driven firing sets, other than those specified in 1A007.a., designed to drive multiple controlled detonators specified in 1A007.b.;
b.
Modular electrical pulse generators (pulsers) having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Designed for portable, mobile, or ruggedized-use;
2.
Capable of delivering their energy in less than 15 μs into loads of less than 40 ohms;
3.
Having an output greater than 100 A;
4.
No dimension greater than 30 cm;
5.
Weight less than 30 kg; 
and
6.
Specified for use over an extended temperature range 223 K (-50
o
C) to 373 K (100
o
C) or specified as suitable for aerospace applications.
Note:
3A229.b. includes xenon flash-lamp drivers.
c.
Micro-firing units having all of the following characteristics:
1.
No dimension greater than 35 mm;
2.
Voltage rating of equal to or greater than 1 kV; 
and
3.
Capacitance of equal to or greater than 100 nF.
3A230
High-speed pulse generators, and 'pulse heads' therefor, having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Output voltage greater than 6 V into a resistive load of less than 55 ohms; 
and
b.
'Pulse transition time' less than 500 ps.
Technical Notes:
1.
In 3A230, 'pulse transition time' is defined as the time interval between 10% and 90% voltage amplitude.
2.
'Pulse heads' are impulse forming networks designed to accept a voltage step function and shape it into a variety of pulse forms that can include rectangular, triangular, step, impulse, exponential, or monocycle types. 'Pulse heads' can be an integral part of the pulse generator, they can be a plug-in module to the device or they can be an externally connected device.
3A231
Neutron generator systems, including tubes, having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Designed for operation without an external vacuum system; 
and
b.
Utilizing any of the following:
1.
Electrostatic acceleration to induce a tritium-deuterium nuclear reaction; 
or
2.
Electrostatic acceleration to induce a deuterium-deuterium nuclear reaction and capable of an output of 3 x 10
9
 neutrons/s or greater.
3A232
Multipoint initiation systems, other than those specified in 1A007, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
N.B.
See 1A007.b. for detonators.
a.
Not used;
b.
Arrangements using single or multiple detonators designed to nearly simultaneously initiate an explosive surface over an area greater than 5 000 mm
2
 from a single firing signal with an initiation timing spread over the surface of less than 2,5 μs.
Note:
3A232 does not control detonators using only primary explosives, such as lead azide.
3A233
Mass spectrometers, other than those specified in 0B002.g., capable of measuring ions of 230 u or greater and having a resolution of better than 2 parts in 230, as follows, and ion sources therefor:
a.
Inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometers (ICP/MS);
b.
Glow discharge mass spectrometers (GDMS);
c.
Thermal ionisation mass spectrometers (TIMS);
d.
Electron bombardment mass spectrometers having both of the following features:
1.
A molecular beam inlet system that injects a collimated beam of analyte molecules into a region of the ion source where the molecules are ionised by an electron beam; 
and
2.
One or more 'cold traps' that can be cooled to a temperature of 193 K (-80°C);
e.
Not used;
f.
Mass spectrometers equipped with a microfluorination ion source designed for actinides or actinide fluorides.
Technical Notes:
1.
Electron bombardment mass spectrometers in 3A233.d. are also known as electron impact mass spectrometers or electron ionisation mass spectrometers.
2.
In 3A233.d.2., a 'cold trap' is a device that traps gas molecules by condensing or freezing them on cold surfaces. For the purposes of 3A233.d.2., a closed-loop gaseous helium cryogenic vacuum pump is not a 'cold trap'.
3A234
Striplines to provide low inductance path to detonators with the following characteristics:
a.
Voltage rating greater than 2 kV; 
and
b
Inductance of less than 20 nH.
3B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
3B001
Equipment for the manufacturing of semiconductor devices or materials, as follows and specially designed components and accessories therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B226
a.
Equipment designed for epitaxial growth as follows:
1.
Equipment designed or modified to produce a layer of any material other than silicon with a thickness uniform to less than ± 2,5% across a distance of 75 mm or more;
Note:
3B001.a.1. includes Atomic Layer Epitaxy (ALE) equipment.
2.
Metal Organic Chemical Vapour Deposition (MOCVD) reactors designed for compound semiconductor epitaxial growth of material having two or more of the following elements: aluminium, gallium, indium, arsenic, phosphorus, antimony, or nitrogen;
3.
Molecular beam epitaxial growth equipment using gas or solid sources;
b.
Equipment designed for ion implantation and having any of the following:
1.
Not used;
2.
Being designed and optimised to operate at a beam energy of 20 keV or more and a beam current of 10 mA or more for hydrogen, deuterium or helium implant;
3.
Direct write capability;
4.
A beam energy of 65 keV or more and a beam current of 45 mA or more for high energy oxygen implant into a heated semiconductor material "substrate"; 
or
5.
Being designed and optimised to operate at a beam energy of 20 keV or more and a beam current of 10 mA or more for silicon implant into a semiconductor material "substrate" heated to 600°C or greater;
c.
Not used;
d.
Not used;
e.
Automatic loading multi-chamber central wafer handling systems having all of the following:
1.
Interfaces for wafer input and output, to which more than two functionally different 'semiconductor process tools' specified in 3B001.a.1., 3B001.a.2., 3B001.a.3. or 3B001.b. are designed to be connected; 
and
2.
Designed to form an integrated system in a vacuum environment for 'sequential multiple wafer processing';
Note:
3B001.e. does not control automatic robotic wafer handling systems specially designed for parallel wafer processing.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purpose of 3B001.e., 'semiconductor process tools' refers to modular tools that provide physical processes for semiconductor production that are functionally different, such as deposition, implant or thermal processing.
2.
For the purpose of 3B001.e., 'sequential multiple wafer processing' means the capability to process each wafer in different 'semiconductor process tools', such as by transferring each wafer from one tool to a second tool and on to a third tool with the automatic loading multi-chamber central wafer handling systems.
f.
Lithography equipment as follows:
1.
Align and expose step and repeat (direct step on wafer) or step and scan (scanner) equipment for wafer processing using photo-optical or X-ray methods and having any of the following:
a.
A light source wavelength shorter than 193 nm; 
or
b.
Capable of producing a pattern with a 'Minimum Resolvable Feature size' (MRF) of 45 nm or less;
Technical Note:
The 'Minimum Resolvable Feature size' (MRF) is calculated by the following formula:
where the K factor = 0,35
2.
Imprint lithography equipment capable of producing features of 45 nm or less;
Note:
3B001.f.2. includes:
Micro contact printing tools
Hot embossing tools
Nano-imprint lithography tools
Step and flash imprint lithography (S-FIL) tools
3.
Equipment specially designed for mask making having all of the following:
a.
A deflected focussed electron beam, ion beam or "laser" beam; 
and
b.
Having any of the following:
1.
A full-width half-maximum (FWHM) spot size smaller than 65 nm and an image placement less than 17 nm (mean + 3 sigma); 
or
2.
Not used;
3.
A second-layer overlay error of less than 23 nm (mean + 3 sigma) on the mask;
4.
Equipment designed for device processing using direct writing methods, having all of the following:
a.
A deflected focused electron beam; 
and
b.
Having any of the following:
1.
A minimum beam size equal to or smaller than 15 nm; 
or
2.
An overlay error less than 27 nm (mean + 3 sigma);
g.
Masks and reticles, designed for integrated circuits specified in 3A001;
h.
Multi-layer masks with a phase shift layer not specified in 3B001.g. and designed to be used by lithography equipment having a light source wavelength less than 245 nm;
Note:
3B001.h. does not control multi-layer masks with a phase shift layer designed for the fabrication of memory devices not specified in 3A001.
N.B.
For masks and reticles, specially designed for optical sensors, see 6B002.
i.
Imprint lithography templates designed for integrated circuits specified in 3A001.
j.
Mask "substrate blanks" with multilayer reflector structure consisting of molybdenum and silicon, and having all of the following:
1.
Specially designed for 'Extreme Ultraviolet' ('EUV') lithography; 
and
2.
Compliant with SEMI Standard P37.
Technical Note:
'Extreme Ultraviolet' ('EUV') refers to electromagnetic spectrum wavelengths greater than 5 nm and less than 124 nm.
3B002
Test equipment specially designed for testing finished or unfinished semiconductor devices as follows and specially designed components and accessories therefor:
a.
For testing S-parameters of items specified in 3A001.b.3.;
b.
Not used;
c.
For testing items specified in 3A001.b.2.
3C   
Materials
3C001
Hetero-epitaxial materials consisting of a "substrate" having stacked epitaxially grown multiple layers of any of the following:
a.
Silicon (Si);
b.
Germanium (Ge);
c.
Silicon carbide (SiC); 
or
d.
"III/V compounds" of gallium or indium.
Note:
3C001.d. does not control a "substrate" having one or more P-type epitaxial layers of GaN, InGaN, AlGaN, InAlN, InAlGaN, GaP, GaAs, AlGaAs, InP, InGaP, AlInP or InGaAlP, independent of the sequence of the elements, except if the P-type epitaxial layer is between N-type layers.
3C002
Resist materials as follows and "substrates" coated with the following resists:
a.
Resists designed for semiconductor lithography as follows:
1.
Positive resists adjusted (optimised) for use at wavelengths less than 193 nm but equal to or greater than 15 nm;
2.
Resists adjusted (optimised) for use at wavelengths less than 15 nm but greater than 1 nm;
b.
All resists designed for use with electron beams or ion beams, with a sensitivity of 0,01 μcoulomb/mm
2
 or better;
c.
Not used;
d.
All resists optimised for surface imaging technologies;
e.
All resists designed or optimised for use with imprint lithography equipment specified in 3B001.f.2. that use either a thermal or photo-curable process.
3C003
Organo-inorganic compounds as follows:
a.
Organo-metallic compounds of aluminium, gallium or indium, having a purity (metal basis) better than 99,999%;
b.
Organo-arsenic, organo-antimony and organo-phosphorus compounds, having a purity (inorganic element basis) better than 99,999%.
Note:
3C003 only controls compounds whose metallic, partly metallic or non-metallic element is directly linked to carbon in the organic part of the molecule.
3C004
Hydrides of phosphorus, arsenic or antimony, having a purity better than 99,999%, even diluted in inert gases or hydrogen.
Note:
3C004 does not control hydrides containing 20% molar or more of inert gases or hydrogen.
3C005
High resistivity materials as follows:
a.
Silicon carbide (SiC), gallium nitride (GaN), aluminium nitride (AlN) or aluminium gallium nitride (AlGaN) semiconductor "substrates", or ingots, boules, or other preforms of those materials, having resistivities greater than 10 000 ohm-cm at 20°C;
b.
Polycrystalline "substrates" or polycrystalline ceramic "substrates", having resistivities greater than 10 000 ohm-cm at 20°C and having at least one non-epitaxial single-crystal layer of silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), gallium nitride (GaN), aluminium nitride (AlN), or aluminium gallium nitride (AlGaN) on the surface of the "substrate".
3C006
Materials, not specified in 3C001, consisting of a "substrate" specified in 3C005 with at least one epitaxial layer of silicon carbide, gallium nitride, aluminium nitride or aluminium gallium nitride.
3D   
Software
3D001
"Software" specially designed for the "development" or "production" of equipment specified in 3A001.b. to 3A002.h. or 3B.
3D002
"Software" specially designed for the "use" of equipment specified in 3B001.a. to f., 3B002 or 3A225
3D003
'Computational lithography' "software" specially designed for the "development" of patterns on EUV-lithography masks or reticles.
Technical Note:
'Computational lithography' is the use of computer modelling to predict, correct, optimise and verify imaging performance of the lithography process over a range of patterns, processes, and system conditions.
3D004
"Software" specially designed for the "development" of equipment specified in 3A003.
3D005
"Software" specially designed to restore normal operation of a microcomputer, "microprocessor microcircuit" or "microcomputer microcircuit" within 1 ms after an Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) or Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) disruption, without loss of continuation of operation.
3D101
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of equipment specified in 3A101.b.
3D225
"Software" specially designed to enhance or release the performance of frequency changers or generators to meet the characteristics of 3A225.
3E   
Technology
3E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of equipment or materials specified in 3A, 3B or 3C;
Note 1:
3E001 does not control "technology" for equipment or components specified in 3A003.
Note 2:
3E001 does not control "technology" for integrated circuits specified in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.12., having all of the following:
a.
Using "technology" at or above 0,130 μm; 
and
b.
Incorporating multi-layer structures with three or fewer metal layers.
Note 3:
3E001 does not control 'Process Design Kits' ('PDKs') unless they include libraries implementing functions or technologies for items specified in 3A001.
Technical Note:
A 'Process Design Kit' ('PDK') is a software tool provided by a semiconductor manufacturer to ensure that the required design practices and rules are taken into account in order to successfully produce a specific integrated circuit design in a specific semiconductor process, in accordance with technological and manufacturing constraints (each semiconductor manufacturing process has its particular 'PDK').
3E002
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note, other than that specified in 3E001, for the "development" or "production" of a "microprocessor microcircuit", "microcomputer microcircuit" or microcontroller microcircuit core, having an arithmetic logic unit with an access width of 32 bits or more and any of the following features or characteristics:
a.
A 'vector processor unit' designed to perform more than two calculations on 'floating-point' vectors (one-dimensional arrays of 32-bit or larger numbers) simultaneously;
Technical Note:
A 'vector processor unit' is a processor element with built-in instructions that perform multiple calculations on 'floating-point' vectors (one-dimensional arrays of 32-bit or larger numbers) simultaneously, having at least one vector arithmetic logic unit and vector registers of at least 32 elements each.
b.
Designed to perform more than four 64-bit or larger 'floating-point' operation results per cycle; 
or
c.
Designed to perform more than eight 16-bit 'fixed-point' multiply-accumulate results per cycle (e.g., digital manipulation of analogue information that has been previously converted into digital form, also known as digital "signal processing").
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purpose of 3E002.a. and 3E002.b., 'floating-point' is defined by IEEE-754.
2.
For the purpose of 3E002.c., 'fixed-point' refers to a fixed-width real number with both an integer component and a fractional component, and which does not include integer-only formats.
Note 1:
3E002 does not control "technology" for multimedia extensions.
Note 2:
3E002 does not control "technology" for micro-processor cores, having all of the following:
a.
Using "technology" at or above 0,130 μm; 
and
b.
Incorporating multi-layer structures with five or fewer metal layers.
Note 3:
3E002 includes "technology" for the "development" or "production" of digital signal processors and digital array processors.
3E003
Other "technology" for the "development" or "production" of the following:
a.
Vacuum microelectronic devices;
b.
Hetero-structure semiconductor electronic devices such as high electron mobility transistors (HEMT), hetero-bipolar transistors (HBT), quantum well and super lattice devices;
Note:
3E003.b. does not control "technology" for high electron mobility transistors (HEMT) operating at frequencies lower than 31,8 GHz and hetero-junction bipolar transistors (HBT) operating at frequencies lower than 31,8 GHz.
c.
"Superconductive" electronic devices;
d.
Substrates of films of diamond for electronic components.
e.
Substrates of silicon-on-insulator (SOI) for integrated circuits in which the insulator is silicon dioxide;
f.
Substrates of silicon carbide for electronic components;
g.
"Vacuum electronic devices" operating at frequencies of 31,8 GHz or higher.
3E004
"Technology""required" for the slicing, grinding and polishing of 300 mm diameter silicon wafers to achieve a 'Site Front least sQuares Range' ('SFQR') less than or equal to 20 nm at any site of 26 mm x 8 mm on the front surface of the wafer and an edge exclusion less than or equal to 2 mm.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 3E004 'SFQR' is the range of maximum deviation and minimum deviation from front reference plane, calculated by least square method with all front surface data including site boundary within a site.
3E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment or "software" specified in 3A001.a.1. or 2., 3A101, 3A102 or 3D101.
3E102
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of "software" specified in 3D101.
3E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 3A001.e.2., 3A001.e.3., 3A001.g., 3A201, 3A225 to 3A234.
3E225
"Technology", in the form of codes or keys, to enhance or release the performance of frequency changers or generators to meet the characteristics of 3A225.
PART VI –
Category 4
CATEGORY 4 - COMPUTERS
Note 1:
Computers, related equipment and "software" performing telecommunications or "local area network" functions must also be evaluated against the performance characteristics of Category 5, Part 1 (Telecommunications).
Note 2:
Control units which directly interconnect the buses or channels of central processing units, 'main storage' or disk controllers are not regarded as telecommunications equipment described in Category 5, Part 1 (Telecommunications).
N.B.
For the control status of "software" specially designed for packet switching, see 5D001.
Technical Note:
'Main storage' is the primary storage for data or instructions for rapid access by a central processing unit. It consists of the internal storage of a "digital computer" and any hierarchical extension thereto, such as cache storage or non-sequentially accessed extended storage.
4A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
4A001
Electronic computers and related equipment, having any of the following and "electronic assemblies" and specially designed components therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 4A101.
a.
Specially designed to have any of the following:
1.
Rated for operation at an ambient temperature below 228 K (-45°C) or above 358 K (85°C); 
or
Note:
4A001.a.1. does not control computers specially designed for civil automobile, railway train or “civil aircraft” applications.
2.
Radiation hardened to exceed any of the following specifications:
a.
Total Dose 5 x 10
3
 Gy (silicon);
b.
Dose Rate Upset 5 x 10
6
 Gy (silicon)/s; 
or
c.
Single Event Upset 1 x 10
-8
 Error/bit/day;
Note:
4A001.a.2. does not control computers specially designed for "civil aircraft" applications.
b.
Not used.
4A003
"Digital computers", "electronic assemblies", and related equipment therefor, as follows and specially designed components therefor:
Note 1:
4A003 includes the following:
—
'Vector processors';
—
Array processors;
—
Digital signal processors;
—
Logic processors;
—
Equipment designed for "image enhancement".
Note 2:
The control status of the "digital computers" and related equipment described in 4A003 is determined by the control status of other equipment or systems provided:
a.
The "digital computers" or related equipment are essential for the operation of the other equipment or systems;
b.
The "digital computers" or related equipment are not a "principal element" of the other equipment or systems; 
and
N.B.1.
The control status of "signal processing" or "image enhancement" equipment specially designed for other equipment with functions limited to those required for the other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment even if it exceeds the "principal element" criterion.
N.B.2.
For the control status of "digital computers" or related equipment for telecommunications equipment, see Category 5, Part 1 (Telecommunications).
c.
The "technology" for the "digital computers" and related equipment is determined by 4E.
a.
Not used;
b.
"Digital computers" having an "Adjusted Peak Performance" ("APP") exceeding 29 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT);
c.
"Electronic assemblies" specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the "APP" of the aggregation exceeds the limit specified in 4A003.b.;
Note 1:
4A003.c. controls only "electronic assemblies" and programmable interconnections not exceeding the limit specified in 4A003.b. when shipped as unintegrated "electronic assemblies".
Note 2:
4A003.c. does not control "electronic assemblies" specially designed for a product or family of products whose maximum configuration does not exceed the limit specified in 4A003.b.
d.
Not used;
e.
Not used;
f.
Not used;
g.
Equipment specially designed for aggregating the performance of "digital computers" by providing external interconnections which allows communications at unidirectional data rates exceeding 2,0 Gbyte/s per link.
Note:
4A003.g. does not control internal interconnection equipment (e.g. backplanes, buses), passive interconnection equipment, "network access controllers" or "communications channel controllers".
4A004
Computers as follows and specially designed related equipment, "electronic assemblies" and components therefor:
a.
'Systolic array computers';
b.
'Neural computers';
c.
'Optical computers'.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Systolic array computers' are computers where the flow and modification of the data is dynamically controllable at the logic gate level by the user.
2.
'Neural computers' are computational devices designed or modified to mimic the behaviour of a neuron or a collection of neurons, i.e., computational devices which are distinguished by their hardware capability to modulate the weights and numbers of the interconnections of a multiplicity of computational components based on previous data.
3.
'Optical computers' are computers designed or modified to use light to represent data and whose computational logic elements are based on directly coupled optical devices.
4A005
Systems, equipment, and components therefor, specially designed or modified for the generation, command and control, or delivery of "intrusion software".
4A101
Analogue computers, "digital computers" or digital differential analysers, other than those specified in 4A001.a.1., which are ruggedized and designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
4A102
Hybrid computers specially designed for modelling, simulation or design integration of space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
Note:
This control only applies when the equipment is supplied with "software" specified in 7D103 or 9D103.
4B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
None.
4C   
Materials
None.
4D   
Software
Note:
The control status of "software" for equipment described in other Categories is dealt with in the appropriate Category.
4D001
"Software" as follows:
a.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development" or "production" of equipment or "software" specified in 4A001 to 4A004, or 4D.
b.
"Software", other than that specified in 4D001.a., specially designed or modified for the "development" or "production" of equipment as follows:
1.
"Digital computers" having an "Adjusted Peak Performance" ("APP") exceeding 15 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT);
2.
"Electronic assemblies" specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the "APP" of the aggregation exceeds the limit in 4D001.b.1.
4D002
Not used
4D003
Not used.
4D004
"Software" specially designed or modified for the generation, command and control, or delivery of "intrusion software".
Note:
4D004 does not control "software" specially designed and limited to provide "software" updates or upgrades meeting all the following:
a.
The update or upgrade operates only with the authorisation of the owner or administrator of the system receiving it; 
and
b.
After the update or upgrade, the "software" updated or upgraded is not any of the following:
1.
"Software" specified in 4D004; 
or
2.
"Intrusion software".
4E   
Technology
4E001
a.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note, for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment or "software" specified in 4A or 4D.
b.
"Technology", according to the General Technology Note, other than that specified in 4E001.a., for the "development" or "production" of equipment as follows:
1.
"Digital computers" having an "Adjusted Peak Performance" ("APP") exceeding 15 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT);
2.
"Electronic assemblies" specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the "APP" of the aggregation exceeds the limit in 4E001.b.1.
c.
"Technology" for the "development" of "intrusion software".
Note 1:
4E001.a. and 4E001.c. do not control "vulnerability disclosure" or "cyber incident response".
Note 2:
Note 1 does not diminish the rights of the competent authority of the EU Member State in which the exporter is established to ascertain compliance with 4E001.a. and 4E001.c.
TECHNICAL NOTE ON "ADJUSTED PEAK PERFORMANCE" ("APP")
"APP" is an adjusted peak rate at which "digital computers" perform 64-bit or larger floating point additions and multiplications.
"APP" is expressed in Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT), in units of 10
12
 adjusted floating point operations per second.
Abbreviations used in this Technical Note
n
number of processors in the "digital computer"
i
processor number (i,...n)
t
i
processor cycle time (t
i
 = 1/F
i
)
F
i
processor frequency
R
i
peak floating point calculating rate
W
i
architecture adjustment factor
Outline of "APP" calculation method
1.
For each processor i, determine the peak number of 64-bit or larger floating point operations, FPO
i
, performed per cycle for each processor in the "digital computer".
Note:
In determining FPO, include only 64-bit or larger floating point additions or multiplications. All floating point operations must be expressed in operations per processor cycle; operations requiring multiple cycles may be expressed in fractional results per cycle. For processors not capable of performing calculations on floating point operands of 64-bit or more, the effective calculating rate R is zero.
2.
Calculate the floating point rate R for each processor R
i
 = FPO
i
/t
i
.
3.
Calculate "APP" as "APP" = W
1
 x R
1
 + W
2
 x R
2
 + … + W
n
 x R
n
.
4.
For 'vector processors', W
i
 = 0,9. For non-'vector processors', W
i
 = 0,3.
Note 1:
For processors that perform compound operations in a cycle, such as addition and multiplication, each operation is counted.
Note 2:
For a
 pipelined 
processor the effective calculating rate R is the faster of the pipelined rate, once the pipeline is full, or the non-pipelined rate.
Note 3:
The calculating rate R of each contributing processor is to be calculated at its maximum value theoretically possible before the "APP" of the combination is derived. Simultaneous operations are assumed to exist when the computer manufacturer claims concurrent, parallel, or simultaneous operation or execution in a manual or brochure for the computer.
Note 4:
Do not
 include 
processors that are limited to input/output and peripheral functions (e.g., disk drive, communication and video display) when calculating "APP".
Note 5:
"APP"
 values 
are not to be calculated for processor combinations (inter)connected by "Local Area Networks", Wide Area Networks, I/O shared connections/devices, I/O controllers and any communication interconnection implemented by "software".
Note 6:
"APP" values must be calculated for processor combinations containing processors specially designed to enhance performance by aggregation, operating simultaneously and sharing memory;
Technical Notes:
1.
Aggregate all processors and accelerators operating simultaneously and located on the same die.
2.
Processor combinations share memory when any processor is capable of accessing any memory location in the system through the hardware transmission of cache lines or memory words, without the involvement of any software mechanism, which may be achieved using "electronic assemblies" specified in 4A003.c.
Note 7:
A 'vector processor' is defined as a processor with built-in instructions that perform multiple calculations on floating-point vectors (one-dimensional arrays of 64-bit or larger numbers) simultaneously, having at least 2 vector functional units and at least 8 vector registers of at least 64 elements each.
PART VII –
Category 5
CATEGORY 5 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND "INFORMATION SECURITY"
Part 1 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS
Note 1:
The control status of components, test and "production" equipment and "software" therefor which are specially designed for telecommunications equipment or systems is determined in Category 5, Part 1.
N.B.
For "lasers" specially designed for telecommunications equipment or systems, see 6A005.
Note 2:
"Digital computers", related equipment or "software", when essential for the operation and support of telecommunications equipment described in this Category, are regarded as specially designed components, provided they are the standard models customarily supplied by the manufacturer. This includes operation, administration, maintenance, engineering or billing computer systems.
5A1   
Systems, Equipment and Components
5A001
Telecommunications systems, equipment, components and accessories as follows:
a.
Any type of telecommunications equipment having any of the following characteristics, functions or features:
1.
Specially designed to withstand transitory electronic effects or electromagnetic pulse effects, both arising from a nuclear explosion;
2.
Specially hardened to withstand gamma, neutron or ion radiation;
3.
Specially designed to operate below 218 K (-55°C); 
or
4.
Specially designed to operate above 397 K (124°C);
Note 1:
5A001.a.3. and 5A001.a.4. control only electronic equipment.
Note 2:
5A001.a.2., 5A001.a.3. and 5A001.a.4. do not control equipment designed or modified for use on board satellites.
b.
Telecommunication systems and equipment, and specially designed components and accessories therefor, having any of the following characteristics, functions or features:
1.
Being underwater untethered communications systems having any of the following:
a.
An acoustic carrier frequency outside the range from 20 kHz to 60 kHz;
b.
Using an electromagnetic carrier frequency below 30 kHz;
c.
Using electronic beam steering techniques; 
or
d.
Using "lasers" or light-emitting diodes (LEDs) with an output wavelength greater than 400 nm and less than 700 nm, in a "local area network";
2.
Being radio equipment operating in the 1,5 MHz to 87,5 MHz band and having all of the following:
a.
Automatically predicting and selecting frequencies and "total digital transfer rates" per channel to optimise the transmission; 
and
b.
Incorporating a linear power amplifier configuration having a capability to support multiple signals simultaneously at an output power of 1 kW or more in the frequency range of 1,5 MHz or more but less than 30 MHz, or 250 W or more in the frequency range of 30 MHz or more but not exceeding 87,5 MHz, over an "instantaneous bandwidth" of one octave or more and with an output harmonic and distortion content of better than -80 dB;
3.
Being radio equipment employing "spread spectrum" techniques, including "frequency hopping" techniques, other than those specified in 5A001.b.4. and having any of the following:
a.
User programmable spreading codes; 
or
b.
A total transmitted bandwidth which is 100 or more times the bandwidth of any one information channel and in excess of 50 kHz;
Note:
5A001.b.3.b. does not control radio equipment specially designed for use with any of the following:
a.
Civil cellular radio-communications systems; or
b.
Fixed or mobile satellite earth stations for commercial civil telecommunications.
Note:
5A001.b.3 does not control equipment designed to operate at an output power of 1 W or less.
4.
Being radio equipment employing ultra-wideband modulation techniques, having user programmable channelising codes, scrambling codes or network identification codes and having any of the following:
a.
A bandwidth exceeding 500 MHz; 
or
b.
A "fractional bandwidth" of 20% or more;
5.
Being digitally controlled radio receivers having all of the following:
a.
More than 1 000 channels;
b.
A 'channel switching time' of less than 1 ms;
c.
Automatic searching or scanning of a part of the electromagnetic spectrum; 
and
d.
Identification of the received signals or the type of transmitter; 
or
Note:
5A001.b.5. does not control radio equipment specially designed for use with civil cellular radio-communications systems.
Technical Note:
'Channel switching time' means the time (i.e., delay) to change from one receiving frequency to another, to arrive at or within ±0,05% of the final specified receiving frequency. Items having a specified frequency range of less than ±0,05% around their centre frequency are defined to be incapable of channel frequency switching.
6.
Employing functions of digital "signal processing" to provide 'voice coding' output at rates of less than 700 bit/s.
Technical Notes:
1.
For variable rate 'voice coding', 5A001.b.6. applies to the 'voice coding' output of continuous speech.
2.
For the purposes of 5A001.b.6., 'voice coding' is defined as the technique to take samples of human voice and then convert these samples into a digital signal, taking into account specific characteristics of human speech.
c.
Optical fibres of more than 500 m in length and specified by the manufacturer as being capable of withstanding a 'proof test' tensile stress of 2 x 10
9
 N/m
2
 or more;
N.B.
 For
 underwater 
umbilical cables, see 8A002.a.3.
Technical Note:
'Proof Test': on-line or off-line production screen testing that dynamically applies a prescribed tensile stress over a 0,5 to 3 m length of fibre at a running rate of 2 to 5 m/s while passing between capstans approximately 150 mm in diameter. The ambient temperature is a nominal 293 K (20
o
C) and relative humidity 40%. Equivalent national standards may be used for executing the proof test.
d.
'Electronically steerable phased array antennae' as follows:
1.
Rated for operation above 31,8 GHz, but not exceeding 57 GHz, and having an Effective Radiated Power (ERP) equal to or greater than +20 dBm (22,15 dBm Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP));
2.
Rated for operation above 57 GHz, but not exceeding 66 GHz, and having an ERP equal to or greater than +24 dBm (26,15 dBm EIRP);
3.
Rated for operation above 66 GHz, but not exceeding 90 GHz, and having an ERP equal to or greater than +20 dBm (22,15 dBm EIRP);
4.
Rated for operation above 90 GHz;
Note 1:
5A001.d. does not control 'electronically steerable phased array antennae' for landing systems with instruments meeting ICAO standards covering Microwave Landing Systems (MLS).
Note 2:
5A001.d. does not control antennae specially designed for any of the following:
a.
Civil cellular or WLAN radio-communications systems;
b.
IEEE 802.15 or wireless HDMI; 
or
c.
Fixed or mobile satellite earth stations for commercial civil telecommunications.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 5A001.d. 'electronically steerable phased array antenna' is an antenna which forms a beam by means of phase coupling, (i.e., the beam direction is controlled by the complex excitation coefficients of the radiating elements) and the direction of that beam can be varied (both in transmission and reception) in azimuth or in elevation, or both, by application of an electrical signal.
e.
Radio direction finding equipment operating at frequencies above 30 MHz and having all of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
"Instantaneous bandwidth" of 10 MHz or more; 
and
2.
Capable of finding a Line Of Bearing (LOB) to non-cooperating radio transmitters with a signal duration of less than 1 ms;
f
Mobile telecommunications interception or jamming equipment, and monitoring equipment therefor, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Interception equipment designed for the extraction of voice or data, transmitted over the air interface;
2.
Interception equipment not specified in 5A001.f.1., designed for the extraction of client device or subscriber identifiers (e.g., IMSI, TIMSI or IMEI), signalling, or other metadata transmitted over the air interface;
3.
Jamming equipment specially designed or modified to intentionally and selectively interfere with, deny, inhibit, degrade or seduce mobile telecommunication services and performing any of the following:
a.
Simulate the functions of Radio Access Network (RAN) equipment;
b.
Detect and exploit specific characteristics of the mobile telecommunications protocol employed (e.g., GSM); 
or
c.
Exploit specific characteristics of the mobile telecommunications protocol employed (e.g. GSM);
4.
RF monitoring equipment designed or modified to identify the operation of items specified in 5A001.f.1., 5A001.f.2. or 5A001.f.3.;
Note:
5A001.f.1. and 5A001.f.2. do not control any of the following:
a.
Equipment specially designed for the interception of analogue Private Mobile Radio (PMR), IEEE 802.11 WLAN;
b.
Equipment designed for mobile telecommunications network operators; 
or
c.
Equipment designed for the "development" or "production" of mobile telecommunications equipment or systems.
N.B.1.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
N.B.2.
For radio receivers see 5A001.b.5.
g.
Passive Coherent Location (PCL) systems or equipment, specially designed for detecting and tracking moving objects by measuring reflections of ambient radio frequency emissions, supplied by non-radar transmitters;
Technical Note:
Non-radar transmitters may include commercial radio, television or cellular telecommunications base stations.
Note:
5A001.g. does not control any of the following:
a.
Radio-astronomical equipment; 
or
b.
Systems or equipment, that require any radio transmission from the target.
h.
Counter Improvised Explosive Device (IED) equipment and related equipment, as follows:
1.
Radio Frequency (RF) transmitting equipment, not specified in 5A001.f., designed or modified for prematurely activating or preventing the initiation of Improvised Explosive Devices (IEDs);
2.
Equipment using techniques designed to enable radio communications in the same frequency channels on which co-located equipment specified in 5A001.h.1. is transmitting;
N.B.
SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
i.
Not used;
j.
Internet Protocol (IP) network communications surveillance systems or equipment, and specially designed components therefor, having all of the following:
1.
Performing all of the following on a carrier class Internet Protocol (IP) network (e.g., national grade IP backbone):
a.
Analysis at the application layer (e.g., Layer 7 of Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model (ISO/IEC 7498-1));
b.
Extraction of selected metadata and application content (e.g., voice, video, messages, attachments); 
and
c.
Indexing of extracted data; 
and
2.
Being specially designed to carry out all of the following:
a.
Execution of searches on the basis of "hard selectors"; 
and
b.
Mapping of the relational network of an individual or of a group of people.
Note:
5A001.j. does not control systems or equipment, specially designed for any of the following:
a.
Marketing purpose;
b.
Network Quality of Service (QoS); 
or
c.
Quality of Experience (QoE).
5A101
Telemetry and telecontrol equipment, including ground equipment, designed or modified for 'missiles'.
Technical Note:
In 5A101 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
Note:
5A101 does not control:
a.
Equipment designed or modified for manned aircraft or satellites;
b.
Ground based equipment designed or modified for terrestrial or marine applications;
c.
Equipment designed for commercial, civil or ‘Safety of Life’ (e.g., data integrity, flight safety) GNSS services;
5B1   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
5B001
Telecommunications test, inspection and production equipment, components and accessories, as follows:
a.
Equipment and specially designed components or accessories therefor, specially designed for the "development" or "production" of equipment, functions or features, specified in 5A001;
Note:
5B001.a. does not control optical fibre characterization equipment.
b.
Equipment and specially designed components or accessories therefor, specially designed for the "development" of any of the following telecommunication transmission or switching equipment:
1.
Not used;
2.
Equipment employing a "laser" and having any of the following:
a.
A transmission wavelength exceeding 1 750 nm; 
or
b.
Not used;
c.
Not used;
d.
Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz; 
or
Note:
5B001.b.2.d. does not control equipment specially designed for the "development" of commercial TV systems.
3.
Not used;
4.
Radio equipment employing Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation (QAM) techniques above level 1 024;
5.
Not used.
5C1   
Materials
None
5D1   
Software
5D001
"Software" as follows:
a.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment, functions or features, specified in 5A001;
b.
Not used;
c.
Specific "software" specially designed or modified to provide characteristics, functions or features of equipment, specified in 5A001 or 5B001;
d.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development" of any of the following telecommunication transmission or switching equipment:
1.
Not used;
2.
Equipment employing a "laser" and having any of the following:
a.
A transmission wavelength exceeding 1 750 nm; 
or
b.
Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz; 
or
Note:
5D001.d.2.b. does not control "software" specially designed or modified for the "development" of commercial TV systems.
3.
Not used;
4.
Radio equipment employing Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation (QAM) techniques above level 1 024.
e.
"Software", other than that specified in 5D001.a. or 5D001.c., specially designed or modified for monitoring or analysis by law enforcement, providing all of the following:
1.
Execution of searches on the basis of "hard selectors" of either the content of communication or metadata acquired from a communications service provider using a 'handover interface'; 
and
2.
Mapping of the relational network or tracking the movement of targeted individuals based on the results of searches on content of communication or metadata or searches as described in 5D001.e.1.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 5D001.e., a 'handover interface' is a physical and logical interface, designed for use by an authorised law enforcement authority, across which targeted interception measures are requested from a communications service provider and the results of interception are delivered from a communications service provider to the requesting authority. The 'handover interface' is implemented within systems or equipment (e.g., mediation devices) that receive and validate the interception request, and deliver to the requesting authority only the results of interception that fulfil the validated request.
2.
'Handover interfaces' may be specified by international standards (including but not limited to ETSI TS 101 331, ETSI TS 101 671, 3GPP TS 33.108) or national equivalents.
Note:
5D001.e. does not control "software" specially designed or modified for any of the following:
a.
Billing purposes;
b.
Network Quality of Service (QoS);
c.
Quality of Experience (QoE);
d.
Mediation devices; 
or
e.
Mobile payment or banking use.
5D101
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of equipment specified in 5A101.
5E1   
Technology
5E001
"Technology" as follows:
a.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development", "production" or "use" (excluding operation) of equipment, functions or features specified in 5A001 or "software" specified in 5D001.a. or 5D001.e.;
b.
Specific "technology" as follows:
1.
"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of telecommunications equipment specially designed to be used on board satellites;
2.
"Technology" for the "development" or "use" of "laser" communication techniques with the capability of automatically acquiring and tracking signals and maintaining communications through exoatmosphere or sub-surface (water) media;
3.
"Technology" for the "development" of digital cellular radio base station receiving equipment whose reception capabilities that allow multi-band, multi-channel, multi-mode, multi-coding algorithm or multi-protocol operation can be modified by changes in "software";
4.
"Technology" for the "development" of "spread spectrum" techniques, including "frequency hopping" techniques;
Note:
5E001.b.4. does not control "technology" for the "development" of any of the following:
a.
Civil cellular radio-communications systems; 
or
b.
Fixed or mobile satellite earth stations for commercial civil telecommunications.
c.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:
1.
Not used;
2.
Equipment employing a "laser" and having any of the following:
a.
A transmission wavelength exceeding 1 750 nm; 
or
b.
Not used;
c.
Not used;
d.
Employing wavelength division multiplexing techniques of optical carriers at less than 100 GHz spacing; 
or
e.
Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz;
Note:
5E001.c.2.e. does not control "technology" for commercial TV systems.
N.B.
For "technology" for the "development" or "production" of non-telecommunications equipment employing a laser, see 6E.
3.
Equipment employing "optical switching" and having a switching time less than 1 ms;
4.
Radio equipment having any of the following:
a.
Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation (QAM) techniques above level 1 024;
b.
Operating at input or output frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz; 
or
Note:
5E001.c.4.b. does not control "technology" for equipment designed or modified for operation in any frequency band which is "allocated by the ITU" for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.
c.
Operating in the 1,5 MHz to 87,5 MHz band and incorporating adaptive techniques providing more than 15 dB suppression of an interfering signal; 
or
5.
Not used;
6.
Mobile equipment having all of the following:
a.
Operating at an optical wavelength greater than or equal to 200 nm and less than or equal to 400 nm; 
and
b.
Operating as a "local area network";
d.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of "Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit" ("MMIC") amplifiers specially designed for telecommunications and that are any of the following:
Technical Note:
For purposes of 5E001.d., the parameter peak saturated power output may also be referred to on product data sheets as output power, saturated power output, maximum power output, peak power output, or peak envelope power output.
1.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 15%, and having any of the following:
a.
A peak saturated power output greater than 75 W (48,75 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;
b.
A peak saturated power output greater than 55 W (47,4 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;
c.
A peak saturated power output greater than 40 W (46 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; 
or
d.
A peak saturated power output greater than 20 W (43 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;
2.
Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 16 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 10%, and having any of the following:
a.
A peak saturated power output greater than 10W (40 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz; 
or
b.
A peak saturated power output greater than 5W (37 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 16 GHz;
3.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 3 W (34,77 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
4.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;
5.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 1 W (30 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
6.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 31,62 mW (15 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz up to and including 75 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;
7.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 10 mW (10 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 75 GHz up to and including 90 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 5%; 
or
8.
Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 90 GHz;
e.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of electronic devices and circuits, specially designed for telecommunications and containing components manufactured from "superconductive" materials, specially designed for operation at temperatures below the "critical temperature" of at least one of the "superconductive" constituents and having any of the following:
1.
Current switching for digital circuits using "superconductive" gates with a product of delay time per gate (in seconds) and power dissipation per gate (in watts) of less than 10
-14
 J; 
or
2.
Frequency selection at all frequencies using resonant circuits with Q-values exceeding 10 000.
5E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment specified in 5A101.
Part 2 - "INFORMATION SECURITY"
Note 1:
Not used.
Note 2:
Category 5, Part 2 does not control products when accompanying their user for the user's personal use.
Note 3:
Cryptography Note
5A002, 5D002.a.1., 5D002.b. and 5D002.c.1. do not control items as follows:
a.
Items that meet all of the following:
1.
Generally available to the public by being sold, without restriction, from stock at retail selling points by means of any of the following:
a.
Over-the-counter transactions;
b.
Mail order transactions;
c.
Electronic transactions; 
or
d.
Telephone call transactions;
2.
The cryptographic functionality cannot easily be changed by the user;
3.
Designed for installation by the user without further substantial support by the supplier; 
and
4.
When necessary, details of the goods are accessible and will be provided, upon request, to the competent authorities of the EU Member State in which the exporter is established in order to ascertain compliance with conditions described in paragraphs 1. to 3. above;
b.
Hardware components or 'executable software',
of existing items described in paragraph a. of this Note, that have been designed for these existing items, meeting all of the following:
1.
"Information security" is not the primary function or set of functions of the component or 'executable software';
2.
The component or 'executable software' does not change any cryptographic functionality of the existing items, or add new cryptographic functionality to the existing items;
3.
The feature set of the component or 'executable software' is fixed and is not designed or modified to customer specification; 
and
4.
When necessary as determined by the competent authorities of the EU Member State in which the exporter is established, details of the component or 'executable software' and details of relevant end-items are accessible and will be provided to the competent authority upon request, in order to ascertain compliance with conditions described above.
Technical Note:
For the purpose of the Cryptography Note, 'executable software' means "software" in executable form, from an existing hardware component excluded from 5A002 by the Cryptography Note.
Note:
'Executable software' does not include complete binary images of the "software" running on an end-item.
Note to the Cryptography Note:
1.
To meet paragraph a. of Note 3, all of the following must apply:
a.
The item is of potential interest to a wide range of individuals and businesses; 
and
b.
The price and information about the main functionality of the item are available before purchase without the need to consult the vendor or supplier. A simple price enquiry is not considered to be a consultation.
2.
In determining eligibility of paragraph a. of Note 3, competent authorities may take into account relevant factors such as quantity, price, required technical skill, existing sales channels, typical customers, typical use or any exclusionary practices of the supplier.
5A2   
Systems, Equipment and Components
5A002
"Information security" systems, equipment and components, as follows:
N.B.
For the control of "satellite navigation system" receiving equipment containing or employing decryption, see 7A005 and for related decryption "software" and "technology" see 7D005 and 7E001.
a.
Designed or modified to use 'cryptography for data confidentiality' having a 'described security algorithm', where that cryptographic capability is usable, has been activated, or can be activated by any means other than secure "cryptographic activation", as follows:
1.
Items having "information security" as a primary function;
2.
Digital communication or networking systems, equipment or components, not specified in 5A002.a.1.;
3.
Computers, other items having information storage or processing as a primary function, and components therefor, not specified in 5A002.a.1. or 5A002.a.2.;
N.B.
For operating systems, see also 5D002.a.1. and 5D002.c.1.
4.
Items, not specified in 5A002.a.1. to 5A002.a.3., where the 'cryptography for data confidentiality' having a 'described security algorithm' meets all of the following:
a.
It supports a non-primary function of the item; 
and
b.
It is performed by incorporated equipment or "software" that would, as a standalone item, be specified in Category 5, Part 2.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 5A002.a., 'cryptography for data confidentiality' means "cryptography" that employs digital techniques and performs any cryptographic function other than any of the following:
a.
"Authentication";
b.
Digital signature;
c.
Data integrity;
d.
Non-repudiation;
e.
Digital rights management, including the execution of copy-protected "software";
f.
Encryption or decryption in support of entertainment, mass commercial broadcasts or medical records management; 
or
g.
Key management in support of any function described in paragraph a. to f. above.
2.
For the purposes of 5A002.a., 'described security algorithm' means any of the following:
a.
A "symmetric algorithm" employing a key length in excess of 56 bits, not including parity bits;
b.
An "asymmetric algorithm" where the security of the algorithm is based on any of the following:
1.
Factorisation of integers in excess of 512 bits (e.g., RSA);
2.
Computation of discrete logarithms in a multiplicative group of a finite field of size greater than 512 bits (e.g., Diffie-Hellman over Z/pZ); 
or
3.
Discrete logarithms in a group other than mentioned in paragraph b.2. in excess of 112 bits (e.g., Diffie-Hellman over an elliptic curve); 
or
c.
An "asymmetric algorithm" where the security of the algorithm is based on any of the following:
1.
Shortest vector or closest vector problems associated with lattices (e.g., NewHope, Frodo, NTRUEncrypt, Kyber, Titanium);
2.
Finding isogenies between Supersingular elliptic curves (e.g., Supersingular Isogeny Key Encapsulation); 
or
3.
Decoding random codes (e.g., McEliece, Niederreiter).
Technical Note:
An algorithm described by Technical Note 2.c. may be referred to as being post-quantum, quantum-safe or quantum-resistant.
Note 1:
When necessary as determined by the appropriate authority in the exporter's country, details of items must be accessible and provided to the authority upon request, in order to establish any of the following:
a.
Whether the item meets the criteria of 5A002.a.1. to 5A002.a.4.; 
or
b.
Whether the cryptographic capability for data confidentiality specified in 5A002.a. is usable without "cryptographic activation".
Note 2:
5A002.a. does not control any of the following items, or specially designed "information security" components therefor:
a.
Smart cards and smart card 'readers/writers' as follows:
1.
A smart card or an electronically readable personal document (e.g., token coin, e-passport) that meets any of the following:
a.
The cryptographic capability meets all of the following:
1.
It is restricted for use in any of the following:
a.
Equipment or systems not described by 5A002.a.1. to 5A002.a.4.;
b.
Equipment or systems not using 'cryptography for data
confidentiality' having a 'described security algorithm'; 
or
c.
Equipment or systems, excluded from 5A002.a., by paragraphs b. to f. of this Note; 
and
2.
It cannot be reprogrammed for any other use; or:
b.
Having all of the following:
1.
It is specially designed and limited to allow protection of 'personal data' stored within;
2.
Has been, or can only be, personalised for public or commercial transactions or individual identification; 
and
3.
Where the cryptographic capability is not user-accessible;
Technical Note:
'Personal data' includes any data specific to a particular person or entity, such
as the amount of money stored and data necessary for "authentication".
2.
'Readers/writers' specially designed or modified, and limited, for items specified in paragraph a.1. of this Note.
Technical Note:
'Readers/writers' include equipment that communicates with smart cards or electronically readable documents through a network.
b.
Cryptographic equipment specially designed and limited for banking use or 'money transactions';
Technical Note:
'Money transactions' in 5A002.a. Note 2.b. includes the collection and settlement of fares or credit functions.
c.
Portable or mobile radiotelephones for civil use (e.g., for use with commercial civil cellular radio communication systems) that are not capable of transmitting encrypted data directly to another radiotelephone or equipment (other than Radio Access Network (RAN) equipment), nor of passing encrypted data through RAN equipment (e.g., Radio Network Controller (RNC) or Base Station Controller (BSC));
d.
Cordless telephone equipment not capable of end-to-end encryption where the maximum effective range of unboosted cordless operation (i.e. a single, unrelayed hop between terminal and home base station) is less than 400 metres according to the manufacturer's specifications;
e.
Portable or mobile radiotelephones and similar client wireless devices for civil use, that implement only published or commercial cryptographic standards (except for anti-piracy functions, which may be non-published) and also meet the provisions of paragraphs a.2. to a.4. of the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2), that have been customised for a specific civil industry application with features that do not affect the cryptographic functionality of these original non-customised devices;
f.
Items, where the "information security" functionality is limited to wireless "personal area network" functionality, implementing only published or commercial cryptographic standards;
g.
Mobile telecommunications Radio Access Network (RAN) equipment designed for civil use, which also meet the provisions of paragraphs a.2. to a.4. of the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2), having an RF output power limited to 0,1W (20 dBm) or less, and supporting 16 or fewer concurrent users;
h.
Routers, switches, gateways or relays, where the "information security" functionality is limited to the tasks of "Operations, Administration or Maintenance" ("OAM") implementing only published or commercial cryptographic standards; 
or
i.
General purpose computing equipment or servers, where the "information security" functionality meets all of the following:
1.
Uses only published or commercial cryptographic standards; 
and
2.
Is any of the following:
a.
Integral to a CPU that meets the provisions of Note 3 to Category 5, Part
 
2;
b.
Integral to an operating system that is not specified in 5D002; 
or
c.
Limited to "OAM" of the equipment.
j.
Items specially designed for a 'connected civil industry application', meeting all of the following:
1.
Being any of the following:
a.
A network-capable endpoint device meeting any of the following:
1.
The "information security" functionality is limited to securing 'non-arbitrary data' or the tasks of "Operations, Administration or Maintenance" ("OAM"); 
or
2.
The device is limited to a specific 'connected civil industry application'; 
or
b.
Networking equipment meeting all of the following:
1.
Being specially designed to communicate with the devices specified in paragraph j.1.a. above; 
and
2.
The "information security" functionality is limited to supporting the 'connected civil industry application' of devices specified in paragraph j.1.a. above, or the tasks of "OAM" of this networking equipment or of other items specified in paragraph j. of this Note; 
and
2.
Where the "information security" functionality implements only published or commercial cryptographic standards, and the cryptographic functionality cannot easily be changed by the user.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Connected civil industry application' means a network connected consumer or civil industry application other than "information security", digital communication, general purpose networking or computing.
2.
'Non-arbitrary data' means sensor or metering data directly related to the stability, performance or physical measurement of a system (e.g., temperature, pressure, flow rate, mass, volume, voltage, physical location etc.), that cannot be changed by the user of the device.
b.
Being a 'cryptographic activation token';
Technical Note:
A 'cryptographic activation token' is an item designed or modified for any of the following:
1.
Converting, by means of "cryptographic activation", an item not specified in Category 5, Part 2 into an item specified in 5A002.a. or 5D002.c.1., and not released by the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2); 
or
2.
Enabling, by means of "cryptographic activation", additional functionality specified in 5A002.a. of an item already specified in Category 5, Part 2.
c.
Designed or modified to use or perform "quantum cryptography";
Technical Note:
"Quantum cryptography" is also known as Quantum Key Distribution (QKD).
d.
Designed or modified to use cryptographic techniques to generate channelising codes, scrambling codes or network identification codes, for systems using ultra-wideband modulation techniques and having any of the following:
1.
A bandwidth exceeding 500 MHz; 
or
2.
A "fractional bandwidth" of 20% or more;
e.
Designed or modified to use cryptographic techniques to generate the spreading code for "spread spectrum" systems, other than those specified in 5A002.d., including the hopping code for "frequency hopping" systems.
5A003
Systems, equipment and components, for non-cryptographic "information security", as follows:
a.
Communications cable systems designed or modified using mechanical, electrical or electronic means to detect surreptitious intrusion;
Note:
5A003.a. only controls physical layer security. For the purpose of 5A003.a., the physical layer includes Layer 1 of the Reference Model of Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) (ISO/IEC 7498-1).
b.
Specially designed or modified to reduce the compromising emanations of information-bearing signals beyond what is necessary for health, safety or electromagnetic interference standards.
5A004
Systems, equipment and components for defeating, weakening or bypassing "information security", as follows:
a.
Designed or modified to perform 'cryptanalytic functions'.
Note:
5A004.a. includes systems or equipment, designed or modified to perform 'cryptanalytic functions' by means of reverse engineering.
Technical Note:
'Cryptanalytic functions' are functions designed to defeat cryptographic mechanisms in order to derive confidential variables or sensitive data, including clear text, passwords or cryptographic keys.
b.
Items, not specified in 4A005 or 5A004.a., designed to perform all of the following:
1.
'Extract raw data' from a computing or communications device; 
and
2.
Circumvent "authentication" or authorisation controls of the device, in order to perform the function described in 5A004.b.1.
Technical Note:
'Extract raw data' from a computing or communications device means to retrieve binary data from a storage medium (e.g., RAM, flash or hard disk) of the device without interpretation by the device’s operating system or filesystem.
Note1:
5A004.b. does not control systems or equipment specially designed for the "development" or "production" of a computing or communications device.
Note 2:
5A004.b. does not include:
a.
Debuggers, hypervisors;
b.
Items limited to logical data extraction;
c.
Data extraction items using chip-off or JTAG; 
or
d.
Items specially designed and limited to jail-breaking or rooting.
5B2   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
5B002
"Information security" test, inspection and "production" equipment, as follows:
a.
Equipment specially designed for the "development" or "production" of equipment specified in 5A002, 5A003, 5A004 or 5B002.b.;
b.
Measuring equipment specially designed to evaluate and validate the "information security" functions of the equipment specified in 5A002, 5A003 or 5A004, or of "software" specified in 5D002.a. or 5D002.c.
5C2   
Materials
None.
5D2   
Software
5D002
"Software" as follows:
a.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of any of the following:
1.
Equipment specified in 5A002 or "software" specified in 5D002.c.1.;
2.
Equipment specified in 5A003 or "software" specified in 5D002.c.2.; 
or
3.
Equipment or "software", as follows:
a.
Equipment specified in 5A004.a. or "software" specified in 5D002.c.3.a.;
b.
Equipment specified in 5A004.b. or "software" specified in 5D002.c.3.b.
b.
"Software" having the characteristics of a 'cryptographic activation token' specified in 5A002.b.;
c.
"Software" having the characteristics of, or performing or simulating the functions of, any of the following:
1.
Equipment specified in 5A002.a., 5A002.c., 5A002.d. or 5A002.e.;
Note:
5D002.c.1. does not control "software" limited to the tasks of "OAM" implementing only published or commercial cryptographic standards.
2.
Equipment specified in 5A003; 
or
3.
Equipment, as follows:
a.
Equipment specified in 5A004.a.;
b.
Equipment specified in 5A004.b.
Note:
5D002.c.3.b. does not control "intrusion software".
d.
Not used.
5E2   
Technology
5E002
"Technology" as follows:
a.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment specified in 5A002, 5A003, 5A004 or 5B002, or of "software" specified in 5D002.a. or 5D002.c.
Note:
5E002.a. does not control "technology" for items specified in 5A004.b., 5D002.a.3.b. or 5D002.c.3.b.
b.
"Technology" having the characteristics of a 'cryptographic activation token' specified in 5A002.b.
Note:
5E002 includes "information security" technical data resulting from procedures carried out to evaluate or determine the implementation of functions, features or techniques specified in Category 5, Part 2.
PART VIII –
Category 6
CATEGORY 6 - SENSORS AND LASERS
6A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
6A001
Acoustic systems, equipment and components, as follows:
a.
Marine acoustic systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
1.
Active (transmitting or transmitting-and-receiving) systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
Note:
6A001.a.1. does not control equipment as follows:
a.
Depth sounders operating vertically below the apparatus, not including a scanning function exceeding ± 20°, and limited to measuring the depth of water, the distance of submerged or buried objects or fish finding;
b.
Acoustic beacons, as follows:
1.
Acoustic emergency beacons;
2.
Pingers specially designed for relocating or returning to an underwater position.
a.
Acoustic seabed survey equipment as follows:
1.
Surface vessel survey equipment designed for seabed topographic mapping and having all of the following:
a.
Designed to take measurements at an angle exceeding 20° from the vertical;
b.
Designed to measure seabed topography at seabed depths exceeding 600 m;
c.
'Sounding resolution' less than 2; 
and
d.
'Enhancement' of the depth "accuracy" through compensation for all the following:
1.
Motion of the acoustic sensor;
2.
In-water propagation from sensor to the seabed and back; 
and
3.
Sound speed at the sensor;
Technical Notes:
1.
'Sounding resolution' is the swath width (degrees) divided by the maximum number of soundings per swath.
2.
'Enhancement' includes the ability to compensate by external means.
2.
Underwater survey equipment designed for seabed topographic mapping and having any of the following:
Technical Note:
The acoustic sensor pressure rating determines the depth rating of the equipment specified in 6A001.a.1.a.2.
a.
Having all of the following:
1.
Designed or modified to operate at depths exceeding 300 m; 
and
2.
'Sounding rate' greater than 3 800 m/s; 
or
Technical Note:
'Sounding rate' is the product of the maximum speed (m/s) at which the sensor can operate and the maximum number of soundings per swath assuming 100% coverage. For systems that produce soundings in two directions (3D sonars), the maximum of the 'sounding rate' in either direction should be used.
b.
Survey equipment, not specified in 6A001.a.1.a.2.a., having all of the following:
1.
Designed or modified to operate at depths exceeding 100 m;
2.
Designed to take measurements at an angle exceeding 20° from the vertical;
3.
Having any of the following:
a.
Operating frequency below 350 kHz; 
or
b.
Designed to measure seabed topography at a range exceeding 200 m from the acoustic sensor; 
and
4.
'Enhancement' of the depth "accuracy" through compensation of all of the following:
a.
Motion of the acoustic sensor;
b.
In-water propagation from sensor to the seabed and back; 
and
c.
Sound speed at the sensor;
3.
Side Scan Sonar (SSS) or Synthetic Aperture Sonar (SAS), designed for seabed imaging and having all of the following, and specially designed transmitting and receiving acoustic arrays therefor:
a.
Designed or modified to operate at depths exceeding 500 m;
b.
An 'area coverage rate' of greater than 570 m
2
/s while operating at the maximum range that it can operate with an 'along track resolution' of less than 15 cm; 
and
c.
An 'across track resolution' of less than 15 cm;
Technical Notes:
1.
'Area coverage rate' (m
2
/s) is twice the product of the sonar range (m) and the maximum speed (m/s) at which the sensor can operate at that range.
2.
'Along track resolution' (cm), for SSS only, is the product of azimuth (horizontal) beamwidth (degrees) and sonar range (m) and 0,873.
3.
'Across track resolution' (cm) is 75 divided by the signal bandwidth (kHz).
b.
Systems or transmitting and receiving arrays, designed for object detection or location, having any of the following:
1.
A transmitting frequency below 10 kHz;
2.
Sound pressure level exceeding 224 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) for equipment with an operating frequency in the band from 10 kHz to 24 kHz inclusive;
3.
Sound pressure level exceeding 235 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) for equipment with an operating frequency in the band between 24 kHz and 30 kHz;
4.
Forming beams of less than 1° on any axis and having an operating frequency of less than 100 kHz;
5.
Designed to operate with an unambiguous display range exceeding 5 120 m; 
or
6.
Designed to withstand pressure during normal operation at depths exceeding 1 000 m and having transducers with any of the following:
a.
Dynamic compensation for pressure; 
or
b.
Incorporating other than lead zirconate titanate as the transduction element;
c.
Acoustic projectors (including transducers), incorporating piezoelectric, magnetostrictive, electrostrictive, electrodynamic or hydraulic elements operating individually or in a designed combination and having any of the following:
Note 1:
The control status of acoustic projectors, including transducers, specially designed for other equipment not specified in 6A001 is determined by the control status of the other equipment.
Note 2:
6A001.a.1.c. does not control electronic sources which direct the sound vertically only, or mechanical (e.g., air gun or vapour-shock gun) or chemical (e.g., explosive) sources.
Note 3:
Piezoelectric elements specified in 6A001.a.1.c. include those made from lead-magnesium-niobate/lead-titanate (Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
-PbTiO
3
, or PMN-PT) single crystals grown from solid solution or lead-indium-niobate/lead-magnesium niobate/lead-titanate (Pb(In
1/2
Nb
1/2
)O
3
–Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
–PbTiO
3
, or PIN-PMN-PT) single crystals grown from solid solution.
1.
Operating at frequencies below 10 kHz and having any of the following:
a.
Not designed for continuous operation at 100% duty cycle and having a radiated 'free-field Source Level (SL
RMS
)' exceeding (10log(f) + 169,77) dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) where f is the frequency in Hertz of maximum Transmitting Voltage Response (TVR) below 10kHz; 
or
b.
Designed for continuous operation at 100% duty cycle and having a continuously radiated 'free-field Source Level (SL
RMS
)' at 100% duty cycle exceeding (10log(f) + 159,77) dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) where f is the frequency in Hertz of maximum Transmitting Voltage Response (TVR) below 10kHz; 
or
Technical Note:
The 'free-field Source Level ( SL
RMS
)' is defined along the maximum response axis and in the far field of the acoustic projector. It can be obtained from the Transmitting Voltage Response using the following equation: SL
RMS
 = (TVR + 20log V
RMS
) dB (ref 1μPa at 1 m), where SL
RMS
 is the source level, TVR is the Transmitting Voltage Response and V
RMS
 is the Driving Voltage of the Projector.
2.
Not used;
3.
Side-lobe suppression exceeding 22 dB;
d.
Acoustic systems and equipment, designed to determine the position of surface vessels or underwater vehicles and having all the following, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Detection range exceeding 1 000 m; 
and
2.
Determined position error of less than 10 m rms (root mean square) when measured at a range of 1 000 m;
Note:
 6A001.a.1.d. includes:
a.
Equipment using coherent "signal processing" between two or more beacons and the hydrophone unit carried by the surface vessel or underwater vehicle;
b.
Equipment capable of automatically correcting speed-of-sound propagation errors for calculation of a point.
e.
Active individual sonars, specially designed or modified to detect, locate and automatically classify swimmers or divers, having all of the following, and specially designed transmitting and receiving acoustic arrays therefor:
1.
Detection range exceeding 530 m;
2.
Determined position error of less than 15 m rms (root mean square) when measured at a range of 530 m; 
and
3.
Transmitted pulse signal bandwidth exceeding 3 kHz;
N.B.
For diver detection systems specially designed or modified for military use, see the Military Goods Controls.
Note:
For 6A001.a.1.e., where multiple detection ranges are specified for various environments, the greatest detection range is used.
2.
Passive systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
Note:
6A001.a.2. also controls receiving equipment, whether or not related in normal application to separate active equipment, and specially designed components therefor.
a.
Hydrophones having any of the following:
Note:
The control status of hydrophones specially designed for other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.
Technical Notes:
1.
Hydrophones consist of one or more sensing elements producing a single acoustic output channel. Those that contain multiple elements can be referred to as a hydrophone group.
2.
For the purposes of 6A001.a.2.a., underwater acoustic transducers designed to operate as passive receivers are hydrophones.
1.
Incorporating continuous flexible sensing elements;
2.
Incorporating flexible assemblies of discrete sensing elements with either a diameter or length less than 20 mm and with a separation between elements of less than 20 mm;
3.
Having any of the following sensing elements:
a.
Optical fibres;
b.
'Piezoelectric polymer films' other than polyvinylidene-fluoride (PVDF) and its co-polymers {P(VDF-TrFE) and P(VDF-TFE)};
c.
'Flexible piezoelectric composites';
d.
Lead-magnesium-niobate/lead-titanate (i.e., Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
-PbTiO
3
, or PMN-PT) piezoelectric single crystals grown from solid solution; 
or
e.
Lead-indium-niobate/lead-magnesium niobate/lead-titanate (i.e., Pb(In
1/2
Nb
1/2
)O
3
–Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
–PbTiO
3
, or PIN-PMN-PT) piezoelectric single crystals grown from solid solution;
4.
A 'hydrophone sensitivity' better than -180 dB at any depth with no acceleration compensation;
5.
Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m with acceleration compensation; 
or
6.
Designed for operation at depths exceeding 1 000 m and having a 'hydrophone sensitivity' better than -230 dB below 4 kHz;
Technical Notes:
1.
'Piezoelectric polymer film' sensing elements consist of polarised polymer film that is stretched over and attached to a supporting frame or spool (mandrel).
2.
'Flexible piezoelectric composite' sensing elements consist of piezoelectric ceramic particles or fibres combined with an electrically insulating, acoustically transparent rubber, polymer or epoxy compound, where the compound is an integral part of the sensing elements.
3.
'Hydrophone sensitivity' is defined as twenty times the logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of rms output voltage to a 1 V rms reference, when the hydrophone sensor, without a pre-amplifier, is placed in a plane wave acoustic field with an rms pressure of 1 μPa. For example, a hydrophone of -160 dB (reference 1 V per μPa) would yield an output voltage of 10
-8
 V in such a field, while one of -180 dB sensitivity would yield only 10
-9
 V output. Thus, -160 dB is better than -180 dB.
b.
Towed acoustic hydrophone arrays having any of the following:
Technical Note:
Hydrophone arrays consist of a number of hydrophones providing multiple acoustic output channels.
1.
Hydrophone group spacing of less than 12,5 m or 'able to be modified' to have hydrophone group spacing of less than 12,5 m;
2.
Designed or 'able to be modified' to operate at depths exceeding 35 m;
Technical note:
'Able to be modified' in 6A001.a.2.b.1. and 2. means having provisions to allow a change of the wiring or interconnections to alter hydrophone group spacing or operating depth limits. These provisions are: spare wiring exceeding 10% of the number of wires, hydrophone group spacing adjustment blocks or internal depth limiting devices that are adjustable or that control more than one hydrophone group.
3.
Heading sensors specified in 6A001.a.2.d.;
4.
Longitudinally reinforced array hoses;
5.
An assembled array of less than 40 mm in diameter;
6.
Not used;
7.
Hydrophone characteristics specified in 6A001.a.2.a.; 
or
8.
Accelerometer-based hydro-acoustic sensors specified in 6A001.a.2.g.;
c.
Processing equipment, specially designed for towed acoustic hydrophone arrays, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;
d.
Heading sensors having all of the following:
1.
An "accuracy" of better than 0,5°; 
and
2.
Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m or having an adjustable or removable depth sensing device in order to operate at depths exceeding 35 m;
N.B.
For inertial heading systems, see 7A003.c.
e.
Bottom or bay-cable hydrophone arrays, having any of the following:
1.
Incorporating hydrophones specified in 6A001.a.2.a.;
2.
Incorporating multiplexed hydrophone group signal modules having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m or having an adjustable or removable depth sensing device in order to operate at depths exceeding 35 m; 
and
b.
Capable of being operationally interchanged with towed acoustic hydrophone array modules; 
or
3.
Incorporating accelerometer-based hydro-acoustic sensors specified in 6A001.a.2.g.;
f.
Processing equipment, specially designed for bottom or bay cable systems, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;
g.
Accelerometer-based hydro-acoustic sensors having all of the following:
1.
Composed of three accelerometers arranged along three distinct axes;
2.
Having an overall 'acceleration sensitivity' better than 48 dB (reference 1 000 mV rms per 1g);
3.
Designed to operate at depths greater than 35 meters; 
and
4.
Operating frequency below 20 kHz.
Note:
6A001.a.2.g. does not control particle velocity sensors or geophones.
Technical Notes:
1.
Accelerometer-based hydro-acoustic sensors are also known as vector sensors.
2.
'Acceleration sensitivity' is defined as twenty times the logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of rms output voltage to a 1 V rms reference, when the hydro-acoustic sensor, without a preamplifier, is placed in a plane wave acoustic field with an rms acceleration of 1 g (i.e., 9,81 m/s
2
).
b.
Correlation-velocity and Doppler-velocity sonar log equipment, designed to measure the horizontal speed of the equipment carrier relative to the sea bed, as follows:
1.
Correlation-velocity sonar log equipment having any of the following characteristics:
a.
Designed to operate at distances between the carrier and the sea bed exceeding 500 m; 
or
b.
Having speed "accuracy" better than 1% of speed;
2.
Doppler-velocity sonar log equipment having speed "accuracy" better than 1% of speed.
Note 1:
6A001.b. does not control depth sounders limited to any of the following:
a.
Measuring the depth of water;
b.
Measuring the distance of submerged or buried objects; 
or
c.
Fish finding.
Note 2:
6A001.b. does not control equipment specially designed for installation on surface vessels.
c.
Not used.
6A002
Optical sensors or equipment and components therefor, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6A102.
a.
Optical detectors as follows:
1.
"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors as follows:
Note:
For the purpose of 6A002.a.1., solid-state detectors include "focal plane arrays".
a.
"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors having all of the following:
1.
A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm but not exceeding 300 nm; 
and
2.
A response of less than 0,1% relative to the peak response at a wavelength exceeding 400 nm;
b.
"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors having all of the following:
1.
A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 900 nm but not exceeding 1 200 nm; 
and
2.
A response "time constant" of 95 ns or less;
c.
"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 200 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm;
d.
"Space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having more than 2 048 elements per array and having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 300 nm but not exceeding 900 nm;
2.
Image intensifier tubes and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
Note:
6A002.a.2. does not control non-imaging photomultiplier tubes having an electron sensing device in the vacuum space limited solely to any of the following:
a.
A single metal anode; 
or
b.
Metal anodes with a centre to centre spacing greater than 500 μm.
Technical Note:
'Charge multiplication' is a form of electronic image amplification and is defined as the generation of charge carriers as a result of an impact ionisation gain process. 'Charge multiplication' sensors may take the form of an image intensifier tube, solid state detector or "focal plane array".
a.
Image intensifier tubes having all of the following:
1.
A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 1 050 nm;
2.
Electron image amplification using any of the following:
a.
A microchannel plate with a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less; 
or
b.
An electron sensing device with a non-binned pixel pitch of 500 μm or less, specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' other than by a microchannel plate; 
and
3.
Any of the following photocathodes:
a.
Multialkali photocathodes (e.g., S-20 and S-25) having a luminous sensitivity exceeding 350 μA/lm;
b.
GaAs or GaInAs photocathodes; 
or
c.
Other "III/V compound" semiconductor photocathodes having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W;
b.
Image intensifier tubes having all of the following:
1.
A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 050 nm but not exceeding 1 800 nm;
2.
Electron image amplification using any of the following:
a.
A microchannel plate with a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less; 
or
b.
An electron sensing device with a non-binned pixel pitch of 500 μm or less, specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' other than by a microchannel plate; 
and
3.
"III/V compound" semiconductor (e.g., GaAs or GaInAs) photocathodes and transferred electron photocathodes, having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 15 mA/W;
c.
Specially designed components as follows:
1.
Microchannel plates having a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less;
2.
An electron sensing device with a non-binned pixel pitch of 500 μm or less, specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' other than by a microchannel plate;
3.
"III/V compound" semiconductor (e.g., GaAs or GaInAs) photocathodes and transferred electron photocathodes;
Note:
6A002.a.2.c.3. does not control compound semiconductor photocathodes designed to achieve a maximum "radiant sensitivity" of any of the following:
a.
10 mA/W or less at the peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 1 050 nm; 
or
b.
15 mA/W or less at the peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 050 nm but not exceeding 1 800 nm.
3.
Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" as follows:
N.B.
'Microbolometer' non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" are only specified in 6A002.a.3.f.
Technical Note:
Linear or two-dimensional multi-element detector arrays are referred to as "focal plane arrays";
Note 1:
6A002.a.3. includes photoconductive arrays and photovoltaic arrays.
Note 2:
6A002.a.3. does not control:
a.
Multi-element (not to exceed 16 elements) encapsulated photoconductive cells using either lead sulphide or lead selenide;
b.
Pyroelectric detectors using any of the following:
1.
Triglycine sulphate and variants;
2.
Lead-lanthanum-zirconium titanate and variants;
3.
Lithium tantalate;
4.
Polyvinylidene fluoride and variants; 
or
5.
Strontium barium niobate and variants;
c.
"Focal plane arrays" specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and limited by design to have a maximum "radiant sensitivity" of 10 mA/W or less for wavelengths exceeding 760 nm, having all of the following:
1.
Incorporating a response limiting mechanism designed not to be removed or modified; 
and
2.
Any of the following:
a.
The response limiting mechanism is integral to or combined with the detector element; 
or
b.
The "focal plane array" is only operable with the response limiting mechanism in place.
Technical Note:
A response limiting mechanism integral to the detector element is designed not to be removed or modified without rendering the detector inoperable.
d.
Thermopile arrays having less than 5 130 elements.
Technical Note:
'Charge multiplication' is a form of electronic image amplification and is defined as the generation of charge carriers as a result of an impact ionisation gain process. 'Charge multiplication' sensors may take the form of an image intensifier tube, solid state detector or "focal plane array".
a.
Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having all of the following:
1.
Individual elements with a peak response within the wavelength range exceeding 900 nm but not exceeding 1 050 nm; 
and
2.
Any of the following:
a.
A response "time constant" of less than 0,5 ns; 
or
b.
Specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W;
b.
Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having all of the following:
1.
Individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 050 nm but not exceeding 1 200 nm; 
and
2.
Any of the following:
a.
A response "time constant" of 95 ns or less; 
or
b.
Specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W;
c.
Non-"space-qualified" non-linear (2-dimensional) "focal plane arrays" having individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 200 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm;
N.B.
Silicon and other material based 'microbolometer' non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" are only specified in 6A002.a.3.f.
d.
Non-"space-qualified" linear (1-dimensional) "focal plane arrays" having all of the following:
1.
Individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 200 nm but not exceeding 3 000 nm; 
and
2.
Any of the following:
a.
A ratio of 'scan direction' dimension of the detector element to the 'cross-scan direction' dimension of the detector element of less than 3,8; 
or
b.
Signal processing in the detector elements;
Note:
6A002.a.3.d. does not control "focal plane arrays" (not to exceed 32 elements) having detector elements limited solely to germanium material.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 6A002.a.3.d., 'cross-scan direction' is defined as the axis parallel to the linear array of detector elements and the 'scan direction' is defined as the axis perpendicular to the linear array of detector elements.
e.
Non-"space-qualified" linear (1-dimensional) "focal plane arrays" having individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 3 000 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm;
f.
Non-"space-qualified" non-linear (2-dimensional) infrared "focal plane arrays" based on 'microbolometer' material having individual elements with an unfiltered response in the wavelength range equal to or exceeding 8 000 nm but not exceeding 14 000 nm;
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 6A002.a.3.f., 'microbolometer' is defined as a thermal imaging detector that, as a result of a temperature change in the detector caused by the absorption of infrared radiation, is used to generate any usable signal.
g.
Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having all of the following:
1.
Individual detector elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 900 nm;
2.
Specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W for wavelengths exceeding 760 nm; 
and
3.
Greater than 32 elements;
b.
"Monospectral imaging sensors" and "multispectral imaging sensors", designed for remote sensing applications and having any of the following:
1.
An Instantaneous-Field-Of-View (IFOV) of less than 200 μrad (microradians); 
or
2.
Specified for operation in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm and having all the following;
a.
Providing output imaging data in digital format; 
and
b.
Having any of the following characteristics:
1.
"Space-qualified"; 
or
2.
Designed for airborne operation, using other than silicon detectors, and having an IFOV of less than 2,5 mrad (milliradians);
Note:
6A002.b.1. does not control "monospectral imaging sensors" with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 300 nm but not exceeding 900 nm and only incorporating any of the following non–"space-qualified" detectors or non–"space-qualified""focal plane arrays":
1.
Charge Coupled Devices (CCD) not designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication'; 
or
2.
Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) devices not designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication'.
c.
'Direct view' imaging equipment incorporating any of the following:
1.
Image intensifier tubes specified in 6A002.a.2.a. or 6A002.a.2.b.;
2.
"Focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.; 
or
3.
Solid state detectors specified in 6A002.a.1.;
Technical Note:
'Direct view' refers to imaging equipment that presents a visual image to a human observer without converting the image into an electronic signal for television display, and that cannot record or store the image photographically, electronically or by any other means.
Note:
6A002.c. does not control equipment as follows, when incorporating other than GaAs or GaInAs photocathodes:
a.
Industrial or civilian intrusion alarm, traffic or industrial movement control or counting systems;
b.
Medical equipment;
c.
Industrial equipment used for inspection, sorting or analysis of the properties of materials;
d.
Flame detectors for industrial furnaces;
e.
Equipment specially designed for laboratory use.
d.
Special support components for optical sensors, as follows:
1.
"Space-qualified" cryocoolers;
2.
Non-"space-qualified" cryocoolers having a cooling source temperature below 218 K (-55°C), as follows:
a.
Closed cycle type with a specified Mean-Time-To-Failure (MTTF) or Mean-Time-Between-Failures (MTBF), exceeding 2 500 hours;
b.
Joule-Thomson (JT) self-regulating minicoolers having bore (outside) diameters of less than 8 mm;
3.
Optical sensing fibres specially fabricated either compositionally or structurally, or modified by coating, to be acoustically, thermally, inertially, electromagnetically or nuclear radiation sensitive;
Note:
6A002.d.3. does not control encapsulated optical sensing fibres specially designed for bore hole sensing applications.
e.
Not used.
f.
'Read-out integrated circuits' ('ROIC') specially designed for "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.
Note:
6A002.f. does not control 'read-out integrated circuits' specially designed for civil automotive applications.
Technical Note:
A 'Read-Out Integrated Circuit' ('ROIC') is an integrated circuit designed to underlie or be bonded to a "focal plane array" ("FPA") and used to read-out (i.e., extract and register) signals produced by the detector elements. At a minimum the 'ROIC' reads the charge from the detector elements by extracting the charge and applying a multiplexing function in a manner that retains the relative spatial position and orientation information of the detector elements for processing inside or outside the 'ROIC'.
6A003
Cameras, systems or equipment, and components therefor, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6A203.
a.
Instrumentation cameras and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
Note:
Instrumentation cameras, specified in 6A003.a.3. to 6A003.a.5., with modular structures should be evaluated by their maximum capability, using plug-ins available according to the camera manufacturer's specifications.
1.
Not used;
2.
Not used;
3.
Electronic streak cameras having temporal resolution better than 50 ns;
4.
Electronic framing cameras having a speed exceeding 1 000 000 frames/s;
5.
Electronic cameras having all of the following:
a.
An electronic shutter speed (gating capability) of less than 1 μs per full frame; 
and
b.
A read out time allowing a framing rate of more than 125 full frames per second;
6.
Plug-ins having all of the following characteristics:
a.
Specially designed for instrumentation cameras which have modular structures and which are specified in 6A003.a.; 
and
b.
Enabling these cameras to meet the characteristics specified in 6A003.a.3., 6A003.a.4., or 6A003.a.5., according to the manufacturer's specifications;
b.
Imaging cameras as follows:
Note:
6A003.b. does not control television or video cameras, specially designed for television broadcasting.
1.
Video cameras incorporating solid state sensors, having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm, but not exceeding 30 000 nm and having all of the following:
a.
Having any of the following:
1.
More than 4 x 10
6
"active pixels" per solid state array for monochrome (black and white) cameras;
2.
More than 4 x 10
6
"active pixels" per solid state array for colour cameras incorporating three solid state arrays; 
or
3.
More than 12 x 10
6
"active pixels" for solid state array colour cameras incorporating one solid state array; 
and
b.
Having any of the following:
1.
Optical mirrors specified in 6A004.a.;
2.
Optical control equipment specified in 6A004.d.; 
or
3.
The capability for annotating internally generated 'camera tracking data';
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purpose of this entry, digital video cameras should be evaluated by the maximum number of "active pixels" used for capturing moving images.
2.
For the purpose of this entry, 'camera tracking data' is the information necessary to define camera line of sight orientation with respect to the earth. This includes: 1) the horizontal angle the camera line of sight makes with respect to the earth's magnetic field direction and; 2) the vertical angle between the camera line of sight and the earth's horizon.
2.
Scanning cameras and scanning camera systems, having all of the following:
a.
A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm, but not exceeding 30 000 nm;
b.
Linear detector arrays with more than 8 192 elements per array; 
and
c.
Mechanical scanning in one direction;
Note:
6A003.b.2. does not control scanning cameras and scanning camera systems, specially designed for any of the following:
a.
Industrial or civilian photocopiers;
b.
Image scanners specially designed for civil, stationary, close proximity scanning applications (e.g., reproduction of images or print contained in documents, artwork or photographs); 
or
c.
Medical equipment.
3.
Imaging cameras incorporating image intensifier tubes specified in 6A002.a.2.a. or 6A002.a.2.b.;
4.
Imaging cameras incorporating "focal plane arrays" having any of the following:
a.
Incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.a. to 6A002.a.3.e.;
b.
Incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.f.; 
or
c.
Incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.g.;
Note 1:
Imaging cameras specified in 6A003.b.4. include "focal plane arrays" combined with sufficient "signal processing" electronics, beyond the read out integrated circuit, to enable as a minimum the output of an analogue or digital signal once power is supplied.
Note 2:
6A003.b.4
.
a. does not control imaging cameras incorporating linear "focal plane arrays" with 12 elements or fewer, not employing time-delay-and-integration within the element and designed for any of the following:
a.
Industrial or civilian intrusion alarm, traffic or industrial movement control or counting systems;
b.
Industrial equipment used for inspection or monitoring of heat flows in buildings, equipment or industrial processes;
c.
Industrial equipment used for inspection, sorting or analysis of the properties of materials;
d.
Equipment specially designed for laboratory use; 
or
e.
Medical equipment.
Note 3:
6A003.b.4.b. does not control imaging cameras having any of the following:
a.
A maximum frame rate equal to or less than 9 Hz ;
b.
Having all of the following:
1.
Having a minimum horizontal or vertical 'Instantaneous-Field-of-View (IFOV)' of at least 2 mrad (milliradians);
2.
Incorporating a fixed focal-length lens that is not designed to be removed;
3.
Not incorporating a 'direct view' display, 
and
4.
Having any of the following:
a.
No facility to obtain a viewable image of the detected field-of-view, 
or
b.
The camera is designed for a single kind of application and designed not to be user modified; 
or
c.
The camera is specially designed for installation into a civilian passenger land vehicle and having all of the following:
1
The placement and configuration of the camera within the vehicle are solely to assist the driver in the safe operation of the vehicle;
2.
Is only operable when installed in any of the following:
a.
The civilian passenger land vehicle for which it was intended and the vehicle weighs less than 4 500 kg (gross vehicle weight); 
or
b.
A specially designed, authorised maintenance test facility; 
and
3.
Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when it is removed from the vehicle for which it was intended.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Instantaneous Field of View (IFOV)' specified in 6A003.b.4. Note 3.b. is the lesser figure of the 'Horizontal IFOV' or the 'Vertical IFOV'.
'Horizontal IFOV' = horizontal Field of View (FOV) / number of horizontal detector elements
'Vertical IFOV' = vertical Field of View (FOV) / number of vertical detector elements.
2.
'Direct view' in 6A003.b.4. Note 3.b. refers to an imaging camera operating in the infrared spectrum that presents a visual image to a human observer using a near-to-eye micro display incorporating any light-security mechanism.
Note 4:
6A003.b.4.c. does not control imaging cameras having any of the following:
a.
Having all of the following:
1.
Where the camera is specially designed for installation as an integrated component into indoor and wall-plug-operated systems or equipment, limited by design for a single kind of application, as follows;
a.
Industrial process monitoring, quality control, or analysis of the properties of materials;
b.
Laboratory equipment specially designed for scientific research;
c.
Medical equipment;
d.
Financial fraud detection equipment; 
and
2.
Is only operable when installed in any of the following:
a.
The system(s) or equipment for which it was intended; 
or
b.
A specially designed, authorised maintenance facility; 
and
3.
Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when it is removed from the system(s) or equipment for which it was intended;
b.
Where the camera is specially designed for installation into a civilian passenger land vehicle or passenger and vehicle ferries, and having all of the following:
1.
The placement and configuration of the camera within the vehicle or ferry is solely to assist the driver or operator in the safe operation of the vehicle or ferry;
2.
Is only operable when installed in any of the following:
a.
The civilian passenger land vehicle for which it was intended and the vehicle weighs less than 4 500 kg (gross vehicle weight);
b.
The passenger and vehicle ferry for which it was intended and having a length overall (LOA) 65 m or greater; 
or
c.
A specially designed, authorised maintenance test facility; 
and
3.
Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when it is removed from the vehicle for which it was intended;
c.
Limited by design to have a maximum "radiant sensitivity" of 10 mA/W or less for wavelengths exceeding 760 nm, having all of the following:
1.
Incorporating a response limiting mechanism designed not to be removed or modified;
2.
Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when the response limiting mechanism is removed; 
and
3.
Not specially designed or modified for underwater use: 
or
d.
Having all of the following:
1.
Not incorporating a 'direct view' or electronic image display;
2.
Has no facility to output a viewable image of the detected field of view;
3.
The "focal plane array" is only operable when installed in the camera for which it was intended; 
and
4.
The "focal plane array" incorporates an active mechanism that forces it to be permanently inoperable when removed from the camera for which it was intended.
5.
Imaging cameras incorporating solid-state detectors specified in 6A002.a.1.
6A004
Optical equipment and components, as follows:
a.
Optical mirrors (reflectors) as follows:
Technical Note:
For the purpose of 6A004.a., Laser Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) is measured according to ISO 21254-1:2011.
N.B.
For optical mirrors specially designed for lithography equipment, see 3B001.
1.
'Deformable mirrors' having an active optical aperture greater than 10 mm and having any of the following, and specially designed components therefor,
a.
Having all the following:
1.
A mechanical resonant frequency of 750 Hz or more; 
and
2.
More than 200 actuators; 
or
b.
A Laser Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) being any of the following:
1.
Greater than 1 kW/ cm
2
 using a "CW laser"; 
or
2.
Greater than 2 J/ cm
2
 using 20 ns "laser" pulses at 20 Hz repetition rate;
Technical Note:
'Deformable mirrors' are mirrors having any of the following:
a.
A single continuous optical reflecting surface which is dynamically deformed by the application of individual torques or forces to compensate for distortions in the optical waveform incident upon the mirror; 
or
b.
Multiple optical reflecting elements that can be individually and dynamically repositioned by the application of torques or forces to compensate for distortions in the optical waveform incident upon the mirror.
'Deformable mirrors' are also known as adaptive optic mirrors.
2.
Lightweight monolithic mirrors having an average "equivalent density" of less than 30 kg/m
2
 and a total mass exceeding 10 kg;
Note:
6A004.a.2. does not control mirrors specially designed to direct solar radiation for terrestrial heliostat installations
.
3.
Lightweight "composite" or foam mirror structures having an average "equivalent density" of less than 30 kg/m
2
 and a total mass exceeding 2 kg;
Note:
6A004.a.3. does not control mirrors specially designed to direct solar radiation for terrestrial heliostat installations.
4.
Mirrors specially designed for beam steering mirror stages specified in 6A004.d.2.a. with a flatness of λ/10 or better (λ is equal to 633 nm)and having any of the following:
a.
Diameter or major axis length greater than or equal to 100 mm; 
or
b.
Having all of the following:
1.
Diameter or major axis length greater than 50 mm but less than 100 mm; 
and
2.
A Laser Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) being any of the following:
a.
Greater than 10 kW/cm
2
 using a "CW laser"; 
or
b.
Greater than 20 J/cm
2
 using 20 ns "laser" pulses at 20 Hz repetition rate;
b.
Optical components made from zinc selenide (ZnSe) or zinc sulphide (ZnS) with transmission in the wavelength range exceeding 3 000 nm but not exceeding 25 000 nm and having any of the following:
1.
Exceeding 100 cm
3
 in volume; 
or
2.
Exceeding 80 mm in diameter or length of major axis and 20 mm in thickness (depth);
c.
"Space-qualified" components for optical systems, as follows:
1.
Components lightweighted to less than 20% "equivalent density" compared with a solid blank of the same aperture and thickness;
2.
Raw substrates, processed substrates having surface coatings (single-layer or multi-layer, metallic or dielectric, conducting, semiconducting or insulating) or having protective films;
3.
Segments or assemblies of mirrors designed to be assembled in space into an optical system with a collecting aperture equivalent to or larger than a single optic 1 m in diameter;
4.
Components manufactured from "composite" materials having a coefficient of linear thermal expansion, in any coordinate direction, equal to or less than 5 x 10
-6
/K;
d.
Optical control equipment as follows:
1.
Equipment specially designed to maintain the surface figure or orientation of the "space-qualified" components specified in 6A004.c.1. or 6A004.c.3.;
2.
Steering, tracking, stabilisation and resonator alignment equipment as follows:
a.
Beam steering mirror stages designed to carry mirrors having diameter or major axis length greater than 50 mm and having all of the following, and specially designed electronic control equipment therefor:
1.
A maximum angular travel of ±26 mrad or more;
2.
A mechanical resonant frequency of 500 Hz or more; 
and
3.
An angular "accuracy" of 10 μrad (microradians) or less (better);
b.
Resonator alignment equipment having bandwidths equal to or more than 100 Hz and an "accuracy" of 10 μrad or less (better);
3.
Gimbals having all of the following:
a.
A maximum slew exceeding 5°;
b.
A bandwidth of 100 Hz or more;
c.
Angular pointing errors of 200 μrad (microradians) or less; 
and
d.
Having any of the following:
1.
Exceeding 0,15 m but not exceeding 1 m in diameter or major axis length and capable of angular accelerations exceeding 2 rad (radians)/s
2
; 
or
2.
Exceeding 1 m in diameter or major axis length and capable of angular accelerations exceeding 0,5 rad (radians)/s
2
;
4.
Not used
e.
'Aspheric optical elements' having all of the following:
1.
Largest dimension of the optical-aperture greater than 400 mm;
2.
Surface roughness less than 1 nm (rms) for sampling lengths equal to or greater than 1 mm; 
and
3.
Coefficient of linear thermal expansion's absolute magnitude less than 3 x 10
-6
/K at 25°C.
Technical Notes:
1.
An 'aspheric optical element' is any element used in an optical system whose imaging surface or surfaces are designed to depart from the shape of an ideal sphere.
2.
Manufacturers are not required to measure the surface roughness listed in 6A004.e.2. unless the optical element was designed or manufactured with the intent to meet, or exceed, the control parameter.
Note
6A004.e. does not control 'aspheric optical elements' having any of the following:
a.
Largest optical-aperture dimension less than 1 m and focal length to aperture ratio equal to or greater than 4,5:1;
b.
Largest optical-aperture dimension equal to or greater than 1 m and focal length to aperture ratio equal to or greater than 7:1;
c.
Designed as Fresnel, flyeye, stripe, prism or diffractive optical elements;
d.
Fabricated from borosilicate glass having a coefficient of linear thermal expansion greater than 2,5 x 10
-6
/K at 25 °C; 
or
e.
An X-ray optical element having inner mirror capabilities (e.g., tube-type mirrors).
N.B.
For 'aspheric optical elements' specially designed for lithography equipment, see 3B001.
f.
Dynamic wavefront measuring equipment having all of the following:
1.
'Frame rates' equal to or more than 1 kHz; 
and
2.
A wavefront accuracy equal to or less (better) than λ/20 at the designed wavelength.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 6A004.f., 'frame rate' is a frequency at which all "active pixels" in the "focal plane array" are integrated for recording images projected by the wavefront sensor optics.
6A005
"Lasers", other than those specified in 0B001.g.5. or 0B001.h.6., components and optical equipment, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6A205.
Note 1:
Pulsed "lasers" include those that run in a continuous wave (CW) mode with pulses superimposed.
Note 2:
Excimer, semiconductor, chemical, CO, CO
2
, and 'non-repetitive pulsed' Nd:glass "lasers" are only specified in 6A005.d.
Technical Note:
'Non-repetitive pulsed' refers to "lasers" that produce either a single output pulse or that have a time interval between pulses exceeding one minute.
Note 3:
6A005 includes fibre "lasers".
Note 4:
The control status of "lasers" incorporating frequency conversion (i.e., wavelength change) by means other than one "laser" pumping another "laser" is determined by applying the control parameters for both the output of the source "laser" and the frequency-converted optical output.
Note 5:
6A005 does not control "lasers" as follows:
a.
Ruby with output energy below 20 J;
b.
Nitrogen;
c.
Krypton.
Note 6:
For the purposes of 6A005.a. and 6A005.b., 'single transverse mode' refers to "lasers" with a beam profile having an M 
2
-factor of less than 1,3, while 'multiple transverse mode' refers to "lasers" with a beam profile having an M 
2
-factor of 1,3 or higher.
Technical Note:
In 6A005 'Wall-plug efficiency' is defined as the ratio of "laser" output power (or "average output power") to total electrical input power required to operate the "laser", including the power supply/conditioning and thermal conditioning/heat exchanger.
a.
Non-"tunable" continuous wave "(CW) lasers" having any of the following:
1.
Output wavelength less than 150 nm and output power exceeding 1 W;
2.
Output wavelength of 150 nm or more but not exceeding 510 nm and output power exceeding 30 W;
Note:
6A005.a.2. does not control Argon "lasers" having an output power equal to or less than 50 W.
3.
Output wavelength exceeding 510 nm but not exceeding 540 nm and any of the following:
a.
'Single transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 50 W; 
or
b.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 150 W;
4.
Output wavelength exceeding 540 nm but not exceeding 800 nm and output power exceeding 30 W;
5.
Output wavelength exceeding 800 nm but not exceeding 975 nm and any of the following:
a.
'Single transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 50 W; 
or
b.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 80 W;
6.
Output wavelength exceeding 975 nm but not exceeding 1 150 nm and any of the following:
a.
'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:
1.
Output power exceeding 1 000 W; 
or
2.
Having all of the following:
a.
Output power exceeding 500 W; 
and
b.
Spectral bandwidth less than 40 GHz; 
or
b.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:
1.
'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 18% and output power exceeding 1 000 W; 
or
2.
Output power exceeding 2 kW;
Note 1:
6A005.a.6.b. does not control 'multiple transverse mode', industrial "lasers" with output power exceeding 2 kW and not exceeding 6 kW with a total mass greater than 1 200 kg. For the purpose of this note, total mass includes all components required to operate the "laser", e.g., "laser", power supply, heat exchanger, but excludes external optics for beam conditioning or delivery.
Note 2:
6A005.a.6.b. does not control 'multiple transverse mode', industrial "lasers" having any of the following:
a.
Not used;
b.
Output power exceeding 1 kW but not exceeding 1,6 kW and having a BPP exceeding 1,25 mm•mrad
c.
Output power exceeding 1,6 kW but not exceeding 2,5 kW and having a BPP exceeding 1,7 mm•mrad;
d.
Output power exceeding 2,5 kW but not exceeding 3,3 kW and having a BPP exceeding 2,5 mm•mrad;
e.
Output power exceeding 3,3 kW but not exceeding 6 kW and having a BPP exceeding 3,5 mm•mrad;
f.
Not used;
g.
Not used;
h.
Output power exceeding 6 kW but not exceeding 8 kW and having a BPP exceeding 12 mm•mrad;
or
i.
Output power exceeding 8 kW but not exceeding 10 kW and having a BPP exceeding 24 mm•mrad.
7.
Output wavelength exceeding 1 150 nm but not exceeding 1 555 nm and any of the following:
a.
'Single transverse mode' and output power exceeding 50 W; 
or
b.
'Multiple transverse mode' and output power exceeding 80 W;
8.
Output wavelength exceeding 1 555 nm but not exceeding 1 850 nm and output power exceeding 1 W;
9.
Output wavelength exceeding 1 850 nm but not exceeding 2 100 nm, and any of the following:
a.
'Single transverse mode' and output power exceeding 1 W; 
or
b.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 120 W; 
or
10.
Output wavelength exceeding 2 100 nm and output power exceeding 1 W;
b.
Non-"tunable""pulsed lasers" having any of the following:
1.
Output wavelength less than 150 nm and any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; 
or
b.
"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;
2.
Output wavelength of 150 nm or more but not exceeding 510 nm and any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 30 W; 
or
b.
"Average output power" exceeding 30 W;
Note:
6A005.b.2.b. does not control Argon "lasers" having an "average output power" equal to or less than 50 W.
3.
Output wavelength exceeding 510 nm but not exceeding 540 nm and any of the following:
a.
'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 50 W; 
or
b.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 150 W; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 150 W;
4.
Output wavelength exceeding 540 nm but not exceeding 800 nm and any of the following:
a.
"Pulse duration" less than 1 ps and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 0,005 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 5 GW; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 20 W; 
or
b.
"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ps and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 30 W; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 30 W;
5.
Output wavelength exceeding 800 nm but not exceeding 975 nm and any of the following:
a.
"Pulse duration" less than 1 ps and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 0,005 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 5 GW; 
or
2.
'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 20 W;
b.
"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ps and not exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 0,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;
2.
'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 20 W; 
or
3.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; 
or
c.
"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;
2.
'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; 
or
3.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 80 W;
6.
Output wavelength exceeding 975 nm but not exceeding 1 150 nm and any of the following:
a.
"Pulse duration" of less than 1 ps, and any of the following:
1.
Output "peak power" exceeding 2 GW per pulse;
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 30 W; 
or
3.
Output energy exceeding 0,002 J per pulse;
b.
"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ps and less than 1 ns and any of the following:
1.
Output "peak power" exceeding 5 GW per pulse;
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 50 W; 
or
3.
Output energy exceeding 0,1 J per pulse;
c.
"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ns but not exceeding 1 μs, and any of the following:
1.
'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:
a.
"Peak power" exceeding 100 MW;
b.
"Average output power" exceeding 20 W limited by design to a maximum pulse repetition frequency less than or equal to 1 kHz;
c.
'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 12%, "average output power" exceeding 100 W and capable of operating at a pulse repetition frequency greater than 1 kHz;
d.
"Average output power" exceeding 150 W and capable of operating at a pulse repetition frequency greater than 1 kHz; 
or
e.
Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse; 
or
2.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:
a.
"Peak power" exceeding 400 MW;
b.
'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 18% and "average output power" exceeding 500 W;
c.
"Average output power" exceeding 2 kW; 
or
d.
Output energy exceeding 4 J per pulse; 
or
d.
"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:
1.
'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:
a.
"Peak power" exceeding 500 kW;
b.
'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 12% and "average output power" exceeding 100 W; 
or
c.
"Average output power" exceeding 150 W; 
or
2.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:
a.
"Peak power" exceeding 1 MW;
b.
'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 18% and "average output power" exceeding 500 W; 
or
c.
"Average output power" exceeding 2 kW;
7.
Output wavelength exceeding 1 150 nm but not exceeding 1 555 nm, and any of the following:
a.
"Pulse duration" not exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 0,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;
2.
'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 20 W; 
or
3.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; 
or
b.
"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;
2.
'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; 
or
3.
'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 80 W;
8.
Output wavelength exceeding 1 555 nm but not exceeding 1 850 nm, and any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; 
or
b.
"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;
9.
Output wavelength exceeding 1 850 nm but not exceeding 2 100 nm, and any of the following
a.
'Single transverse mode' and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 1 W; 
or
b.
'Multiple transverse mode' and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 10 kW; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 120 W; 
or
10.
Output wavelength exceeding 2 100 nm and any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; 
or
b.
"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;
c.
"Tunable""lasers" having any of the following:
1.
Output wavelength less than 600 nm and any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; 
or
b.
Average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;
Note:
6A005.c.1. does not control dye "lasers" or other liquid "lasers", having a multimode output and a wavelength of 150 nm or more but not exceeding 600 nm and all of the following:
1.
Output energy less than 1,5 J per pulse or a "peak power" less than 20 W; 
and
2.
Average or CW output power less than 20 W.
2.
Output wavelength of 600 nm or more but not exceeding 1 400 nm, and any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 1 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 20 W; 
or
b.
Average or CW output power exceeding 20 W; 
or
3.
Output wavelength exceeding 1 400 nm and any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; 
or
b.
Average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;
d.
Other "lasers", not specified in 6A005.a., 6A005.b. or 6A005.c. as follows:
1.
Semiconductor "lasers" as follows:
Note 1:
6A005.d.1. includes semiconductor "lasers" having optical output connectors (e.g., fibre optic pigtails).
Note 2:
The control status of semiconductor "lasers" specially designed for other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.
a.
Individual single-transverse mode semiconductor "lasers" having any of the following:
1.
Wavelength equal to or less than 1 510 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 1,5 W; 
or
2.
Wavelength greater than 1 510 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 500 mW;
b.
Individual multiple-transverse mode semiconductor "lasers" having any of the following:
1.
Wavelength of less than 1 400 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 15W;
2.
Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 400 nm and less than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 2,5 W; 
or
3.
Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 1 W;
c.
Individual semiconductor "laser" 'bars', having any of the following:
1.
Wavelength of less than 1 400 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 100 W;
2.
Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 400 nm and less than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 25 W; 
or
3.
Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 10 W;
d.
Semiconductor "laser" 'stacked arrays' (two-dimensional arrays) having any of the following:
1.
Wavelength less than 1 400 nm and having any of the following:
a.
Average or CW total output power less than 3 kW and having average or CW output 'power density' greater than 500 W/cm
2
;
b.
Average or CW total output power equal to or exceeding 3 kW but less than or equal to 5 kW, and having average or CW output 'power density' greater than 350 W/cm
2
;
c.
Average or CW total output power exceeding 5 kW;
d.
Peak pulsed 'power density' exceeding 2 500 W/cm
2
; 
or
Note:
6A005.d.1.d.1.d. does not control epitaxially-fabricated monolithic devices.
e.
Spatially coherent average or CW total output power, greater than 150 W;
2.
Wavelength greater than or equal to 1 400 nm but less than 1 900 nm, and having any of the following:
a.
Average or CW total output power less than 250 W and average or CW output 'power density' greater than 150 W/cm
2
;
b.
Average or CW total output power equal to or exceeding 250 W but less than or equal to 500 W, and having average or CW output 'power density' greater than 50 W/cm
2
;
c.
Average or CW total output power exceeding 500 W;
d.
Peak pulsed 'power density' exceeding 500 W/cm
2
; 
or
Note:
6A005.d.1.d.2.d. does not control epitaxially-fabricated monolithic devices.
e.
Spatially coherent average or CW total output power, exceeding 15 W;
3.
Wavelength greater than or equal to 1 900 nm and having any of the following:
a.
Average or CW output 'power density' greater than 50 W/cm
2
;
b.
Average or CW output power greater than 10 W; 
or
c.
Spatially coherent average or CW total output power, exceeding 1,5 W; 
or
4.
At least one "laser" 'bar' specified in 6A005.d.1.c.;
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 6A005.d.1.d., 'power density' means the total "laser" output power divided by the emitter surface area of the 'stacked array'.
e.
Semiconductor "laser" 'stacked arrays', other than those specified in 6A005.d.1.d., having all of the following:
1.
Specially designed or modified to be combined with other 'stacked arrays' to form a larger 'stacked array'; 
and
2.
Integrated connections, common for both electronics and cooling;
Note 1:
'Stacked arrays', formed by combining semiconductor "laser" 'stacked arrays' specified in 6A005.d.1.e., that are not designed to be further combined or modified are specified in 6A005.d.1.d.
Note 2:
'Stacked arrays', formed by combining semiconductor "laser" 'stacked arrays' specified in 6A005.d.1.e., that are designed to be further combined or modified are specified in 6A005.d.1.e.
Note 3:
6A005.d.1.e. does not control modular assemblies of single 'bars' designed to be fabricated into end-to-end stacked linear arrays.
Technical Notes:
1.
Semiconductor "lasers" are commonly called "laser" diodes.
2.
A 'bar' (also called a semiconductor "laser" 'bar', a "laser" diode 'bar' or diode 'bar') consists of multiple semiconductor "lasers" in a one-dimensional array.
3.
A 'stacked array' consists of multiple 'bars' forming a two-dimensional array of semiconductor "lasers".
2.
Carbon monoxide (CO) "lasers" having any of the following:
a.
Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 5 kW; 
or
b.
Average or CW output power exceeding 5 kW;
3.
Carbon dioxide (CO
2
) "lasers" having any of the following:
a.
CW output power exceeding 15 kW;
b.
Pulsed output with a "pulse duration" exceeding 10 μs and any of the following:
1.
"Average output power" exceeding 10 kW; 
or
2.
"Peak power" exceeding 100 kW; 
or
c.
Pulsed output with a "pulse duration" equal to or less than 10 μs and any of the following:
1.
Pulse energy exceeding 5 J per pulse; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 2,5 kW;
4.
Excimer "lasers" having any of the following:
a.
Output wavelength not exceeding 150 nm and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;
b.
Output wavelength exceeding 150 nm but not exceeding 190 nm and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 120 W;
c.
Output wavelength exceeding 190 nm but not exceeding 360 nm and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 10 J per pulse; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 500 W; 
or
d.
Output wavelength exceeding 360 nm and any of the following:
1.
Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse; 
or
2.
"Average output power" exceeding 30 W;
N.B.
For excimer "lasers" specially designed for lithography equipment, see 3B001.
5.
"Chemical lasers" as follows:
a.
Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) "lasers";
b.
Deuterium Fluoride (DF) "lasers";
c.
'Transfer lasers' as follows:
1.
Oxygen Iodine (O
2
-I) "lasers";
2.
Deuterium Fluoride-Carbon dioxide (DF-CO
2
) "lasers";
Technical Note:
'Transfer lasers' are "lasers" in which the lasing species are excited through the transfer of energy by collision of a non- lasing atom or molecule with a lasing atom or molecule species.
6.
'Non-repetitive pulsed' Nd: glass "lasers" having any of the following:
a.
"Pulse duration" not exceeding 1 μs and output energy exceeding 50 J per pulse; 
or
b.
"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and output energy exceeding 100 J per pulse;
Note:
'Non-repetitive pulsed' refers to "lasers" that produce either a single output pulse or that have a time interval between pulses exceeding one minute.
e.
Components as follows:
1.
Mirrors cooled either by 'active cooling' or by heat pipe cooling;
Technical Note:
'Active cooling' is a cooling technique for optical components using flowing fluids within the subsurface (nominally less than 1 mm below the optical surface) of the optical component to remove heat from the optic.
2.
Optical mirrors or transmissive or partially transmissive optical or electro-optical components, other than fused tapered fibre combiners and Multi-Layer Dielectric gratings (MLDs), specially designed for use with specified "lasers";
Note:
Fibre combiners and MLDs are specified in 6A005.e.3.
3.
Fibre "laser" components as follows:
a.
Multimode to multimode fused tapered fibre combiners having all of the following:
1.
An insertion loss better (less) than or equal to 0,3 dB maintained at a rated total average or CW output power (excluding output power transmitted through the single mode core if present) exceeding 1 000 W; 
and
2.
Number of input fibres equal to or greater than 3;
b.
Single mode to multimode fused tapered fibre combiners having all of the following:
1.
An insertion loss better (less) than 0,5 dB maintained at a rated total average or CW output power exceeding 4 600 W;
2.
Number of input fibres equal to or greater than 3; 
and
3.
Having any of the following:
a.
A Beam Parameter Product (BPP) measured at the output not exceeding 1,5 mm mrad for a number of input fibres less than or equal to 5; 
or
b.
A BPP measured at the output not exceeding 2,5 mm mrad for a number of input fibres greater than 5;
c.
MLDs having all of the following:
1.
Designed for spectral or coherent beam combination of 5 or more fibre "lasers"; 
and
2.
CW "Laser" Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) greater than or equal to 10 kW/cm
2
.
f.
Optical equipment as follows:
N.B.
For shared aperture optical elements, capable of operating in "Super-High Power Laser" ("SHPL") applications, see the Military Goods Controls.
1.
Not used;
2.
"Laser" diagnostic equipment specially designed for dynamic measurement of "SHPL" system angular beam steering errors and having an angular "accuracy" of 10 μrad (microradians) or less (better);
3.
Optical equipment and components, specially designed for coherent beam combination in a phased-array "SHPL" system and having any of the following:
a.
An "accuracy" of 0,1 μm or less, for wavelengths greater than 1 μm; 
or
b.
An "accuracy" of λ/10 or less (better) at the designed wavelength, for wavelengths equal to or less than 1 μm;
4.
Projection telescopes specially designed for use with "SHPL" systems;
g.
'Laser acoustic detection equipment' having all of the following:
1.
CW "laser" output power equal to or exceeding 20 mW;
2.
"Laser" frequency stability equal to or better (less) than 10 MHz;
3.
"Laser" wavelengths equal to or exceeding 1 000 nm but not exceeding 2 000 nm;
4.
Optical system resolution better (less) than 1 nm; 
and
5.
Optical Signal to Noise ratio equal to or exceeding 10
3
.
Technical Note:
'Laser acoustic detection equipment' is sometimes referred to as a "Laser" Microphone or Particle Flow Detection Microphone.
6A006
"Magnetometers", "magnetic gradiometers", "intrinsic magnetic gradiometers", underwater electric field sensors, "compensation systems", and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7A103.d.
Note:
6A006 does not control instruments specially designed for fishery applications or biomagnetic measurements for medical diagnostics.
a.
"Magnetometers" and subsystems as follows:
1.
"Magnetometers" using "superconductive" (SQUID) "technology" and having any of the following:
a.
SQUID systems designed for stationary operation, without specially designed subsystems designed to reduce in-motion noise, and having a 'sensitivity' equal to or lower (better) than 50 fT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz; 
or
b.
SQUID systems having an in-motion-magnetometer 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 20 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz and specially designed to reduce in-motion noise;
2.
"Magnetometers" using optically pumped or nuclear precession (proton/Overhauser) "technology" having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 20 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz;
3.
"Magnetometers" using fluxgate "technology" having a 'sensitivity' equal to or lower (better) than 10 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz;
4.
Induction coil "magnetometers" having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than any of the following:
a.
0,05 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies of less than 1 Hz;
b.
1 x 10
-3
 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies of 1 Hz or more but not exceeding 10 Hz; 
or
c.
1 x 10
-4
 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies exceeding 10 Hz;
5.
Fibre optic "magnetometers" having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 1 nT (rms) per square root Hz;
b.
Underwater electric field sensors having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 8 nanovolt per metre per square root Hz when measured at 1 Hz;
c.
"Magnetic gradiometers" as follows:
1.
"Magnetic gradiometers" using multiple "magnetometers" specified in 6A006.a.;
2.
Fibre optic "intrinsic magnetic gradiometers" having a magnetic gradient field 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 0,3 nT/m rms per square root Hz;
3.
"Intrinsic magnetic gradiometers", using "technology" other than fibre-optic "technology", having a magnetic gradient field 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 0,015 nT/m rms per square root Hz;
d.
"Compensation systems" for magnetic or underwater electric field sensors resulting in a performance equal to or better than the specified parameters of 6A006.a., 6A006.b. or 6A006.c.;
e.
Underwater electromagnetic receivers incorporating magnetic field sensors specified in 6A006.a. or underwater electric field sensors specified in 6A006.b.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 6A006, 'sensitivity' (noise level) is the root mean square of the device-limited noise floor which is the lowest signal that can be measured.
6A007
Gravity meters (gravimeters) and gravity gradiometers, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6A107.
a.
Gravity meters designed or modified for ground use and having a static "accuracy" of less (better) than 10 μGal;
Note:
6A007.a. does not control ground gravity meters of the quartz element (Worden) type.
b.
Gravity meters designed for mobile platforms and having all of the following:
1.
A static "accuracy" of less (better) than 0,7 mGal; 
and
2.
An in-service (operational) "accuracy" of less (better) than 0,7 mGal having a "time-to-steady-state registration" of less than 2 minutes under any combination of attendant corrective compensations and motional influences;
c.
Gravity gradiometers.
6A008
Radar systems, equipment and assemblies, having any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6A108.
Note:
6A008 does not control:
—
Secondary surveillance radar (SSR);
Civil Automotive Radar;
Displays or monitors used for air traffic control (ATC);
Meteorological (weather) radar;
Precision approach radar (PAR) equipment conforming to ICAO standards and employing electronically steerable linear (1-dimensional) arrays or mechanically positioned passive antennae.
a.
Operating at frequencies from 40 GHz to 230 GHz and having any of the following:
1.
An average output power exceeding 100 mW; 
or
2.
Locating "accuracy" of 1 m or less (better) in range and 0,2 degree or less (better) in azimuth;
b.
A tunable bandwidth exceeding ± 6,25% of the 'centre operating frequency';
Technical Note:
The 'centre operating frequency' equals one half of the sum of the highest plus the lowest specified operating frequencies.
c.
Capable of operating simultaneously on more than two carrier frequencies;
d.
Capable of operating in synthetic aperture (SAR), inverse synthetic aperture (ISAR) radar mode, or sidelooking airborne (SLAR) radar mode;
e.
Incorporating electronically scanned array antennae;
Technical Note:
Electronically scanned array antennae are also known as electronically steerable array antennae.
f.
Capable of heightfinding non-cooperative targets;
g.
Specially designed for airborne (balloon or airframe mounted) operation and having Doppler "signal processing" for the detection of moving targets;
h.
Employing processing of radar signals and using any of the following:
1.
"Radar spread spectrum" techniques; 
or
2.
"Radar frequency agility" techniques;
i.
Providing ground-based operation with a maximum 'instrumented range' exceeding 185 km;
Note:
6A008.i. does not control:
a.
Fishing ground surveillance radar;
b.
Ground radar equipment specially designed for enroute air traffic control and having all the following:
1.
A maximum 'instrumented range' of 500 km or less;
2.
Configured so that radar target data can be transmitted only one way from the radar site to one or more civil ATC centres;
3.
Contains no provisions for remote control of the radar scan rate from the enroute ATC centre; 
and
4.
Permanently installed;
c.
Weather balloon tracking radars.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 6A008.i. 'instrumented range' is the specified unambiguous display range of a radar.
j.
Being "laser" radar or Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) equipment and having any of the following:
1.
"Space-qualified";
2.
Employing coherent heterodyne or homodyne detection techniques and having an angular resolution of less (better) than 20 μrad (microradians); 
or
3.
Designed for carrying out airborne bathymetric littoral surveys to International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) Order 1a Standard (5
th
 Edition February 2008) for Hydrographic Surveys or better, and using one or more "lasers" with a wavelength exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 600 nm;
Note 1:
LIDAR equipment specially designed for surveying is only specified in 6A008.j.3.
Note 2:
6A008.j. does not control LIDAR equipment specially designed for meteorological observation.
Note 3:
Parameters in the IHO Order 1a Standard (5
th
 Edition February 2008) are summarised as follows:
—
Horizontal Accuracy (95% Confidence Level) = 5 m + 5% of depth.
Depth Accuracy for Reduced Depths (95% confidence level) = ±√(a
2
+(b*d)
2
), where:
a = 0,5 m = constant depth error,
i.e., the sum of all constant depth errors
b = 0,013 = factor of depth dependent error
b*d = depth dependent error,
i.e., the sum of all depth dependent errors
d = depth
Feature Detection = Cubic features > 2 m in depths up to 40 m; 10% of depth beyond 40 m.
k.
Having "signal processing" sub-systems using "pulse compression" and having any of the following:
1.
A "pulse compression" ratio exceeding 150; 
or
2.
A compressed pulse width of less than 200 ns; 
or
Note:
6A008.k.2. does not control two dimensional 'marine radar' or 'vessel traffic service' radar, having all of the following;
a.
"Pulse compression" ratio not exceeding 150;
b.
Compressed pulse width of greater than 30 ns;
c.
Single and rotating mechanically scanned antenna;
d.
Peak output power not exceeding 250 W; 
and
e.
Not capable of "frequency hopping".
l.
Having data processing sub-systems and having any of the following:
1.
'Automatic target tracking' providing, at any antenna rotation, the predicted target position beyond the time of the next antenna beam passage; 
or
Note:
6A008.l.1. does not control conflict alert capability in ATC systems, or 'marine radar'.
Technical Note:
'Automatic target tracking' is a processing technique that automatically determines and provides as output an extrapolated value of the most probable position of the target in real time.
2.
Not used;
3.
Not used;
4.
Configured to provide superposition and correlation, or fusion, of target data within six seconds from two or more 'geographically dispersed' radar sensors to improve the aggregate performance beyond that of any single sensor specified in 6A008.f. or 6A008.i.
Technical Note:
Sensors are considered 'geographically dispersed' when each location is distant from any other more than 1 500 m in any direction. Mobile sensors are always considered 'geographically dispersed'.
N.B.
See also Military Goods Controls.
Note:
6A008.l.4. does not control systems, equipment and assemblies used for 'vessel traffic
service'.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 6A008, 'marine radar' is a radar that is used to navigate safely at sea, inland waterways or near-shore environments.
2.
For the purposes of 6A008, 'vessel traffic service' is a vessel traffic monitoring and control service similar to air traffic control for "aircraft".
6A102
Radiation hardened 'detectors', other than those specified in 6A002, specially designed or modified for protecting against nuclear effects (e.g. electromagnetic pulse (EMP), X-rays, combined blast and thermal effects) and usable for "missiles", designed or rated to withstand radiation levels which meet or exceed a total irradiation dose of 5 x 10
5
 rads (silicon).
Technical Note:
In 6A102, a 'detector' is defined as a mechanical, electrical, optical or chemical device that automatically identifies and records, or registers a stimulus such as an environmental change in pressure or temperature, an electrical or electromagnetic signal or radiation from a radioactive material. This includes devices that sense by one time operation or failure.
6A107
Gravity meters (gravimeters) and components for gravity meters and gravity gradiometers, as follows:
a.
Gravity meters, other than those specified in 6A007.b., designed or modified for airborne or marine use, and having a static or operational accuracy equal to or less (better) than 0,7 milligal (mgal), and having a time-to-steady-state registration of two minutes or less;
b.
Specially designed components for gravity meters specified in 6A007.b. or 6A107.a. and gravity gradiometers specified in 6A007.c.
6A108
Radar systems, tracking systems and radomes, other than those specified in entry 6A008, as follows:
a.
Radar and laser radar systems designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;
Note:
6A108.a. includes the following:
a.
Terrain contour mapping equipment;
b.
Scene mapping and correlation (both digital and analogue) equipment;
c.
Doppler navigation radar equipment;
d.
Passive interferometer equipment;
e.
Imaging sensor equipment (both active and passive).
b.
Precision tracking systems, usable for 'missiles', as follows:
1.
Tracking systems which use a code translator in conjunction with either surface or airborne references or navigation satellite systems to provide real-time measurements of in-flight position and velocity;
2.
Range instrumentation radars including associated optical/infrared trackers with all of the following capabilities:
a.
Angular resolution better than 1,5 milliradians;
b.
Range of 30 km or greater with a range resolution better than 10 m rms; 
and
c.
Velocity resolution better than 3 m/s;
Technical Note:
In 6A108.b. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
c.
Radomes designed to withstand a combined thermal shock greater than 4,184 x 10
6
 J/m
2
 accompained by a peak over pressure of greater than 50 kPa, and usable in "missiles" for protecting against nuclear effects (e.g. electromagnetic pulse (EMP), X-rays, combined blast and thermal effects).
6A202
Photomultiplier tubes having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Photocathode area of greater than 20 cm
2
; 
and
b.
Anode pulse rise time of less than 1 ns.
6A203
Cameras and components, other than those specified in 6A003, as follows:
N.B.1.
"Software" specially designed to enhance or release the performance of a camera or imaging device to meet the characteristics of 6A203.a., 6A203.b. or 6A203.c. is specified in 6D203.
N.B.2.
"Technology" in the form of codes or keys to enhance or release the performance of a camera or imaging device to meet the characteristics of 6A203.a., 6A203.b. or 6A203.c. is specified in 6E203.
Note:
6A203.a. to 6A203.c. does not control cameras or imaging devices if they have hardware, "software" or "technology" constraints that limit the performance to less than that specified below, provided they meet any of the following:
1.
They need to be returned to the original manufacturer to make the enhancements or release the constraints;
2.
They require "software" as specified in 6D203 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 6A203;
or
3.
They require "technology" in the form of keys or codes as specified in 6E203 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 6A203.
a.
Streak cameras, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
1.
Streak cameras with writing speeds greater than 0,5 mm/μs;
2.
Electronic streak cameras capable of 50 ns or less time resolution;
3.
Streak tubes for cameras specified in 6A203.a.2.;
4.
Plug-ins specially designed for use with streak cameras which have modular structures and that enable the performance specifications in 6A203.a.1. or 6A203.a.2.;
5.
Synchronizing electronics units, rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.a.1.;
b.
Framing cameras, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
1.
Framing cameras with recording rates greater than 225 000 frames per second;
2.
Framing cameras capable of 50 ns or less frame exposure time;
3.
Framing tubes and solid-state imaging devices having a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.b.1. or 6A203.b.2.;
4.
Plug-ins specially designed for use with framing cameras which have modular structures and that enable the performance specifications in 6A203.b.1. or 6A203.b.2.;
5.
Synchronizing electronics units, rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.b.1. or 6A203.b.2.;
Technical Note:
In 6A203.b., high speed single frame cameras can be used alone to produce a single image of a dynamic event, or several such cameras can be combined in a sequentially-triggered system to produce multiple images of an event.
c.
Solid state or electron tube cameras, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
1.
Solid-state cameras or electron tube cameras with a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less;
2.
Solid-state imaging devices and image intensifiers tubes having a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.c.1.;
3.
Electro-optical shuttering devices (Kerr or Pockels cells) with a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less;
4.
Plug-ins specially designed for use with cameras which have modular structures and that enable the performance specifications in 6A203.c.1.
d.
Radiation-hardened TV cameras, or lenses therefor, specially designed or rated as radiation hardened to withstand a total radiation dose greater than 50 x 10
3
 Gy(silicon) (5 x 10
6
 rad (silicon)) without operational degradation.
Technical Note:
The term Gy(silicon) refers to the energy in Joules per kilogram absorbed by an unshielded silicon sample when exposed to ionising radiation.
6A205
"Lasers", "laser" amplifiers and oscillators, other than those specified in 0B001.g.5., 0B001.h.6. and 6A005, as follows:
N.B.
For copper vapour lasers, see 6A005.b.
a.
Argon ion "lasers" having both of the following characteristics:
1.
Operating at wavelengths between 400 nm and 515 nm; 
and
2.
An "average output power" greater than 40 W;
b.
Tunable pulsed single-mode dye laser oscillators having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Operating at wavelengths between 300 nm and 800 nm;
2.
An "average output power" greater than 1 W;
3.
A repetition rate greater than 1 kHz; 
and
4.
Pulse width less than 100 ns;
c.
Tunable pulsed dye laser amplifiers and oscillators, having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Operating at wavelengths between 300 nm and 800 nm;
2.
An "average output power" greater than 30 W;
3.
A repetition rate greater than 1 kHz; 
and
4.
Pulse width less than 100 ns;
Note:
6A205.c. does not control single mode oscillators.
d.
Pulsed carbon dioxide (CO
2
) "lasers" having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Operating at wavelengths between 9 000 nm and 11 000 nm;
2.
A repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;
3.
An "average output power" greater than 500 W; 
and
4.
Pulse width of less than 200 ns;
e.
Para-hydrogen Raman shifters designed to operate at 16 μm output wavelength and at a repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;
f.
Neodymium-doped (other than glass) "lasers" with an output wavelength between 1 000 and 1 100 nm having either of the following:
1.
Pulse-excited and Q-switched with a pulse duration equal to or more than 1 ns, and having either of the following:
a.
A single–transverse mode output with an "average output power" greater than 40W; 
or
b.
A multiple-transverse mode output having an average power greater than 50 W; 
or
2.
Incorporating frequency doubling to give an output wavelength between 500 and 550 nm with an "average output power" of more than 40 W;
g.
Pulsed carbon monoxide (CO) "lasers", other than those specified in 6A005.d.2., having all of the following:
1.
Operating at wavelengths between 5 000 and 6 000 nm;
2.
A repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;
3.
An "average output power" greater than 200 W; 
and
4.
Pulse width of less than 200 ns.
6A225
Velocity interferometers for measuring velocities exceeding 1 km/s during time intervals of less than 10 microseconds.
Note:
6A225 includes velocity interferometers such as VISARs (Velocity Interferometer Systems for Any Reflector), DLIs (Doppler Laser Interferometers) and PDV (Photonic Doppler Velocimeters) also known as Het-V (Heterodyne Velocimeters).
6A226
Pressure sensors, as follows:
a.
Shock pressure gauges capable of measuring pressures greater than 10 GPa, including gauges made with manganin, ytterbium, and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) / polyvinyl difluoride (PVF
2
);
b.
Quartz pressure transducers for pressures greater than 10 GPa.
6B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
6B002
Masks and reticles, specially designed for optical sensors specified in 6A002.a.1.b. or 6A002.a.1.d.
6B004
Optical equipment as follows:
a.
Equipment for measuring absolute reflectance to an "accuracy" of equal to or better than 0,1% of the reflectance value;
b.
Equipment other than optical surface scattering measurement equipment, having an unobscured aperture of more than 10 cm, specially designed for the non-contact optical measurement of a non-planar optical surface figure (profile) to an "accuracy" of 2 nm or less (better) against the required profile.
Note:
6B004 does not control microscopes.
6B007
Equipment to produce, align and calibrate land-based gravity meters with a static "accuracy" of better than 0,1 mGal.
6B008
Pulse radar cross-section measurement systems having transmit pulse widths of 100 ns or less, and specially designed components therefor.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 6B108.
6B108
Systems, other than those specified in 6B008, specially designed for radar cross-section measurement usable for 'missiles' and their subsystems.
Technical Note:
In 6B108 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
6C   
Materials
6C002
Optical sensor materials as follows:
a.
Elemental tellurium (Te) of purity levels of 99,9995% or more;
b.
Single crystals (including epitaxial wafers) of any of the following:
1.
Cadmium zinc telluride (CdZnTe), with zinc content of less than 6% by 'mole fraction';
2.
Cadmium telluride (CdTe) of any purity level; 
or
3.
Mercury cadmium telluride (HgCdTe) of any purity level.
Technical Note:
'Mole fraction' is defined as the ratio of moles of ZnTe to the sum of moles of CdTe and ZnTe present in the crystal.
6C004
Optical materials as follows:
a.
Zinc selenide (ZnSe) and zinc sulphide (ZnS) "substrate blanks", produced by the chemical vapour deposition process and having any of the following:
1.
A volume greater than 100 cm
3
; 
or
2.
A diameter greater than 80 mm and a thickness of 20 mm or more;
b.
Electro-optic materials and non-linear optical materials, as follows:
1.
Potassium titanyl arsenate (KTA) (CAS 59400-80-5);
2.
Silver gallium selenide (AgGaSe
2
 , also known as AGSE) (CAS 12002-67-4);
3.
Thallium arsenic selenide (Tl
3
AsSe
3
 , also known as TAS) (CAS 16142-89-5);
4.
Zinc germanium phosphide (ZnGeP
2
, also known as ZGP, zinc germanium biphosphide or zinc germanium diphosphide); 
or
5.
Gallium selenide (GaSe) (CAS 12024-11-2);
c.
Non-linear optical materials, other than those specified in 6C004.b., having any of the following:
1.
Having all of the following:
a.
Dynamic (also known as non-stationary) third order non-linear susceptibility (χ
(3)
, chi 3) of 10
-6
 m
2
/V
2
 or more; 
and
b.
Response time of less than 1 ms; 
or
2.
Second order non-linear susceptibility (χ
(2)
, chi 2) of 3,3×10
-11
 m/V or more;
d.
"Substrate blanks" of silicon carbide or beryllium beryllium (Be/Be) deposited materials, exceeding 300 mm in diameter or major axis length;
e.
Glass, including fused silica, phosphate glass, fluorophosphate glass, zirconium fluoride (ZrF
4
) (CAS 7783-64-4) and hafnium fluoride (HfF
4
) (CAS 13709-52-9) and having all of the following:
1.
A hydroxyl ion (OH
-
) concentration of less than 5 ppm;
2.
Integrated metallic purity levels of less than 1 ppm; 
and
3.
High homogeneity (index of refraction variance) less than 5 x 10
-6
;
f.
Synthetically produced diamond material with an absorption of less than 10
-5
 cm
-1
 for wavelengths exceeding 200 nm but not exceeding 14 000 nm.
6C005
"Laser" materials as follows:
a.
Synthetic crystalline "laser" host material in unfinished form as follows:
1.
Titanium doped sapphire;
2.
Not used.
b.
Rare-earth-metal doped double-clad fibres having any of the following:
1.
Nominal "laser" wavelength of 975 nm to 1 150 nm and having all of the following:
a.
Average core diameter equal to or greater than 25 μm; 
and
b.
Core 'Numerical Aperture' ('NA') less than 0,065; 
or
Note:
6C005.b.1. does not control double-clad fibres having an inner glass cladding diameter exceeding 150 μm and not exceeding 300 μm.
2.
Nominal "laser" wavelength exceeding 1 530 nm and having all of the following:
a.
Average core diameter equal to or greater than 20 μm; 
and
b.
Core 'Numerical Aperture' ('NA') less than 0,1.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 6C005.b., the core 'Numerical Aperture' ('NA') is measured at the emission wavelengths of the fibre.
2.
6C005.b. includes fibres assembled with end caps.
6D   
Software
6D001
"Software" specially designed for the "development" or "production" of equipment specified in 6A004, 6A005, 6A008 or 6B008.
6D002
"Software" specially designed for the "use" of equipment specified in 6A002.b., 6A008 or 6B008.
6D003
Other "software" as follows:
a.
"Software" as follows:
1.
"Software" specially designed for acoustic beam forming for the "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using towed hydrophone arrays;
2.
"Source code" for the "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using towed hydrophone arrays;
3.
"Software" specially designed for acoustic beam forming for "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using bottom or bay cable systems;
4.
"Source code" for "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using bottom or bay cable systems;
5.
"Software" or "source code", specially designed for all of the following:
a.
"Real-time processing" of acoustic data from sonar systems specified in 6A001.a.1.e.; 
and
b.
Automatically detecting, classifying and determining the location of divers or swimmers;
N.B.
For diver detection "software" or "source code", specially designed or modified for military use, SEE THE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
b.
Not used;
c.
"Software" designed or modified for cameras incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.f. and designed or modified to remove a frame rate restriction and allow the camera to exceed the frame rate specified in 6A003.b.4. Note 3.a.
d.
"Software" specially designed to maintain the alignment and phasing of segmented mirror systems consisting of mirror segments having a diameter or major axis length equal to or larger than 1 m;
e.
Not used;
f.
"Software" as follows:
1.
"Software" specially designed for magnetic and electric field "compensation systems" for magnetic sensors designed to operate on mobile platforms;
2.
"Software" specially designed for magnetic and electric field anomaly detection on mobile platforms;
3.
"Software" specially designed for "real-time processing" of electromagnetic data using underwater electromagnetic receivers specified in 6A006.e.;
4.
"Source code" for "real time processing" of electromagnetic data using underwater electromagnetic receivers specified in 6A006.e.;
g.
"Software" specially designed to correct motional influences of gravity meters or gravity gradiometers;
h.
"Software" as follows:
1.
Air Traffic Control (ATC) "software" application "programs" designed to be hosted on general purpose computers located at Air Traffic Control centres and capable of accepting radar target data from more than four primary radars;
2.
"Software" for the design or "production" of radomes having all of the following:
a.
Specially designed to protect the electronically scanned array antennae specified in 6A008.e.; 
and
b.
Resulting in an antenna pattern having an 'average side lobe level' more than 40 dB below the peak of the main beam level.
Technical Note:
'Average side lobe level' in 6D003.h.2.b. is measured over the entire array excluding the angular extent of the main beam and the first two side lobes on either side of the main beam.
6D102
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of goods specified in 6A108.
6D103
"Software" which processes post-flight, recorded data, enabling determination of vehicle position throughout its flight path, specially designed or modified for 'missiles'.
Technical Note:
In 6D103 'missiles' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
6D203
"Software" specially designed to enhance or release the performance of cameras or imaging devices to meet the characteristics of 6A203.a. to 6A203.c.
6E   
Technology
6E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment, materials or "software" specified in 6A, 6B, 6C or 6D.
6E002
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment or materials specified in 6A, 6B or 6C.
6E003
Other "technology" as follows:
a.
"Technology" as follows:
1.
"Technology""required" for the coating and treatment of optical surfaces to achieve an 'optical thickness' uniformity of 99,5% or better for optical coatings 500 mm or more in diameter or major axis length and with a total loss (absorption and scatter) of less than 5 x 10
-3
;
N.B.
See also 2E003.f.
Technical Note:
'Optical thickness' is the mathematical product of the index of refraction and the physical thickness of the coating.
2.
"Technology" for the fabrication of optics using single point diamond turning techniques to produce surface finish "accuracies" of better than 10 nm rms on non-planar surfaces exceeding 0,5 m
2
;
b.
"Technology""required" for the "development", "production" or "use" of specially designed diagnostic instruments or targets in test facilities for "SHPL" testing or testing or evaluation of materials irradiated by "SHPL" beams;
6E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment or "software" specified in 6A002, 6A007.b. and .c., 6A008, 6A102, 6A107, 6A108, 6B108, 6D102 or 6D103.
Note:
6E101 only controls "technology" for items specified in 6A002, 6A007 and 6A008 if the items were designed for airborne applications and are usable in "missiles".
6E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 6A003, 6A005.a.2., 6A005.b.2., 6A005.b.3., 6A005.b.4., 6A005.b.6., 6A005.c.2., 6A005.d.3.c., 6A005.d.4.c., 6A202, 6A203, 6A205, 6A225 or 6A226.
Note 1:
6E201 only controls "technology" for cameras specified in 6A003 if the cameras are also specified by any of the control parameters of 6A203.
Note 2:
6E201 only controls "technology” for lasers in 6A005.b.6. that are neodymium-doped and specified by any of the control parameters of 6A205.f.
6E203
"Technology", in the form of codes or keys, to enhance or release the performance of cameras or imaging devices to meet the characteristics of 6A203.a. to 6A203.c.
PART IX –
Category 7
CATEGORY 7 - NAVIGATION AND AVIONICS
7A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
N.B.
For automatic pilots for underwater vehicles, see Category 8.
For radar, see Category 6.
7A001
Accelerometers as follows and specially designed components therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7A101.
N.B.
For angular or rotational accelerometers, see 7A001.b.
a.
Linear accelerometers having any of the following:
1.
Specified to function at linear acceleration levels less than or equal to 15 g and having any of the following:
a.
A "bias""stability" of less (better) than 130 micro g with respect to a fixed calibration value over a period of one year; 
or
b.
A "scale factor""stability" of less (better) than 130 ppm with respect to a fixed calibration value over a period of one year;
2.
Specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 15 g but less than or equal to 100 g and having all of the following:
a.
A "bias""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 micro g over a period of one year; 
and
b.
A "scale factor""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 ppm over a period of one year; 
or
3.
Designed for use in inertial navigation or guidance systems and specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g;
Note:
7A001.a.1. and 7A001.a.2. do not control accelerometers limited to measurement of only vibration or shock.
b.
Angular or rotational accelerometers, specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g.
7A002
Gyros or angular rate sensors, having any of the following and specially designed components therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7A102.
N.B.
For angular or rotational accelerometers, see 7A001.b.
a.
Specified to function at linear acceleration levels less than or equal to 100 g and having any of the following:
1.
An angular rate range of less than 500 degrees per second and having any of the following:
a.
A "bias""stability" of less (better) than 0,5 degree per hour, when measured in a 1 g environment over a period of one month, and with respect to a fixed calibration value; 
or
b.
An "angle random walk" of less (better) than or equal to 0,0035 degree per square root hour; 
or
Note:
7A002.a.1.b. does not control "spinning mass gyros".
2.
An angular rate range greater than or equal to 500 degrees per second and having any of the following:
a.
A "bias""stability" of less (better) than 4 degrees per hour, when measured in a 1 g environment over a period of three minutes, and with respect to a fixed calibration value; 
or
b.
An "angle random walk" of less (better) than or equal to 0,1 degree per square root hour; 
or
Note:
7A002.a.2.b. does not control "spinning mass gyros".
b.
Specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g.
7A003
'Inertial measurement equipment or systems', having any of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7A103.
Note 1:
'Inertial measurement equipment or systems' incorporate accelerometers or gyroscopes to measure changes in velocity and orientation in order to determine or maintain heading or position without requiring an external reference once aligned. 'Inertial measurement equipment or systems' include:
—
Attitude and Heading Reference Systems (AHRSs);
Gyrocompasses;
Inertial Measurement Units (IMUs);
Inertial Navigation Systems (INSs);
Inertial Reference Systems (IRSs);
Inertial Reference Units (IRUs).
Note 2:
7A003 does not control 'inertial measurement equipment or systems' which are certified for use on "civil aircraft" by civil
aviation authorities of one or more EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States.
Technical Note:
'Positional aiding references' independently provide position, and include:
a.
"Satellite navigation system";
b.
"Data-Based Referenced Navigation" ("DBRN").
a.
Designed for "aircraft", land vehicles or vessels, providing position without the use of 'positional aiding references', and having any of the following "accuracies" subsequent to normal alignment:
1.
0,8 nautical miles per hour (nm/hr) "Circular Error Probable" ("CEP") rate or less (better);
2.
0,5 % distanced travelled "CEP" or less (better); 
or
3.
Total drift of 1 nautical mile "CEP" or less (better) in a 24 hr period;
Technical Note:
The performance parameters in 7A003.a.1., 7A003.a.2. and 7A003.a.3. typically apply to 'inertial measurement equipment or systems' designed for "aircraft", vehicles and vessels, respectively. These parameters result from the utilisation of specialised non-positional aiding references (e.g., altimeter, odometer, velocity log). As a consequence, the specified performance values cannot be readily converted between these parameters. Equipment designed for multiple platforms are evaluated against each applicable entry 7A003.a.1., 7A003.a.2., or 7A003.a.3.
b.
Designed for "aircraft", land vehicles or vessels, with an embedded 'positional aiding reference' and providing position after loss of all 'positional aiding references' for a period of up to 4 minutes, having an "accuracy" of less (better) than 10 meters "CEP";
Technical Note:
7A003.b. refers to systems in which 'inertial measurement equipment or systems' and other independent 'positional aiding references' are built into a single unit (i.e., embedded) in order to achieve improved performance.
c.
Designed for "aircraft", land vehicles or vessels, providing heading or True North determination and having any of the following:
1.
A maximum operating angular rate less (lower) than 500 deg/s and a heading "accuracy" without the use of 'positional aiding references' equal to or less (better) than 0,07 deg sec(Lat) (equivalent to 6 arc minutes rms at 45 degrees latitude); 
or
2.
A maximum operating angular rate equal to or greater (higher) than 500 deg/s and a heading "accuracy" without the use of 'positional aiding references' equal to or less (better) than 0,2 deg sec(Lat) (equivalent to 17 arc minutes rms at 45 degrees latitude); 
or
d.
Providing acceleration measurements or angular rate measurements, in more than one dimension, and having any of the following:
1.
Performance specified in 7A001 or 7A002 along any axis, without the use of any aiding references; 
or
2.
Being "space-qualified" and providing angular rate measurements having an "angle random walk" along any axis of less (better) than or equal to 0,1 degree per square root hour.
Note:
7A003.d.2. does not control 'inertial measurement equipment or systems' that contain "spinning mass gyros" as the only type of gyro.
7A004
'Star trackers' and components therefor, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7A104.
a.
'Star trackers' with a specified azimuth "accuracy" of equal to or less (better) than 20 seconds of arc throughout the specified lifetime of the equipment;
b.
Components specially designed for equipment specified in 7A004.a. as follows:
1.
Optical heads or baffles;
2.
Data processing units.
Technical Note:
'Star trackers' are also referred to as stellar attitude sensors or gyro-astro compasses.
7A005
"Satellite navigation system" receiving equipment having any of the following and specially designed components therefor:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7A105.
N.B.
For equipment specially designed for military use, SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
a.
Employing a decryption algorithm specially designed or modified for government use to access the ranging code for position and time; 
or
b.
Employing 'adaptive antenna systems'.
Note:
7A005.b. does not control "satellite navigation system" receiving equipment that only uses components designed to filter, switch, or combine signals from multiple omni-directional antennae that do not implement adaptive antenna techniques.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 7A005.b. 'adaptive antenna systems' dynamically generate one or more spatial nulls in an antenna array pattern by signal processing in the time domain or frequency domain.
7A006
Airborne altimeters operating at frequencies other than 4,2 to 4,4 GHz inclusive and having any of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7A106.
a.
'Power management'; 
or
b.
Using phase shift key modulation.
Technical Note:
'Power management' is changing the transmitted power of the altimeter signal so that received power at the "aircraft" altitude is always at the minimum necessary to determine the altitude.
7A008
Underwater sonar navigation systems using doppler velocity or correlation velocity logs integrated with a heading source and having a positioning "accuracy" of equal to or less (better) than 3% of distance travelled "Circular Error Probable" ("CEP") and specially designed components therefor.
Note:
7A008 does not control systems specially designed for installation on surface vessels or systems requiring acoustic beacons or buoys to provide positioning data.
N.B.
See 6A001.a. for acoustic systems, and 6A001.b. for correlation-velocity and Doppler-velocity sonar log equipment.
See 8A002 for other marine systems.
7A101
Linear accelerometers, other than those specified in 7A001, designed for use in inertial navigation systems or in guidance systems of all types, usable in 'missiles', having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:
a.
A "bias""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 micro g; 
and
b.
A "scale factor""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 ppm;
Note:
7A101 does not control accelerometers specially designed and developed as Measurement While Drilling (MWD) Sensors for use in downhole well service operations.
Technical Notes:
1.
In 7A101 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km;
2.
In 7A101 the measurement of "bias" and "scale factor" refers to one sigma standard deviation with respect to a fixed calibration over a period of one year;
7A102
All types of gyros, other than those specified in 7A002, usable in 'missiles', with a rated "drift rate" 'stability' of less than 0,5° (1 sigma or rms) per hour in a 1 g environment and specially designed components therefor.
Technical Notes:
1.
In 7A102 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
2.
In 7A102 'stability' is defined as a measure of the ability of a specific mechanism or performance coefficient to remain invariant when continuously exposed to a fixed operating condition (IEEE STD 528-2001 paragraph 2.247).
7A103
Instrumentation, navigation equipment and systems, other than those specified in 7A003, as follows; and specially designed components therefor:
a.
'Inertial measurement equipment or systems', using accelerometers or gyros as follows:
1.
Accelerometers specified in 7A001.a.3., 7A001.b. or 7A101 or gyros specified in 7A002 or 7A102; 
or
Note:
7A103.a.1. does not control equipment containing accelerometers specified in 7A001.a.3. that are designed to measure vibration or shock.
2.
Accelerometers specified in 7A001.a.1. or 7A001.a.2., designed for use in inertial navigation systems or in guidance systems of all types, and usable in 'missiles';
Note:
7A103.a.2. does not control equipment containing accelerometers specified in 7A001.a.1. or 7A001.a.2. where such accelerometers are specially designed and developed as MWD (Measurement While Drilling) sensors for use in down-hole well services operations
Technical Note:
'Inertial measurement equipment or systems' specified in 7A103.a. incorporate accelerometers or gyros to measure changes in velocity and orientation in order to determine or maintain heading or position without requiring an external reference once aligned.
Note:
'Inertial measurement equipment or systems' in 7A103.a. include:
—
Attitude and Heading Reference Systems (AHRSs);
—
Gyrocompasses;
—
Inertial Measurement Units (IMUs);
—
Inertial Navigation Systems (INSs);
—
Inertial Reference Systems (IRSs);
—
Inertial Reference Units (IRUs).
b.
Integrated flight instrument systems which include gyrostabilisers or automatic pilots, designed or modified for use in 'missiles';
c.
'Integrated navigation systems', designed or modified for 'missiles' and capable of providing a navigational accuracy of 200 m 'CEP' or less;
Technical Notes:
1.
An 'integrated navigation system' typically incorporates the following components:
a.
An inertial measurement device (e.g., an attitude and heading reference system, inertial reference unit, or inertial navigation system);
b.
One or more external sensors used to update the position and/or velocity, either periodically or continuously throughout the flight (e.g., satellite navigation receiver, radar altimeter, and/or Doppler radar);
and
c.
Integration hardware and software;
2.
In 7A103.c. 'CEP' (Circular Error Probable or Circle of Equal Probability) is a measure of accuracy, defined as the radius of the circle inside of which there is a 50% probability of being located.
d.
Three axis magnetic heading sensors, designed or modified to be integrated with flight control and navigation systems, other than those specified in 6A006, having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Internal tilt compensation in pitch (± 90 degrees) and roll (± 180 degrees) axes; 
and
2.
Azimuthal accuracy better (less) than 0,5 degrees rms at latitude of ± 80 degrees, reference to local magnetic field.
Note:
Flight control and navigation systems in 7A103.d. include gyrostabilisers, automatic pilots and inertial navigation systems.
Technical Note:
In 7A103 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
7A104
Gyro-astro compasses and other devices, other than those specified in 7A004, which derive position or orientation by means of automatically tracking celestial bodies or satellites and specially designed components therefor.
7A105
Receiving equipment for 'navigation satellite systems', other than those specified in 7A005, having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:
a.
Designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a.; 
or
b.
Designed or modified for airborne applications and having any of the following:
1.
Capable of providing navigation information at speeds in excess of 600 m/s;
2.
Employing decryption, designed or modified for military or governmental services, to gain access to a 'navigation satellite system' secured signal/data; 
or
3.
Being specially designed to employ anti-jam features (e.g., null steering antenna or electronically steerable antenna) to function in an environment of active or passive countermeasures.
Note:
7A105.b.2. and 7A105.b.3. do not control equipment designed for commercial, civil or 'Safety of Life' (e.g., data integrity, flight safety) 'navigation satellite system' services.
Technical Note:
In 7A105, 'navigation satellite system' includes Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS; e.g., GPS, GLONASS, Galileo or BeiDou) and Regional Navigation Satellite Systems (RNSS; e.g., NavIC, QZSS).
7A106
Altimeters, other than those specified in 7A006, of radar or laser radar type, designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
7A115
Passive sensors for determining bearing to specific electromagnetic source (direction finding equipment) or terrain characteristics, designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
Note:
Equipment specified in 7A105, 7A106, and 7A115 includes the following:
a.
Terrain contour mapping equipment;
b.
Scene mapping and correlation (both digital and analogue) equipment;
c.
Doppler navigation radar equipment;
d.
Passive interferometer equipment;
e.
Imaging sensor equipment (both active and passive).
7A116
Flight control systems and servo valves, as follows; designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or "missiles".
a.
Pneumatic, hydraulic, mechanical, electro-optical, or electro-mechanical flight control systems (including fly-by-wire and fly-by-light systems);
b.
Attitude control equipment;
c.
Flight control servo valves designed or modified for the systems specified in 7A116.a. or 7A116.b., and designed or modified to operate in a vibration environment greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz.
Note:
For conversion of manned aircraft to operate as "missiles", 7A116 includes the systems, equipment and valves designed or modiﬁed to enable operation of manned aircraft as unmanned aerial vehicles.
7A117
"Guidance sets", usable in "missiles" capable of achieving system accuracy of 3,33% or less of the range (e.g., a 'CEP' of 10 km or less at a range of 300 km).
Technical Note:
In 7A117 'CEP' (Circular Error Probable or Circle of Equal Probability) is a measure of accuracy, defined as the radius of the circle centred at the target, at a specific range, in which 50% of the payloads impact.
7B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
7B001
Test, calibration or alignment equipment, specially designed for equipment specified in 7A.
Note:
7B001 does not control test, calibration or alignment equipment for 'Maintenance Level I' or 'Maintenance Level II'.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Maintenance Level I'
The failure of an inertial navigation unit is detected on the "aircraft" by indications from the Control and Display Unit (CDU) or by the status message from the corresponding sub-system. By following the manufacturer's manual, the cause of the failure may be localised at the level of the malfunctioning Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). The operator then removes the LRU and replaces it with a spare.
2.
'Maintenance Level II'
The defective LRU is sent to the maintenance workshop (the manufacturer's or that of the operator responsible for level II maintenance). At the maintenance workshop, the malfunctioning LRU is tested by various appropriate means to verify and localise the defective Shop Replaceable Assembly (SRA) module responsible for the failure. This SRA is removed and replaced by an operative spare. The defective SRA (or possibly the complete LRU) is then shipped to the manufacturer. 'Maintenance Level II' does not include the disassembly or repair of controlled accelerometers or gyro sensors.
7B002
Equipment specially designed to characterize mirrors for ring "laser" gyros, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 7B102.
a.
Scatterometers having a measurement "accuracy" of 10 ppm or less (better);
b.
Profilometers having a measurement "accuracy" of 0,5 nm (5 angstrom) or less (better).
7B003
Equipment specially designed for the "production" of equipment specified in 7A.
Note:
7B003 includes:
—
Gyro tuning test stations;
Gyro dynamic balance stations;
Gyro run-in/motor test stations;
Gyro evacuation and fill stations;
Centrifuge fixtures for gyro bearings;
Accelerometer axis align stations;
Fibre optic gyro coil winding machines.
7B102
Reflectometers specially designed to characterise mirrors, for "laser" gyros, having a measurement accuracy of 50 ppm or less (better).
7B103
"Production facilities" and "production equipment" as follows:
a.
"Production facilities" specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117;
b.
"Production equipment", and other test, calibration and alignment equipment, other than that specified in 7B001 to 7B003, designed or modified to be used with equipment specified in 7A.
7C   
Materials
None.
7D   
Software
7D001
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development" or "production" of equipment specified in 7A or 7B.
7D002
"Source code" for the operation or maintenance of any inertial navigation equipment, including inertial equipment not specified in 7A003 or 7A004, or Attitude and Heading Reference Systems ('AHRS').
Note:
7D002 does not control "source code" for the "use" of gimballed 'AHRS'.
Technical Note:
'AHRS' generally differ from Inertial Navigation Systems (INS) in that an 'AHRS' provides attitude and heading information and normally does not provide the acceleration, velocity and position information associated with an INS.
7D003
Other "software" as follows:
a.
"Software" specially designed or modified to improve the operational performance or reduce the navigational error of systems to the levels specified in 7A003, 7A004 or 7A008;
b.
"Source code" for hybrid integrated systems which improves the operational performance or reduces the navigational error of systems to the level specified in 7A003 or 7A008 by continuously combining heading data with any of the following:
1.
Doppler radar or sonar velocity data;
2.
"Satellite navigation system" reference data; 
or
3.
Data from "Data-Based Referenced Navigation" ("DBRN") systems;
c.
Not used;
d.
Not used;
e.
Computer-Aided-Design (CAD) "software" specially designed for the "development" of "active flight control systems", helicopter multi-axis fly-by-wire or fly-by-light controllers or helicopter "circulation controlled anti-torque or circulation-controlled direction control systems", whose "technology" is specified in 7E004.b.1., 7E004.b.3. to 7E004.b.5., 7E004.b.7., 7E004.b.8., 7E004.c.1. or 7E004.c.2.
7D004
"Source code" incorporating "development""technology" specified in 7E004.a.2., 7E004.a.3., 7E004.a.5., 7E004.a.6. or 7E004.b., for any of the following:
a.
Digital flight management systems for "total control of flight";
b.
Integrated propulsion and flight control systems;
c.
"Fly-by-wire systems" or "fly-by-light systems";
d.
Fault-tolerant or self-reconfiguring "active flight control systems";
e.
Not used;
f.
Air data systems based on surface static data; 
or
g.
Three dimensional displays.
Note:
7D004. does not control "source code" associated with common computer elements and utilities (e.g., input signal acquisition, output signal transmission, computer program and data loading, built-in test, task scheduling mechanisms) not providing a specific flight control system function.
7D005
"Software" specially designed to decrypt "satellite navigation system" ranging code designed for government use.
7D101
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of equipment specified in 7A001 to 7A006, 7A101 to 7A106, 7A115, 7A116.a., 7A116.b., 7B001, 7B002, 7B003, 7B102 or 7B103.
7D102
Integration "software" as follows:
a.
Integration "software" for the equipment specified in 7A103.b.;
b.
Integration "software" specially designed for the equipment specified in 7A003 or 7A103.a.;
c.
Integration "software" designed or modified for the equipment specified in 7A103.c.
Note:
A common form of integration "software" employs Kalman filtering.
7D103
"Software" specially designed for modelling or simulation of the "guidance sets" specified in 7A117 or for their design integration with the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
Note:
"Software" specified in 7D103 remains controlled when combined with specially designed hardware specified in 4A102.
7D104
"Software" specially designed or modified for the operation or maintenance of "guidance sets" specified in 7A117.
Note:
7D104 includes ″software″, specially designed or modified to enhance the performance of ″guidance sets″ to achieve or exceed the accuracy specified in 7A117.
7E   
Technology
7E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment or "software", specified in 7A, 7B, 7D001, 7D002, 7D003, 7D005 and 7D101 to 7D103.
Note:
7E001 includes key management "technology" exclusively for equipment specified in 7A005.a.
7E002
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment specified in 7A or 7B.
7E003
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the repair, refurbishing or overhaul of equipment specified in 7A001 to 7A004.
Note:
7E003 does not control "technology" for maintenance, directly associated with calibration, removal or replacement of damaged or unserviceable LRUs and SRAs of a "civil aircraft" as described in 'Maintenance Level I' or 'Maintenance Level II'.
N.B.
See Technical Notes to 7B001.
7E004
Other "technology" as follows:
a.
"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:
1.
Not used;
2.
Air data systems based on surface static data only, i.e., which dispense with conventional air data probes;
3.
Three dimensional displays for "aircraft";
4.
Not used;
5.
Electric actuators (i.e., electromechanical, electrohydrostatic and integrated actuator package) specially designed for 'primary flight control';
Technical Note:
'Primary flight control' is "aircraft" stability or manoeuvring control using force/moment generators, i.e. aerodynamic control surfaces or propulsive thrust vectoring.
6.
'Flight control optical sensor array' specially designed for implementing "active flight control systems"; 
or
Technical Note:
A 'flight control optical sensor array' is a network of distributed optical sensors, using "laser" beams, to provide real-time flight control data for on-board processing.
7.
"DBRN" systems designed to navigate underwater, using sonar or gravity databases, that provide a positioning "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 0,4 nautical miles;
b.
"Development""technology", as follows, for "active flight control systems" (including "fly-by-wire systems" or "fly-by-light systems"):
1.
Photonic-based "technology" for sensing "aircraft" or flight control component state, transferring flight control data, or commanding actuator movement, "required" for "fly-by-light systems""active flight control systems";
2.
Not used;
3.
Real-time algorithms to analyse component sensor information to predict and preemptively mitigate impending degradation and failures of components within an "active flight control system";
Note:
7E004.b.3. does not control algorithms for purpose of off-line maintenance.
4.
Real-time algorithms to identify component failures and reconfigure force and moment controls to mitigate "active flight control system" degradations and failures;
Note:
7E004.b.4. does not control algorithms for the elimination of fault effects through comparison of redundant data sources, or off-line pre-planned responses to anticipated failures.
5.
Integration of digital flight control, navigation and propulsion control data, into a digital flight management system for "total control of flight";
Note:
7E004.b.5. does not control:
a.
"Technology" for integration of digital flight control, navigation and propulsion control data, into a digital flight management system for 'flight path optimisation';
b.
"Technology" for "aircraft" flight instrument systems integrated solely for VOR, DME, ILS or MLS navigation or approaches.
Technical Note:
'Flight path optimisation' is a procedure that minimises deviations from a four-dimensional (space and time) desired trajectory based on maximising performance or effectiveness for mission tasks.
6.
Not used;
7.
"Technology""required" for deriving the functional requirements for "fly-by-wire systems" having all of the following:
a.
'Inner-loop' airframe stability controls requiring loop closure rates of 40 Hz or greater; 
and
Technical Note:
'Inner-loop' refers to functions of "active flight control systems" that automate airframe stability controls.
b.
Having any of the following:
1.
Corrects an aerodynamically unstable airframe, measured at any point in the design flight envelope, that would lose recoverable control if not corrected within 0,5 seconds;
2.
Couples controls in two or more axes while compensating for 'abnormal changes in aircraft state';
Technical Note:
'Abnormal changes in aircraft state' include in-flight structural damage, loss of engine thrust, disabled control surface, or destabilising shifts in cargo load.
3.
Performs the functions specified in 7E004.b.5.; 
or
Note:
7E004.b.7.b.3. does not control autopilots.
4.
Enables "aircraft" to have stable controlled flight, other than during take-off or landing, at greater than 18 degrees angle of attack, 15 degrees side slip, 15 degrees/second pitch or yaw rate, or 90 degrees/second roll rate;
8.
"Technology""required" for deriving the functional requirements for "fly-by-wire systems" to achieve all of the following:
a.
No loss of control of the "aircraft" in the event of a consecutive sequence of any two individual faults within the "fly-by-wire system"; 
and
b.
Probability of loss of control of the "aircraft" being less (better) than 1 x 10
-9
 failures per flight hour;
Note:
7E004.b. does not control "technology" associated with common computer elements and utilities (e.g., input signal acquisition, output signal transmission, computer program and data loading, built-in test, task scheduling mechanisms) not providing a specific flight control system function.
c.
"Technology" for the "development" of helicopter systems, as follows:
1.
Multi-axis fly-by-wire or fly-by-light controllers, which combine the functions of at least two of the following into one controlling element:
a.
Collective controls;
b.
Cyclic controls;
c.
Yaw controls;
2.
"Circulation-controlled anti-torque or circulation-controlled direction control systems";
3.
Rotor blades incorporating 'variable geometry airfoils', for use in systems using individual blade control.
Technical Note:
'Variable geometry airfoils' use trailing edge flaps or tabs, or leading edge slats or pivoted nose droop, the position of which can be controlled in flight.
7E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 7A001 to 7A006, 7A101 to 7A106, 7A115 to 7A117, 7B001, 7B002, 7B003, 7B102, 7B103, 7D101 to 7D103.
7E102
"Technology" for protection of avionics and electrical subsystems against electromagnetic pulse (EMP) and electromagnetic interference (EMI) hazards, from external sources, as follows:
a.
Design "technology" for shielding systems;
b.
Design "technology" for the configuration of hardened electrical circuits and subsystems;
c.
Design "technology" for the determination of hardening criteria of 7E102.a. and 7E102.b.
7E104
"Technology" for the integration of the flight control, guidance, and propulsion data into a flight management system for optimisation of rocket system trajectory.
PART X –
Category 8
CATEGORY 8 - MARINE
8A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
8A001
Submersible vehicles and surface vessels, as follows:
N.B.
For the control status of equipment for submersible vehicles, see:
—
Category 6 for sensors;
Categories 7 and 8 for navigation equipment;
Category 8A for underwater equipment.
a.
Manned, tethered submersible vehicles designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m;
b.
Manned, untethered submersible vehicles having any of the following:
1.
Designed to 'operate autonomously' and having a lifting capacity of all of the following:
a.
10% or more of their weight in air; 
and
b.
15 kN or more;
2.
Designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m; 
or
3.
Having all of the following:
a.
Designed to continuously 'operate autonomously' for 10 hours or more; 
and
b.
'Range' of 25 nautical miles or more;
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 8A001.b., 'operate autonomously' means fully submerged, without snorkel, all systems working and cruising at minimum speed at which the submersible can safely control its depth dynamically by using its depth planes only, with no need for a support vessel or support base on the surface, sea-bed or shore, and containing a propulsion system for submerged or surface use.
2.
For the purposes of 8A001.b., 'range' means half the maximum distance a submersible vehicle can 'operate autonomously'.
c.
Unmanned submersible vehicles, as follows:
1.
Unmanned submersible vehicles having any of the following:
a.
Designed for deciding a course relative to any geographical reference without real-time human assistance;
b.
Acoustic data or command link; 
or
c.
Optical data or command link exceeding 1 000 m;
2.
Unmanned submersible vehicles, not specified in 8A001.c.1, having all of the following:
a.
Designed to operate with a tether;
b.
Designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m;
c.
Having any of the following:
1.
Designed for self-propelled manoeuvre using propulsion motors or thrusters specified in 8A002.a.2.; 
or
2.
Fibre optic data link;
d.
Not used;
e.
Ocean salvage systems with a lifting capacity exceeding 5 MN for salvaging objects from depths exceeding 250 m and having any of the following:
1.
Dynamic positioning systems capable of position keeping within 20 m of a given point provided by the navigation system; 
or
2.
Seafloor navigation and navigation integration systems, for depths exceeding 1 000 m and with positioning "accuracies" to within 10 m of a predetermined point;
f.
Not used;
g.
Not used;
h.
Not used;
i.
Not used.
8A002
Marine systems, equipment and components, as follows:
Note:
For underwater communications systems, see Category 5, Part 1 - Telecommunications.
a.
Systems, equipment and components, specially designed or modified for submersible vehicles and designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m, as follows:
1.
Pressure housings or pressure hulls with a maximum inside chamber diameter exceeding 1,5 m;
2.
Direct current propulsion motors or thrusters;
3.
Umbilical cables, and connectors therefor, using optical fibre and having synthetic strength members;
4.
Components manufactured from material specified in 8C001;
Technical Note:
The objective of 8A002.a.4. should not be defeated by the export of 'syntactic foam' specified in 8C001 when an intermediate stage of manufacture has been performed and it is not yet in the final component form.
b.
Systems specially designed or modified for the automated control of the motion of submersible vehicles specified in 8A001, using navigation data, having closed loop servo-controls and having any of the following:
1.
Enabling a vehicle to move within 10 m of a predetermined point in the water column;
2.
Maintaining the position of the vehicle within 10 m of a predetermined point in the water column; 
or
3.
Maintaining the position of the vehicle within 10 m while following a cable on or under the seabed;
c.
Fibre optic pressure hull penetrators;
d.
Underwater vision systems having all of the following:
1.
Specially designed or modified for remote operation with an underwater vehicle; 
and
2.
Employing any of the following techniques to minimise the effects of back scatter:
a.
Range-gated illuminators; 
or
b.
Range-gated laser systems;
e.
Not used;
f.
Not used;
g.
Light systems specially designed or modified for underwater use, as follows:
1.
Stroboscopic light systems capable of a light output energy of more than 300 J per flash and a flash rate of more than 5 flashes per second;
2.
Argon arc light systems specially designed for use below 1 000 m;
h.
"Robots" specially designed for underwater use, controlled by using a dedicated computer and having any of the following:
1.
Systems that control the "robot" using information from sensors which measure force or torque applied to an external object, distance to an external object, or tactile sense between the "robot" and an external object; 
or
2.
The ability to exert a force of 250 N or more or a torque of 250 Nm or more and using titanium based alloys or "composite""fibrous or filamentary materials" in their structural members;
i.
Remotely controlled articulated manipulators specially designed or modified for use with submersible vehicles and having any of the following:
1.
Systems which control the manipulator using information from sensors which measure any of the following:
a.
Torque or force applied to an external object; 
or
b.
Tactile sense between the manipulator and an external object; 
or
2.
Controlled by proportional master-slave techniques and having 5 degrees of 'freedom of movement' or more;
Technical Note:
Only functions having proportionally related motion control using positional feedback are counted when determining the number of degrees of 'freedom of movement'.
j.
Air independent power systems specially designed for underwater use, as follows:
1.
Brayton or Rankine cycle engine air independent power systems having any of the following:
a.
Chemical scrubber or absorber systems, specially designed to remove carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and particulates from recirculated engine exhaust;
b.
Systems specially designed to use a monoatomic gas;
c.
Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; 
or
d.
Systems having all of the following:
1.
Specially designed to pressurise the products of reaction or for fuel reformation;
2.
Specially designed to store the products of the reaction; 
and
3.
Specially designed to discharge the products of the reaction against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;
2.
Diesel cycle engine air independent systems having all of the following:
a.
Chemical scrubber or absorber systems, specially designed to remove carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and particulates from recirculated engine exhaust;
b.
Systems specially designed to use a monoatomic gas;
c.
Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; 
and
d.
Specially designed exhaust systems that do not exhaust continuously the products of combustion;
3.
"Fuel cell" air independent power systems with an output exceeding 2 kW and having any of the following:
a.
Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; 
or
b.
Systems having all of the following:
1.
Specially designed to pressurise the products of reaction or for fuel reformation;
2.
Specially designed to store the products of the reaction; 
and
3.
Specially designed to discharge the products of the reaction against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;
4.
Stirling cycle engine air independent power systems having all of the following:
a.
Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; 
and
b.
Specially designed exhaust systems which discharge the products of combustion against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;
k.
Not used;
l.
Not used;
m.
Not used;
n.
Not used;
o.
Propellers, power transmission systems, power generation systems and noise reduction systems, as follows:
1.
Not used
2.
Water-screw propeller, power generation systems or transmission systems, designed for use on vessels, as follows:
a.
Controllable-pitch propellers and hub assemblies, rated at more than 30 MW;
b.
Internally liquid-cooled electric propulsion engines with a power output exceeding 2,5 MW;
c.
"Superconductive" propulsion engines or permanent magnet electric propulsion engines, with a power output exceeding 0,1 MW;
d.
Power transmission shaft systems incorporating "composite" material components and capable of transmitting more than 2 MW;
e.
Ventilated or base-ventilated propeller systems, rated at more than 2,5 MW;
3.
Noise reduction systems designed for use on vessels of 1 000 tonnes displacement or more, as follows:
a.
Systems that attenuate underwater noise at frequencies below 500 Hz and consist of compound acoustic mounts for the acoustic isolation of diesel engines, diesel generator sets, gas turbines, gas turbine generator sets, propulsion motors or propulsion reduction gears, specially designed for sound or vibration isolation and having an intermediate mass exceeding 30% of the equipment to be mounted;
b.
'Active noise reduction or cancellation systems' or magnetic bearings, specially designed for power transmission systems;
Technical Note:
'Active noise reduction or cancellation systems' incorporate electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source.
p.
Pumpjet propulsion systems having all of the following:
1.
Power output exceeding 2,5 MW; 
and
2.
Using divergent nozzle and flow conditioning vane techniques to improve propulsive efficiency or reduce propulsion-generated underwater-radiated noise;
q.
Underwater swimming and diving equipment as follows:
1.
Closed circuit rebreathers;
2.
Semi-closed circuit rebreathers;
Note:
8A002.q. does not control individual rebreathers for personal use when accompanying their users.
N.B.
For equipment and devices specially designed for military use, SEE THE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
r.
Diver deterrent acoustic systems specially designed or modified to disrupt divers and having a sound pressure level equal to or exceeding 190 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) at frequencies of 200 Hz and below.
Note 1:
8A002.r. does not control diver deterrent systems based on underwater explosive devices, air guns or combustible sources.
Note 2:
8A002.r. includes diver deterrent acoustic systems that use spark gap sources, also known as plasma sound sources.
8B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
8B001
Water tunnels designed to have a background noise of less than 100 dB (reference 1 μPa, 1 Hz) within the frequency range exceeding 0 Hz but not exceeding 500 Hz and designed for measuring acoustic fields generated by a hydro-flow around propulsion system models.
8C   
Materials
8C001
'Syntactic foam' designed for underwater use and having all of the following:
N.B.
See also 8A002.a.4.
a.
Designed for marine depths exceeding 1 000 m; 
and
b.
A density less than 561 kg/m
3
.
Technical Note:
'Syntactic foam' consists of hollow spheres of plastic or glass embedded in a resin "matrix".
8D   
Software
8D001
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment or materials, specified in 8A, 8B or 8C.
8D002
Specific "software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production", repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction.
8E   
Technology
8E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of equipment or materials, specified in 8A, 8B or 8C.
8E002
Other "technology" as follows:
a.
"Technology" for the "development", "production", repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction;
b.
"Technology" for the overhaul or refurbishing of equipment specified in 8A001, 8A002.b., 8A002.j., 8A002.o. or 8A002.p.
c.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:
1.
Surface-effect vehicles (fully skirted variety) having all of the following:
a.
Maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 30 knots in a significant wave height of 1,25 m or more;
b.
Cushion pressure exceeding 3 830 Pa; 
and
c.
Light-ship-to-full-load displacement ratio of less than 0,70;
2.
Surface-effect vehicles (rigid sidewalls) with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 40 knots in a significant wave height of 3,25 m or more;
3.
Hydrofoil vessels with active systems for automatically controlling foil systems, with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, of 40 knots or more in a significant wave height of 3,25 m or more; 
or
4.
'Small waterplane area vessels' having any of the following:
a.
Full load displacement exceeding 500 tonnes with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 35 knots in a significant wave height of 3,25 m or more; 
or
b.
Full load displacement exceeding 1 500 tonnes with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 25 knots in a significant wave height of 4 m or more.
Technical Note:
A 'small waterplane area vessel' is defined by the following formula: waterplane area at an operational design draft less than 2 x (displaced volume at the operational design draft)
2/3
.
PART XI –
Category 9
CATEGORY 9 – AEROSPACE AND PROPULSION
9A   
Systems, Equipment and Components
N.B.
For propulsion systems designed or rated against neutron or transient ionising radiation, SEE THE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
9A001
Aero gas turbine engines having any of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A101.
a.
Incorporating any of the "technologies" specified in 9E003.a., 9E003.h. or 9E003.i.; 
or
Note 1:
9A001.a. does not control aero gas turbine engines which meet all of the following:
a.
Certified by the civil aviation authorities of one or more EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States; 
and
b.
Intended to power non-military manned "aircraft" for which any of the following has been issued by civil aviation authorities of one or more EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States for the "aircraft" with this specific engine type:
1.
A civil type certificate; 
or
2.
An equivalent document recognised by the International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO).
Note 2:
9A001.a. does not control aero gas turbine engines designed for Auxiliary Power Units (APUs) approved by the civil aviation authority in a EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States.
b.
Designed to power an "aircraft" to cruise at Mach 1 or higher, for more than thirty minutes.
9A002
'Marine gas turbine engines' designed to use liquid fuel and having all of the following, and specially designed assemblies and components therefor:
a.
Maximum continuous power when operating in "steady state mode" at standard reference conditions specified by ISO 3977-2:1997 (or national equivalent) of 24 245 kW or more; 
and
b.
'Corrected specific fuel consumption' not exceeding 0,219 kg/kWh at 35% of the maximum continuous power when using liquid fuel.
Note:
The term 'marine gas turbine engines' includes those industrial, or aero-derivative, gas turbine engines adapted for a ship's electric power generation or propulsion.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 9A002, 'corrected specific fuel consumption' is the specific fuel consumption of the engine corrected to a marine distillate liquid fuel having a net specific energy (i.e. net heating value) of 42MJ/kg (ISO 3977-2:1997).
9A003
Specially designed assemblies or components, incorporating any of the "technologies" specified in 9E003.a., 9E003.h. or 9E003.i., for any of the following aero gas turbine engines:
a.
Specified in 9A001; 
or
b.
Whose design or production origins are either non-EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States or unknown to the manufacturer.
9A004
Space launch vehicles, "spacecraft", "spacecraft buses", "spacecraft payloads", "spacecraft" on-board systems or equipment, terrestrial equipment, and air-launch platforms as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A104.
a.
Space launch vehicles;
b.
"Spacecraft";
c.
"Spacecraft buses";
d.
"Spacecraft payloads" incorporating items specified in 3A001.b.1.a.4., 3A002.g., 5A001.a.1., 5A001.b.3., 5A002.c., 5A002.e., 6A002.a.1., 6A002.a.2., 6A002.b., 6A002.d., 6A003.b., 6A004.c., 6A004.e., 6A008.d., 6A008.e., 6A008.k., 6A008.l. or 9A010.c.;
e.
On-board systems or equipment, specially designed for "spacecraft" and having any of the following functions:
1.
'Command and telemetry data handling';
Note:
For the purpose of 9A004.e.1., 'command and telemetry data handling' includes bus data management, storage, and processing.
2.
'Payload data handling'; 
or
Note:
For the purpose of 9A004.e.2., 'payload data handling' includes payload data management, storage, and processing.
3.
'Attitude and orbit control';
Note:
For the purpose of 9A004.e.3., 'attitude and orbit control' includes sensing and actuation to determine and control the position and orientation of a "spacecraft".
N.B.
For equipment specially designed for military use, SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
f.
Terrestrial equipment specially designed for "spacecraft", as follows:
1.
Telemetry and telecommand equipment specially designed for any of the following data processing functions:
a.
Telemetry data processing of frame synchronisation and error corrections, for monitoring of operational status (also known as health and safe status) of the "spacecraft bus"; 
or
b.
Command data processing for formatting command data being sent to the "spacecraft" to control the "spacecraft bus";
2.
Simulators specially designed for 'verification of operational procedures' of "spacecraft";
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 9A004.f.2., 'verification of operational procedures' is any of the following:
1.
Command sequence confirmation;
2.
Operational training;
3.
Operational rehearsals;
or
4.
Operational analysis.
g.
"Aircraft" specially designed or modified to be air-launch platforms for space launch vehicles;
h.
"Sub-orbital craft".
9A005
Liquid rocket propulsion systems containing any of the systems or components, specified in 9A006.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A105 AND 9A119.
9A006
Systems and components, specially designed for liquid rocket propulsion systems, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A106, 9A108 AND 9A120.
a.
Cryogenic refrigerators, flightweight dewars, cryogenic heat pipes or cryogenic systems, specially designed for use in space vehicles and capable of restricting cryogenic fluid losses to less than 30% per year;
b.
Cryogenic containers or closed-cycle refrigeration systems, capable of providing temperatures of 100 K (-173°C) or less for "aircraft" capable of sustained flight at speeds exceeding Mach 3, launch vehicles or "spacecraft";
c.
Slush hydrogen storage or transfer systems;
d.
High pressure (exceeding 17,5 MPa) turbo pumps, pump components or their associated gas generator or expander cycle turbine drive systems;
e.
High-pressure (exceeding 10,6 MPa) thrust chambers and nozzles therefor;
f.
Propellant storage systems using the principle of capillary containment or positive expulsion (i.e., with flexible bladders);
g.
Liquid propellant injectors with individual orifices of 0,381 mm or smaller in diameter (an area of 1,14 x 10
-3
 cm
2
 or smaller for non-circular orifices) and specially designed for liquid rocket engines;
h.
One-piece carbon-carbon thrust chambers or one-piece carbon-carbon exit cones, with densities exceeding 1,4 g/cm
3
 and tensile strengths exceeding 48 MPa.
9A007
Solid rocket propulsion systems having any of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A107 AND 9A119.
a.
Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs;
b.
Specific impulse of 2,4 kNs/kg or more, when the nozzle flow is expanded to ambient sea level conditions for an adjusted chamber pressure of 7 MPa;
c.
Stage mass fractions exceeding 88% and propellant solid loadings exceeding 86%;
d.
Components specified in 9A008; 
or
e.
Insulation and propellant bonding systems, using direct-bonded motor designs to provide a 'strong mechanical bond' or a barrier to chemical migration between the solid propellant and case insulation material.
Technical Note:
'Strong mechanical bond' means bond strength equal to or more than propellant strength.
9A008
Components specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A108.
a.
Insulation and propellant bonding systems, using liners to provide a 'strong mechanical bond' or a barrier to chemical migration between the solid propellant and case insulation material;
Technical Note:
'Strong mechanical bond' means bond strength equal to or more than propellant strength.
b.
Filament-wound "composite" motor cases exceeding 0,61 m in diameter or having 'structural efficiency ratios (PV/W)' exceeding 25 km;
Technical Note:
'Structural efficiency ratio (PV/W)' is the burst pressure (P) multiplied by the vessel volume (V) divided by the total pressure vessel weight (W).
c.
Nozzles with thrust levels exceeding 45 kN or nozzle throat erosion rates of less than 0,075 mm/s;
d.
Movable nozzle or secondary fluid injection thrust vector control systems, capable of any of the following:
1.
Omni-axial movement exceeding ± 5°;
2.
Angular vector rotations of 20°/s or more; 
or
3.
Angular vector accelerations of 40°/s
2
 or more.
9A009
Hybrid rocket propulsion systems having any of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A109 AND 9A119.
a.
Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs; 
or
b.
Thrust levels exceeding 220 kN in vacuum exit conditions.
9A010
Specially designed components, systems and structures, for launch vehicles, launch vehicle propulsion systems or "spacecraft", as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1A002 AND 9A110.
a.
Components and structures, each exceeding 10 kg and specially designed for launch vehicles manufactured using any of the following:
1.
"Composite" materials consisting of "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.e. and resins specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.;
2.
Metal "matrix""composites" reinforced by any of the following:
a.
Materials specified in 1C007;
b.
"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010; 
or
c.
Aluminides specified in 1C002.a.; 
or
3.
Ceramic "matrix""composite" materials specified in 1C007;
Note:
The weight cut-off is not relevant for nose cones.
b.
Components and structures, specially designed for launch vehicle propulsion systems specified in 9A005 to 9A009 manufactured using any of the following:
1.
"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.e. and resins specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.;
2.
Metal "matrix""composites" reinforced by any of the following:
a.
Materials specified in 1C007;
b.
"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010; 
or
c.
Aluminides specified in 1C002.a.; 
or
3.
Ceramic "matrix""composite" materials specified in 1C007;
c.
Structural components and isolation systems, specially designed to control actively the dynamic response or distortion of "spacecraft" structures;
d.
Pulsed liquid rocket engines with thrust-to-weight ratios equal to or more than 1 kN/kg and a 'response time' of less than 30 ms.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 9A010.d., 'response time' is the time required to achieve 90% of total rated thrust from start-up.
9A011
Ramjet, scramjet or 'combined cycle engines', and specially designed components therefor.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A111 AND 9A118.
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 9A011, 'combined cycle engines' combine two or more of the following types of engines:
—
Gas turbine engine (turbojet, turboprop and turbofan);
Ramjet or scramjet;
Rocket motor or engine (liquid/gel/solid-propellant and hybrid).
9A012
"Unmanned aerial vehicles" ("UAVs"), unmanned "airships", related equipment and components, as follows:
N.B.1.
SEE ALSO 9A112.
N.B.2.
For "UAVs" that are "sub-orbital craft", see 9A004.h.
a.
"UAVs" or unmanned "airships", designed to have controlled flight out of the direct 'natural vision' of the 'operator' and having any of the following:
1.
Having all of the following:
a.
A maximum 'endurance' greater than or equal to 30 minutes but less than 1 hour; 
and
b.
Designed to take-off and have stable controlled flight in wind gusts equal to or exceeding 46,3 km/h (25 knots); 
or
2.
A maximum 'endurance' of 1 hour or greater;
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 9A012.a., 'operator' is a person who initiates or commands the "UAV" or unmanned "airship" flight.
2.
For the purposes of 9A012.a., 'endurance' is to be calculated for ISA conditions (ISO 2533:1975) at sea level in zero wind.
3.
For the purposes of 9A012.a., 'natural vision' means unaided human sight, with or without corrective lenses.
b.
Related equipment and components, as follows:
1.
Not used;
2.
Not used;
3.
Equipment or components, specially designed to convert a manned "aircraft" or manned "airship", to a "UAV" or unmanned "airship", specified in 9A012.a.;
4.
Air breathing reciprocating or rotary internal combustion type engines, specially designed or modified to propel "UAVs" or unmanned "airships", at altitudes above 15 240 metres (50 000 feet).
9A101
Turbojet and turbofan engines, other than those specified in 9A001, as follows;
a.
Engines having all of the following characteristics:
1.
'Maximum thrust value' greater than 400 N excluding civil certified engines with a 'maximum thrust value' greater than 8 890 N;
2.
Specific fuel consumption of 0,15 kg N
-1
 h
-1
 or less;
3.
'Dry weight' less than 750 kg; 
and
4.
'First-stage rotor diameter' less than 1 m;
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purpose of 9A101.a.1., 'maximum thrust value' is the manufacturer’s demonstrated maximum thrust for the engine type un-installed at sea level static conditions using the ICAO standard atmosphere. The civil type certified thrust value will be equal to or less than the manufacturer’s demonstrated maximum thrust for the engine type un-installed.
2.
Specific fuel consumption is determined at maximum continuous thrust for engine type un-installed at sea level static conditions using the ICAO standard atmosphere.
3.
'Dry weight' is the weight of the engine without fluids (fuel, hydraulic fluid, oil, etc.) and does not include the nacelle (housing).
4.
'First-stage rotor diameter' is the diameter of the first rotating stage of the engine, whether a fan or compressor, measured at the leading edge of the blade tips.
b.
Engines designed or modified for use in "missiles" or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a.
9A102
'Turboprop engine systems' specially designed for unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a., and specially designed components therefor, having a 'maximum power' greater than 10 kW.
Note:
9A102 does not control civil certified engines.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 9A102, a 'turboprop engine system' incorporates all of the following:
a.
Turboshaft engine;
and
b.
Power transmission system to transfer the power to a propeller.
2.
For the purposes of 9A102, the 'maximum power' is achieved un-installed at sea level static conditions using ICAO standard atmosphere.
9A104
Sounding rockets, capable of a range of at least 300 km.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A004.
9A105
Liquid propellant rocket engines or gel propellant rocket motors, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A119.
a.
Liquid propellant rocket engines or gel propellant rocket motors, usable in "missiles", other than those specified in 9A005, integrated, or designed or modified to be integrated, into a liquid propellant or gel propellant propulsion system which has a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1,1 MNs;
b.
Liquid propellant rocket engines or gel propellant rocket motors, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005 or 9A105.a., integrated, or designed or modified to be integrated, into a liquid propellant or gel propellant propulsion system which has a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 0,841 MNs.
9A106
Systems or components, other than those specified in 9A006 as follows, specially designed for liquid rocket propulsion or gel propellant rocket systems:
a.
Not used;
b.
Not used;
c.
Thrust vector control sub-systems, usable in "missiles";
Technical Note:
Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A106.c. are:
1.
Flexible nozzle;
2.
Fluid or secondary gas injection;
3.
Movable engine or nozzle;
4.
Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes);
or
5.
Thrust tabs.
d.
Liquid, slurry and gel propellant (including oxidisers) control systems, and specially designed components therefor, usable in "missiles", designed or modified to operate in vibration environments greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz;
Note:
The only servo valves, pumps and gas turbines specified in 9A106.d., are the following:
a.
Servo valves designed for flow rates equal to or greater than 24 litres per minute, at an absolute pressure equal to or greater than 7 MPa, that have an actuator response time of less than 100 ms;
b.
Pumps, for liquid propellants, with shaft speeds equal to or greater than 8 000 r.p.m. at a maximum operating mode or with discharge pressures equal to or greater than 7 MPa;
c.
Gas turbines, for liquid propellant turbopumps, with shaft speeds equal to or greater than 8 000 r.p.m. at the maximum operating mode.
e.
Combustion chambers and nozzles for liquid propellant rocket engines or gel propellant rocket motors specified in 9A005 or 9A105.
9A107
Solid propellant rocket motors, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A007, having total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 0,841 MNs.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A119.
9A108
Components, other than those specified in 9A008, as follows, specially designed for solid and hybrid rocket propulsion systems:
a.
Rocket motor cases and "insulation" components therefor, usable in subsystems specified in 9A007, 9A009, 9A107 or 9A109.a.;
b.
Rocket nozzles, usable in subsystems specified in 9A007, 9A009, 9A107 or 9A109.a.;
c.
Thrust vector control sub-systems, usable in "missiles".
Technical Note:
Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A108.c. are:
1.
Flexible nozzle;
2.
Fluid or secondary gas injection;
3.
Movable engine or nozzle;
4.
Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); 
or
5.
Thrust tabs.
9A109
Hybrid rocket motors and specially designed components as follows:
a.
Hybrid rocket motors usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A009, having a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 0,841 MNs, and specially designed components therefor;
b.
Specially designed components for hybrid rocket motors specified in 9A009 that are usable in "missiles".
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A009 AND 9A119.
9A110
Composite structures, laminates and manufactures thereof, other than those specified in 9A010, specially designed for use in 'missiles' or the subsystems specified in 9A005, 9A007, 9A105, 9A106.c., 9A107, 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1A002.
Technical Note:
In 9A110 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
9A111
Pulse jet or detonation engines, usable in "missiles" or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a., and specially designed components therefor.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A011 AND 9A118.
Technical Note:
In 9A111 detonation engines utilise detonation to produce a rise in effective pressure across the combustion chamber. Examples of detonation engines include pulse detonation engines, rotating detonation engines or continuous wave detonation engines.
9A112
"Unmanned aerial vehicles" ("UAVs"), other than those specified in 9A012, as follows:
a.
"Unmanned aerial vehicles" ("UAVs") capable of a range of 300 km;
b.
"Unmanned aerial vehicles" ("UAVs") having all of the following:
1.
Having any of the following:
a.
An autonomous flight control and navigation capability; 
or
b.
Capability of controlled flight out of the direct vision range involving a human operator; 
and
2.
Having any of the following:
a.
Incorporating an aerosol dispensing system/mechanism with a capacity greater than 20 litres; 
or
b.
Designed or modified to incorporate an aerosol dispensing system/mechanism with a capacity greater than 20 litres.
Technical Notes:
1.
An aerosol consists of particulate or liquids other than fuel components, by products or additives, as part of the payload to be dispersed in the atmosphere. Examples of aerosols include pesticides for crop dusting and dry chemicals for cloud seeding.
2.
An aerosol dispensing system/mechanism contains all those devices (mechanical, electrical, hydraulic, etc.), which are necessary for storage and dispersion of an aerosol into the atmosphere. This includes the possibility of aerosol injection into the combustion exhaust vapour and into the propeller slip stream.
9A115
Launch support equipment as follows:
a.
Apparatus and devices for handling, control, activation or launching, designed or modified for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or 'missiles';
Technical Note:
In 9A115.a. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
b.
Vehicles for transport, handling, control, activation or launching, designed or modified for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or "missiles".
9A116
Reentry vehicles, usable in "missiles", and equipment designed or modified therefor, as follows:
a.
Reentry vehicles;
b.
Heat shields and components therefor, fabricated of ceramic or ablative materials;
c.
Heat sinks and components therefor, fabricated of light-weight, high heat capacity materials;
d.
Electronic equipment specially designed for reentry vehicles.
9A117
Staging mechanisms, separation mechanisms, and interstages, usable in "missiles".
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9A121.
9A118
Devices to regulate combustion usable in engines, which are usable in "missiles" or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a., specified in 9A011 or 9A111.
9A119
Individual rocket stages, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005, 9A007, 9A009, 9A105, 9A107 and 9A109.
9A120
Liquid or gel propellant tanks, other than those specified in 9A006, specially designed for propellants specified in 1C111 or 'other liquid or gel propellants' used in rocket systems capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.
Note:
In 9A120 'other liquid or gel propellants' includes, but is not limited to, propellants specified in THE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
9A121
Umbilical and interstage electrical connectors specially designed for "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.
Technical Note:
Interstage connectors referred to in 9A121 also include electrical connectors installed between the "missile", space launch vehicle or sounding rocket and their payload.
9A350
Spraying or fogging systems, specially designed or modified for fitting to aircraft, "lighter-than-air vehicles" or unmanned aerial vehicles, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:
a.
Complete spraying or fogging systems capable of delivering, from a liquid suspension, an initial droplet 'VMD' of less than 50 μm at a flow rate of greater than two litres per minute;
b.
Spray booms or arrays of aerosol generating units capable of delivering, from a liquid suspension, an initial droplet 'VMD' of less than 50 μm at a flow rate of greater than two litres per minute;
c.
Aerosol generating units specially designed for fitting to systems specified in 9A350.a. and .b.
Note:
Aerosol generating units are devices specially designed or modified for fitting to aircraft such as nozzles, rotary drum atomisers and similar devices.
Note:
9A350 does not control spraying or fogging systems and components that are demonstrated not to be capable of delivering biological agents in the form of infectious aerosols.
Technical Notes:
1.
Droplet size for spray equipment or nozzles specially designed for use on aircraft, "lighter-than-air vehicles" or unmanned aerial vehicles should be measured using either of the following:
a.
Doppler laser method;
b.
Forward laser diffraction method.
2.
In 9A350 'VMD' means Volume Median Diameter and for water-based systems this equates to Mass Median Diameter (MMD).
9B   
Test, Inspection and Production Equipment
9B001
Manufacturing equipment, tooling or fixtures, as follows:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 2B226
a.
Directional solidification or single crystal casting equipment designed for "superalloys";
b.
Casting tooling, specially designed for manufacturing gas turbine engine blades, vanes or "tip shrouds", manufactured from refractory metals or ceramics, as follows:
1.
Cores;
2.
Shells (moulds);
3.
Combined core and shell (mould) units;
c.
Directional-solidification or single-crystal additive-manufacturing equipment, specially designed for manufacturing gas turbine engine blades, vanes or "tip shrouds".
9B002
On-line (real time) control systems, instrumentation (including sensors) or automated data acquisition and processing equipment, having all of the following:
a.
Specially designed for the "development" of gas turbine engines, assemblies or components; 
and
b.
Incorporating any of the "technologies" specified in 9E003.h. or 9E003.i.
9B003
Equipment specially designed for the "production" or test of gas turbine brush seals designed to operate at tip speeds exceeding 335 m/s and temperatures in excess of 773 K (500°C), and specially designed components or accessories therefor.
9B004
Tools, dies or fixtures, for the solid state joining of "superalloy", titanium or intermetallic airfoil-to-disk combinations described in 9E003.a.3. or 9E003.a.6. for gas turbines.
9B005
On-line (real time) control systems, instrumentation (including sensors) or automated data acquisition and processing equipment, specially designed for use with any of the following:
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9B105.
a.
Wind tunnels designed for speeds of Mach 1,2 or more;
Note:
9B005.a. does not control wind tunnels specially designed for educational purposes and having a 'test section size' (measured laterally) of less than 250 mm.
Technical Note:
'Test section size' means the diameter of the circle, or the side of the square, or the longest side of the rectangle, at the largest test section location.
b.
Devices for simulating flow-environments at speeds exceeding Mach 5, including hot-shot tunnels, plasma arc tunnels, shock tubes, shock tunnels, gas tunnels and light gas guns; 
or
c.
Wind tunnels or devices, other than two-dimensional sections, capable of simulating Reynolds number flows exceeding 25 x 10
6
.
9B006
Acoustic vibration test equipment capable of producing sound pressure levels of 160 dB or more (referenced to 20 μPa) with a rated output of 4 kW or more at a test cell temperature exceeding 1 273 K (1 000°C), and specially designed quartz heaters therefor.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9B106.
9B007
Equipment specially designed for inspecting the integrity of rocket motors and using Non-Destructive Test (NDT) techniques other than planar x-ray or basic physical or chemical analysis.
9B008
Direct measurement wall skin friction transducers specially designed to operate at a test flow total (stagnation) temperature exceeding 833 K (560°C).
9B009
Tooling specially designed for producing gas turbine engine powder metallurgy rotor components having all of the following:
a.
Designed to operate at stress levels of 60% of Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS) or more measured at a temperature of 873 K (600°C); 
and
b.
Designed to operate at 873 K (600°C) or more.
Note:
9B009 does not control tooling for the production of powder.
9B010
Equipment specially designed for the production of items specified in 9A012.
9B105
'Aerodynamic test facilities' for speeds of Mach 0,9 or more, usable for 'missiles' and their subsystems.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 9B005.
Note:
9B105 does not control wind-tunnels for speeds of Mach 3 or less with dimension of the 'test cross section size' equal to or less than 250 mm.
Technical Notes:
1.
In 9B105 'aerodynamic test facilities' includes wind tunnels and shock tunnels for the study of airflow over objects.
2.
In Note to 9B105, 'test cross section size' means the diameter of the circle, or the side of the square, or the longest side of the rectangle, or the major axis of the ellipse at the largest 'test cross section' location. 'Test cross section' is the section perpendicular to the flow direction.
3.
In 9B105 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
9B106
Environmental chambers and anechoic chambers, as follows:
a.
Environmental chambers having all of the following:
1.
Capable of simulating any of the following flight conditions:
a.
Altitude equal to or greater than 15 km; 
or
b.
Temperature range from below 223 K (-50
o
C) to above 398 K (125
o
C); 
and
2.
Incorporating, or 'designed or modified' to incorporate, a shaker unit or other vibration test equipment to produce vibration environments equal to or greater than 10 g rms, measured 'bare table', between 20 Hz and 2 kHz while imparting forces equal to or greater than 5 kN;
Technical Notes:
1.
9B106.a.2. describes systems that are capable of generating a vibration environment with a single wave (e.g., a sine wave) and systems capable of generating a broad band random vibration (i.e., power spectrum).
2.
In 9B106.a.2., 'designed or modified' means the environmental chamber provides appropriate interfaces (e.g., sealing devices) to incorporate a shaker unit or other vibration test equipment as specified in 2B116.
3.
In 9B106.a.2., 'bare table' means a flat table, or surface, with no fixture or fittings.
b.
Environmental chambers capable of simulating the following flight conditions:
1.
Acoustic environments at an overall sound pressure level of 140 dB or greater (referenced to 20 μPa) or with a total rated acoustic power output of 4 kW or greater; 
and
2.
Altitude equal to or greater than 15 km; 
or
3.
Temperature range from below 223 K (-50
o
C) to above 398 K (125
o
C).
9B107
'Aerothermodynamic test facilities', usable for 'missiles', 'missile' rocket propulsion systems, and reentry vehicles and equipment specified in 9A116, having any of the following characteristics:
a.
An electrical power supply equal to or greater than 5 MW; 
or
b.
A gas supply total pressure equal to or greater than 3 MPa.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Aerothermodynamic test facilities' include plasma arc jet facilities and plasma wind tunnels for the study of thermal and mechanical effects of airflow on objects.
2.
In 9B107 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
9B115
Specially designed "production equipment" for the systems, sub-systems and components specified in 9A005 to 9A009, 9A011, 9A101, 9A102, 9A105 to 9A109, 9A111, 9A116 to 9A120.
9B116
Specially designed "production facilities" for the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, or systems, sub-systems, and components specified in 9A005 to 9A009, 9A011, 9A101, 9A102, 9A104 to 9A109, 9A111, 9A116 to 9A120 or 'missiles'.
Technical Note:
In 9B116 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
9B117
Test benches or test stands for solid or liquid propellant rockets or rocket motors, having either of the following characteristics:
a.
The capacity to handle more than 68 kN of thrust; 
or
b.
Capable of simultaneously measuring the three axial thrust components.
9C   
Materials
9C108
"Insulation" material in bulk form and "interior lining", other than those specified in 9A008, for rocket motor cases usable in "missiles" or specially designed for solid propellant rocket engines specified in 9A007 or 9A107.
9C110
Resin impregnated fibre prepregs and metal coated fibre preforms therefor, for composite structures, laminates and manufactures specified in 9A110, made either with organic matrix or metal matrix utilising fibrous or filamentary reinforcements having a "specific tensile strength" greater than 7,62 x 10
4
 m and a "specific modulus" greater than 3,18 x 10
6
 m.
N.B.
SEE ALSO 1C010 AND 1C210.
Note:
The only resin impregnated fibre prepregs specified in entry 9C110 are those using resins with a glass transition temperature (T
g
), after cure, exceeding 418 K (145
o
C) as determined by ASTM D4065 or equivalent.
9D   
Software
9D001
"Software", not specified in 9D003 or 9D004, specially designed or modified for the "development" of equipment or "technology", specified in 9A001 to 9A119, 9B or 9E003.
9D002
"Software", not specified in 9D003 or 9D004, specially designed or modified for the "production" of equipment specified in 9A001 to 9A119 or 9B.
9D003
"Software" incorporating "technology" specified in 9E003.h. and used in "FADEC Systems" for systems specified in 9A or equipment specified in 9B.
9D004
Other "software" as follows:
a.
2D or 3D viscous "software", validated with wind tunnel or flight test data required for detailed engine flow modelling;
b.
"Software" for testing aero gas turbine engines, assemblies or components, having all of the following:
1.
Specially designed for testing any of the following:
a.
Aero gas turbine engines, assemblies or components, incorporating "technology" specified in 9E003.a., 9E003.h. or 9E003.i.; 
or
b.
Multi-stage compressors providing either bypass or core flow, specially designed for aero gas turbine engines incorporating "technology" specified in 9E003.a. or 9E003.h.; 
and
2.
Specially designed for all of the following:
a.
Acquisition and processing of data, in real time; 
and
b.
Feedback control of the test article or test conditions (e.g. temperature, pressure, flow rate) while the test is in progress;
Note:
9D004.b. does not control software for operation of the test facility or operator safety (e.g. overspeed shutdown, fire detection and suppression), or production, repair or maintenance acceptance-testing limited to determining if the item has been properly assembled or repaired.
c.
"Software" specially designed to control directional solidification or single crystal material growth in equipment specified in 9B001.a. or 9B001.c.;
d.
Not used;
e.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the operation of items specified in 9A012;
f.
"Software" specially designed to design the internal cooling passages of aero gas turbine blades, vans and "tip shrouds";
g.
"Software" having all of the following:
1.
Specially designed to predict aero thermal, aeromechanical and combustion conditions in aero gas turbine engines; 
and
2.
Theoretical modelling predictions of the aero thermal, aeromechanical and combustion conditions, which have been validated with actual aero gas turbine engine (experimental or production) performance data.
9D005
"Software" specially designed or modified for the operation of items specified in 9A004.e. or 9A004.f.
N.B.
For "software" for items listed in 9A004.d. that are incorporated into "spacecrafts payloads", see the appropriate Categories.
9D101
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of goods specified in 9B105, 9B106, 9B116 or 9B117.
9D103
"Software" specially designed for modelling, simulation or design integration of the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or "missiles", or the subsystems specified in 9A005, 9A007, 9A105, 9A106.c., 9A107, 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119.
Note:
"Software" specified in 9D103 remains controlled when combined with specially designed hardware specified in 4A102.
9D104
"Software" as follows:
a.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of goods specified in 9A001, 9A005, 9A006.d., 9A006.g., 9A007.a., 9A009.a., 9A010.d., 9A011, 9A101, 9A102, 9A105, 9A106.d., 9A107, 9A109, 9A111, 9A115.a., 9A117 or 9A118.
b.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the operation or maintenance of subsystems or equipment specified in 9A008.d., 9A106.c., 9A108.c. or 9A116.d.
9D105
"Software" specially designed or modified to coordinate the function of more than one subsystem, other than that specified in 9D004.e., in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or 'missiles'
Note:
9D105 includes "software" specially designed for a manned "aircraft" converted to operate as "unmanned aerial vehicle", as follows:
a.
"Software" specially designed or modified to integrate the conversion equipment with the "aircraft" system functions;
and
b.
"Software" specially designed or modified to operate the "aircraft" as an "unmanned aerial vehicle".
Technical Note:
In 9D105 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
9E   
Technology
Note:
"Development" or "production""technology" specified in 9E001 to 9E003 for gas turbine engines remains controlled when used for repair or overhaul. Excluded from control are: technical data, drawings or documentation for maintenance activities directly associated with calibration, removal or replacement of damaged or unserviceable line replaceable units, including replacement of whole engines or engine modules.
9E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment or "software", specified in 9A001.b., 9A004 to 9A012, 9A350, 9B or 9D.
9E002
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment specified in 9A001.b., 9A004 to 9A011, 9A350 or 9B.
N.B.
For "technology" for the repair of controlled structures, laminates or materials, see 1E002.f.
9E003
Other "technology" as follows:
a.
"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of any of the following gas turbine engine components or systems:
1.
Gas turbine blades, vanes or "tip shrouds", made from directionally solidified (DS) or single crystal (SC) alloys and having (in the 001 Miller Index Direction) a stress-rupture life exceeding 400 hours at 1 273 K (1 000°C) at a stress of 200 MPa, based on the average property values;
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 9E003.a.1., stress-rupture life testing is typically conducted on a test specimen.
2.
Combustors having any of the following:
a.
'Thermally decoupled liners' designed to operate at 'combustor exit temperature' exceeding 1 883K (1 610°C);
b.
Non-metallic liners;
c.
Non-metallic shells; 
or
d.
Liners designed to operate at 'combustor exit temperature' exceeding 1 883 K (1 610°C) and having holes that meet the parameters specified in 9E003.c.;
Note:
The "required""technology" for holes in 9E003.a.2. is limited to the derivation of the geometry and location of the holes.
Technical Notes:
1.
'Thermally decoupled liners' are liners that feature at least a support structure designed to carry mechanical loads and a combustion facing structure designed to protect the support structure from the heat of combustion. The combustion facing structure and support structure have independent thermal displacement (mechanical displacement due to thermal load) with respect to one another, i.e. they are thermally decoupled.
2.
'Combustor exit temperature' is the bulk average gas path total (stagnation) temperature between the combustor exit plane and the leading edge of the turbine inlet guide vane (i.e., measured at engine station T40 as defined in SAE ARP 755A) when the engine is running in a "steady state mode" of operation at the certificated maximum continuous operating temperature.
N.B.
See 9E003.c. for "technology""required" for manufacturing cooling holes.
3.
Components that are any of the following:
a.
Manufactured from organic "composite" materials designed to operate above 588 K (315°C);
b.
Manufactured from any of the following:
1.
Metal "matrix""composites" reinforced by any of the following:
a.
Materials specified in 1C007;
b.
"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010; 
or
c.
Aluminides specified in 1C002.a.; 
or
2.
Ceramic "matrix""composites" specified in 1C007.; 
or
c.
Stators, vanes, blades, tip seals (shrouds), rotating blings, rotating blisks, or 'splitter ducts', that are all of the following:
1.
Not specified in 9E003.a.3.a.;
2.
Designed for compressors or fans; 
and
3.
Manufactured from material specified in 1C010.e. with resins specified in 1C008;
Technical Note:
A 'splitter duct' performs the initial separation of the air-mass flow between the bypass and core sections of the engine.
4.
Uncooled turbine blades, vanes or "tip-shrouds", designed to operate at a 'gas path temperature' of 1 373 K (1 100°C) or more;
5.
Cooled turbine blades, vanes, "tip-shrouds" other than those described in 9E003.a.1., designed to operate at a 'gas path temperature' of 1 693 K (1 420°C) or more;
Technical Note:
'Gas path temperature' is the bulk average gas path total (stagnation) temperature at the leading edge plane of the turbine component when the engine is running in a "steady state mode" of operation at the certificated or specified maximum continuous operating temperature.
6.
Airfoil-to-disk blade combinations using solid state joining;
7.
Not used;
8.
'Damage tolerant' gas turbine engine rotor components using powder metallurgy materials specified in 1C002.b.; 
or
Technical Note:
'Damage tolerant' components are designed using methodology and substantiation to predict and limit crack growth.
9.
Not used;
10.
Not used;
11.
'Fan blades' having all of the following:
a.
20% or more of the total volume being one or more closed cavities containing vacuum or gas only; 
and
b.
One or more closed cavities having a volume of 5 cm
3
 or larger;
Technical Note:
For the purposes of 9E003.a.11., a 'fan blade' is the aerofoil portion of the rotating stage or stages, which provide both compressor and bypass flow in a gas turbine engine.
b.
"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:
1.
Wind tunnel aero-models equipped with non-intrusive sensors capable of transmitting data from the sensors to the data acquisition system; 
or
2.
"Composite" propeller blades or propfans, capable of absorbing more than 2 000 kW at flight speeds exceeding Mach 0,55;
c.
"Technology""required" for manufacturing cooling holes, in gas turbine engine components incorporating any of the "technologies" specified in 9E003.a.1., 9E003.a.2. or 9E003.a.5., and having any of the following:
1.
Having all of the following:
a.
Minimum 'cross-sectional area' less than 0,45 mm
2
;
b.
'Hole shape ratio' greater than 4,52; 
and
c.
'Incidence angle' equal to or less than 25°; 
or
2.
Having all of the following:
a.
Minimum 'cross-sectional area' less than 0,12 mm
2
;
b.
'Hole shape ratio' greater than 5,65; 
and
c.
'Incidence angle' more than 25°;
Note:
9E003.c. does not control "technology" for manufacturing constant radius cylindrical holes that are straight through and enter and exit on the external surfaces of the component.
Technical Notes:
1.
For the purposes of 9E003.c., the 'cross-sectional area' is the area of the hole in the plane perpendicular to the hole axis.
2.
For the purposes of 9E003.c., 'hole shape ratio' is the nominal length of the axis of the hole divided by the square root of its minimum 'cross-sectional area'.
3.
For the purposes of 9E003.c., 'incidence angle' is the acute angle measured between the plane tangential to the aerofoil surface and the hole axis at the point where the hole axis enters the aerofoil surface.
4.
Methods for manufacturing holes in 9E003.c. include "laser" beam machining, water jet machining, Electro-Chemical Machining (ECM) or Electrical Discharge Machining (EDM).
d.
"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of helicopter power transfer systems or tilt rotor or tilt wing "aircraft" power transfer systems;
e.
"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of reciprocating diesel engine ground vehicle propulsion systems having all of the following:
1.
'Box volume' of 1,2 m
3
 or less;
2.
An overall power output of more than 750 kW based on 80/1269/EEC, ISO 2534 or national equivalents; 
and
3.
Power density of more than 700 kW/m
3
 of 'box volume';
Technical Note:
'Box volume' in 9E003.e. is the product of three perpendicular dimensions measured in the following way:
Length:
The length of the crankshaft from front flange to flywheel face;
Width:
The widest of any of the following:
a.
The outside dimension from valve cover to valve cover;
b.
The dimensions of the outside edges of the cylinder heads;
or
c.
The diameter of the flywheel housing;
Height:
The largest of any of the following:
a.
The dimension of the crankshaft centre-line to the top plane of the valve cover (or cylinder head) plus twice the stroke;
or
b.
The diameter of the flywheel housing.
f.
"Technology""required" for the "production" of specially designed components for high output diesel engines, as follows:
1.
"Technology""required" for the "production" of engine systems having all of the following components employing ceramics materials specified in 1C007:
a.
Cylinder liners;
b.
Pistons;
c.
Cylinder heads; 
and
d.
One or more other components (including exhaust ports, turbochargers, valve guides, valve assemblies or insulated fuel injectors);
2.
"Technology""required" for the "production" of turbocharger systems with single-stage compressors and having all of the following:
a.
Operating at pressure ratios of 4:1 or higher;
b.
Mass flow in the range from 30 to 130 kg per minute; 
and
c.
Variable flow area capability within the compressor or turbine sections;
3.
"Technology""required" for the "production" of fuel injection systems with a specially designed multifuel (e.g., diesel or jet fuel) capability covering a viscosity range from diesel fuel (2,5 cSt at 310,8 K (37,8°C)) down to gasoline fuel (0,5 cSt at 310,8 K (37,8°C)) and having all of the following:
a.
Injection amount in excess of 230 mm
3
 per injection per cylinder; 
and
b.
Electronic control features specially designed for switching governor characteristics automatically depending on fuel property to provide the same torque characteristics by using the appropriate sensors;
g.
"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of 'high output diesel engines' for solid, gas phase or liquid film (or combinations thereof) cylinder wall lubrication and permitting operation to temperatures exceeding 723 K (450°C), measured on the cylinder wall at the top limit of travel of the top ring of the piston;
Technical Note:
'High output diesel engines' are diesel engines with a specified brake mean effective pressure of 1,8 MPa or more at a speed of 2 300 r.p.m., provided the rated speed is 2 300 r.p.m. or more.
h.
"Technology" for gas turbine engine "FADEC systems" as follows:
1.
"Development""technology" for deriving the functional requirements for the components necessary for the "FADEC system" to regulate engine thrust or shaft power (e.g., feedback sensor time constants and accuracies, fuel valve slew rate);
2.
"Development" or "production""technology" for control and diagnostic components unique to the "FADEC system" and used to regulate engine thrust or shaft power;
3.
"Development""technology" for the control law algorithms, including "source code", unique to the "FADEC system" and used to regulate engine thrust or shaft power;
Note:
9E003.h. does not control technical data related to engine-"aircraft" integration required by the civil aviation authorities of one or more EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States to be published for general airline use (e.g., installation manuals, operating instructions, instructions for continued airworthiness) or interface functions (e.g., input/output processing, airframe thrust or shaft power demand).
i.
"Technology" for adjustable flow path systems designed to maintain engine stability for gas generator turbines, fan or power turbines, or propelling nozzles, as follows:
1.
"Development""technology" for deriving the functional requirements for the components that maintain engine stability;
2.
"Development" or "production""technology" for components unique to the adjustable flow path system and that maintain engine stability;
3.
"Development""technology" for the control law algorithms, including "source code", unique to the adjustable flow path system and that maintain engine stability.
Note:
9E003.i. does not control "technology" for any of the following:
a.
Inlet guide vanes;
b.
Variable pitch fans or prop-fans;
c.
Variable compressor vanes;
d.
Compressor bleed valves;
or
e.
Adjustable flow path geometry for reverse thrust.
j.
"Technology""required" for the "development" of wing-folding systems designed for fixed-wing "aircraft" powered by gas turbine engines.
N.B.
For "technology""required" for the "development" of wing-folding systems designed for fixed-wing "aircraft" SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.
9E101
a.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of goods specified in 9A101, 9A102, 9A104 to 9A111, 9A112.a. or 9A115 to 9A121.
b.
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of 'UAV's specified in 9A012 or goods specified in 9A101, 9A102, 9A104 to 9A111, 9A112.a. or 9A115 to 9A121.
Technical Note:
In 9E101.b. 'UAV' means unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
9E102
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, goods specified in 9A005 to 9A011, 'UAV's specified in 9A012 or goods specified in 9A101, 9A102, 9A104 to 9A111, 9A112.a., 9A115 to 9A121, 9B105, 9B106, 9B115, 9B116, 9B117, 9D101 or 9D103.
Technical Note:
In 9E102 'UAV' means unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
(
1
)
  https://www.australiagroup.net/
(
2
)
  http://mtcr.info/
(
3
)
  http://www.nuclearsuppliersgroup.org/
(
4
)
  http://www.wassenaar.org/
(
5
)
  https://www.opcw.org/chemical-weapons-convention
(
6
)
  Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230-2:1997 or 2006 should consult the competent authorities of the EU Member State in which they are established.
(
7
)
  The numbers in parenthesis refer to the Notes following this Table.
ANNEX II
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATIONS
The following sections set out the Union general export authorisations for certain exports.
A.   EXPORTS TO AUSTRALIA, CANADA, ICELAND, JAPAN, NEW ZEALAND, NORWAY, SWITZERLAND, INCLUDING LIECHTENSTEIN, THE UNITED KINGDOM AND THE UNITED STATES
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU001
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Exports to Australia, Canada, Iceland, Japan, New Zealand, Norway, Switzerland, including Liechtenstein, the United Kingdom and the United States
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 – Items
This authorisation covers all dual-use items specified in any entry in Annex I, except those listed in Section I of this Annex.
Part 2 – Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:
—
Australia,
—
Canada,
—
Iceland,
—
Japan,
—
New Zealand,
—
Norway,
—
Switzerland, including Liechtenstein,
—
United Kingdom (without prejudice to the application of this Regulation to and in the United Kingdom in respect of Northern Ireland, in accordance with point 47 of Annex 2 to the Protocol on Ireland/Northern Ireland (the “Protocol”) annexed to the Agreement on the withdrawal of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland from the European Union and the European Atomic Energy Community 
(
1
)
, listing the provisions of Union law referred to in Article 5(4) of the Protocol),
—
United States.
Part 3 – Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of items where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation in a country subject to an arms embargo; or
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;
(b)
the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a); or
(c)
the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.
2.
The exporter shall declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU001 in the customs declaration.
3.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall notify the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established of the first use of this authorisation within 30 days from the date when the first export took place or, alternatively, and in accordance with a requirement by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established, prior to the first use of this authorisation. Member States shall notify the Commission of the notification mechanism chosen for this authorisation. The Commission shall publish the information notified to it in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union.
Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.
A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.
Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.
B.   EXPORTS OF CERTAIN DUAL-USE ITEMS TO CERTAIN DESTINATIONS
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU002
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Exports of certain dual-use items to certain destinations
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 — Items
This authorisation covers the following dual-use items specified in Annex I:
—
1A001,
—
1A003,
—
1A004,
—
1C003.b.,
—
1C003.c.,
—
1C004,
—
1C005,
—
1C006,
—
1C008,
—
1C009,
—
2B008,
—
3A001.a.3.,
—
3A001.a.6.,
—
3A001.a.7.,
—
3A001.a.9.,
—
3A001.a.10.,
—
3A001.a.11.,
—
3A001.a.12.,
—
3A002.c.,
—
3A002.d.,
—
3A002.e.,
—
3A002.f.,
—
3C001,
—
3C002,
—
3C003,
—
3C004,
—
3C005,
—
3C006.
Part 2 — Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:
—
Argentina,
—
South Africa,
—
South Korea,
—
Turkey.
Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of items where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation in a country subject to an arms embargo; or
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in national military lists that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;
(b)
the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a); or
(c)
the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.
2.
The exporter shall declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU002 in the customs declaration.
3.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall notify the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established of the first use of this authorisation within 30 days from the date when the first export took place or, alternatively, and in accordance with a requirement by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established, prior to the first use of this authorisation. Member States shall notify the Commission of the notification mechanism chosen for this authorisation. The Commission shall publish the information notified to it in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union.
Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation are defined by Member States.
A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.
Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.
C.   EXPORT AFTER REPAIR/REPLACEMENT
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU003
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Export after repair/replacement
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 — Items
1.
This authorisation covers all dual-use items specified in any entry in Annex I, except those listed in paragraph 2 of this Section where:
(a)
the items were reimported into the customs territory of the Union for the purpose of maintenance, repair or replacement, and are exported or re-exported to the country of consignment without any changes to their original characteristics within a period of 5 years after the date when the original export authorisation has been granted; or
(b)
the items are exported to the country of consignment in exchange for items of the same quality and number which were reimported into the customs territory of the Union for maintenance, repair or replacement within a period of 5 years after the date when the original export authorisation has been granted.
2.
Items excluded:
(a)
all items listed in Section I of this Annex;
(b)
all items listed in Sections D and E of each Category of Annex I;
(c)
the following items specified in Annex I:
—
1A002.a.,
—
1C012.a.,
—
1C227,
—
1C228,
—
1C229,
—
1C230,
—
1C231,
—
1C236,
—
1C237,
—
1C240,
—
1C350,
—
1C450,
—
5A001.b.5.,
—
5A002.c.,
—
5A002.d.,
—
5A002.e.,
—
5A003.a.,
—
5A003.b.,
—
6A001.a.2.a.1.,
—
6A001.a.2.a.5.,
—
6A002.a.1.c.,
—
8A001.b.,
—
8A001.c.1.,
—
9A011.
Part 2 — Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:
—
Albania,
—
Argentina,
—
Bosnia and Herzegovina,
—
Brazil,
—
Chile,
—
China (including Hong Kong and Macao),
—
French overseas territories,
—
India,
—
Kazakhstan,
—
Mexico,
—
Montenegro,
—
Morocco,
—
North Macedonia,
—
Russia,
—
Serbia,
—
Singapore,
—
South Africa,
—
South Korea,
—
Tunisia,
—
Turkey,
—
Ukraine,
—
United Arab Emirates.
Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation can only be used when the initial export has taken place under a Union general export authorisation or an initial export authorisation has been granted by the competent authority of the Member State where the original exporter was resident or established for the export of the items which have subsequently been reimported into the customs territory of the Union for the purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement. This authorisation is valid only for exports to the original end-user.
2.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of items where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; or
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;
(b)
the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);
(c)
the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation;
(d)
the initial authorisation has been annulled, suspended, modified or revoked; or
(e)
the exporter is aware that the end-use of the items in question is different from that specified in the original export authorisation.
3.
On exportation of any of the items pursuant to this authorisation, exporters shall:
(a)
mention the reference number of the initial export authorisation in the export declaration to customs together with the name of the Member State that granted the authorisation, and declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU003 in the customs declaration;
(b)
provide customs officers, if so requested, with documentary evidence of the date of importation of the items into the Union, of any maintenance, repair or replacement of the items carried out in the Union and of the fact that the items are being returned to the end-user and the country from which they were imported into the Union.
4.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall notify the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established of the first use of this authorisation within 30 days from the date when the first export took place or, alternatively, and in accordance with a requirement by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established, prior to the first use of this authorisation. Member States shall notify the Commission of the notification mechanism chosen for this authorisation. The Commission shall publish the information notified to it in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union.
Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.
A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.
Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.
5.
This authorisation covers items for “repair”, “replacement” and “maintenance”, including coincidental improvements to the original goods, e.g. resulting from the use of modern spare parts or from use of a later built standard for reliability or safety reasons, provided that this does not result in any enhancement to the functional capability of the items or provide the items with new or additional functions.
D.   TEMPORARY EXPORT FOR EXHIBITION OR FAIR
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU004
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Temporary export for exhibition or fair
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 — Items
This authorisation covers all dual-use items specified in any entry in Annex I, except:
(a)
all items listed in Section I of this Annex;
(b)
all items listed in Section D of each Category of Annex I (this does not include software necessary to the proper functioning of the equipment for the purpose of the demonstration);
(c)
all items listed in Section E of each category of Annex I;
(d)
the following items specified in Annex I:
—
1A002.a.,
—
1C002.b.4.,
—
1C010,
—
1C012.a.,
—
1C227,
—
1C228,
—
1C229,
—
1C230,
—
1C231,
—
1C236,
—
1C237,
—
1C240,
—
1C350,
—
1C450,
—
5A001.b.5.,
—
5A002.c.,
—
5A002.d.,
—
5A002.e.,
—
5A003.a.,
—
5A003.b.,
—
6A001,
—
6A002.a.,
—
8A001.b.,
—
8A001.c.1.,
—
9A011.
Part 2 — Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:
—
Albania,
—
Argentina,
—
Bosnia and Herzegovina,
—
Brazil,
—
Chile,
—
China (including Hong Kong and Macao),
—
French overseas territories,
—
India,
—
Kazakhstan,
—
Mexico,
—
Montenegro,
—
Morocco,
—
North Macedonia,
—
Russia,
—
Serbia,
—
Singapore,
—
South Africa,
—
South Korea,
—
Tunisia,
—
Turkey,
—
Ukraine,
—
United Arab Emirates.
Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation authorises the export of items listed in Part 1 on condition that the export concerns temporary export for an exhibition or fair as defined in paragraph 6 of this Part and that the items are reimported within a period of 120 days after the initial export, complete and without modification, into the customs territory of the Union.
2.
The competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established may, at the exporter’s request, waive the requirement that the items are to be reimported as stated in paragraph 1. To waive the requirement, the procedure for individual authorisations laid down in Article 12(2) of this Regulation shall apply accordingly.
3.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of items where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; or
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;
(b)
the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);
(c)
the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation;
(d)
the exporter has been informed by a competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established, or is otherwise aware (e.g. from information received from the manufacturer), that the items in question have been classified by the competent authority as having a protective national security classification marking, equivalent to or above “CONFIDENTIEL UE/EU CONFIDENTIAL”;
(e)
their return, in their original state, without the removal, copying or dissemination of any component or software, cannot be guaranteed by the exporter, or where a transfer of technology is connected with a presentation;
(f)
the relevant items are to be exported for a private presentation or demonstration (e.g. in in-house showrooms);
(g)
the relevant items are to be merged into any production process;
(h)
the relevant items are to be used for their intended purpose, except to the minimum extent required for effective demonstration, but without making specific test outputs available to third parties;
(i)
the export is to take place as a result of a commercial transaction, in particular as regards the sale, rental or lease of the relevant items;
(j)
the relevant items are to be stored at an exhibition or fair only for the purpose of sale, rent or lease, without being presented or demonstrated; or
(k)
the exporter makes any arrangement which would prevent him from keeping the relevant items under his control during the whole period of the temporary export.
4.
The exporter shall declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU004 in the customs declaration.
5.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall notify the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established of the first use of this authorisation within 30 days from the date when the first export took place or, alternatively, and in accordance with a requirement by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established, prior to the first use of this authorisation. Member States shall notify the Commission of the notification mechanism chosen for this authorisation. The Commission shall publish the information notified to it in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union.
Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation are defined by Member States.
A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.
Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.
6.
For the purpose of this authorisation, “exhibition or fair” means commercial events of a specific duration at which several exhibitors make demonstrations of their products to trade visitors or to the general public.
E.   TELECOMMUNICATIONS
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU005
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Telecommunications
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 — Items
This authorisation covers the following dual-use items specified in Annex I:
(a)
the following items of Category 5, Part l:
(i)
items, including specially designed or developed components and accessories therefor specified in 5A001.b.2., 5A001.c. and 5A001.d.;
(ii)
items specified in 5B001 and 5D001, where test, inspection and production equipment is concerned and software for items mentioned under point (i);
(b)
technology controlled by 5E001.a., where required for the installation, operation, maintenance or repair of items specified under point (a) and intended for the same end-user.
Part 2 — Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:
—
Argentina,
—
China (including Hong Kong and Macao),
—
India,
—
South Africa,
—
South Korea,
—
Russia,
—
Turkey,
—
Ukraine.
Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of items where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo;
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State; or
(iv)
for use in connection with a violation of human rights, democratic principles or the freedom of expression as defined by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union, by using interception technologies and digital data transfer devices for monitoring mobile phones and text messages and targeted surveillance of Internet use (e.g. via Monitoring Centres and Lawful Interception Gateways);
(b)
the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);
(c)
the exporter is aware that the items in question will be re-exported to any destination other than those listed in Part 2 of this Section or in Part 2 of Section A of this Annex and the Member States;
(d)
the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.
2.
The exporter shall declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU005 in the customs declaration.
3.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall notify the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established of the first use of this authorisation within 30 days from the date when the first export took place or, alternatively, and in accordance with a requirement by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established, prior to the first use of this authorisation. Member States shall notify the Commission of the notification mechanism chosen for this authorisation. The Commission shall publish the information notified to it in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union.
Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation are defined by Member States.
A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.
Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.
F.   CHEMICALS
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU006
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Chemicals
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 — Items
This authorisation covers the following dual-use items specified in Annex I:
1C350:
1.
Thiodiglycol (CAS 111-48-8);
2.
Phosphorus oxychloride (CAS 10025-87-3);
3.
Dimethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 756-79-6);
5.
Methylphosphonyl dichloride (CAS 676-97-1);
6.
Dimethyl phosphite (DMP) (CAS 868-85-9);
7.
Phosphorus trichloride (CAS 7719-12-2);
8.
Trimethyl phosphite (TMP) (CAS 121-45-9);
9.
Thionyl chloride (CAS 7719-09-7);
10.
3-Hydroxy-1-methylpiperidine (CAS 3554-74-3);
11.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride (CAS 96-79-7);
12.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9);
13.
3-Quinuclidinol (CAS 1619-34-7);
14.
Potassium fluoride (CAS 7789-23-3);
15.
2-Chloroethanol (CAS 107-07-3);
16.
Dimethylamine (CAS 124-40-3);
17.
Diethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 78-38-6);
18.
Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate (CAS 2404-03-7);
19.
Diethyl phosphite (CAS 762-04-9);
20.
Dimethylamine hydrochloride (CAS 506-59-2);
21.
Ethyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 1498-40-4);
22.
Ethyl phosphonyl dichloride (CAS 1066-50-8);
24.
Hydrogen fluoride (CAS 7664-39-3);
25.
Methyl benzilate (CAS 76-89-1);
26.
Methyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 676-83-5);
27.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-amino ethanol (CAS 96-80-0);
28.
Pinacolyl alcohol (CAS 464-07-3);
30.
Triethyl phosphite (CAS 122-52-1);
31.
Arsenic trichloride (CAS 7784-34-1);
32.
Benzilic acid (CAS 76-93-7);
33.
Diethyl methylphosphonite (CAS 15715-41-0);
34.
Dimethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 6163-75-3);
35.
Ethyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 430-78-4);
36.
Methyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 753-59-3);
37.
3-Quinuclidone (CAS 3731-38-2);
38.
Phosphorus pentachloride (CAS 10026-13-8);
39.
Pinacolone (CAS 75-97-8);
40.
Potassium cyanide (CAS 151-50-8);
41.
Potassium bifluoride (CAS 7789-29-9);
42.
Ammonium hydrogen fluoride or ammonium bifluoride (CAS 1341-49-7);
43.
Sodium fluoride (CAS 7681-49-4);
44.
Sodium bifluoride (CAS 1333-83-1);
45.
Sodium cyanide (CAS 143-33-9);
46.
Triethanolamine (CAS 102-71-6);
47.
Phosphorus pentasulphide (CAS 1314-80-3);
48.
Di-isopropylamine (CAS 108-18-9);
49.
Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8);
50.
Sodium sulphide (CAS 1313-82-2);
51.
Sulphur monochloride (CAS 10025-67-9);
52.
Sulphur dichloride (CAS 10545-99-0);
53.
Triethanolamine hydrochloride (CAS 637-39-8);
54.
N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (CAS 4261-68-1);
55.
Methylphosphonic acid (CAS 993-13-5);
56.
Diethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 683-08-9);
57.
N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride (CAS 677-43-0);
58.
Triisopropyl phosphite (CAS 116-17-6);
59.
Ethyldiethanolamine (CAS 139-87-7);
60.
O,O-Diethyl phosphorothioate (CAS 2465-65-8);
61.
O,O-Diethyl phosphorodithioate (CAS 298-06-6);
62.
Sodium hexafluorosilicate (CAS 16893-85-9);
63.
Methylphosphonothioic dichloride (CAS 676-98-2);
64.
Diethylamine (CAS 109-89-7);
65.
N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5).
1C450.a.:
4.
Phosgene: Carbonyl dichloride (CAS 75-44-5);
5.
Cyanogen chloride (CAS 506-77-4);
6.
Hydrogen cyanide (CAS 74-90-8);
7.
Chloropicrin: Trichloronitromethane (CAS 76-06-2);
1C450.b.:
1.
Chemicals, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls or in 1C350, containing a phosphorus atom to which is bonded one methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso) group but not further carbon atoms;
2.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] phosphoramidic dihalides, other than N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride which is specified in 1C350.57;
3.
Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] N,N-dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)]-phosphoramidates, other than Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate which is specified in 1C350;
4.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethyl-2-chlorides and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride or N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride which are specified in 1C350;
5.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-ols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0) and N,N-Diethylaminoethanol (100-37-8) which are specified in 1C350;
6.
N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-thiols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9) and N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5) which are specified in 1C350;
8.
Methyldiethanolamine (CAS 105-59-9).
Part 2 — Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:
—
Argentina,
—
South Korea,
—
Turkey,
—
Ukraine.
Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of items where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; or
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;
(b)
the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);
(c)
the exporter is aware that the items in question will be re-exported to any destination other than those listed in Part 2 of this Section or in Part 2 of Section A of this Annex and the Member States; or
(d)
the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.
2.
The exporter shall declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU006 in the customs declaration.
3.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall notify the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established of the first use of this authorisation within 30 days from the date when the first export took place or, alternatively, and in accordance with a requirement by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established, prior to the first use of this authorisation. Member States shall notify the Commission of the notification mechanism chosen for this authorisation. The Commission shall publish the information notified to it in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union.
Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.
A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.
Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.
G.   INTRA-GROUP EXPORT OF SOFTWARE AND TECHNOLOGY
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU007
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Intra-group export of software and technology
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 – Items
This authorisation covers all technology and software specified in Annex I, except those listed in Section I of this Annex and technology and software related to items under 4A005, 4D004, 4E001.c, 5A001.f and 5A001.j.
Part 2 – Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports of software and technology to the following destinations:
—
Argentina,
—
Brazil,
—
Chile,
—
India,
—
Indonesia,
—
Israel,
—
Jordan,
—
Malaysia,
—
Mexico,
—
Morocco,
—
Philippines,
—
Singapore,
—
South Africa,
—
South Korea,
—
Thailand,
—
Tunisia.
Part 3 – Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation authorises the export of software and technology listed in Part 1 by any exporter that is a legal person established in a Member State to a company wholly owned and controlled by the exporter (subsidiary) or to a company directly and wholly owned and controlled by the same parent company as the exporter (sister company), provided that:
(a)
the parent company that directly controls the exporter and the entity ultimately controlling the exporter are resident or established in a Member State or in a country covered by Union general export authorisation No EU001; and
(b)
the parent company that directly controls the exporter provides a binding guarantee for the sister company’s compliance with the requirements of this authorisation; and
For the purpose of this authorisation, a parent company controls another company when it is capable of exercising decisive influence on it;
(c)
the exported software and technology will be exclusively used for the commercial product development activities of the exporter and the subsidiary or sister company respectively, and, in the case of employees, pursuant to the agreement establishing the employment relationship; and
(d)
the exported software and technology and any products resulting therefrom remain under the complete control of the exporter, or, for the purpose of fulfilling the requirements of this authorisation when the export is directed to a sister company, under the complete control of the parent company that directly controls the sister company and will not be shared with any other entity; and
(e)
the exported software and technology will be returned to the exporter and completely deleted by the subsidiary or sister company when the development activity has been completed or in the event that the subsidiary or sister company is acquired by any other entity. Any resulting developed technology will also be transmitted to the exporter and completely deleted by the subsidiary or sister company.
2.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of software and technology where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is established that the software or technology in question is or may be intended, in its entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military, paramilitary, police, intelligence, surveillance end-use or other security end-use by the government or by entities acting on behalf of the government;
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State; or
(iv)
for use in connection with a violation of human rights, democratic principles or the freedom of expression as defined by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union;
(b)
the exporter is aware that the software or technology in question is intended, in its entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);
(c)
the exporter is aware that the software or technology in question will be re-exported to any destination other than those listed in Part 2 of Section A of this Annex and the Member States; or
(d)
the exporter is aware that the consignee or end-user of the items in question is a military, paramilitary, police or intelligence service, or another governmental service for security, or that the items are intended for entities acting on behalf of any of the aforementioned services.
A Member State may adopt national legislation expanding points (b) and (c) to cover circumstances where the exporter has grounds for suspecting that the software or technology in question are intended for the uses referred to in point (b) or (c).
3.
The exporter intending to use this authorisation shall implement an Internal Compliance Programme.
4.
The exporter shall declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU007 in the customs declaration in the case of tangible export of software or technology.
5.
The exporter intending to use this authorisation shall register prior to the first use of this authorisation with the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is established.
Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter within 10 working days of receipt.
6.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall notify the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is established of the first use of this authorisation no later than 30 days prior to the date of the first export.
7.
The exporter who uses this authorisation shall report to the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is established on the use of this authorisation. The report on the use of this authorisation shall be produced at least once per year and shall include at least information regarding:
(a)
the description of the software and technology;
(b)
where available, the quantity and the value of the software and technology;
(c)
the subsidiaries, sister companies and parent companies involved under this authorisation.
Additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.
H.   ENCRYPTION
UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU008
(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)
Encryption
Issuing authority: European Union
Part 1 — Items
1.
This authorisation covers dual-use items specified in Annex I, as follows:
—
5A002.a.2,
—
5A002.a.3,
—
5A002.b., only “cryptographic activation token” converting, by means of “cryptographic activation”, an item not specified in Category 5, Part 2, into an item specified in 5A002.a. as above or 5D002.c.1. as below, and not released by the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2),
—
5D002.a.1., only “Software” specially designed or modified for the “use” of equipment specified in 5A002.a. as above or “software” specified in 5D002.c.1. as below,
—
5D002.b., “Software” having the characteristics of a “cryptographic activation token” specified in 5A002.b. as above,
—
5D002.c.1., only “Software” having the characteristics of, or performing or simulating the functions of equipment specified in 5A002.a. as above,
—
5E002.b., only “Technology” having the characteristics of a “cryptographic activation token” specified in 5A002.b. as above.
2.
This authorisation shall be valid only if the items meet all of the following conditions:
(a)
the items use only published or commercial cryptographic standards that have been approved or adopted by internationally recognised standard bodies;
(b)
the items do not use cryptographic standards specially designed for government use (e.g. the cryptographic standards used in public safety radio systems, such as TETRA, TETRAPOL and P25); and
(c)
any cryptographic functionality used by the items cannot be easily changed by the user.
3.
This authorisation shall not be used if:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established, or is otherwise aware (e.g. from information received from the manufacturer), that the items in question have been accredited or otherwise formally approved by the designated authority in a Member State (or are in the process of accreditation or other formal approval) to transmit, process or store classified information, equivalent to or above “RESTREINT UE/EU RESTRICTED”;
(b)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established, or is otherwise aware (e.g. from information received from the manufacturer), that the items in question have been classified by the designated authority in a Member State (or are in the process of classification) as having a protective national security classification marking, equivalent to or above “RESTREINT UE/EU RESTRICTED”.
Part 2 — Destinations
This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to all destinations, excluding:
(a)
destinations eligible for export under Union general export authorisation No EU001;
(b)
Afghanistan, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Cambodia, Central African Republic, China (including Hong Kong and Macao), Congo, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Egypt, Eritrea, Georgia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Lebanon, Libya, Malaysia, Mali, Mauritius, Mongolia, Myanmar/Burma, North Korea, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, United Arab Emirates, Uzbekistan, Venezuela, Yemen, Zimbabwe;
(c)
any destination, other than those listed in point (b), subject to an arms embargo or subject to restrictive measures of the Union applicable to dual-use items.
Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use
1.
This authorisation does not authorise the export of items where:
(a)
the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:
(i)
for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;
(ii)
for a military, paramilitary, police, intelligence, surveillance end-use, or other security end-use by the government or by entities acting on behalf of the government;
(iii)
for use as parts or components of military items listed in national military lists that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State; or
(iv)
for use in connection with a violation of human rights, democratic principles or the freedom of expression as defined by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union;
(b)
the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);
(c)
the exporter is aware that the items in question will be re-exported to any destination excluded by point (b) or (c) of Part 2 of this authorisation;
(d)
the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation;
(e)
the exporter is aware that the consignee or end-user of the items in question is a military, paramilitary, police or intelligence service, or another governmental service for security, or that the items are intended for entities acting on behalf of any of the aforementioned services; or
(f)
the export is controlled by virtue of any entry in Annex I not specified in this authorisation.
2.
Where a customs declaration is required, the exporter shall declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU008 in the customs declaration.
3.
The exporter intending to use this authorisation shall register prior to the first use of this authorisation with the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter within 10 working days of receipt.
4.
The registered exporter shall notify the first use of this authorisation to the competent authority of the Member State where the registered exporter is resident or established, no later than 10 days before the date of the first export.
5.
The exporter shall, at the request of the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established, submit technical data of any export planned or conducted under this authorisation. If such technical data has been requested in relation to a specific item and the technical data changes, the exporter shall notify the competent authority of this without delay. The technical data shall include at least the following information regarding the item:
(a)
manufacturer;
(b)
product name;
(c)
model number;
(d)
item description - a brief general description of the item such as might be contained in a product brochure;
(e)
if necessary, as determined by the competent authority, technical specifications, which shall include:
(i)
a list of all relevant cryptographic algorithms, including associated key management, related to data confidentiality;
(ii)
a list of any protocols to which the item adheres;
(iii)
specification of pre- or post-processing of data, such as compression of plain text or packetizing of encrypted data;
(iv)
details of programming interfaces that can be used to gain access to the cryptographic functionality of the item;
(f)
export control classification.
6.
The competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established may, for reasons of national security, prohibit the exporter from using this Union general export authorisation for any item mentioned in Part 1. The Member State concerned shall inform the Commission and the other Member States on the use of this provision.
7.
The registered exporter shall at the request of the competent authority of the Member State where the registered exporter is resident or established report on the use of this authorisation. Upon request, the report on the use of this authorisation shall be produced at least once per year and shall include at least the following information:
(a)
export control classification of the dual-use items;
(b)
the quantity and the value of the dual-use items;
(c)
the name and address of the consignee;
(d)
where known, the end-use and end-user of the dual-use items;
(e)
a reference to the last submission of technical data for the dual-use items.
I.   LIST REFERRED TO IN POINT (A) OF ARTICLE 12(6) OF THIS REGULATION AND SECTIONS A, C, D AND G OF THIS ANNEX
The entries do not always provide a complete description of the items and the related notes in Annex I. Only Annex I provides a complete description of the items.
The mention of an item in this Section does not affect the application of the General Software Note (GSN) set out in Annex I.
—
all items specified in Annex IV,
—
0C001 “Natural uranium” or “depleted uranium” or thorium in the form of metal, alloy, chemical compound or concentrate and any other material containing one or more of the foregoing,
—
0C002 “Special fissile materials” other than those specified in Annex IV,
—
0D001 “Software” specially designed or modified for the “development”, “production” or “…” of goods specified in Category 0, in so far as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV,
—
0E001 “Technology” in accordance with the Nuclear Technology Note for the “development”, “production” or “…” of goods specified in Category 0, in so far as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV,
—
1A102 Resaturated pyrolised carbon-carbon components designed for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104,
—
1C351 Human and animal pathogens and “toxins”,
—
1C353 Genetic elements and genetically modified organisms,
—
1C354 Plant pathogens,
—
1C450.a.1. Amiton: O,O-Diethyl S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] phosphorothiolate (78-53-5) and corresponding alkylated or protonated salts,
—
1C450.a.2. PFIB: 1,1,3,3,3-Pentafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-1-propene (382-21-8),
—
7E104 “Technology” for the integration of flight control, guidance and propulsion data into a flight management system for optimisation of rocket system trajectory,
—
9A009.a. Hybrid rocket propulsion systems with total impulse capacity exceeding 1.1 MNs,
—
9A117 Staging mechanisms, separation mechanisms and interstages usable in “missiles”.
(
1
)
  Agreement on the withdrawal of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland from the European Union and the European Atomic Energy Community (
OJ L 29, 31.1.2020, p. 7
).
ANNEX III
MODELS FOR AUTHORISATION FORMS
A.   Model for individual or global export authorisation forms
(referred to in Article 12(2) of this Regulation)
When granting the export authorisations, Member States will strive to ensure the visibility of the nature of the authorisation (individual or global) on the form issued.
This export authorisation is valid in all Member States of the European Union until its expiry date.
EUROPEAN UNION
EXPORT OF DUAL-USE ITEMS (Reg. (EU) 2021/821)
1
1.
Exporter
No
2.
Identification number
3.
Expiry date (if applicable)
LICENCE
4.
Contact point details
5.
Consignee
6.
Issuing authority
7.
Agent/Representative (if different from exporter)
No
8.
Country of consignment
Code
9.
End-user (if different from consignee)
10.
Member State of current or future location of the items
Code
11.
Member State of intended entry into the customs export procedure
Code
1
12.
Country of final destination
Code
13.
Description of the items
 (
1
)
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Harmonised System or Combined Nomenclature Code (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available)
16.
Control list No (for listed items)
17.
Currency and Value
18.
Quantity of the items
19.
End-use
20.
Contract date (if applicable)
21.
Customs export procedure
22.
Additional information required by national legislation (to be specified on the form)
Available for pre-printed information
At discretion of Member States
For completion by issuing authority
Signature
Issuing Authority
Stamp
Date
1 Bis
1.
Exporter
2.
Identification number
LICENCE
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available)
16.
Control list No (for listed items)
17.
Currency and Value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available)
16.
Control list No (for listed items)
17.
Currency and Value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
13.
Description of the items
14.
Country of origin
Code
2
15.
Commodity code
16.
Control list No
17.
Currency and value
18.
Quantity of the items
Note: In part 1 of column 24, write the quantity still available and in part 2 of column 24, write the quantity deducted on this occasion.
23.
Net quantity/value (Net mass/other unit with indication of unit)
26.
Customs document (Type and number) or extract (No) and date of deduction
27.
Member state, name and signature, stamp of deduction
24.
In numbers
25.
In words for quantity/value deducted
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
B.   Model for brokering services / technical assistance authorisation forms
(referred to in Article 13(5) of this Regulation)
EUROPEAN UNION
PROVISION OF BROKERING SERVICES / TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE (Reg. (EU) 2021/821)
1
1.
Broker/ Provider of technical assistance/ Applicant
No
2.
Identification number
3.
Expiry date
(if applicable)
LICENCE
4.
Contact point details
5.
Exporter in originating third country (if applicable)
6.
Issuing authority
7.
Consignee
No
8.
Member State in which the broker / provider of technical assistance is resident or established
Code
 (
2
)
9.
Originating country/ Country of location of the items subject of brokering services
Code
 (
2
)
10.
End-user in third country of destination (if different from consignee)
11.
Country of destination
Code
 (
2
)
12.
Third parties involved, e.g. agents (if applicable)
1
13.
Description of the items / technical assistance.
14.
Harmonised System or Combined Nomenclature Code (if applicable)
15.
Control list No (if applicable)
16.
Currency and Value
17.
Quantity of the items (if applicable)
18.
End-use
19.
Additional information required by national legislation (to be specified on the form)
Available for pre-printed information
At discretion of Member States
For completion by issuing authority
Signature
Issuing Authority
Stamp
Date
C.   Common elements for publication of national general export authorisations in national Official Journals
(referred to in point (b) of Article 12(6) of this Regulation)
1.
Title of the national general export authorisation
2.
Authority issuing the authorisation
3.
EU validity. The following text shall be used:
‘This is a national general export authorisation under the terms of Article 12(6) of Regulation (EU) 2021/821. This authorisation, in accordance with Article 12(6) of that Regulation, is valid in all Member States of the European Union.’
Validity: according to national practices.
4.
Items concerned: the following introductory text shall be used:
‘This export authorisation covers the following items’
5.
Destinations concerned: the following introductory text shall be used:
‘This export authorisation is valid for exports to the following destinations’
6.
Conditions and requirements
(
1
)
  If needed, this description may be given in one or more attachments to this form (1bis). In this case, indicate the exact number of attachments in this box. The description should be as precise as possible and integrate, where relevant, the CAS or other references for chemical items in particular.
(
2
)
  See Regulation (EC) No 1172/95 (
OJ L 118, 25.5.1995, p. 10
).
ANNEX IV
LIST OF DUAL-USE ITEMS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 11(1) OF THIS REGULATION
The entries do not always cover the complete description of the item and the related notes in Annex I
 
(
1
)
. Only Annex I provides for the complete description of the items.
The mention of an item in this Annex does not affect the application of the provisions concerning mass-market products in Annex I.
The terms appearing in straight double quotes are defined terms in the global definitions list of Annex I.
PART I
(possibility of National General Authorisation for intra-Union trade)
Items of stealth technology
1C001
Materials specially designed for absorbing electromagnetic radiations, or intrinsically conductive polymers.
N.B. SEE ALSO 1C101
1C101
Materials and devices for reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures, other than those specified in 1C001, usable in ‘missiles’, "missile" subsystems or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012.
Note:
 1C101 does not control materials if such goods are formulated solely for civil applications.
Technical Note:
In 1C101 ‘missiles’ means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
1D103
"Software" specially designed for analysis of reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures.
1E101
"Technology" according to the GTN for the "use" of goods specified in 1C101 or 1D103.
1E102
"Technology" according to the GTN for the "development" of "software" specified in 1D103.
6B008
Pulse radar cross-section measurement systems having transmit pulse widths of 100 ns or less and specially designed components therefor.
N.B
. SEE ALSO 6B108
6B108
Systems specially designed for radar cross section measurement usable for ‘missiles’ and their subsystems.
Technical Note:
In 6B108 ‘missile’ means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.
Items of the Union strategic control
1A007
Equipment and devices, specially designed to initiate charges and devices containing "energetic materials", by electrical means, as follows:
N.B
. SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS, 3A229 AND 3A232.
a.
Explosive detonator firing sets designed to drive 
multiple controlled
 detonators specified in 1A007.b. below;
b.
Electrically driven explosive detonators as follows:
1.
Exploding bridge (EB);
2.
Exploding bridge wire (EBW);
3.
Slapper;
4.
Exploding foil initiators (EFI).
Note:
 1A007.b. does not control detonators using only primary explosives, such as lead azide.
1C239
High explosives, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls, or substances or mixtures containing more than 2% by weight thereof, with a crystal density greater than 1,8 g/cm3 and having a detonation velocity greater than 8 000  m/s.
1E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of goods specified in 1C239.
3A229
High-current pulse generators, as follows ...
N.B.
 SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS
3A232
Multipoint initiation systems, other than those specified in 1A007
above,
as follows ...
N.B.
 SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS
3E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 3A229 or 3A232.
6A001
Acoustics, limited to the following:
6A001.a.1.b.
Object detection or location systems, having any of the following:
1.
A transmitting frequency
below 5 kHz;
6.
Designed to withstand …;
6A001.a.2.a.2.
Hydrophones … Incorporating …
6A001.a.2.a.3.
Hydrophones … Having any …
6A001.a.2.a.6.
Hydrophones … Designed for …
6A001.a.2.b.
Towed acoustic hydrophone arrays …
6A001.a.2.c.
Processing equipment, specially designed for
real time application with
towed acoustic hydrophone arrays, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;
6A001.a.2.e.
Bottom or bay-cable hydrophone arrays, having any of the following:
1.
Incorporating hydrophones …,
or
2.
Incorporating multiplexed hydrophone group signal modules …;
6A001.a.2.f.
Processing equipment, specially designed for
real time application with
bottom or bay cable systems, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;
6D003.a.
"Software" for the "real-time processing" of acoustic data;
8A002.o.3.
Noise reduction systems designed for use on vessels of 1 000  tonnes displacement or more, as follows:
b.
‘Active noise reduction or cancellation systems’, or magnetic bearings, specially designed for power transmission systems, and incorporating electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source;
Technical Note:
‘Active noise reduction or cancellation systems’ incorporate electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source.
8E002.a.
"Technology" for the "development", "production", repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction.
Items of the Union strategic control— Cryptanalysis — Category 5, Part 2
5A004.a.
Equipment designed or modified to perform ‘cryptanalytic functions’.
Note
: 5A004.a. includes systems or equipment, designed or modified to perform ‘cryptanalytic functions’ by means of reverse engineering.
Technical Note:
‘Cryptanalytic functions’ are functions designed to defeat cryptographic mechanisms in order to derive confidential variables or sensitive data, including clear text, passwords or cryptographic keys.
5D002.a.
"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of any of the following:
3.
Equipment as follows:
a.
Equipment specified in 5A004.a.;
b.
Equipment specified in 5A004.b.;
5D002.c.
"Software" having the characteristics of, or performing or simulating the functions of, any of the following:
3.
Equipment as follows:
a.
Equipment specified in 5A004.a.;
b.
Equipment specified in 5A004.b.;
5E002.a.
Only "technology" for the "development", "production" or "use" of the goods specified in 5A004.a, 5D002.a.3. or 5D002.c.3.
above.
Items of the MTCR technology
7A117
"Guidance sets", usable in "missiles" capable of achieving system accuracy of 3,33% or less of the range (e.g., a ‘CEP’ of 10 km or less at a range of 300 km),
except "guidance sets" designed for missiles with a range under 300 km or manned aircraft.
Technical Note:
In 7A117 ‘CEP’ (Circular Error Probable or Circle of Equal Probability) is a measure of accuracy, defined as the radius of the circle centred at the target, at a specific range, in which 50% of the payloads impact.
7B001
Test, calibration or alignment equipment specially designed for equipment specified
in 7A117 above
.
Note:
 7B001 does not control test, calibration or alignment equipment for ‘Maintenance Level I’ or ‘Maintenance Level II’.
7B003
Equipment specially designed for the "production" of equipment specified
in 7A117 above.
7B103
"Production facilities" specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117
above.
7D101
"Software" specially designed for the "use" of equipment specified in 7B003 or 7B103
above.
7E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment or "software" specified
in 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 or 7D101 above.
7E002
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment specified
in 7A117, 7B003 and 7B103
above.
7E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 and 7D101
above
.
9A004
Space launch vehicles
capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km
.
N.B.
 SEE ALSO 9A104.
Note 1:
 9A004 does not control payloads.
9A005
Liquid rocket propulsion systems containing any of the systems or components specified in 9A006
usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below.
N.B.
 SEE ALSO 9A105 and 9A119.
9A007.a.
Solid rocket propulsion systems,
usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below,
with any of the following:
N.B.
 SEE ALSO 9A119.
a.
Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs;
9A008.d.
Components, as follows, specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems:
N.B.
 SEE ALSO 9A108.c.
d.
Movable nozzle or secondary fluid injection thrust vector control systems,
usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below,
capable of any of the following:
1.
Omni-axial movement exceeding ± 5°;
2.
Angular vector rotations of 20°/s or more; or
3.
Angular vector accelerations of 40°/s2 or more.
9A104
Sounding rockets, capable of
delivering at least a 500 kg payload to
a range of at least 300 km.
N.B.
 SEE ALSO 9A004.
9A105.a.
Liquid propellant rocket engines, as follows:
N.B.
 SEE ALSO 9A119.
a.
Liquid propellant rocket engines usable in ‘missiles’, other than those specified in 9A005, integrated, or designed or modified to be integrated, into a liquid propellant propulsion system which has a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1,1 MNs having a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1,1 MNs;
except liquid propellant apogee engines designed or modified for satellite applications and having all of the following:
1.
nozzle throat diameter of 20 mm or less; and
2.
2. combustion chamber pressure of 15 bar or less.
9A106.c.
Systems or components, other than those specified in 9A006,
usable in "missiles"
, as follows, specially designed for liquid rocket propulsion systems:
c.
Thrust vector control sub-systems,
except those designed for rocket systems that are not capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.
Technical Note:
Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A106.c. are:
1.
Flexible nozzle;
2.
Fluid or secondary gas injection;
3.
Movable engine or nozzle;
4.
Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or
5.
Thrust tabs.
9A108.c.
Components, other than those specified in 9A008,
usable in ‘missiles’ as follows,
specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems:
c.
Thrust vector control sub-systems,
except those designed for rocket systems that are not capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.
Technical Note:
Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A108.c. are:
1.
Flexible nozzle;
2.
Fluid or secondary gas injection;
3.
Movable engine or nozzle;
4.
Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or
5.
Thrust tabs.
9A116
Reentry vehicles, usable in "missiles", and equipment designed or modified therefor, as follows,
except for reentry vehicles designed for non-weapon payloads:
a.
Reentry vehicles;
b.
Heat shields and components therefor fabricated of ceramic or ablative materials;
c.
Heat sinks and components therefor fabricated of light-weight, high heat capacity materials;
d.
Electronic equipment specially designed for reentry vehicles.
9A119
Individual rocket stages, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of
delivering at least a 500 kg payload to
a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005 or 9A007.a.
above
9B115
Specially designed "production equipment" for the systems, sub-systems and components specified in 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119
above.
9B116
Specially designed "production facilities" for the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, or systems, sub-systems, and components specified in 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119
above.
9D101
"Software" specially designed for the "use" of goods specified in 9B116
above
.
9E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment or "software" specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115, 9B116 or 9D101
above.
9E002
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115 or 9B116
above
.
Note:
 For "technology" for the repair of controlled structures, laminates or materials, see 1E002.f.
9E101
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of goods specified in 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119
above
.
9E102
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116, 9A119, 9B115, 9B116 or 9D101
above
.
Exemptions:
Annex IV does not control the following items of the MTCR technology:
1.
that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed by the European Space Agency (ESA) or that are transferred by ESA to accomplish its official tasks;
2.
that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed by a Member State's national space organisation or that are transferred by it to accomplish its official tasks;
3.
that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed in connection with a Union space launch development and production programme signed by two or more European governments;
4.
that are transferred to a State-controlled space launching site in the territory of a Member State, unless that Member State controls such transfers within the terms of this Regulation.
PART II
(NO NATIONAL GENERAL AUTHORISATION FOR INTRA-UNION TRADE)
Items of the CWC (Chemical Weapons Convention)
1C351.d.4.
Ricin
1C351.d.5.
Saxitoxin
Items of the NSG technology
All Category 0 of Annex I is included in Annex IV, subject to the following:
0C001: this item is not included in Annex IV;
—
0C002: this item is not included in Annex IV, with the exception of "special fissile materials" as follows:
(a)
separated plutonium;
(b)
"uranium enriched in the isotopes 235 or 233" to more than 20%.
—
0C003 only if for use in a "nuclear reactor" (within 0A001.a.);
—
0D001 ("software") is included in Annex IV except insofar as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV;
—
0E001 ("technology") is included in Annex IV except insofar as these related to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV.
1B226
Electromagnetic isotope separators designed for, or equipped with, single or multiple ion sources capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater.
Note:
 1B226 includes separators:
a.
Capable of enriching stable isotopes;
b.
With the ion sources and collectors both in the magnetic field and those configurations in which they are external to the field.
1B231
Tritium facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows:
a.
Facilities or plants for the production, recovery, extraction, concentration, or handling of tritium;
b.
Equipment for tritium facilities or plants, as follows:
1.
Hydrogen or helium refrigeration units capable of cooling to 23 K (– 250°C) or less, with heat removal capacity greater than 150 W;
2.
Hydrogen isotope storage or hydrogen isotope purification systems using metal hydrides as the storage or purification medium.
1B233
Lithium isotope separation facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows:
a.
Facilities or plants for the separation of lithium isotopes;
b.
Equipment for the separation of lithium isotopes, as follows:
1.
Packed liquid-liquid exchange columns specially designed for lithium amalgams;
2.
Mercury or lithium amalgam pumps;
3.
Lithium amalgam electrolysis cells;
4.
Evaporators for concentrated lithium hydroxide solution.
1C012
Materials as follows:
Technical Note:
These materials are typically used for nuclear heat sources.
b.
"Previously separated" neptunium-237 in any form.
Note
: 1C012.b. does not control shipments with a neptunium-237 content of 1 g or less.
1C233
Lithium enriched in the lithium-6 (6Li) isotope to greater than its natural isotopic abundance, and products or devices containing enriched lithium, as follows: elemental lithium, alloys, compounds, mixtures containing lithium, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.
Note:
 1C233 does not control thermoluminescent dosimeters.
Technical Note:
The natural isotopic abundance of lithium-6 is approximately 6,5 weight per cent (7,5 atom per cent).
1C235
Tritium, tritium compounds, mixtures containing tritium in which the ratio of tritium to hydrogen atoms exceeds 1 part in 1 000 , and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.
Note:
 1C235 does not control a product or device containing less than 1,48 × 103 GBq (40 Ci) of tritium.
1E001
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of equipment or materials specified in 1C012.b.
1E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of goods specified in 1B226, 1B231, 1B233, 1C233 or 1C235.
3A228
Switching devices, as follows:
a.
Cold-cathode tubes, whether gas filled or not, operating similarly to a spark gap, having all of the following characteristics:
1.
Containing three or more electrodes;
2.
Anode peak voltage rating of 2,5 kV or more;
3.
Anode peak current rating of 100 A or more; and
4.
Anode delay time of 10 μs or less;
Note:
 3A228 includes gas krytron tubes and vacuum sprytron tubes.
b.
Triggered spark-gaps having both of the following characteristics:
1.
An anode delay time of 15 μs or less; and
2.
Rated for a peak current of 500 A or more;
3A231
Neutron generator systems, including tubes, having both of the following characteristics:
a.
Designed for operation without an external vacuum system;
and
b.
Utilizing electrostatic acceleration to induce a tritium-deuterium nuclear reaction.
3E201
"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 3A228 or 3A231
above.
6A203
Cameras and components, other than those specified in 6A003, as follows:
a.
Mechanical rotating mirror streak cameras, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Streak cameras with writing speeds greater than 0,5 mm per microsecond;
b.
Mechanical rotating mirror framing cameras, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:
1.
Framing cameras with recording rates greater than 225 000  frames per second;
Note:
In 6A203.a. components of such cameras include their synchronising electronics units and rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings.
6A225
Velocity interferometers for measuring velocities exceeding 1 km/s during time intervals of less than 10 microseconds.
Note:
 6A225 includes velocity interferometers such as VISARs (Velocity interferometer systems for any reflector) and DLIs (Doppler laser interferometers).
6A226
Pressure sensors, as follows:
a.
Shock pressure gauges capable of measuring pressures greater than 10 GPa, including gauges made with manganin, ytterbium, and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) / polyvinyl difluoride (PVF2);
b.
Quartz pressure transducers for pressures greater than 10 GPa.
(
1
)
  The differences in the wordings/scopes between Annex I and Annex IV are indicated with bold italic text.
ANNEX V
REPEALED REGULATION WITH LIST OF THE SUCCESSIVE AMENDMENTS THERETO
Council Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 (
OJ L 134, 29.5.2009, p. 1
)
Regulation (EU) No 1232/2011 of the European Parliament and of the Council (
OJ L 326, 8.12.2011, p. 26
)
Regulation (EU) No 388/2012 of the European Parliament and of the Council (
OJ L 129, 16.5.2012, p. 12
)
Regulation (EU) No 599/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council (
OJ L 173, 12.6.2014, p. 79
)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1382/2014 (
OJ L 371, 30.12.2014, p. 1
)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/2420 (
OJ L 340, 24.12.2015, p. 1
)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/1969 (
OJ L 307, 15.11.2016, p. 1
)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2017/2268 (
OJ L 334, 15.12.2017, p. 1
)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/1922 (
OJ L 319, 14.12.2018, p. 1
)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2019/2199 (
OJ L 338, 30.12.2019, p. 1
)
Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2020/1749 (
OJ L 421, 14.12.2020, p. 1
)
Regulation (EU) 2020/2171 of the European Parliament and of the Council (
OJ L 432, 21.12.2020, p. 4
)
ANNEX VI
CORRELATION TABLE
Regulation (EC) No 428/2009
This Regulation
Article 1
Article 1
Article 2, introductory wording
Article 2, introductory wording
Article 2, point 1
Article 2, point (1)
Article 2, point 2, introductory wording
Article 2, point (2), introductory wording
Article 2, point 2,(i) and (ii)
Article 2, point (2)(a) and (b)
-
Article 2, point (2)(c)
Article 2, point 2,(iii)
Article 2, point (2)(d)
Article 2, point 3, first subparagraph, introductory wording
Article 2, point (3), first subparagraph, introductory wording
Article 2, point 3, first subparagraph, point (i)
Article 2, point (3), first subparagraph, point (a)
Article 2, point 3, first subparagraph, point (ii)
Article 2, point (3), first subparagraph, point (b)
Article 2, point 3, second subparagraph
Article 2, point (3), point (c)
-
Article 2, point (3), point (d)
Article 2, point 4
Article 2, point (4)
-
Article 2, point (5)
-
Article 2, point (6)
Article 2, point 5, first subparagraph, introductory wording
Article 2, point (7), first subparagraph, introductory wording
Article 2, point 5, first subparagraph, first indent
Article 2, point (7)
Article 2, point 5, first subparagraph, second indent
Article 2, point (7)
Article 2, point 5, second subparagraph
Article 2, point (7)
Article 2, point 6
Article 2, point (8)
-
Article 2, point (9) and (10)
Article 2, point 7
Article 2, point (11)
Article 2, point 8
Article 2, point (12)
Article 2, point 9
Article 2, point (15)
Article 2, point 10
Article 2, point (13)
-
Article 2, point (14)
Article 2, point 11
Article 2, point (16)
Article 2, point 12
Article 2, point (17)
Article 2, point 13
Article 2, point (18)
-
Article 2, point (19)
-
Article 2, point (20)
-
Article 2, point (21) and (22)
Article 3
Article 3
Article 4(1)
Article 4(1), introductory wording and point (a)
Article 4(2), first sentence
Article 2 (19) and 4(1)(b)
Article 4(2),second sentence
Article 4(1)(b), introductory wording
Article 4(2), points (a), (b) and (c)
Article 4(1), point (b) (i), (ii) and (iii)
Article 4(3)
Article 4(1), point (c)
Article 4(4)
Article 4(2)
Article 4(5)
Article 4(3)
Article 4(6)
Article 4(4) and (5)
Article 4(7)
Article 4(6)
-
Article 4(7)
Article 4(8)
Article 4(8)
-
Article 5
Article 5(1), first sentence
Article 6(1)
Article 5(1), second sentence
Article 6(2)
Article 5(2), (3) and (4)
Article 6(3), (4) and (5)
Article 6(1), first sentence
Article 7(1)
Article 6(1), second sentence
-
Article 6(2), first sentence
Article 7(2), first sentence
-
Article 7(2), second sentence
Article 6(3)
Article 7(3)
Article 6(4)
Article 7(4)
Article 7
-
-
Article 8
Article 8
Article 9
-
Article 10
Article 9(1), first subparagraph
Article 12(1), point (d)
Article 9(1), second and third subparagraphs
Article 12(7)
Article 9(1), fourth and fifth subparagraphs
Articles 17 and 19
Article 9(2), first subparagraph
Article 12(1), points (a) to (c), and Article 12(2), first subparagraph
Article 9(2), second subparagraph
Article 12(1), second subparagraph
-
Article 12(2), second subparagraph
-
Article 12(3)
Article 9(2), third subparagraph
Article 12(4), first and second subparagraphs
-
Article 12(4), third subparagraph
Article 9(3)
Article 12(5)
Article 9(4)
Article 12(6)
Article 9(5)
-
Article 9(6)
Article 12(6), fourth subparagraph, and Article 23(1)
Article 10(1), extended to technical assistance
Article 13(1), first subparagraph, and Article 13(2)
-
Article 13(1), second subparagraph
Article 10(2)
Article 13(3)
Article 10(3)
Article 13(4)
Article 11
Article 14
Article 12(1)
Article 15(1)
Article 12(2)
-
-
Article 15(2)
Article 13
Article 16
Article 14(1)
Article 12(2), third subparagraph, and Article 13(5), extended to technical assistance
Article 14(2)
Article 12(4), fourth subparagraph
Article 15(1)
Article 17(1), point (a)
Article 15(2)
Article 20
Article 15(3)
Article 17(1), introductory wording and point (b)
-
Article 17(2)
Article 16
Article 21
Article 17
Article 22
Article 18
-
Article 19(1)
-
Article 19(1), introductory wording
Article 23(2), introductory wording
-
Article 23(2), point (a)
-
Article 23 (2), point (b)
-
Article 23 (2), point (c)
Article 19(2), point (a)
Article 23(2), point (d)
Article 19(2), point (b)
Article 23(2), point (e)
-
Article 23 (3)
-
Article 23 (4)
Article 19(3)
Article 23 (5)
Article 19(4)
Article 23(6)
Article 19(5)
Article 26(1), second sentence
Article 19(6)
Article 23(7)
Article 20(1) to (3)
Article 27(1) to (3)
Article 21
Article 28
Article 22(1) and (2)
Article 11(1) and (2)
Article 22(3) and (4)
Article 11(3) and (4)
Article 22(5) to (7)
Article 11(5) to (7)
Article 22(8)
Article 27(4)
Article 22(9) and (10)
Article 11(8) and (9)
Article 23(1) and (2)
Article 24(1) and (2)
-
Article 24(3)
-
Article 24 (4)
Article 23(3)
Article 26(2)
-
Article 26(3)
-
Article 26 (4)
Article 23a(1)
Article 18(1)
Article 23a(2) and (3)
Article 18(2) and (3)
-
Article 18(4)
Article 23a(4) and (5)
Article 18(5) and (6)
Article 23b
Article 19
Article 24
Article 25(1)
-
Article 25(2)
Article 25(1)
Article 23(1), first and second subparagraphs
Article 25(2) and (3)
-
Article 25(4)
Article 26(2)
-
Article 29(1)
Article 25a
Article 29(2)
Article 26
-
-
Article 30
Article 27
Article 31
Article 28
Article 32
Annex I
Annex I
-
Annex I
Annex IIa
Annex II, Section A
Annex IIb
Annex II, Section B
Annex IIc
Annex II, Section C
Annex IId
Annex II, Section D
Annex IIe
Annex II, Section E
Annex IIf
Annex II, Section F
-
Annex II, Section G
-
Annex II, Section H
Annex IIg
Annex II, Section I
Annex IIIa
Annex III, Section A
Annex IIIb
Annex III, Section B
Annex IIIc
Annex III, Section C
Annex IV
Annex IV
Annex V
Annex V
Annex VI
Annex VI

Summary:
Dual-use export controls
SUMMARY OF:
Regulation (EU) 2021/821 setting up an EU regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items
WHAT IS THE AIM OF THE REGULATION?
 
It sets out rules throughout the 
European Union
 (EU) to control exports, 
brokering
1
, technical assistance, transit and transfer of 
dual-use items
2
.
KEY POINTS
 
Annex I to the regulation, based on internationally agreed controls, lists the dual-use items that require export authorisation. The list of dual-use items is amended periodically (see the updated list in the 
consolidated version
 of Regulation (EU) 2021/821).
These include:
nuclear materials, facilities and equipment;
special materials and related equipment;
materials processing;
electronics;
computers;
telecommunications and information security;
sensors and lasers;
navigation and avionics;
marine;
aerospace and propulsion systems.
Other dual-use items, including any associated brokering services or technical assistance, need export authorisation if they are intended, entirely or in part, for:
chemical, biological or nuclear weapons;
military use in countries subject to an arms embargo;
components of military items already exported from an EU 
Member State
 without the necessary authorisation.
Authorisation is required for:
the export of cybersurveillance items likely to be used for internal repression or serious violations of human rights and international humanitarian law;
the transfer of dual-use items listed in Annex IV, such as stealth technology and strategic control, from one Member State to another.
Member States may:
prohibit the transit on their territory of non-EU dual-use items if their intended use would breach the regulation;
ban or demand an export authorisation for items not listed in Annex I, for reasons of public security, including terrorism or human rights violations;
demand export authorisation, in certain circumstances, for the transfer of dual-use items from their territory to another Member State.
The regulation provides for five types of authorisation valid throughout the EU customs area.
EU general export authorisations.
 These are for certain destinations under certain conditions. They include authorisation for exports to Australia, Canada, Iceland, Japan, Liechtenstein, New Zealand, Norway, Switzerland, the United Kingdom and the United States.
National general export authorisations.
 These are issued by Member States if they are consistent with existing EU general export authorisations and they do not cover the export of dual-use software and technology to certain countries (Annex II G).
Individual and global.
 These are issued by national authorities for up to 2 years to one 
exporter
3
 for the export of:
one or more dual-use items to one end-user in a non-EU country (individual); or
multiple items, countries and end-users (global).
Large project authorisations.
 Individual export authorisation or a global export authorisation granted to one specific exporter, in respect of a type or category of dual-use items which may be valid for exports to one or more specified end-users in one or more specified non-EU countries for the purpose of a specified large-scale project.
Exporters requesting authorisation must:
supply authorities with complete information, especially on the 
end-user,
country of destination,
end-use of the item exported;
keep detailed records of their exports for 5 years, including commercial documents such as invoices and transport material, to identify: 
the descriptions and quantities of the dual-use items,
the names and addresses of the exporter and consignee,
the end-use and end-user, when known.
Authorisations to provide brokering services and technical assistance are granted by national authorities and are valid throughout the EU customs area. They require details of:
the location, description and quantity of the dual-use items;
the third parties involved;
the country of destination;
the end-user and location.
Member States, when deciding to grant or refuse an authorisation request, must take into account: 
the EU, national and international obligations and commitments, particularly relevant non-proliferation regimes and export controls;
any EU, 
Organisation for Security and Cooperation in Europe
 or 
United Nations
 
sanctions
;
the national foreign and security policy decisions;
the intended end-use and risk of diversion to another end-user or another end-use.
Member States must: 
inform the 
European Commission
 of: 
the national authorities authorised to grant export authorisations and prohibit transit of non-EU dual-use items,
the measures they take to enforce the regulation;
take every measure, together with the Commission, to establish direct cooperation and information exchange between national authorities to ensure the efficiency, consistency and enforcement of the export controls;
provide the Commission with the necessary information for its annual report.
The Commission has the following responsibilities. 
It develops a secure and encrypted system to support cooperation and the exchange of information between national authorities and, where appropriate, the Commission itself.
Together with the 
Council
, it issues guidelines and best-practice recommendations to ensure the system’s efficiency and consistency.
It submits an annual report to the 
European Parliament
 and the Council on the implementation of the regulation, in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group. This includes the number, value and destination of authorisations and requests refused.
It uses a simplified procedure (
delegated acts
) to amend the list of items and destinations subject to specific controls.
It will carry out an initial evaluation of cybersurveillance authorisations after 
10 September 2024
, and a full evaluation of the regulation between 
10 September 2026
 and 
10 September 2028
. It will submit both evaluations to the European Parliament, the Council and the 
European Economic and Social Committee
.
The regulation establishes a Dual-Use Coordination Group chaired by the Commission with a representative from each Member State. This group: 
examines issues arising from the legislation;
can consult exporters, brokers, technical assistance providers and other individuals and bodies involved;
sets up groups of technical experts.
The Commission and Member States use exchanges of information and best practice, capacity building and outreach with non-EU countries to promote global convergence on dual-use export controls.
Delegated Regulation (EU) 
2022/699
 amends Regulation (EU) 2021/821 by removing Russia as a destination from the scope of EU general export authorisations, in light of Russia’s illegal attack on Ukraine’s territorial integrity, sovereignty, and independence and the respective threats to the EU’s essential security interests (see summary on 
restrictive measures against Russia
).
Repeal
The regulation repeals and 
revises
 Regulation (EC) 
No 
428/2009
 (see 
summary
) from 
9 September 2021
, except for authorisation applications made before this date, as stated in Article 31 of Regulation (EU) 2021/821.
FROM WHEN DOES THE REGULATION APPLY?
 
It has applied since 
9 September 2021
.
BACKGROUND
 
Dual-use goods and technology meet many civilian needs, but they can also be used for defence, intelligence and law enforcement.
Regulation (EU) 2021/821 provides a comprehensive system upgrade to strengthen the previous export control system and respond to evolving security risks and emerging technologies.
It expands cooperation between Member States and the Commission, places specific obligations on exporters and introduces controls to prevent cybersurveillance technologies from violating human rights.
The EU system is aligned with international rules and commitments made by the following:
Australia Group
Missile Technology Control Regime
Nuclear Suppliers Group
Wassenaar Arrangement on Export Controls for Conventional Arms and Dual-Use Goods and Technologies
Chemical Weapons Convention
.
KEY TERMS
Brokering.
 Negotiating with and arranging transactions between non-EU countries for the purpose of selling or buying dual-use items.
Dual-use items.
 Items, including software and technology, that can be used for both civil and military purposes.
Exporter.
 Any natural or legal person, including researchers or partnerships, physically sending, electronically transmitting or personally carrying dual-use items.
MAIN DOCUMENT
Regulation (EU) 
2021/821
 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 
20 May 2021
 setting up a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items (recast) (OJ L 206, 
11.6.2021
, 
pp. 1–461
).
Successive amendments to Regulation (EU) 2021/821 have been incorporated into the original text. This 
consolidated version
 is of documentary value only.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Communication from the Commission to the Council and the European Parliament – The review of export control policy: ensuring security and competitiveness in a changing world (
COM(2014) 244 final
, 
24.4.2014
).
Council Regulation (EC) 
No 
428/2009
 of 
5 May 2009
 setting up a Community regime for the control of exports, transfer, brokering and transit of dual-use items (recast) (OJ L 134, 
29.5.2009
, 
pp. 1–269
).
See 
consolidated version
.
last update 
17.11.2023

--- DANISH ---

Document:
11.6.2021
DA
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
L 206/1
EUROPA-PARLAMENTETS OG RÅDETS FORORDNING (EU) 2021/821
af 20. maj 2021
om en EU-ordning for kontrol med eksport, mæglervirksomhed, teknisk bistand, transit og overførsel i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse (omarbejdning)
EUROPA-PARLAMENTET OG RÅDET FOR DEN EUROPÆISKE UNION HAR —
under henvisning til traktaten om Den Europæiske Unions funktionsmåde, særlig artikel 207, stk. 2,
under henvisning til forslag fra Europa-Kommissionen,
efter fremsendelse af udkast til lovgivningsmæssig retsakt til de nationale parlamenter,
efter den almindelige lovgivningsprocedure 
(
1
)
, og
ud fra følgende betragtninger:
(1)
Rådets forordning (EF) nr. 428/2009 
(
2
)
 er flere gange blevet ændret væsentligt. Da der skal foretages yderligere ændringer, bør nævnte forordning omarbejdes af hensyn til klarhed, effektivitet og virkningsfuldhed.
(2)
Denne forordning har til formål at sikre, at Unionen og dens medlemsstater fuldt ud tager hensyn til alle relevante overvejelser på området for produkter med dobbelt anvendelse. Relevante overvejelser omfatter internationale forpligtelser og tilsagn, forpligtelser i henhold til relevante sanktioner, overvejelser vedrørende den nationale udenrigs- og sikkerhedspolitik, herunder dem, der er indeholdt i Rådets fælles holdning 2008/944/FUSP 
(
3
)
, herunder menneskerettigheder, og overvejelser om den tiltænkte endelige anvendelse og faren for omdirigering. Med denne forordning viser Unionen, at den er fast besluttet på at opretholde solide retlige krav for så vidt angår produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, samt på at styrke udvekslingen af relevante oplysninger og sikre større gennemsigtighed. Med hensyn til cyberovervågningsprodukter bør medlemsstaternes kompetente myndigheder navnlig overveje risikoen for, at de anvendes i forbindelse med intern undertrykkelse eller alvorlige krænkelser af menneskerettigheder og den humanitære folkeret.
(3)
Denne forordning har også til formål at styrke den vejledning, der skal gives til eksportører, navnlig små og mellemstore virksomheder (SMV'er), om ansvarlig praksis, dog uden at det går ud over den globale konkurrenceevne hos eksportører af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse eller andre tilknyttede industrier eller akademiske kredse, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i en medlemsstat.
(4)
I FN's Sikkerhedsråds resolution 1540 (2004), der blev vedtaget den 28. april 2004, blev det fastsat, at alle stater skal træffe og håndhæve effektive foranstaltninger til indførelse af indenlandsk kontrol for at hindre spredning af nukleare, kemiske og biologiske våben og disses fremføringsmidler, herunder ved at indføre passende kontrol med relaterede materialer, udstyr og teknologi. Der kræves ligeledes kontrol i henhold til relevante internationale aftaler, såsom konventionen om forbud mod udvikling, fremstilling, oplagring og anvendelse af kemiske våben og sådanne våbens tilintetgørelse (»konventionen om kemiske våben« eller »CWC«) og konventionen om forbud mod udvikling, fremstilling og oplagring af bakteriologiske (biologiske) våben og toksinvåben samt om disse våbens tilintetgørelse (»konventionen om biologiske våben og toksinvåben« eller »BWC«), og i henhold til de forpligtelser, der er indgået inden for rammerne af multilaterale eksportkontrolordninger.
(5)
Et effektivt fælles system til kontrol med eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse er derfor nødvendigt for at leve op til medlemsstaternes og Unionens internationale forpligtelser og ansvar, navnlig med hensyn til ikke-spredning, regional fred, sikkerhed og stabilitet og respekt for menneskerettighederne og den humanitære folkeret.
(6)
EU's strategi mod spredning af masseødelæggelsesvåben af 12. december 2003 (»EU's WMD-strategi«) understreger Unionens engagement i en stærk national og internationalt koordineret eksportkontrol.
(7)
Det er afgørende, at eksportører, mæglere, leverandører af teknisk bistand eller andre relevante interessenter bidrager til det overordnede mål om handelskontrol. For at de kan handle i overensstemmelse med denne forordning, skal vurderingen af risici i forbindelse med transaktioner, der er omfattet af denne forordning, foretages ved hjælp af foranstaltninger til screening af transaktioner, også kaldet princippet om passende omhu, som en del af et internt program til sikring af overholdelse (ICP). I denne forbindelse skal der navnlig tages hensyn til eksportørernes størrelse og organisationsstruktur ved udarbejdelsen og gennemførelsen af ICP'er.
(8)
For at imødegå risikoen for, at visse ikke opførte cyberovervågningsprodukter, der eksporteres fra Unionens toldområde, kan misbruges af personer, der har medvirket til eller været ansvarlige for at give ordre til eller for at begå alvorlige krænkelser af menneskerettighederne eller den humanitære folkeret, er det hensigtsmæssigt at bringe eksporten af sådanne produkter under kontrol. De dermed forbundne risici vedrører navnlig tilfælde, hvor cyberovervågningsprodukter er særligt udformet til at muliggøre adgang eller deep packet inspection i informations- og telekommunikationssystemer med henblik på at foretage skjult overvågning af fysiske personer ved at overvåge, uddrage, indsamle eller analysere data, herunder biometriske data, fra disse systemer. Produkter, der anvendes til rent kommercielle formål, såsom fakturering, markedsføring, kvalitetstjenester, brugertilfredshed eller netsikkerhed, anses normalt ikke for at indebære sådanne risici.
(9)
Med henblik på at styrke den effektive kontrol med eksporten af cyberovervågningsprodukter, der ikke er opført på listen, er det vigtigt yderligere at harmonisere anvendelsen af bredtfavnende kontrol (»catch-all control«) på dette område. Med henblik herpå er medlemsstaterne forpligtet til at støtte en sådan kontrol ved at udveksle oplysninger indbyrdes og med Kommissionen, navnlig om den teknologiske udvikling af cyberovervågningsprodukter, og ved at udvise omhu i forbindelse med anvendelsen af en sådan kontrol for at fremme en udveksling på EU-plan.
(10)
For at sætte Unionen i stand til at reagere hurtigt på alvorligt misbrug af eksisterende teknologier eller på nye risici i forbindelse med fremspirende teknologier bør der indføres en mekanisme, der gør det muligt for medlemsstaterne at koordinere deres indsats, når der konstateres en ny risiko. En sådan koordinering bør følges op af initiativer til indførelse af tilsvarende kontrol på multilateralt plan for at udvide indsatsen over for den identificerede risiko.
(11)
Overførsel af software og teknologi med dobbelt anvendelse ved hjælp af elektroniske medier, telefax eller telefon til bestemmelsessteder uden for Unionens toldområde bør også kontrolleres. For at begrænse den administrative byrde for eksportørerne og medlemsstaternes kompetente myndigheder bør der anvendes generelle eller globale tilladelser eller harmoniserede fortolkninger af bestemmelser for visse overførsler såsom overførsler til en datasky (cloud).
(12)
I betragtning af toldmyndighedernes vigtige rolle i håndhævelsen af eksportkontrol bør de udtryk, der anvendes i denne forordning, så vidt muligt være i overensstemmelse med definitionerne i Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) nr. 952/2013 
(
4
)
 (»EU-toldkodeksen«).
(13)
Forskellige kategorier af personer kan være involveret i eksporten af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, herunder fysiske personer som tjenesteydere, forskere, konsulenter og personer, der overfører produkter med dobbelt anvendelse elektronisk. Det er vigtigt, at alle disse personer er bevidste om de risici, der er forbundet med eksport og ydelse af teknisk bistand i forbindelse med følsomme produkter. Navnlig akademiske institutioner og forskningsinstitutioner står over for særlige udfordringer i forhold til eksportkontrol, bl.a. på grund af deres generelle forpligtelse til den frie udveksling af idéer, det forhold, at deres forskningsarbejde ofte omfatter banebrydende teknologier, deres organisationsstrukturer og deres videnskabelige udvekslingers internationale karakter. Medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen bør om nødvendigt øge bevidstheden i den akademiske verden og forskningsverdenen og give dem skræddersyet vejledning i at imødegå disse særlige udfordringer. I overensstemmelse med multilaterale eksportkontrolordninger bør gennemførelsen af kontrol så vidt muligt give mulighed for en fælles tilgang med hensyn til visse bestemmelser, navnlig vedrørende noterne om de-kontrol i forbindelse med teknologi til »videnskabelig grundforskning« og »fri, offentlig anvendelse«, der anvendes i den akademiske verden.
(14)
Definitionen af udtrykket »mægler« bør revideres, så den omfatter juridiske personer og partnerskaber, der ikke er hjemmehørende eller ikke har hjemsted i en medlemsstat, og som udøver mæglervirksomhed fra Unionens toldområde.
(15)
Lissabontraktaten præciserer, at grænseoverskridende levering af teknisk bistand er underlagt Unionens kompetence. Det er derfor hensigtsmæssigt at indføre en definition af teknisk bistand og at specificere den kontrol, der gælder for leveringen heraf. Af hensyn til effektiviteten og ensartetheden bør kontrollen ved levering af teknisk bistand endvidere harmoniseres.
(16)
Som i forordning (EF) nr. 428/2009 bør det være muligt for medlemsstaternes myndigheder at forbyde transit af ikke-EU-produkter med dobbelt anvendelse under visse omstændigheder, når de på baggrund af efterretninger eller andre kilder har rimelig begrundet mistanke om, at produkterne helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til militær slutanvendelse i et land, der er omfattet af en våbenembargo, eller til spredning af masseødelæggelsesvåben eller disses fremføringsmidler.
(17)
Der bør ske en harmonisering af tilladelsesvilkår og -krav, hvor det er relevant, for at undgå konkurrenceforvridninger og at sikre en ensartet og effektiv kontrol i hele Unionens toldområde. Med henblik på dette er det ligeledes nødvendigt for hver type kontrol tydeligt at fastsætte, hvilken myndighed i medlemsstaterne der er kompetent. Ansvaret for afgørelserne om individuelle, globale eller generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, om tilladelser til mæglervirksomhed og til teknisk bistand samt om transit af ikke-EU-produkter med dobbelt anvendelse og om tilladelser til overførsel inden for Unionens toldområde af de produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført i bilag IV, ligger hos de nationale myndigheder.
(18)
Der bør indføres retningslinjer for interne programmer til sikring af overholdelse for at bidrage til at opnå lige konkurrencevilkår mellem eksportører og fremme en effektiv anvendelse af kontrolforanstaltningerne. Sådanne retningslinjer bør tage hensyn til forskelle i eksportørers og deres datterselskabers størrelse, ressourcer, aktivitetsområder og andre aspekter og betingelser såsom koncerninterne overholdelsesstrukturer og -standarder, således at man undgår en tilgang med én model, der skal gælde for alle, og hjælper hver eksportør med at finde sine egne løsninger, for så vidt angår overholdelse og konkurrenceevne. Eksportører, der anvender globale eksporttilladelser, bør gennemføre et ICP, medmindre den kompetente myndighed finder det unødvendigt på grund af andre omstændigheder, den har taget i betragtning ved behandlingen af den ansøgning om en global eksporttilladelse, som eksportøren har indgivet.
(19)
Der bør indføres supplerende generelle EU-eksporttilladelser for at nedbringe den administrative byrde for virksomheder, især SMV'er, og myndigheder og samtidig sikre et passende kontrolniveau vedrørende de relevante produkter til de relevante bestemmelsessteder. Medlemsstaterne kan om nødvendigt udarbejde retningslinjer til eksportørerne om anvendelsen af generelle tilladelser. Medlemsstaterne kan også indføre generelle nationale eksporttilladelser for lavrisikoeksport, hvis de finder det nødvendigt. Der bør ligeledes indføres en tilladelse for store projekter for at tilpasse tilladelsesbetingelserne til industriens særlige behov.
(20)
Kommissionen bør i snævert samråd med medlemsstaterne og interessenter udarbejde retningslinjer og/eller henstillinger om bedste praksis til støtte for den praktiske gennemførelse af kontrolforanstaltninger. Når Kommissionen udarbejder retningslinjer og/eller henstillinger, bør den tage behørigt hensyn til SMV'ernes informationsbehov.
(21)
Fælles lister over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, bestemmelsessteder og retningslinjer er afgørende elementer for en effektiv eksportkontrolordning.
(22)
Medlemsstater, der udarbejder nationale kontrollister i henhold til denne forordning, bør underrette Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om sådanne lister. Medlemsstaterne bør også underrette Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om alle afgørelser om afslag på tilladelse til en given eksport, for hvilken der kræves en tilladelse på grundlag af en national kontrolliste.
(23)
Med henblik på at sikre en hurtig reaktion fra Unionen i forhold til ændrede vilkår i forbindelse med vurderingen af en given eksports følsomhed inden for rammerne af en generel EU-eksporttilladelse samt i forhold til den teknologiske og kommercielle udvikling bør beføjelsen til at vedtage retsakter i overensstemmelse med artikel 290 i traktaten om Den Europæiske Unions funktionsmåde (TEUF) delegeres til Kommissionen, for så vidt angår ændring af bilag I, II og IV til denne forordning. Afgørelser om ajourføring af den fælles liste over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er underlagt eksportkontrol, jf. bilag I, bør være i overensstemmelse med de forpligtelser og tilsagn, som medlemsstaterne eller Unionen har accepteret som medlemmer i de relevante internationale ikkespredningsaftaler og som medlemmer i multilaterale eksportkontrolordninger eller ved ratifikation af relevante internationale traktater. Hvor ændringen af bilag I vedrører produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som også er opført i bilag II eller IV, bør disse bilag ændres i overensstemmelse hermed. Afgørelser om ajourføring af de fælles lister over produkter og bestemmelsessteder, jf. afsnit A til H i bilag II, bør træffes under hensyntagen til de i denne forordning fastsatte vurderingskriterier. Det er navnlig vigtigt, at Kommissionen gennemfører relevante høringer under sit forberedende arbejde, herunder på ekspertniveau, og at disse høringer gennemføres i overensstemmelse med principperne i den interinstitutionelle aftale af 13. april 2016 om bedre lovgivning 
(
5
)
. For at sikre lige deltagelse i forberedelsen af delegerede retsakter modtager Europa-Parlamentet og Rådet navnlig alle dokumenter på samme tid som medlemsstaternes eksperter, og deres eksperter har systematisk adgang til møder i Kommissionens ekspertgrupper, der beskæftiger sig med forberedelse af delegerede retsakter.
(24)
Kommissionen bør offentliggøre ajourføringerne af bilag I ved hjælp af delegerede retsakter på alle Unionens officielle sprog.
(25)
Kommissionen bør offentliggøre og ajourføre en samling af de nationale kontrollister, der er gældende i medlemsstaterne, på alle Unionens officielle sprog.
(26)
Nationale bestemmelser og afgørelser, der påvirker eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, bør træffes inden for rammerne af den fælles handelspolitik, herunder navnlig Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) 2015/479 
(
6
)
. Der bør ved en passende udveksling af oplysninger og konsultationer om nationale bestemmelser og beslutninger sikres en effektiv og ensartet kontrol i hele Unionens toldområde.
(27)
Tilstedeværelsen af et fælles kontrolsystem er en forudsætning for at etablere fri bevægelighed for produkter med dobbelt anvendelse inden for Unionens toldområde.
(28)
I henhold til og inden for rammerne af artikel 36 i TEUF og i overensstemmelse med indgåede internationale forpligtelser vil medlemsstaterne fortsat have ret til at foretage kontrol af overførsler af visse produkter med dobbelt anvendelse inden for Unionens toldområde for at beskytte den offentlige orden eller offentlige sikkerhed. Listen over produkter, der er genstand for kontrol inden for Unionen fastsat i bilag IV, bør med mellemrum tages op til fornyet behandling idet der tages hensyn til den videre udvikling i de underliggende internationale forpligtelser samt til den teknologiske og kommercielle udvikling, for så vidt angår vurderingen af overførslernes følsomhed. Afgørelser om ajourføring af den fælles liste over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er underlagt eksportkontrol som fastsat i bilag IV, bør være i overensstemmelse med artikel 36 i TEUF, nemlig medlemsstaternes interesser for så vidt angår offentlig orden og offentlig sikkerhed.
(29)
Den 22. september 1998 undertegnede medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen tillægsprotokoller til de respektive aftaler om kontrol mellem medlemsstaterne, Det Europæiske Atomenergifællesskab og Den Internationale Atomenergiorganisation, der blandt andre foranstaltninger forpligter medlemsstaterne til at oplyse om overførslen af specificeret udstyr og ikke-nukleart materiale. Kontrol af overførsler inden for Unionen bør give Unionen og dens medlemsstater mulighed for at opfylde deres forpligtelser i henhold til disse aftaler.
(30)
Med henblik på at sikre ensartet og konsekvent anvendelse af kontrollen i hele Unionen er det hensigtsmæssigt at udvide omfanget af høring og informationsudveksling mellem medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen og at indføre værktøjer, der fremmer udviklingen af et fælles netværk for eksportkontrol i hele Unionen, såsom elektroniske tilladelsesprocedurer, tekniske ekspertgrupper og etableringen af en mekanisme for koordineret håndhævelse. Det er navnlig vigtigt at sikre, at eksportører, mæglere, leverandører af teknisk bistand og andre relevante interessenter, der berøres af denne forordning, herunder industrien og civilsamfundsorganisationer, høres, hvor det er relevant, af Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse og de tekniske ekspertgrupper.
(31)
Toldmyndighederne deler visse oplysninger med andre toldmyndigheder ved hjælp af et risikostyringssystem i overensstemmelse med Unionens toldregler, og det er ligeledes hensigtsmæssigt at sikre et tæt samarbejde mellem tilladelsesudstedende myndigheder og toldmyndighederne.
(32)
Det bør præciseres, at i det omfang, der er tale om personoplysninger, bør behandlingen og udvekslingen af oplysninger ske efter de gældende regler for beskyttelse af fysiske personer i forbindelse med behandling af personoplysninger og om fri udveksling af sådanne oplysninger i Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) 2016/679 
(
7
)
 og (EU) 2018/1725 
(
8
)
.
(33)
Medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen bør træffe alle nødvendige foranstaltninger for at sikre beskyttelsen af fortrolige oplysninger i overensstemmelse med navnlig Kommissionens afgørelse (EU, Euratom) 2015/443 
(
9
)
 og (EU, Euratom) 2015/444 
(
10
)
 og aftalen mellem Den Europæiske Unions medlemsstater, forsamlet i Rådet, om beskyttelse af klassificerede informationer, der udveksles i Den Europæiske Unions interesse 
(
11
)
. Dette gælder navnlig forpligtelsen til ikke at ned- eller afklassificere klassificerede informationer uden forudgående skriftligt samtykke fra udstederen. Ikkeklassificerede følsomme oplysninger eller oplysninger, som gives på et fortroligt grundlag, bør behandles som sådan af myndighederne.
(34)
Formidling til den private sektor, navnlig SMV'er, og gennemsigtighed er afgørende elementer for en effektiv eksportkontrolordning. Det er derfor hensigtsmæssigt at sørge for en fortsat udvikling af retningslinjer, hvor det er nødvendigt, til støtte for gennemførelsen af denne forordning og for offentliggørelsen af en årlig EU-beretning om gennemførelsen af kontrol.
(35)
Den årlige EU-beretning om gennemførelsen af kontrol bør indeholde relevante oplysninger om udstedelse af tilladelser og håndhævelse af kontrol i henhold til denne forordning under behørig hensyntagen til behovet for at sikre beskyttelsen af fortroligheden af visse data, navnlig hvis offentliggørelsen af data om tilladelser kan påvirke nationale sikkerhedsinteresser, som medlemsstaterne har givet udtryk for, eller bringe fortroligheden af forretningshemmeligheder i fare og give leverandører uden for Unionen mulighed for at underbyde medlemsstaternes restriktive afgørelser om tilladelser.
(36)
For at sikre, at denne forordning anvendes korrekt, skal hver medlemsstat træffe foranstaltninger, der giver de kompetente myndigheder passende beføjelser.
(37)
I overensstemmelse med EU's WMD-strategi bør hver medlemsstat fastsætte sanktioner, der er effektive, står i et rimeligt forhold til overtrædelsen og har en afskrækkende virkning, og som finder anvendelse i tilfælde af overtrædelse af denne forordnings bestemmelser. Det er ligeledes hensigtsmæssigt at indføre bestemmelser for at sikre en effektiv håndhævelse af kontrollen bl.a. gennem en håndhævelseskoordinationsmekanisme.
(38)
EU-toldkodeksen indeholder bl.a. bestemmelser om eksport og reeksport af varer. Intet i denne forordning indskrænker de beføjelser, der gælder i henhold til og i medfør af EU-toldkodeksen og gennemførelsesbestemmelserne hertil.
(39)
Eksportkontrol bidrager til den internationale sikkerhed og indvirker på handelen med tredjelande. Det er derfor hensigtsmæssigt at udvikle dialogen og samarbejdet med tredjelande med henblik på at skabe lige vilkår på verdensplan og fremme den internationale sikkerhed. Medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen bør navnlig øge deres bidrag til de multilaterale eksportkontrolordningers aktiviteter. Medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen bør også støtte disse ordninger i udviklingen af solide eksportkontroller som et globalt grundlag og en model for bedste internationale praksis og et vigtigt redskab til at sikre international fred og stabilitet. Der bør ydes bidrag, når alle medlemsstater har identificeret en ny risiko inden for cyberovervågningsprodukter, for at sikre lige vilkår på multilateralt plan.
(40)
Denne forordning finder anvendelse, uden at det berører Kommissionens delegerede afgørelse af 15. september 2015 om supplerende regler til Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets afgørelse nr. 1104/2011/EU 
(
12
)
, hvormed der fastsættes specifikke regler for kontrol med eksport af produkter til statsreguleret tjeneste under Galileo-programmet.
(41)
Denne forordning overholder de grundlæggende rettigheder og de principper, som bl.a. Den Europæiske Unions charter om grundlæggende rettigheder anerkender —
VEDTAGET DENNE FORORDNING:
KAPITEL I
FORMÅL OG DEFINITIONER
Artikel 1
Ved denne forordning oprettes en EU-ordning for kontrol med eksport, mæglervirksomhed, teknisk bistand, transit og overførsel i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
Artikel 2
I denne forordning forstås ved:
1)
»produkter med dobbelt anvendelse«: produkter, herunder software og teknologi, der kan anvendes til både civile som militære formål, og produkter, der kan anvendes til udformning, udvikling, produktion eller anvendelse af nukleare, kemiske eller biologiske våben eller disses fremføringsmidler, herunder alle produkter, der kan anvendes både til ikke-eksplosive formål og til på enhver måde at fremme fabrikation af nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer
2)
»eksport«:
a)
en eksportprocedure, jf. artikel 269 i EU-toldkodeksen
b)
en reeksport, jf. artikel 270 i EU-toldkodeksen. Der er også tale om reeksport, hvis der under transit gennem Unionens toldområde i henhold til nærværende artikels nr. 11) skal indgives en summarisk udpassageangivelse, fordi produkternes endelige bestemmelsessted er blevet ændret
c)
en procedure for passiv forædling, jf. artikel 259 i EU-toldkodeksen, eller
d)
overførsel af software eller teknologi ved hjælp af elektroniske medier, herunder telefax, telefon, elektronisk post eller et hvilket som helst andet elektronisk medium, til et bestemmelsessted uden Unionens toldområde. Dette omfatter tilrådighedsstillelse i elektronisk form af sådan software og teknologi for fysiske eller juridiske personer eller for partnerskaber uden for Unionens toldområde. Det omfatter også mundtlig overførsel af teknologi, hvis teknologien beskrives via et taletransmissionsmedium
3)
»eksportør«:
a)
enhver fysisk eller juridisk person eller ethvert partnerskab, der på det tidspunkt, hvor eksportangivelsen eller reeksportangivelsen eller en summarisk udpassageangivelse antages, har kontrakten med modtageren i tredjelandet og har beføjelse til at beslutte, at produktet skal sendes ud af Unionens toldområde; hvor der ikke er indgået nogen eksportkontrakt, eller hvis indehaveren af kontrakten ikke handler for egen regning, forstås ved eksportøren den person, der har beføjelse til at beslutte, at produkterne skal sendes ud af Unionens toldområde, eller
b)
enhver fysisk eller juridisk person eller ethvert partnerskab, der beslutter at overføre software eller teknologi ved hjælp af elektroniske medier, herunder telefax, telefon, elektronisk post eller et hvilket som helst andet elektronisk medium, til et bestemmelsessted uden for Unionens toldområde eller at stille sådan software og teknologi til rådighed i elektronisk form for fysiske eller juridiske personer, eller for partnerskaber uden for Unionens toldområde.
Hvor retten til at disponere over produktet med dobbelt anvendelse i medfør af den kontrakt, i henhold til hvilken eksporten finder sted, indehaves af en person, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted uden for Unionens toldområde, betragtes den kontrahent, der er hjemhørende eller har hjemsted i Unionens toldområde, som eksportør
c)
hvis dette nummers litra a) eller b) ikke gør sig gældende, enhver fysisk person, der medbringer produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse med henblik på eksport, hvis disse produkter med dobbelt anvendelse er indeholdt i vedkommendes personlige bagage, jf. artikel 1, nr. 19), litra a), i Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2015/2446 
(
13
)
4)
»eksportangivelse«: den handling, ved hvilken enhver fysisk eller juridisk person eller ethvert partnerskab i behørig form og efter de foreskrevne regler tilkendegiver at ville henføre et produkt med dobbelt anvendelse, jf. nr. 1), under eksportproceduren
5)
»reeksportangivelse«: en handling som defineret i artikel 5, nr. 13), i EU-toldkodeksen
6)
»summarisk udpassageangivelse«: en handling som defineret i artikel 5, nr. 10), i EU-toldkodeksen
7)
»mæglervirksomhed«:
a)
forhandling eller tilrettelæggelse af transaktioner med henblik på køb, salg eller levering af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse fra et tredjeland til et andet tredjeland, eller
b)
salg eller køb af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der befinder sig i tredjelande, med henblik på eksport til et andet tredjeland.
Med henblik på denne forordning er levering af udelukkende sekundære tjenester undtaget fra denne definition. Sekundære tjenester er transport, finansielle tjenester, forsikring eller genforsikring eller almindelig reklame eller salgsfremmende foranstaltninger
8)
»mægler«: enhver fysisk eller juridisk person eller et ethvert partnerskab, som leverer mæglingstjenester fra Unionens toldområde på et tredjelands område
9)
»teknisk bistand«: enhver teknisk bistand i forbindelse med reparation, udvikling, fremstilling, samling, prøvning, vedligeholdelse eller enhver anden form for teknisk ydelse, uanset om bistanden ydes i form af instruktion, rådgivning, oplæring, overførsel af driftskendskab eller færdigheder eller konsulentservice, herunder via elektroniske medier samt via telefon eller andre former for mundtlig bistand
10)
»leverandør af teknisk bistand«:
a)
enhver fysisk eller juridisk person eller ethvert partnerskab, som leverer teknisk bistand fra Unionens toldområde på et tredjelands område
b)
enhver fysisk eller juridisk person eller ethvert partnerskab, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i en medlemsstat, som leverer teknisk bistand inden for et tredjelands område, eller
c)
enhver fysisk eller juridisk person eller ethvert partnerskab, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i en medlemsstat, som leverer teknisk bistand til en person hjemmehørende i et tredjeland, der midlertidig opholder sig inden for Unionen toldområde
11)
»transit«: transport af ikke-EU-produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som indføres i og passerer gennem Unionens toldområde med et bestemmelsessted uden for Unionens toldområde, hvis disse produkter:
a)
henføres under en procedure for ekstern forsendelse i henhold til artikel 226 i EU-toldkodeksen og kun passerer gennem Unionens toldområde
b)
omlades i eller reeksporteres direkte fra en frizone
c)
er under midlertidig opbevaring og reeksporteres direkte fra et anlæg til midlertidig opbevaring, eller
d)
er bragt ind i Unionens toldområde på samme skib eller fly, hvormed de bringes ud af dette område uden omladning
12)
»individuel eksporttilladelse«: en tilladelse, der udstedes til en bestemt eksportør for en enkelt slutbruger eller modtager i et tredjeland, og som gælder for et eller flere produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
13)
»global eksporttilladelse«: en tilladelse, der udstedes til en bestemt eksportør for en type eller kategori af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som kan være gyldig for eksport til en eller flere angivne slutbrugere og/eller i et eller flere angivne tredjelande
14)
»eksporttilladelse til stort projekt«: en individuel eksporttilladelse eller en global eksporttilladelse, der udstedes til en bestemt eksportør for en type eller kategori af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som kan være gyldig for eksport til en eller flere angivne slutbrugere i et eller flere angivne tredjelande for et specifikt storstilet projekt
15)
»generel EU-eksporttilladelse«: en eksporttilladelse, der udstedes til alle eksportører, som overholder betingelserne og kravene i afsnit A til H i bilag II, for eksport til visse bestemmelseslande
16)
»generel national eksporttilladelse«: en eksporttilladelse, der fastlægges i national lovgivning i overensstemmelse med artikel 12, stk. 6, og afsnit C i bilag III i denne forordning
17)
»Unionens toldområde«: Unionens toldområde i henhold til artikel 4 i EU-toldkodeksen
18)
»ikke-EU-produkter med dobbelt anvendelse«: produkter, der har status af ikke-EU-varer i henhold til artikel 5, nr. 24), i EU-toldkodeksen
19)
»våbenembargo« våbenembargo i henhold til en afgørelse eller en fælles holdning vedtaget af Rådet eller ved en afgørelse truffet af Organisationen for Sikkerhed og Samarbejde i Europa (OSCE) eller en våbenembargo i henhold til en bindende resolution fra De Forenede Nationers Sikkerhedsråd
20)
»cyberovervågningsprodukter«: produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som er særligt udformet til at give mulighed for skjult overvågning af fysiske personer gennem overvågning, uddragelse, indsamling eller analysere af data fra informations- og telekommunikationssystemer
21)
»internt program til sikring af overholdelse« eller »ICP«: løbende effektive, passende og forholdsmæssige politikker og procedurer, der er vedtaget af eksportører for at fremme overholdelse af bestemmelserne og målene i denne forordning samt vilkårene og betingelserne for de tilladelser, der gennemføres i henhold til denne forordning, herunder foranstaltninger vedrørende passende omhu til vurdering af risici i forbindelse med eksport af produkterne til slutbrugere og endelige anvendelsesformål
22)
»en i alt væsentligt identisk transaktion«: en transaktion vedrørende produkter med i alt væsentligt identiske parametre eller tekniske egenskaber og med samme slutbruger eller modtager som en anden transaktion.
KAPITEL II
ANVENDELSESOMRÅDE
Artikel 3
1.   Der kræves tilladelse til eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført på listen i bilag I.
2.   Der kan i henhold til artikel 4, 5, 9 eller 10 også kræves tilladelse til at eksportere visse produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, til alle eller visse bestemmelsessteder.
Artikel 4
1.   Der kræves tilladelse til eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, hvis eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til:
a)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
b)
militær endelig anvendelse, hvis køberlandet eller bestemmelseslandet er genstand for en våbenembargo; i dette litra forstås ved »militær endelig anvendelse«:
i)
inkorporering i militære produkter, der er opført på medlemsstaternes militære liste
ii)
anvendelse af fremstillings-, afprøvnings- eller analyseudstyr og komponenter hertil til udvikling, fremstilling eller vedligeholdelse af militære produkter, der er opført på medlemsstaternes militære liste, eller
iii)
anvendelse af ufærdige produkter på et anlæg til fremstilling af militære produkter, der er opført på medlemsstaternes militære liste
c)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra en medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning.
2.   Hvis en eksportør har kendskab til, at produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som denne agter at eksportere, og som ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, helt eller delvis er bestemt til en af de i nærværende artikels stk. 1 omhandlede anvendelser, meddeler eksportøren dette til den kompetente myndighed. Denne kompetente myndighed afgør, om der skal kræves tilladelse til den pågældende eksport.
3.   En medlemsstat kan vedtage eller opretholde national lovgivning, hvorefter der kræves tilladelse til eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, hvis eksportøren har begrundet mistanke om, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til en af de i nærværende artikels stk. 1 omhandlede anvendelser.
4.   En medlemsstat, der i henhold til stk. 1, 2 eller 3 stiller krav om tilladelse, underretter straks sine toldmyndigheder og andre relevante nationale myndigheder og forelægger de øvrige medlemsstater og Kommissionen alle relevante oplysninger om det pågældende tilladelseskrav, særlig med hensyn til de berørte produkter og slutbrugere, medmindre den finder, at det ikke er hensigtsmæssigt at gøre dette i lyset af transaktionens art eller de pågældende oplysningers følsomhed.
5.   Medlemsstaterne tager behørigt hensyn til oplysninger, de modtager i henhold til stk. 4, og underretter deres toldmyndigheder og andre relevante nationale myndigheder herom.
6.   Med henblik på at gøre det muligt for medlemsstaterne at foretage en gennemgang af alle gyldige afslag finder artikel 16, stk. 1, 2 og 5-7, anvendelse på produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I.
7.   Al udveksling af oplysninger, der kræves i henhold til denne artikel, finder sted i overensstemmelse med de retlige krav vedrørende beskyttelse af personoplysninger, kommercielt følsomme oplysninger eller beskyttede oplysninger vedrørende forsvar, udenrigspolitik eller national sikkerhed. Sådan udveksling af oplysninger skal ske ved hjælp af sikre elektroniske medier, herunder ved hjælp af det system, der er omhandlet i artikel 23, stk. 6.
8.   Denne forordning berører ikke medlemsstaternes ret til at træffe nationale foranstaltninger i henhold til artikel 10 i forordning (EU) 2015/479.
Artikel 5
1.   Der kræves tilladelse til eksport af cyberovervågningsprodukter, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, hvis eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til anvendelse i forbindelse med intern undertrykkelse og/eller alvorlige krænkelser af menneskerettigheder og den humanitære folkeret.
2.   Hvis en eksportør i henhold til sin procedure for passende omhu har kendskab til cyberovervågningsprodukter, som eksportøren agter at eksportere, og som ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, og helt eller delvis er bestemt til en af de i nærværende artikels stk. 1 omhandlede anvendelser, meddeler eksportøren dette til den kompetente myndighed. Denne kompetente myndighed træffer afgørelse om, hvorvidt der skal kræves tilladelse til den pågældende eksport. Kommissionen og Rådet stiller retningslinjer til rådighed for eksportører, jf. artikel 26, stk. 1.
3.   En medlemsstat kan vedtage eller opretholde national lovgivning, hvorefter der kræves tilladelse til eksport af cyberovervågningsprodukter, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, hvis eksportøren har begrundet mistanke om, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til en af de i nærværende artikels stk. 1 omhandlede anvendelser.
4.   En medlemsstat, der i henhold til stk. 1, 2 eller 3 stiller krav om tilladelse, underretter straks sine toldmyndigheder og andre relevante nationale myndigheder og forelægger de øvrige medlemsstater og Kommissionen relevante oplysninger om det pågældende tilladelseskrav, særlig med hensyn til de berørte produkter og enheder, medmindre den finder, at det ikke er hensigtsmæssigt at gøre dette i lyset af transaktionens art eller de pågældende oplysningers følsomhed.
5.   Medlemsstaterne tager behørigt hensyn til de oplysninger, de modtager i henhold til stk. 4, og gennemgår dem i lyset af kriterierne i stk. 1 inden for 30 arbejdsdage. De underretter deres toldmyndigheder og andre relevante nationale myndigheder. I undtagelsestilfælde kan en medlemsstat anmode om forlængelse af denne periode på 30 dage. Forlængelsen kan dog ikke overstige 30 arbejdsdage.
6.   Hvis samtlige medlemsstater underretter hinanden og Kommissionen om, at der bør stilles krav om tilladelse til transaktioner, der i alt væsentligt er identiske, offentliggør Kommissionen i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
 oplysninger om cyberovervågningsprodukter og, hvor det er relevant, bestemmelsessteder, der er underlagt krav om tilladelse som meddelt af medlemsstaterne til dette formål.
7.   Medlemsstaterne gennemgår de oplysninger, der offentliggøres i henhold til stk. 6, mindst en gang om året på grundlag af relevante oplysninger og analyser, som Kommissionen stiller til rådighed. Hvis samtlige medlemsstater underretter hinanden og Kommissionen om, at offentliggørelsen af et krav om tilladelse bør ændres eller fornyes, ændrer eller fornyer Kommissionen straks og i overensstemmelse hermed de oplysninger, der er offentliggjort i henhold til stk. 6 i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
8.   Med henblik på at gøre det muligt for medlemsstaterne at foretage en gennemgang af alle gyldige afslag finder artikel 16, stk. 1, 2 og 5-7, anvendelse på cyberovervågningsprodukter, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I.
9.   Al udveksling af oplysninger, der kræves i henhold til denne artikel, finder sted i overensstemmelse med de retlige krav vedrørende beskyttelse af personoplysninger, kommercielt følsomme oplysninger eller beskyttede oplysninger vedrørende forsvar, udenrigspolitik eller national sikkerhed. Sådan udveksling af oplysninger skal ske ved hjælp af sikre elektroniske medier, herunder ved hjælp af det system, der er omhandlet i artikel 23, stk. 6.
10.   Medlemsstaterne skal overveje at støtte inddragelsen af produkter, der er offentliggjort i henhold til nærværende artikels stk. 6, i de relevante internationale ikke-spredningsregimer eller eksportkontrolordninger med henblik på at udvide kontrollen. Kommissionen fremlægger analyser af de relevante data, der er indsamlet i henhold til artikel 23, stk. 2, og artikel 26, stk. 2.
11.   Denne forordning berører ikke medlemsstaternes ret til at træffe nationale foranstaltninger i henhold til artikel 10 i forordning (EU) 2015/479.
Artikel 6
1.   Der kræves en tilladelse til mæglervirksomhed i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført på listen i bilag I, hvis mægleren af den kompetente myndighed er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til en af de i artikel 4, stk. 1, omhandlede anvendelser.
2.   Hvis en mægler agter at udøve mæglervirksomhed i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som er opført på listen i bilag I, og har kendskab til, at disse produkter helt eller delvis er bestemt til et af de i artikel 4, stk. 1, omhandlede anvendelser, meddeler mægleren dette til den kompetente myndighed. Denne kompetente myndighed afgør, om der skal stilles krav om tilladelse til sådan mæglervirksomhed.
3.   En medlemsstat kan udvide anvendelsen af stk. 1 til at omfatte ikke-opførte produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
4.   En medlemsstat kan vedtage eller opretholde national lovgivning, hvorefter der kræves tilladelse til at udøve mæglervirksomhed i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, hvis mægleren har begrundet mistanke om, at de pågældende produkter er eller kan være bestemt til en af de i artikel 4, stk. 1, omhandlede anvendelser.
5.   Artikel 9, stk. 2, 3 og 4, finder anvendelse på de i nærværende artikels stk. 3 og 4 omhandlede nationale foranstaltninger.
Artikel 7
1.   Transit af ikke-EUprodukter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført i bilag I, kan til enhver tid forbydes af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor produkterne befinder sig, hvis produkterne helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til enhver af de i artikel 4, stk. 1, omhandlede anvendelser.
2.   Inden den afgør, om den vil forbyde en transit, kan den kompetente myndighed i individuelle tilfælde kræve en tilladelse til specifik transit af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført i bilag I, hvis produkterne helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til enhver af de i artikel 4, stk.1, omhandlede anvendelser. Hvis transitten foregår gennem flere medlemsstaters område, skal den kompetente myndighed i hver berørt medlemsstat kunne forbyde en sådan transit gennem sit område.
Den kompetente myndighed kan stille krav om tilladelse for den fysiske eller juridiske person eller det partnerskab, som har kontrakten med modtageren i tredjelandet og har beføjelse til at beslutte, at produkterne skal sendes gennem Unionens toldområde.
Hvis den fysiske eller juridiske person eller partnerskabet ikke er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i Unionens toldområde, kan den kompetente myndighed stille krav om tilladelse for:
a)
klarereren, jf. artikel 5, nr. 15, i EU-toldkodeksen
b)
transportøren, jf. artikel 5, nr. 40, i EU-toldkodeksen eller
c)
den fysiske person, der medbringer produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse i transit, hvis disse produkter med dobbelt anvendelse er indeholdt i den pågældende persons personlige bagage.
3.   En medlemsstat kan udvide anvendelsen af stk. 1 til at omfatte ikke-opførte produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
4.   Artikel 9, stk. 2, 3 og 4, finder anvendelse på de i nærværende artikels stk. 3 omhandlede nationale foranstaltninger.
Artikel 8
1.   Der kræves en tilladelse til levering af teknisk bistand i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført på listen i bilag I, hvis leverandøren af teknisk bistand af den kompetente myndighed er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til en af de i artikel 4, stk. 1, omhandlede anvendelser.
2.   Hvis en leverandør af teknisk bistand agter at levere teknisk bistand i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som er opført på listen i bilag I, og har kendskab til, at disse produkter helt eller delvis er bestemt til et af de i artikel 4, stk. 1, omhandlede anvendelser, meddeler leverandøren af teknisk bistand dette til den kompetente myndighed. Denne kompetente myndighed afgør, om der skal stilles krav om tilladelse til sådan teknisk bistand.
3.   Stk. 1 og 2 finder ikke anvendelse, hvis den tekniske bistand:
a)
leveres i eller til området i et land, der er opført på listen i bilag II, afsnit A, del 2, eller til en person, der er hjemmehørende i et land, der er opført i bilag II, afsnit A, del 2
b)
har form af overførsel af oplysninger, der er til fri offentlig anvendelse eller til videnskabelig grundforskning som defineret i den generelle teknologinote eller noten vedrørende nuklear teknologi i bilag I
c)
stilles til rådighed af en medlemsstats myndigheder eller agenturer inden for rammerne af deres officielle opgaver
d)
leveres til en medlemsstats væbnede styrker på grundlag af de opgaver, de er blevet pålagt
e)
er bestemt til et formål, der er nævnt i undtagelserne for produkter under missilteknologikontrolregimet (MTCR-teknologi) i bilag IV, eller
f)
er det minimum, der kræves til installation, drift, vedligeholdelse (eftersyn) eller reparation af de produkter, hvortil der er udstedt eksporttilladelse.
4.   En medlemsstat kan udvide anvendelsen af stk. 1 til at omfatte ikke-opførte produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
5.   En medlemsstat kan vedtage eller opretholde national lovgivning, hvorefter der kræves tilladelse til levering af teknisk bistand, hvis en leverandør af teknisk bistand, der agter at levere teknisk bistand i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, har begrundet mistanke om, at de pågældende produkter er eller kan være bestemt til en af de i artikel 4, stk. 1, omhandlede anvendelser.
6.   Artikel 9, stk. 2, 3 og 4, finder anvendelse på de i nærværende artikels stk. 4 og 5 omhandlede nationale foranstaltninger.
Artikel 9
1.   En medlemsstat kan af hensyn til den offentlige sikkerhed, herunder forebyggelse af terrorhandlinger, eller menneskerettigheder forbyde eller kræve tilladelse til eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I.
2.   Medlemsstaterne underretter straks Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om foranstaltninger, som de har vedtaget i henhold til stk. 1, og angiver de nøjagtige årsager til disse foranstaltninger. Hvis foranstaltningen består i at opstille en national kontrolliste, underretter medlemsstaterne også Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om beskrivelsen af de kontrollerede produkter.
3.   Medlemsstaterne underretter straks Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om eventuelle ændringer af foranstaltninger, der er vedtaget i henhold til stk. 1, herunder eventuelle ændringer af deres nationale kontrollister.
4.   Kommissionen offentliggør de foranstaltninger, som der er givet underretning om i henhold til stk. 2 og 3, i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
. Kommissionen offentliggør separat og straks på alle Unionens officielle sprog en samling af de nationale kontrollister, der er gældende i medlemsstaterne. Kommissionen offentliggør straks og på alle Unionens officielle sprog, efter meddelelse fra en medlemsstat om enhver ændring af dens nationale kontrolliste, en ajourføring af samlingen af de nationale kontrollister, der er gældende i medlemsstaterne.
Artikel 10
1.   Der kræves tilladelse til eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, hvis en anden medlemsstat indfører et tilladelseskrav til eksport af disse produkter på grundlag af en national kontrolliste over produkter, som den pågældende medlemsstat har vedtaget i medfør af artikel 9, og som er offentliggjort af Kommissionen i medfør af artikel 9, stk. 4, og hvis eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed er blevet underrettet om, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til anvendelser, som kan give anledning til betænkeligheder i forhold til offentlig sikkerhed, herunder forebyggelse af terrorhandlinger, eller menneskerettighedshensyn.
2.   En medlemsstat, der giver afslag på en tilladelse, der kræves i henhold til stk. 1, underretter også Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om en sådan beslutning.
3.   En medlemsstat, der i medfør nærværende artikels stk. 1 kræver tilladelse til eksport for et produkt med dobbelt anvendelse, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, underretter straks sine toldmyndigheder og andre relevante nationale myndigheder om tilladelseskravet og forelægger, hvor det er relevant, de øvrige medlemsstater og Kommissionen relevante oplysninger, særlig med hensyn til de berørte produkter og slutbrugere. De øvrige medlemsstater tager behørigt hensyn til disse oplysninger og underretter deres toldmyndigheder og andre relevante nationale myndigheder herom.
Artikel 11
1.   Der kræves tilladelse til overførsel inden for Unionen af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført på listen i bilag IV. Produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført på listen i bilag IV, del 2, omfattes ikke af en generel tilladelse.
2.   En medlemsstat kan kræve tilladelse til overførsel af andre produkter med dobbelt anvendelse fra sit område til en anden medlemsstat, hvis det på tidspunktet for overførslen forholder sig sådan, at
a)
operatøren eller den kompetente myndighed er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkters endelige bestemmelsessted ligger uden for Unionens toldområde
b)
eksporten af disse produkter til dette endelige bestemmelsessted er underkastet krav om tilladelse i henhold til artikel 3, 4, 5, 9 eller 10 i den medlemsstat, fra hvilken produkterne skal overføres, og en sådan eksport direkte fra dens område ikke er tilladt i henhold til en generel tilladelse eller en global tilladelse og
c)
produkterne ikke er bestemt til at undergå nogen bearbejdning eller forarbejdning som defineret i artikel 60, stk. 2, i EU-toldkodeksen i den medlemsstat, som de skal overføres til.
3.   Der ansøges om den i stk. 1 og 2 omhandlede tilladelse til overførsel i den medlemsstat, som produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse skal overføres fra.
4.   I tilfælde, hvor den efterfølgende eksport af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse allerede er blevet godkendt efter høringsprocedurerne fastsat i artikel 14 af den medlemsstat, som produkterne skal overføres fra, udstedes der straks overførselstilladelse til operatøren, medmindre omstændighederne har ændret sig væsentligt.
5.   En medlemsstat, der vedtager lovgivning med et tilladelseskrav som omhandlet i stk. 2, underretter straks Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om de foranstaltninger, den har truffet. Kommissionen offentliggør disse oplysninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
6.   Anvendelsen af foranstaltningerne i henhold til stk. 1 og 2 må ikke medføre kontrol ved de indre grænser inden for Unionens toldområde, men kun kontrol, der foretages som led i de normale kontrolprocedurer, der anvendes uden forskelsbehandling på hele Unionens toldområde.
7.   Anvendelse af foranstaltningerne i henhold til stk. 1 og 2 må ikke medføre, at overførsel fra en medlemsstat til en anden underkastes mere restriktive betingelser end dem, der gælder for eksport af samme produkter til ikke-medlemsstater.
8.   En medlemsstat kan ifølge national lovgivning ved overførsler inden for Unionen fra medlemsstaten af produkter, der er opført på listen i bilag I, kategori 5, del 2, men som ikke er opført på listen i bilag IV, kræve, at yderligere oplysninger om disse produkter skal afgives til medlemsstatens kompetente myndigheder.
9.   De relevante handelsdokumenter vedrørende overførsler inden for Unionen af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført på listen i bilag I, skal klart angive, at produkterne er underlagt kontrol, hvis de eksporteres fra Unionens toldområde. Sådanne dokumenter omfatter især salgskontrakt, ordrebekræftelse, faktura eller forsendelsesmeddelelse.
KAPITEL III
EKSPORTTILLADELSE OG TILLADELSE TIL MÆGLERVIRKSOMHED OG TEKNISK BISTAND
Artikel 12
1.   Ved denne forordning kan der udstedes eller indføres følgende typer af eksporttilladelser:
a)
individuelle eksporttilladelser
b)
globale eksporttilladelser
c)
generelle nationale eksporttilladelser
d)
generelle EU-eksporttilladelser for eksport af visse produkter til visse bestemmelsessteder, der er underlagt særlige betingelser og krav vedrørende anvendelse, jf. afsnit A-H i bilag II.
Tilladelser der er udstedt eller indført i henhold til denne forordning er gyldige i hele Unionens toldområde.
2.   Individuelle og globale eksporttilladelser i henhold til denne forordning udstedes af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted.
Uden at det berører artikel 2, nr. 3, hvis eksportøren ikke er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i Unionens toldområde, udstedes der individuelle eksporttilladelser i henhold til denne forordning af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse befinder sig.
Alle individuelle og globale eksporttilladelser skal så vidt muligt udstedes ved hjælp af elektroniske medier på formularer, der mindst indeholder alle elementerne i modellerne fastsat i afsnit A i bilag III i den der angivne rækkefølge.
3.   Individuelle eksporttilladelser og globale eksporttilladelser er gyldige i op til to år, medmindre den kompetente myndighed træffer anden afgørelse.
Tilladelser til stort projekt er gyldige i en periode, der fastsættes af den kompetente myndighed, men ikke længere end fire år, undtagen i behørigt begrundede tilfælde, der er baseret på projektets varighed.
4.   Eksportører skal give den kompetente myndighed alle de relevante oplysninger, der kræves til deres ansøgninger om individuelle og globale eksporttilladelser, for at give fuldstændige oplysninger navnlig om slutbrugeren, bestemmelseslandet og de endelige anvendelser af det eksporterede produkt.
Individuelle eksporttilladelser er betinget af en erklæring om den endelige anvendelse. Den kompetente myndighed kan fritage visse ansøgninger fra forpligtelsen til at fremlægge en erklæring om den endelige anvendelse. Globale eksporttilladelser kan om nødvendigt være betinget af en erklæring om den endelige anvendelse.
Eksportører, der anvender globale eksporttilladelser, skal gennemføre et ICP, medmindre den kompetente myndighed finder det unødvendigt på grund af andre oplysninger, den har taget i betragtning ved behandlingen af den ansøgning om en global eksporttilladelse, som eksportøren har indgivet.
Medlemsstaterne fastlægger rapporterings- og ICP-krav vedrørende brugen af globale eksporttilladelser.
På anmodning af eksportørerne skal globale eksporttilladelser, der indeholder kvantitative begrænsninger, opdeles.
5.   De kompetente myndigheder i medlemsstaterne skal behandle ansøgninger om individuelle eller globale tilladelser inden for en periode, der skal fastsættes i medfør af national ret eller praksis.
6.   Generelle nationale eksporttilladelser:
a)
omfatter ikke produkter, der er opført på listen i afsnit I i bilag II,
b)
fastlægges i medfør af national ret eller praksis; de kan anvendes af alle eksportører, der har hjemsted eller er hjemmehørende i den medlemsstat, der udsteder disse tilladelser, hvis de opfylder kravene i denne forordning og i den supplerende nationale lovgivning; de udstedes i overensstemmelse med angivelserne i afsnit C i bilag III,
c)
må ikke anvendes, hvis eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed er blevet underrettet om, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til en af de anvendelser, der er omhandlet i artikel 4, stk. 1, eller hvis eksportøren har kendskab til, at produkterne er bestemt til sådan anvendelse.
Generelle nationale eksporttilladelser kan finde anvendelse på produkter og bestemmelsessteder, der er opført i bilag II, afsnit A-H.
Medlemsstaterne underretter straks Kommissionen om enhver generel national eksporttilladelse, de har udstedt eller ændret. Kommissionen offentliggør sådanne underretninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
7.   Den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, kan forbyde eksportøren at anvende generelle EU-eksporttilladelser, hvis der er begrundet mistanke om eksportørens evne til at overholde en sådan tilladelse eller en bestemmelse i eksportkontrollovgivningen.
De kompetente myndigheder i medlemsstaterne udveksler oplysninger om eksportører, der har forbud mod at anvende en generel EU-eksporttilladelse, medmindre den kompetente myndighed i medlemsstaten, hvor eksportøren er hjemhørende eller har hjemsted fastslår, at eksportøren ikke vil forsøge at eksportere produkter med dobbelt anvendelse via en anden medlemsstat. Udvekslingen af oplysninger sker ved hjælp af det elektroniske system, der er omhandlet i artikel 23, stk. 6.
Artikel 13
1.   Tilladelser til mæglervirksomhed og teknisk assistance i henhold til denne forordning udstedes af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor mægleren eller leverandøren af teknisk bistand er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted. Når mægleren eller leverandøren af teknisk bistand ikke er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted på Unionens toldområde, udstedes tilladelser til mæglervirksomhed og teknisk bistand i henhold til denne forordning af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvorfra mæglervirksomheden eller den tekniske bistand vil blive leveret.
2.   Tilladelser til mæglervirksomhed udstedes for en bestemt mængde af specifikke produkter og angiver klart placeringen af produkterne i oprindelsestredjelandet, slutbrugeren og den nøjagtige placering af slutbrugeren.
Tilladelser til teknisk bistand angiver klart slutbrugeren og slutbrugerens nøjagtige placering.
Tilladelserne er gyldige i hele Unionens toldområde.
3.   Mæglere og leverandører af teknisk bistand skal give den kompetente myndighed alle de relevante oplysninger, der kræves til deres ansøgning om tilladelse i henhold til denne forordning, navnlig detaljer om placeringen af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse, en klar beskrivelse af produkterne og den pågældende mængde, tredjeparter, der er involveret i transaktionen, bestemmelseslandet, slutbrugeren i dette land og dennes nøjagtige placering.
4.   De kompetente myndigheder i medlemsstaterne skal behandle ansøgninger om individuelle eller globale tilladelser inden for en tidsperiode, der skal fastsættes i medfør af national ret eller praksis.
5.   Alle tilladelser til mæglervirksomhed og teknisk bistand skal så vidt muligt udstedes ved hjælp af elektroniske medier på formularer, der mindst indeholder alle elementerne i modellerne fastsat i afsnit B i bilag III i den der angivne rækkefølge.
Artikel 14
1.   Hvis de produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, for hvilke der er ansøgt om en individuel eksporttilladelse til et bestemmelsessted, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag IIa, del 2, eller, i tilfælde af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse opført på listen i bilag IV, til ethvert bestemmelsessted, befinder sig eller vil befinde sig i en eller flere andre medlemsstater end den, hvor ansøgningen er indgivet, skal dette fremgå af ansøgningen. Den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor ansøgningen er indgivet, skal straks høre de kompetente myndigheder i de pågældende medlemsstater og give dem alle relevante oplysninger. Denne høring kan foretages ved hjælp af det elektroniske system, der er omhandlet i artikel 23, stk. 6. De medlemsstater, der høres, tilkendegiver inden for en frist på 10 arbejdsdage deres eventuelle indsigelser mod udstedelsen af tilladelsen, som er bindende for den medlemsstat, hvor ansøgningen er indgivet.
Såfremt der ikke foreligger noget svar inden for 10 arbejdsdage, anses de medlemsstater, der høres, for ikke at have indvendinger.
I undtagelsestilfælde kan en medlemsstat, der høres, anmode om forlængelse af denne periode på 10 dage. Forlængelsen kan dog ikke overstige 30 arbejdsdage.
2.   Hvis eksport vil være til skade for en medlemsstats væsentlige sikkerhedsinteresser, kan denne anmode en anden medlemsstat om ikke at udstede eksporttilladelse, eller, hvis der allerede er udstedt en sådan tilladelse, anmode om, at den annulleres, suspenderes, ændres eller tilbagekaldes. En medlemsstat, som modtager en sådan anmodning, indleder straks høringer af ikke-bindende karakter, som skal afsluttes inden for 10 arbejdsdage, af den medlemsstat, der har fremsat anmodningen. I tilfælde af, at den medlemsstat, som har modtaget en sådan anmodning, beslutter at udstede tilladelsen, bør denne medlemsstat underrette Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater herom ved hjælp af det i artikel 23, stk. 6, omhandlede elektroniske system.
Artikel 15
1.   Når medlemsstaterne afgør, om der skal udstedes en tilladelse, eller om de skal forbyde en transit i henhold til denne forordning, skal medlemsstaterne tage hensyn til alle relevante betragtninger, herunder:
a)
Unionens og medlemsstaternes internationale forpligtelser og tilsagn, særlig de forpligtelser og tilsagn, som de hver især har indgået som medlemmer i relevante internationale ikke-spredningsregimer og eksportkontrolordninger eller ved ratifikation af relevante internationale traktater
b)
deres forpligtelser i henhold til sanktioner, der er pålagt ved en afgørelse eller en fælles holdning vedtaget af Rådet, ved en afgørelse truffet af OSCE eller ved en bindende resolution fra De Forenede Nationers Sikkerhedsråd
c)
nationale udenrigs- og sikkerhedspolitiske hensyn, herunder dem, der er omfattet af fælles holdning 2008/944/FUSP
d)
den tiltænkte endelige anvendelse og faren for omdirigering.
2.   Når medlemsstaterne behandler en ansøgning om en global eksporttilladelse, tager de ud over de i stk. 1 fastsatte kriterier hensyn til eksportørens gennemførelse af et ICP.
Artikel 16
1.   Den kompetente myndighed kan i overensstemmelse med denne forordning afslå at udstede en eksporttilladelse og kan annullere, suspendere, ændre eller tilbagekalde en eksporttilladelse, den allerede har udstedt. I tilfælde af at den kompetente myndighed giver afslag på, annullerer, suspenderer, væsentligt begrænser eller tilbagekalder en eksporttilladelse eller har truffet beslutning om, at den påtænkte eksport ikke skal tillades, skal den give meddelelse herom til de kompetente myndigheder i de andre medlemsstater og Kommissionen og videregive relevante oplysninger til dem. Såfremt en medlemsstats kompetente myndighed har suspenderet en eksporttilladelse, skal den endelige vurdering meddeles de kompetente myndigheder i de øvrige medlemsstater og Kommissionen ved suspensionens ophør.
2.   Medlemsstaternes kompetente myndigheder gennemgår på ny afslag, der er meddelt i henhold til stk. 1, inden for tre år efter meddelelsen og tilbagekalder, ændrer eller forlænger dem. Medlemsstaternes kompetente myndigheder meddeler snarest muligt resultaterne af gennemgangen til de øvrige medlemsstaters kompetente myndigheder og Kommissionen. Afslag, der ikke tilbagekaldes, forbliver gyldige og skal tages op til fornyet gennemgang hvert tredje år. Ved den tredje gennemgang skal den pågældende medlemsstat redegøre for grundene til at opretholde et sådant afslag.
3.   Den kompetente myndighed meddeler straks de kompetente myndigheder i de andre medlemsstater og Kommissionen deres afgørelse i henhold til artikel 7 om at forbyde transit af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse. Disse meddelelser indeholder alle relevante oplysninger, herunder om klassificeringen af produktet, dets tekniske parametre, bestemmelseslandet og slutbrugeren.
4.   Nærværende artikels stk. 1 og 2 finder også anvendelse på tilladelser til mæglervirksomhed og teknisk bistand som omhandlet i artikel 13.
5.   Inden en medlemsstats kompetente myndighed afgør, om der skal udstedes tilladelse til en transit i henhold til denne forordning, eller om den skal forbydes, skal den gennemgå alle gyldige afslag eller afgørelser om at forbyde en transit af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført i bilag I, som er meddelt i henhold til denne forordning, for at fastslå, om en tilladelse eller transit er blevet afslået af de kompetente myndigheder i en anden medlemsstat til en i alt væsentligt identisk transaktion. Den skal dernæst høre de kompetente myndigheder i de medlemsstater, der har meddelt sådanne afslag eller truffet afgørelse om at forbyde transitten som omhandlet i nærværende artikels, stk. 1, 3 og 4.
De kompetente myndigheder i de hørte medlemsstater meddeler inden for 10 arbejdsdage, om de anser den pågældende transaktion for at være en i alt væsentligt identisk transaktion. Er der ikke modtaget et svar inden for 10 arbejdsdage, antages det, at de kompetente myndigheder i de hørte medlemsstater ikke anser den pågældende transaktion for at være en i alt væsentligt identisk transaktion.
Hvis der er behov for flere oplysninger med henblik på en korrekt vurdering af den pågældende transaktion, aftaler de kompetente myndigheder i de berørte medlemsstater en forlængelse af denne tidagesfrist. Denne forlængelse kan dog ikke overstige 30 arbejdsdage.
Beslutter den kompetente myndighed efter den pågældende høring at udstede en tilladelse eller tillade transitten, meddeler den det til de kompetente myndigheder i de øvrige medlemsstater og til Kommissionen og fremlægger alle relevante oplysninger til at forklare afgørelsen.
6.   Alle meddelelser i henhold til denne artikel gives ved hjælp af sikre elektroniske medier, herunder ved hjælp af det system, der er omhandlet i artikel 23, stk. 6.
7.   Alle givne oplysninger i medfør af bestemmelserne i denne artikel skal være i overensstemmelse med artikel 23, stk. 5, vedrørende disse oplysningers fortrolighed.
KAPITEL IV
ÆNDRING AF LISTER OVER PRODUKTER MED DOBBELT ANVENDELSE OG BESTEMMELSESSTEDER
Artikel 17
1.   Kommissionen tillægges beføjelse til at vedtage delegerede retsakter i overensstemmelse med artikel 18 med henblik på at ændre listen over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er fastsat i bilag I og IV, som følger:
a)
listen over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse som fastsat i bilag I ændres i overensstemmelse med de relevante forpligtelser og tilsagn ligesom alle ændringer heraf, som medlemsstaterne og, hvor det er relevant, Unionen har accepteret som medlemmer i de internationale ikke-spredningsregimer og eksportkontrolregimer eller ved ratifikation af relevante internationale traktater
b)
når ændringen af i bilag I vedrører produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der også er opført på listen i bilag II eller IV, ændres disse bilag i overensstemmelse hermed.
2.   Kommissionen tillægges beføjelse til at vedtage delegerede retsakter i overensstemmelse med artikel 18 med henblik på at ændre bilag II ved at slette produkter og ved at tilføje eller slette bestemmelsessteder fra anvendelsesområdet for generelle EU-eksporttilladelser i samråd med Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse, der er nedsat i henhold til artikel 24, og under hensyntagen til forpligtelser og tilsagn i henhold til de relevante ikke-spredningsregimer og eksportkontrolordninger, såsom ændringer af kontrollister, samt relevant geopolitisk udvikling. Når der af særligt hastende årsager kræves sletning af særlige bestemmelsessteder fra anvendelsesområdet for en generel EU-eksporttilladelse, finder proceduren i artikel 19 anvendelse på delegerede retsakter, der vedtages i henhold til nærværende stykke.
Artikel 18
1.   Beføjelsen til at vedtage delegerede retsakter tillægges Kommissionen på de i denne artikel fastlagte betingelser.
2.   Beføjelsen til at vedtage delegerede retsakter, jf. artikel 17, tillægges Kommissionen for en periode på fem år fra den 9. september 2021. Kommissionen udarbejder en beretning vedrørende delegationen af beføjelser senest ni måneder inden udløbet af femårsperioden. Delegationen af beføjelser forlænges stiltiende for perioder af samme varighed, medmindre Europa-Parlamentet eller Rådet modsætter sig en sådan forlængelse senest tre måneder inden udløbet af hver periode.
3.   Den i artikel 17 omhandlede delegation af beføjelser kan til enhver tid tilbagekaldes af Europa-Parlamentet eller Rådet. En afgørelse om tilbagekaldelse bringer delegationen af de beføjelser, der er angivet i den pågældende afgørelse, til ophør. Den får virkning dagen efter offentliggørelsen af afgørelsen i 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
 eller på et senere tidspunkt, der angives i afgørelsen. Den berører ikke gyldigheden af delegerede retsakter, der allerede er i kraft.
4.   Inden vedtagelsen af en delegeret retsakt hører Kommissionen eksperter, som er udpeget af hver enkelt medlemsstat, i overensstemmelse med principperne i den interinstitutionelle aftale af 13. april 2016 om bedre lovgivning.
5.   Så snart Kommissionen vedtager en delegeret retsakt, giver den samtidigt Europa-Parlamentet og Rådet meddelelse herom.
6.   En delegeret retsakt vedtaget i henhold til artikel 17 træder kun i kraft, hvis hverken Europa-Parlamentet eller Rådet har gjort indsigelse inden for en frist på to måneder fra meddelelsen af den pågældende retsakt til Europa-Parlamentet og Rådet, eller hvis Europa-Parlamentet og Rådet inden udløbet af denne frist begge har informeret Kommissionen om, at de ikke agter at gøre indsigelse. Fristen forlænges med to måneder på Europa-Parlamentets eller Rådets initiativ.
Artikel 19
1.   Delegerede retsakter vedtaget i henhold til denne artikel træder i kraft straks og anvendes, så længe der ikke er gjort indsigelse i henhold til stk. 2. I meddelelsen til Europa-Parlamentet og Rådet af en delegeret retsakt anføres begrundelsen for anvendelse af hasteproceduren.
2.   Europa-Parlamentet eller Rådet kan efter proceduren i artikel 18, stk. 6, gøre indsigelse mod en delegeret retsakt. I så fald skal Kommissionen ophæve retsakten straks efter Europa-Parlamentets eller Rådets meddelelse af afgørelsen om at gøre indsigelse.
Artikel 20
Listen over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse i bilag IV, der udgør en delmængde af bilag I, ajourføres under hensyn til artikel 36 i TEUF, nemlig medlemsstaternes interesser for så vidt angår offentlig orden og sikkerhed.
KAPITEL V
TOLDPROCEDURER
Artikel 21
1.   Ved opfyldelsen af formaliteterne vedrørende eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse på det toldsted, der er ansvarligt for behandling af eksportangivelsen, skal eksportøren føre bevis for, at der foreligger behørig eksporttilladelse.
2.   Det kan kræves af eksportøren, at han lader de dokumenter, der forelægges som bevis, oversætte til et officielt sprog i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportangivelsen indgives.
3.   Uden at det berører de beføjelser, som tilkommer den i medfør af EU-toldkodeksen, kan en medlemsstat desuden i en periode, som ikke overstiger de perioder, der er omhandlet i stk. 4, udsætte eksport fra sit område eller, hvis det er nødvendigt, på anden måde hindre, at produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som er eller ikke er omfattet af en behørig eksporttilladelse, eksporteres fra Unionen fra den pågældende medlemsstats område, når den har:
a)
mistanke om, at:
i)
der i forbindelse med tilladelsens udstedelse ikke er taget hensyn til relevante oplysninger, eller
ii)
omstændighederne har ændret sig væsentligt siden tilladelsens udstedelse, eller
b)
relevante oplysninger om den potentielle anvendelse af foranstaltninger i henhold til artikel 4, stk. 1.
4.   I de tilfælde, der er omhandlet i nærværende artikels stk. 3 hører den medlemsstat, der er omhandlet i nævnte stykke, straks den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, som har udstedt eksporttilladelsen, eller som kan træffe foranstaltninger i henhold til artikel 4, stk. 1, således at den kompetente myndighed kan træffe foranstaltninger i henhold til artikel 4, stk. 1, eller artikel 16, stk. 1. Beslutter denne myndighed at opretholde tilladelsen eller ikke at træffe foranstaltninger i henhold til artikel 4, stk. 1, skal den svare inden for 10 arbejdsdage, hvilket, hvis den anmoder herom, i undtagelsestilfælde kan forlænges til 30 arbejdsdage. I så fald, eller hvis der ikke er modtaget noget svar inden for 10 eller 30 arbejdsdage, alt efter omstændighederne, frigives produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse straks. Den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, som har udstedt tilladelsen, underretter de kompetente myndigheder i de øvrige medlemsstater og Kommissionen.
5.   Kommissionen kan i samarbejde med medlemsstaterne udvikle en vejledning til at fremme myndighedssamarbejde mellem myndigheder, der udsteder tilladelser, og toldmyndigheder.
Artikel 22
1.   Medlemsstaterne kan bestemme, at toldformaliteterne i forbindelse med eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse kun kan opfyldes ved toldsteder, der er bemyndiget hertil.
2.   Når medlemsstaterne anvender muligheden i stk. 1, underretter de Kommissionen om, hvilke toldsteder der har fået denne bemyndigelse. Kommissionen offentliggør sådanne meddelelser i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
KAPITEL VI
ADMINISTRATIVT SAMARBEJDE, GENNEMFØRELSE OG HÅNDHÆVELSE
Artikel 23
1.   Medlemsstaterne underretter straks Kommissionen om, hvilke love, forskrifter og administrative bestemmelser de har vedtaget for at gennemføre denne forordning, herunder:
a)
en liste over de kompetente myndigheder i medlemsstaterne, der har beføjelse til:
—
at udstede eksporttilladelser for produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
—
at udstede tilladelser i henhold til denne forordning til mæglervirksomhed og teknisk bistand
—
at forbyde transit af ikke-EU-produkter med dobbelt anvendelse i henhold til denne forordning
b)
de i artikel 25, stk. 1, omhandlede foranstaltninger.
Kommissionen fremsender oplysningerne til de øvrige medlemsstater og offentliggør oplysningerne i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
2.   Medlemsstaterne træffer i samarbejde med Kommissionen alle hensigtsmæssige foranstaltninger til at etablere et direkte samarbejde og udveksling af oplysninger mellem de kompetente myndigheder med henblik på at øge effektiviteten af Unionens eksportkontrolordning og for at sikre en konsekvent og effektiv gennemførelse og håndhævelse af kontrollen i hele Unionens toldområde. Udvekslingen af oplysninger kan omfatte:
a)
relevante data om tilladelser for hver tilladelse, som er udstedt (f.eks. værdi og typer af tilladelser og de pågældende bestemmelsessteder, antal brugere af generelle tilladelser)
b)
yderligere oplysninger vedrørende anvendelsen af kontrollen, herunder oplysninger om anvendelsen af kriterierne i artikel 15, stk. 1, antallet af operatører med et ICP og, når disse oplysninger er tilgængelige, data om eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der gennemføres i andre medlemsstater
c)
oplysninger om den analyse, der ligger til grund for tilføjelser eller planlagte tilføjelser til de nationale kontrollister i medfør artikel 9
d)
oplysninger vedrørende håndhævelse af kontrollen, herunder risikobaserede revisioner, detaljer vedrørende eksportører, der er blevet frataget retten til at anvende generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, og, når disse oplysninger er tilgængelige, antal krænkelser, beslaglæggelser og anvendelsen af andre sanktioner
e)
oplysninger om følsomme slutbrugere, aktører, der er involveret i mistænkelige indkøbsaktiviteter, og, hvis der findes sådanne oplysninger, anvendte ruter.
3.   Udvekslingen af tilladelsesdata finder sted mindst én gang om året i overensstemmelse med retningslinjer, der skal udarbejdes af Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse, som er nedsat i medfør af artikel 24, under behørig hensyntagen til retlige krav vedrørende beskyttelse af personoplysninger, kommercielt følsomme oplysninger eller beskyttede forsvarsmæssige, udenrigspolitiske eller nationale sikkerhedsoplysninger.
4.   Medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen undersøger regelmæssigt gennemførelsen af artikel 15 på grundlag af oplysninger, der indgives i henhold til denne forordning, og analyser af sådanne data. Alle deltagere i disse udvekslinger skal respektere fortroligheden af drøftelserne.
5.   Rådets forordning (EF) nr. 515/97 
(
14
)
, og navnlig dens bestemmelser om den fortrolige karakter af oplysninger, finder tilsvarende anvendelse.
6.   Kommissionen udvikler i samråd med Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse nedsat i henhold til artikel 24 et sikkert og krypteret system for at støtte direkte samarbejde og udveksling af oplysninger mellem medlemsstaternes kompetente myndigheder og, når det er hensigtsmæssigt, Kommissionen. Systemet skal, når det er muligt, af Kommissionen tilsluttes medlemsstaternes kompetente myndigheders elektroniske tilladelsessystemer, i det omfang det er nødvendigt for at lette dette direkte samarbejde og udvekslingen af oplysninger. Europa-Parlamentet informeres om systemets budget, udvikling og funktionsmåde.
7.   Behandlingen af personoplysninger skal ske i overensstemmelse med reglerne i forordning (EU) 2016/679 og (EU) 2018/1725.
Artikel 24
1.   Der oprettes en koordinationsgruppe for produkter med dobbelt anvendelse med en repræsentant for Kommissionen som formand. Hver medlemsstat udpeger en repræsentant til denne gruppe. Den undersøger alle spørgsmål vedrørende anvendelsen af denne forordning, der rejses af formanden eller af en repræsentant for en medlemsstat.
2.   Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse skal, hvis den finder det nødvendigt, høre de eksportører, mæglere, leverandører af teknisk bistand og andre relevante parter, der berøres af denne forordning.
3.   Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse skal, når det er hensigtsmæssigt, nedsætte tekniske ekspertgrupper bestående af eksperter fra medlemsstaterne til at undersøge specifikke spørgsmål i forbindelse med gennemførelsen af kontrolforanstaltninger, herunder spørgsmål i forbindelse med ajourføringen af EU-kontrollisterne fastsat i bilag I. De tekniske ekspertgrupper skal, når det er hensigtsmæssigt, høre de eksportører, mæglere, leverandører af teknisk bistand og andre relevante parter, der berøres af denne forordning.
4.   Kommissionen støtter et EU-program for opbygning af kapacitet med hensyn til udstedelse af tilladelser og håndhævelse, herunder ved i samråd med Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse at udvikle fælles uddannelsesprogrammer for medlemsstaternes embedsmænd.
Artikel 25
1.   Hver medlemsstat træffer passende foranstaltninger til at sikre, at denne forordnings bestemmelser anvendes korrekt. Den fastsætter navnlig, hvilke sanktioner der skal benyttes i tilfælde af overtrædelse af bestemmelserne i denne forordning og af de bestemmelser, der vedtages til dens gennemførelse. Disse sanktioner skal være effektive, stå i rimeligt forhold til overtrædelsen og have en afskrækkende virkning.
2.   Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse opretter en håndhævelseskoordinationsmekanisme for at støtte udveksling af oplysninger og direkte samarbejde mellem medlemsstaternes kompetente myndigheder og håndhævelsesorganer (»håndhævelseskoordinationsmekanismen«). Inden for rammerne af håndhævelseskoordinationsmekanismen udveksler medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen relevante oplysninger, hvis sådanne foreligger, herunder om anvendelsen, karakteren og virkningen af de foranstaltninger, der er truffet i henhold til stk. 1, om håndhævelse af bedste praksis og uautoriseret eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse og/eller overtrædelser af denne forordning og/eller relevant national lovgivning.
Inden for rammerne af håndhævelseskoordinationsmekanismen udveksler medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen endvidere oplysninger om nationale håndhævende myndigheders bedste praksis med hensyn til risikobaserede revisioner, opdagelse og retsforfølgelse af uautoriseret eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse og/eller mulige andre overtrædelser af denne forordning og/eller relevant national lovgivning.
Udveksling af oplysninger inden for rammerne af håndhævelseskoordinationsmekanismen er fortrolig.
KAPITEL VII
GENNEMSIGTIGHED, OPLYSNING, OVERVÅGNING OG EVALUERING
Artikel 26
1.   Kommissionen og Rådet skal, når det er hensigtsmæssigt, stille retningslinjer og/eller henstillinger om bedste praksis med hensyn til de spørgsmål, der er omhandlet i denne forordning til rådighed, for at sikre en effektiv EU-eksportkontrol og en konsekvent gennemførelse heraf. Udstedelse af retningslinjer og/eller henstillinger om bedste praksis til eksportører, mæglere og leverandører af teknisk bistand påhviler de medlemsstater, hvor de er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted. I disse retningslinjer og/eller henstillinger om bedste praksis tages der navnlig hensyn til SMV'ers informationsbehov.
2.   Kommissionen forelægger i samråd med Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse Europa-Parlamentet og Rådet en årlig beretning om gennemførelsen af nærværende forordning og de aktiviteter, undersøgelser og høringer, som Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse har foretaget. Denne årlige beretning skal offentliggøres.
Den årlige beretning skal indeholde oplysninger om tilladelser (navnlig antal og værdi efter typer af produkter og bestemmelsessteder på EU- og medlemsstatsplan), afslag og forbud i henhold til denne forordning. Den årlige beretning skal endvidere indeholde oplysninger om forvaltningen (navnlig personale, overholdelse og opsøgende aktiviteter, særlige tilladelses- eller klassificeringsværktøjer) og om gennemførelse af kontroller (navnlig antallet af overtrædelser og sanktioner).
For så vidt angår cyberovervågningsprodukter skal den årlige beretning indeholde specifikke oplysninger om tilladelser, navnlig om antallet af ansøgninger, der er blevet modtaget efter produkt, den udstedende medlemsstat og de bestemmelsessteder, der berøres af disse ansøgninger, samt om de afgørelser, der er truffet om disse ansøgninger.
Oplysningerne i den årlige beretning fremlægges i overensstemmelse med principperne i stk. 3.
Kommissionen og Rådet stiller retningslinjer til rådighed om metoden til indsamling og behandling af data til udarbejdelsen af den årlige beretning, herunder fastlæggelse af produkttyperne og tilgængeligheden af håndhævelsesdata.
3.   Medlemsstaterne giver Kommissionen alle relevante oplysninger med henblik på udarbejdelsen af beretningen under behørig hensyntagen til de retlige krav vedrørende beskyttelse af personoplysninger, kommercielt følsomme oplysninger eller beskyttede forsvarsmæssige, udenrigspolitiske eller nationale sikkerhedsoplysninger. Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EF) nr. 223/2009 
(
15
)
 om europæiske statistikker finder anvendelse på oplysninger, der udveksles eller offentliggøres i henhold til denne artikel.
4.   Kommissionen skal mellem den 10. september 2026 og den 10. september 2028 foretage en evaluering af denne forordning og aflægge beretning om de vigtigste resultater til Europa-Parlamentet, Rådet og Det Europæiske Økonomiske og Sociale Udvalg. Senest den 10. september 2024 skal Kommissionen foretage en evaluering af artikel 5 og aflægge beretning om de vigtigste resultater til Europa-Parlamentet, Rådet og Det Europæiske Økonomiske og Sociale Udvalg.
KAPITEL VIII
KONTROLFORANSTALTNINGER
Artikel 27
1.   Eksportører af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse skal føre detaljerede registre eller optegnelser vedrørende deres eksport i overensstemmelse med gældende national ret eller praksis i de pågældende medlemsstater. De pågældende registre eller optegnelser skal navnlig indeholde handelsdokumenter såsom fakturaer, ladningsmanifester og andre transport- og forsendelsesdokumenter, der indeholder tilstrækkelige oplysninger til at gøre det muligt at identificere følgende:
a)
beskrivelsen af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse
b)
mængden af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse
c)
eksportørens og modtagerens navn og adresse
d)
den endelige anvendelse samt slutbrugeren af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse, når disse forhold kendes.
2.   Mæglere og leverandører af teknisk bistand skal føre registre eller optegnelser vedrørende mæglervirksomhed eller teknisk bistand for på forlangende at kunne gøre rede for beskrivelsen af de produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der var genstand for mæglervirksomhed eller teknisk bistand, den periode, hvor produkterne var genstand for sådanne tjenester, deres bestemmelsessted og de lande, der var genstand for sådan virksomhed, i overensstemmelse med gældende national ret eller praksis i de pågældende medlemsstater.
3.   De i stk. 1 og 2 omhandlede registre eller optegnelser samt dokumenter skal opbevares i en periode på mindst fem år fra afslutningen af det kalenderår, hvor eksporten eller mæglervirksomheden eller den tekniske bistand fandt sted. De skal, på forlangende, forevises den kompetente myndighed.
4.   Dokumenter og optegnelser vedrørende overførsler inden for Unionen af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er opført på listen i bilag I, skal opbevares i mindst tre år regnet fra udgangen af det kalenderår, hvor en overførsel fandt sted, og skal forevises på forlangende af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, som disse produkter er overført fra.
Artikel 28
For at sikre, at denne forordning anvendes korrekt, træffer medlemsstaterne alle nødvendige foranstaltninger til at gøre det muligt for deres kompetente myndigheder at:
a)
indsamle oplysninger om alle ordrer eller transaktioner vedrørende produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
b)
fastslå, om kontrolforanstaltningerne vedrørende eksport anvendes korrekt, hvilket bl.a. kan indebære adgang til forretningssteder, der anvendes af personer, der er involveret i en eksporttransaktion, eller mæglere, der er involveret i mæglervirksomhed under de omstændigheder, der er redegjort for i artikel 6, eller leverandører af teknisk bistand under de omstændigheder, der er redegjort for i artikel 8.
KAPITEL IX
SAMARBEJDE MED TREDJELANDE
Artikel 29
1.   Kommissionen og medlemsstaterne skal, når det er hensigtsmæssigt, opretholde dialoger med tredjelande med henblik på at fremme global konvergens i kontrollerne.
Dialogerne kan støtte et regelmæssigt og gensidigt samarbejde med tredjelande, herunder udveksling af oplysninger og bedste praksis samt kapacitetsopbygning og opsøgende arbejde over for tredjelande. Dialogerne kan også tilskynde tredjelande til at tilslutte sig robuste eksportkontroller, der er blevet udviklet af multilaterale eksportkontrolordninger som model for den bedste internationale praksis.
2.   Med forbehold af bestemmelserne om aftaler om gensidig administrativ bistand eller protokoller om toldspørgsmål, som Unionen har indgået med tredjelande, kan Rådet bemyndige Kommissionen til at føre forhandlinger med tredjelande om aftaler om gensidig anerkendelse af kontrol med eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som er omfattet af denne forordning.
Disse forhandlinger føres efter procedurerne i artikel 207, stk. 3, i TEUF og i traktaten om oprettelse af Det Europæiske Atomenergifællesskab alt efter, hvad der er relevant.
KAPITEL X
AFSLUTTENDE BESTEMMELSER
Artikel 30
Bestemmelserne i denne forordning finder anvendelse, uden at det berører Kommissionens delegerede afgørelse af 15. september 2015 om supplerende regler til afgørelse nr. 1104/2011/EU.
Artikel 31
Forordning (EF) nr. 428/2009 ophæves.
For så vidt angår ansøgninger om tilladelser, der er indgivet før den 9. september 2021, gælder de relevante bestemmelser i forordning (EF) nr. 428/2009 dog fortsat.
Henvisninger til den ophævede forordning gælder som henvisninger til denne forordning og læses efter sammenligningstabellen i bilag VI.
Artikel 32
Denne forordning træder i kraft på nittendedagen efter offentliggørelsen i 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
Denne forordning er bindende i alle enkeltheder og gælder umiddelbart i hver medlemsstat.
Udfærdiget i Bruxelles, den 20. maj 2021.
På Europa-Parlamentets vegne
D. M. SASSOLI
Formand
På Rådets vegne
A. P. ZACARIAS
Formand
(
1
)
  Europa-Parlamentets holdning af 25.3.2021 (endnu ikke offentliggjort i EUT) og Rådets afgørelse af 10.5.2021.
(
2
)
  Rådets forordning (EF) nr. 428/2009 af 5. maj 2009 om en fællesskabsordning for kontrol med udførsel, overførsel, mæglervirksomhed og transit i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse (
EUT L 134 af 29.5.2009, s. 1
).
(
3
)
  Rådets fælles holdning 2008/944/FUSP af 8. december 2008 om fælles regler for kontrol med eksport af militærteknologi og -udstyr (
EUT L 335 af 13.12.2008, s. 99
).
(
4
)
  Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) nr. 952/2013 af 9. oktober 2013 om EU-toldkodeksen (
EUT L 269 af 10.10.2013, s. 1
).
(
5
)
  
            
EUT L 123 af 12.5.2016, s. 1
.
(
6
)
  Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) 2015/479 af 11. marts 2015 om fælles ordninger for udførsel (
EUT L 83 af 27.3.2015, s. 34
).
(
7
)
  Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) 2016/679 af 27. april 2016 om beskyttelse af fysiske personer i forbindelse med behandling af personoplysninger og om fri udveksling af sådanne oplysninger og om ophævelse af direktiv 95/46/EF (
EUT L 119 af 4.5.2016, s. 1
).
(
8
)
  Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) 2018/1725 af 23. oktober 2018 om beskyttelse af fysiske personer i forbindelse med behandling af personoplysninger i Unionens institutioner, organer, kontorer og agenturer og om fri udveksling af sådanne oplysninger og om ophævelse af forordning (EF) nr. 45/2001 og afgørelse nr. 1247/2002/EF (
EUT L 295 af 21.11.2018, s. 39
)
(
9
)
  Kommissionens afgørelse (EU, Euratom) 2015/443 af 13. marts 2015 om sikkerhedsbeskyttelse i Kommissionen (
EUT L 72 af 17.3.2015, s. 41
).
(
10
)
  Kommissionens afgørelse (EU, Euratom) 2015/444 af 13. marts 2015 om reglerne for sikkerhedsbeskyttelse af EU's klassificerede informationer (
EUT L 72 af 17.3.2015, s. 53
).
(
11
)
  
            
EUT C 202 af 8.7.2011, s. 13
.
(
12
)
  Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets afgørelse nr. 1104/2011/EU af 25. oktober 2011 om reglerne for adgang til den statsregulerede tjeneste, der leveres af det globale satellitbaserede navigationssystem etableret under Galileo-programmet (
EUT L 287 af 4.11.2011, s. 1
).
(
13
)
  Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2015/2446 af 28. juli 2015 til supplering af Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) nr. 952/2013 med nærmere regler angående visse bestemmelser i EU-toldkodeksen (
EUT L 343 af 29.12.2015, s. 1
).
(
14
)
  Rådets Forordning (EF) nr. 515/97 af 13. marts 1997 om gensidig bistand mellem medlemsstaternes administrative myndigheder og om samarbejde mellem disse og Kommissionen med henblik på at sikre den rette anvendelse af told- og landbrugsbestemmelserne (
EFT L 82 af 22.3.1997, s. 1
).
(
15
)
  Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EF) nr. 223/2009 af 11. marts 2009 om europæiske statistikker og om ophævelse af Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EF, Euratom) nr. 1101/2008 om fremsendelse af fortrolige statistiske oplysninger til De Europæiske Fællesskabers Statistiske Kontor, Rådets forordning (EF) nr. 322/97 om EF-statistikker og Rådets afgørelse 89/382/EØF, Euratom om nedsættelse af et udvalg for De Europæiske Fællesskabers statistiske program (
EUT L 87 af 31.3.2009, s. 164
).
BILAG I
LISTE OVER PRODUKTER MED DOBBELT ANVENDELSE SOM OMHANDLET I DENNE FORORDNINGS ARTIKEL 3
Listen over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse i dette bilag udgør den tekniske gennemførelse af internationale aftaler om kontrol med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, herunder Australiengruppen 
(
1
)
, missilteknologi-kontrolregimet 
(
2
)
, Gruppen af Leverandører af Nukleart Materiale 
(
3
)
, Wassenaararrangementet 
(
4
)
 og konventionen om forbud mod kemiske våben 
(
5
)
.
INDHOLDSFORTEGNELSE
Del I –
Generelle noter, akronymer og forkortelser
Del II - Kategori 0
Nukleare materialer og faciliteter samt nukleart udstyr
Del III - Kategori 1
Særlige materialer og tilhørende udstyr
Del IV - Kategori 2
Materialebehandling
Del V - Kategori 3
Elektronik
Del VI - Kategori 4
Computere
Del VII - Kategori 5
Telekommunikation og "informationssikkerhed"
Del VIII - Kategori 6
Sensorer og lasere
Del IX - Kategori 7
Styring af fly og skibe
Del X - Kategori 8
Skibsteknologi
Del XI - Kategori 9
Rumfart og fremdrift
DEL I –
Generelle noter, akronymer og forkortelser
GENERELLE NOTER TIL BILAG I
1.
Med hensyn til produkter, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til militært brug, henvises der til de relevante lister over kontrol med produkter til sådanne formål, der føres af de enkelte EU-medlemsstater. I dette bilag henvises der til disse lister med følgende ordlyd: "JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL".
2.
Nærværende kontrolforanstaltninger gælder også ved eksport af et ikkekontrolleret produkt (herunder samlede anlæg), der indeholder en eller flere kontrollerede komponenter, hvis den kontrollerede komponent/de kontrollerede komponenter er hovedbestanddelen af produktet og let kan fjernes eller bruges til andre formål.
N.B.
Ved vurderingen af, om den kontrollerede komponent/de kontrollerede komponenter skal betragtes som hovedbestanddel, er det nødvendigt at afveje faktorer såsom kvantitet, værdi og teknologisk knowhow samt andre særlige omstændigheder, der kan betyde, at den kontrollerede komponent/de kontrollerede komponenter må betragtes som hovedbestanddel af produktet.
3.
Et produkt, der er opført på listen i dette bilag, omfatter dette produkt enten som nyt eller i brugt tilstand.
4.
I nogle tilfælde opføres kemiske stoffer ved navn og CAS-nummer. Listen omfatter kemiske stoffer med samme konstitutionsformel (herunder hydrater) uanset navn eller CAS-nummer. CAS-numrene anføres for at gøre det lettere at identificere et bestemt kemisk stof eller en bestemt blanding uanset nomenklatur. CAS-numrene kan ikke anvendes som de eneste identifikatorer, fordi nogle former af de opførte kemiske stoffer har forskellige CAS-numre, og blandinger, der indeholder et kemisk stof, der er opført på listen, også kan have forskellige CAS-numre.
NOTE VEDRØRENDE NUKLEAR TEKNOLOGI (NTN)
(Læses i forbindelse med afsnit E i kategori 0).
"Teknologi", der er direkte forbundet med produkter, der kontrolleres i kategori 0, kontrolleres efter bestemmelserne i kategori 0.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af et produkt, der er pålagt eksportkontrol, forbliver under eksportkontrol, også når den kan anvendes på et produkt, der ikke er pålagt eksportkontrol.
Tilladelse til eksport af ethvert produkt på listen tillader samtidig eksport til samme slutbruger af den "teknologi", der minimalt kræves til installation, drift, vedligeholdelse og reparation af produktet.
Kontrollen anvendes ikke på "teknologi" til "fri, offentlig anvendelse" eller til "videnskabelig grundforskning".
GENEREL TEKNOLOGINOTE (GTN)
(Læses i forbindelse med afsnit E i kategori 1-9).
Den eksport af "teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af varer, der er pålagt eksportkontrol i kategori 1-9, kontrolleres i overensstemmelse med bestemmelserne i kategori 1-9.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af et produkt, der er pålagt eksportkontrol, forbliver under eksportkontrol, også når den kan anvendes på et produkt, der ikke er pålagt eksportkontrol.
Kontrollen anvendes ikke på den "teknologi", der minimalt kræves til installation, drift, vedligeholdelse (eftersyn) og reparation af de produkter, der ikke er pålagt eksportkontrol, eller hvortil der tidligere er udstedt tilladelse.
Note:
"Teknologi", der er specificeret i 1E002.e., 1E002.f., 8E002.a. og 8E002.b., er ikke fritaget.
Kontrollen anvendes ikke på "teknologi" til "fri offentlig anvendelse" eller til "videnskabelig grundforskning" eller på de oplysninger, der som minimum kræves til patentansøgninger.
NUKLEAR SOFTWARENOTE (NSN)
(Bestemmelserne i denne note tilsidesætter al kontrol i afsnit D i kategori 0).
Afsnit D i kategori 0 i denne liste omfatter ikke "software", der er den minimalt nødvendige "objektkode", der kræves til installation, drift, vedligeholdelse (eftersyn) eller reparation af de produkter, hvortil der er udstedt eksporttilladelse.
Tilladelse til eksport tillader samtidig eksport til samme slutbruger af den minimalt nødvendige "objektkode", der kræves til installation, drift, vedligeholdelse (eftersyn) eller reparation af de(t) pågældende produkt(er).
Note:
Den nukleare softwarenote fritager ikke "software", der er specificeret i kategori 5, del 2 ("Informationssikkerhed").
GENEREL SOFTWARENOTE (GSN)
(Bestemmelserne i denne note tilsidesætter al kontrol i afsnit D i kategori 1-9).
Kategori 1-9 omfatter ikke "software", som opfylder et af følgende:
a.
Er almindeligt tilgængelig for offentligheden, idet den:
1.
Sælges fra lager i detailhandelen uden begrænsninger ved:
a.
Salg over disken
b.
Postordresalg
c.
Elektronisk salg eller
d.
Telefonsalg og
2.
Er udviklet til installation af brugeren uden yderligere væsentlig støtte fra leverandøren
Note:
Litra a. i den generelle softwarenote fritager ikke "software", der er specificeret i kategori 5, del 2 ("Informationssikkerhed")
b.
Er til "fri, offentlig anvendelse", eller
c.
Den minimalt nødvendige "objektkode", der kræves til installation, drift, vedligeholdelse (eftersyn) eller reparation af de produkter, hvortil der er udstedt eksporttilladelse.
Note:
Litra c. i den generelle softwarenote fritager ikke "software", der er specificeret i kategori 5, del 2 ("Informationssikkerhed")
GENEREL "INFORMATIONSSIKKERHED"SNOTE (GISN)
"Informationssikkerheds"-produkter eller -funktioner bør vurderes efter bestemmelserne i kategori 5, del 2, selv om der er tale om komponenter, "software" eller funktioner, der indgår i andre produkter.
REDAKTIONEL PRAKSIS I 
DEN EUROPÆISKE UNIONS TIDENDE
I overensstemmelse med reglerne i Vejledningen i Udformning af EU-publikationer for tekster offentliggjort på engelsk i 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
:
—
anvendes et komma for at adskille det hele tal fra decimalerne
—
anføres hele tal i serier på tre, idet hver serie adskilles med et lille mellemrum.
Teksten i dette bilag følger ovenstående praksis.
AKRONYMER OG FORKORTELSER, DER ER ANVENDT I DETTE BILAG
Vedrørende akronymer og forkortelser, der anvendes som definerede udtryk, se 'Definitioner af udtryk, der anvendes i dette bilag'.
AKRONYMER OG FORKORTELSER
ABEC
Annular Bearing Engineers Committee
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ADC
analog-til-digital konverter
AGMA
American Gear Manufacturers' Association
AHRS
attitude and heading reference systems
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
ALE
atomlagsepitaksi
ALU
aritmetisk logikenhed
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
APP
justeret spidsydeevne
APU
hjælpemotor
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
ATC
flyvekontrol
BJT
bipolær junction transistor
BPP
beam parameter product
BSC
base station controller
CAD
computer-aided-design (computerstøttet konstruktion)
CAS
Chemical Abstracts Service
CCD
ladningskoblet enhed
CDU
kontrol- og visningsenhed
CEP
circular error probable
CMM
koordinatmålingsmaskine
CMOS
supplerende MOS-anordning
CNTD
styret nuklear, termisk nedbrydning
CPLD
kompleks programmerbar logisk anordning
CPU
CPU (centralenhed)
CVD
kemisk dampudfældning
CW
kemisk krigsførelse
CW (for lasere)
continuous wave
DAC
digital-til-analog konverter
DANL
middelstøjniveau
DBRN
databaseret referencenavigationssystem
DDS
direkte digital synthesizer
DMA
dynamisk mekanisk analyse
DME
distance measuring equipment (afstandsmålingsradar)
DMOSFET
diffunderede metaloxidfelteffekttransistor
DS
retningsbestemt størkning
EB
eksplosiv bro
EB-PVD
electron beam physical vapour deposition (fysisk dampudfældning med elektronstråle)
EBW
tråd til eksplosive broer
ECM
electro-chemical machining (elektrokemisk forarbejdning)
EDM
electrical discharge machines (elektriske udladnings-maskiner)
EFI
tænder med eksplosiv folie
EIRP
effektiv isotropisk udstrålet effekt
EMP
elektromagnetisk impuls
ENOB
effektivt antal bits
ERF
elektroreologisk finbearbejdning
ERP
effektiv udstrålet effekt
ESD
elektrostatisk udladning
ETO
slukbar emitterthyristor
ETT
elektrisk styret thyristor
EU
Den Europæiske Union
EUV
ekstremt ultraviolet
FADEC
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FFT
Fast Fourier Transform (Fast Fourier-transformation)
FPGA
gate arrays, der er programmerbare på stedet
FPIC
kontakter, der er programmerbare på stedet
FPLA
logiske arrays, der er programmerbare på stedet
FPO
operation med flydende komma
FWHM
fuld halvværdibredde
GLONASS
global navigation satellite system
GNSS
global navigation satellite system
GPS
global positioning system (GPS-lokaliseringssystem)
GSM
globalt system for mobilkommunikation
GTO
gate turn-off thyristor
HBT
hetero-bipolære transistorer
HDMI
High-Definition Multimedia Interface
HEMT
high electron mobility transistor (transistor med høj elektronmobilitet)
ICAO
Organisationen for International Civil Luftfart (International Civil Aviation Organization)
IEC
International Electro-technical Commission (Den Internationale Elektrotekniske Kommission)
IED
improviseret eksplosiv anordning
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IFOV
instantanous-field-of-view
IGBT
isoleret gate bipolære transistor
IGCT
integreret brokommuteret thyristor
IHO
Den Internationale Hydrografiske Organisation
ILS
instrument landing system (instrumentlandingssystem)
IMU
inertimåleenhed
INS
inertinavigationssystem
IP
internetprotokol
IRS
inertireferencesystem
IRU
inertireferenceenhed
ISA
international standard atmosphere (international standardatmosfære)
ISAR
inverse synthetic aperture radar (radarmode med invers syntetisk blænde)
ISO
International Organization for Standardization (Den internationale Standardiseringsorganisation)
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
JT
Joule-Thomson
LIDAR
light detection og ranging
LIDT
tærskel for laserinduceret skade
LOA
længde overalt
LRU
line replaceable unit
LTT
lysstyret thyristor
MLS
mikrobølgelandingssystemer
MMIC
monolitisk integreret mikrobølgekredsløb
MOCVD
metal organic chemical vapour deposition (metal-organisk kemisk dampudfældning)
MOSFET
metaloxidfelteffekttransistor
MPM
mikrobølgeeffektmodul
MRF
magnetreologisk finbearbejdning
MRF
mindste detaljeopløsning
MRI
magnetic resonance imaging (magnetisk resonansbilled-dannelse)
MTBF
mean-time-between-failures
MTTF
mean-time-to-failure
NA
blændetal
NDT
non-destructive test (ikkedestruktiv prøvning)
NEQ
netto eksplosiv mængde
NIJ
National Institute of Justice
OAM
drift, administration eller vedligeholdelse
OSI
sammenkobling af åbne systemer
PAI
polyamidimider
PAR
precision approach radar (præcisionsindflyvningsradar) PCL
PCL
passiv kohærent stedbestemmelse
PDK
procesdesignsæt
PIN
personidentifikationsnummer
PMR
privat mobilradio
PVD
fysisk dampudfældning
ppm
parts per million (dele pr. million)
QAM
quadrature-amplitude-modulation (kvadraturamplitudemodulering)
QE
kvanteefficiens
RAP
reaktive atomplasmaer
RF
Radiofrekvens
rms
kvadratisk middelværdi (rms)
RNC
Radio Network Controller
RNSS
regionalt satellitnavigationssystem
ROIC
integreret udlæsningskredsløb
S-FIL
litografisk step-and-flash-prægning
SAR
synthetic aperture radar (radarmode med syntetisk blænde)
SAS
sonar med syntetisk blænde
SC
enkeltkrystal
SCR
styrede ensrettere af silicium
SFDR
dynamikområde uden falske signaler
SHPL
superhøjeffektlaser
SLAR
sidelooking airborne radar ("sidelooking airborne"-radarmode)
SOI
silicon-on-insulator
SQUID
Superconducting Quantum Interference Device (superledende kvante-interferensmaskine)
SRA
shop replaceable assembly
SRAM
statisk random-access memory
SSB
single sideband (enkelt sidebånd)
SSR
secondary surveillance radar (sekundær overvågningsradar)
SSS
sidescansonar
TIR
total indicated reading (totalt indikatorudslag)
TVR
transmitting voltage response
u
atommasseenhed
UPR
envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed
UV
ultraviolet
UTS
trækbrudspænding
VJFET
lodret junction felteffekttransistor
VOR
very high frequency omni-directional range (VHF omnidirectional radio range)
WHO
Verdenssundhedsorganisationen
WLAN
Wireless Local Area Network
DEFINITIONER AF UDTRYK, DER ANVENDES I DETTE BILAG
DEL II –
Kategori 0
KATEGORI 0 - NUKLEARE MATERIALER, FACILITETER SAMT NUKLEART UDSTYR
0A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
0A001
"Atomreaktorer" og udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt som følger:
a.
"Atomreaktorer"
b.
Metalbeholdere eller større fabriksfremstillede dele hertil, herunder topdækslet til en reaktortrykbeholder, som er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til at indeholde kernen til en "atomreaktor"
c.
Håndteringsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til at anbringe eller fjerne brændsel i en "atomreaktor"
d.
Kontrolstænger, specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til styring af fissionsprocessen i en "atomreaktor", konstruktioner til understøtning og ophængning af disse, drivmekanismer og styrerør til kontrolstænger
e.
Trykrør, dvs. rør, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til at indeholde både brændselselementer og det primære kølemiddel i en "atomreaktor"
f.
Rør (eller rørsamlinger) af zirconium eller zirconiumlegeringer, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til at blive anvendt som brændselsindkapsling i en "atomreaktor", og i mængder på over 10 kg
N.B.
For trykrør af zirconium henvises til 0A001.e. og for kalandriarør henvises til 0A001.h.
g.
Kølepumper eller cirkulationspumper, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til cirkulation af det primære kølemiddel i "atomreaktorer"
h.
'Atomreaktorers interne dele', der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til brug i en "atomreaktor", inklusive støttesøjler til kernen, brændselskanaler, kalandriarør, termiske skjolde, baffler, kernegitterplader og diffuserplader
Teknisk note:
I 0A001.h er 'atomreaktorers interne dele' enhver større konstruktion i en reaktortank, som har en eller flere funktioner som f.eks. at bære kernen, opretholde brændselstilførslen, lede den primære kølemiddelstrøm, holde strålingsskjolde for reaktortanken og lede instrumenteringen inden i kernen.
i.
Varmevekslere som følger:
1.
Dampgeneratorer, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til brug i en "atomreaktors" primære eller mellemliggende kølekredsløb
2.
Andre varmevekslere, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til brug i en "atomreaktors" primære kølekredsløb
Note:
0A001.i. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på varmevekslere til reaktorens understøttende systemer, f.eks. nødkølesystem eller kølesystemer for eftervarme.
j.
Neutrondetektorer, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til at bestemme neutronfluxniveauer i en "atomreaktors" kerne
k.
'Eksterne termiske skjolde' specielt fremstillet eller forberedt på anvendelse i en "atomreaktor" med henblik på en reduktion af varmetab og beskyttelse af indeslutningsbeholderen.
Teknisk note:
I 0A001.k. er 'eksterne termiske skjolde' omfattende strukturer placeret over reaktortanken, som reducerer varmetab fra reaktoren og reducerer temperaturen i selve indeslutningsbeholderen.
0B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
0B001
Anlæg konstrueret til separation af isotoper af "naturligt uran", "depleteret uran" eller "specielle fissile materialer" og specielt konstrueret eller forberedt udstyr og komponenter hertil, som følger:
a.
Enheder specielt konstrueret til at udskille isotoper af "naturligt uran", "depleteret uran" eller "specielle fissile materialer" som følger:
1.
Anlæg til gascentrifugeseparation
2.
Anlæg til gasdiffusionsseparation
3.
Anlæg til aerodynamisk separation
4.
Anlæg til separation ved kemisk udveksling
5.
Anlæg til separation ved ionbytning
6.
Anlæg til isotopisk separation med atomdamp"laser"
7.
Anlæg til isotopisk separation med molekylær"laser"
8.
Plasmaudskilleranlæg
9.
Elektromagnetisk udskilleranlæg
b.
Gascentrifuger og samlinger og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til gascentrifugeseparationsproces som følger:
Teknisk note:
I 0B001.b. er 'materialer med højt styrke/densitetsforhold':
1.
Martensitisk ældende ståltyper med maksimal trækstyrke på mindst 1,95 MPa
2.
Aluminiumlegeringer med maksimal trækstyrke på mindst 0,46 MPa 
eller
3.
"Fiber- eller trådmaterialer" med "specifikt modul" på mere end 3,18 x 10
6
m og "specifik trækstyrke" på mere end 7,62 x 10
4
 m.
1.
Gascentrifuger
2.
Komplette rotorsamlinger
3.
Rotorrørcylindre med en tykkelse på højst 12 mm, diameter mellem 75 mm og 650 mm, fremstillet af 'materialer med højt styrke/densitetsforhold'
4.
Ringe eller bælge med en vægtykkelse på højst 3 mm og diameter mellem 75 mm og 650 mm og konstrueret til at give lokal støtte til et rotorrør eller til at sammenkoble et antal rotorrør, fremstillet af 'materialer med højt styrke/densitetsforhold'
5.
Baffler med diameter mellem 75 mm og 650 mm til montering inde i rotorrøret, fremstillet af 'materialer med højt styrke/densitetsforhold'
6.
Top- og bundkapsler med diameter mellem 75 mm og 650 mm konstruerede til at passe til rotorrørets ender, fremstillet af 'materialer med højt styrke/densitetsforhold'
7.
Magnetisk ophængte lejer som følger:
a.
Lejeenheder bestående af en ringmagnet ophængt i et hus fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale" og indeholdende et dæmpende medie, hvor magneten er koblet til et polstykke eller en anden magnet, der er monteret på rotorens øverste lejekapsel
b.
Aktive magnetiske lejer specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til anvendelse med gascentrifuger.
8.
Specielt fremstillede lejer omfattende en samling af tap og skål monteret på en dæmper
9.
Molekylarpumper bestående af cylindre med indvendige fræsede eller ekstruderede skruegange og indvendige fræsede lysninger
10.
Ringformede motorstatorer til flerfasede AC hysterese (eller reluktans) motorer til synkrondrift i vakuum med en frekvens på 600 Hz eller derover og en effekt fra 40 VA eller derover
11.
Centrifugehuse/indkapslinger for rotorsamlinger til gascentrifuger, bestående af en stiv cylinder med en vægtykkelse på højst 30 mm og præcisionsforarbejdede ender, som er parallelle med hinanden, og vinkelrette med cylinderens længdeakse med 0,05 grader eller derunder
12.
Gasudtagningsrør, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til udtagning af UF
6
-gas fra rotorrøret efter Pitotrørsprincippet, som kan forbindes med det centrale gasudtagningssystem
13.
Frekvensomformere (konvertere eller invertere) specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til at føde motorstatorer til gascentrifugeberigning, med alle følgende egenskaber, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
a.
En flerfaset frekvensudgang på 600 Hz eller derover 
og
b.
Høj stabilitet (med frekvensstyring bedre end 0,2 %)
14.
Stopventiler og reguleringsventiler som følger:
a.
Stopventiler specielt fremstillet eller forberedt til at behandle tilføring, produkt eller rest fra UF
6
-gasstrømme fra en individuel gascentrifuge
b.
Bælgventiler, stopventiler eller reguleringsventiler fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale" med en indvendig diameter på 10-160 mm, specielt fremstillet eller forberedt til anvendelse i hoved- eller hjælpesystemer i gascentrifugeanlæg
c.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til gasdiffusionsseparationsproces som følger:
1.
Gasdiffusionsbarrierer fremstillet af porøse, metalliske, polymere eller keramiske "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandige materialer", med en porestørrelse på 10-100 nm, en tykkelse på højst 5 mm og, ved rørformede typer, en diameter på 25 mm eller mindre
2.
Gasdiffusionshuse fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF6-korrosionsbestandigt materiale"
3.
Kompressorer og gasblæsere med en sugekapacitet på 1 m
3
/min eller derover af UF
6
, med et afgangstryk på højst 500 kPa og med et trykforhold på 10:1 eller derunder, fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale"
4.
Akseltætninger til kompressorer og blæsere, som er specificeret i 0B001.c.3, og som er konstrueret til en indtagslækhastighed af buffergas på mindre end 1 000 cm
3
/min
5.
Varmevekslere fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandige materialer" og konstrueret til et utæthedstryk på mindre end 10 Pa i timen ved et trykdifferentiel på 100 kPa
6.
Bælgventiler, manuelle eller automatiserede, stop- eller reguleringsventiler, fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale"
d.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til aerodynamisk separationsproces som følger:
1.
Separationsdyser bestående af spalteformede, kurvede kanaler med en krumningsradius på mindre end 1 mm, der er UF
6
-korrosionsbestandige, med en æg i dysen, der separerer gas, der strømmer gennem dysen, i to strømme
2.
Cylindriske eller koniske rør (vortexrør), fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale", og med en eller flere tangentielle indløbsåbninger
3.
Kompressorer og gasblæsere fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale" samt akseltætninger hertil
4.
Varmevekslere fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale"
5.
Separationselementhuse, fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale" til at rumme vortexrør eller separationsdyser
6.
Bælgventiler, manuelle eller automatiserede, stop- eller kontrolventiler, fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale", med en diameter på mindst 40 mm
7.
Processystemer til adskillelse af UF
6
 fra bæregas (hydrogen eller helium) til et indhold på højst 1 ppm UF
6
, herunder
a.
Kryovarmevekslere og kryoseparatorer til drift ved temperaturer på 153 K (-120 °C) eller derunder
b.
Kryokøleenheder til drift ved temperaturer på 153 K (-120 °C) eller derunder
c.
Separationsdyser eller vortexrør til adskillelse af UF
6
 fra bæregas
d.
UF
6
-kuldefælder, der kan fryse UF
6
 ude
e.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til separationsproces ved kemisk udveksling som følger:
1.
Impulskolonner til hurtig væskevæskeudveksling med opholdstid på hvert trin på 30 sekunder eller derunder og modstandsdygtige mod koncentreret saltsyre (f.eks. fremstillet af eller beskyttet af et egnet plastmateriale såsom fluorerede hydrocarbonpolymer eller glas)
2.
Centrifugalkontaktorer for hurtig væskevæskeudveksling med opholdstid på hvert trin på 30 sekunder eller derunder og modstandsdygtige mod koncentreret saltsyre (f.eks. fremstillet af eller beskyttet af et egnet plastmateriale såsom fluorerede hydrocarbonpolymerer eller glas)
3.
Elektrokemiske reduktionsceller, der er bestandige mod koncentrerede saltsyreopløsninger, til at reducere uran fra en valenstilstand til en anden
4.
Fødeudstyr til elektrokemiske reduktionsceller, som skal fjerne U
+4
 fra den organiske fase, og hvis dele, der er i forbindelse med processtrømmen, er fremstillet af eller beskyttet af et egnet materiale (f.eks. glas, fluorocarbonpolymerer, polyphenylsulfat, polyethersulfon eller harpiksimprægneret grafit)
5.
Systemer til fremstilling af fødeblandinger til fremstilling af meget rene uranchloridopløsninger, bestående af opløsning, rensning ved opløsningsmiddelekstraktion og/eller ionbytning og elektrolyseceller til reduktion af U
+6
 eller U
+4
 til U
+3
6.
Uranoxidationssystemer til oxidation af U
+3
 til U
+4
f.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til ionbytningsseparationsproces som følger:
1.
Hurtigt reagerende ionbytningsharpikser, hindeformede eller porøse makroretikulerede harpikser, i hvilke de aktive kemiske byttegrupper er begrænset til en belægning på overfladen af en inaktiv porøs bærestruktur, og andre kompositstrukturer i en egnet form, herunder partikler eller fibre med en diameter på 0,2 mm eller derunder, som er modstandsdygtige mod koncentreret saltsyre, er konstrueret til at have en udvekslingshalveringstid på mindre end 10 sekunder og kan arbejde ved en temperatur i området 373 K (100 °C) til 473 K (200 °C)
2.
Ionbytterkolonner (cylindriske) med en diameter på over 1 000 mm, som er fremstillet af eller beskyttet af materialer, der er modstandsdygtige mod koncentreret saltsyre (f.eks. titan eller fluorocarbonplast), og som kan arbejde ved en temperatur i området 373 K (100 °C) til 473 K (200 °C) og ved et tryk på over 0,7 MPa
3.
Ionbyttertilbageløbssystemer (systemer til kemisk eller elektrokemisk oxidation eller reduktion) til regenerering af de kemiske reduktions- eller oxidationsmidler, der benyttes i ionbytterberigningskaskader
g.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til laserbaserede separationsprocesser ved isotopisk separation med atomdamplaser som følger:
1.
Uranfordampningssystemer konstrueret til at nå en afgiven effekt på 1 kW eller derover på målet til brug ved laserberigelse
2.
Systemer til håndtering af flydende eller dampformigt uranmetal specielt fremstillet eller forberedt til håndtering af smeltet uran, smeltede uranlegeringer eller uranmetaldamp til brug ved laserberigelse, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2A225.
3.
Samlesystemer til produkt og produktrest til indsamling af uranmetal i flydende eller fast form fremstillet af eller beskyttet af materialer, der er bestandige mod varme og korrosion fra uranmetaldamp eller væske, som f.eks. yttriumoxidbelagt grafit eller tantal
4.
Huse til separatormoduler (cylindriske eller rektangulære beholdere), som skal indeholde uranmetalfordampningsenheden, elektronkanonen og samlesystemer til produkt og produktrester
5.
"Lasere" eller "laser"systemer specielt fremstillet eller forberedt til separation af uranisotoper med spektrumfrekvensstabilisation med henblik på drift i længere tid ad gangen
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6A005 OG 6A205.
h.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til laserbaserede separationsprocesser ved isotopisk separation med molekylær laser som følger:
1.
Supersoniske ekspansionsdyser til nedkøling af blandinger af UF
6
 og bæregas til 150 K (-123 °C) eller derunder, fremstillet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale"
2.
Samlekomponenter eller -systemer til produkt og produktrest, som er specielt fremstillet eller forberedt til indsamling af uranmaterialer eller uranrestmaterialer efter belysning/bestråling med laserlys, fremstillet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandige materialer"
3.
Kompressorer fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandigt materiale" samt akseltætninger hertil
4.
Udstyr til fluorering af UF
5
 (fast stof) til UF
6
 (luftart)
5.
Processystemer til adskillelse af UF
6
 fra bæregas (f.eks. nitrogen, argon eller en anden gas), herunder:
a.
Kryovarmevekslere og kryoseparatorer til drift ved temperaturer på 153K (– 120 °C) eller derunder
b.
Kryokøleenheder til drift ved temperaturer på 153 K (– 120 °C) eller derunder
c.
UF
6
-kuldefælder, der kan fryse UF
6
 ude
6.
"Lasere" eller "laser"systemer specielt fremstillet eller forberedt til separation af uranisotoper med spektrumfrekvensstabilisation med henblik på drift i længere tid ad gangen
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6A005 OG 6A205.
i.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til plasmaseparationsproces som følger:
1.
Mikrobølgegeneratorer og -antenner til fremstilling eller accelerering af ioner, med en udgangsfrekvens på over 30 GHz og en middeludgangseffekt på mere end 50 kW
2.
Radiofrekvens ionexciteringsspoler for frekvenser på mere end 100 kHz, i stand til drift med en middeleffekt på mere end 40 kW
3.
Systemer til generering af uranplasma
4.
Ikke anvendt
5.
Samlesystemer til produkt og produktrest til uranmetal i fast form fremstillet af eller beskyttet af materialer, der er bestandige mod varme og korrosion fra urandamp, som f.eks. yttriumoxidbelagt grafit eller tantal
6.
Huse til separatormoduler (cylindriske), som skal indeholde uranplasmakilden, radiofrekvensspolen og samlesystemet til produkt og produktrester, og som er fremstillet af et passende umagnetisk materiale (f.eks. rustfrit stål)
j.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til elektromagnetisk separationsproces som følger:
1.
Ionkilder, enkelte eller flerdobbelte, som består af dampkilde, ionisator og stråleaccelerator, er fremstillet af egnede umagnetiske materialer (f.eks. grafit, rustfrit stål eller kobber) og kan levere en samlet ionstrålestrøm på 50 mA eller derover
2.
Ionkollektorplader til opsamling af stråler af beriget eller depleteret uran, bestående af to eller flere spalter og lommer og fremstillet af egnede umagnetiske materialer (f.eks. grafit eller rustfrit stål)
3.
Vakuumbeholdere til elektromagnetiske uranseparatorer, fremstillet af umagnetisk materiale (f.eks. rustfrit stål) og konstrueret til drift ved et tryk på 0,1 Pa eller derunder
4.
Magnetpolstykker med diameter over 2 m
5.
Højspændingsstrømforsyninger til ionkilder, som har alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
I stand til kontinuerlig drift
b.
Udgangsspænding 20 000 V eller derover
c.
Udgangsstrøm 1 A eller derover 
og
d.
Spændingsregulering bedre end 0,01 % over en periode på 8 timer
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 3A227.
6.
Magnetstrømforsyninger (højeffekt, jævnstrøm), som har alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
I stand til kontinuerlig drift ved en udgangsstrøm på 500 A eller derover ved en spænding på 100 V eller derover 
og
b.
Strøm- eller spændingsregulering bedre end 0,01 % over en periode på 8 timer.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 3A226.
0B002
Specielt konstruerede eller forberedte hjælpesystemer, udstyr og komponenter til de isotopseparationsanlæg, der er specificeret i 0B001, og som er fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandige materialer":
a.
Fødeautoklaver, ovne eller systemer til tilføring af UF
6
 til berigningsprocessen
b.
Desublimatorer eller kuldefælder til fjernelse af UF
6
 fra berigningsprocessen til senere overførsel efter opvarmning
c.
Produkt- og reststationer, der anvendes til overførsel af UF
6
 til beholdere
d.
Fortætnings- og størkningsstationer, der anvendes til fjernelse af UF
6
 fra berigningsprocessen ved komprimering, køling og omdannelse af UF
6
 til flydende eller fast form
e.
Rør- og samlesystemer, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til at føre UF
6
 i gasdiffusions-, gascentrifuge- eller aerodynamiske kaskader
f.
Vakuumsystemer og -pumper som følger:
1.
Vakuumgrenrør, vakuumrørsamlekasser eller vakuumpumper med en sugekapacitet på 5 m
3
/min eller derover
2.
Vakuumpumper, der er specielt konstrueret til brug i UF
6
-holdig atmosfære, der er fremstillet af eller beskyttet af "UF
6
-korrosionsbestandige materialer"
eller
3.
Vakuumsystemer bestående af vakuumgrenrør, vakuumsamlekasser og vakuumpumper og konstrueret til brug i UF6-holdig atmosfære
g.
UF
6
-massespektrometre eller ionkilder i stand til at tage online prøver af UF
6
-gasstrømme, og som har alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
I stand til at måle ioner på 320 atommasseenheder eller derover og med en opløsning bedre end 1 del på 320
2.
Ionkilder, der er fremstillet eller beskyttet af nikkel, nikkel-kobberlegeringer med et nikkelindhold på mindst 60 vægtprocent, eller nikkel-kromlegeringer
3.
Ioniseringskilder med elektronbeskydning 
og
4.
Kollektorsystem egnet til isotopanalyse.
0B003
Anlæg til omdannelse af uran og udstyr specielt konstrueret eller forberedt dertil som følger:
a.
Systemer til omdannelse af uranmalmkoncentrat til UO
3
b.
Systemer til omdannelse af UO
3
 til UF
6
c.
Systemer til omdannelse af UO
3
 til UO
2
d.
Systemer til omdannelse af UO
2
 til UF
4
e.
Systemer til omdannelse af UF
4
 til UF
6
f.
Systemer til omdannelse af UF
4
 til uranmetal
g.
Systemer til omdannelse af UF
6
 til UO
2
h.
Systemer til omdannelse af UF
6
 til UF
4
i.
Systemer til omdannelse af UO
2
 til UCl
4
.
0B004
Anlæg til produktion eller koncentration af tungt vand, deuterium og deuteriumforbindelser og specielt konstrueret eller forberedt udstyr og komponenter hertil som følger:
a.
Udstyr til produktion af tungt vand, deuterium eller deuteriumforbindelser som følger:
1.
Vand-hydrogensulfidbytningsanlæg
2.
Ammoniak-hydrogenbytningsanlæg
b.
Udstyr og komponenter som følger:
1.
Vand-hydrogensulfidbytningstårne med diametre på 1,5 m eller derover til drift ved tryk på 2 MPa eller derover
2.
Enkelttrins-, lavtryks- (dvs. 0,2 MPa) centrifugalblæsere eller -kompressorer til hydrogensulfidgascirkulation (dvs. gas med over 70 vægtprocent hydrogensulfid (H
2
S)) med en kapacitet på 56 m
3
/sekund eller derover ved sugetryk på 1,8 MPa eller derover og med pakninger udformet til våd H
2
S-anvendelse
3.
Ammoniak-hydrogenbytningstårne med en højde på 35 m eller derover og diametre på 1,5-2,5 m til drift ved tryk på over 15 MPa
4.
Interne dele til tårne, herunder trinkontaktorer og trinpumper, herunder neddykkede pumper, til tungtvandsproduktion ved hjælp af ammoniak-hydrogenbytningsprocessen
5.
Ammoniakcrackere med driftstryk på 3 MPa eller derover til tungtvandsproduktion ved hjælp af ammoniak-hydrogenbytningsprocessen
6.
Infrarøde absorptionsanalysatorer til onlineanalyse af hydrogen/deuteriumforholdet ved deuteriumkoncentrationer lig med eller højere end 90 vægtprocent
7.
Katalytiske brændere til omdannelse af beriget deuteriumgas til tungt vand ved hjælp af ammoniak-hydrogenbytningsprocessen
8.
Komplette tungtvandsforbedringssystemer eller søjler dertil til forbedring af tungt vand til reaktordeuteriumkoncentration
9.
Ammoniaksyntesekonvertere og ammoniaksynteseenheder, som er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til tungtvandsproduktion ved hjælp af ammoniak-hydrogenbytningsprocessen.
0B005
Anlæg specielt konstrueret til produktion af brændselselementer til "atomreaktorer" og specielt konstrueret eller forberedt udstyr hertil.
Teknisk note:
Specielt konstrueret eller forberedt udstyr til produktion af brændselselementer til "atomreaktorer" omfatter udstyr, som:
1.
Normalt kommer i direkte berøring med eller direkte behandler eller styrer produktstrømmen af kernematerialer
2.
Indelukker kernematerialet i dets indkapsling
3.
Kontrollerer, at indkapslingen og dens pakninger er intakte
4.
Kontrollerer den endelige behandling af det indkapslede brændsel eller
5.
Anvendes til samling af reaktorelementer.
0B006
Anlæg til oparbejdning af bestrålede brændselselementer fra "atomreaktorer" og specielt konstrueret eller forberedt udstyr og komponenter hertil.
Note:
0B006 omfatter:
a.
Anlæg til oparbejdning af bestrålede brændselselementer fra "atomreaktorer", herunder udstyr og komponenter, som normalt kommer i direkte berøring med og som direkte styrer det bestrålede brændsel og de vigtigste processtrømme af kernemateriale og spaltningsprodukter
b.
Maskiner og udstyr til fjernelse af indkapsling og sønderdeling af brændselselementer, dvs. fjernbetjent udstyr til at skære, hugge eller snitte bestrålede brændselsaggregater, bundter eller stænger til "atomreaktorer"
c.
Opløsningstanke eller tanke med mekaniske anordninger, der er specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til opløsning af bestrålet "atomreaktor" brændsel, som er i stand til at modstå varme, stærkt korroderende væsker, og som kan lades og vedligeholdes ved fjernbetjening
d.
Udstyr til udtrækning såsom impuls- eller fyldlegemekolonner, blande/afsætningsbeholdere og centrifugalkontraktorer, som er modstandsdygtige over for ætsning af salpetersyre og specielt konstrueret eller forberedt til brug i et anlæg til oparbejdning af bestrålet "naturligt uran", "depleteret uran" eller "specielle fissile materialer"
e.
Opbevarings- eller lagertanke, der er særligt konstruerede til at være kritikalitetssikre og modstandsdygtige over for ætsning af salpetersyre.
Teknisk note:
Opbevarings- eller lagertanke kan have følgende egenskaber:
1.
Vægge eller interne strukturer med en borækvivalent (der for alle elementer beregnes som defineret i noten til 0C004) på mindst 2 %
2.
Maksimal diameter på 175 mm for cylindriske tanke 
eller
3.
Maksimal bredde på 75 mm for flade eller ringformede tanke.
f.
Systemer til måling af neutroner specielt fremstillet eller forberedt til integration og anvendelse med automatiserede processtyringssystemer i et anlæg til oparbejdning af bestrålet "naturligt uran", "depleteret uran" eller "specielle fissile materialer".
0B007
Anlæg til omdannelse af plutonium og udstyr specielt konstrueret eller forberedt hertil som følger:
a.
Systemer til omdannelse af plutoniumnitrat til plutoniumoxid
b.
Systemer til produktion af metallisk plutonium.
0C   
Materialer
0C001
"Naturligt uran" eller "depleteret uran" eller thorium i form af metal, legering, kemisk forbindelse eller koncentrat og et hvilket som helst andet materiale, der indeholder et eller flere af de nævnte stoffer.
Note:
0C001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
Fire gram og derunder "naturligt uran" eller "depleteret uran", når de er indeholdt i sensorkomponenten i instrumenter
b.
"Depleteret uran" specielt fremstillet til følgende, civile, ikkenukleare formål:
1.
Afskærmning
2.
Emballage
3.
Ballast med en masse på ikke over 100 kg
4.
Kontravægte med en masse på ikke over 100 kg
c.
Legeringer indeholdende under 5 % thorium
d.
Keramiske produkter indeholdende thorium, som er fremstillet til ikkenukleare formål.
0C002
"Specielle, fissile materialer"
Note:
0C002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på fire "effektive gram" eller derunder, når de er indeholdt i sensorkomponenten i instrumenter.
0C003
Deuterium, tungt vand (deuteriumoxid), deuteriumforbindelser og blandinger og opløsninger indeholdende deuterium, i hvilke isotopforholdet mellem deuterium og hydrogen er højere end 1:5 000.
0C004
Grafit med en renhedsgrad på mindst 5 ppm "borækvivalent" og med en densitet, der er større end 1,50 g/cm
3
 til brug i en "atomreaktor", i mængder, der overskrider 1 kg.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C107
Note 1:
Med henblik på eksportkontrol afgør de kompetente myndigheder i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er etableret, om eksporteret grafit, der opfylder ovenstående specifikationer, er til brug i "atomreaktorer". 0C004 pålægger ikke eksportkontrol af grafit med en renhedsgrad på mindst 5 ppm borækvivalent og med en densitet, der er større end 1,50 g/cm
3
 til brug i en atomreaktor.
Note 2:
I 0C004 defineres 'borækvivalent' (BE) som summen af BE
z
 for urenheder (undtagen BE-
kulstof
, da kulstof ikke betragtes som en urenhed), herunder bor, hvis:
BE
Z
 (ppm) = CF x koncentrationen af elementet Z i ppm
og
 σ
B
 og
 σ
Z
 er de termiske neutronoptagelsestværsnit (i barn) for henholdsvis naturligt forekommende bor og element Z; og A
B
 og A
Z
 er atommasserne af henholdsvis naturligt forekommende bor og element Z.
0C005
Specielt forberedte forbindelser eller pulvere, der er modstandsdygtige over for UF
6
-korrosion (f.eks. nikkel eller legeringer med 60 vægtprocent nikkel eller derover, aluminiumoxid og fuldt fluorerede hydrocarbonpolymerer) til fremstilling af gasdiffusionsbarrierer, og med en renhed på mindst 99,9 vægtprocent og en kornstørrelse mindre end 10 μm målt efter ASTM B 330 standard, og en høj regelmæssighedsgrad af kornstørrelse.
0D   
Software
0D001
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i denne kategori.
0E   
Teknologi
0E001
"Teknologi" iflg. noten vedrørende nuklear teknologi (NTN), til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i denne kategori.
DEL II –
Kategori 1
KATEGORI 1 – SÆRLIGE MATERIALER OG TILHØRENDE UDSTYR
1A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
1A001
Komponenter fremstillet af fluorerede forbindelser som følger:
a.
Tætninger, pakninger, tætningsmidler eller brændstofblærer, specielt udviklet til brug i "fly" eller rumfart, og fremstillet af mere end 50 vægtprocent af nogen af de materialer, der er specificeret i 1C009.b eller 1C009.c
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Ikke anvendt.
1A002
"Kompositte" strukturer eller laminater som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1A202, 9A010 OG 9A110.
a.
Fremstillet af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
En organisk "matrix" og "fiber- og trådmaterialer", der er specificeret i 1C010.c eller 1C010.d eller
2.
Prepregs og preforms, der er specificeret i 1C010.e
b.
Fremstillet af en metal- eller carbon-"matrix", og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Carbon "fiber- og trådmaterialer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Specifikt modul" større end 10,15 x 10
6
 m 
og
b.
"Specifik trækstyrke" større end 17,7 x 10
4
 m 
eller
2.
Materialer, der er specificeret i 1C010.c.
Note 1:
1A002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "kompositte" strukturer eller laminater, der er fremstillet af kul "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" imprægneret med epoxyharpiks, til reparation af "civile fly"strukturer eller laminater, som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Et areal på højst 1 m
2
b.
En længde på højst 2,5 m 
og
c.
En bredde på mere end 15 mm.
Note 2:
1A002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på halvfabrikata, der er specielt beregnet til rent civile anvendelser som følger:
a.
Sportsartikler
b.
Automobilindustrien
c.
Værktøjsmaskinindustrien
d.
Medicinske anvendelser.
Note 3:
1A002b.1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på halvfabrikata, der indeholder sammenvævede tråde af højst to dimensioner, og som er specielt beregnet til følgende anvendelser:
a.
Ovne til varmebehandling af metaller med henblik på hærdning af metaller
b.
Udstyr til fremstilling af boules af silicium.
Note 4:
1A002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på færdigprodukter, der er specielt beregnet til en specifik anvendelse.
Note 5:
1A002.b.1. pålægger ikke eksportkontrol af mekanisk skårne, slebne eller klippede carbon-"fiber- eller trådmaterialer" med en længde på 25,0 mm eller mindre.
1A003
Produkter af ikke-"smeltelige", aromatiske polyimider i form af film, folie, tape eller bånd med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En tykkelse på mere end 0,254 mm 
eller
b.
Belagt eller lamineret med carbon, grafit, metaller eller magnetiske stoffer.
Note:
1A003 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter, når de er belagt eller lamineret med kobber og beregnet til produktion af elektroniske trykte kredsløbskort.
N.B.
Med hensyn til "smeltelige", aromatiske polyimider i alle former, jf. 1C008.a.3.
1A004
Beskyttelses- og detekteringsudstyr og komponenter hertil, der ikke er specielt beregnet til militær anvendelse, som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL, 2B351 OG 2B352.
a.
Helmasker, filterbeholdere og dekontamineringsudstyr hertil, der er udviklet eller modificeret til forsvar mod en eller flere af følgende, og specielt udviklede komponenter hertil:
Note:
1A004.a. omfatter Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPR – ventilerede åndedrætsværn), der er konstrueret eller modificeret til forsvar mod kampmidler og materialer som anført i 1A004.a.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 1A004.a.
1.
Betegnes helmasker også gasmasker
2.
Omfatter filterbeholdere også filterpatroner.
1.
"Biologiske agenser"
2.
'Radioaktive materialer'
3.
Kampmidler til kemisk krigsførelse (CW) 
eller
4.
"Kampmidler til oprørskontrol", herunder:
a.
α-Brombenzenacetonitril (brombenzylcyanid) (CA) (CAS 5798-79-8)
b.
[(2-Chlorphenyl)methylen]propandinitril, (o-Chlorbenzylidenmalononitril) (CS) (CAS 2698-41-1)
c.
2-Chlor-1-phenylethanon, phenylacylchlorid (ω-chloracetophenon) (CN) (CAS 532-274)
d.
Dibenz-(b,f)-1,4-oxazepin (CR) (CAS 257-07-8)
e.
10-Chlor-5,10-dihydrophenarsazin, (phenarsazinchlorid), (adamsit), (DM) (CAS 578-94-9)
f.
N-Nonanoylmorpholin, (MPA) (CAS 5299-64-9)
b.
Beskyttelsesdragter, -handsker og -sko, der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til forsvar mod en eller flere af følgende:
1.
"Biologiske agenser"
2.
"Radioaktive materialer"
eller
3.
Kampmidler til kemisk krigsførelse (CW)
c.
Detekteringssystemer, der specielt er udviklet eller modificeret til detektering eller identifikation af en eller flere af følgende, og specielt udviklede komponenter hertil:
1.
"Biologiske agenser"
2.
"Radioaktive materialer"
eller
3.
Kampmidler til kemisk krigsførelse (CW).
d.
Elektronisk udstyr, der er udviklet til automatisk detektering eller identifikation af tilstedeværelse af restmængder af "sprængstoffer", og som anvender 'trace detection'-teknikker (f.eks. akustisk overfladebølge, ionmobilitetsspektronomi, differential mobilitetsspektronomi, massespektrometri).
Teknisk note:
'Trace detection' defineres som evnen til at detektere mindre end 1 ppm damp eller 1 mg fast stof eller væske.
Note 1:
1A004.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, der specielt er udviklet til laboratoriebrug.
Note 2:
1A004.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på kontaktfrie sikkerhedsentréer.
Note:
1A004 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Dosimetre til personlig bestrålingsovervågning
b.
Udstyr til sundhed og sikkerhed på arbejdspladsen, der i udformning eller funktion er begrænset til at beskytte mod risici, der er specifikke for sikring af beboelseskvarterer eller ikkemilitære industrier, herunder
1.
miner
2.
stenbrud
3.
landbrug
4.
den farmaceutiske industri
5.
medicinalindustrien
6.
den veterinære sektor
7.
miljøsektoren
8.
affaldshåndtering
9.
fødevareindustrien.
Tekniske noter:
1.
1A004 omfatter også udstyr og komponenter, der er blevet identificeret, med held afprøvet efter nationale standarder, eller som på anden måde har vist sig effektive med henblik på detektering af eller forsvar imod 'radioaktive materialer', "biologiske agenser", kampmidler til kemisk krigsførelse, 'simulatorer' eller "kampmidler til oprørskontrol", selv hvis sådant udstyr eller sådanne komponenter anvendes i ikkemilitære industrier som f.eks. miner, stenbrud, landbrug, den farmaceutiske industri, medicinalindustrien, den veterinære sektor, miljøsektoren, affaldshåndtering eller fødevareindustrien.
2.
'Simulator' er et stof eller materiale, der anvendes i stedet for et (kemisk eller biologisk) toksin i forbindelse med uddannelse, forskning, afprøvning eller evaluering.
3.
I forbindelse med 1A004 forstås ved 'radioaktive materialer' materialer, der er udvalgt eller modificeret med henblik på at gøre dem mere effektive til at dræbe mennesker eller dyr, ødelægge udstyr eller skade afgrøder eller miljøet.
1A005
Armerede beskyttelsesdragter og komponenter hertil som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
a.
Lette armerede beskyttelsesdragter, der ikke er fremstillet efter militære standarder eller specifikationer eller efter, hvad der svarer hertil, og specielt udviklede komponenter hertil
b.
Tunge armerede beskyttelsesdragter, der giver ballistisk beskyttelse svarende til højst niveau IIIA (NIJ 0101,06, juli 2008) eller "tilsvarende standarder".
N.B.
Med hensyn til "fiber- og trådmaterialer", der benyttes til fremstilling af armerede beskyttelsesdragter, se 1C010.
Note 1:
1A005 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på armerede beskyttelsesdragter, når de medbringes af brugeren med henblik på dennes egen personlige beskyttelse.
Note 2
1A005 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på armerede beskyttelsesdragter, der er udviklet til at yde udelukkende frontal beskyttelse mod både sprængstykker og lufttryk fra ikkemilitære sprængstofanordninger.
Note 3
1A005 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på armerede beskyttelsesdragter, der udelukkende er udviklet til at beskytte mod knive, pile, nåle og slagvåben.
1A006
Følgende udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til bortskaffelse af improviserede eksplosive anordninger, og specielt udviklede komponenter og tilbehør hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
a.
Fjernbetjente køretøjer
b.
'Afbrydere'.
Teknisk note:
Med henblik på 1A006.b. gælder følgende: 'Afbrydere' er anordninger, der er specielt konstrueret til at hindre den eksplosive anordning i at eksplodere, idet der affyres et flydende, fast eller brudbart projektil.
Note:
1A006 gælder ikke for udstyr, når det ledsager operatøren.
1A007
Følgende udstyr og anordninger, der er specielt konstrueret til ad elektrisk vej at bringe sprængladninger og anordninger, der indeholder "energimaterialer", til sprængning:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL, 3A229 OG 3A232.
a.
Eksplosive detonatortændapparater, der er konstrueret til at drive detonatorer, der er specificeret i 1A007.b.
b.
Følgende elektrisk aktiverede detonatorer:
1.
Eksplosive broer (EB)
2.
Tråd til eksplosive broer (EBW)
3.
Tændere med slapper
4.
Tændere med eksplosiv folie (EFI).
Tekniske noter:
1.
Ordet initiator eller tænder bruges undertiden i stedet for ordet detonator.
2.
1A007.b. forstås således, at alle de pågældende detonatorer bruger en lille elektrisk leder (bro, brotråd eller folie), som fordamper eksplosivt, når der passerer en hurtig, højelektrisk strøm igennem den. I non-slapper-typer begynder den eksplosive leder en kemisk detonation i et berørende, høj-eksplosivt materiale som f.eks. PETN (pentaerythritoltetranitrat). I slapper-detonatorer driver den eksplosive fordampning af den elektriske leder en flyer eller slapper over en spalte, og slapperens anslag på et sprængstof indleder en kemisk detonation. I nogle udførelser drives slapperen af magnetisk kraft. Udtrykket eksplosiv folie-detonator kan betyde enten en EB eller en detonator af slapper-typen.
1A008
Følgende sprængladninger, anordninger og komponenter:
a.
'Retningsbestemte ladninger', som har alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Netto eksplosiv mængde (NEM) overstiger 90 g 
og
2.
Hylsterets ydre diameter er lig med eller større end 75 mm
b.
Lineære sprængskæreladninger, som har alle nedenstående egenskaber, samt særligt udformede komponenter hertil:
1.
sprængladningen overstiger 40 g/m 
og
2.
bredden er 10 mm eller mere
c.
Sprængsnore med en kernesprængladning, der overstiger 64 g/m
d.
Skæreanordninger ud over dem, der er omhandlet i 1A008.b., og redskaber til kløvning med en netto eksplosiv mængde (NEM), der overstiger 3,5 kg.
Teknisk note:
'Retningsbestemte ladninger' er sprængladninger, der er udformet med henblik på at målrette effekten af eksplosionen.
1A102
Resaturerede pyroliserede carboncarbonkomponenter, der er udviklet til løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, som er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, som er specificeret i 9A104.
1A202
Kompositte strukturer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1A002, i form af rør med begge af følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A010 OG 9A110.
a.
En indvendig diameter mellem 75 mm og 400 mm 
og
b.
Fremstillet af de "fiber- eller trådmaterialer", der er specificeret i 1C010.a eller b eller 1C210.a, eller af carbonprepregmaterialer, der er specificeret i 1C210.c.
1A225
Platiniserede katalysatorer, der er specielt udviklet eller forberedt til at fremme hydrogenisotopbytningsreaktionen mellem hydrogen og vand til udvinding af tritium fra tungt vand eller til produktion af tungt vand.
1A226
Specielle pakninger, der kan anvendes til adskillelse af tungt vand fra almindeligt vand, og som har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Fremstillet af phosphorbronzenet (kemisk behandlet for at forbedre vædbarhed) 
og
b.
Konstrueret til brug i vakuumdestillationstårne.
1A227
Strålingsbeskyttende vinduer af høj densitet (blyglas eller andet), der har samtlige følgende egenskaber, og specielt konstruerede rammer hertil:
a.
Et 'inaktivt område' målende mere end 0,09 m
2
b.
En tæthed på mere end 3 g/cm
3
og
c.
En tykkelse på mindst 100 mm.
Teknisk note:
I 1A227 forstås ved 'inaktivt område' det synsfelt i et vindue, der er udsat for den laveste stråling i designapplikationen.
1B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
1B001
Udstyr til fremstilling eller inspektion af "kompositte" strukturer eller laminater, som er specificeret i 1A002, eller "fiber- og trådmaterialer", som er specificeret i 1C010, som følger, og specielt udviklede komponenter og tilbehør hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1B101 OG 1B201.
a.
Filamentvindemaskiner, i hvilke bevægelserne til anbringelse, omlægning og vinding af fibre koordineres og programmeres i tre eller flere 'primære servoanbringelsesakser', specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af "kompositte" strukturer eller laminater, af "fiber- eller trådmaterialer"
b.
'Tapepålægningsmaskiner', i hvilke bevægelserne til anbringelse og pålægning af tape koordineres og programmeres i fem eller flere 'primære servoanbringelsesakser', specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af "kompositte" strukturer til flykroppe og 'missiler'.
Note:
I 1B001.b forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer.
Teknisk note:
'Tape-pålægningsmaskiner' i 1B001.b. er i stand til at pålægge et eller flere 'filamentbånd' begrænset til bredder på over 25,4 mm og under eller lig med 304,8 mm, og til at skære og genstarte produktionen af individuelle 'filamentbånd' under pålægningsprocessen.
c.
Multidirektionelle, multidimensionelle vævemaskiner eller sammenfletningsmaskiner, inklusive tilpasningsstykker og modificeringssæt, specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til vævning, sammenfletning eller sammensnoning af fibre til "kompositte" strukturer.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 1B001.c. omfatter sammenfletning også strikning.
d.
Udstyr, specielt konstrueret eller tilpasset til fremstilling af forstærkningsfibre som følger:
1.
Udstyr til omdannelse af polymeriske fibre (som f.eks. polyacrylonitril, rayon, beg eller polycarbosilan) til carbonfibre eller siliciumcarbidfibre, inklusive specielt udstyr til at strække fiberen under opvarmning
2.
Udstyr til kemisk dampudfældning af grundstoffer eller forbindelser, på opvarmede, trådede substrater, til fremstilling af siliciumcarbidfibre
3.
Udstyr til vådspinding af varmebestandige, keramiske materialer (som. f.eks. aluminiumoxid)
4.
Udstyr til omdannelse af aluminium, der indeholder prækursorfibre, til aluminiumoxidfibre ved varmebehandling
e.
Udstyr til fremstilling af prepregs, der er specificeret i 1C010.e, ved varmsmeltningsmetoden
f.
Ikkedestruktivt inspektionsudstyr, specielt udviklet til "kompositte" materialer, som følger:
1.
Røntgentomografisystemer til tredimensionel defektkontrol
2.
Numerisk styrede ultralydstestmaskiner, i hvilke bevægelserne for positionering af sendere eller modtagere simultant koordineres og programmeres i mindst fire akser for at følge de tredimensionelle konturer af den komponent, der kontrolleres
g.
'Blårpålægningsmaskiner', i hvilke bevægelserne til anbringelse og pålægning af blår koordineres eller programmeres i to eller flere 'primære servoanbringelsesakser', specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af "kompositte" strukturer til flyskrog og 'missiler'.
Teknisk note:
'Blårpålægningsmaskiner' i 1B001.b. er i stand til at pålægge et eller flere 'filamentbånd' begrænset til bredder på højst 25,4 mm, og til at skære og genstarte produktionen af individuelle 'filamentbånd' under pålægningsprocessen.
Tekniske noter:
1.
For så vidt angår 1B001 lægges der eksportkontrol på 'primære servoanbringelsesakser' ved hjælp af et computerprogram terminalanordningens (dvs. hovedets) position i rummet i forhold til arbejdsemnet og sørger for, at den har den korrekte drejning og retning med henblik på at opnå den ønskede proces.
2.
I 1B001 forstås ved et 'filamentbånd' en endeløs bredde af helt eller delvis harpiksimprægneret tape, blår eller fiber. Helt eller delvis harpiksimprægnerede 'filamentbånd' omfatter dem, der er belagt med pulver, som klæber ved opvarmning.
1B002
Udstyr, der er beregnet til at fremstille metallegeringspulver eller partikelformet materiale, og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
specielt udviklet til at undgå kontaminering 
og
b.
specielt udviklet til brug i en af de processer, der er specificeret i 1C002.c.2.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1B102.
1B003
Værktøjer, matricer, forme eller tilbehør til "superplastisk formning" eller "diffusionsbonding" af titan, aluminium eller deres legeringer, specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Konstruktioner til flyskrog eller rumfart
b.
Motorer til "fly" eller rumfart 
eller
c.
Specielt konstruerede komponenter til de konstruktioner, der er omhandlet i 1B003.a, eller de motorer, der er omhandlet i 1B003.b.
1B101
Udstyr ud over det, der er specificeret i 1B001, til "produktion" af konstruktionskompositter som følger; og specielt konstruerede komponenter og tilbehør hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1B201.
Note:
Eksempler på komponenter og tilbehør til maskiner, som er specificeret i 1B101 er: Forme, dorne, matricer, opspændinger og værktøj til præformpresning, hærdning, støbning, sintring eller bonding af kompositstrukturer, laminater og produkter heraf.
a.
Filamentvindemaskiner eller fiberviklemaskiner, hvor bevægelserne til anbringelse, omlægning og vinding af fibre kan koordineres og programmeres i tre eller flere akser, specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af kompositstruktur eller laminater af "fiber- eller trådmaterialer", og koordinering og programstyring hertil
b.
Tapepålægningsmaskiner, hvor bevægelserne til anbringelse og lægning af tape og folie kan koordineres og programmeres i to eller flere akser, konstrueret til fremstilling af kompositte flyskrog og "missil" konstruktioner
c.
Udstyr konstrueret eller modificeret til "produktion" af "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" som følger:
1.
Udstyr til omdannelse af polymere fibre (som for eksempel polyakrylonitril, rayon eller polycarbosilan), herunder specielle forholdsregler til strækning af fiberen under opvarmning
2.
Udstyr til dampudfældning af grundstoffer eller forbindelser på opvarmede trådsubstrater
3.
Udstyr til vådspinding af varmebestandige, keramiske materialer (som. f.eks. aluminiumoxid)
d.
Udstyr, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til speciel fiberoverfladebehandling eller fremstilling af de prepregs og preforms, der er specificeret i 9C110.
Note:
1B101.d. omfatter valser, strammeanordninger, belægningsudstyr, skæreudstyr og clicker dies.
1B102
Udstyr til "produktion" af metalpulver ud over det, der er specificeret i 1B002, og komponenter som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1B115.b.
a.
Udstyr til "produktion" af metalpulver, som kan anvendes til "produktion" i et kontrolleret miljø af sfærisk, sfæroidalt eller forstøvet materiale, der er specificeret i 1C011.a, 1C011.b, 1C111.a.1, 1C111.a.2. eller kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål
b.
Specielt konstruerede komponenter til udstyr til "produktion", som er specificeret i 1B002 eller 1B102.a.
Note:
1B102 omfatter:
a.
Plasmageneratorer (højfrekvent buejet), der kan anvendes til fremstilling af forstøvet eller sfærisk metalpulver med tilrettelæggelse af processen i et argon-vand-miljø
b.
Electroburstudstyr, der kan anvendes til fremstilling af forstøvet eller sfærisk metalpulver med tilrettelæggelse af processen i et argon-vand-miljø
c.
Udstyr, der kan anvendes til "produktion" af sfærisk aluminiumpulver ved forstøvning af smelt i et inaktivt medium (f.eks. nitrogen).
1B115
Følgende udstyr ud over det, der er specificeret i 1B002 eller 1B102, til produktion af drivstoffer eller bestanddele af drivstoffer og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
a.
"Produktionsudstyr" til "produktion", håndtering og godkendelsesafprøvning af flydende drivstoffer eller bestanddele af drivstoffer, der er specificeret i 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 eller kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål
b.
"Produktionsudstyr" til "produktion", håndtering, blanding, hærdning, støbning, presning, maskinbehandling, strengpresning eller godkendelsesafprøvning af faste drivstoffer eller bestanddele af drivstoffer, der er specificeret i 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 eller kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
Note:
1B115.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på batchblandere, kontinuerlige blandere, møller baseret på fluidenergi. For så vidt angår eksportkontrol på batchblandere, kontinuerlige blandere, møller baseret på fluidenergi, se 1B117, 1B118 og 1B119.
Note 1:
For så vidt angår udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af militære produkter, se kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
Note 2:
1B115 omfatter ikke kontrol med "produktion", håndtering og godkendelsesprøvning af borcarbid.
1B116
Specielt konstruerede dyser til fremstilling af pyrolytisk afledte materialer, der dannes på en form, dorn eller andet underlag fra prækursorgasser, som spaltes i temperaturområder fra 1 573 K (1 300 °C) til 3 173 K (2 900 °C) ved tryk på 130 Pa til 20 kPa.
1B117
Blandere, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber og har specielt udviklede komponenter hertil:
a.
Udformet eller modificeret til at blande under vakuum i området fra nul til 13,326 kPa
b.
Mulighed for temperaturkontrol i blandekammeret
c.
Et totalt rumfang på 110 l eller derover 
og
d.
Mindst en excentrisk monteret 'blande/ælteaksel'.
Note:
I 1B117.d. anvendes udtrykket 'blande/ælteaksel' ikke om deagglomeratorer eller knife-spindles.
1B118
Kontinuerlige blandere, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber og har specielt udviklede komponenter hertil:
a.
Udformet eller ombygget til at blande under vakuum i området fra nul til 13,326 kPa
b.
Mulighed for temperaturkontrol i blandekammeret
c.
Et eller flere af følgende:
1.
To eller flere blande/ælteaksler 
eller
2.
Samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
En enkelt roterende og oscillerende aksel med æltetænder/tappe 
og
b.
Æltetænder/tappe indvendigt i blandekammeret.
1B119
Møller baseret på fluidenergi til formaling og fræsning af stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 eller kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål, og specielt udviklede komponenter hertil.
1B201
Filamentviklemaskiner ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1B001 eller 1B101, og beslægtet udstyr som følger:
a.
Filamentviklemaskiner, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bevægelserne til anbringelse, lægning og vikling af fibre kan koordineres og programmeres i to eller flere akser
2.
Specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af kompositte strukturer eller laminater af "fiber- eller trådmaterialer"
og
3.
I stand til at vikle cylindriske rør med en indvendig diameter på mellem 75 mm og 650 mm og længder på 300 mm eller derover
b.
Koordinerings- og programmeringsstyring til de filamentviklemaskiner, der er specificeret i 1B201.a
c.
Præcisionsdorne til de filamentviklemaskiner, der er specificeret i 1B201.a.
1B225
Elektrolytceller til fluorproduktion med en produktionskapacitet på mere end 250 g fluor pr. time.
1B226
Elektromagnetiske isotopseparatorer, konstrueret til eller udstyret med enkelte eller multiple ionkilder, der er i stand til at afgive en total ionstrålestrøm på mindst 50 mA.
Note:
1B226 omfatter:
a.
Separatorer, der er i stand til at berige stabile isotoper
b.
Separatorer med både ionkilder og kollektorer i magnetfeltet og de konfigurationer, hvor de er uden for feltet.
1B228
Hydrogenkryogene destillationskolonner med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Konstrueret til drift ved indre temperaturer på højst 35 K (– 238 °C)
b.
Konstrueret til drift ved indre tryk på 0,5 til 5 MPa
c.
Konstrueret af:
1.
Rustfrit stål i 300-serien fra Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) med lavt svovlindhold og med en austenitisk kornstørrelse på mindst 5 efter ASTM (eller tilsvarende standard) eller
2.
Tilsvarende kryogeniske og hydrogen(H
2
)-kompatible materialer 
og
d.
Med indvendig diameter på mindst 30 cm og 'effektive længder' på mindst 4 m.
Teknisk note:
I 1B228 forstås ved 'effektiv længde' pakningsmaterialets aktive højde i en fyldlegemekolonne eller interne kontaktorpladers aktive højde i en plade-type-kolonne.
1B230
Pumper, der er i stand til at cirkulere opløsninger af koncentreret eller fortyndet kaliumamidkatalysator i flydende ammoniak (KNH
2
/NH
3
), med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er lufttætte (dvs. hermetisk forseglede)
b.
Har en kapacitet over 8,5 m
3
/h 
og
c.
Med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
For koncentrerede kaliumamidopløsninger (1 % eller højere) et driftstryk på 1,5-60 MPa 
eller
2.
For fortyndede kaliumamidopløsninger (mindre end 1 %) et driftstryk på 20-60 MPa.
1B231
Tritiumindretninger eller -anlæg og udstyr hertil som følger:
a.
Indretninger eller anlæg til produktion, udvinding, udtrækning, koncentrering eller håndtering af tritium
b.
Udstyr til tritiumindretninger eller -anlæg som følger:
1.
Hydrogen- eller heliumkøleenheder, der er i stand til at køle til 23 K (– 250 °C) eller derunder, med en varmeafgivelseseffekt på mere end 150 W
2.
Systemer til lagring eller rensning af hydrogenisotoper ved anvendelse af metalhydrider som lagrings- eller rensningsmedie.
1B232
Ekspansionsturbiner eller ekspansionsturbinekompressorer med begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Konstrueret til drift under 35 K (– 238 °C) 
og
b.
Konstrueret til en hydrogengaskapacitet på mindst 1 000 kg/h.
1B233
Indretninger eller anlæg og systemer og udstyr til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper som følger:
a.
Indretninger eller anlæg til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper
b.
Udstyr til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper baseret på lithium-kviksølv-amalgamprocessen som følger:
1.
Fyldlegemevæskevæskebyttersøjler specielt konstrueret til lithiumamalgamer
2.
Kviksølv- eller lithiumamalgampumper
3.
Lithiumamalgamelektrolyseceller
4.
Fordampere til koncentreret lithiumhydroxidopløsning.
c.
Ionbytningssystemer, der er specielt konstruerede til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil
d.
Kemiske bytningssystemer (kroneethere, kryptander eller lariatethere), som er specielt udviklet til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
1B234
Tanke til højeksplosive sprængstoffer, kamre, containere og lignende beholdere udviklet til prøvning af højeksplosive eller eksplosive anordninger, som har begge følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
a.
Udviklet til fuldt ud at standse en eksplosion svarende til 2 kg trinitrotoluen (TNT) eller derover 
og
b.
Har konstruktionselementer eller funktionaliteter, der kan iværksætte tidstro eller forsinket overførsel af diagnostik eller måleinformation.
1B235
Sammensatte slutprodukter og komponenter til fremstilling af tritium som følger:
a.
Sammensatte slutprodukter, der er fremstillet af eller indeholder lithium beriget til lithium-6 (6Li)-isotopen, specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af tritium ved bestråling, herunder ved indføring i en atomreaktor
b.
Komponenter, der er specielt konstrueret til de sammensatte slutprodukter, der er omhandlet i 1B235.a.
Teknisk note:
Komponenter, der er specielt konstrueret til sammensatte slutprodukter til fremstilling af tritium, kan omfatte lithiumpiller, tritiumgetters og specialovertrukket plettering.
1C   
Materialer
Teknisk note:
Metaller og legeringer:
Medmindre der træffes bestemmelse om det modsatte, dækker ordene 'metaller' og 'legeringer' i 1C001-1C012 uforarbejdede og halvforarbejdede former som følger:
Uforarbejdede former:
Anoder, kugler, stænger (herunder også prøvestænger med kærv samt wirebars), råemner, blokke, lupper, briketter, stykker, katoder, krystaller, terninger, matricer, korn, granulat, barrer, klumper, piller, stumper, pulver, skiver, stålsand, plader, brikker, jernsvamp, stokke.
Halvforarbejdede former (uanset om de er belagt, pletteret, boret eller udstanset eller ej):
a.
Smedede eller forarbejdede metaller, der er fremstillet ved valsning, trækning, strengpresning, smedning, slagstøbning, presning, granulering, forstøvning og formaling dvs.: vinkeljern, U-jern, cirkler, skiver, støv, flager, folie, smedeemner, pletterede emner, pulver, emner efter presning og udstansning, bånd, ringe, stænger (herunder nøgne svejseelektroder, valsetråd og valset tråd), profiljern, forme, plader, lister og rør (herunder rundjern, firkantjern og huljern), trukket eller strengpresset tråd
b.
Støbt materiale fremstillet ved støbning i sand, matrice, metal, gips eller andre typer af støbeforme, herunder også højtryksstøbning, sintrede forme og forme fremstillet ved pulvermetallurgi.
Eksportkontrollens formål bør ikke omgås ved eksport af ikkeopførte emner, der påstås at være færdigprodukter, men i virkeligheden er uforarbejdede eller halvforarbejdede former.
1C001
Materialer specielt udviklet til at absorbere elektromagnetisk stråling eller intrinsisk ledende polymerer som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C101.
a.
Materialer til absorbering af frekvenser på over 2 x 10
8
 Hz, men under 3 x 10
12
 Hz
Note 1:
1C001.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Absorberende stoffer af hårtypen, konstrueret af naturlige eller syntetiske fibre, med umagnetisk fyldstof for at tilvejebringe absorption
b.
Absorberende stoffer uden magnetisk tab, hvis indfaldsflade er ikkeplan af form, inklusive pyramider, kegler, kiler og krumme overflader
c.
Plane absorberende materialer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Fremstillet af et eller flere af følgende:
a.
Plastiske skummaterialer (bøjelige eller stive), med carbonfyldstof, eller organiske materialer, inklusive bindematerialer, som giver mere end 5 % ekko i sammenligning med metal over en båndbredde på over ±15 % af den indfaldende energis midtfrekvens, og ikke i stand til at modstå temperaturer på mere end 450 K (177 °C) 
eller
b.
Keramiske materialer, der giver mere end 20 % ekko i sammenligning med metal over en båndbredde på over ±15% af den indfaldende energis midtfrekvens og kan modstå temperaturer på mere end 800 K (527°C).
Teknisk note:
Absorptionsprøveemner til 1C001.a. Note: 1.c.1 skal være kvadrater med sider på mindst 5 bølgelængder af midtfrekvensen og anbragt i det fjerneste felt af det strålende element.
2.
Trækstyrke mindre end 7 x 10
6
 N/m
2
og
3.
Trykstyrke mindre end 14 x 10
6
 N/m
2
d.
Plane absorberende materialer fremstillet af sintret ferrit med samtlige følgende egenskaber
:
1.
Massefylde på mere end 4,4 
og
2.
Maksimal driftstemperatur på 548 K (275 °C) eller derunder.
e.
Plane absorberende materialer uden magnetisk tab og fremstillet af plastmateriale 'skum med åbne celler' med en tæthed på 0,15 g/cm
3
 eller derunder.
Teknisk note:
'Skum med åbne celler' er fleksible og porøse materialer, hvis indre struktur har åben forbindelse til atmosfæren. 'Skum med åbne celler' kaldes også for netskum.
Note 2:
Intet i note 1 til 1C001.a fritager magnetiske materialer, som forårsager absorption, når de indeholdes i maling.
b.
Materialer, der er ikkegennemsigtige med synligt lys, til absorbering af nærinfrarød stråling med en bølgelængde på over 810 nm, men under 2 000 nm (frekvenser på over 150 THz, men under 370 THz)
Note:
1C001.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på materialer, der er specielt udviklet til eller formuleret til følgende anvendelser:
a.
"Laser"mærkning af polymerer 
eller
b.
"Laser"svejsning af polymerer.
c.
Intrinsisk ledende polymere materialer med en 'samlet specifik elektrisk ledningsevne' på mere end 10 000 S/m (Siemens pr. meter) eller en 'specifik overflademodstand' på mere end 100 ohm/kvadrat, baseret på nogen af følgende polymerer:
1.
Polyanilin
2.
Polypyrrol
3.
Polythiophen
4.
Polyphenylenvinylen 
eller
5.
Polythienylenvinylen.
Note:
1C001.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på materialer i flydende form.
Teknisk note:
'Samlet elektrisk ledningsevne' og 'specifik overflademodstand' skal bestemmes ved hjælp af ASTM D-257 eller tilsvarende nationale normer.
1C002
Metallegeringer, metallegeringspulver eller legerede materialer som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C202.
Note:
1C002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på metallegeringer, metallegeringspulver eller legerede materialer, der er specielt formuleret til belægningsformål.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Metallegeringerne i 1C002 er legeringer, der indeholder en højere vægtprocentdel af det angivne metal end af noget andet grundstof.
2.
'Spændingsbrudlevetid' skal måles iflg. ASTM standard E-139 eller tilsvarende nationale normer.
3.
‘Lavfrekvent brudlevetid’ skal måles iflg. ASTM standard E-606 "Recommended Practice for Constant-Amplitude Low-Cycle Fatigue Testing" eller tilsvarende nationale normer. Afprøvningen skal være aksial med et middelbelastningsforhold på 1 og en belastningskoncentrationsfaktor (Kt) på 1. Middelbelastningsforholdet defineres som maksimumbelastningen minus minimumbelastningen divideret med maksimumbelastningen.
a.
Aluminider som følger:
1.
Nikkelaluminider indeholdende mindst 15 vægtprocent aluminium, højst 38 vægtprocent aluminium og mindst en yderligere legeringskomponent
2.
Titanaluminider indeholdende 10 vægtprocent aluminium eller mere og mindst en yderligere legeringskomponent
b.
Metallegeringer som følger fremstillet af det pulver eller partikelformede materiale, som er specificeret i 1C002.c:
1.
Nikkellegeringer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Spændingsbrudlevetid' på 10 000 timer eller mere ved 923 K (650 °C) og en belastning på 676 MPa 
eller
b.
'Lavfrekvent brudlevetid' på 10 000 perioder eller mere ved 823 K (550°C) ved en maksimal belastning på 1 095 MPa
2.
Niobiumlegeringer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Spændingsbrudlevetid' på 10 000 timer eller mere ved 1 073 K (800°C) og en belastning på 400 MPa 
eller
b.
'Lavfrekvent brudlevetid' på 10 000 perioder eller mere ved 973 K (700°C) ved en maksimal belastning på 700 MPa
3.
Titanlegeringer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Spændingsbrudlevetid' på 10 000 timer eller mere ved 723 K (450 °C) og en belastning på 200 MPa 
eller
b.
'Lavfrekvent brudlevetid' på 10 000 perioder eller mere ved 723 K (450 °C) ved en maksimal belastning på 400 MPa
4.
Aluminiumlegeringer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En trækstyrke på 240 MPa eller mere ved 473 K (200 °C) 
eller
b.
En trækstyrke på 415 MPa eller mere ved 298 K (25 °C)
5.
Magnesiumlegeringer med begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
En trækstyrke på mindst 345 MPa 
og
b.
En korrosionshastighed på mindre end 1 mm/år i 3 % vandig natriumkloridopløsning målt iflg. ASTM standard G-31 eller tilsvarende nationale normer
c.
Metallegeringspulver eller partikelformet materiale, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Fremstillet ved et eller flere af følgende legeringssystemer:
Teknisk note:
I det følgende står X for en eller flere legeringskomponenter.
a.
Nikkellegeringer (Ni-Al-X, Ni-X-Al), som er kvalificerede til turbinemaskindele eller komponenter, dvs. med mindre end 3 ikkemetalliske partikler (tilført under fremstillingsprocessen), som er større end 100 μm i 10
9
 legeringspartikler
b.
Niobiumlegeringer (Nb-Al-X eller Nb-X-Al, Nb-Si-X eller Nb-X-Si, Nb-Ti-X eller Nb-X-Ti)
c.
Titanlegeringer (Ti-Al-X eller Ti-X-Al)
d.
Aluminiumlegeringer (Al-Mg-X eller Al-X-Mg, Al-Zn-X eller Al-X-Zn, Al-Fe-X eller Al-X-Fe) 
eller
e.
Magnesiumlegeringer (Mg-Al-X eller Mg-X-Al)
2.
Fremstillet i et kontrolleret miljø ved en eller flere af følgende processer:
a.
'Vakuumatomisering'
b.
'Gasatomisering'
c.
'Roterende atomisering'
d.
'Splat quenching'
e.
'Smeltespinding' og 'findeling'
f.
'Smelteekstraktion' og 'findeling'
g.
'Mekanisk legering' 
eller
h.
'Plasmaforstøvning' 
og
3.
Kan anvendes til fremstilling af materialer, som er specificeret i 1C002.a eller 1C002.b
d.
Legerede materialer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Fremstillet ved et eller flere af de legeringssystemer, der er specificeret i 1C002.c.1
2.
I form af udelte flager, bændler eller tynde stænger 
og
3.
Fremstillet i et kontrolleret miljø ved en eller flere af følgende processer:
a.
'Splat quenching'
b.
'Smeltespinding' 
eller
c.
'Smelteekstraktion'.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Vakuumatomisering' er en proces til forstøvning af en strøm af smeltet metal til dråber med en diameter på 500 μm eller derunder ved hurtig omdannelse af opløst gas, når den udsættes for vakuum.
2.
'Gasatomisering' er en proces, der omdanner en strøm af smeltet metallegering til dråber med en diameter på højst 500 μm ved hjælp af en gasstrøm under højt tryk.
3.
'Roterende atomisering' er en proces til omdannelse af en strøm eller et reservoir af smeltet metal til dråber med en diameter på højst 500 μm ved hjælp af centrifugalkraft.
4.
'Splat quenching' er en proces til 'hurtigstørkning' af en strøm af smeltet metal, der rammer en afkølet blok og danner et flageagtigt produkt.
5.
'Smeltespinding' er en proces til 'hurtigstørkning' af en strøm af smeltet metal, der rammer en roterende, nedkølet blok og derved frembringer et flage-, bånd- eller stavformet produkt.
6.
'Findeling' er en proces til bearbejdning af et materiale til partikler ved knusning eller formaling.
7.
'Smelteekstraktion' er en proces til 'hurtigstørkning' og ekstraktion af et båndformet legeringsprodukt ved indføring af et kort segment af en roterende, nedkølet blok i et bad af smeltet metallegering.
8.
'Mekanisk legering' er en legeringsproces, der er et resultat af bonding, knusning og rebonding af pulvere af grundstoffer og masterlegeringer ved mekanisk påvirkning. Der kan tilføjes umetalliske partikler til legeringen ved tilsætning af egnede pulvere.
9.
'Plasmaforstøvning' er en proces, der omdanner en strøm af smeltet metal eller metal i fast form til dråber med en diameter på højst 500 μm ved hjælp af plasmabrændere i et inaktivt gasmiljø.
10.
‘Hurtigstørkning’ er en proces, der indebærer størkning af smeltet materiale ved nedkølingshastigheder på over 1 000 K/s.
1C003
Magnetiske metaller af enhver type eller form med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Initial, relativ permeabilitet på 120 000 eller mere, og tykkelse på 0,05 mm eller mindre.
Teknisk note:
Måling af initial relativ permeabilitet skal udføres på fuldt afhærdede materialer.
b.
Magnetostriktive legeringer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Mætningsmagnetostriktion på mere end 5 x 10
–4
eller
2.
Magnetomekanisk koblingsfaktor (k) på mere end 0,8 
eller
c.
Amorfe eller 'nanokrystallinske' legeringsstrimler med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
En sammensætning med minimum 75 vægtprocent jern, cobalt eller nikkel
2.
En magnetisk mætningsinduktion (B
s
) på 1,6 T eller mere 
og
3.
En eller flere af følgende:
a.
Strimmeltykkelse på 0,02 mm eller mindre 
eller
b.
Elektrisk modstand på 2 x 10
–4
 ohm-cm eller mere.
Teknisk note:
'Nanokrystallinske' materialer i 1C003.c. er materialer, der har en krystalkornstørrelse på 50 nm eller mindre, bestemt ved røntgendiffraktion.
1C004
Uran-titan-legeringer eller wolframlegeringer med en "matrix" baseret på jern, nikkel eller kobber med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Specifik massefylde på over 17,5 g/cm
3
b.
Elasticitetsgrænse på mere end 880 MPa
c.
Trækbrudstyrke på mere end 1 270 MPa 
og
d.
Forlængelse på mere end 8 %.
1C005
"Superledende""kompositte" ledere i længder på mere end 100 m eller med en masse på mere end 100 g som følger:
a.
"Superledende""kompositte" ledere, som indeholder en eller flere niobium-titan-'filamenter' med alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indlagt i en "matrix", som ikke er en kobber- eller kobberbaseret blandet "matrix"
og
2.
Med et tværsnit på mindre end 0,28 x 10
–4
 mm
2
 (6 μm i diameter for cirkulære 'filamenter')
b.
"Superledende""kompositte" ledere bestående af et eller flere "superledende" 'filamenter' af andet end niobiumtitan med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Med en "kritisk temperatur" ved nul magnetisk induktion på mere end 9,85 K (– 263,31 °C) 
og
2.
Forbliver i den "superledende" tilstand ved en temperatur på 4,2 K (– 268,96°C, når de udsættes for et magnetfelt, som er rettet vinkelret mod lederens længdeakse, og svarende til en magnetisk induktion på 12 T med en kritisk strømtæthed, som overstiger 1 750 A/mm
2
 på hele tværsnittet af lederen.
c.
"Superledende""kompositte" ledere bestående af et eller flere "superledende" 'filamenter', som forbliver "superledende" ved en temperatur, der overstiger 115 K (– 158,16 °C).
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 1C005 kan 'filamenter' være i tråd-, cylinder-, film-, tape- eller båndform.
1C006
Væsker og smøremidler som følger:
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Smøremidler, der som deres hovedbestanddele indeholder en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Phenylen- eller alkylphenylenethere eller thioethere eller blandinger heraf, indeholdende mere end to ether- eller thioetherfunktioner eller blandinger heraf 
eller
2.
Fluorerede siliconevæsker med en kinematisk viskositet på mindre end 5 000 mm
2
/s (5 000 centistoke) målt ved 298 K (25 °C)
c.
Dæmpnings- eller flotationsvæsker med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Renhed på over 99,8 %
2.
Indeholdende mindre end 25 partikler på 200 μm eller derover i størrelse pr. 100 ml 
og
3.
Fremstillet af mindst 85 % af en af følgende:
a.
Dibromtetrafluorethan (CAS 25497-30-7, 124-73-2, 27336-23-8)
b.
Polychlortrifluorethylen (kun olie- og voksmodifikationer) 
eller
c.
Polybromtrifluorethylen
d.
Fluorcarbonvæsker, der er udviklet med henblik på elektronisk køling, og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indeholdende 85 vægtprocent eller mere af et eller flere af følgende stoffer eller blandinger heraf:
a.
Monomere former af perfluorpolyalkylethertriaziner eller perfluoraliphatiske-ethere
b.
Perfluoralkylaminer
c.
Perfluorcycloalkaner 
eller
d.
Perfluoralkaner
2.
Massefylde ved 298 K (25 °C) på 1,5 g/ml eller mere
3.
I flydende tilstand ved 273 K (0 °C.) 
og
4.
Indeholdende 60 vægtprocent fluor eller mere.
Note:
1C006.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på materialer, der er specificeret og emballeret som lægemidler.
1C007
Keramiske pulvere, keramiske "matrix"-"kompositte" materialer og 'prækursormaterialer' som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C107.
a.
Keramiske pulvere af titandiborid (TiB
2
) (CAS 12045-63-5), med et totalt indhold af metalliske urenheder, eksklusive ønskede tilsatte stoffer, på mindre end 5 000 ppm, en gennemsnitlig partikelstørrelse lig med eller mindre end 5 μm og ikke mere end 10 % af partiklerne større end 10 μm
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Keramiske "matrix"-"kompositte" materialer som følger:
1.
Keramisk-keramiske "kompositte" materialer med en glas- eller oxid-"matrix", og forstærket med et eller flere af følgende:
a.
Kontinuerlige fibre fremstillet af et eller flere af følgende materialer:
1.
Al
2
O
3
 (CAS 1344-28-1) 
eller
2.
Si-C-N 
eller
Note:
1C007.c.1.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "kompositter", der indeholder fibre med en trækstyre på mindre end 700 MPa at 1 273 K (1 000 °C) eller trækkrybestyrke på mere end 1 % krybeforlængelse ved 100 Mpa belastning og 1 273 K (1 000 °C) i 100 timer.
b.
Fibre med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Fremstillet af et eller flere af følgende materialer:
a.
Si-N
b.
Si-C
c.
Si-Al-O-N 
eller
d.
Si-O-N 
og
2.
Med en "specifik trækstyrke" på mere end 12,7 x 10
3
m
2.
Keramiske "matrix"-"kompositte" materialer med en "matrix" af carbider eller nitrider af silicium, zirconium eller bor
d.
Ikke anvendt
e.
'Prækursormaterialer', der er specielt udviklet til "fremstilling" af de materialer, der er specificeret i 1C007.c, som følger:
1.
Polydiorganosilaner
2.
Polysilazaner
3.
Polycarbosilazaner
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 1C007 forstås ved 'prækursormaterialer' polymeriske eller metalloorganiske materialer til specielle formål, der anvendes til "fremstilling" af siliciumcarbid, siliciumnitrid, eller keramiske materialer med silicium, carbon og nitrogen.
f.
Ikke anvendt.
1C008
Ikkefluorerede polymere substanser som følger:
a.
Imider som følger:
1.
Bismaleimider
2.
Aromatiske polyamidimider (PAI) med en 'glasomdannelsestemperatur (T
g
)' på mere end 563 K (290 °C)
3.
Aromatiske polyetherimider med en 'glasomdannelsestemperatur (T
g
)' på mere end 505 K (232 °C)
4.
Aromatiske polyetherimider med en 'glasomdannelsestemperatur (T
g
)' på mere end 563 K (290 °C)
Note:
1C008.a. omfatter substanser i flydende eller fast "smeltelig" form, inklusive harpiks, pulver, piller, film, blad, tape og bånd.
N.B.
For så vidt angår ikke "smeltelige" aromatiske polyimider i film, blad, tape og bånd, se 1A003.
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Polyarylenketoner
e.
Polyarylensulfider, hvor arylengruppen er biphenylen, triphenylen eller kombinationer heraf
f.
Polybiphenylenethersulfon med en 'glasomdannelsestemperatur (T
g
)' på mere end 563 K (290 °C)
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Glasomdannelsestemperaturen (T
g
)' for termoplastiske materialer under 1C008.a.2., materialer under 1C008.a.4. og materialer under 1C008.f bestemmes ved metoden beskrevet i ISO 11357-2:1999 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder.
2.
'Glasomdannelsestemperaturen (T
g
)' for termohærdende materialer under 1C008.a.2. og materialer under 1C008.a.3. bestemmes ved 3-punktsbøjningsmetoden beskrevet i ASTM D 7028-07 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder. Denne test udføres på et tørt prøveemne med en hærdningsgrad på mindst 90 % som defineret i ASTM E 2160-04 eller en tilsvarende national standard og som hærdede ved hjælp af en kombination af standard- og efterhærdningsprocesser med den højeste T
g
.
1C009
Ubehandlede fluorerede forbindelser som følger:
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Fluorerede polyimider indeholdende mindst 10 vægtprocent bunden fluor
c.
Fluorerede phosphazenelastomerer indeholdende mindst 30 vægtprocent bunden fluor.
1C010
"Fiber- og trådmaterialer" som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C210 OG 9C110.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Med henblik på beregningen af "specifik trækstyrke", "specifikt modul" eller specifik vægt af "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" beskrevet i 1C010.a, 1C010.b, 1C010.c eller 1C010.e.1.b. beregnes trækstyrke og modul ved hjælp af metode A i ISO 10618:2004 eller tilsvarende nationale metoder.
2.
Vurderingen af "specifik trækstyrke", "specifikt modul" eller specifik vægt af ikke-ensrettede "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" (f.eks. væv, måtter og flettede bånd) i 1C010. baseres på de mekaniske egenskaber ved de indeholdte ensrettede monofilamenter (f.eks. monofilamenter, garner, forgarner eller blår), før de omdannes til ikke-ensrettede "fiber- og trådmaterialer".
a.
Organiske "fiber- og trådmaterialer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Specifikt modul" større end 12,7 x10
6
 m 
og
2.
"Specifik trækstyrke" større end 23,5 x 10
4
 m
Note:
1C010.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på polyethylen.
b.
Carbon "fiber- og trådmaterialer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Specifikt modul" større end 14,65 x10
6
 m 
og
2.
"Specifik trækstyrke" større end 26,82 x 10
4
 m
Note:
1C010.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
"Fiber- eller trådmaterialer" til reparation af "civile fly" strukturer eller laminater med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et areal på højst 1 m
2
2.
En længde på højst 2,5 m 
og
3.
En bredde på mere end 15 mm.
b.
Mekanisk skårne, slebne eller klippede carbon "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" med en længde på 25,0 mm eller mindre.
c.
Uorganiske "fiber- og trådmaterialer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Består af mindst 50 vægtprocent siliciumdioxid og med et "specifikt modul", der er større end 2,54 x 10
6
 m eller
b.
Er ikke specificeret i 1C010.c.1.a. og har et "specifikt modul", der er større end 5,6 x 10
6
 m 
og
2.
Smelte-, blødgørings-, nedbrydnings- eller sublimeringspunkt på mere end 1 922 K (1 649 °C) i et inaktivt miljø
Note:
1C010.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Diskontinuerte, multifase-, polykrystallinske aluminium-oxidfibre i form af skårne fibre eller måtter med tilfældigt orienterede fibre, indeholdende mindst 3 vægtprocent silicium, med et "specifikt modul" på mindre end 10 x 10
6
 m
b.
Molybdæn og molybdænlegeringsfibre
c.
Borfibre
d.
Diskontinuerte keramiske fibre med smelte-, blødgørings-, nedbrydnings- eller sublimeringspunkt på mindre end 2 043 K (1 770 °C) i et inaktivt miljø.
d.
"Fiber- og trådmaterialer" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Sammensat af en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Polyetherimider, som er specificeret i 1C008.a. 
eller
b.
Materialer, der er specificeret i 1C008.b-1C008.f. 
eller
2.
Sammensat af materialer, der specificeret i 1C010.d.1.a. eller 1C010.d.1.b., og 'blandet' med andre fibre, der er specificeret i 1C010.a., 1C010.b. eller 1C010.c.
Teknisk note:
'Blandet' er en filament/filament-blanding af termoplastiske fibre og forstærkningsfibre for at fremstille fiberforstærknings-"matrix"-mix i total fiberform.
e.
Helt eller delvis harpiksimprægnerede eller begimprægnerede "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" (prepregs), metal- eller carboncoatede "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" (preforms) eller 'carbonfiberpreforms' med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Uorganiske "fiber- og trådmaterialer", som er specificeret i 1C010.c. 
eller
b.
Organiske eller carbon-"fiber- og trådmaterialer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Specifikt modul" større end 10,15 x10
6
 m 
og
2.
"Specifik trækstyrke" større end 17,7 x 10
4
 m 
og
2.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Harpiks eller beg, som er specificeret i 1C008 eller 1C009.b.
b.
'Dynamisk mekanisk analyseglasomdannelsestemperatur (DMA T
g
)' lig med eller mere end 453 K (180 °C) og med phenolharpiks 
eller
c.
'Dynamisk mekanisk analyseglasomdannelsestemperatur (DMA T
g
)' lig med eller mere end 505 K (232 °C) og med harpiks eller beg, som ikke er specificeret i 1C008 eller 1C009.b., og som ikke er en phenolharpiks
Note 1:
Metal- eller carboncoatede "fiber- og trådmaterialer" (preforms) eller 'carbonfiberpreforms', der ikke er imprægneret med harpiks eller beg, er specificeret med "fiber- og trådmaterialer" i 1C010.a., 1C010.b. eller 1C010.c.
Note 2:
1C010.e. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Carbon-"fiber- eller trådmaterialer", der er imprægneret med epoxyharpiks"matrix" (prepregs), til reparation af "civile fly"strukturer eller laminater, som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et areal på højst 1 m
2
2.
En længde på højst 2,5 m 
og
3.
En bredde på mere end 15 mm.
b.
Helt eller delvis harpiksimprægnerede eller begimprægnerede mekanisk skårne, slebne eller klippede carbon "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" med en længde på 25,0 mm eller mindre ved anvendelse af harpiks eller beg, der ikke er specificeret i 1C008 eller 1C009.b.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Carbonfiberpreforms' er et ordnet arrangement af ikke-coatede eller coatede fibre, der skal danne en ramme om en del, inden "matrix" indføres for at danne en "komposit".
2.
'Den dynamiske mekaniske analyseglasomdannelsestemperatur (DMA T
g
)' for materialer, der er specificeret i 1C010.e., bestemmes ved metoden beskrevet i ASTM D 7028-07 eller en tilsvarende national standard på et tørt prøveemne. I forbindelse med termohærdende materialer skal hærdningsgraden for et tørt prøveemne være på mindst 90 % som defineret i ASTM E 2160-04 eller en tilsvarende national standard.
1C011
Metaller og forbindelser som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL OG 1C111.
a.
Metaller med kornstørrelser på mindre end 60 μm, i sfærisk, forstøvet, sfæroidal, skæl- eller formalet form, fremstillet af materialer indeholdende mindst 99 % zirconium, magnesium og legeringer heraf
Teknisk note:
Det naturlige indhold af hafnium i zirconium (typisk 2-7 %) medregnes i zirconium.
Note:
De metaller og legeringer, der er specificeret i 1C011.a, er pålagt eksportkontrol, uanset om metallerne eller legeringerne er indkapslet i aluminium, magnesium, zirconium eller beryllium.
b.
Bor eller borlegeringer med en kornstørrelse på højst 60 μm som følger:
1.
Bor med en renhed på mindst 85 vægtprocent
2.
Borlegeringer med et borindhold på mindst 85 vægtprocent
Note:
De metaller og legeringer, der er specificeret i 1C011.b, er pålagt eksportkontrol, uanset om metallerne eller legeringerne er indkapslet i aluminium, magnesium, zirconium eller beryllium.
c.
Guanidinnitrat (CAS 506-93-4)
d.
Nitroguanidin (NQ) (CAS 556-88-7).
N.B.
Jf. ligeledes kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål for metalpulver, der blandes med andre stoffer for at danne en blanding, der er formuleret til militære formål.
1C012
Materialer som følger:
Teknisk note:
Disse materialer anvendes typisk til nukleare varmekilder.
a.
Plutonium i enhver form med et indhold af plutonium-238 på mere end 50 vægtprocent
Note:
1C012.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Forsendelser med et plutoniumindhold på højst 1 g
b.
Forsendelser på højst 3 "effektive gram", når de er indeholdt i sensorkomponenten i instrumenter.
b.
"Tidligere separeret" neptunium-237 i enhver form.
Note:
1C012.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på forsendelser med et indhold af neptunium-237 på højst 1 g.
1C101
Materialer og indretninger til formindskede observerbare størrelser som radarreflektivitet, ultraviolet/infrarøde og akustiske signaturer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1C001, til anvendelse i 'missiler', "missil" undersystemer eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a.
Note 1:
1C101 omfatter:
a.
Konstruktionsmaterialer og belægninger, der er specielt udviklede til formindsket radarreflektivitet
b.
Belægninger, herunder malinger, der er specielt udviklet til formindsket eller tilpasset reflektivitet eller emissivitet i mikrobølge-, infrarøde eller ultraviolette dele af det elektromagnetiske spektrum.
Note 2:
1C101 omfatter ikke belægninger, der specielt bruges til varmekontrol af satellitter.
Teknisk note:
I 1C101 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
1C102
Resaturerede pyroliserede carboncarbonmaterialer, der er udviklet til løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, som er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, som er specificeret i 9A104.
1C107
Grafit og keramiske materialer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1C007, som følger:
a.
Finkornede grafitter med en bulktæthed på mindst 1,72 g/cm
3
 målt ved 288 K (15 °C) og med kornstørrelse 100 μm eller derunder, der er anvendelige til raketdyser og næser til reentry vehicles, som kan maskinbearbejdes til et af følgende produkter:
1.
Cylindre med en diameter på 120 mm eller derover og en længde på 50 mm eller derover
2.
Rør med en indre diameter på 65 mm eller derover og en vægtykkelse på 25 mm eller derover og en længde på 50 mm eller derover 
eller
3.
Blokke med en størrelse på 120 x 120 x 50 mm eller derover
N.B.
Jf. ligeledes 0C004.
b.
Pyrolytiske eller fiberforstærkede grafitter, der er anvendelige til raketdyser og næser til reentry vehicles, og som kan anvendes i "missiler", løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104
N.B.
Jf. ligeledes 0C004.
c.
Keramiske kompositmaterialer (dielektrisk konstant mindre end 6 ved alle frekvenser fra 100 MHz til 100 GHz) til brug i radomer, der kan anvendes i "missiler", løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104
d.
Ubrændt, maskinbearbejdeligt, siliciumcarbidforstærket keramisk materiale i bulkform, der er anvendeligt til næser, der kan anvendes i "missiler", løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104
e.
Forstærkede keramiske kompositter af siliciumcarbid, som er anvendelige til næser, reentry vehicles og dyseflaps, der kan anvendes i "missiler", løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104.
f.
Maskinbearbejdelige keramiske kompositmaterialer i bulkmateriale, der består af en matrix af 'ultrahøjtemperaturkeramik' (Ultra High Temperature Ceramic – UHTC) med et smeltepunkt på mindst 3 000 °C og forstærket med fibre eller filamenter, anvendelige til missilkomponenter (såsom næser, reentry vehicles, forkanter, jetfinner, styreflader eller halsindsatser i raketmotore) i "missiler", løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104, eller 'missiler'.
Note:
1C107.f. omfatter ikke kontrol med materialer af 'ultrahøjtemperaturkeramik' i ikke-komposit form.
Teknisk note 1:
I 1C107.f. forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
Teknisk note 2:
'Ultrahøjtemperaturkeramik' omfatter:
1.
Titandiborid (TiB
2
)
2.
Zirconiumdiborid (ZrB
2
)
3.
Niobiumdiborid (NbB
2
)
4.
Hafniumdiborid (HfB
2
)
5.
Tantalumdiborid (TaB
2
)
6.
Titaniumcarbid (TiC)
7.
Zirconiumcarbid (ZrC)
8.
Niobiumcarbid (NbC)
9.
Hafniumcarbid (HfC)
10.
Tantalumcarbid (TaC).
1C111
Drivstoffer og kemiske stoffer, der udgør en bestanddel af drivstoffer, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1C011, som følger:
a.
Drivstoffer:
1.
Sfærisk eller sfæroidalt aluminiumspulver ud over det, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål, med partikelstørrelse på mindre end 200 μm og et aluminiumindhold på 97 vægtprocent eller derover, hvis mindst 10 % af den samlede vægt udgøres af partikler, der er mindre end 63 μm, iflg. ISO 2591-1:1988 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder
Teknisk note:
En partikelstørrelse på 63 μm (ISO R-565) svarer til 250 mesh (Tyler) eller 230 mesh (ASTM standard E-11).
2.
Metalpulver ud over det, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål som følger:
a.
Metalpulver af zirconium, beryllium og magnesium, eller legeringer af disse metaller, hvis mindst 90 % af det samlede antal partikler pr. partikelvolumen eller vægt består af partikler på mindre end 60 μm (bestemt ved måleteknikker såsom sibunde, laserdiffraktion eller optisk scanning), uanset om de er sfæriske, sfæroidale, forstøvede eller i skæl- eller formalet form, bestående af 97 vægtprocent eller mere af et eller flere af følgende stoffer:
1.
Zirconium
2.
Beryllium 
eller
3.
Magnesium
Teknisk note:
Det naturlige indhold af hafnium i zirconium (typisk 2-7 %) medregnes i zirconium.
b.
Metalpulver af bor eller borlegeringer med et indhold af bor på mindst 85 vægtprocent, hvis mindst 90 % af det samlede antal partikler pr. partikelvolumen eller vægt består af partikler på mindre end 60 μm (bestemt ved måleteknikker såsom sibunde, laserdiffraktion eller optisk scanning), uanset om de er sfæriske, sfæroidale, forstøvede eller i skæl- eller formalet form.
Note:
1C111.a.2.a. og 1C111a.2.b. lægger eksportkontrol på pulverblandinger med en multimodal partikelfordeling (f.eks. blandinger af forskellige kornstørrelser), hvis en eller flere typer er pålagt eksportkontrol.
3.
Følgende iltningsmidler, som kan anvendes i raketmotorer til flydende brændstof:
a.
Dinitrogentrioxid (CAS 10544-73-7)
b.
Nitrogendioxid (CAS 10102-44-0)/dinitrogentetroxid (CAS 10544-72-6)
c.
Dinitrogenpentoxid (CAS 10102-03-1)
d.
Blandede nitrogenoxider (MON)
Teknisk note:
Blandede nitrogenoxider (MON) er opløsninger af nitrogenoxid (NO) i dinitrogentetroxid/nitrogendioxid (N
2
O
4
/NO
2
), der kan anvendes i missilsystemer. En række forbindelser kan betegnes som MONi eller MONij, hvor i og j er hele tal, der repræsenterer den procentvise andel af nitrogenoxid i blandingen (f.eks. indeholder MON3 3 % nitrogenoxid og MON25 25 % nitrogenoxid. Den øvre grænse er MON40, 40 vægtprocent).
e.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE inhiberet, rød, rygende salpetersyre (IRFNA)
f.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL OG 1C238 VEDRØRENDE forbindelser af fluor og en eller flere andre halogener, oxygen eller nitrogen.
4.
Følgende hydrazinderivater:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
a.
Trimethylhydrazin (CAS 1741-01-1)
b.
Tetramethylhydrazin (CAS 6415-12-9)
c.
N,N-Diallylhydrazine (CAS 5164-11-4)
d.
Allylhydrazin (CAS 7422-78-8)
e.
Ethylendihydrazin (CAS 6068-98-0)
f.
Monomethylhydrazindinitrat
g.
Asymmetrisk dimethylhydrazinnitrat
h.
Hydrazinazid (CAS 14546-44-2)
i.
1,1-Dimethylhydrazinazid (CAS 227955-52-4) / 1,2-Dimethylhydrazinazid (CAS 299177-50-7)
j.
Hydrazindinitrat (CAS 13464-98-7)
k.
Diimido-oxalsyredihydrazin (CAS 3457-37-2)
l.
2-Hydroxyethylhydrazinnitrat (HEHN)
m.
Se kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål vedrørende hydrazinperklorat
n.
Hydrazindiperklorat (CAS 13812-39-0)
o.
Methylhydrazinnitrat (MHN) (CAS 29674-96-2)
p.
1,1-Diethylhydrazinnitrat (DEHN) / 1,2-Diethylhydrazinnitrat (DEHN) (CAS 363453-17-2)
q.
3,6-Dihydrazintetrazinnitrat (1,4-dihydrazinnitrat) (DHTN)
5.
Materialer med høj energitæthed ud over dem, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål, til anvendelse i 'missiler' eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a
a.
Brændselsblandinger, der indeholder både fast og flydende brændsel såsom borslurry, som har en massebaseret energitæthed på 40 x 10
6
 J/kg eller derover
b.
Andre brændstoffer og brændstofadditiver med høj energitæthed (f.eks. cuban, ioniske opløsninger og JP-10), som har en volumenbaseret energitæthed på 37,5 x 10
9
 J/m
3
 eller derover målt ved 20 °C og én atmosfæres tryk (101,325 kPa)
Note:
1C111.a.5.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på raffinerede fossile brændstoffer og biobrændstoffer, der er fremstillet af planter, herunder motorbrændstoffer, som er godkendt til brug i civile fly, medmindre de er specielt formuleret til 'missiler' eller ubemandede luftfartøjer som specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a.
Teknisk note:
II1C111.a.5. forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
6.
Brændstoffer til erstatning af hydrazin som følger:
a.
2-Dimethylaminoethylazid (DMAZ) (CAS 86147-04-8)
b.
Polymere stoffer:
1.
Carboxytermineret polybutadien (herunder carboxyltermineret polybutadien) (CTPB)
2.
Hydroxytermineret polybutadien (herunder hydroxyltermineret polybutadien) (HTPB) (CAS 69102-90-5) ud over det, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål
3.
Polybutadienakrylsyre (PBAA)
4.
Polybutadienakrylsyreacrylonitril (PBAN) (CAS 25265-19-4 / CAS 68891-50-9)
5.
Polytetrahydrofuran-polyethylenglykol (TPEG)
Teknisk note:
Polytetrahydrofuran-polyethylenglykol (TPEG) er en blockcopolymer af poly-1,4-butanediol (CAS 110-63-4) og polyethylenglykol (PEG) (CAS 25322-68-3).
6.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE polyglycidylnitrat (PGN eller poly-GLYN) (CAS 27814-48-8).
c.
Andre tilsætningsstoffer og bestanddele:
1.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE carboraner; decaboraner, pentaboraner og derivater heraf
2.
Triethylenglycoldinitrat (TEGDN) (CAS 111-22-8)
3.
2-nitrodiphenylamin (CAS 119-75-5)
4.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE trimethylolethantrinitrat (TMETN) (CAS 3032-55-1)
5.
Diethylenglycoldinitrat (DEGDN) (CAS 693-21-0)
6.
Følgende ferrocenderivater:
a.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE catocen (CAS 37206-42-1)
b.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE ethylferrocen (CAS 1273-89-8)
c.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE n-propylferrocen (CAS 1273-92-3)/iso-propyl ferrocen (CAS 12126-81-7)
d.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE n-butylferrocen (CAS 31904-29-7)
e.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE pentylferrocen (CAS 1274-00-6)
f.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE dicyclopentylferrocen (CAS 125861-17-8)
g.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE dicyclohexylferrocen
h.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE diethylferrocen (CAS 1273-97-8)
i.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE dipropylferrocen
j.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE dibutylferrocen (CAS 1274-08-4)
k.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE dihexylferrocen (CAS 93894-59-8)
l.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE acetylferrocen (CAS 1271-55-2)/1,1'- diacetylferrocen (CAS 1273-94-5)
m.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE ferrocencarboxylsyre (CAS 1271-42-7)/1,1'- ferrocendicarboxylsyre (CAS 1293-87-4)
n.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE butacen (CAS 125856-62-4)
o.
Andre ferrocenderivater, der kan anvendes til at ændre raketdrivstoffers forbrændingshastighed, ud over dem, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelser for produkter til militære formål.
Note:
1C111.c.6.o. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på ferrocenderivater, som indeholder en aromatisk funktionel gruppe med seks kulstofatomer bundet til ferrocenmolekylet.
7.
4,5 Diazidomethyl-2-methyl-1,2,3-triazol (iso-DAMTR), ud over dem, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelser for produkter til militære formål.
d.
'Drivstof i gelform', ud over det, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål, specifikt formuleret til anvendelse i 'missiler'.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Ved 'drivstof i gelform' forstås 1C111.d. et brændstof- eller et iltningsmiddel, i hvis formulering indgår et fortykkelsesmiddel såsom silicater, kaolin (ler), carbon eller polymere fortykkelsesmidler.
2.
I 1C111.d. forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
Note:
For så vidt angår drivstoffer og kemiske stoffer, der udgør en bestanddel af drivstoffer, som ikke er specificeret i 1C111: se kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
1C116
Martensitisk stål til brug i 'missiler' med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C216.
a.
En trækbrudsstyrke målt ved 293 K (20 °C) på mindst:
1.
0,9 GPa i opløsningsglødet tilstand 
eller
2.
1,5 GPa i ældningshærdet tilstand 
og
b.
En eller flere af følgende former:
1.
Plade eller rør med en væg- eller godstykkelse på højst 5,0 mm
2.
Rørformede typer med en vægtykkelse på højst 50 mm og en indvendig diameter på mindst 270 mm.
Teknisk note 1:
Martensitisk stål er jernlegeringer:
1.
Som generelt karakteriseres ved højt nikkelindhold, meget lavt kulstofindhold og brug af substitutionskomponenter eller udskillelser til at fremkalde forstærkning og ældningshærdning af legeringen, 
og
2.
Som udsættes for varmebehandling for at fremme den martensitiske transformationsproces (opløsningsglødet tilstand) og derefter ældningshærdet tilstand.
Teknisk note 2:
I 1C116 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
1C117
Materialer til fremstilling af 'missilkomponenter' som følger:
a.
Wolfram og legeringer i partikelform med et indhold af wolfram på mindst 97 vægtprocent og en partikelstørrelse på 50 x 10
-6
 m (50 μm) eller mindre
b.
Molybdæn og legeringer i partikelform med et indhold af molybdæn på mindst 97 vægtprocent og en partikelstørrelse på 50 x 10
-6
 m (50 μm) eller mindre
c.
Wolframmaterialer i fast form med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Som har en eller flere af følgende materialesammensætninger:
a.
Wolfram og legeringer med et indhold af wolfram på mindst 97 vægtprocent
b.
Kobberinfiltreret wolfram med et indhold af wolfram på mindst 80 vægtprocent 
eller
c.
Sølvinfiltreret wolfram med et indhold af wolfram på mindst 80 vægtprocent 
og
2.
I stand til at kunne maskinbearbejdes til et eller flere af følgende produkter:
a.
Cylindre med en diameter på 120 mm eller derover og en længde på 50 mm eller derover
b.
Rør med en indre diameter på 65 mm eller derover og en vægtykkelse på 25 mm eller derover og en længde på 50 mm eller derover 
eller
c.
Blokke med en størrelse på 120 x 120 x 50 mm eller derover.
Teknisk note:
I 1C117 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
1C118
Titanstabiliseret duplex rustfrit stål (Ti-DSS) med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indeholder 17,0-23,0 vægtprocent chrom og 4,5-7,0 vægtprocent nikkel
2.
Har et titanindhold på mindst 0,10 vægtprocent 
og
3.
Har en ferritisk austenitisk mikrostruktur (også kaldet tofaset mikrostruktur, hvoraf mindst 10 % er austenit opgjort som volumenindhold (iflg. ASTM E-1181-87 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder) 
og
b.
Som har en eller flere af følgende former:
1.
Barrer eller stænger med en størrelse på 100 mm eller mere i enhver dimension
2.
Plader med en bredde på 600 mm eller mere og en tykkelse på 3 mm eller mindre eller
3.
Rør med en ydre diameter på 600 mm eller mere og en vægtykkelse på 3 mm eller mindre.
1C202
Legeringer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1C002.b.3. eller 1C002.b.4., som følger:
a.
Aluminiumlegeringer med begge af følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Kan belastes med' en maksimal trækstyrke på 460 MPa eller derover ved 293 K (20 °C) 
og
2.
I form af rør eller cylindriske massive emner (herunder smedede emner) med en udvendig diameter på mere end 75 mm
b.
Titanlegeringer med begge af følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Kan belastes med' en maksimal trækstyrke på 900 MPa eller derover ved 293 K (20 °C) 
og
2.
I form af rør eller cylindriske massive emner (herunder smedede emner) med en udvendig diameter på mere end 75 mm.
Teknisk note:
Udtrykket 'kan belastes med' vedrører legeringer før eller efter varmebehandling.
1C210
'Fiber- eller trådmateriale' eller prepregs ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1C010.a., .b. eller .e., som følger:
a.
'Fiber- eller trådmaterialer' af carbon eller aramid med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Specifikt modul" større end 12,7 x 10
6
 m 
eller
2.
"Specifik trækstyrke" på 23,5 x 10
4
 m eller derover
Note:
1C210.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'fiber- eller trådmaterialer' af aramid med en esterbaseret fiberoverflademodifikator på mindst 0,25 vægtprocent.
b.
'Fiber- eller trådmaterialer' af glas med begge af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Specifikt modul" større end 3,18 x 10
6
 m 
og
2.
"Specifik trækstyrke" på 7,62 x 10
4
 m eller derover
c.
Kontinuerlige "garner", "forgarner", "blår" eller "tape", imprægneret med termohærdende harpiks, med bredde på højst 15 mm (prepregs), fremstillet af 'fiber- eller trådmaterialer' af carbon eller glas, som er specificeret i 1C210.a eller b.
Teknisk note:
Harpiksen udgør matrixen i kompositten.
Note:
I 1C210 er 'fiber eller trådmaterialer' begrænset til kontinuerlige "monofilamenter", "garner", "forgarner", "blår" eller "tape".
1C216
Martensitisk ældende stål ud over det, der er specificeret i 1C116, der 'kan belastes med en' maksimal trækstyrke på 1 950 MPa eller derover ved 293 K (20 °C).
Note:
1C216 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på forme, hvor ingen lineære dimensioner overstiger 75 mm.
Teknisk note:
Udtrykket 'martensitisk ældende stål … med en' omfatter martensitisk ældende stål før eller efter varmebehandling.
1C225
Bor beriget til bor-10 isotopen (
10
B) med mere end dets naturlige isotopiske indhold som følger: elementar bor, forbindelser, blandinger indeholdende bor eller produkter heraf, affald og skrot indeholdende nogle af ovennævnte.
Note:
1C225 omfatter borblandinger indeholdende borladede materialer.
Teknisk note:
Det naturlige isotopiske bor 10-indhold udgør ca. 18,5 vægtprocent (20 atomprocent).
1C226
Wolfram, wolframcarbid og wolframlegeringer indeholdende mere end 90 vægtprocent wolfram ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1C117, som har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
I forme med en hul cylindersymmetri (herunder cylindersegmenter) med en indvendig diameter på mere end 100 mm, men mindre end 300 mm 
og
b.
En masse på mere end 20 kg.
Note:
1C226 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter, der er specielt konstrueret til brug som vægte eller gammastrålekollimatorer.
1C227
Calcium med begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Med et vægtindhold af metalliske urenheder af andet end magnesium på mindre end 1 000 ppm 
og
b.
Med et vægtindhold af bor på mindre end 10 ppm.
1C228
Magnesium med begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Indeholder mindre end 200 ppm metalliske urenheder af andet end calcium 
og
b.
Med et vægtindhold af bor på mindre end 10 ppm.
1C229
Bismuth med begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
En renhed på mindst 99,99 vægtprocent 
og
b.
Med et vægtindhold af sølv på mindre end 10 ppm.
1C230
Metallisk beryllium, legeringer indeholdende mere end 50 vægtprocent beryllium, berylliumforbindelser, produkter heraf og eventuelt affald eller skrot af ovennævnte, ud over det, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
Note:
1C230 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
Metalvinduer til røntgenapparater eller apparater til borehulsmålinger
b.
Oxidkomponenter i færdig eller halvfærdig form specielt konstrueret til elektroniske komponentdele eller som substrater til elektroniske kredsløb
c.
Beryl (silicat af beryllium og aluminium) i form af smaragder eller akvamariner.
1C231
Metallisk hafnium, legeringer indeholdende mere end 60 vægtprocent hafnium, hafniumforbindelser indeholdende mere end 60 vægtprocent hafnium, produkter heraf og affald og skrot af ovennævnte.
1C232
Helium-3 (
3
He), blandinger indeholdende helium-3 eller produkter eller apparater indeholdende ovennævnte.
Note:
1C232 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter eller apparater, der indeholder mindre end 1 g helium-3.
1C233
Lithium beriget til lithium-6 (
6
Li) isotopen med mere end dets naturlige isotopiske indhold, og produkter eller apparater indeholdende beriget lithium som følger: elementar lithium, legeringer, forbindelser eller blandinger indeholdende lithium, produkter heraf, affald og skrot af ovennævnte.
Note:
1C233 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på termoluminiscente dosimetre.
Teknisk note:
Lithium-6's naturlige isotopiske indhold er ca. 6,5 vægtprocent (7,5 atomprocent).
1C234
Zirconium med et hafnium/zirconium-vægtforhold på mindre end 1/500 som følger: i form af metal, legeringer indeholdende mere end 50 vægtprocent zirconiumforbindelser, produkter heraf, affald eller skrot af ovennævnte, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 0A001.f.
Note:
1C234 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på zirconium i form af folie af en tykkelse på højst 0,10 mm.
1C235
Tritium og forbindelser og blandinger af tritium, i hvilke tritium/hydrogenatomforholdet overstiger 1 promille, og produkter eller apparater indeholdende nogen af ovennævnte.
Note:
1C235 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter eller apparater, som indeholder mindre end 1,48 x 10
3
 GBq (40 Ci) tritium.
1C236
'Radionuklider', som er egnede til fremstilling af neutronkilder på basis af alpha-n-reaktion, udover dem der er specificeret i 0C001 og 1C012.a i følgende form:
a.
Elementar
b.
Forbindelser med en total alfaaktivitet på mindst 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg)
c.
Blandinger med en total alfaaktivitet på mindst 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg)
d.
Produkter eller apparater, som indeholder nogen af ovenstående.
Note:
1C236 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter eller apparater, som indeholder mindre end 3,7 GBq (100 millicurie) alfaaktivitet.
Teknisk note:
I 1C236 er 'radionuklider':
Actinium-225 (
225
Ac)
Actinium-227 (
227
Ac)
Californium-253 (
253
Cf)
Curium-240 (
240
Cm)
Curium-241 (
241
Cm)
Curium-242 (
242
Cm)
Curium-243 (
243
Cm)
Curium-244 (
244
Cm)
Einsteinium-253 (
253
Es)
Einsteinium-254 (
254
Es)
Gadolinium-148 (
148
Gd)
Plutonium-236 (
236
Pu)
Plutonium-238 (
238
Pu)
Polonium-208 (
208
Po)
Polonium-209 (
209
Po)
Polonium-210 (
210
Po)
Radium-223 (
223
Ra)
Thorium-227 (
227
Th)
Thorium-228 (
228
Th)
Uranium-230 (
230
U)
Uranium-232 (
232
U)
1C237
Radium-226 (
226
Ra), radium-226-legeringer, radium-226-forbindelser, blandinger indeholdende radium-226, produkter heraf eller produkter, som indeholder nogen af ovennævnte.
Note:
1C237 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
Medicinske apparater eller applikatorer
b.
Produkter eller apparater, der indeholder mindre end 0,37 GBq (10 millicurie) radium-226.
1C238
Chlortrifluorid (ClF
3
).
1C239
Højeksplosive stoffer ud over dem, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål, eller stoffer eller blandinger indeholdende mere end 2 vægtprocent deraf med en krystalmassetæthed på mere end 1,8 g/cm
3
 og en detonationshastighed på mere end 8 000 m/s.
1C240
Nikkelpulver og porøst nikkelmetal ud over dem, der er specificeret i 0C005, som følger:
a.
Nikkelpulver, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et indhold af rent nikkel på mindst 99,0 vægtprocent 
og
2.
En gennemsnitlig kornstørrelse på mindre end 10 μm målt efter American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B 330 standard
b.
Porøst nikkelmetal fremstillet af materialer, der er specificeret i 1C240.a.
Note:
1C240 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
Trådformet nikkelpulver
b.
Enkelte plader af porøst nikkel med et areal på højst 1 000 cm
2
 pr. plade.
Teknisk note:
1C240.b. henviser til porøst metal fremstillet ved komprimering og sintring af de i 1C240.a. nævnte materialer, så de danner et metalmateriale med fine porer, som er indbyrdes forbundet hele strukturen igennem.
1C241
Rhenium og legeringer med et indhold af rhenium på mindst 90 vægtprocent og legeringer af rhenium og wolfram med et indhold af enhver kombination af rhenium og wolfram på mindst 90 vægtprocent ud over dem, der er specifieret i 1C226, og som har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
I forme med en hul cylindersymmetri (herunder cylindersegmenter) med en indvendig diameter på mellem 100 mm og 300 mm 
og
b.
En masse på mere end 20 kg.
1C350
Kemiske stoffer, der kan anvendes som prækursorer til toksiske kemiske forbindelser, som følger, og "kemiske blandinger", der indeholder et eller flere af disse:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL OG 1C450.
1.
Thiodiglycol (CAS 111-48-8)
2.
Phosphoroxychlorid (CAS 10025-87-3)
3.
Dimethyl methylphosphonat (CAS 756-79-6)
4.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE methylphosphonyldifluorid (CAS 676-99-3)
5.
Methylphosphonyldichlorid (CAS 676-97-1)
6.
Dimethylphosphit (DMP) (CAS 868-85-9)
7.
Phosphortrichlorid (CAS 7719-12-2)
8.
Trimethylphosphit (TMP) (CAS 121-45-9)
9.
Thionylchlorid (CAS 7719-09-7)
10.
3-hydroxy-1-methylpiperidin (CAS 3554-74-3)
11.
N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethylchlorid (CAS 96-79-7)
12.
N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanthiol (CAS 5842-07-9)
13.
3-quinuclidinol (CAS 1619-34-7)
14.
Kaliumfluorid (CAS 7789-23-3)
15.
2-chloroethanol (CAS 107-07-3)
16.
Dimethylamin (CAS 124-40-3)
17.
Diethylethylphosphonat (CAS 78-38-6)
18.
Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidat (CAS 2404-03-7)
19.
Diethylphosphit (CAS 762-04-9)
20.
Dimethylaminhydrochlorid (CAS 506-59-2)
21.
Ethylphosphinyldichlorid (CAS 1498-40-4)
22.
Ethylphosphonyldichlorid (CAS 1066-50-8)
23.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE ethylphosphonyldifluorid (CAS 753-98-0)
24.
Hydrogenfluorid (CAS 7664-39-3)
25.
Methylbenzilat (CAS 76-89-1)
26.
Methylphosphinyldichlorid (CAS 676-83-5)
27.
N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0)
28.
Pinacolylalkohol (CAS 464-07-3)
29.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE O-ethyl-O-2-diisopropylaminoethyl-methylphosphonit (QL) (CAS 57856-11-8)
30.
Triethylphosphit (CAS 122-52-1)
31.
Arsentrichlorid (CAS 7784-34-1)
32.
Benzilsyre (CAS 76-93-7)
33.
Diethylmethylphosphonit (CAS 15715-41-0)
34.
Dimethylethylphosphonat (CAS 6163-75-3)
35.
Ethylphosphinyldifluorid (CAS 430-78-4)
36.
Methylphosphinyldifluorid (CAS 753-59-3)
37.
3-Quinuclidon (CAS 3731-38-2)
38.
Phosphorpentachlorid (CAS 10026-13-8)
39.
Pinacolon (CAS 75-97-8)
40.
Kaliumcyanid (CAS 151-50-8)
41.
Kaliumbifluorid (CAS 7789-29-9)
42.
Ammoniumhydrogenfluorid eller ammoniumbifluorid (CAS 1341-49-7)
43.
Natriumfluorid (CAS 7681-49-4)
44.
Natriumbifluorid (CAS 1333-83-1)
45.
Natriumcyanid (CAS 143-33-9)
46.
Triethanolamin (CAS 102-71-6)
47.
Phosphorpentasulfid (CAS 1314-80-3)
48.
Diisopropylamin (CAS 108-18-9)
49.
Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8)
50.
Natriumsulfid (CAS 1313-82-2)
51.
Svovlmonochlorid (CAS 10025-67-9)
52.
Svovldichlorid (CAS 10545-99-0)
53.
Triethanolaminhydrochlorid (CAS 637-39-8)
54.
N,N-diisopropyl-aminoethylchloridhydrochlorid (CAS 4261-68-1)
55.
Methylphosphonsyre (CAS 993-13-5)
56.
Diethylmethylphosphonat (CAS 683-08-9)
57.
N,N-dimethylaminophosphoryldichlorid (CAS 677-43-0)
58.
Triisopropylphosphit (CAS 116-17-6)
59.
Ethyldiethanolamin (CAS 139-87-7)
60.
O,O-diethylphosphorthioat (CAS 2465-65-8)
61.
O,O-diethylphosphordithioat (CAS 298-06-6)
62.
Natriumhexafluorosilicat (CAS 16893-85-9)
63.
Methylphosphonthiodichlorid (CAS 676-98-2)
64.
Diethylamin (CAS 109-89-7)
65.
N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiolhydrochlorid (CAS 41480-75-5)
66.
Methyldichlorphosphat (CAS 677-24-7)
67.
Ethyldichlorphosphat (CAS 1498-51-7)
68.
Methyldifluorphosphat (CAS 22382-13-4)
69.
Ethyldifluorphosphat (CAS 460-52-6)
70.
Diethylchlorphosphit (CAS 589-57-1)
71.
Methylchlorfluorphosphat (CAS 754-01-8)
72.
Ethylchlorfluorphosphat (CAS 762-77-6)
73.
N,N-Dimethylformamidin (CAS-nr. 44205-42-7)
74.
N,N-Diethylformamidin (CAS-nr. 90324-67-7)
75.
N,N-Dipropylformamidin (CAS 48044-20-8)
76.
N,N-Diisopropylformamidin (CAS 857522-08-8)
77.
N,N-Dimethylacetamidin (CAS 2909-14-0)
78.
N,N-Diethylacetamidin (CAS 14277-06-6)
79.
N,N-Dipropylacetamidin (CAS 1339586-99-0)
80.
N,N-Dimethylpropanamidin (CAS 56776-14-8)
81.
N,N-Diethylpropanamidin (CAS 84764-73-8)
82.
N,N-Dipropylpropanamidin (CAS 1341496-89-6)
83.
N,N-Dimethylbutanamidin (CAS 1340437-35-5)
84.
N,N-Diethylbutanamidin (CAS 53510-30-8)
85.
N,N-Dipropylbutanamidin (CAS 1342422-35-8)
86.
N,N-Diisopropylbutanamidin (CAS 1315467-17-4)
87.
N,N-Dimethylisobutanamidin (CAS 321881-25-8)
88.
N,N-Diethylisobutanamidin (CAS 1342789-47-2)
89.
N,N-Dipropylisobutanamidin (CAS 1342700-45-1).
Note 1:
For så vidt angår eksport til "stater, der ikke er parter i konventionen om kemiske våben", lægger 1C350 ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C350.1, 3, 5, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 21, 22, 26, 27, 28, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 54, 55, 56, 57, 63 og 65, og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 10 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 2:
For så vidt angår eksport til "stater, der er parter i konventionen om kemiske våben", lægger 1C350 ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C350.1, 3, 5, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18, 21, 22, 26, 27, 28, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 54, 55, 56, 57, 63 og 65, og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 30 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 3:
1C350 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C350.2, .6, .7, .8, .9, .10, .14, .15, .16, .19, .20, .24, .25, .30, .37, .38, .39, .40, .41, .42, .43, .44, .45, .46, .47, .48, .49, .50, .51, .52, .53, .58, .59, .60, .61, .62, .64, .66, .67, .68, .69, .70, .71, .72, .73, .74, .75, .76, .77, .78, .79, .80, .81, .82, .83, .84, .85, .86, .87, .88 og 89, og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 30 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 4:
1C350 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter, der betegnes som forbrugsprodukter og er pakket til detailsalg og personlig brug eller er pakket til individuel brug.
1C351
Humane og animalske patogener og "toksiner" som følger:
a.
Virus, hvad enten de er naturlige, forstærkede eller modificerede, enten i form af "isolerede levende kulturer" eller i form af materiale, der omfatter levende materiale, der forsætligt er inokuleret eller kontamineret med sådanne kulturer, som følger:
1.
Afrikansk hestepestvirus
2.
Afrikansk svinepestvirus
3.
Andesvirus
4.
Aviært influenzavirus, der
a.
er ukarakteriseret 
eller
b.
er defineret i bilag I, pkt. 2, til direktiv 2005/94/EF (
EUT L 10 af 14.1.2006, s. 16
) som værende stærkt patogent som følger:
1.
Type A-vira på et intravenøst patogenicitetsindeks hos seks uger gamle kyllinger på over 1,2 
eller
2.
Type A-vira af undertype H5 eller H7 med en genotypefrekvens kodende for flere basiske aminosyrer på hæmagglutininets kløvningssted, svarende til, hvad der er konstateret for andre HPAI-virus, og som indikerer, at hæmagglutininet kan kløves af proteaser, der forekommer ubikvitært i værten
5.
Bluetonguevirus
6.
Chaparevirus
7.
Chikungunyavirus
8.
Choclovirus
9.
Krim-Congo hæmorragisk febervirus
10.
Ikke anvendt
11.
Dobrava-Belgrade-virus
12.
Østlig hesteencephalitvirus
13.
Ebolavirus: alle medlemmer af Ebolavirusslægten
14.
Mund- og klovesyge-virus
15.
Gedekoppevirus
16.
Guanaritovirus
17.
Hantaanvirus
18.
Hendravirus (Equine morbillivirus)
19.
Aujeszkys sygdom (Suid herpesvirus 1) (Pseudorabies-virus)
20.
Klassisk svinepestvirus (Hog Choleravirus)
21.
Japansk encephalitvirus
22.
Juninvirus
23.
Kyasanur Forest-virus
24.
Laguna Negra-virus
25.
Lassavirus
26.
Louping ill-virus
27.
Lujovirus
28.
Lumpy Skin Diseasevirus
29.
Lymphocytær choriomeningitisvirus
30.
Machupovirus
31.
Marburgvirus: alle medlemmer af Marburgvirusslægten
32.
Monkeypoxvirus
33.
Murray Valley encephalitvirus
34.
Newcastlediseasevirus
35.
Nipahvirus
36.
Omsk hæmorragisk febervirus
37.
Oropouchevirus
38.
Fåre- og gedepestvirus
39.
Vesikulærvirus hos svin
40.
Powassanvirus
41.
Rabiesvirus og alle andre medlemmer af Lyssavirusslægten
42.
Rift Valley febervirus
43.
Kvægpestvirus
44.
Rociovirus
45.
Sabiavirus
46.
Seoulvirus
47.
Fårekoppevirus
48.
Sin Nombre-virus
49.
St. Louis encephalitvirus
50.
Smitsom svinelammelse
51.
Centraleuropæisk hjernehindebetændelsesvirus (fjernøstlig subtype)
52.
Variolavirus
53.
Venezuelansk hesteencephalitvirus
54.
Vesikulær stomatitisvirus
55.
Vestlig hesteencephalitvirus
56.
Gul feber-virus
57.
Severe acute respiratory syndrome-related coronavirus (sarsrelated coronavirus);
58.
Rekonstrueret 1918-influenzavirus
59.
Middle East respiratory syndrome-related coronavirus (mersrelateret coronavirus)
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Bakterier, hvad enten de er naturlige, forstærkede eller modificerede, enten i form af "isolerede levende kulturer" eller i form af materiale, der omfatter levende materiale, der forsætligt er inokuleret eller kontamineret med sådanne kulturer, som følger:
1.
Bacillus anthracis
2.
Brucella abortus
3.
Brucella melitensis
4.
Brucella suis
5.
Burkholderia mallei (Pseudomonas mallei)
6.
Burkholderia pseudomallei (Pseudomonas pseudomallei)
7.
Chlamydia psittaci (Chlamydophila psittaci)
8.
Botulinneurotoksin producerende typer af Clostridium argentinense (tidligere Clostridium botulinum Type G)
9.
Botulinneurotoksin producerende typer af Clostridium baratii
10.
Clostridium botulinum
11.
Botulinneurotoksin producerende typer af Clostridium butyricum
12
Epsilontoksinproducerende typer af Clostridium perfringens
13.
Coxiella burnetii
14.
Francisella tularensis
15.
Mycoplasma capricolum subspecies capripneumoniae (type F38)
16.
Mycoplasma mycoides subspecies mycoides SC (små kolonier biotype)
17.
Rickettsia prowazekii
18.
Salmonella enterica underart enterica serovar Typhi (Salmonella typhi)
19.
Shigatoksinproducerende Escherichia coli (STEC) af serotype O26, O45, O103, O104, O111, O121, O145, O157 og andre shigatoksinproducerende serotyper
Note:
Shigatoksinproducerende Escherichia (coli (STEC) omfatter bl.a. Enterohaemorrhagisk Escherichia coli (EHEC), verotoksinproducerende E.coli (VTEC) eller verocytotoksinproducerende E.Coli (VTEC).
20.
Shigella dysenteriæ
21.
Vibrio choleræ
22.
Yersinia pestis
d.
Følgende "toksiner" og "underenheder af toksiner" heraf:
1.
Botulinumtoksin
2.
Clostridium perfringens alpha-, beta 1-, beta 2-, epsilon- og iota-toksin
3.
Conotoksiner
4.
Ricin
5.
Saxitoksin
6.
Shigatoksiner (shigalignende toksiner, verotoksiner og verocytotoksiner)
7.
Staphylococcus aureus-enterotoksin, hæmolysinalpha-toksin og toksisk chocksyndrom-toksin (tidligere benævnt Staphylococcus enterotoksin F)
8.
Tetrodotoksin
9.
Ikke anvendt
10.
Microcystiner (Cyanginosiner)
11.
Aflatoksiner
12.
Abrin
13.
Choleratoksin
14.
Diacetoxyscirpenol
15.
T-2-toksin
16.
HT-2-toksin
17.
Modeccin
18.
Volkensin
19.
Viscumin (Viscum Album Lectin 1)
Note:
1C351.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på botulinumtoksiner eller conotoksiner i produktform, der opfylder samtlige følgende kriterier:
1.
Er farmaceutiske specialiteter til human brug med henblik på sygdomsbehandling
2.
Er færdigpakkede med henblik på distribution som lægemidler
3.
Er tilladt af en statslig myndighed med henblik på markedsføring som lægemidler.
e.
Svampe, hvad enten de er naturlige, forstærkede eller modificerede, enten i form af "isolerede levende kulturer" eller i form af materiale, der omfatter levende materiale, der forsætligt er inokuleret eller kontamineret med sådanne kulturer, som følger:
1.
Coccidioides immitis
2.
Coccidioides posadsii.
Note:
1C351 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "vacciner" eller "immunotoksiner".
1C353
'Genetiske elementer' og 'genetisk modificerede organismer' som følger:
a.
En 'genetisk modificeret organisme', der indeholder, eller et 'genetisk element', der koder for en af følgende:
1.
Et eller flere specifikke gener for en virus, der specificeret i 1C351.a. eller 1C354.a.
2.
Et eller flere specifikke gener for en bakterie, der er specificeret i 1C351.c. eller 1C354.b., eller en svamp, der er specificeret i 1C351.e. eller 1C354.c., og for hvilken der gælder et af følgende:
a.
I sig selv eller via sine transskriberede eller translaterede produkter udgør en betydelig risiko for menneskers, dyrs eller planters sundhed 
eller
b.
Kan 'tilføre eller højne patogenicitet' 
eller
3.
Et eller flere af de "toksiner", der er specificeret i 1C351.d., eller "underenheder af toksiner" af disse.
b.
Ikke anvendt.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Genetisk modificerede organismer' omfatter organismer, hvori nukleinsyresekvenserne er blevet skabt eller ændret ved bevidst molekylemanipulering.
2.
'Genetiske elementer' omfatter bl.a. kromosomer, genomer, plasmider, transposoner, vektorer og inaktiverede organismer, der indeholder regenererbare nukleinsyrefragmenter, hvad enten de er genetisk modificerede eller ej eller helt eller delvis fremstillet ved kemisk syntese. Med henblik på kontrol af de genetiske elementer regnes nukleinsyrer fra en inaktiveret organisme, virus eller prøve som regenererbare, hvis inaktiveringen og bearbejdningen af materialet har til formål eller vides at muliggøre isolering, rensning, forstærkning, detektion eller identificering af nukleinsyrer.
3.
Med 'tilføre eller højne patogenicitet' forstås, at der ved indføring eller integrering af nukleinsyresekvenserne er sandsynlighed for, at dette bibringer eller øger modtagerorganismens evne til at anvendes til forsætligt at forårsage sygdom eller dødsfald. Dette kan omfatte ændringer af bl.a. virulens, overførbarhed, stabilitet, smittevej, værtsspektrum, reproducerbarhed, evne til at modvirke eller nedkæmpe værtsimmunitet, modstandsdygtighed imod medicinske modforanstaltninger eller sporbarhed.
Note 1:
1C353 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på nukleinsyresekvenser fra shigatoksinproducerende Escherichia coli af serogruppe O26, O45, O103, O104, O111, O121, O145, O157, og andre shigatoksinproducerende serogrupper, ud over de genetiske elementer, der koder for underenheder heraf.
Note 2:
1C353 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "vacciner".
1C354
Plantepatogener som følger:
a.
Virus, hvad enten de er naturlige, forstærkede eller modificerede, enten i form af "isolerede levende kulturer" eller i form af materiale, der omfatter levende materiale, der forsætligt er inokuleret eller kontamineret med sådanne kulturer, som følger:
1.
Latent andeskartoffelvirus (Potato Andean latent tymovirus)
2.
Potato spindle tuber viroid
b.
Bakterier, hvad enten de er naturlige, forstærkede eller modificerede, enten i form af "isolerede levende kulturer" eller i form af materiale, der forsætligt er inokuleret eller kontamineret med sådanne kulturer, som følger:
1.
Xanthomonas albilineans
2.
Xanthomonas anoxopodis pv. citri (Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri, type A) [Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri]
3.
Xanthomonas oryzae pv. oryzae (Pseudomonas campestris pv. oryzae)
4.
Clavibacter michiganensis ssp. sepedonicus Corynebacterium michiganensis subsp. Sepedonicum eller Corynebacterium Sepedonicum)
5.
Ralstonia solanacearum, race 3, biovar 2
c.
Svampe, hvad enten de er naturlige, forstærkede eller modificerede, enten i form af "isolerede levende kulturer" eller i form af materiale, der forsætligt er inokuleret eller kontamineret med sådanne kulturer, som følger:
1.
Colletotrichum kahawae (Colletotrichum coffeanum var. virulans)
2.
Cochliobolus miyabeanus (Helminthosporium oryzae)
3.
Microcyclus ulei (syn. Dothidella ulei)
4.
Puccinia graminis ssp. graminis var. graminis/Puccinia graminis ssp. graminis var. stakmanii (Puccinia graminis [syn. Puccinia graminis f. sp. tritici])
5.
Puccinia striiformis (syn. Puccinia glumarum)
6.
Magnaporthe oryzae (Pyricularia oryzae)
7.
Peronosclerospora philippinensis (Peronosclerospora sacchari)
8.
Sclerophthora rayssiae var. zeae
9.
Synchytrium endobioticium
10.
Tilletia indica
11.
Thecaphora solani.
1C450
Toksiske kemiske stoffer og toksiske kemiske prækursorer, som følger, og "kemiske blandinger", der indeholder et eller flere af disse:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C350, 1C351.D OG KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
a.
Toksiske kemiske stoffer som følger:
1.
Amiton: O,O-Diethyl-S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] phosphorothiolat (CAS 78-53-5) og alkylerede eller protoniserede salte deraf
2.
PFIB: 1,1,3,3,3-pentafluor-2-(trifluormethyl)-1-propen (CAS 382-21-8)
3.
SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL VEDRØRENDE BZ: 3-quinuclidinylbenzilat (CAS 6581-06-2)
4.
Phosgen: carbonyldichlorid (CAS 75-44-5)
5.
Cyanogenchlorid (CAS 506-77-4)
6.
Hydrogencyanid (CAS 74-90-8)
7.
Klorpikrin: trichlornitromethan (CAS 76-06-2)
Note 1:
For så vidt angår eksport til "stater, der ikke er parter i konventionen om kemiske våben", lægger 1C450 ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C450.a.1. og .a.2., og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 1 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 2:
For så vidt angår eksport til "stater, der er parter i konventionen om kemiske våben", lægger 1C450 ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C450.a.1. og .a.2., og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 30 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 3:
1C450 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C450.a.4., .a.5., .a.6. og .a.7., og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 30 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 4:
1C450 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter, der betegnes som forbrugsprodukter og er pakket til detailsalg og personlig brug eller er pakket til individuel brug.
b.
Toksiske kemiske prækursorer som følger:
1.
Kemiske stoffer ud over dem, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål eller 1C350, indeholdende et phosphoratom, hvortil er bundet en methyl-, ethyl- eller propylgruppe (normal- eller iso-), men ikke flere carbonatomer
Note:
1C450.b1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på fonofos: O-Ethyl S
-
phenylethylphosphonothiolothionat (CAS 944-22-9)
2.
Andre N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-phosphor-amiddihalogenider end N,N-dimethylfosforaminodiklorid
N.B.
Se 1C350.57. vedrørende N,N-dimetylfosforamidodiklorid.
3.
Dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-phosphoramidater, bortset fra diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidat som specificeret i 1C350
4.
N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-aminoethyl-2-chlorider og protoniserede salte deraf, bortset fra N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethylchlorid eller N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethylchloridhydrochlorid som specificeret i 1C350
5.
N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-aminoethan-2-oler og protoniserede salte deraf, bortset fra N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0) og N,N-diethylamino-ethanol (CAS 100-37-8) som specificeret i 1C350
Note:
1C450.b.5. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
N,N-dimethylaminoethanol (CAS 108-01-0) og protoniserede salte deraf
b.
Protoniserede salte af N,N-diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8).
6.
N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-aminoethan-2-thioler og protoniserede salte deraf, bortset fra N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanthiol (CAS 5842-07-9) og N,N-diisopropylaminoethanethiolhydrochlorid (CAS 41480-75-5), som specificeret i 1C350
7.
Se 1C350 vedrørende ethyldiethanolamin (CAS 139-87-7)
8.
Methyldiethanolamin (CAS 105-59-9).
Note 1:
For så vidt angår eksport til "stater, der ikke er parter i konventionen om kemiske våben" lægger 1C450 ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C450.b.1, b.2, b.3, b.4, b.5. og b.6, og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 10 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 2:
For så vidt angår eksport til "stater, der er parter i konventionen om kemiske våben" lægger 1C450 ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C450.b.1, b.2, b.3, b.4, b.5. og b.6, og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 30 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 3:
1C450 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "kemiske blandinger", som indeholder et eller flere af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C450.b.8, og hvori intet individuelt specificeret kemisk stof udgør mere end 30 vægtprocent af blandingen.
Note 4:
1C450 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter, der betegnes som forbrugsprodukter og er pakket til detailsalg og personlig brug eller er pakket til individuel brug.
1D   
Software
1D001
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 1B001-1B003.
1D002
"Software" til "udvikling" af organiske "matrix"-, metal"matrix"- eller carbon"matrix"-laminater eller -"kompositter".
1D003
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til at sætte udstyr i stand til at udføre de funktioner, som udføres af udstyr, der er specificeret i 1A004.c. eller 1A004.d.
1D101
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller ændret til drift eller vedligeholdelse af produkter, der er specificeret i 1B101, 1B102, 1B115, 1B117, 1B118 eller 1B119.
1D103
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til analyse af reducerede observable størrelser som radarreflektivitet, ultraviolette/infrarøde signaturer og akustiske signaturer.
1D201
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 1B201.
1E   
Teknologi
1E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr eller materialer, der er specificeret i 1A002-1A005, 1A006.b., 1A007, 1B eller 1C.
1E002
Følgende anden "teknologi":
a.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af polybenzothiazoler eller polybenzoxazoler.
b.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af fluorelastomerforbindelser indeholdende mindst én vinylethermonomer.
c.
"Teknologi" til udvikling eller "produktion" af følgende keramiske pulvere eller ikke "kompositte" keramiske materialer:
1.
Keramiske pulvere med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
En eller flere af følgende forbindelser:
1.
Enkelt- eller komplekse oxider af zirconium og komplekse oxider af silicium eller aluminium
2.
Enkeltnitrider af bor (kubisk krystallinske former)
3.
Enkelt- eller komplekse carbider af silicium eller bor 
eller
4.
Enkelt- eller komplekse nitrider af silicium
b.
En af følgende totale mængder metalliske urenheder (eksklusive forsætlige tilsætninger):
1.
Mindre end 1 000 ppm for enkeltoxider eller enkeltcarbider 
eller
2.
Mindre end 5 000 ppm for komplekse forbindelser eller enkeltnitrider 
og
c.
Som er en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Zirconiumforbindelser (CAS 1314-23-4) med en gennemsnitlig partikelstørrelse, der er lig med eller mindre end 1 μm, og hvor højst 10 % af partiklerne er større end 5 μm 
eller
2.
Andre keramiske pulvere med en gennemsnitlig partikelstørrelse lig med eller mindre end 5 μm og højst 10 % af partiklerne større end 10 μm
2.
Ikke "kompositte" keramiske materialer sammensat af de i 1E002.c.1 specificerede materialer
Note:
1E002.c.2 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" vedrørende slibemidler.
d.
Ikke anvendt.
e.
"Teknologi" til installering, vedligeholdelse eller reparation af materialer, der er specificeret i 1C001.
f.
"Teknologi" til reparation af "komposit" strukturer, -laminater eller -materialer, der er specificeret i 1A002 eller 1C007.c.
Note:
1E002.f lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til reparation af strukturer til "civile fly" ved brug af carbon "fiber eller trådmaterialer" og epoxyharpikser, der omfattes af "fly"producenters manualer.
g.
"Biblioteker", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til at sætte udstyr i stand til at udføre de funktioner, som udføres af udstyr, der er specificeret i 1A004.c. eller 1A004.d.
1E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 1A102, 1B001, 1B101, 1B102, 1B115-1B119, 1C001, 1C101, 1C107, 1C111-1C118, 1D101 eller 1D103.
1E102
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af "software", der er specificeret i 1D001, 1D101 eller 1D103.
1E103
"Teknologi" til regulering af temperatur, tryk og atmosfære i autoklaver og hydroklaver, når de bruges til "produktion" af "kompositter" eller delvis fremstillede "kompositter".
1E104
"Teknologi" til "produktion" af pyrolytisk afledte materialer, der dannes på en form, dorn eller andet underlag fra prækursorgasser, som spaltes i temperaturområdet fra 1 573 K (1 300 °C) til 3 173 K (2 900 °C) ved tryk på 130 Pa til 20 kPa.
Note:
1E104 omfatter "teknologi" til kombination af prækursorgasser, flowhastigheder og processtyringsprogrammer og parametre.
1E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 1A002, 1A007, 1A202, 1A225 to 1A227, 1B201, 1B225-1B234, 1C002.b.3 eller b.4, 1C010.b, 1C202, 1C210, 1C216, 1C225-1C241 eller 1D201.
1E202
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af produkter, der er specificeret i 1A007, 1A202 eller 1A225-1A227.
1E203
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af "software", der er specificeret i 1D201.
DEL IV –
Kategori 2
KATEGORI 2 - MATERIALEBEHANDLING
2A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
N.B.
Med hensyn til lydløse lejer henvises til kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
2A001
Følgende rulningslejer og lejesystemer samt komponenter hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2A101.
a.
Kuglelejer og massive rullelejer, med tolerancer, der alle er specificeret af producenten i overensstemmelse med ISO 492 Tolerance Class 4 eller Tolerance Class 2 (eller tilsvarende nationale standarder) eller bedre, med både 'ringe' og 'rullelegemer', fremstillet af monel eller beryllium
Note:
2A001.a lægger ikke eksportkontrol på koniske rullelejer.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Ring' – ringformet del af et radialrulleleje, der omfatter en eller flere løbebaner (ISO 5593:1997).
2.
'Rullelegeme' – kugle eller rulle, der ruller mellem løbebaner (ISO 5593:1997).
b.
Ikke anvendt.
c.
Aktive magnetlejesystemer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
1.
Materialer med fluxdensitet på 2,0 T eller større og flydegrænser på mere end 414 MPa
2.
Hel-elektromagnetisk 3D homopolær forspændingsdesign for aktuatorer 
eller
3.
Positionssensorer til høj temperatur (mindst 450 K (177 °C)).
2A101
Radialkuglelejer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2A001, med tolerancer, der alle er specificeret i overensstemmelse med ISO 492 Tolerance Class 2 (eller ANSI/ABMA Std 20 Tolerance Class ABEC-9 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder) eller bedre, og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
En indre ring med boringsdiameter på mellem 12 og 50 mm
b.
En ydre ring med udvendig diameter på mellem 25 og 100 mm 
og
c.
En bredde på mellem 10 og 20 mm.
2A225
Følgende digler fremstillet af materialer, der er bestandige mod flydende aktinider:
a.
Digler, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et rumfang på mellem 150 cm
3
 og 8 000 cm
3
og
2.
Er fremstillet af eller belagt med et af følgende materialer eller en kombination af følgende materialer af en urenhed på højst 2 vægtprocent:
a.
Calciumfluorid (CaF
2
)
b.
Calciumzirconate (metazirconat) (CaZrO
3
)
c.
Ceriumsulfid (Ce
2
S
3
)
d.
Erbiumoxid (Er
2
O
3
)
e.
Hafniumoxid (HfO
2
)
f.
Magnesiumoxid (MgO)
g.
Nitrideret niobium-titanium-wolfram-legering (ca. 50 % Nb, 30 % Ti, 20 % W)
h.
Yttriumoxid (Y
2
O
3
) 
eller
i.
Zirconiumoxid (ZrO
2
)
b.
Digler, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et rumfang på mellem 50 cm
3
 og 2 000 cm
3
og
2.
Er fremstillet af eller foret med tantal af en renhed på mindst 99,9 vægtprocent
c.
Digler, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et rumfang på mellem 50 cm
3
 og 2 000 cm
3
2.
Er fremstillet af eller foret med tantal af en renhed på mindst 98 vægtprocent 
og
3.
Er belagt med tantalcarbid, nitrid eller borid eller en blanding heraf.
2A226
Ventiler, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Mindst 5 mm 'nominel størrelse'
b.
Har en bælg 
og
c.
Er helt fremstillet af eller foret med aluminium, aluminiumlegering, nikkel eller nikkellegeringer indeholdende mindst 60 % nikkel efter vægt.
Teknisk note:
For ventiler med forskellige indløbs- og udløbsdiameter henviser 'nominel størrelse' i 2A226 til den mindste diameter.
2B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
Tekniske noter:
1.
Sekundære, parallelle, profilgenererende akser (f.eks. w-aksen på horisontale boremøller eller en sekundær roterende akse med en centerlinje, der er parallel med den primære omdrejningsakse) medregnes ikke i det totale antal profilgenererende akser. Omdrejningsakser behøver ikke at dreje 360°. En omdrejningsakse kan drives af en lineær maskindel (f.eks. snekke eller tandstang).
2.
For så vidt angår 2B er antallet af akser, der kan koordineres samtidig til "profilstyring", det antal akser, langs med eller uden om hvilke der under bearbejdelsen af emnet udføres samtidige og indbyrdes forbundne bevægelser mellem emnet og et værktøj. Dette omfatter ikke yderligere akser, langs med eller uden om hvilke der udføres andre arbejdsbevægelser i maskinen, som f.eks.:
a.
Afrettersystemer i slibemaskiner
b.
Parallelle omdrejningsakser til montering af separate emner
c.
Ko-lineære omdrejningsakser til bearbejdning af samme emne ved opspænding i en spændepatron fra hver sin ende.
3.
Aksenomenklaturen skal være i overensstemmelse med International Standard ISO 841:2001, Systemer til industriel automation - Numerisk styring af maskiner - Nomenklatur for koordinatsystem og bevægelsesakser.
4.
For så vidt angår 2B001-2B009 anses en "vippespindel" for at være en omdrejningsakse.
5.
'Opgiven "Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed"' kan anvendes for hver værktøjsmaskinmodel som et alternativ til individuelle maskinprøvninger og bestemmes som følger:
a.
Der udvælges fem maskiner af en model, der skal vurderes
b.
Repeterbarheden af den lineære akse (R↑,R↓) måles i overensstemmelse med ISO 230-2:2014, og "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarheden" for hver akse i hver af de fem maskiner vurderes
c.
Den aritmetiske middelværdi af "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed"-værdierne bestemmes for hver akse i alle fem maskiner. Disse aritmetiske middelværdier af "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed" (
) bliver den opgivne værdi for hver akse i modellen (
,
, …)
d.
Da listen vedrørende kategori 2 vedrører hver enkelt lineære akse, er der lige så mange opgivne "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed"-værdier, som der er lineære akser
e.
Hvis en akse i en maskinmodel, der ikke er specificeret i 2B001.a.-2B001.c., har en opgivet "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed" lig med eller mindre end den opgivne "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed" for hver værktøjsmaskinmodel plus 0,7 μm, bør producenten anmodes om at bekræfte nøjagtighedsniveauet en gang hver 18. måned.
6.
I 2B001.a-2B001.c tages måleusikkerheden i forbindelse med "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed" for værktøjsmaskiner som defineret i den internationale standard ISO 230-2:2014 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder ikke i betragtning.
7.
I 2B001.a.-2B001.c. måles akserne i overensstemmelse med prøvningsprocedurerne i par. 5.3.2. i ISO 230-2:2014. Prøvning af akser af længde over 2 m foretages i segmenter a 2 m. Akser af længde over 4 m skal underkastes flere prøvninger (f.eks. to prøvninger for akser af længde over 4 m og op til 8 m, tre prøvninger for akser af længde over 8 m og op til 12 m), begge i segmenter a 2 m fordelt ligeligt over hele aksens længde. De prøvede segmenter fordeles ligeligt over hele aksens længde, og eventuelle overskydende længder fordeles ligeligt i begyndelsen, på midten og i slutningen af segmenterne. Den mindste "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed"-værdi af alle prøvede segmenter opgives.
2B001
Værktøjsmaskiner og enhver kombination af disse, til fjernelse (eller bearbejdning) af metaller, keramiske materialer eller "kompositter", der ifølge producentens tekniske specifikationer kan udstyres med elektroniske indretninger til "numerisk styring":
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B201.
Note 1:
2B001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på specialværktøjsmaskiner, der er begrænset til fremstilling af tandhjul. For så vidt angår sådanne maskiner, se 2B003.
Note 2:
2B001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på specialværktøjsmaskiner, der er begrænset til fremstilling af en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Krumtapaksler eller knastaksler
b.
Værktøj eller skærestål
c.
Ekstrudersnekker
d.
Graverede eller facetslebne smykkedele 
eller
e.
Tandproteser.
Note 3:
Værktøjsmaskiner, der har mindst to ud af tre egenskaber med hensyn til drejning, fræsning og slibning (f.eks. en drejemaskine, der kan fungere som fræsemaskine), skal vurderes i forhold til hvert af de relevante punkter 2B001.a., b., eller c.
Note 4:
En værktøjsmaskine, der har endnu en produktionsevne ud over drejning, fræsning og slibning, skal vurderes i forhold til hvert af de relevante punkter 2B001.a., b., eller c.
N.B.
Med hensyn til værktøjsmaskiner til optisk finbearbejdning, se 2B002.
a.
Værktøjsmaskiner til drejning, som har to eller flere akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring", og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,9 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde på under 1,0 m 
eller
2.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,1 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde lig med eller større end 1,0 m
Note 1:
2B001.a lægger ikke eksportkontrol på drejemaskiner, der er specielt konstrueret til produktion af kontaktlinser, og som har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Maskinstyringen er begrænset til anvendelse af oftalmisk baseret software til input af data til delprogrammering 
og
b.
Ingen vacuumopspænding.
Note 2:
2B001.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på langdrejeautomater (Swiss-type), som kun kan bearbejde emner med stangladning, hvis stangens diameter højst er 42 mm eller derunder, og hvis der ikke er mulighed for montering af centrerpatroner. Maskinerne kan have bore- eller fræsekapacitet til maskindele med en diameter under 42 mm.
b.
Værktøjsmaskiner til fræsning med en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Tre lineære akser samt en omdrejningsakse, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring" og har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,9 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde på under 1,0 m 
eller
b.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,1 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde lig med eller større end 1,0 m
2.
Fem eller flere akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring" og har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,9 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde på under 1,0 m
b.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,4 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde lig med eller større end 1 m og under 4 m 
eller
c.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 6,0 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde lig med eller større end 4 m
3.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed" for koordinatboremaskiner, som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,1 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser 
eller
4.
Flycuttingmaskiner med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Radial forskydning" og "aksial forskydning" af spindlen mindre (bedre) end 0,0004 mm total indikatorudslag (TIR) 
og
b.
Vinkelforskydning i slædebevægelsen (giring, hældning og rulning) mindre (bedre) end 2 buesekunder, total indikatorudslag (TIR) over 300 mm vandring
c.
Værktøjsmaskiner til slibning med en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Har samtlige følgende:
a.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,1 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser 
og
b.
Tre eller fire akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
eller
2.
Fem eller flere akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring" og har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,1 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde på under 1 m
b.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,4 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde lig med eller større end 1 m og under 4 m 
eller
c.
"Envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 6,0 μm langs en eller flere lineære akser med en vandringslængde lig med eller større end 4 m
Note:
2B001.c lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende slibemaskiner:
a.
Cylindriske, udvendige, indvendige og udvendigt-indvendige slibemaskiner med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Kun til cylindrisk slibning 
og
2.
Kun til en maksimal udvendig diameter eller længde af emnet på 150 mm
b.
Maskiner, der er specielt konstrueret som koordinatslibemaskiner, der ikke har en z-akse eller en w-akse, med en "envejs positioneringsrepeterbarhed", som er mindre (bedre) end 1,1 μm
c.
Overfladeslibemaskiner.
d.
Elektriske udladningsmaskiner (EDM) af typen uden tråd, som har to eller flere omdrejningsakser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
e.
Værktøjsmaskiner til at fjerne metaller, keramiske materialer eller "kompositter" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Fjerner materiale ved hjælp af en af følgende metoder:
a.
Vand eller andre stråler af flydende materiale, inklusive anvendelse af slibende tilsætningsstoffer
b.
Elektronstråle 
eller
c.
"Laser"stråle 
og
2.
Mindst to omdrejningsakser med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
og
b.
En "positioneringsnøjagtighed" på mindre (bedre) end 0,003 °
f.
Maskiner til dybdeboring og drejemaskiner, der er modificeret til dybdeboring med en maksimal boredybdekapacitet på mere end 5 m.
2B002
"Numerisk styrede" værktøjsmaskiner til optisk finbearbejdning, som er udstyret med henblik på selektiv materialeaftagning til fremstilling af ikkesfæriske optiske overflader, der har samtlige følgende kendetegn:
a.
De finbearbejder formen til mindre (bedre) end 1,0 μm
b.
De finbearbejder til en ruhed, der er mindre (bedre) end 100 nm (rms)
c.
Fire eller flere akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
og
d.
De anvender en af følgende processer:
1.
Magnetreologisk finbearbejdning ('MRF')
2.
Elektroreologisk finbearbejdning ('ERF')
3.
'Finbearbejdning med energisk partikelstråle'
4.
'Finbearbejdning med oppustelig membran' 
eller
5.
'Finbearbejdning med væskestråle'.
Tekniske noter:
I forbindelse med 2B002 er
1.
'MRF' en materialeaftagningsproces, der anvender en slibende magnetisk væske, hvis viskositet styres af et magnetfelt.
2.
'ERF' er en aftagningsproces, der anvender en slibende væske, hvis viskositet styres af et elektrisk felt.
3.
'Finbearbejdning med energisk partikelstråle' anvender reaktive atomplasmaer (RAP) eller ionstråler til selektiv aftagning af materiale.
4.
'Finbearbejdning med oppustelig membran' er en proces, hvor der anvendes en membran under tryk, der deformeres for at opnå kontakt med emnet i et lille område.
5.
'Finbearbejdning med væskestråle' anvender en stråle af væske med henblik på materialeaftagning.
2B003
"Numerisk styrede" værktøjsmaskiner, der er specielt konstrueret til at høvle, færdigbehandle, slibe eller polere hærdede (R
c
=40 eller mere) cylindriske, heliske og dobbelt heliske tandhjul med samtlige af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En delediameter på mere end 1 250 mm
b.
En tandbredde på 15 % eller mere af delediameteren 
og
c.
En endelig kvalitet på AGMA 14 eller bedre (svarende til ISO 1328 class 3).
2B004
Varme "isostatiske presser" med samtlige af følgende egenskaber samt specielt konstruerede komponenter og tilbehør hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B104 OG 2B204.
a.
Et styret termisk miljø inde i det lukkede kammer, og med et trykkammer med en indvendig diameter på mindst 406 mm 
og
b.
En eller flere af følgende:
1.
Maksimalt arbejdstryk på mere end 207 MPa
2.
Styret termisk miljø på mere end 1 773 K (1 500 °C) 
eller
3.
Indrettet til hydrocarbonimprægnering og fjernelse af de resulterende luftformige nedbrydningsprodukter.
Teknisk note:
Den indvendige kammerdimension er dimensionen på det kammer, hvor både arbejdstemperaturen og arbejdstrykket opnås, og indbefatter ikke opspændingsmidler. Dimensionen skal være den mindste af enten trykkammerets indvendige diameter eller det isolerede ovnkammers indvendige diameter, afhængigt af hvilket af de to kamre der befinder sig inden i det andet.
N.B.
For så vidt angår specielt konstruerede matricer, forme og redskaber, se 1B003, 9B009 og kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
2B005
Følgende udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til udfældning, behandling og styring under behandlingen af uorganiske belægninger, coatings og overflademodifikationer for substrater, der er specificeret i kolonne 2, ved processer, der er vist i kolonne 1 i tabellen efter 2E003.f, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil til automatisk håndtering, anbringelse, manipulering og styring:
a.
Kemisk dampudfældnings-(CVD)-produktionsudstyr med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B105.
1.
En proces modificeret til en af følgende:
a.
Pulserende CVD
b.
Styret nukleær, termisk nedbrydning (CNTD) 
eller
c.
Plasmaforstærket eller plasmaassisteret CVD 
og
2.
Med en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Omfattende højvakuum (højst 0,01 Pa), roterende pakninger 
eller
b.
Omfatter 
in situ
-styring af belægningstykkelsen
b.
Ionimplanteringsproduktionsudstyr med strålestrømme på mindst 5 mA
c.
Produktionsudstyr med fysisk dampudfældning med elektronstråle (EB-PVD), med kraftforsyning med en ydelse på mere end 80 kW, og som har en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et "laser"styresystem til det flydende bads niveau, som nøjagtigt regulerer tilførselshastigheden af barrer 
eller
2.
En computerstyret hastighedsovervågning, der virker ved princippet om de ioniserede atomers fotoluminans i den fordampende stråle til styring af udfældningshastigheden ved coating, der indeholder to eller flere grundstoffer
d.
Plasmasprøjtningsproduktionsudstyr med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Drift ved en atmosfære, der har begrænset tryk (højst 10 kPa målt over og inden for 300 mm fra pistolens dyseåbning) i et vakuumkammer, der er i stand til at sættes under et vakuum på ned til 0,01 Pa før sprøjteprocessen 
eller
2.
Omfatter 
in situ
-styring af belægningstykkelsen
e.
Sputter belægningsproduktionsudstyr, der kan operere med strømtætheder på mindst 0,1 mA/mm
2
 ved en belægningshastighed på mindst 15 μm/h
f.
Produktionsudstyr til katodebuebelægning, der indbefatter et net af elektromagneter til styring af buepletten på katoden
g.
Produktionsudstyr til ionplettering, der er i stand til at foretage 
in situ
-måling af mindst en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Belægningstykkelsen på substratet og hastighedsstyring 
eller
2.
Optiske egenskaber.
Note:
2B005 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr til kemisk dampudfældning, katodebuebelægning, sputter belægning, ionplettering eller ionimplantering, der er specielt konstrueret til skære- eller værktøjsmaskiner.
2B006
Følgende dimensionsinspektions- eller målesystemer, udstyr, enheder med positionsfeedback og "elektroniske samlinger":
a.
Computerstyrede eller "numerisk styrede" koordinatmålingsmaskiner (CMM) med en tredimensional (volumetrisk) maksimal fejlvisningsmargen ved længdemåling (E
0,MPE
) i et givet punkt inden for maskinens driftsområde (dvs. inden for aksernes længde) lig med eller mindre (bedre) end (1,7 + L/1 000) μm (L er den målte længde i mm) afprøvet efter ISO 10360-2:2009
Teknisk note:
E
0,MPE
 for den mest nøjagtige opsætning af CMM som opgivet af producenten (dvs. det bedste af følgende: sonde, stiftlængde, bevægelsesparametre, omgivelser) og med "alle disponible kompensationer" sammenholdes med tærsklen på 1,7 + L/1 000 μm.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B206.
b.
Følgende måleinstrumenter eller -systemer til lineær forskydning, enheder med lineær positionsfeedback og "elektroniske samlinger":
Note:
Interferometersystemer og optiske enkodermålesystemer, som indeholder en "laser", er kun specificeret i 2B006.b.3 og 2B206.c.
1.
'Kontaktfrie målesystemer' med en "opløsning", der er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,2 μm med et 'måleområde' på mellem 0 og 0,2 mm
Tekniske noter:
Med henblik på 2B006.b.1. gælder følgende:
1.
'kontaktfrie målesystemer' er konstrureret til at måle afstanden mellem proben og den målte genstand langs en enkelt vektor, hvor proben eller den målte genstand er i bevægelse
2.
'måleområde' er afstanden mellem den minimale og den maksimale arbejdsafstand.
2.
Enheder med lineær positionsfeedback, der er specielt konstrueret til værktøjsmaskiner og har en total "nøjagtighed" på mindre (bedre) end (800 + (600 x L/1 000)) nm (L = den effektive længde i mm)
3.
Målesystemer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Indeholder en "laser"
b.
"Opløsning" over deres fulde skala på 0,200 nm eller mindre (bedre) 
og
c.
I stand til at opnå en "måleusikkerhed" – når der er taget højde for luftbrydningsindeks, og målingen er foretaget i 30 sekunder ved en temperatur på 20±0,01 °C – der er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end (1,6 + L/2 000) nm (L er den målte længde i mm) i et givet punkt inden for måleområdet 
eller
4.
"Elektroniske samlinger", der er specielt konstrueret til at give feedbackkapacitet i systemer specificeret i 2B006.b.3.
c.
Feedback-enheder til vinkelposition, der er specielt konstrueret til værktøjsmaskiner, eller instrumenter til måling af vinkelforskydning med en "vinkelstillingsnøjagtighed" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,9 buesekunder
Note:
2B006.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på optiske instrumenter som f.eks. autokollimatorer, der bruger kollimeret lys (f.eks. "laser"lys) til bestemmelse af et spejls vinkelafvigelse.
d.
Udstyr til måling af overfladeruhed (inklusive overfladefejl) ved måling af optisk spredning med en følsomhed på 0,5 nm eller mindre (bedre).
Note:
2B006 omfatter værktøjsmaskiner ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B001, som kan bruges som målemaskiner, hvis de opfylder eller overgår de kriterier, der er specificeret for målemaskinfunktionen.
2B007
"Robotter" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber samt specielt konstruerede styringer og "effektorer" hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B207.
a.
Ikke anvendt.
b.
Specielt konstrueret til at opfylde nationale sikkerhedsstandarder gældende for miljøer med potentielt eksplosivt materiel
Note:
2B007.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "robotter", der er specielt konstrueret til sprøjtemalingskabiner.
c.
Specielt konstrueret eller normeret som strålingshærdede til at modstå en samlet strålingsdosis på mere end 5 x 10
3
 Gy (silicium) uden driftsforringelse 
eller
Teknisk note:
Udtrykket Gy (silicium) betegner den mængde energi i joule pr. kilo, der absorberes af en uafskærmet siliciumprøve, når den udsættes for ioniserende stråling.
d.
Specielt konstrueret til at arbejde i højder over 30 000 m
2B008
Følgende 'kombinerede drejeborde' og "vippespindler", der er specielt konstrueret til værktøjsmaskiner:
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
'Kombinerede drejeborde' med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Konstrueret til værktøjsmaskiner til drejning, fræsning og slibning 
og
2.
To omdrejningsakser, der er konstrueret til at koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
Teknisk note:
Et 'kombineret drejebord' er et border, der gør det muligt at dreje og vippe arbejdsemnet om to ikke-parallelle akser
d.
"Vippespindler" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Konstrueret til værktøjsmaskiner til drejning, fræsning og slibning 
og
2.
Konstrueret til at koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring".
2B009
Maskiner til rotationsformning (spin forming) og flydeformning, som efter producentens tekniske specifikationer kan udstyres med "numeriske styrings"-enheder eller computerstyring med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B109 OG 2B209.
a.
Tre eller flere akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
og
b.
En valsekraft på mere end 60 kN.
Teknisk note:
For så vidt angår 2B009 anses maskiner, der har kombineret rotations- og flydeformningsfunktion, for at være flydeformningsmaskiner.
2B104
"Isostatiske presser" ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B004, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B204.
a.
Maksimalt arbejdstryk på 69 MPa eller derover
b.
Konstrueret til at opnå og vedligeholde et kontrolleret termisk miljø på 873 K (600 °C) eller derover 
og
c.
Har et kammer med en indvendig diameter på 254 mm eller derover.
2B105
Ovne til kemisk dampudfældning (CVD) ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B005.a, som er konstrueret eller modificeret til densifikation af carboncarbonkompositter.
2B109
Flydeformningsmaskiner ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B009, som kan benyttes til "produktion" af fremdrivningskomponenter og udstyr (f.eks. motorhuse og mellemtrin) til "missiler", samt følgende specielt konstruerede komponenter:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B209.
a.
Flydeformningsmaskiner med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udstyret med eller, ifølge producentens tekniske specifikation, mulig at udstyre med "numeriske styrings"-enheder eller computerstyring 
og
2.
Flere end 2 akser, som kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring".
b.
Specielt konstruerede komponenter til flydeformningsmaskiner, der er specificeret i 2B009 eller 2B109.a.
Teknisk note:
Maskiner, der har kombineret rotations- og flydeformningsfunktion, anses for så vidt angår 2B109 for at være flydeformningsmaskiner.
2B116
Følgende vibrationsprøvesystemer og udstyr og komponenter hertil:
a.
Vibrationsprøvesystemer, som bruger teknikker med feedback eller lukket sløjfe og indeholder en digital styreenhed, og som er i stand til at vibrere et system ved en acceleration lig med eller større end 10 g rms (eff.) mellem 20 Hz og 2 kHz, mens der afsættes kræfter lig med eller større end 50 kN, målt på 'tomt vibrationsbord'
b.
Digitale styreenheder, kombineret med specielt konstrueret vibrationsprøvesoftware, med en 'realtidsstyringsbåndbredde' på over 5 kHz og konstrueret til brug sammen med vibrationsprøvesystemer som specificeret i 2B116.a
Teknisk note:
I 2B116.b forstås ved 'realtidsstyringsbåndbredde' det maksimale tempo, hvori en styreenhed kan gennemføre fuldstændige samplingcyklusser, hvor der behandles data og sendes kontrolsignaler.
c.
Vibrationsgeneratorer (rysteenheder) med eller uden forstærkere, som kan afsætte kræfter lig med eller større end 50 kN, målt på 'tomt vibrationsbord', og som kan bruges i vibrationsprøvesystemer som specificeret i 2B116.a
d.
Strukturer til opspænding af prøveemner og elektroniske enheder, som er konstrueret til at kombinere flere rysteenheder til et system, der kan yde en samlet effektiv kraft lig med eller større end 50 kN, målt på 'tomt vibrationsbord', og som kan bruges i vibrationsprøvesystemer som specificeret i 2B116.a.
Teknisk note:
I 2B116 forstås ved 'tomt vibrationsbord' et plant bord eller en plan flade uden nogen form for stativ eller beslag.
2B117
Udstyr og processtyring ud over det, der er specificeret i 2B004, 2B005.a., 2B104 eller 2B105, konstrueret eller modificeret til densifikation og pyrolyse af strukturelle, kompositte raketdyser og næser til reentry vehicles.
2B119
Følgende afbalanceringsmaskiner samt tilhørende udstyr:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B219.
a.
Afbalanceringsmaskiner, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Er ikke i stand til at afbalancere rotorer/samlinger, der har en masse på over 3 kg
2.
Er i stand til at afbalancere rotorer/samlinger ved hastigheder, der overstiger 12 500 omdrejninger pr. minut
3.
Er i stand til at korrigere en ubalance i to planer eller mere 
og
4.
Er i stand til at afbalancere til en residuel specifik ubalance på 0,2 g mm pr. kg. rotormasse
Note:
2B119.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på afbalanceringsmaskiner, der er konstrueret eller modificeret med henblik på tandlægeudstyr eller andet medicinsk udstyr.
b.
Aflæsningsenheder konstrueret eller ændret til anvendelse i forbindelse med maskiner, der er specificeret i 2B119.a.
Teknisk note:
Aflæsningsenheder kaldes undertiden afbalanceringsinstrumentering.
2B120
Bevægelsessimulatorer eller drejeborde, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
To eller flere akser
b.
Konstrueret eller ændret til at indeholde slæberinge eller integrerede kontaktfrie anordninger, der er i stand til at overføre elektrisk kraft, signaloplysninger eller begge dele, 
og
c.
En af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Anordninger med enkelt akse, der har samtlige af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er i stand til at dreje 400 grader/s eller mere eller 30 grader/s eller mindre 
og
b.
Har en drejningsrateresolution lig med eller mindre end 6 grader/s og en nøjagtighed lig med eller mindre end 0,6 grader/s
2.
En worstcasedrejningsratestabilitet lig med eller bedre (mindre) end plus eller minus 0,05 % i gennemsnit over 10 grader eller mere, 
eller
3.
En "positionsnøjagtighed" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 5 buesekunder.
Note 1:
2B120 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på drejeborde, der er konstrueret eller modificeret med henblik på værktøjsmaskiner eller medicinsk udstyr. For så vidt angår eksportkontrol på drejeborde til værktøjsmaskiner se 2B008.
Note 2:
Bevægelsessimulatorer eller drejeborde som specificeret i 2B120 er stadig kontrolleret, uanset om der monteres slæberinge eller integrerede kontaktfrie anordninger i forbindelse med eksport.
2B121
Positioneringsborde (udstyr, der er i stand til præcis rotationspositionering i ethvert plan) ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B120, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
To eller flere akser 
og
b.
En "positionsnøjagtighed" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 5 buesekunder.
Note:
2B121 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på drejeborde, der er konstrueret eller modificeret med henblik på værktøjsmaskiner eller medicinsk udstyr. For så vidt angår eksportkontrol på drejeborde til værktøjsmaskiner se 2B008.
2B122
Centrifuger, der er i stand til at frembringe accelerationer på over 100 g, og som er konstrueret eller modificeret til at indeholde slæberinge eller integrerede kontaktfrie anordninger, der er i stand til at overføre elektrisk kraft, signaloplysninger eller begge dele.
Note:
Centrifuger som specificeret i 2B122 er stadig kontrolleret, uanset om der monteres slæberinge eller integrerede kontaktfrie anordninger i forbindelse med eksport.
2B201
Følgende værktøjsmaskiner og enhver kombination heraf ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B001, til fjernelse eller bearbejdning af metaller, keramiske materialer eller "kompositter", og som ifølge producentens tekniske specifikationer kan udstyres med elektroniske indretninger til samtidig "profilstyring" i to eller flere akser:
Teknisk note:
I stedet for individuelle maskinprøvninger kan der for hver værktøjsmaskinmodel anvendes opgivne positioneringsnøjagtighed-værdier, som udledes af målinger foretaget efter følgende procedurer i overensstemmelse med ISO 230-2:1988
(
6
)
eller tilsvarende nationale standarder, hvis de indberettes til og accepteres af de nationale myndigheder. Bestemmelse af opgiven positioneringsnøjagtighed:
a.
Der udvælges fem maskiner af en model, der skal vurderes
b.
Nøjagtigheden af den lineære akse måles i overensstemmelse med ISO 230-2:1988
1
c.
Nøjagtighedsværdierne (A) for hver akse i hver maskine bestemmes. Metoden til beregning af nøjagtighedsværdien er beskrevet i ISO 230-2:1988
1
-standarden
d.
Den gennemsnitlige nøjagtighedsværdi for hver akse bestemmes. Denne gennemsnitsværdi bliver den opgivne positioneringsnøjagtighed for hver akse i modellen (Âx, Ây …)
e.
Da 2B201 vedrører hver enkelt lineære akse, er der lige så mange opgivne positioneringsnøjagtighed-værdier, som der er lineære akser
f.
Hvis en akse i en værktøjsmaskine, der ikke er specificeret i 2B201.a., 2B201.b. eller 2B201.c., har en opgivet positioneringsnøjagtighed på 6 μm eller bedre (mindre) for slibemaskiner og 8 μm eller bedre (mindre) for fræse- og drejemaskiner, i begge tilfælde i henhold til ISO 230
-
2:1988
1
, bør producenten anmodes om at bekræfte nøjagtighedsniveauet en gang hver 18. måned.
a.
Værktøjsmaskiner til fræsning med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Positioneringsnøjagtigheder, med "alle disponible kompenseringer", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 6 μm i henhold til 230-2:1988
1
 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder langs en eller flere lineære akser
2.
To eller flere profilstyrede omdrejningsakser 
eller
3.
Fem eller flere akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
Note:
2B201.a lægger ikke eksportkontrol på fræsemaskiner med følgende egenskaber:
a.
X-aksens vandring er større end 2 m 
og
b.
Den samlede positioneringsnøjagtighed på x-aksen er større (ringere) end 30 μm.
b.
Værktøjsmaskiner til slibning med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Positioneringsnøjagtigheder, med "alle disponible kompenseringer", som er lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 4 μm i henhold til 230-2:1988
1
 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder langs en eller flere lineære akser
2.
To eller flere profilstyrede omdrejningsakser 
eller
3.
Fem eller flere akser, der kan koordineres samtidigt til "profilstyring"
Note:
2B201.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende slibemaskiner:
a.
Cylindriske, udvendige, indvendige og udvendigt-indvendige slibemaskiner med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Kun til en maksimal udvendig diameter eller længde af emnet på 150 mm 
og
2.
Akser begrænset til x, z og c
b.
Koordinatslibemaskiner, der ikke har en z-akse eller en w-akse med en samlet positioneringsnøjagtighed, der er mindre (bedre) end 4 μm, i overensstemmelse med ISO 230-2:1988
1
 eller tilsvarende nationale standarder.
c.
Værktøjsmaskiner til drejning, der har positioneringsnøjagtigheder med "alle disponible kompenseringer", som er bedre (mindre) end 6 μm i henhold til ISO 230-2:1988
1
 langs en eller flere lineære akser (samlet positionering), til maskiner, der kan fremstille diametre større end 35 mm
Note:
2B201.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på langdrejeautomater (Swiss-type), som kun kan bearbejde emner med stangladning, hvis stangens diameter højst er 42 mm eller derunder, og hvis der ikke er mulighed for montering af centrerpatroner. Maskinerne kan have bore- og/eller fræsekapacitet til maskindele med en diameter under 42 mm.
Note 1:
2B201 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på specialværktøjsmaskiner, der er begrænset til fremstilling af en eller flere af følgende dele:
a.
Tandhjul
b.
Krumtapaksler eller knastaksler
c.
Værktøj eller skærestål
d.
Ekstrudersnekker
Note 2:
Værktøjsmaskiner, der har mindst to ud af tre egenskaber med hensyn til drejning, fræsning og slibning (f.eks. en drejemaskine, der kan fungere som fræsemaskine), skal vurderes i forhold til hvert af de relevante punkter 2B201.a., b., eller c.
Note 3:
2B201.a.3. og 2B201.b.3. omfatter maskiner baseret på en parallel, lineær kinematisk konstruktion (f.eks. hexapoder) med fem eller flere akser, hvoraf ingen er omdrejningsakser.
2B204
Følgende "isostatiske presser" ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B004 eller 2B104, samt beslægtet udstyr:
a.
"Isostatiske presser", der har begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Er i stand til at opnå et maksimalt arbejdstryk på 69 MPa eller mere 
og
2.
Har et kammer med indvendig diameter på mere end 152 mm
b.
De matricer, forme og styreanordninger, der er specielt konstrueret til "isostatiske presser", som specificeret i 2B204.a.
Teknisk note:
I 2B204 svarer kammerets indvendige diameter til dimensionen på det kammer, hvor både arbejdstemperaturen og arbejdstrykket opnås, og omfatter ikke opspændingsanordninger. Dimensionen skal være den mindste af enten trykkammerets indvendige diameter eller det isolerede ovnkammers indvendige diameter, afhængigt af hvilket af de to kamre der befinder sig inden i det andet.
2B206
Følgende dimensionsinspektionsmaskiner, -instrumenter eller -systemer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B006:
a.
Computerstyrede eller numerisk styrede koordinatmålingsmaskiner (CMM) med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Har kun to akser og en maksimal fejlvisningsmargen ved længdemåling langs en akse (endimensional), defineret som en kombination af E
0x,MPE
, E
0y,MPE
 eller E
0z,MPE
 lig med eller mindre (bedre) end (1,25 + L/1 000) μm (hvor L er den målte længde i mm) i et givet punkt inden for maskinens driftsområde (dvs. inden for aksens længde), i henhold til ISO 10360-2:2009 
eller
2.
Tre akser eller flere og en tredimensional maksimal fejlvisningsmargen ved længdemåling (E
0,MPE
), lig med eller mindre (bedre) end (1,7 + L/800) μm (hvor L er den målte længde i mm) i et givet punkt inden for maskinens driftsområde (dvs. inden for aksens længde), i henhold til ISO 10360-2:2009
Teknisk note:
E
0,MPE
 for den mest nøjagtige opsætning af CMM i som specificeret i henhold til ISO 10360-2:2009 af producenten (dvs. det bedste af følgende: sonde, stiftlængde, bevægelsesparametre, omgivelser) og med alle disponible kompensationer sammenholdes med tærsklen på 1,7 + L/800 μm.
b.
Systemer til samtidig lineær-vinkel inspektion af halvskaller med begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Måleusikkerhed" langs enhver lineær akse lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 3,5 μm pr. 5 mm 
og
2.
"Vinkelstillingsafvigelse" lig med eller mindre end 0,02 °
c.
Systemer til måling af 'lineær forskydning' med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
Teknisk note:
I 2B206.c. forstås ved 'lineær forskydning' en ændring af afstanden mellem måleproben og den målte genstand.
1.
Indeholder en "laser"
og
2.
I stand til at bibeholde samtlige følgende egenskaber i mindst 12 timer ved en temperatur på ± 1 K (± 1 °C) omkring en standardtemperatur og ved et standardtryk:
a.
"Opløsning" over deres fulde skala på 0,1 μm eller bedre 
og
b.
Med en "måleusikkerhed", der er lig med eller bedre (mindre) end (0,2 + L/2 000) μm (L er den målte længde i mm).
Note:
2B206.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på måleinterferometersystemer uden lukket eller åben tilbagekoblingssløjfe, som indeholder en laser til måling af værktøjsmaskiners, dimensionsinspektionsmaskiners eller lignende udstyrs slædebevægelsesfejl.
d.
Systemer med lineær variabel differential transformering (LVDT) med begge følgende egenskaber:
Teknisk note:
I 2B206.d. forstås ved 'lineær forskydning' en ændring af afstanden mellem måleproben og den målte genstand.
1.
Med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Linearitet" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,1 % målt fra 0 til det fulde driftsområde for LVDT'er med et driftsområde på op til 5 mm 
eller
b.
"Linearitet" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,1 % målt fra 0 til 5 mm for LVDT'er med et driftsområde, der er større end 5 mm, 
og
2.
Drift lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,1 % pr. døgn ved en standard-prøverumstemperatur på ±1 K (± 1 °C).
Note 1:
Værktøjsmaskiner, der kan bruges som målemaskiner, er pålagt eksportkontrol, hvis de opfylder eller overgår de kriterier, der er specificeret for værktøjsmaskinfunktionen eller målemaskinfunktionen.
Note 2:
En maskine, der er specificeret i 2B206, er pålagt eksportkontrol, hvis den overgår eksportkontroltærskelen på noget sted i dens driftsområde.
Teknisk note:
Samtlige parametre for måleværdier i 2B206 betegner plus/minus, dvs. ikke det samlede bånd.
2B207
Følgende "robotter", "effektorer" og kontrolenheder ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B007:
a.
"Robotter" eller "effektorer", som er specielt konstrueret til at overholde nationale sikkerhedsstandarder vedrørende håndtering af højeksplosiver (f.eks. elektriske kodekategorier for højeksplosiver)
b.
Styreanordninger, der er specielt konstrueret til "robotter" og "effektorer", der er specificeret i 2B207.a.
2B209
Følgende flydeformningsmaskiner, rotationsformningsmaskiner, som kan udføre flydeformningsopgaver ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B009 eller 2B109, og dorne:
a.
Maskiner, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Har tre eller flere valser (aktive eller styrende) 
og
2.
Ifølge producentens tekniske specifikation kan udstyres med "numeriske styrings"-enheder eller computerstyring
b.
Dorne til rotorfremstilling, beregnet til formning af cylindriske rotorer med en indvendig diameter mellem 75 mm og 400 mm.
Note:
2B209.a. omfatter maskiner med kun én valse, beregnet til at deformere metal, plus to hjælpevalser, der støtter dornen, men som ikke deltager direkte i deformationsprocessen.
2B219
Følgende centrifugale, multiplansafbalanceringsmaskiner, faste eller transportable, vandrette eller lodrette:
a.
Centrifugalafbalanceringsmaskiner konstrueret til afbalancering af bøjelige rotorer af en længde på mindst 600 mm og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Sving- eller lejediameter på mere end 75 mm
2.
Massekapacitet fra 0,9 til 23 kg 
og
3.
I stand til at afbalancere ved hastigheder på mere end 5 000 omdrejninger pr. minut
b.
Centrifugalafbalanceringsmaskiner konstrueret til afbalancering af hule, cylindriske rotorkomponenter og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Lejediameter på mere end 75 mm
2.
Massekapacitet fra 0,9 til 23 kg
3.
En mindsteværdi for en opnåelig specifik restubalance på højst 10 g mm/kg pr. plan og
4.
Bæltedrevne.
2B225
Fjernmanipulatorer, som kan bruges til at udføre fjernbevægelser i radiokemiske adskillelsesoperationer eller hotcells, som har en af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er i stand til at fungere gennem en væg på mindst 0,6 m i et hot cell-anlæg (gennem væggen-operation) eller
b.
Er i stand til at række over toppen af en væg med en tykkelse på mindst 0,6 m i et hot cell-anlæg (over væggen-operation).
Teknisk note:
Fjernmanipulatorer overfører en menneskelig operatørs bevægelser til en bevægelig arm og opspændingsanordning. De kan være af 'master-slave'-typen eller styres med joystick eller tastatur.
2B226
Induktionsovne med styret atmosfære (vakuum eller inaktiv luftart) ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9B001 og 3B001, samt kraftforsyning hertil som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 3B001 OG 9B001.
a.
Ovne, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Er i stand til at fungere ved over 1 123 K (850 °C)
2.
Har induktionsspoler med en diameter på højst 600 mm 
og
3.
Er konstrueret til en indgangseffekt på mindst 5 kW
Note:
2B226.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på ovne konstrueret til fremstilling af halvlederskiver.
b.
Kraftforsyninger med en specificeret udgangseffekt på mindst 5 kW, som er specielt konstrueret til ovne, der er specificeret i 2B226.a.
2B227
Følgende metallurgiske smelte- og støbeovne med vakuumtryk eller anden trykstyring, samt tilhørende udstyr:
a.
Lysbueovne til omsmeltning, lysbueovne til smeltning og lysbueovne til omsmeltning og støbning, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Med smelteelektrodekapacitet mellem 1 000 cm
3
 og 20 000 cm
3
og
2.
Er i stand til at operere med smeltetemperaturer på over 1 973 K (1 700 °C)
b.
Elektronstrålesmelteovne, plasmaforstøvningsovne og plasmasmelteovne med begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
En effekt på mindst 50 kW 
og
2.
Er i stand til at operere med smeltetemperaturer på over 1 473 K (1 200 °C)
c.
Specielt konfigurerede computerstyrings- og overvågningssystemer til nogen af de ovne, der er specificeret i 2B227.a eller 2B227.b
d.
Plasmabrændere, der er specielt konstrueret til ovne som specificeret i 2B227.b., og som har begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Opererer ved en effekt på over 50 kW 
og
2.
Er i stand til at operere over 1 473 K (1 200 °C)
e.
Elektronkanoner, der er specielt konstrueret til de ovne, der er specificeret i 2B227.b., og som opererer ved en effekt på over 50 kW.
2B228
Følgende udstyr til fremstilling eller samling af rotorer, udstyr til retning af rotorer samt dorne og forme til fremstilling af bælge:
a.
Rotorsamleudstyr til samling af rørsektioner, baffler og endedæksler til gascentrifugerotorer
Note:
2B228.a. omfatter præcisionsdorne, bøjler og maskiner til krympepasning.
b.
Udstyr til retning af rotorer til indretning af gascentrifugerotorrørsektioner efter en fælles akse
Teknisk note:
I 2B228.b består sådant udstyr normalt af præcisionsmålehoveder tilsluttet en computer, som derefter styrer for eksempel pneumatiske stempler, der bruges til indretning af rotorrørsektioner.
c.
Bælgformedorne og forme til fremstilling af enkeltsnoede bælge.
Teknisk note:
I 2B228.c. har bælgene samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indvendig diameter på mellem 75 mm og 400 mm
2.
Længde på mindst 12,7 mm
3.
Enkeltviklingsdybde på mere end 2 mm 
og
4.
Fremstillet af aluminiumlegeringer af høj styrke, martensitisk stål eller "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" af høj styrke.
2B230
Alle typer 'tryktransducere', som er i stand til at måle absolutte tryk, og som har samtlige følgende:
a.
Trykfølerelementer, der er fremstillet af eller beskyttet af aluminium, aluminiumlegeringer, aluminiumoxid (safir), nikkel, nikkellegeringer med mere end 60 vægtprocent nikkel eller fuldt fluorerede hydrocarbonpolymerer
b.
Eventuelle pakninger til forsegling af trykfølerelementer, og i direkte kontakt med procesmediet, som er fremstillet af eller beskyttet af aluminium, aluminiumlegeringer, aluminiumoxid (safir), nikkel, nikkellegeringer med mere end 60 vægtprocent nikkel eller fuldt fluorerede hydrocarbonpolymerer 
og
c.
Som har en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et fuldt udslag på mindre end 13 kPa og en 'nøjagtighed' bedre end 1 % af fuldt udslag eller
2.
Et fuldt udslag på mindst 13 kPa og en 'nøjagtighed' bedre end 130 Pa målt ved 13 kPa.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 2B230 forstås ved 'tryktransducer' en anordning, der konverterer en trykmåling til et signal.
2.
I 2B230 omfatter 'nøjagtighed' ulinearitet, hysterese og repeterbarhed ved omgivelsestemperatur.
2B231
Vakuumpumper, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Indsugningsportstørrelse på mindst 380 mm
b.
En pumpekapacitet på mindst 15 m
3
/s 
og
c.
Er i stand til at danne et maksimalt vakuum bedre end 13 mPa.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Pumpehastigheden bestemmes i målepunkterne med nitrogengas eller luft.
2.
Det maksimale vakuum bestemmes ved pumpens indgang med indgangssiden blokeret.
2B232
Højhastighedskanonsystemer (driv-, gas-, spole-, elektromagnetiske og elektrotermiske typer samt andre avancerede systemer), der er i stand til at accelerere projektiler til mindst 1,5 km/s.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
2B233
Bælgtætnede scrollkompressorer og bælgtætnede scrollvakuumpumper, som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B350.i.
a.
En indsugningsvolumenstrøm på mindst 50 m
3
/h
b.
Et trykforhold på 2:1 eller højere 
og
c.
Alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med procesgasser, er fremstillet af et af følgende materialer:
1.
Aluminium eller aluminiumlegeringer
2.
Aluminiumoxid
3.
Rustfrit stål
4.
Nikkel eller nikkellegering
5.
Phosphorbronze eller
6.
Fluorholdige polymerer.
2B350
Følgende kemiske produktionsfaciliteter, udstyr og komponenter:
a.
Reaktionstanke og reaktorer, med eller uden omrøringsudstyr, med et samlet indvendigt (geometrisk) volumen på mere end 0,1 m
3
 (100 l) og mindre end 20 m
3
 (20 000 l), hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede eller indeholdte kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
N.B.
For præfabrikerede reparationssamlinger henvises til 2B350.k.
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
3.
Glas (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt eller glasforet)
4.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
5.
Tantal eller 'tantallegeringer'
6.
Titan eller 'titanlegeringer'
7.
Zirconium eller 'zirconiumlegeringer' 
eller
8.
Niobium (columbium) eller 'niobiumlegeringer'.
b.
Omrøringsudstyr konstrueret til brug i reaktionstanke eller reaktorer som specificeret i 2B350.a. samt skovlhjul, blade og aksler til brug i et sådant omrøringsudstyr, hvor alle de overflader på omrøringsudstyret, som kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede eller indeholdte kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
3.
Glas (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt eller glasforet)
4.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
5.
Tantal eller tantal'legeringer'
6.
Titan eller titan'legeringer'
7.
Zirconium eller zirconium'legeringer' 
eller
8.
Niobium (columbium) eller niobium'legeringer'.
c.
Lagertanke, beholdere og holdetanke med et samlet indvendigt (geometrisk) volumen på mere end 0,1 m
3
 (100 l), hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede eller indeholdte kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
N.B.
For præfabrikerede reparationssamlinger henvises til 2B350.k.
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
3.
Glas (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt eller glasforet)
4.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
5.
Tantal eller tantal'legeringer'
6.
Titan eller titan'legeringer'
7.
Zirconium eller zirconium'legeringer' 
eller
8.
Niobium (columbium) eller niobium'legeringer'.
d.
Varmevekslere eller kondensatorer med et varmeoverføringsareal på mere end 0,15 m
2
, og mindre end 20 m
2
 samt rør, plader, spiraler eller blokke (kerner) til brug i sådanne varmevekslere eller kondensatorer, hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
3.
Glas (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt eller glasforet)
4.
Grafit eller 'carbongrafit'
5.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
6.
Tantal eller tantal'legeringer'
7.
Titan eller titan'legeringer'
8.
Zirconium eller zirconium'legeringer'
9.
Siciliumcarbid
10.
Titancarbid 
eller
11.
Niobium (columbium) eller niobium'legeringer'.
e.
Destillations- eller absorptionskolonner med indre diameter større end 0,1 m samt væskefordelere, dampfordelere eller væskesamlere til brug i sådanne destillations- og absorptionskolonner, hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
3.
Glas (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt eller glasforet)
4.
Grafit eller 'carbongrafit'
5.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
6.
Tantal eller tantal'legeringer'
7.
Titan eller titan'legeringer'
8.
Zirconium eller zirconium'legeringer' 
eller
9.
Niobium (columbium) eller niobium'legeringer'.
f.
Fjernstyret påfyldningsudstyr, hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom 
eller
2.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
g.
Ventiler og komponenter som følger:
1.
Ventiler, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
En 'nominel størrelse' på over DN 10 eller NPS 3/8 
og
b.
Alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de producerede, behandlede eller indeholdte kemikalier, er fremstillet af 'korrosionsbestandige materialer'
2.
Ventiler ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B350.g.1, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
En 'nominel størrelse' lig med eller større end DN 25 eller NPS 1 og lig med eller mindre end DN 100 eller NPS 4
b.
Indkapslinger (ventilhuse) eller præformede indkapslingsforinger
c.
Et lukkeelement, der er udskifteligt 
og
d.
Alle overflader af indkapslingen (ventilhuset) og den præformede indkapslingsforing, der kommer i direkte berøring med de producerede, behandlede eller indeholdte kemikalier, er fremstillet af 'korrosionsbestandige materialer'
3.
Komponenter, der er konstrueret til ventiler som specificeret i 2B350.g.1 eller 2B350.g.2, hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de producerede, behandlede eller indeholdte kemikalier, er fremstillet af 'korrosionsbestandige materialer' som følger:
a.
Indkapslinger (ventilhuse)
b.
Præformede indkapslingsforinger
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 2B350.g. forstås ved 'korrosionsbestandige materialer' et eller flere af følgende materialer:
a.
Nikkel eller legeringer med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
b.
Legeringer med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
c.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
d.
Glas eller glasforet (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt)
e.
Tantal eller tantallegeringer
f.
Titan eller titanlegeringer
g.
Zirconium eller zirconiumlegeringer
h.
Niobium (columbium) eller niobiumlegeringer. 
eller
i.
Følgende keramiske materialer:
1.
Siliciumcarbid med en renhed på mindst 80 vægtprocent
2.
Aluminiumoxid med en renhed på mindst 99,9 vægtprocent
3.
Zirconiumoxid.
2.
'Nominel størrelse' defineres som den mindste af henholdsvis indløbs- og udløbsdiameter.
3.
Ventilers nominelle størrelser (DN) er i overensstemmelse med ISO 6708:1995. Rørs nominelle størrelser (NPS) er i overensstemmelse med ASME B36.10 eller B36.19 eller nationale ækvivalenter.
h.
Flervæggede rør med udtag til detektering af utæthed, hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede eller indeholdte kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
3.
Glas (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt eller glasforet)
4.
Grafit eller 'carbongrafit'
5.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
6.
Tantal eller 'tantallegeringer'
7.
Titan eller 'titanlegeringer'
8.
Zirconium eller 'zirconiumlegeringer' 
eller
9.
Niobium (columbium) eller 'niobiumlegeringer'.
i.
Flerdobbelttætte og pakningsløse pumper med en fabrikantspecificeret maksimal gennemstrømningshastighed på over 0,6 m
3
/time, vakuumpumper med en fabrikantspecificeret maksimal gennemstrømningshastighed på over 5 m
3
/time (ved standardtemperatur (273 K (0 °C)) og -tryk (101,3 kPa) ud over dem, der er specificeret i 2B233, samt indkapslinger (pumpehuse), præfabrikerede indkapslingsforinger, skovlhjul, rotorer eller jetpumpedyser til brug i sådanne pumper, hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede kemikalier, er fremstillet af:
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Keramisk materiale
3.
Ferrosilicium (jernlegeringer med højt siliciumindhold)
4.
Fluorholdige polymerer (polymere eller elastomere materialer med mere end 35 vægtprocent fluor)
5.
Glas (herunder glas- eller emaljebelagt eller glasforet)
6.
Grafit eller 'carbongrafit'
7.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
8.
Tantal eller 'tantallegeringer'
9.
Titan eller 'titanlegeringer'
10.
Zirconium eller 'zirconiumlegeringer' 
eller
11.
Niobium (columbium) eller 'niobiumlegeringer'.
Teknisk note:
I 2B350.i. henviser pakninger kun til den type tætninger, der kommer i direkte berøring med de behandlede kemikalier (eller er konstrueret hertil), og fungerer som forsegling, hvor en roterende eller frem- og tilbagegående drivaksel går gennem pumpehuset.
j.
Incineratorer konstrueret til destruktion af de kemiske stoffer, der er specificeret i 1C350, med specielt konstruerede affaldstilførselssystemer, specielle håndteringsfaciliteter og en gennemsnitlig temperatur i forbrændingsrummet på over 1 273 K (1 000 °C), hvor alle overflader, der kommer i direkte berøring med affaldsprodukterne, er fremstillet af eller foret med:
1.
'Legeringer' med mere end 25 vægtprocent nikkel og 20 vægtprocent chrom
2.
Keramisk materiale 
eller
3.
Nikkel eller 'legeringer' med mere end 40 vægtprocent nikkel
k.
Præfabrikerede reparationssamlinger med metaloverflader, der kommer i direkte kontakt med de(t) kemikalie(r), der forarbejdes, som er fremstillet af tantal eller tantallegeringer, som følger, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
1.
Konstrueret til mekanisk fastgørelse til de glasforede reaktionstanke og reaktorer, der er specificeret i 2B350.a. 
eller
2.
Konstrueret til mekanisk fastgørelse til de glasforede lagertanke, beholdere og væskesamlere, der er specificeret i 2B350.c.
Note:
I 2B350 afgøres eksportkontrolstatus ikke af, hvilke materialer der anvendes til pakninger, pakningsmidler, tætninger, skruer, møtrikker og andre materialer, der anvendes til en forsegling, forudsat at disse komponenter er udskiftelige.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Carbongrafit' er en sammensætning bestående af amorf carbon og grafit med et grafitindhold på mindst otte vægtprocent.
2.
For de anførte materialer i ovennævnte produkter forstås ved 'legering', hvis der ikke er angivet nogen specifik koncentration af stoffet, en legering, hvor det pågældende metal indgår med en større vægtprocent end noget andet stof.
2B351
Følgende overvågnings- og kontrolsystemer til giftige gasser og dedikerede detekteringskomponenter, bortset fra dem, der er specificeret i 1A004, samt detektorer, følere og udskiftelige følerpatroner hertil:
a.
Konstrueret til kontinuerlig drift og brugbare til detektering af stoffer til kemisk krigsførelse eller de i 1C350 specificerede kemiske stoffer ved koncentrationer på mindre end 0,3 mg/m
3
eller
b.
Konstrueret til detektering af cholinesterasehæmmende aktivitet.
2B352
Følgende udstyr til håndtering af biologiske materialer:
a.
Følgende faciliteter til biologisk indkapsling og beslægtet udstyr:
1.
Komplette faciliteter til indkapsling, der opfylder kriterierne for indkapslingniveau P3 eller P4 (BL3, BL4, L3, L4) som specificeret i WHO's Laboratory Biosafety Manual (3. udg., Genève, 2004)
2.
Følgende udstyr, der er konstrueret til fast installation i faciliteter til indkapsling, og som er specificeret i 2B352.a.:
a.
Dobbeltdørsgennemgangsautoklaver til dekontaminering
b.
Dekontameringsbrusere med ventileret dragt;
c.
Gennemgangsdøre med mekanisk tætning eller oppustelig tætning
b.
Gæringsanlæg og komponenter som følger:
1.
Gæringsanlæg, der kan anvendes til dyrkning af "mikroorganismer" eller af levende celler til produktion af virus eller toksiner, uden udledning af aerosol, og som har en samlet indre volumen på mindst 20 liter
2.
Følgende komponenter til gæringsanlæg, som er specificeret i 2B352.b.1.:
a.
Dyrkningskamre konstrueret til at blive steriliseret eller desinficeret på stedet
b.
Holdere til dyrkningskamre
c.
Proceskontrolenheder, som samtidig kan overvåge og kontrollere to eller flere gæringssystemparametre (f.eks. temperatur, pH, næringsmidler, omrøring, opløst oxygen, lufttilstrømning, skumkontrol)
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 2B352.b. omfatter gæringsanlæg bioreaktorer, bioreaktorer til engangsbrug, kemostater og systemer med kontinuerlig gennemstrømning.
2.
Holdere til dyrkningskamre omfatter bl.a. engangsdyrkningskamre med stive vægge.
c.
Centrifugalseparatorer, der kan foretage kontinuerlig adskillelse uden udledning af aerosol, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Gennemstrømningshastighed på mere end 100 liter/time
2.
Komponenter af poleret rustfrit stål eller titan
3.
En eller flere forseglinger i dampindeslutningsområdet 
og
4.
Kan steriliseres på stedet i lukket tilstand
Teknisk note:
Centrifugalcentrifuger omfatter dekanteringskar.
d.
Følgende filtreringsudstyr med krydsende (tangential) strømning og komponenter:
1.
Filtreringsudstyr med krydsende (tangential) strømning, der kan foretage adskillelse af "mikroorganismer", virus, toksiner eller cellekulturer, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Et samlet filtreringsareal på mindst 1 m
2
og
b.
En af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Kan steriliseres eller desinficeres på stedet 
eller
2.
Anvender engangsfiltreringskomponenter
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 2B352.d.1.b betyder sterilisering eliminering af samtlige levedygtige mikrober i udstyret ved hjælp af fysiske agenser (f.eks. damp) eller kemiske agenser. Desinficering betyder nedbrydelse af mikrobers potentielle smitteevne i udstyret ved hjælp af kimdræbende kemiske agenser. Desinficering og sterilisering adskiller sig fra hygiejnisering, idet der ved sidstnævnte forstås rensningsprocedurer, der skal nedbringe indholdet af mikrober i udstyret, uden at dette nødvendigvis fører til total eliminering af mikrobernes smitteevne eller levedygtighed.
Note:
2B352.d lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr til omvendt osmose og hæmodialyse som specificeret af fabrikanten.
2.
Filtreringskomponenter med krydsende (tangential) strømning (f.eks. moduler, elementer, kassetter, patroner eller plader) med et filtreringsareal på mindst 0,2 m
2
 for hver komponent og konstrueret til brug i det filtreringsudstyr med krydsende (tangential) strømning, der er specificeret i 2B352.d
e.
Damp- eller gassteriliserbart udstyr til frysetørring, med en kondenseringskapacitet på mindst 10 kg is på 24 timer og under 1 000 kg is på 24 timer
f.
Følgende beskyttelses- og indkapslingsudstyr:
1.
Beskyttelsesdragter (hel- eller halvdragter) eller hætter med tilkoblet ekstern lufttilførsel, og som fungerer med overtryk
Note:
2B352.f.1 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på dragter, der skal anvendes med indbygget åndedrætsudstyr.
2.
Kamre til biologisk indeslutning, isoleringsudstyr eller biologiske sikkerhedsskabe med samtlige følgende egenskaber, til normal drift:
a.
Helt aflukket arbejdsplads, hvor operatøren er adskilt fra arbejdet af en fysisk barriere
b.
Kan betjenes under undertryk
c.
Et middel til sikker håndtering af genstande på arbejdspladsen
d.
Lufttilførsel til og luftudslip fra arbejdspladsen er HEPA-filtreret
Note 1:
2B352.f.2 omfatter klasse III biologiske sikkerhedsskabe som beskrevet i den seneste udgave af WHO's Laboratory Biosafety manual eller fremstillet i overensstemmelse med nationale standarder, bestemmelser og vejledninger.
Note 2:
2B352.f.2. omfatter ikke isoleringsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til beskyttelse af sundhedspersonale (barrier nursing) eller transport af inficerede patienter.
g.
Aerosolindåndingsudstyr, der er konstrueret til aerosolprovokationsprøvning med "mikroorganismer", virus eller "toksiner" som følger:
1.
Kamre til eksponering af hele kroppen med en kapacitet på mindst 1 m
3
.
2.
Udstyr til eksponering udelukkende gennem næsen, der anvender styret flow af aerosol og med en eksponeringskapacitet for en eller flere af følgende:
a.
12 eller flere gnavere 
eller
b.
2 eller flere dyr, der ikke er gnavere
3.
Lukkede fastspændingsslanger på dyr, der er konstrueret til anvendelse i forbindelse med udstyr til eksponering udelukkende gennem næsen, der anvender styret flow af aerosol
h.
Spraytørringsudstyr, der kan tørre toksiner eller patogene "mikroorganismer", og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Vandfordampningskapacitet på ≥ 0,4 kg/h og ≤ 400 kg/h
2.
Kan generere en typisk gennemsnitlig partikelstørrelse på ≤ 10 μm med eksisterende fittings eller minimal ændring af spraytørreren med forstøvningsdyser, der kan generere den ønskede partikelstørrelse, 
og
3.
Kan steriliseres eller desinficeres på stedet.
i.
Nukleinsyresamlere og –synthesizere, der helt eller delvis automamiserede og konstruerede til kontinuerligt at generere nukleinsyrer med en længde på over 1,5 kilobaser og fejlprocenter på under 5 % pr. prøvningsforløb.
2C   
Materialer
Ingen.
2D   
Software
2D001
Anden "software" end software, der er specificeret i 2D002, som følger:
a.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 2A001 eller 2B001
b.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 2A001.c, 2B001 eller 2B003-2B009.
Note:
2D001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på partprogrammerings"software", der genererer koder til "numerisk kontrol" til fremstilling af forskellige dele.
2D002
"Software" til elektroniske anordninger, uanset om det indgår i en elektronisk anordning eller et elektronisk system, såfremt det kan sætte sådanne anordninger eller systemer i stand til at fungere som en enhed med "numerisk styring", der er i stand til samtidig koordinering af mere end 4 akser med henblik på "profilstyring".
Note 1:
2D002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til drift af produkter, der ikke er specificeret i kategori 2.
Note 2:
2D002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "software" til produkter, der er specificeret i 2B002. Se 2D001 og 2D003 vedrørende "software" til produkter, der er specificeret i 2B002.
Note 3:
2D002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "software", der eksporteres med produkter, der ikke er specificeret i kategori 2, og på det minimum, der kræves til drift heraf.
2D003
"Software", der er konstrueret eller modificeret til drift af udstyr specificeret i 2B002, som konverterer optisk opbygning, målinger af arbejdsemner og materialeaftagningsfunktioner til "numeriske styringskommandoer" for at opnå den ønskede form på arbejdsemnet.
2D101
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller ændret til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 2B104, 2B105, 2B109, 2B116, 2B117 eller 2B119-2B122.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9D004.
2D201
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 2B204, 2B206, 2B207, 2B209, 2B219 eller 2B227.
2D202
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 2B201.
Note:
2D202 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på partprogrammerings"software", der genererer koder til "numerisk kontrol", men ikke tillader direkte brug af udstyr til fremstilling af forskellige dele.
2D351
"Software", bortset fra det, der er specificeret i 1D003, der er specielt udviklet til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 2B351.
2E   
Teknologi
2E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 2A, 2B eller 2D.
Note:
2E001 omfatter "teknologi" til integration af probesystemer i koordinatmålingsmaskiner som specificeret i 2B006.a.
2E002
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 2A eller 2B.
2E003
Følgende anden "teknologi":
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Følgende "teknologi" til metalbearbejdningsprocesser:
1.
"Teknologi" til konstruktion af værktøjer, matricer eller opspændingsudstyr, der er specielt beregnet til følgende processer:
a.
"Superplastisk formning"
b.
"Diffusionsbonding" eller
c.
'Direkte hydraulisk presning'
2.
Tekniske data, der består af procesmetoder eller procesparametre, som opført herunder til styring af:
a.
"Superplastisk formning" af aluminiumlegeringer, titanlegeringer eller "superlegeringer":
1.
Forberedelse af overflade
2.
Deformationshastighed
3.
Temperatur
4.
Tryk
b.
"Diffusionsbonding" af "superlegeringer" eller titanlegeringer:
1.
Forberedelse af overflade
2.
Temperatur
3.
Tryk
c.
'Direkte hydraulisk presning' af aluminiumlegeringer eller titanlegeringer:
1.
Tryk
2.
Cyklustid
d.
'Varm isostatisk densifikation' af titanlegeringer, aluminiumlegeringer eller "superlegeringer":
1.
Temperatur
2.
Tryk
3.
Cyklustid
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Direkte hydraulisk presning' er en deformationsproces, der bruger en væskefyldt, fleksibel blære i direkte kontakt med arbejdsemnet.
2.
'Varm isostatisk densifikation' er proces, ved hvilken støbeemner sættes under tryk ved temperaturer på mere end 375 K (102 °C) i et lukket rum ved hjælp af forskellige medier (gas, væske, faste partikler, osv.) for at skabe et ensartet tryk i alle retninger for at reducere eller eliminere indre hulrum i støbeemnet.
c.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af hydrauliske strækformningsmaskiner og matricer hertil, til fremstilling af flyskrogstrukturer
d.
Ikke anvendt
e.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" af integrations"software" til inkorporering af ekspertsystemer i "numeriske styrings"enheder til avanceret beslutningsstøtte i værkstedet
f.
"Teknologi" til pålægning af uorganiske overlaybelægninger eller uorganiske belægninger til overflademodifikation, (specificeret i kolonne 3 i følgende skema), til ikkeelektroniske substrater, (specificeret i kolonne 2 i følgende skema), ved de processer, der er specificeret i kolonne 1 i følgende skema og defineret i den tekniske note.
Note:
Skemaet og den tekniske note findes efter nr. 2E301.
N.B.
Skemaet bør læses således, at det kun specificerer "teknologien" ved en bestemt belægningsproces, når den resulterende belægning i kolonne 3 er anført direkte ud for det relevante substrat i kolonne 2. De tekniske data for belægningsprocessen ved kemisk dampudfældning (CVD) er for eksempel medtaget for pålægning af silicider til substrater af carboncarbon, keramiske og metal"matrix"
                                             "komposit"substrater, men er ikke medtaget for pålægning af silicider til substrater af 'cementeret wolframcarbid' (16) og 'siliciumcarbid' (18). I andet tilfælde er den resulterende belægning ikke anført i kolonne 3 direkte ud for 'cementeret wolframcarbid' (16) og 'siliciumcarbid' (18).
2E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 2B004, 2B009, 2B104, 2B109, 2B116, 2B119-2B122 eller 2D101.
2E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 2A225, 2A226, 2B001, 2B006, 2B007.b., 2B007.c., 2B008, 2B009, 2B201, 2B204, 2B206, 2B207, 2B209, 2B225-2B233, 2D201 eller 2D202.
2E301
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 2B350-2B352.
SKEMA - UDFÆLDNINGSTEKNIK
1.
Belægningsproces
(
7
)
2.
Substrat
3.
Resulterende belægning
A.
Kemisk dampudfældning (CVD)
"Superlegeringer"
Aluminider til indvendige overflader
Keramiske materialer (19) og glasarter med lav udvidelseskoefficient (14)
Silicider
Carbider
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamant
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
Carboncarbon-, keramiske og metal"matrix""kompositter"
Silicider
Carbider
Tungtsmeltelige metaller
Blandinger heraf (4)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Alumider
Legerede aluminider (2)
Bornitrid
Cementeret wolframcarbid (16) Siliciumcarbid (18)
Carbider
Wolfram
Blandinger heraf (4)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Molybdæn og molybdænlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Beryllium og berylliumlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamant
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
Materialer til sensorvinduer (9)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamant
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
B.
Fysisk dampudfældning ved termisk fordampning (TE-PVD)
B.1
Fysisk dampudfældning (PVD): Elektronstråle (EB-PVD)
"Superlegeringer"
Legerede silicider
Legerede aluminider (2)
MCrAlX (5)
Modificeret zirconiumoxid (12)
Silicider
Alumider
Blandinger heraf (4)
Keramiske materialer (19) og glasarter med lav udvidelseskoefficient (14)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Korrosionsbestandigt stål (7)
MCrAlX (5)
Modificeret zirconiumoxid (12)
Blandinger heraf (4)
Carboncarbon-, keramiske og metal"matrix""kompositter"
Silicider
Carbider
Tungtsmeltelige metaller
Blandinger heraf (4)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Bornitrid
Cementeret wolframcarbid (16) Siliciumcarbid (18)
Carbider
Wolfram
Blandinger heraf (4)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Molybdæn og molybdænlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Beryllium og berylliumlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Borider
Beryllium
Materialer til sensorvinduer (9)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Titanlegeringer (13)
Borider
Nitrider
B.2
Fysisk dampudfældning ved ionassisteret modstandsopvarmning (Ionplettering)
Keramiske materialer (19) og glasarter med lav udvidelseskoefficient
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
Carboncarbon-, keramiske og metal"matrix""kompositter"
Dielektriske lag (15)
Cementeret wolframcarbid (16) Siliciumcarbid
Dielektriske lag (15)
Molybdæn og molybdænlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Beryllium og berylliumlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Materialer til sensorvinduer (9)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
B.3
Fysisk dampudfældning (PVD): "laser"fordampning
Keramiske materialer (19) og glasarter med lav udvidelseskoefficient (14)
Silicider
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
Carboncarbon-, keramiske og metal"matrix""kompositter"
Dielektriske lag (15)
Cementeret wolframcarbid (16) Siliciumcarbid
Dielektriske lag (15)
Molybdæn og molybdænlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Beryllium og berylliumlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Materialer til sensorvinduer (9)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
B.4
Fysisk dampudfældning (PVD): katodebueudladning
"Superlegeringer"
Legerede silicider
Legerede aluminider (2)
MCrAlX (5)
Polymerer (11) og organiske "matrix""kompositter"
Borider
Carbider
Nitrider
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
C.
Pakcementering (se A ovenfor om cementering uden for pakke) (10)
Carboncarbon-, keramiske og metal"matrix""kompositter"
Silicider
Carbider
Blandinger heraf (4)
Titanlegeringer (13)
Silicider
Alumider
Legerede aluminider (2)
Tungtsmeltelige metaller og legeringer (8)
Silicider
Oxider
D.
Plasmasprøjtning
"Superlegeringer"
MCrAlX (5)
Modificeret zirconiumoxid (12)
Blandinger heraf (4)
Afslideligt nikkelgrafit
Afslidelige materialer, der indeholder Ni-Cr-Al
Afslideligt Al-Si-Polyester
Legerede aluminider (2)
Aluminiumlegeringer (6)
MCrAlX (5)
Modificeret zirconiumoxid (12)
Silicider
Blandinger heraf (4)
Tungtsmeltelige metaller og legeringer (8)
Alumider
Silicider
Carbider
Korrosionsbestandigt stål (7)
MCrAlX (5)
Modificeret zirconiumoxid (12)
Blandinger heraf (4)
Titanlegeringer (13)
Carbider
Alumider
Silicider
Legerede aluminider (2)
Afslideligt nikkelgrafit
Afslidelige materialer, der indeholder Ni-Cr-Al
Afslideligt Al-Si-Polyester
E.
Slurrybelægning
Tungtsmeltelige metaller og legeringer (8)
Smeltede silicider
Smeltede aluminider undtagen til modstandsvarmeelementer
Carboncarbon-, keramiske og metal"matrix""kompositter"
Silicider
Carbider
Blandinger heraf (4)
F.
Sputterbelægning
"Superlegeringer"
Legerede silicider
Legerede aluminider (2)
Aluminider modificeret med ædle metaller (3)
MCrAlX (5)
Modificeret zirconiumoxid (12)
Platin
Blandinger heraf (4)
Keramiske materialer og glasarter med lav udvidelseskoefficient (14)
Silicider
Platin
Blandinger heraf (4)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
Titanlegeringer (13)
Borider
Nitrider
Oxider
Silicider
Alumider
Legerede aluminider (2)
Carbider
Carboncarbon-, keramiske og metal"matrix""kompositter"
Silicider
Carbider
Tungtsmeltelige metaller
Blandinger heraf (4)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Bornitrid
Cementeret wolframcarbid (16) Siliciumcarbid (18)
Carbider
Wolfram
Blandinger heraf (4)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Bornitrid
Molybdæn og molybdænlegeringer
Dielektriske lag (15)
Beryllium og berylliumlegeringer
Borider
Dielektriske lag (15)
Beryllium
Materialer til sensorvinduer (9)
Dielektriske lag (15)
Diamantlignende carbon (17)
Tungtsmeltelige metaller og legeringer (8)
Alumider
Silicider
Oxider
Carbider
G.
Ionimplantering
Lejestål til høje temperaturer
Tilsætninger af chrom tantal eller niobium (columbium)
Titanlegeringer (13)
Borider
Nitrider
Beryllium og berylliumlegeringer
Borider
Cementeret wolframcarbid (16)
Carbider
Nitrider
SKEMA - UDFÆLDNINGSTEKNIK - NOTER
1.
'Belægningsprocessen' omfatter reparation og fornyelse af belægningen såvel som oprindelig belægning.
2.
Udtrykket 'legeret aluminidbelægning' omfatter éttrins- eller flertrinsbelægninger, i hvilke et eller flere grundstoffer pålægges før eller under påføring af aluminidbelægningen, selv om disse grundstoffer pålægges ved en anden belægningsproces. Det omfatter imidlertid ikke gentagen anvendelse af éttrinspakcementeringsprocesser for at opnå legerede aluminider.
3.
Udtrykket belægning med 'aluminid modificeret med ædle metaller' omfatter flertrinsbelægninger, ved hvilke det eller de ædle metaller pålægges ved en anden belægningsproces før pålægningen af aluminidbelægningen.
4.
Udtrykket 'blandinger heraf' omfatter infiltreret materiale, graderede sammensætninger, samudfældninger og flerlagsudfældninger fremstillet ved en eller flere af de i dette skema specificerede processer.
5.
'MCrAlX' refererer til en belægningslegering, hvor M er cobalt, jern, nikkel eller sammensætninger heraf, og X er hafnium, yttrium, silicium, tantal i enhver mængde eller andre tilsigtede tilsætninger over 0,01 vægtprocent i forskellige forhold og kombinationer undtagen:
a.
CoCrAlY-belægninger, som indeholder mindre end 22 vægtprocent chrom, mindre end 7 vægtprocent aluminium, og mindre end 2 vægtprocent yttrium
b.
CoCrAlY-belægninger, som indeholder 22-24 vægtprocent chrom, 10-12 vægtprocent aluminium, og 0,5-0,7 vægtprocent yttrium 
eller
c.
NiCrAlY-belægninger, som indeholder 21-23 vægtprocent chrom, 10-12 vægtprocent aluminium, og 0,9-1,1 vægtprocent yttrium.
6.
'Aluminiumlegeringer' er legeringer, der har en trækbrudstyrke på mindst 190 MPa målt ved 293 K (20 °C).
7.
'Korrosionsbestandigt stål' er stål iflg. AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) 300 rækken eller tilsvarende nationale standarder.
8.
'Tungtsmeltelige metaller og legeringer' omfatter følgende metaller og deres legeringer: niobium (columbium), molybdæn, wolfram og tantal.
9.
'Materialer til sensorvinduer' som følger: aluminiumoxid, silicium, germanium, zinksulphid, zinkselenid, galliumarsenid, diamant, galliumfosfid, safir og følgende metalhalider: sensorvinduesmaterialer med en større diameter end 40 mm for zirconiumfluorid og hafniumfluorid.
10.
Kategori 2 omfatter ikke "teknologi" til éttrinspakcementering af faste planprofiler.
11.
'Polymerer' som følger: polyimid, polyester, polysulfid, polycarbonater og polyurethaner.
12.
'Modificerede zirconiumoxider' er tilsætning af andre metaloxider, f.eks. calcium-, magnesium-, yttrium- og hafnium-oxider, oxider af sjældne jordarter, osv. til zirconiumoxider for at stabilisere visse krystallografiske faser og fasesammensætninger. Termiske spærrebelægninger fremstillet af zirconiumoxid modificeret med calcium- eller magnesiumoxider ved blanding eller fusion pålægges ikke eksportkontrol.
13.
'Titanlegeringer' er udelukkende rumfartslegeringer med en trækbrudstyrke på mindst 900 MPa målt ved 293 K (20 °C).
14.
'Glasarter med lav udvidelseskoefficient' refererer til glasarter, som har en termisk udvidelseskoefficient på højst 1 x 10
-7
 K
-1
 målt ved 293 K (20 °C).
15.
'Dielektriske lag' er belægninger, der er konstrueret af flere lag af isolerende materialer, i hvilket interferensegenskaberne ved en konstruktion, der er sammensat af materialer med forskelligt refraktivt indeks, bruges til at reflektere, transmittere eller absorbere forskellige bølgelængdebånd. Dielektriske lag refererer til mere end fire dielektriske lag eller "kompositte" lag af dielektrikametal.
16.
'Cementeret wolframcarbid' omfatter ikke skære- og formværktøjsmaterialer bestående af wolframcarbid/(cobalt, nikkel), titancarbid/(cobalt, nikkel), chromcarbid/nikkel-chrom og chrom carbid/nikkel.
17.
"Teknologi" til udfældning af diamantlignende carbon på følgende pålægges ikke eksportkontrol:
magnetpladedrev og magnethoveder, udstyr til fremstilling af engangsemballager, ventiler til haner, højttalermembraner, motordele til motorkøretøjer, skære-, lokke- og presseværktøj, kontorautomationsudstyr, mikrofoner eller medicinsk udstyr eller forme til støbning af plast, fremstillet af legeringer indeholdende mindre end 5 % beryllium.
18.
'Siliciumcarbid' omfatter ikke materialer til fremstilling af skære- og formværktøj.
19.
Keramiske substrater som omhandlet under dette punkt omfatter ikke keramiske materialer med et indhold af ler eller cement på 5 vægtprocent eller derover enten som separate bestanddele eller i kombination.
SKEMA - UDFÆLDNINGSTEKNIK - TEKNISK NOTE
Processer der er specificeret i kolonne 1 i skemaet, defineres som følger:
a.
Kemisk dampudfældning (CVD) er en overfladebelægnings- eller overflademodificeringsproces, hvorved et metal, en legering, "komposit", dielektrikum eller keramisk materiale udfældes på et opvarmet substrat. Gasformige reaktanter spaltes eller indgår forbindelse i nærheden af substratet, således af der sker en udfældning af det ønskede grundstof, legering eller forbindelse på substratet. Energien til denne spaltnings- eller kemiske reaktionsproces kan bringes til veje ved substratets varme, en glødeudladningsplasma, eller ved "laser"stråling.
N.B.1
CVD omfatter følgende processer: Udfældning ved en ledet gasstrøm uden pakning, pulserende CVD, styret nuklear termisk udfældning (CNTD), plasmaforstærkede eller plasmaassisterede CVD processer.
N.B.2
Pakket betyder, at et substrat er nedlagt i en pulverblanding.
N.B.3
De gasformige reaktanter, der anvendes i en ikkepakket proces, frembringes ved brug af de samme grundreaktioner og parametre som i pakkecementeringsprocessen, med undtagelse af at det substrat, der skal belægges, ikke er i kontakt med pulverblandingen.
b.
Termisk fordampning-fysisk dampudfældning (TE-PVD) er en overlaybelægningsproces, der foregår i et vakuum med et tryk på mindre end 0,1 Pa, i hvilket der bruges en termisk energikilde til at fordampe belægningsmaterialet. Denne proces resulterer i kondensering eller deponering af det fordampede materiale på passende anbragte substrater.
Tilførsel af gasser til vakuumkammeret under belægningsprocessen til syntetisering af sammensatte belægninger er en normal modificering af processen.
Brugen af ion- eller elektronstråler eller plasma for at aktivere eller assistere belægningens deponering er også en almindelig modifikation i denne teknik. Brugen af monitorer til opnåelse af måling af optiske egenskaber og tykkelse under processen kan være en del af disse processer.
Specifikke TE-PVD processer er følgende:
1.
Elektronstråle PVD bruger en elektronstråle til opvarmning og fordampning af det materiale, der danner belægningen.
2.
PVD med ionstøttet modstandsopvarmning bruger elektriske resistive varmekilder i kombination med aktiverende ionstråler, så der frembringes en styret og ensartet strøm af fordampede belægningsmaterialer.
3.
"Laser"fordampning bruger enten pulserende eller kontinuert-bølge "laser"-stråler til fordampning af det materiale, der danner belægningen.
4.
Katodebuebelægning bruger en smelteelektrode af det materiale, der danner belægningen, og som etablerer en lysbue på overfladen ved en kortvarig kontakt til jord ved en igangsætter. Styret bevægelse af buen eroderer katodeoverfladen og skaber en højioniseret plasma. Anoden kan enten være en kegle, der er fastgjort til katodens omkreds ved hjælp af en isolator, eller kammeret. Biasing af substrater bruges ved belægning uden for sigtelinje.
NB
Denne definition omfatter ikke tilfældig katodelysbuebelægning med substrater, der ikke er biased.
5.
Ionplettering er en speciel modificering af en generel TE-PVD-proces, hvorved en plasma- eller ionkilde bruges til at ionisere de materialer, der skal danne belægningen, og substratet gives negativ bias for at lette udtrækningen fra plasmaen af det materiale, der skal pålægges. Indføringen af reaktive materialer, fordampning af faststoffer i proceskammeret, og brugen af monitorer til opnåelse af måling af belægningers optiske egenskaber og tykkelser under processen er normale modifikationer af processen.
c.
Pakcementering er en overflademodifikationsbelægning eller overlaybelægningsproces, hvor substratet nedlægges i en pulverblanding (en pakning), som består af:
1.
De metalliske pulvere, der skal danne belægningen (normalt aluminium, chrom, silicium eller kombinationer af disse)
2.
En aktivator (normalt et halidsalt) 
og
3.
Et inaktivt pulver, hyppigst aluminiumoxid.
Substratet og pulverblandingen indeholdes i en retort, som opvarmes til mellem 1 030 K 757 °C) og 1 375 K (1 102 °C) i tilstrækkelig lang tid til udfældning af belægningen.
d.
Plasmasprøjtning er en overlaybelægningsproces, hvor en pistol (sprøjtebrænder), som frembringer og styrer en plasma, modtager pulver- eller trådbelægningsmaterialer, smelter dem og slynger dem mod et substrat, hvor der dannes en integreret, bonded belægning. Plasmasprøjtning kan være enten lavtryksplasmasprøjtning eller højhastighedsplasmasprøjtning.
N.B.1
Lavtryk betyder mindre end det omgivende atmosfæriske tryk.
N.B.2
Høj hastighed refererer til, at gassens udgangshastighed ved dysens munding overstiger 750 m/s udregnet ved 293 K (20 °C) ved 0,1 MPa.
e.
Slurrybelægning er en overflademodifikationsbelægnings- eller overlaybelægningsproces, hvor et metallisk eller keramisk pulver med et organisk bindemiddel opslemmes i en væske og påføres et substrat enten ved sprøjtning, dypning eller maling, hvorefter det luft- eller ovntørres, og varmebehandles for at opnå den ønskede belægning.
f.
Sputterbelægning er en overlaybelægningsproces, der er baseret på et momentoverførselsfænomen, hvor positive ioner accelereres af et elektrisk felt mod målets (belægningsmaterialets) overflade. Når ionerne rammer overfladen, er den kinetiske energi tilstrækkelig til at frigøre overfladeatomer på målet og aflejre dem på det passende anbragte substrat.
N.B.1
Skemaet refererer kun til triode-, magnetron- eller reaktiv sputterbelægning, som bruges til at forbedre belægningens vedhængskraft og belægningsprocessens hastighed, og til radiofrekvens-(RF)forbedret sputterbelægning, der bruges til at frembringe fordampning af umetalliske belægningsmaterialer.
N.B.2
Lavenergiionstråler (mindre end 5 keV) kan anvendes til at aktivere belægningsprocessen.
g.
Ionimplantering er en overflademodifikationsbelægningsproces, hvor det grundstof, der skal legeres, bliver ioniseret, accelereret gennem en spændingsgradient og implanteret i substratets overfladeområde. Dette omfatter processer, hvor ionimplanteringen sker samtidig med fysisk dampudfældning med elektronstråle eller sputterbelægning.
DEL V –
Kategori 3
KATEGORI 3 - ELEKTRONIK
3A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
Note 1:
Eksportkontrolstatus for udstyr og komponenter beskrevet i 3A001 eller 3A002, bortset fra det i 3A001.a.3-10 eller 3A001.a.12-14 beskrevne, som er specielt udviklet eller som har samme funktionelle egenskaber som andet udstyr, afgøres ved dette andet udstyrs eksportkontrolstatus.
Note 2:
Eksportkontrolstatus for udstyr for integrerede kredsløb beskrevet i 3A001.a.3-9 eller 3A001.a.12-14, som er uforanderligt programmeret eller udviklet til en bestemt funktion i andet udstyr, bestemmes af dette andet udstyrs eksportkontrolstatus.
N.B.
Hvis producenten eller ansøgeren ikke kan afgøre det andet udstyrs eksportkontrolstatus, bestemmes eksportkontrolstatus for de integrerede kredsløb i 3A001.a.3-9 og 3A001.a.12-14.
Note 3:
Status for wafere (færdigforarbejdede eller uforarbejdede), i hvilke funktionen er fastlagt, skal bedømmes efter parametrene i 3A001.a., 3A001.b., 3A001.d., 3A001.e.4., 3A001.g., 3A001.h eller 3A001.i.
3A001
Elektronisk udstyr som følger:
a.
Integrerede kredsløb til generelle formål som følger:
Note:
Integrerede kredsløb omfatter følgende typer:
—
"Monolitisk integrerede kredsløb"
—
"Hybride integrerede kredsløb"
—
"Multichip integrerede kredsløb"
—
"Film-type integrerede kredsløb", inklusive silicium-på-safir integrerede kredsløb
—
"Optiske integrerede kredsløb"
—
"Tredimensionale integrerede kredsløb"
—
"Monolitisk integrerede mikrobølgekredsløb" ("MMIC)".
1.
Integrerede kredsløb udviklet eller normeret som strålingsbeskyttede, således at de kan modstå en af følgende:
a.
En total dosis på mindst 5 x 10
3
 Gy (silicum)
b.
En dosisændring på mindst 5 x 10
6
 Gy (silicium) 
eller
c.
En neutronfluens (integreret flux) (1 MeV-ækvivalent) på 5 x 10
13
 n/cm
2
 eller højere for silicium eller tilsvarende for andre materialer
Note:
3A001.a.1.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på metalisolatorhalvledere (MIS).
2.
"Mikroprocessormikrokredsløb", "mikrocomputermikrokredsløb", mikrocontrollermikrokredsløb, integrerede hukommelseskredsløb fremstillet af en sammensat halvleder, integrerede kredsløb til analog-til-digital konvertering, integrerede kredsløb, der indeholder analog-digitale konvertere og lagrer eller behandler de digitaliserede data, integrerede kredsløb til digital-til-analog konvertering, elektrooptiske eller "optisk integrerede kredsløb" til "signalbehandling", logiske anordninger, der er programmerbare på stedet, kundespecificerede integrerede kredsløb, for hvilke enten funktionen er ukendt, eller eksportkontrolstatus for det udstyr, i hvilket de integrerede kredsløb skal anvendes, ukendt, processorer til Fast Fourier-Transformation (FFT), statiske random-access-hukommelser (SRAM) eller 'ikke-flygtige hukommelser' med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Normeret til drift ved en omgivelsestemperatur over 398 K (125 °C)
b.
Normeret til drift ved en omgivelsestemperatur over 218 K (-55 °C) eller
c.
Normeret til drift ved alle omgivelsestemperaturer mellem 218 K (-55 °C) og 398 K (125 °C)
Note:
3A001.a.2 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på integrerede kredsløb, der er konstrueret til anvendelse i civile motorkøretøjer eller jernbanemateriel.
Teknisk note:
'Ikke-flygtige hukommelser' er hukommelser med datalagring i en vis tidsperiode efter et strømafbrud.
3.
"Mikroprocessormikrokredsløb", "mikrocomputermikrokredsløb" og mikrocontrollermikrokredsløb fremstillet af en sammensat halvleder og med en taktfrekvens på mere end 40 MHz.
Note:
3A001.a.3. omfatter digitale signalprocessorer, digitale arrayprocessorer og digitale co-processorer.
4.
Ikke anvendt
5.
Integrerede kredsløb til analog-til-digital konvertering (ADC) og digital-til-analog konvertering (DAC) som følger:
a.
ADC'er med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES ALSO 3A101
1.
Opløsning på mindst 8 bit, men mindre end 10 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 1,3 gigaaftastninger pr. sekund (GSPS)
2.
Opløsning på mindst 10 bit, men mindre end 12 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 600 megaaftastninger pr. sekund (MSPS)
3.
Opløsning på mindst 12 bit, men mindre end 14 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 400 MSPS
4.
Opløsning på mindst 14 bit, men mindre end 16 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 250 MSPS eller
5.
Opløsning på mindst 16 bit med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 65 MSPS
N.B.
Med hensyn til integrerede kredsløb, der indeholder analog-til-digital-konvertere, og som lagrer eller behandler de digitaliserede data, henvises til 3A001.a.14.
Tekniske noter:
1.
En opløsning på n bit svarer til en kvantisering på 2
n
 niveauer.
2.
ADC'ens opløsning er lig med antallet af bits i det digitale output, som udgør det målte analoge input. Effektivt antal bits (ENOB) anvendes ikke til at fastsætte ADC'ens opløsning.
3.
I forbindelse med "ADC'er med flere kanaler" aggregeres "aftastningshastigheden" ikke, og "aftastningshastigheden" er den enkelte kanals maksimale hastighed.
4.
I forbindelse med "interleaved ADC'er" eller "ADC'er med flere kanaler", som er specificeret til at have en driftsform med interleaving, aggregeres "aftastningshastighederne", og "aftastningshastigheden" er alle interleaved-kanalernes maksimale samlede hastighed.
b.
Digital-til-analog konvertere (DAC'er) med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Opløsning på mindst 10 bit men under 12 bit MED en 'justeret opdateringshastighed' på over 3 500 MSPS 
eller
2.
Opløsning på mindst 12 bit og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En 'justeret opdateringshastighed' på over 1 250 MSPS men ikke over 3 500 MSPS og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Konverteringstid på mindre end 9 ns på op til 0,024 % af fuldt skalaudslag fra et fuldt skalatrin 
eller
2.
'Dynamikområde uden falske signaler' (SFDR), der er større end 68 dBc (bærer) ved syntetisering af et analogt signal med fuldt skalaudslag på 100 MHz eller den højeste analoge signalfrekvens med fuldt skalaudslag, der er specificeret til mindre end 100 MHz, 
eller
b.
En 'justeret opdateringshastighed' på over 3 500 MSPS.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Dynamikområde uden falske signaler' defineres som forholdet mellem rms-værdien af bærefrekvensen (maksimal signalkomponent) ved DAC'ens indgang og rms-værdien af den næststørste komponent til harmonisk forvrængning eller støjforvrængning ved dens udgang.
2.
SFDR bestemmes direkte fra specifikationstabellen eller fra karakteriseringsområderne for SFDR i forhold til frekvens.
3
Et signal defineres til at være fuldt skalaudslag, når dets amplitude er større end -3 dBfs (fuldt skalaudslag).
4.
'Justeret opdateringshastighed' for DAC'er:
a.
I forbindelse med konventionelle (ikkeinterpolerende) DAC'er er den 'justerede opdateringshastighed' den hastighed, hvormed det digitale signal konverteres til et analogt signal, og de analoge udgangsværdier ændres af DAC'en. I forbindelse med DAC'er, hvor interpolation kan undgås (interpolationsfaktor 1), skal DAC'en anses for en konventionel (ikkeinterpolerende) DAC.
b.
I forbindelse med interpolerende DAC'er (oversamplings-DAC'er) defineres den 'justerede opdateringshastighed' som DAC-opdateringshastigheden divideret med den laveste interpolerende faktor. I forbindelse med interpolerende DAC'er kan der henvises til den 'justerede opdateringshastighed' vha. forskellige udtryk, herunder:
—
input-datahastighed
—
input-ordhastighed
—
input-aftastningshastighed
—
maksimal samlet input-busfrekvens
—
maksimal DAC-taktfrekvens for DAC-taktinput.
6.
Elektrooptiske og "optisk integrerede kredsløb" til "signalbehandling" og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
En eller flere interne "laser"dioder
b.
Et eller flere interne lysdetektorelementer 
og
c.
Optiske bølgeledere
7.
Logiske anordninger, der er programmerbare på stedet, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Et maksimalt antal single-ended digitale input/outputs på over 700 
eller
b.
En 'samlet envejs spids seriel transceiver datahastighed' på 500 Gb/s eller derover
Note:
3A001.a.7. omfatter:
Komplekse programmerbare logiske anordninger (CPLD)
Gate arrays, der er programmerbare på stedet (FPGA)
Logiske arrays, der er programmerbare på stedet (FPLA)
Kontakter, der er programmerbare på stedet (FPIC).
N.B.
Med hensyn til integrerede kredsløb med logiske anordninger, der er programmerbare på stedet, kombineret med en analog-til-digital konverter henvises til 3A001.a.14.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Det maksimale antal input/outputs i 3A001.a.7.a. kaldes også de maksimale brugerinput/outputs eller de maksimale disponible input/outputs, uanset om det integrerede kredsløb er en pakket eller upakket matrice.
2.
En 'samlet envejs spids seriel transceiver datahastighed' er resultatet af en spids seriel envejs-transceiverhastighed ganget med antallet af transceivere på FPGA'et.
8.
Ikke anvendt
9.
Integrerede kredsløb til neurale net
10.
Kundespecificerede integrerede kredsløb, for hvilke funktionen er ukendt, eller eksportkontrolstatus for det udstyr, i hvilket de integrerede kredsløb skal anvendes, er ukendt for producenten, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Mere end 1 500 terminaler
b.
Typisk "basal gatetransmissionsforsinkelse" på mindre end 0,02 ns 
eller
c.
Driftsfrekvens på over 3 GHz
11.
Digitale integrerede kredsløb, ud over de i 3A001.a.3.-3A001.a.10. og 3A001.a.12. beskrevne, baseret på en hvilken som helst sammensat halvleder, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Ækvivalent gateantal på mere end 3 000 (2 inputgates) 
eller
b.
Togglefrekvens på over 1,2 GHz
12.
Processorer til Fast Fouriertransformation (FFT) med en normeret udførelseshastighed for en N-punkts kompleks FFT på mindre end (N log
2
 N)/20 480 ms, hvor N er antallet af punkter
Teknisk note:
Hvis N er lig med 1 024 punkter, giver formlen i 3A001.a.12 en udførelseshastighed på 500 μs.
13.
Integrerede kredsløb til en direkte digital synthesizer, som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Digital-til-analog konverter (DAC) med en taktfrekvens på mindst 3,5 GHz og en DAC-opløsning på mindst 10 bit, men under 12 bit eller
b.
Digital-til-analog konverter (DAC) med en taktfrekvens på mindst 1,25 GHz og en DAC-opløsning på over 12 bit
Teknisk note:
DAC-taktfrekvensen kan specificeres som hovedtaktfrekvensen eller inputtaktfrekvensen.
14.
Integrerede kredsløb, der udfører eller kan programmeres til af udføre samtlige følgende funktioner:
a.
Analog-til-digital-konverteringer, som opfylder et eller flere af følgende krav:
1.
Opløsning på mindst 8 bit, men mindre end 10 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 1,3 gigaaftastninger pr. sekund (GSPS)
2.
Opløsning på mindst 10 bit, men mindre end 12 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 1,0 GSPS
3.
Opløsning på mindst 12 bit, men mindre end 14 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 1,0 GSPS
4.
Opløsning på mindst 14 bit, men mindre end 16 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 400 megaaftastninger pr. sekund (MSPS) 
eller
5.
Opløsning på mindst 16 bit med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 180 MSPS 
og
b.
En eller flere af følgende:
1.
Lagring af digitaliserede data 
eller
2.
Behandling af digitaliserede data
N.B.1
Med hensyn til integrerede kredsløb til analog-til-digital konvertering henvises til 3A001.a.5.a.
N.B.1
Med hensyn til logiske anordninger, der er programmerbare på stedet, henvises til 3A001.a.7.
Tekniske noter:
1.
En opløsning på n bit svarer til en kvantisering på 2
n
 niveauer.
2.
ADC'ens opløsning er lig med antallet af bits i det digitale output, som udgør det målte analoge input. Effektivt antal bits (ENOB) anvendes ikke til at fastsætte ADC'ens opløsning.
3.
I forbindelse med integrerede kredsløb med non-interleaving "ADC'er med flere kanaler" aggregeres "aftastningshastigheden" ikke, og "aftastningshastigheden" er den enkelte kanals maksimale hastighed.
4.
I forbindelse med integrerede kredsløb med "interleaved ADC'er" eller med "ADC'er med flere kanaler", som er specificeret til at have en driftsform med interleaving, aggregeres "aftastningshastighederne", og "aftastningshastigheden" er alle interleaved-kanalernes maksimale samlede hastighed.
b.
Mikrobølge- eller millimeterbølgeenheder som følger:
Teknisk note:
I 3A001.b kan der også henvises til parameteret for maksimal udgangseffekt i forbindelse med produktdatablade som udgangseffekt, maksimal udgangseffekt, topudgangseffekt eller topeffekt.
1.
"Elektroniske vakuumenheder" og katoder som følger:
Note 1:
3A001.b.1 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "elektroniske vakuumenheder", der er konstrueret eller normeret til drift i frekvensbånd, og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Højst 31,8 GHz 
og
b.
"Allokeret af ITU" til radiokommunikationstjenester, men ikke til radiostedbestemmelse.
Note 2:
3A001.b.1 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på ikke "rumkvalificerede"
                                                         "elektroniske vakuumenheder", som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Middeludgangseffekt på 50 W eller derunder 
og
b.
Konstrueret eller normeret til drift i frekvensbånd, og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Mere end 31,8 GHz, men højst 43,5 GHz 
og
2.
"Allokeret af ITU" til radiokommunikationstjenester, men ikke til radiostedbestemmelse.
a.
"Elektroniske vakuumenheder" med vandrefelt, pulserende eller kontinuerlig bølge som følger:
1.
Enheder til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 31,8 GHz
2.
Enheder med en katodevarmer, hvis opvarmningstid til nominel RF-effekt er på mindre end 3 sekunder
3.
Koblede hulrumsenheder eller derivater af disse med en "relativ båndbredde" på over 7 % eller en maksimal effekt på over 2,5 kW
4.
Enheder baseret på helixkredsløb eller foldede eller snoede bølgelederkredsløb eller derivater heraf, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Momentan båndbredde" på mere end en oktav og et produkt af gennemsnitlig effekt (udtrykt i kW) og frekvens (udtrykt i GHz) på mere end 0,5
b.
"Momentan båndbredde" på en oktav eller derunder og et produkt af gennemsnitlig effekt (udtrykt i kW) og frekvens (udtrykt i GHz) på mere end 1
c.
"Rumkvalificeret"
eller
d.
Elektronkanon med gitter
5.
Enheder med en "relativ båndbredde" på mindst 10 %, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En ringformet elektronstråle
b.
En ikke-aksesymmetrisk elektronstråle 
eller
c.
Flere elektronstråler
b.
Krydsfeltforstærkende "elektroniske vakuumenheder" med en forstærkning på mere end 17 dB
c.
Glødekatoder til "elektroniske vakuumenheder" med en emissionsstrømtæthed ved nominelle driftsbetingelser på mere end 5 A/cm
2
 eller en pulserende (ikke-kontinuerlig) strømtæthed ved nominelle driftsbetingelser på mere end 10 A/cm
2
d.
"Elektroniske vakuumenheder", der kan fungere i 'dual mode'.
Teknisk note:
'Dual mode' betyder, at strålestrømmen fra den "elektroniske vakuumenhed" forsætligt kan ændres mellem kontinerlig bølgetilstand og pulserende tilstand ved hjælp af et gitter, og at den frembringer en impulstopudgangseffekt, der er større end udgangseffekten ved kontinuerlig bølge.
2.
Forstærkere med "monolitisk integrerede mikrobølgekredsløb" ("MMIC") med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
Med hensyn til "MMIC"-forstærkere med integreret faseomformer henvises til 3A001.b.12.
a.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 15 %, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 75 W (48,75 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 2,9 GHz
2.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 55 W (47,4 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,9 GHz til og med 3,2 GHz
3.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 40 W (46 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,2 GHz til og med 3,7 GHz 
eller
4.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 20 W (43 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz
b.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 16 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 10 W (40 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 8,5 GHz eller
2.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 5 W (37 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 8,5 GHz til og med 16 GHz
c.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 3 W (34,77 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 16 GHz til og med 31,8 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
d.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 31,8 GHz til og med 37 GHz
e.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W (30 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 37 GHz til og med 43,5 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
f.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 31,62 mW (15 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 43,5 GHz til og med 75 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
g.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 10 mW (10 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 75 GHz til og med 90 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 5 % 
eller
h.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 90 GHz
Note 1:
Ikke anvendt.
Note 2:
Eksportkontrolstatus for "MMIC", hvis nominelle driftsfrekvens omfatter frekvenser opført i mere end ét frekvensområde som defineret i 3A001.b.2.a.-3A001.b.2., afgøres ved den laveste tærskel for maksimal udgangseffekt.
Note 3:
Note 1 og 2 i 3A betyder, at 3A001.b.2 ikke lægger eksportkontrol på "MMIC", der er specielt konstruerede til andre formål, f.eks. telekommunikation, radar eller motorkøretøjer.
3.
Diskrete mikrobølgetransistorer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 400 W (56 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 2,9 GHz
2.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 205 W (53,12 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,9 GHz til og med 3,2 GHz
3.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 115 W (50,61 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,2 GHz til og med 3,7 GHz 
eller
4.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 60 W (47,78 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz
b.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 31,8 GHz, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 50 W (47 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 8,5 GHz
2.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 15 W (41,76 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 8,5 GHz til og med 12 GHz
3.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 40 W (46 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 12 GHz til og med 16 GHz 
eller
4.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 7 W (38,45 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 16 GHz til og med 31,8 GHz
c.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,5 W (27 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 31,8 GHz til og med 37 GHz
d.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 1 W (30 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 37 GHz til og med 43,5 GHz
e.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 43,5 GHz 
eller
f.
Andre end de 3A001.b.3.a til 3A001.b.3.e anførte, som er normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 5 W (37,0 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 8,5 GHz og op til og med 31,8 GHz
Note 1:
Eksportkontrolstatus for en transistor, der er anført i 3A001.b.3.a til og med 3A001.b.3.e, og hvis nominelle driftsfrekvens omfatter frekvenser opført i mere end ét frekvensområde som defineret i 3A001.b.3.a.-3A001.b.3.e, afgøres ved den laveste tærskel for maksimal udgangseffekt.
Note 2:
3A001.b.3. omfatter skiver, skiver monteret på bærere eller skiver monteret i pakker. Visse diskrete transistorer kan også benævnes effektforstærkere, men deres eksportkontrolstatus afgøres i 3A001.b.3.
4.
Mikrobølgehalvlederforstærkere og mikrobølgesamlinger/moduler indeholdende mikrobølgehalvlederforstærkere med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 15 %, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 500 W (57 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 2,9 GHz
2.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 270 W (54,3 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,9 GHz til og med 3,2 GHz
3.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 200 W (53 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,2 GHz til og med 3,7 GHz 
eller
4.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 90 W (49,54 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz
b.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 31,8 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 70 W (48,54 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 8,5 GHz
2.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 50 W (47 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 8,5 GHz til og med 12 GHz
3.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 30 W (44,77 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 12 GHz til og med 16 GHz 
eller
4.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 20 W (43 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 16 GHz til og med 31,8 GHz
c.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,5 W (27 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 31,8 GHz til og med 37 GHz
d.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 2 W (33 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 37 GHz til og med 43,5 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
e.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 43,5 GHz, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 0,2 W (23 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 43,5 GHz til og med 75 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
2.
Maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 20 mW (13 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 75 GHz til og med 90 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 5 % 
eller
3.
Maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 90 GHz 
eller
f.
Ikke anvendt
N.B.1
Med hensyn til "MMIC"-forstærkere henvises til 3A001.b.2.
N.B.2
Med hensyn til 'sender/modtagermoduler' og "sendermoduler" henvises til 3A001.b.12.
N.B.3
Med hensyn til konvertere og harmoniske mixere, der er konstrueret til at udvide drifts- eller frekvensområdet for signalanalysatorer, signalgeneratorer, netværksanalysatorer og mikrobølgetestmodtagere, henvises til 3A001.b.7.
Note 1:
Ikke anvendt.
Note 2:
Eksportkontrolstatus for et produkt, hvis nominelle driftsfrekvens omfatter frekvenser opført i mere end ét frekvensområde som defineret i 3A001.b.4.a.-3A001.b.4.e., afgøres ved den laveste tærskel for maksimal udgangseffekt.
5.
Elektronisk eller magnetisk afstemmelige båndpas- eller båndstopfiltre med mere end 5 afstemmelige resonatorer, der er i stand til at afstemme over et 1,5:1 frekvensbånd (f
max.
/f
min.
) på mindre end 10 μs, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Gennemgangsbåndbredde på mere end 0,5 % af centerfrekvensen 
eller
b.
Båndstopbåndbredde på mindre end 0,5 % af centerfrekvensen
6.
Ikke anvendt
7.
Konvertere og harmoniske mixere med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Konstrueret til at udvide frekvensområdet for "signalanalysatorer" ud over 90 GHz
b.
Konstrueret til at udvide driftsområdet for signalgeneratorer som følger:
1.
Ud over 90 GHz
2.
Til en udgangseffekt på over 100 mW (20 dBm) ved en hvilken som helst frekvens over 43,5 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz
c.
Konstrueret til at udvide driftsområdet for netværksanalysatorer som følger:
1.
Ud over 110 GHz
2.
Til en udgangseffekt på over 31,62 mW (15 dBm) ved en hvilken som helst frekvens over 43,5 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz
3.
Til en udgangseffekt på over 1 mW (0 dBm) ved en hvilken som helst frekvens over 90 GHz, men ikke over 110 GHz 
eller
d.
Konstrueret til at udvide frekvensområdet for mikrobølgetestmodtagere ud over 110 GHz
8.
Mikrobølgeforstærkere med "elektroniske vakuumenheder", som er specificeret i 3A001.b.1., og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Driftsfrekvenser på over 3 GHz
b.
Gennemsnitligt forhold mellem udgangseffekt og masse på mere end 80 W/kg 
og
c.
Rumfang på mindre end 400 cm
3
.
Note:
3A001.b.8 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, der er konstrueret eller normeret til drift i frekvensbånd, som er "allokeret af ITU" til radiokommunikationstjenester, men ikke til radiostedbestemmelse.
9.
Mikrobølgeeffektmoduler (MPM) bestående af mindst en "elektronisk vakuumenhed" med vandrefelt, et "monolitisk integreret mikrobølgekredsløb" ("MMIC") og en integreret elektronisk energikonditioneringsanordning og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Tændtid' fra slukket tilstand til fuld drift på under 10 sekunder
b.
Et volumen på under den maksimale nominelle effekt i watt ganget med 10 cm
3
/W 
og
c.
En "momentan båndbredde" på over 1 oktav (f
max.
 > 2f
min.
) og med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
For frekvenser på 18 GHz eller derunder en RF-udgangseffekt på over 100 W 
eller
2.
En frekvens på over 18 GHz
Tekniske noter:
1.
Til beregning af volumen i 3A001.b.9.b. gives følgende eksempel: for en maksimal nominel effekt på 20 W vil volumen være: 20 W x 10 cm
3
/W = 200 cm
3
.
2.
'Tændtiden' i 3A001.b.9.a. er tiden fra helt slukket tilstand til fuld drift, dvs. omfatter MPM'ens opvarmningstid.
10.
Oscillatorer eller oscillatorsamlinger, der er angivet til at arbejde med et enkelt sidebånd (SSB) fasestøj, i dBc/Hz, mindre (bedre) end -(126 + 20log
10
F - 20log
10
f) på et hvilket som helst punkt i et interval på 10 Hz ≤ F ≤ 10 kHz
Teknisk note:
I 3A001.b.10. er F afvigelsen fra driftsfrekvensen i Hz og f er driftsfrekvensen i MHz.
11.
'Frekvenssynthesizer'-"elektroniske samlinger" med en "frekvensskiftetid" som angivet ved en af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Under 143 ps
b.
Under 100 μs for frekvensændringer på over 2,2 GHz inden for det syntetiserede frekvensområde på over 4,8 GHz, men ikke over 31,8 GHz
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Under 500 μs for frekvensændringer på over 550 MHz inden for det syntetiserede frekvensområde på over 31,8 GHz, men ikke over 37 GHz
e.
Under 100 μs for frekvensændringer på over 2,2 GHz inden for det syntetiserede frekvensområde på over 37 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz 
eller
f.
Ikke anvendt
g.
Under 1 ms inden for det syntetiserede frekvensområde på over 90 GHz.
Teknisk note:
En 'frekvenssynthesizer' er enhver form for frekvenskilde uden hensyn til den anvendte metode, der giver flere samtidige eller alternative udgangsfrekvenser fra én eller flere udgange, der styres af, er afledt af eller er afhængig af et mindre antal standard (eller master)-frekvenser.
N.B.
Vedr. "signalanalysatorer", signalgeneratorer, netværksanalysatorer og mikrobølgetestmodtagere til generelle formål, jf. hhv. 3A002.c., 3A002.d., 3A002.e. og 3A002.f.
12.
'Sender/modtagermoduler', 'sender/modtager-MMIC' og 'sendermoduler' og 'sender-MMIC', normeret til drift ved frekvenser over 2,7 GHz og med alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
Maksimal udgangseffekt (i watt) P
sat
 på over 505,62 divideret med den maksimale driftsfrekvens (i GHz) i anden potens [P
sat
>505,62 W*GHz
2
/f
GHz
2
] for enhver kanal
b.
En "relativ båndbredde" på mindst 5 % for enhver kanal
c.
En plan side, hvor længden d (i cm) er lig med eller mindre end 15 divideret med den laveste driftsfrekvens i GHz [d ≤ 15cm*GHz*N/f
GHz
], hvor N er antallet af sender- eller sender/modtagerkanaler 
og
d.
En elektronisk variabel faseomformer pr. kanal.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Ved 'sender/modtagermodul' forstås en multifunktionel "elektronisk samling", der giver tovejs-amplitude- og fasekontrol for afsendelse og modtagelse af signaler.
2.
Ved 'sendermodul' forstås en "elektronisk samling", der giver amplitude- og fasekontrol for afsendelse af signaler.
3.
Ved 'sender/modtager-MMIC' forstås et multifunktionelt "MMIC", der giver tovejs-amplitude- og fasekontrol for afsendelse og modtagelse af signaler.
4.
Ved 'sender-MMIC' forstås et "MMIC", der giver amplitude- og fasekontrol for afsendelse af signaler.
5.
2,7 GHz bør anvendes som den laveste driftsfrekvens (f
GHz
) i formlen i 3A001.b.12.c. i forbindelse med sender/modtager- eller modtagermoduler, der har et nominelt driftsområde ned til 2,7 GHz og derunder [d≤15cm*GHz*N/2,7 GHz].
6.
3A001.b.12. finder anvendelse på 'sender/modtagermoduler' eller 'sendermoduler' med eller uden køleflade. Værdien d i 3A001.b.12.c. omfatter ikke dele af 'sender/modtagermodulet' eller 'sendermodulet', der fungerer som køleflade.
7.
'Sender/modtagermoduler' eller 'sendermoduler' eller 'sender/modtager-MMIC' eller 'sender-MMIC' kan have N integrerede strålende antenneelementer, hvor N er antallet af sender- eller sender/modtagerkanaler.
c.
Følgende akustisk bølgeudstyr samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
1.
Akustisk bølgeudstyr og surface skimming (fladt volumen) akustisk bølgeudstyr med:
a.
Bærefrekvens på over 6 GHz
b.
Bærefrekvens på mere end 1 GHz, men højst 6 GHz og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Frekvenssidesløjfedæmpning' på mere end 65 dB
2.
Produktet af den største forsinkelse og båndbredden (tid i μs og båndbredde i MHz) på mere end 100
3.
Båndbredde over 250 MHz 
eller
4.
Spredningsforsinkelse på mere end 10 μs 
eller
c.
Bærefrekvens på højst 1 GHz og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Produktet af den største forsinkelse og båndbredden (tid i μs og båndbredde i MHz) på mere end 100
2.
Spredningsforsinkelse på mere end 10 μs 
eller
3.
'Frekvenssidesløjfedæmpning' på mere end 65 dB og båndbredde over 100 MHz
Teknisk note:
'Frekvenssidesløjfedæmpning' er den maksimale dæmpningsværdi, der er specificeret i databladet.
2.
Volumenakustisk bølgeudstyr, som tillader direkte signalbehandling ved frekvenser på over 6 GHz
3.
Akustisk-optisk "signalbehandlings" udstyr, der anvender vekselvirkning mellem akustiske bølger (volumenbølge eller overfladebølge) og lysbølger, der tillader direkte behandling af signaler eller billeder, inklusive spektralanalyse, korrelation eller konvolution
Note:
3A001.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på akustisk bølgeudstyr, der kun omfatter én båndpas-, lavpas-, højpas- eller gradfiltrering eller resonatorfunktion.
d.
Elektronisk udstyr eller kredsløb, der indeholder komponenter, der er fremstillet af "superledende" materialer, der er specielt beregnet til drift ved temperaturer under mindst en af de "superledende" bestanddeles "kritiske temperatur", og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Strømkobling til digitale kredsløb ved hjælp af "superledende" porte med et produkt af forsinkelse pr. port (i sekunder) og effekttab pr. port (i watt) på mindre end 10
-14
 J 
eller
2.
Frekvensvalg ved alle frekvenser ved hjælp af resonanskredse med Q-værdier på mere end 10 000.
e.
Højenergiudstyr som følger:
1.
'Celler' som følger:
a.
'Primærceller' med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber ved 20°C
1.
'Energitæthed' på over 550 Wh/kg og 'kontinuerlig effekttæthed' på over 50 W/kg 
eller
2.
'Energitæthed' på over 50 Wh/kg og 'kontinuerlig effekttæthed' på over 350 W/kg 
eller
b.
"Sekundærceller" med en "energitæthed" på mere end 350 Wh/kg ved 20°C
Tekniske noter:
1.
I forbindelse med 3A001.e.1. beregnes 'energitætheden' (Wh/kg) som den nominelle spænding ganget med den nominelle kapacitet i amperetimer (Ah) divideret med massen i kg. Hvis den nominelle kapacitet ikke er angivet, beregnes energitætheden som den nominelle spænding i anden og derefter ganget med udladningstiden i timer divideret med udladningsbelastningen i ohm og massen i kg.
2.
I forbindelse med 3A001.e.1. defineres en 'celle' som en elektrokemisk anordning, der har positive og negative elektroder og en elektrolyt, og som er en kilde til elektrisk energi. Den er grundbyggeklodsen i et batteri.
3.
I forbindelse med 3A001.e.1.a. er en 'primærcelle' en 'celle', der ikke er beregnet til at blive ladet af en anden kilde.
4.
I forbindelse med 3A001.e.1.b. er en 'sekundærcelle' en 'celle', der er beregnet til at blive ladet af en ekstern elektrisk kilde.
5.
I forbindelse med 3A001.e.1.a beregnes ‘kontinuerlig effekttæthed’ (W/kg) ud fra den nominelle spænding multipliceret med den angivne maksimale kontinuerlige afladningsstrøm i ampere (A) divideret med massen i kg. 'Kontinuerlig effekttæthed' benævnes tillige specifik effekt.
Note:
3A001.e.1 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på batterier, herunder enkeltcellebatterier.
2.
Følgende højenergilagerkondensatorer:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 3A201.a og kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
a.
Kondensatorer med en gentagelseshastighed på mindre end 10 Hz (singleshot kondensatorer) og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Mærkespænding på mindst 5 kV
2.
Energitæthed på mindst 250 J/kg 
og
3.
Total energi på mindst 25 kJ
b.
Kondensatorer med en gentagelseshastighed på 10 Hz eller mere (gentagelseskondensatorer) og med samtlige af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Mærkespænding på mindst 5 kV
2.
Energitæthed på mindst 50 J/kg
3.
Total energi på mindst 100 J 
og
4.
Ladnings/afladningscykluslevetid på mindst 10 000.
3.
"Superledende" elektromagneter eller solenoider, der er specielt konstrueret til at blive fuldt opladet eller afladet på mindre end 1 sekund, og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 3A201.b.
Note
3A001.e.3 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "superledende" elektromagneter eller solenoider, der er specielt konstrueret til medicinsk udstyr til magnetisk resonans-billeddannelse (MRI).
a.
Energiafgivelse på mere end 10 kJ i løbet af det første sekund
b.
Indre diameter af strømvindingerne mere end 250 mm 
og
c.
Nominel magnetisk induktion mere end 8 T eller "total strømtæthed" i vindingen mere end 300 A/mm
2
4.
Solceller, samlinger af forbundne solceller med dækglas (CIC), solpaneler og solarrays, der er "rumkvalificerede" og har en mindste gennemsnitseffektivitet på over 20% ved en driftstemperatur på 301 K (28°C) ved en simuleret ‘AM0’-belysning med en bestråling på 1 367 watt pr. kvadratmeter (W/m
2
)
Teknisk note:
'AM0' eller 'Air Mass Zero' er sollysets spektrale bestråling i jordens ydre atmosfære, når afstanden mellem jorden og solen er én astronomisk enhed (AU).
f.
Enkodere til absolut position med roterende input med en "nøjagtighed" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 1,0 buesekund og specielt konstruerede enkoderringe, -diske eller -skalaer dertil
g.
Faststofthyristorkoblingsanordninger med impulseffekt og 'thyristormoduler', der anvender koblingsmetoder, som styres elektronisk, optisk eller med elektronstråling, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal strømstigning ved tænding (di/dt) på over 30 000 A/μs og en spænding i slukket tilstand på over 1 100 V 
eller
2.
En maksimal strømstigning ved tænding (di/dt) på over 2 000 A/μs, og som har alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
En spidsspænding i slukket tilstand på 3 000 V eller derover 
og
b.
En ikke-repetitiv spidsstrøm (surge current) på 3 000 A eller derover.
Note 1:
3A001.g. omfatter:
Styrede ensrettere af silicium Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCR)
Elektrisk styrede thyristorer (ETT)
Lysstyrede thyristorer (LTT)
Integrerede brokommuterede thyristorer (IGCT)
Gate Turn-Off thyristorer (GTO)
MOS-styrede thyristorer (MCT)
Solidtroner
Note 2:
3A001.g. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på thyristoranordninger og 'thyristormoduler', der er indbygget i udstyr til anvendelse i civil jernbanedrift eller "civile fly".
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 3A001.g. indeholder et 'thyristormodul' en eller flere thyristoranordninger.
h.
Faststofhalvlederswitcher, -dioder eller '-moduler' med følgende egenskaber:
1.
Normeret til maksimal driftstemperatur på over 488 K (215°C)
2.
En repetitiv spidsspænding i off-tilstand (blokeringsspænding) på over 300 V 
og
3.
En kontinuerlig strøm på over 1 A.
Note 1:
Den repetitive spidsspænding i off-tilstand i 3A001.h. omfatter drainsourcespænding, kollektoremitterspænding, repetitiv spidsspærrespænding og repetitiv spidsblokeringsspænding i off-tilstand.
Note 2:
3A001.h. omfatter:
Junction felteffekttransistorer (JFET)
Lodrette junction felteffekttransistorer (VJFET)
Metaloxidfelteffekttransistorer (MOSFET)
Dobbeltdiffunderede metaloxidfelteffekttransistorer (DMOSFET)
Isolerede gate bipolære transistorer (IGBT)
Transistorer med høj elektronmobilitet (HEMT)
Bipolære junction transistorer (BJT)
Thyristorer og styrbare halvlederensrettere (SCR)
Slukbare thyristorer (GTO)
Slukbare emitterthyristorer (ETO)
PiN-dioder
Schottky-dioder
Note 3:
3A001.h. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på switcher, dioder eller 'moduler' i udstyr konstrueret til anvendelse i civile motorkøretøjer, civile jernbaner eller "civile fly".
Teknisk note:
I 3A001.h. indeholder 'moduler' en eller flere faststofhalvlederkoblinger eller -dioder.
i.
Intensitets-, amplitude- eller elektro-optiske fasemodulatorer, der er konstrueret til analoge signaler og har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En maksimal driftsfrekvens på over 10 GHz men under 20 GHz, et optisk indsætningstab på højst 3 dB og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En 'halvbølgespændning' (‘Vπ’) på under 2,7 V målt ved en frekvens på højst 1 GHz eller
b.
En 'Vπ' på under 4 V målt ved en frekvens på over 1 GHz 
eller
2.
En maksimal driftsfrekvens på mindst 20 GHz, et optisk indsætningstab på højst 3 dB og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En 'Vπ' på under 3,3 V målt ved en frekvens på højst 1 GHz 
eller
b.
En 'Vπ' på under 5 V målt ved en frekvens på over 1 GHz.
Note:
3A001.i. omfatter elektro-optiske modulatorer med optiske input- og outputkonnektorer (f.eks. fiberoptiske forbindelsesled).
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 3A001.i er 'halvbølgespændning' ('Vπ') den spænding, der er nødvendig for et faseskift på 180 grader i lysets bølgelængde gennem den optiske modulator.
3A002
"Elektroniske samlinger", moduler og udstyr til generelle formål som følger:
a.
Følgende optageudstyr og oscilloskoper:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Ikke anvendt
3.
Ikke anvendt
4.
Ikke anvendt
5.
Ikke anvendt
6.
Digitale dataoptagere med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
En vedvarende 'kontinuerlig kapacitet' på mere end 6,4 Gbit/s til en harddisk eller et SSD-drev 
og
b.
"Signalbehandling" af radiofrekvens-signaldata, mens disse optages
Tekniske noter:
1.
For optagere med parallel busarkitektur er den 'kontinuerlige kapacitet' den største ordhastighed ganget med ordlængen i bit.
2.
Ved 'kontinuerlig kapacitet' forstås den største hastighed, hvormed instrumentet kan optage data til en harddisk eller et SSD-drev uden tab af information, samtidig med at den hastighed, hvormed digitale data indlæses, eller digitizer-konverteringshastigheden opretholdes.
7.
Tidstro oscilloskoper med en vertikal kvadratisk middelværdi (rms) for støjspænding på under 2% af fuldt udslag på den vertikale skala, der giver den laveste støjværdi for input 3 dB båndbredde på 60 GHz eller derover pr. kanal
Note:
3A002.a.7. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på ækvivalente stikprøveoscilloskoper.
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Følgende "signalanalysatorer":
1.
"Signalanalysatorer" med en 3 dB resolutionsbåndbredde (RBW) på over 40 MHz hvor som helst inden for frekvensområdet på over 31,8 GHz, men ikke over 37 GHz
2.
"Signalanalysatorer" med et middelstøjniveau (DANL) på mindre (bedre) end -150 dBm/Hz hvor som helst inden for frekvensområdet på over 43,5 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz
3.
"Signalanalysatorer" med en frekvens på over 90 GHz
4.
"Signalanalysatorer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Realtidsbåndbredde' på over 170 MHz 
og
b.
Med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
100% sandsynlighed for opfangning med en reduktion på under 3 dB fra den fulde amplitude som følge af gaps eller vindueseffekter fra signaler med en varighed på højst 15 μs, 
eller
2.
'Frekvensmasketriggerfunktion' med 100% sandsynlighed for trigger (opfangning) for signaler med en varighed på højst 15 μs
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Realtidsbåndbredde' er det bredeste frekvensområde, for hvilket analysatoren løbende kan omdanne tidsdomænedata fuldt ud til frekvensdomænedata uden at forårsage diskontinuitet i analysen af input-data ved hjælp af Fourier transformation eller andre former for diskret transformation, der omdanner alle indkommende tidspunkter uden gaps eller vindueseffekter, der medfører en reduktion af den målte amplitude på over 3 dB under den faktiske signalamplitude, samtidig med at de omdannede data udlæses eller vises.
2.
Sandsynligheden for opfangning i 3A002.c.4.b.1. benævnes også sandsynligheden for indfangning eller for observering.
3.
I forbindelse med 3A002.c.4.b.1. er varigheden for 100% sandsynlighed for opfangning lig med den minimale signalvarighed, der er nødvendig for den specificerede måleusikkerheds niveau.
4.
En 'frekvensmasketrigger' er mekanisme, hvor triggerfunktionen kan vælge et frekvensområde, der skal påvirkes (trigges) inden for akkvisitionsbåndbredden og samtidig ignorere andre signaler, der måtte være til stede inden for samme akkvisitionsbåndbredde. En 'frekvensmasketrigger' kan indeholde mere end et sæt uafhængige grænser.
Note:
3A002.c.4 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "signalanalysatorer", som kun bruger konstantprocent båndbreddefiltre (også kendt som oktav- eller fraktionaloktavfiltre).
5.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Signalgeneratorer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specificeret til frembringelse af impulsmodulerede signaler inden for et frekvensområde på over 31,8 GHz, men ikke over 37 GHz, og som har alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
En 'impulsvarighed' mindre end 25 ns 
og
b.
Til/fra-rytme på mindst 65 dB
2.
Udgangseffekt på over 100 mW (20 dBm) hvor som helst inden for et frekvensområde på over 43,5 GHz, men højst 90 GHz
3.
"Frekvensskiftetid" som angivet ved en af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Under 100 μs for frekvensændringer på over 2,2 GHz inden for et frekvensområde på over 4,8 GHz, men højst 31,8 GHz
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Under 500 μs for frekvensændringer på over 550 MHz inden for et frekvensområde på over 31,8 GHz, men højst 37 GHz 
eller
e.
Under 100 μs for frekvensændringer på over 2,2 GHz inden for et frekvensområde på over 37 GHz, men højst 90 GHz
f.
Ikke anvendt
4.
Enkelt sidebånd (SSB) fasestøj, i dBc/Hz, angivet som værende et eller flere af følgende:
a.
Mindre (bedre) end -(126 + 20log
10
F - 20log
10
f) på et sted inden for området 10 Hz ≤ F ≤ 10 kHz på ethvert sted inden for et frekvensområde på over 3,2 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz 
eller
b.
Mindre (bedre) end -(206 - 20log
10
f) på et sted inden for området 10 kHz < F < 100 kHz på ethvert sted inden for et frekvensområde på over 3,2 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz
Teknisk note:
I 3A002.d.4. er F afvigelsen fra driftsfrekvensen i Hz, og f er driftsfrekvensen i MHz
5.
'RF-moduleringsbåndbredde' for digitale basisbåndsignaler som angivet ved en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Mere end 2,2 GHz inden for et frekvensområde på over 4,8 GHz men ikke over 31,8 GHz
b.
Mere end 550 MHz inden for et frekvensområde på over 31,8 GHz men ikke over 37 GHz 
eller
c.
Mere end 2,2 GHz inden for et frekvensområde på over 37 GHz men ikke over 90 GHz 
eller
Teknisk note:
'RF-moduleringsbåndbredde' er den radiofrekvens(RF)-båndbredde, der er belagt af et digitalt kodet basisbåndssignal, der er moduleret på et RF-signal. Dette benævnes også informationsbåndbredde eller vektormoduleringsbåndbredde. I/Q digital modulering er den tekniske metode til at frembringe et vektormoduleret RF-udgangssignal, og dette udgangssignal vil typisk være angivet med en 'RF- moduleringsbåndbredde'.
6.
Maksimal frekvens på over 90 GHz
Note 1:
I forbindelse med 3A002.d. omfatter signalgeneratorer generatorer med vilkårlig bølgeform og funktionsgeneratorer.
Note 2:
3A002.d lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, i hvilket udgangsfrekvensen enten frembringes ved addition eller substraktion af to eller flere krystaloscillatorfrekvenser, eller ved addition eller subtraktion fulgt af en multiplikation af resultatet.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Den maksimale frekvens i en generator med vilkårlig bølgeform eller en funktionsgenerator beregnes ved at dividere aftastningshastigheden, i aftastninger pr. sekund, med en faktor på 2,5.
2.
I 3A002.d.1.a defineres 'impulsvarighed' som tidsperioden fra det punkt på forkanten, der er 50 % af impulsamplituden, til det punkt på bagkanten, der er 50 % af impulsamplituden.
e.
Netværksanalysatorer med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangseffekt på over 31,62 mW (15 dBm) hvor som helst inden for driftsfrekvensområdet på over 43,5 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz
2.
Udgangseffekt på over 1 mW (0 dBm) hvor som helst inden for driftsfrekvensområdet på over 90 GHz, men ikke over 110 GHz
3.
'Ikkelineær vektormålingsfunktionalitet' ved frekvenser på over 50 GHz, men ikke over 110 GHz eller
Teknisk note:
‘Ikkelineær vektormålingsfunktionalitet’ er et instruments evne til at analyse testresultater fra anordninger, der opererer i området med store signaler eller i området for ulineær forvrængning.
4.
Maksimal driftsfrekvens på over 110 GHz
f.
Mikrobølgetestmodtagere med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Maksimal driftsfrekvens på over 110 GHz 
og
2.
Evne til at måle amplitude og fase samtidigt
g.
Atomfrekvensstandarder, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Rumkvalificeret"
2.
Ikke-rubidium og med en langtidsstabilitet mindre (bedre) end 1 x 10
-11
/måned 
eller
3.
Ikke "rumkvalificeret" og med alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er en rubidiumstandard
b.
Langtidsstabilitet mindre (bedre) end 1 × 10
-11
/måned 
og
c.
Totalt energiforbrug på mindre end 1 W
h.
"Elektroniske samlinger", moduler og udstyr, der er specificeret til at udføre samtlige af følgende:
1.
Analog-til-digital-konverteringer, som opfylder et eller flere af følgende krav:
a.
Opløsning på mindst 8 bit, men mindre end 10 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 1,3 gigaaftastninger pr. sekund (GSPS)
b.
Opløsning på mindst 10 bit, men mindre end 12 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 1,0 GSPS
c.
Opløsning på mindst 12 bit, men mindre end 14 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 1,0 GSPS
d.
Opløsning på mindst 14 bit, men mindre end 16 bit, med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 400 megaaftastninger pr. sekund (MSPS) 
eller
e.
Opløsning på mindst 16 bit med en "aftastningshastighed" på over 180 MSPS 
og
2.
En eller flere af følgende:
a.
Output af digitaliserede data
b.
Lagring af digitaliserede data 
eller
c.
Behandling af digitaliserede data
N.B.
Digitale datoptagere, oscilloskoper, "signalanalysatorer", signalgeneratorer, netværksanalysatorer og mikrobølgetestmodtagere er specificeret i hhv. 3A002.a.6., 3A002.a.7., 3A002.c., 3A002.d., 3A002.e. og 3A002.f.
Tekniske noter:
1.
En opløsning på n bit svarer til en kvantisering på 2
n
 niveauer.
2.
ADC'ens opløsning er lig med antallet af bits i det digitale output, som udgør det målte analoge input. Effektivt antal bits (ENOB) anvendes ikke til at fastsætte ADC'ens opløsning.
3.
I forbindelse med non-interleaved "elektroniske samlinger", moduler eller udstyr med flere kanaler aggregeres "aftastningshastigheden" ikke, og "aftastningshastigheden" er den enkelte kanals maksimale hastighed.
4.
I forbindelse med interleaved "elektroniske samlinger", moduler eller udstyr med flere kanaler aggregeres "aftastningshastighederne", og "aftastningshastigheden" er alle interleaved-kanalernes maksimale samlede hastighed.
Note:
3A002.h. omfatter ADC-kort, bølgesignaldigitaliseringsudstyr, dataopsamlingskort, signalakkvisitionsplader (signal acquisition boards) og transientoptagere.
3A003
Varmestyringssystemer med køling ved oversprøjtning, der anvender et lukket kredsløb med indkapslet væskehåndterings- og rekonditioneringsudstyr, hvor elektroniske komponenter oversprøjtes med en dielektrisk væske ved hjælp af særligt konstruerede dyser med henblik på at holde elektroniske komponenter inden for deres driftstemperaturområde, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
3A101
Følgende elektronisk udstyr og komponenter ud over det, der er specificeret i 3A001:
a.
Analog-digitale omsættere, anvendelige i "missiler", konstrueret til at opfylde militære specifikationer for specielt robust udstyr
b.
Acceleratorer, der er i stand til at afgive elektromagnetisk stråling fremkaldt af bremsstrahlung fra accelererede elektroner på mindst 2 MeV, samt systemer, der indeholder sådanne acceleratorer.
Note:
3A101.b omfatter ikke udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til medicinske formål.
3A102
'Termiske batterier' beregnet eller ændret til brug i 'missiler'.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 3A102 er 'termiske batterier' engangsbatterier, der indeholder et fast ikkeledende uorganisk salt som elektrolyt. Disse batterier indeholder et pyrolytisk materiale, der, når det antændes, smelter elektrolytten og aktiverer batteriet.
2.
I 3A102 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
3A201
Følgende elektroniske komponenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 3A001:
a.
Kondensatorer med et af følgende sæt af egenskaber:
1.
a.
Mærkespænding højere end 1,4 kV
b.
Energiopladning mere end 10 J
c.
Kapacitans højere end 0,5 μF og
d.
Serieinduktans mindre end 50 nH 
eller
2.
a.
Mærkespænding højere end 750 V
b.
Kapacitans højere end 0,25 μF 
og
c.
Serieinduktans mindre end 10 nH
b.
Superledende solenoidelektromagneter med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
I stand til at danne magnetfelter på mere end 2 T
2.
Et forhold mellem længde/indvendig diameter på over 2
3.
En indvendig diameter på mere end 300 mm 
og
4.
Et magnetfelt af en homogenitet, der er bedre end 1 % over den midterste halvdel af det indre rum
Note:
3A201.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på magneter, der er specielt konstrueret til, og som eksporteres 'som dele af' medicinske nukleare magnetiske resonanssystemer (NMR) til billeddannelse. Udtrykket 'som dele af' betyder ikke nødvendigvis fysisk del af den samme forsendelse; separate forsendelser fra forskellige kilder er tilladt, såfremt det i de tilhørende eksportpapirer klart anføres, at disse forsendelser er afsendt ‘som dele af’ de billeddannende systemer.
c.
Røntgenudladningsgeneratorer eller impulselektronacceleratorer med et af følgende sæt af egenskaber:
1.
a.
En acceleratorspidselektronenergi på mindst 500 keV, men mindre end 25 MeV 
og
b.
Med et 'godhedstal' (K) på mindst 0,25 
eller
2.
a.
En acceleratorspidselektronenergi på mindst 25 MeV 
og
b.
En 'spidseffekt' større end 50 MW.
Note:
3A201.c lægger ikke eksportkontrol på acceleratorer, som udgør en del af apparater, der er beregnet til andre formål end elektronstråler eller røntgenstråling (f.eks. elektronmikroskopi), og heller ikke på sådanne konstrueret til medicinske formål.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Godhedstallet' K defineres som
K = 1,7 x 10
3
V
2,65
Q
hvor V er spidselektronenergien i millioner elektronvolt.
Hvis acceleratorens stråleimpulsvarighed er mindre end eller lig 1 μs, er Q den maksimale accelererede ladning i coulomb. Hvis acceleratorens stråleimpulsvarighed er større end 1μs, er Q den maksimale accelererede ladning på 1μs.
Q er lig med integralet af i med hensyn til t over varigheden af stråleimpulsen (Q =
 ∫ 
idt), dog højst 1 μs, hvor i er strålestrømmen i ampere, og t er tiden i sekunder.
2.
Spidseffekt = (spidsspænding i volt) x (spidsstrålestrøm i ampere).
3.
I maskiner, der er baseret på mikrobølgeaccelerationshulrum, er stråleimpulsens varighed den mindste af værdierne 1 μs eller varigheden af det strålepakkebundt, der fremkommer ved en mikrobølgemodulatorpuls.
4.
I maskiner, der er baseret på mikrobølgeaccelerationshulrum, er spidsstrålestrømmen middelstrømmen under varigheden af strålepakkebundtet.
3A225
Frekvensomformere eller generatorer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 0B001.b.13, der kan bruges som drivkraft med variabel eller fast frekvens, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.1
"Software", som er specielt udviklet til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i frekvensomformere eller -generatorer, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 3A225, er specificeret i 3D225.
N.B.2
"Teknologi", i form af koder eller nøgler til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i en frekvensomformer eller -generator, således at den opfylder egenskaberne i 3A225, er specificeret i 3E225.
a.
Multifaseudgangseffekt på 40 VA eller større
b.
Opererer ved en frekvens på 600 Hz eller mere 
og
c.
Frekvensstyring bedre (mindre) end 0,2 %.
Note:
3A225 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på frekvensomformere eller -generatorer, hvis de har hardware-, "software"- eller "teknologi"begrænsninger, der begrænser ydelsen til under det niveau, der er specificeret ovenfor, forudsat at de opfylder følgende:
1.
De skal returneres til den oprindelige fabrikant med henblik på at forbedre eller frigive begrænsningerne
2.
De forudsætter "software" som specificeret i 3D225 til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 3A225 
eller
3.
De kræver "teknologi" i form af nøgler eller koder som specificeret i 3E225 til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 3A225.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Frekvensomformere i 3A225 betegnes også konvertere eller invertere.
2.
Frekvensomformere i 3A225 bliver markedsført som generatorer, elektronisk testudstyr, AC-strømforsyninger, Variable Speed Motors Drives, Variable Speed Drives (VSDs), Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs), Adjustable Frequency Drives (AFDs), eller Adjustable Speed Drives (ASDs).
3A226
Stærkstrømsforsyninger med høj effekt bortset fra dem, der er specificeret i 0B001.j.6., som har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er i stand til kontinuerligt at yde mindst 100 V over en periode på 8 timer med en udgangsstrøm på mindst 500 A 
og
b.
Med strøm- eller spændingsstabilitet bedre end 0,1 % over en periode på 8 timer.
3A227
Stærkstrømsforsyninger med høj effekt bortset fra dem, der er specificeret i 0B001.j.5., som har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er i stand til kontinuerligt at yde mindst 20 kV over en periode på 8 timer med en udgangsstrøm på mindst 1 A 
og
b.
Med strøm- eller spændingsstabilitet bedre end 0,1 % over en periode på 8 timer.
3A228
Følgende koblingsindretninger:
a.
Koldkatoderør, også gasfyldte, som virker på samme måde som ved et gnistgab, og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indeholder tre eller flere elektroder
2.
Mærkeanodespidsspænding mindst 2,5 kV
3.
Mærkeanodespidsstrøm mindst 100 A 
og
4.
Anodeforsinkelse højst 10 μs.
Note:
3A228 omfatter ligeledes gaskrytronrør og vakuumsprytronrør.
b.
Styrede gnistgab med begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
En anodeforsinkelse på højst 15 μs 
og
2.
Mærkespidsstrøm på mindst 500 A
c.
Moduler eller samlinger med en hurtig koblingsfunktion bortset fra dem, der er anført i 3A001.g. eller 3A001.h, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Mærkeanodespidsspænding større end 2 kV
2.
Mærkeanodespidsstrøm mindst 500 A 
og
3.
Tændtid højst 1 μs.
3A229
Følgende stærkstrømsimpulsgivere:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
a.
Detonatortændapparater (tændsystemer, tændanordninger), herunder elektronisk ladede, eksplosive og optiske tændapparater, bortset fra dem, der er specificeret i 1A007.a, der er konstrueret til at drive flere styrede detonatorer som specificeret i 1A007.b
b.
Modulære elektriske impulsgeneratorer, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Konstrueret til bærbar, mobil eller særlig modstandsdygtig anvendelse
2.
I stand til at udlade deres energi på mindre end 15 μs i belastninger på mindre end 40 ohm
3.
Med en udgangsstrøm på mere end 100 A
4.
Ingen dimension større end 30 cm
5.
Vægt mindre end 30 kg 
og
6.
Specificeret til brug ved et udvidet temperaturområde fra 223 K (-50 °C) til 373 K (100 °C), eller specificeret som egnet til rumbrug
Note:
3A229.b omfatter xenon-udladningslampestyring.
c.
Mikrodetonatorenheder, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Ingen dimension større end 35 mm
2.
Mærkespænding på 1 kV eller derover 
og
3.
Kapacitans på 100 nF eller derover
3A230
Højhastighedsimpulsgeneratorer og 'impulshoveder' dertil, med begge af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En udgangsspænding på mere end 6 V ind i en resistiv belastning på mindre end 55 ohm, 
og
b.
En 'impulsomkoblingstid' på mindre end 500 ps.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Impulsomkoblingstid' defineres i 3A230 som tidsperioden mellem 10 % og 90 % af spændingsamplituden.
2.
'Impulshoveder' er impulsdannende netværk, der er konstrueret til at acceptere en spændingstrinfunktion og omforme den til en række impulsformer, der kan omfatte rektangulære, trekantede, trin, impuls, eksponentielle eller monocykliske typer. 'Impulshoveder' kan være en integrerende del af impulsgeneratoren, de kan være et plug-in-modul til apparater eller de kan være tilsluttet et eksternt apparat.
3A231
Neutrongeneratorsystemer, herunder rør, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er konstrueret til drift uden et eksternt vakuumsystem 
og
b.
Bruger en af følgende:
1.
Elektrostatisk acceleration til fremkaldelse af en tritium-deuterium kernereaktion 
eller
2.
Elektrostatisk acceleration til fremkaldelse af en deuterium-deuterium kernereaktion, og i stand til en effekt på 3 × 10
9
 neutroner/s eller derover.
3A232
Følgende flerpunktstændsystemer, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1A007:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
N.B.
Se 1A007.b. for detonatorer.
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Arrangementer, der bruger enkelte eller multiple detonatorer, der er beregnet til næsten simultant at tænde en eksplosiv overflade over et område på mere end 5 000 mm
2
 fra et enkelt tændsignal med en tændtid spredt over overfladen på mindre end 2,5 μs.
Note:
3A232 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på detonatorer, der kun bruger primære sprængstoffer som f.eks. blyazid.
3A233
Følgende massespektrometre ud over dem, der er specificeret i 0B002.g, der er i stand til at måle ioner på mindst 230 atommasseenheder og med en opløsning bedre end 2 dele på 230 samt ionkilder hertil:
a.
Induktivt koblede plasmamassespektrometre (ICP/MS)
b.
Glimudladningsmassespektrometre (GDMS)
c.
Termiske ioniseringsmassespektrometre (TIMS)
d.
Elektronbombardementmassespektrometre med begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et molekylestråleinjektionssystem, der injicerer et kollimeret strålebundt af analytte molekyler til et område i ionkilden, hvor molekylerne ioniseres af en elektronstråle 
og
2.
En eller flere 'kolde fælder', der kan nedkøles til en temperatur på 193 K (– 80 °C)
e.
Ikke anvendt
f.
Massespektrometre, der er udstyret med en mikrofluoreringsionkilde, der er beregnet til actinider eller actinidfluorider.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Elektronbombardementmassespektrometre i 3A233.d benævnes også elektronimpaktmassespektrometre eller elektronioniseringsmassespektrometre.
2.
I 3A233.d.2., forstås ved 'kold fælde' en anordning, der fanger gasmolekyler ved at kondensere eller fryse dem på kolde overflader. I forbindelse med 3A233.d.2. er en gasholdig heliumkryogenisk vakuumpumpe med lukket sløjfe, ikke en 'kold fælde'.
3A234
Striplines, der giver stier med lav induktans til detonatorer med følgende egenskaber:
a.
Mærkespænding højere end 2 kV 
og
b
Induktans mindre end 20 nH.
3B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
3B001
Følgende udstyr til fremstilling af halvlederkomponenter eller halvledermaterialer samt specielt konstruerede komponenter og tilbehør hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B226
a.
Følgende udstyr til epitaksial vækst:
1.
Udstyr, som er udviklet eller modificeret til at danne et lag af andet materiale end silicium med en lagtykkelse, der er ensartet til mindre end ± 2,5 % over en længde på mindst 75 mm
Note:
3B001.a.1. omfatter atomlagsepitaksiudstyr.
2.
Metalorganisk kemisk dampudfældnings-(MOCVD)-reaktorer, der er konstrueret til epitaksial vækst af sammensatte halvledere bestående af materiale med to eller flere af følgende grundstoffer: aluminium, gallium, indium, arsen, phosphor, antimon og nitrogen
3.
Udstyr til epitaksial vækst med molekylestråle ved brug af gas- eller faststofkilder
b.
Udstyr konstrueret til ionimplantering og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Konstrueret og optimeret til drift ved en stråleenergi på 20 keV eller derover og en strålestrøm på 10 mA eller derover for hydrogen-, deuterium- eller heliumimplantering
3.
Direkte skrivekapacitet
4.
En stråleenergi på mindst 65 keV og en strålestrøm på mindst 45 mA beregnet til højenergioxygenimplantering i et opvarmet halvledermateriale "substrat" eller
5.
Konstrueret og optimeret til drift ved en stråleenergi på 20 keV eller derover og en strålestrøm på 10 mA eller derover for implantering af silicium på et halvledermateriale "substrat", der er opvarmet til 600 °C eller derover
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Ikke anvendt
e.
Centrale flerkammerwaferhåndteringssystemer til automatisk ilægning med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Interfaces til wafer input og output, til hvilke mere end to funktionelt forskellige 'halvlederbearbejdningsværktøjer' som specificeret i 3B001.a.1., 3B001.a.2., 3B001.a.3. eller 3B001.b. er beregnet til at kunne forbindes, 
og
2.
Beregnet til frembringelse af et integreret system i et vakuummiljø til 'sekventiel behandling af flere wafere'
Note:
3B001.e. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på automatiske robotsystemer til waferbehandling, der er specielt beregnet til parallel behandling af wafere.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I forbindelse med 3B001.e. er 'halvlederbearbejdningsværktøjer' modulbaserede værktøjer, som anvendes til funktionelt forskellige fysiske processer i fremstillingen af halvledere, f.eks. udfældning, implantering eller varmebehandling.
2.
I forbindelse med 3B001.e. er 'sekventiel behandling af flere wafere' muligheden for at behandle hver enkelt wafer med forskellige 'halvlederbearbejdningsværktøjer', f.eks. ved at den enkelte wafer overføres fra et værktøj til et andet og derfra videre til et tredje værktøj med de centrale flerkammerwaferhåndteringssystemer til automatisk ilægning.
f.
Følgende litografiske udstyr:
1.
Step and repeatudstyr (direkte waferstepper) eller step and scanudstyr (scanner) til positionering og eksponering i forbindelse med waferprocesser ved brug af foto-optiske eller røntgenmetoder og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Lyskildebølgelængde kortere end 193 nm 
eller
b.
I stand til at frembringe et mønster med en 'mindste detaljeopløsning' (MRF) på 45 nm eller derunder.
Teknisk note:
'Mindste detaljeopløsning' (MRF) beregnes efter følgende formel:
hvor K-faktor = 0,35
2.
Litografisk udstyr til prægning, der kan frembringe detaljer på 45 nm eller mindre
Note:
3B001.f.2. omfatter:
Mikrokontakttrykkeredskaber
Varmeprægningsredskaber
Litografiske redskaber til nanoprægning
Litografiske (S-FIL) redskaber til step-and-flash-prægning
3.
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til maskefremstilling med alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
En afbøjet fokuseret elektronstråle, ionstråle eller "laser"stråle 
og
b.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
En fuld halvværdibredde (FWHM) pletstørrelse, der er mindre end 65 nm, og en billedplacering på mindre end 17 nm (gennemsnit + 3 sigma) 
eller
2.
Ikke anvendt
3.
Second-layer overlay error på mindre end 23 nm (gennemsnit + 3 sigma) på masken
4.
Udstyr, der er konstrueret til behandling af indretninger, og som bruger direkte skrivemetoder, med alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
En afbøjet fokuseret elektronstråle 
og
b.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Stråle med en minimumstørrelse på højst 15 nm 
eller
2.
Overlay error på mindre end 27 nm (gennemsnit + 3 sigma)
g.
Masker og okularmikrometre, beregnet for integrerede kredsløb, der er specificeret i 3A001
h.
Flerlagsmasker med et faseforskydningslag, der ikke er specificeret i 3B001.g., og konstrueret til anvendelse med litografisk udstyr, hvor lyskildens bølgelængde er mindre end 245 nm
Note:
3B001.h lægger ikke eksportkontrol på flerlagsmasker med et faseforskydningslag, der er beregnet til fremstilling af hukommelsesindretninger, der ikke er specificeret i 3A001.
N.B.
Hvad angår masker og retikler, der er konstrueret til de optiske sensorer, se 6B002.
i.
Litografiskabeloner til prægning beregnet til integrerede kredsløb som omhandlet i 3A001
j.
Maske "substratblanketter" med reflektorstruktur i flere lag bestående af molybdæn og silicium og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specielt konstrueret til 'ekstremt ultraviolet' ('EUV') litografi 
og
2.
Overholder SEMI-standard P37.
Teknisk note:
'Ekstremt ultraviolet' ('EUV') betyder, at det elektromagnetisk spektrum har bølgelængder på over 5 nm og under 124 nm.
3B002
Følgende prøveudstyr, specielt beregnet til prøvning af færdige eller ufærdige halvlederindretninger, samt særlige komponenter og tilbehørsdele dertil:
a.
Til afprøvning af de artikler, der er specificeret i 3A001.b.3
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Til afprøvning af de artikler, der er specificeret i 3A001.b.2.
3C   
Materialer
3C001
Heteroepitaksiale materialer, der består af et "substrat" med flere, stablede epitaksisk dyrkede lag af:
a.
Silicium (Si)
b.
Germanium (Ge)
c.
Siliciumcarbid (SiC) 
eller
d.
"III/V-forbindelser" af gallium eller indium.
Note:
3C001.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på et "substrat" med et eller flere P-type epitaksiale lag af GaN, InGaN, AlGaN, InAlN, InAlGaN, GaP, GaAs, AlGaAs, InP, InGaP, AlInP eller InGaAlP, uanset grundstoffernes sekvens, undtagen hvis det epitaksiale lag af P-type befinder sig mellem N-type-lag.
3C002
Følgende resistmaterialer samt "substrater" belagt med følgende resists:
a.
Følgende resists konstrueret til halvlederlitografi:
1.
Positive resists, som er justeret (optimeret) til brug ved bølgelængder under 193 nm, men lig med eller større end 15 nm
2.
Resists, som er justeret (optimeret) til brug ved bølgelængder under 15 nm, men større end 1 nm
b.
Alle resists, til brug med elektronstråler eller ionstråler, med en følsomhed på 0,01 mikrocoulomb/mm
2
 eller bedre
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Alle resists, der er optimeret til overfladebilleddannelsesteknologi
e.
Alle resists, der er udviklet eller optimeret til brug med litografisk udstyr til prægning specificeret i 3B001.f.2., som bruger enten en termisk eller lyshærdende proces.
3C003
Følgende organiske-uorganiske forbindelser:
a.
Metalorganiske forbindelser af aluminium, gallium eller indium, med en renhed (metalbasis), der er bedre end 99,999 %
b.
Organiske arsen-, antimon- og phosphorforbindelser, med en renhed (på basis af det uorganiske grundstof), der er bedre end 99,999 %.
Note:
3C003 lægger kun eksportkontrol på forbindelser, hvis metal-, halvmetal- eller ikkemetalgrundstof er bundet direkte til kulstof i molekylets organiske del.
3C004
Hydrider af phosphor, arsen eller antimon, med en renhed der er bedre end 99,999%, selv i fortynding med inaktive luftarter eller hydrogen.
Note:
3C004 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på hydrider, der indeholder mindst 20 molprocent inaktive luftarter eller hydrogen.
3C005
Følgende højresisitve materialer:
a.
Halvleder "substrater" af siliciumkarbid (SiC), galliumnitrid (GaN), aluminiumnitrid (AlN) eller aluminiumgalliumnitrid (AlGaN) eller ingots, boules eller andre preforms af disse materialer, med resistiviteter over 10 000 ohm-cm ved 20 °C
b.
Polykrystallinske "substrater" eller polykrystallinske keramiske "substrater" med resistiviteter over 10 000 ohm-cm ved 20 °C og med mindst ét ikke-epitaksialt enkeltkrystallag silicium (Si), siliciumkarbid (SiC), galliumnitrid (GaN), aluminiumnitrid (AlN) eller aluminiumgalliumnitrid (AlGaN) på "substratets" overflade.
3C006
Materialer, der ikke er specificeret i 3C001, bestående af et "substrat", der er specificeret i 3C005, med mindst ét epitaksialt lag siliciumcarbid, galliumnitrid, aluminiumnitrid eller aluminiumgalliumnitrid.
3D   
Software
3D001
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 3A001.b. til 3A002.h. eller 3B.
3D002
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til "brug" af udstyr specificeret i 3B001.a.-f., 3B002 eller 3A225
3D003
"Software" til "computerbaseret litografi", der er specielt udviklet til "udvikling" af mønstre på masker og retikler til EUV-litografi.
Teknisk note:
"Computerbaseret litografi" er brug af computermodellering til at forudsige, korrigere, optimere og verificere billeddannelsen i den litografiske proces for en række mønstre, processer og systemforhold.
3D004
"Software", der er specielt beregnet til "udvikling" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 3A003.
3D005
"Software", der er specielt beregnet til at genoprette normal drift i en mikrocomputer, et "mikroprocessormikrokredsløb" eller et " mikrocomputermikrokredsløb" inden for 1 ms efter en afbrydelse elektromagnetiske puls (EMP) eller elektrostatisk udladning (ESD) uden tab af kontinuerlig drift.
3D101
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller ændret til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 3A101.b.
3D225
"Software", som er specielt udviklet til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i frekvensomformere eller -generatorer, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 3A225.
3E   
Teknologi
3E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr eller materialer, der er specificeret i 3A, 3B eller 3C.
Note 1:
3E001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til udstyr eller komponenter, der er specificeret i 3A003.
Note 2:
3E001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til integrerede kredsløb, der er specificeret i 3A001.a.3-12, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Anvender "teknologi" på mindst 0,130 μm 
og
b.
Indeholder flerlagsstrukturer med højst tre metallag
Note 3:
3E001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'procesdesignsæt' ('PDK'er'), medmindre de indeholder biblioteker, der udfører funktioner eller teknologier for de artikler, der er specificeret i 3A001.
Teknisk note:
Et 'procesdesignsæt' ('PDK') er et softwareredskab, som er fremstillet af en halvlederproducent med henblik på at sikre, at de gældende krav og regler for design overholdes, for at der kan fremstilles et specifikt integreret kredsløbsdesign i en specifik halvlederproces i overensstemmelse med de teknologiske og fremstillingsmæssige begrænsninger (hver proces til fremstilling af halvledere har sin egen ‘PDK’).
3E002
Anden "teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, end den, der er pålagt eksportkontrol iflg. 3E001, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af et "mikroprocessormikrokredsløb", "mikrocomputermikrokredsløb" eller en mikrocontroller mikrokredsløbskerne med en aritmetisk logikenhed med en accessbredde på mindst 32 bit og et eller flere af følgende træk eller karakteristika:
a.
En 'vektorprocessorenhed' beregnet til at foretage mere end to beregninger på 'flydende komma'-vektorer (endimensionelle arrays på 32-bit-tal eller større tal) samtidig
Teknisk note:
En 'vektorprocessorenhed' er et processorelement med indbyggede instruktioner, der udfører multiple beregninger på 'flydende komma'-vektorer (endimensionelle arrays på 32-bit-tal eller større tal) samtidig og har mindst én aritmetisk logisk vektorenhed og vektorregistre på mindst 32 elementer hvert.
b.
Beregnet til at give mere end fire 'flydende komma'-operationer på 64 bit eller derover pr. cyklus 
eller
c.
Beregnet til at give mere end otte multiplicere-akkumulere 'fast komma'-resultater på 16 bit pr. cyklus (f.eks. digital behandling af analog information, der tidligere er omsat til digital form, også kaldet digital "signalbehandling").
Tekniske noter:
1.
Med henblik på 3E002.a. og 3E002.b. er 'flydende komma' defineret ved IEEE-754.
2.
Med henblik på 3E002.c henviser 'fast komma' til reelt tal med fast bredde med både en heltalskomponent og en brøkkomponent, som ikke omfatter formater, der udelukkende har heltal.
Note 1:
3E002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til multimedieudvidelser.
Note 2:
3E002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til mikroprocessorkerner, der har alle de følgende egenskaber:
a.
Anvender "teknologi" på mindst 0,130 μm 
og
b.
Indeholder flerlagsstrukturer med højst fem metallag.
Note 3:
3E002 omfatter "teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af digitale signalprocessorer og digitale arrayprocessorer.
3E003
Anden "teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af følgende:
a.
Vakuum mikroelektroniske indretninger
b.
Heterostrukturelle elektroniske halvlederindretninger som f.eks. transistorer med høj elektronmobilitet (HEMT), heterobipolære transistorer (HBT), quantum well eller superlatticeindretninger
Note:
3E003.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til transistorer med høj elektronmobilitet (HEMT), der opererer ved frekvenser på under 31,8 GHz, og heterobipolære transistorer (HBT), der opererer ved frekvenser på under 31,8 GHz.
c.
"Superledende" elektroniske indretninger
d.
Substrater af diamantfilm til elektronikkomponenter
e.
Substrater af silicon-on-insulator (SOI) til integrerede kredsløb, hvor isolatoren er siliciumdioxid
f.
Substrater af siliciumcarbid til elektronikkomponenter
g.
"Elektroniske vakuumenheder", der opererer ved frekvenser på 31,8 GHz eller derover.
3E004
"Teknologi""krævet" til skæring, slibning og polering af siliciumwafere med en diameter på 300 mm for at få en 'Site Front least sQuares Range' ('SFQR') på højst 20 nm på et hvilket som helst sted på 26 mm x 8 mm på waferens forsideoverflade og et fradrag for kant på højst 2 nm.
Teknisk note:
Med henblik på 3E004 er 'SFQR' intervallet for maksimumsafvigelse og minimumsafvigelse fra forsidereferenceplanet beregnet ved mindste kvadraters metode med alle data om forsideoverfladen, inkl. et steds grænse inden for et sted.
3E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 3A001.a.1 eller 2, 3A101, 3A102 eller 3D101.
3E102
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af "software", der er specificeret i 3D101.
3E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 3A001.e.2, 3A001.e.3, 3A001.g., 3A201, 3A225-3A234.
3E225
"Teknologi", i form af koder eller nøgler til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i en frekvensomformer eller -generator, således at den opfylder egenskaberne i 3A225.
DEL VI –
Kategori 4
KATEGORI 4 - COMPUTERE
Note 1:
Computere, beslægtet udstyr og "software", der udfører funktioner i forbindelse med telekommunikation eller "lokalnet", skal også bedømmes på baggrund af de i kategori 5, del 1 (Telekommunikation) specificerede ydeevnekarakteristika.
Note 2:
Styreenheder, der direkte forbinder busser eller kanaler i centralenheder, controllere til 'hovedlager' eller diske, betragtes ikke som det i kategori 5, del 1 (Telekommunikation) beskrevne telekommunikationsudstyr.
N.B.
For så vidt angår eksportkontrolstatus for "software", der er specielt beregnet til pakkekobling, se kategori 5D001.
Teknisk note:
'Hovedlager' er det primære data- eller instruktionslager for hurtig tilgang fra en centralenhed. Det består af en "digital computers" interne lager og enhver hierarkisk udvidelse hertil, som for eksempel cache-lager eller udvidet lager med ikke-sekventiel tilgang.
4A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
4A001
Elektroniske computere og beslægtet udstyr, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber, herunder "elektroniske samlinger" og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 4A101.
a.
Specielt udviklet til at have en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Normeret til drift ved en omgivelsestemperatur under 228 K (-45 °C) eller over 358 K (85 °C) 
eller
Note:
4A001.a.1 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på computere, der er specielt konstrueret til anvendelse i civile motorkøretøjer, civile jernbaner eller "civile fly".
2.
Bedre strålebeskyttelse end svarende til en eller flere af følgende specifikationer:
a.
Total dosis 5 x 10
3
 Gy (silicium)
b.
Dosisændring ved forstyrrelse 5 x 10
6
 Gy (silicium)/s 
eller
c.
Enkelt forstyrrelse 1 x 10
-8
 Fejl/bit/dag
Note:
4A001.a.2 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på computere, der er specielt konstrueret til anvendelse i "civile fly".
b.
Ikke anvendt.
4A003
Følgende "digitale computere", "elektroniske samlinger" og beslægtet udstyr hertil samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
Note 1:
4A003 omfatter følgende:
—
'Vektorprocessorer'
—
Arrayprocessorer
—
Digitale signalprocessorer (DSP)
—
Logikprocessorer
—
Udstyr til "billedforbedring".
Note 2:
Eksportkontrolstatus for de "digitale computere" eller beslægtet udstyr, der beskrives i 4A003, afhænger af eksportkontrolstatus for andet udstyr eller systemer, såfremt:
a.
De "digitale computere" eller det beslægtede udstyr er væsentligt for driften af andet udstyr eller systemer
b.
De "digitale computere" eller det beslægtede udstyr ikke er et "hovedelement" i andet udstyr eller systemer og
N.B.1
Eksportkontrolstatus for "signalbehandlings"- eller "billedforbedrings"-udstyr, som er specielt konstrueret til andet udstyr, med funktioner, der er begrænset til dem, der kræves for det andet udstyr, afhænger af det andet udstyrs eksportkontrolstatus, selv om det overstiger "hovedelement"-kriteriet.
N.B.2
For så vidt angår eksportkontrolstatus for "digitale computere" eller beslægtet udstyr til telekommunikationsudstyr, se kategori 5, del 1 (Telekommunikation).
c.
"Teknologi" til "digitale computere" og beslægtet udstyr er omfattet af 4E.
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
"Digitale computere" med en "justeret spidsydeevne" ("APP") på mere end 29 vægtede teraflops (WT)
c.
"Elektroniske samlinger", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret for at kunne forbedre processorers ydelse ved sammenlægning, således at de efter sammenlægningen har en "APP", der er større end den i 4A003.b. specificerede grænse
Note 1:
4A003.c. lægger kun eksportkontrol på "elektroniske samlinger" og programmerbare forbindelser, der ikke overstiger de grænser, der er specificeret i 4A003.b., hvis de afsendes som ikke integrerede "elektroniske samlinger".
Note 2:
4A003.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "elektroniske samlinger", der er specielt konstrueret til et produkt eller en familie af produkter, hvis maksimale konfiguration ikke overstiger de grænser, der er specificeret i 4A003.b.
d.
Ikke anvendt
e.
Ikke anvendt
f.
Ikke anvendt
g.
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til at aggregere "digitale computeres" ydeevne ved at give mulighed for eksterne forbindelser, hvilket muliggør kommunikation med envejsdatahastigheder over 2,0 Gbyte/s pr. link.
Note:
4A003.g. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr til intern forbindelse (såsom backplane og bus), passivt forbindelsesudstyr, "network access controller" eller "kommunikationskanalcontrollere".
4A004
Følgende computere samt specielt konstrueret, beslægtet udstyr, "elektroniske samlinger" og komponenter hertil:
a.
'Systoliske array-computere'
b.
'Neurale computere'
c.
'Optiske computere'.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Systoliske array-computere' er computere, hvori dataflow og modifikation af data kan styres dynamisk på logikportniveau af brugeren.
2.
'Neurale computere' er computerindretninger, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til at efterligne en neurons eller neuronsamlings opførsel, dvs. computerindretninger, der kendetegnes ved evnen i deres hardware til at modulere vægt og antal af forbindelser til en række computerkomponenter, baseret på tidligere data.
3.
'Optiske computers' er computere, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til at bruge lys til at repræsentere data, og hvis computer-logikelementer er baseret på direkte koblede optiske enheder.
4A005
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter hertil, som er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til generering, kommando og kontrol eller levering af "intrusionsoftware"
4A101
Analoge computere, "digitale computere" eller digitale differentialanalysatorer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 4A001.a.1, som er specielt robuste og konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004 eller raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104.
4A102
Hybride computere, der er specielt konstrueret til modelforsøg, simulering eller konstruktionsintegrering af løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104.
Note:
Denne bestemmelse gælder kun, hvis udstyret leveres sammen med "software", der er specificeret i 7D103 eller 9D103.
4B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
Ingen.
4C   
Materialer
Ingen.
4D   
Software
Note:
Eksportkontrolstatus for "software" til det udstyr, der er beskrevet i andre kategorier, behandles i pågældende kategori.
4D001
"Software" som følger:
a.
"Software", der er specielt beregnet eller modificeret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, eller "software", der er specificeret i 4A001-4A004 eller 4D.
b.
"Software", bortset fra det, der er specificeret i 4D001.a, der er specielt beregnet eller modificeret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af følgende udstyr:
1.
"Digitale computere" med en "justeret spidsydeevne" ("APP") på mere end 15 vægtede teraflops (WT)
2.
"Elektroniske samlinger", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret for at kunne forbedre deres ydelse ved sammenlægning af processorer, således at de efter sammenlægningen har en "APP", der er større end den i 4D001.b.1 specificerede grænse.
4D002
Ikke anvendt
4D003
Ikke anvendt.
4D004
"Software" specielt beregnet eller modificeret til generering, kommando og kontrol eller levering af "intrusionsoftware".
Note:
4D004 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "software", der er specielt udviklet og begrænset til at tilbyde "software"-opdateringer eller -opgraderinger med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Opdateringen eller opgraderingen sker kun med godkendelse fra ejeren eller administratoren af det system, der modtager den, 
og
b.
Efter opdateringen eller opgraderingen er den pågældende "software" ikke noget af følgende:
1.
"Software", der er specificeret i 4D004 
eller
2.
"Intrusionsoftware".
4E   
Teknologi
4E001
a.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 4A eller 4D
b.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, bortset fra den, der er specificeret i 4E001.a, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af følgende udstyr:
1.
"Digitale computere" med en "justeret spidsydeevne" ("APP") på mere end 15 vægtede teraflops (WT)
2.
"Elektroniske samlinger", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret for at kunne forbedre deres ydelse ved sammenlægning af processorer, således at de efter sammenlægningen har en "APP", der er større end den i 4E001.b.1 specificerede grænse.
c.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" af "intrusionsoftware".
Note 1:
4E001.a. og 4E001.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'offentliggørelse af sårbarheder' eller 'reaktion på cyberhændelser'.
Note 2:
Note 1 indskrænker ikke retten for de kompetente myndigheder i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er etableret, til at undersøge, hvorvidt 4E001.a. er 4E001.c. er overholdt.
TEKNISK NOTE VEDRØRENDE "JUSTERET SPIDSYDEEVNE" ("APP")
"APP" er en justeret maksimal hastighed, hvormed "digitale computere" udfører additioner og multiplikationer med flydende komma på 64 bits eller mere.
"APP" udtrykkes i vægtede teraflops (WT), i enheder af 10
12
 justerede operationer med flydende komma pr. sekund.
Forkortelser i denne tekniske note
n
antal processorer i den "digitale computer"
i
processornummer (i,...n)
t
i
processorcyklustid (t
i
 = 1/F
i
)
F
i
processorfrekvens
R
i
maksimal regnehastighed med flydende komma
W
i
arkitekturjusteringsfaktor
"APP"-beregningsmetoden i korte træk
1.
Beregn for hver processor i det maksimale antal 64 bit- eller større operationer med flydende komma (FPO
i
), der ydes pr. cyklus for hver processor i den "digitale computer".
Note:
Ved beregningen af FPO medtages kun additioner eller multiplikationer med flydende komma på 64 bits eller mere. Alle operationer med flydende komma skal udtrykkes i operationer pr. processorcyklus; operationer, der kræver flere cyklusser, kan udtrykkes i fraktionerede resultater pr. cyklus. For processorer, der ikke er i stand til at udføre udregninger med operander med flydende komma på 64 bits eller mere, er den effektive regnehastighed R lig nul.
2.
Udregn hastigheden med flydende komma R for hver processor R
i
 = FPO
i
/t
i
.
3.
Beregn "APP" som "APP" = W
1
 x R
1
 + W
2
 x R
2
 + … + W
n
 x R
n
.
4.
For 'vektorprocessorer', W
i
 = 0,9. For ikke 'vektorprocessorer', W
i
 = 0,3.
Note 1:
For processorer, der udfører blandede operationer i en cyklus, f.eks. addition og multiplikation, tælles hver operation med.
Note 2:
For en processor med pipeline er den effektive regnehastighed R den største værdi af hastigheden ved udførelse med pipeline, når pipelinen er fuld, eller hastigheden uden pipeline.
Note 3:
Regnehastigheden R for hver medvirkende processor skal beregnes til den maksimalværdi, der er teoretisk mulig før kombinationens "APP" udledes. Samtidige operationer antages at finde sted, når computerens producent opgiver "concurrent, parallel eller simultaneous" operation eller udførelse i en manual eller brochure for computeren.
Note 4:
Processorer, der er begrænset til input/output og ydre funktioner (f.eks. diskdrev, display for kommunikation og video), er ikke omfattet ved beregningen af "APP".
Note 5:
"APP"-værdier beregnes ikke for processorkombinationer, der er (indbyrdes) forbundet via "lokalnet" (LAN), fjernnet (WAN), fælles input/outputforbindelser/indretninger, input/outputkontrolenheder eller enhver form for "software"implementeret kommunikationsforbindelse.
Note 6:
"APP"-værdier skal beregnes for processorkombinationer indeholdende processorer, der er specielt konstrueret til forbedring af ydelsen ved samling, samtidig kørsel eller fælles hukommelse.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Alle processorer og acceleratorer, der opererer samtidig på den samme skive, lægges sammen.
2.
Processorkombinationer deler hukommelse, når en processor kan tilgå en hvilken som helst del af systemets hukommelse ved hardwareoverførsel af cache-blokke eller hukommelsesord uden medvirken af en softwaremekanisme, hvilket kan opnås ved hjælp af "elektroniske samlinger" som specificeret i 4A003.c.
Note 7:
En 'vektorprocessor' defineres som en processor med indbyggede instruktioner, der udfører multiple udregninger med vektorer med flydende komma (éndimensionale arrays på 64 bits eller mere) samtidig, og som har mindst 2 vektorfunktionelle enheder og mindst 8 vektorregistre på mindst 64 elementer hvert.
DEL VII –
Kategori 5
KATEGORI 5 - TELEKOMMUNIKATION OG "INFORMATIONSSIKKERHED"
Del 1 — TELEKOMMUNIKATION
Note 1:
I kategori 5, del 1, defineres eksportkontrolstatus for komponenter, prøve- og "produktions"udstyr og "software" hertil, som er specielt konstrueret til telekommunikationsudstyr eller telekommunikationssystemer.
N.B.
For "lasere" specielt konstrueret til telekommunikationsudstyr eller -systemer, se 6A005.
Note 2:
"Digitale computere", beslægtet udstyr eller "software", der er væsentligt for drift og understøtning af det telekommunikationsudstyr, der er beskrevet i denne kategori, betragtes som specielt konstruerede komponenter, forudsat at der er tale om standardmodeller, der normalt leveres af producenten. Dette omfatter computersystemer til drift, administration, vedligeholdelse, konstruktion eller fakturering.
5A1   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
5A001
Telekommunikationssystemer, -udstyr, komponenter og tilbehør som følger:
a.
Enhver type telekommunikationsudstyr med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber, funktioner eller karakteristika:
1.
Specielt konstrueret til at modstå transiente elektroniske påvirkninger eller elektromagnetiske impulser fra en atomeksplosion
2.
Specielt modstandsdygtige mod gamma-, neutron- eller ionstråling
3.
Specielt konstrueret til at operere ved temperaturer under 218 K (-55 °C) 
eller
4.
Specielt konstrueret til at operere ved temperaturer over 397 K (124 °C)
Note 1:
5A001.a.3. og 5A001.a.4. lægger kun eksportkontrol på elektronisk udstyr.
Note 2:
5A001.a.2., 5A001.a.3. og 5A001.a.4. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, der er konstrueret eller modificeret med henblik på anvendelse i satellitter.
b.
Telekommunikationssystemer og -udstyr, og specielt konstruerede komponenter og tilbehør hertil, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber, funktioner eller karakteristika:
1.
Er utilkoblet undervandskommunikationsudstyr og har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En akustisk bærefrekvens uden for området 20 kHz-60 kHz
b.
Anvender en elektromagnetisk bærefrekvens på under 30 kHz
c.
Anvender elektronstråleretningsstyringsteknikker 
eller
d.
Anvender "lasere" eller lysemitterende dioder (LED) med udgangsbølgelængde på over 400 nm og under 700 nm, i et "lokalnet"
2.
Er radioudstyr, der opererer i 1,5 til 87,5 MHz-båndet og har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Automatisk forudsigelse og valg af frekvenser og "totale digitale overføringshastigheder" pr. kanal til optimering af transmissionen og
b.
Omfatter en lineær effektforstærkerkonfiguration med evne til at understøtte multiple signaler samtidigt ved en udgangseffekt på 1 kW eller mere i 1,5 til 30 MHz-frekvensområdet eller 250 W eller mere i 30 til 87,5 MHz-frekvensområdet, over en "momentan båndbredde" på én oktav eller mere og med et harmonisk og forvrængningsindhold i udgangen, der er bedre end -80 dB
3.
Er radioudstyr, der anvender andre teknikker med "spredt spektrum", herunder "frekvenshop"-teknikker, end dem, der er specificeret i 5A001.b.4. og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Brugerprogrammerbare spredekoder 
eller
b.
Total transmitteret båndbredde, der er mindst 100 gange båndbredden for nogen enkelt informationskanal, og over 50 kHz
Note:
5A001.b.3.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på radioudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til anvendelse med følgende:
a.
Civile mobiltelefonisystemer eller
b.
Faste eller mobile satellitjordstationer til kommerciel civil telefoni.
Note:
5A001.b.3 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, der er konstrueret til at fungere med en udgangseffekt på højst 1 W.
4.
Er radioudstyr, der anvender teknikker med ultrabredbåndsmodulation med brugerprogrammerbare kanaliseringskoder, krypteringskoder eller netværksidentifikationskoder og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Båndbredde på over 500 MHz 
eller
b.
En "relativ båndbredde" på mindst 20 %
5.
Er digitalt styrede radiomodtagere, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Mere end 1 000 kanaler
b.
Har en 'kanalskiftetid' på mindre end 1 ms
c.
Automatisk søgning eller scanning af en del af det elektromagnetiske spektrum 
og
d.
Identifikation af de modtagne signaler eller sendertype 
eller
Note:
5A001.b.5 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på radioudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til anvendelse med civile mobiltelefonisystemer.
Teknisk note:
'Kanalskiftetid' er den tid (dvs. forsinkelse) det tager at skifte fra en modtagefrekvens til en anden, for at nå til eller inden for ± 0,05 % af den endelige specificerede modtagefrekvens. Produkter med et specificeret frekvensområde på under ± 0,05 % omkring deres centerfrekvens kan pr. definition ikke skifte kanal.
6.
Anvender digitale "signalbehandlings"funktioner, som yder 'talekodnings' output på hastigheder på mindre end 700 bit/s
Tekniske noter:
1.
For 'talekodning' med variabel hastighed finder 5A001.b.6 anvendelse på 'talekodnings' output for vedvarende tale.
2.
I 5A001.b.6. defineres 'talekodning' som en teknik til at udtage prøver af den menneskelige stemme og konvertere disse prøver til et digitalt signal under hensyntagen til den menneskelige tales særlige kendetegn.
c.
Optiske fibre af en længde på mere end 500 m, som efter fabrikantens specifikationer er i stand til at modstå en træk'prøvning' på 2 x 10
9
 N/m
2
 eller mere
N.B.
 For
så vidt angår undervandsforbindelseskabler henvises til 8A002.a.3.
Teknisk note:
'Prøvning': Online- eller offlineproduktionsprøvning, som dynamisk påfører en foreskrevet trækspænding over 0,5 til 3 m af en fiber ved en løbehastighed på 2 til 5 m/s, mens den passerer mellem ruller, der er ca. 150 mm i diameter. Omgivelsestemperaturen er nominelt 293 K (20 °C) og den relative fugtighed 40 %. Tilsvarende nationale standarder kan anvendes ved gennemførelsen af denne prøvning.
d.
'Elektronisk drejelige fasede retningsantennesystemer' som følger:
1.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 31,8 GHz, men ikke over 57 GHz, med effektiv udstrålet effekt (ERP) på mindst +20 dBm (22,15 dBm effektiv isotropisk udstrålet effekt (EIRP))
2.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 57 GHz, men ikke over 66 GHz, med ERP på mindst +24 dBm (26,15 dBm EIRP)
3.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 66 GHz, men ikke over 90 GHz, med ERP på mindst +20 dBm (22,15 dBm EIRP)
4.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 90 GHz
Note 1:
5A001.d lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'elektronisk drejelige fasede retningsantennesystemer' til landingssystemer med instrumenter, der overholder International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO)-standarder (mikrobølgelandingssystemer (MLS)).
Note 2:
5A001.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på antenner, der er specielt konstrueret til en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Civile mobiltelefonisystemer eller WLAN-radiokommunikationssystemer
b.
IEEE 802.15 eller trådløst HDMI 
eller
c.
Faste eller mobile satellitjordstationer til kommerciel civil telefoni.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 5A001.d. er et 'elektronisk drejelig faset retningsantennesystem' en antenne, som danner en stråle ved hjælp af fasekobling, dvs. at stråleretningen styres af de strålende elementers komplekse fødekoefficienter, og denne stråles retning kan ændres i azimut eller højde, eller begge dele, både ved transmission og modtagelse af et elektrisk signal.
e.
Radiopejleudstyr, som opererer ved frekvenser på mere end 30 MHz, og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter dertil:
1.
"Øjeblikkelig båndbredde" på 10 MHz eller derover 
og
2.
I stand til at finde en pejlelinje (LOB) til ikkesamarbejdende radiosendere med en signalvarighed på mindre end 1 ms
f.
Udstyr til aflytning af telekommunikation, eller jammingudstyr, og overvågningsudstyr hertil som følger, og specielt designede komponenter hertil:
1.
Aflytningsudstyr beregnet til udtræk af tale eller data, som sendes via radiogrænsefladen
2.
Aflytningsudstyr, som ikke er specificeret i 5A001.f.1, som er beregnet til udtræk identifikatorer for kunders apparater eller abonnementer (f.eks. IMSI, TIMSI eller IMEI), signalering eller andre metadata, der sendes via luftgrænsefladen
3.
Jammingudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til forsætligt og selektivt at interferere med, afvise, hæmme, ødelægge eller bortlede mobile telekommunikationstjenester, og som har en eller flere af følgende funktioner:
a.
Simulering af funktionerne i udstyr til Radio Access Network (RAN)
b.
Detektering og udnyttelse af specifikke karakteristika ved den anvendte protokol til mobil kommunikation (f.eks. GSM) eller
c.
Udnyttelse af specifikke karakteristika ved den anvendte protokol til mobil kommunikation (f.eks. GSM)
4.
RF-overvågningsudstyr, som er konstrueret eller modificeret til at identificere driften af produkter specificeret i 5A001.f.1., 5A001.f.2. eller 5A001.f.3.
Note:
5A001.f.1. og 5A001.f.2. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til aflytning af analoge private mobilradioer (PMR), IEEE 802.11 WLAN
b.
Udstyr, der er konstrueret til mobile telekommunikationsnetværksoperatører 
eller
c.
Udstyr, der er konstrueret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr eller systemer til mobil telekommunikation.
N.B.1
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
N.B.2
For radiomodtagere, se 5A001.b.5.
g.
Passive kohærente stedbestemmelsessystemer eller -udstyr (PCL) specielt beregnet til detektion og sporing af objekter i bevægelse ved måling af refleksioner af radiofrekvensemissioner i atmosfæren fra ikkeradarsendere
Teknisk note:
Ikkeradarsendere kan omfatte kommercielle radio-, TV- eller mobiltelefonbasestationer.
Note:
5A001.g. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
Radioastronomisk udstyr 
eller
b.
Systemer eller udstyr, der kræver radiotransmission fra målet.
h.
Følgende udstyr til bekæmpelse af improviseret eksplosiv anordning (IED) og beslægtet udstyr:
1.
Radiofrekvens-(RF)-sendeudstyr, som ikke er specificeret i 5A001.f, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til at forårsage tidlig aktivering eller hindre initiering af improviserede eksplosive anordninger.
2.
Udstyr, der benytter teknikker beregnet til at muliggøre radiokommunikation på samme frekvenskanaler, som udstyr på samme sted, der er specificeret i 5A001.h.1. sender på.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
i.
Ikke anvendt
j.
Internetprotokolnetbaserede (IP-net) kommunikationsovervågningssystemer eller udstyr, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udfører samtlige følgende funktioner i et carrier class-internetprotokolnet (IP-net) (f.eks. national IP-backbone)
a.
Analyse i applikationslaget (f.eks. lag 7 i modellen for sammenkobling af åbne systemer (OSI) (ISO/IEC 7498-1))
b.
Udtræk af udvalgte metadata og applikationsindhold (f.eks. stemmer, videoer, beskeder, vedhæftede filer) 
og
c.
Indeksering af udtrukne data 
og
2.
Specielt udviklet til at udføre samtlige følgende funktioner:
a.
Udføre søgninger på basis af '''hard selectors'' 
og
b.
Kortlægge en enkeltpersons eller en gruppe af menneskers sociale netværk.
Note:
j5A001.j. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på systemer og udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til følgende:
a.
Markedsføring
b.
Network Quality of Service (QoS) 
eller
c.
Quality of Experience (QoE).
5A101
Fjernmålings- og fjernstyringsudstyr, herunder jordbaseret udstyr, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til 'missiler'.
Teknisk note:
I 5A101 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
Note:
5A101 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Udstyr, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til bemandede luftfartøjer eller satellitter
b.
Jordbaseret udstyr, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til anvendelse på landjorden eller til søs
c.
Udstyr, der er konstrueret til kommercielle, civile eller 'Safety of Life' (f.eks. dataintegritet, flysikkerhed) GNSS-tjenester.
5B1   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
5B001
Telekommunikationsprøvnings-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr, komponenter og tilbehør som følger:
a.
Udstyr og særligt konstruerede komponenter og tilbehør hertil, konstrueret med særligt henblik på "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, funktioner eller karakteristika, der er specificeret i 5A001
Note:
5B001.a lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr til karakterisering af optiske fibre.
b.
Udstyr og særligt konstruerede komponenter eller tilbehør hertil, konstrueret med særligt henblik på "udvikling" af en eller flere af følgende former for telekommunikationstransmissions- eller koblingsudstyr:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Udstyr, der anvender "laser", og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Transmissionsbølgelængde over 1 750 nm 
eller
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Anvender analoge teknikker og har en båndbredde på over 2,5 GHz eller
Note:
5B001.b.2.d lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, der er konstrueret med særlig henblik på "udvikling" af kommercielle TV-systemer.
3.
Ikke anvendt
4.
Radioudstyr, der anvender kvadraturamplitudemodulationsteknikker (QAM) over niveau 1 024
5.
Ikke anvendt.
5C1   
Materialer
Ingen
5D1   
Software
5D001
"Software" som følger:
a.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af udstyr, funktioner eller karakteristika, der er specificeret i 5A001
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Specifik "software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til at tilvejebringe egenskaber, funktioner eller karakteristika i udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A001 eller 5B001
d.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling" af en eller flere af følgende former for telekommunikationstransmissions- eller koblingsudstyr:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Udstyr, der anvender "laser", og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Transmissionsbølgelængde over 1 750 nm 
eller
b.
Anvender analoge teknikker og har en båndbredde på over 2,5 GHz 
eller
Note:
5D001.d.2.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "software", der er konstrueret eller modificeret med særlig henblik på "udvikling" af kommercielle TV-systemer.
3.
Ikke anvendt
4.
Radioudstyr, der anvender kvadraturamplitudemodulationsteknikker (QAM) over niveau 1 024
e.
"Software", bortset fra det, der er specificeret i 5D001.a. eller 5D001.c, der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til retshåndhævende myndigheders overvågning eller analyse, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udføre søgninger på basis af 'hard selectors'' i enten kommunikationsindhold eller metadata modtaget fra en kommunikationstjenesteyder ved anvendelse af et 'overdragelsesinterface' og
2.
Kortlægge bestemte enkeltpersoners sociale netværk eller spore deres bevægelser baseret på resultaterne af søgning i kommunikationsindhold eller metadata eller søgning som beskrevet i 5D001.e.1.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Med henblik på 5D001.e. er et 'overdragelsesinterface' et fysisk og logisk interface, der er udformet med henblik på at blive brugt af en bemyndiget retshåndhævende myndighed, og hvorigennem der anmodes om målrettede foranstaltninger til opfangning af kommunikation fra en kommunikationstjenesteyder, og resultaterne af opfangningen leveres fra en kommunikationstjenesteyder til den anmodende myndighed. 'Overdragelsesinterfacet' fungerer inden for systemer eller udstyr (f.eks. formidlingsanordninger), som modtager og validerer anmodningen om opfangning, og som udelukkende giver den anmodende myndighed de opfangningsresultater, der i overensstemmelse med den validerede anmodning.
2.
''Overdragelsesinterface' kan være specificeret i internationale standarder (bl.a. ETSI TS 101 331, ETSI TS 101 671, 3GPP TS 33.108) eller nationale ækvivalenter.
Note:
5D001.e. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Faktureringsformål
b.
Network Quality of Service (QoS)
c.
Quality of Experience (QoE)
d.
Formidlingsanordninger 
eller
e.
Mobilbetaling eller -banking.
5D101
"Software", der er konstrueret eller modificeret med særlig henblik på "brug" af udstyr, som er specificeret i 5A101.
5E1   
Teknologi
5E001
"Teknologi" som følger:
a.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" (undtagen drift) af udstyr, funktioner eller karakteristika, der er specificeret i 5A001, eller "software", der er specificeret i 5D001.a. eller 5D001.e
b.
Følgende specifik "teknologi":
1.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af telekommunikationsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til brug i satellitter
2.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "brug" af "laser"kommunikationsteknikker med evne til automatisk indhentning og sporing af signaler og opretholdelse af kommunikation gennem exosfæren eller under vandoverfladen
3.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" af digitalt modtageudstyr til mobiltelefonbasestationer, hvis modtagefaciliteter med flerbånds-, flerkanal-, multimode-, multikodningsalgoritme- eller flerprotokolfunktioner kan ændres ved hjælp af ændringer i "software"
4.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" af teknikker med "spredt spektrum", herunder "frekvenshop-"teknikker
Note:
5E001.b.4. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til "udvikling" af følgende:
a.
Civile mobiltelefonisystemer 
eller
b.
Faste eller mobile satellitjordstationer til kommerciel civil telefoni.
c.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Udstyr, der anvender "laser", og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Transmissionsbølgelængde over 1 750 nm 
eller
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Anvender bølgelængdedelingsmultiplekseringsteknikker med optiske bærere med mindre end 100 GHz spatiering 
eller
e.
Anvender analoge teknikker og har en båndbredde på over 2,5 GHz
Note
5E001.c.2.e lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til kommercielle TV-systemer.
N.B.
Med hensyn til "teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, der anvender laser, og som ikke er til telekommunikation, se 6E.
3.
Udstyr, der anvender "optisk kobling", og som har en skiftetid på under 1 ms
4.
Radioudstyr, der anvender en af følgende:
a.
Kvadraturamplitudemodulationsteknikker (QAM) over niveau 1 024
b.
Fungerer ved input- eller outputfrekvenser på over 31,8 GHz 
eller
Note:
5E001.c.4.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til udstyr, der konstrueres eller modificeres til brug inden for et frekvensbånd, der er "allokeret af ITU" til radiokommunikationstjenester, men ikke til radiostedbestemmelse.
c.
Opererer i båndet mellem 1,5 og 87,5 MHz og omfatter adaptive teknikker, der giver mere end 15 dB undertrykkelse af et interferenssignal 
eller
5.
Ikke anvendt
6.
Mobilt udstyr med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Opererer ved en optisk bølgelængde på mindst 200 nm og højst 400 nm 
og
b.
Opererer som et "lokalnet"
d.
"Teknologi" iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af effektforstærkere med "monolitisk integreret mikrobølgekredsløb" ("MMIC"), der er specielt konstruerede til telekommunikation og har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
Teknisk note:
I 5E001.d kan der også henvises til parameteret for maksimal udgangseffekt i forbindelse med produktdatablade som udgangseffekt, maksimal udgangseffekt, topudgangseffekt eller topeffekt.
1.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 15 %, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 75 W (48,75 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,7 GHz til og med 2,9 GHz
b.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 55 W (47,4 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 2,9 GHz til og med 3,2 GHz
c.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 40 W (46 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,2 GHz til og med 3,7 GHz 
eller
d.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 20 W (43 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 3,7 GHz til og med 6,8 GHz
2.
Normeret til drift ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 16 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 10 W (40 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 6,8 GHz til og med 8,5 GHz 
eller
b.
En maksimal udgangseffekt på over 5 W (37 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 8,5 GHz til og med 16 GHz
3.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 3 W (34,77 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 16 GHz til og med 31,8 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
4.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 31,8 GHz til og med 37 GHz
5.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W (30 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 37 GHz til og med 43,5 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
6.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 31,62 mW (15 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 43,5 GHz til og med 75 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 10 %
7.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på mere end 10 mW (10 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 75 GHz til og med 90 GHz og med en "relativ båndbredde" på mere end 5 % 
eller
8.
Normeret til drift med en maksimal udgangseffekt på over 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) ved frekvenser på mere end 90 GHz
e.
"Teknologi" iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af elektronisk udstyr eller kredsløb, der er specielt konstrueret til telekommunikation og indeholder komponenter, der er fremstillet af "superledende" materialer, der er specielt beregnet til drift ved temperaturer under mindst en af de "superledende" bestanddeles "kritiske temperatur", og som har en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Strømkobling til digitale kredsløb ved hjælp af "superledende" porte med et produkt af forsinkelse pr. port (i sekunder) og effekttab pr. port (i watt) på mindre end 10
-14
 J 
eller
2.
Frekvensvalg ved alle frekvenser ved hjælp af resonanskredse med Q-værdier på mere end 10 000.
5E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A101.
Del 2 - "INFORMATIONSSIKKERHED"
Note 1:
Ikke anvendt.
Note 2:
Kategori 5, del 2, lægger ikke eksportkontrol på produkter, når de ledsager brugeren med henblik på dennes personlige brug.
Note 3:
Kryptografinote
5A002, 5D002.a.1., 5D002.b. og 5D002.c.1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende:
a.
Produkter, der opfylder samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Produkter, der er generelt tilgængelige for offentligheden ved salg uden begrænsninger fra lager ved detailsalgssteder i en af følgende former:
a.
Salg over disken
b.
Postordresalg
c.
Elektronisk salg 
eller
d.
Telefonsalg
2.
Krypteringsfunktionen kan ikke let ændres af brugeren
3.
Er udviklet til installation af brugeren uden yderligere væsentlig støtte fra leverandøren 
eller
4.
Nærmere oplysninger om produkterne skal efter anmodning om nødvendigt stilles til rådighed for de kompetente myndigheder i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren har hjemsted, for at fastslå, om kravene i pkt. 1-3 ovenfor er overholdt.
b.
Hardwarekomponenter eller 'eksekverbart software' i eksisterende produkter, som er beskrevet i litra a i denne note, som er konstrueret til disse eksisterende produkter og har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Informationssikkerhed" er ikke den primære funktion eller række af funktioner i komponenten eller det 'eksekverbare software'.
2.
Komponenten eller det 'eksekverbare software' ændrer ikke den kryptografiske funktionalitet i eksisterende produkter eller tilføjer nye kryptografiske funktionaliteter til eksisterende produkter.
3.
Komponentens eller det 'eksekverbare softwares' funktioner er faste og er ikke konstrueret eller modificeret i henhold til kundespecifikation 
og
4.
Når de kompetente myndigheder i den EU-medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren har hjemsted, finder det nødvendigt, skal nærmere oplysninger om komponenter eller 'eksekverbart software' samt om relevante slutprodukter efter anmodning stilles til rådighed for de kompetente myndigheder for at fastslå, om kravene ovenfor er overholdt.
Teknisk note:
I kryptografinoten er 'eksekverbart software' "software" i eksekverbar form, fra en eksisterende hardwarekomponent, der er udelukket fra 5A002 af kryptografinoten.
Note:
'Eksekverbart software' omfatter ikke komplette binære billeder af "software", der køres på et slutprodukt.
Note til kryptografinoten:
1.
For at overholde litra a i note 3 skal følgende gælde:
a.
Produktet er af potentiel interesse for en lang række enkeltpersoner og virksomheder 
og
b.
Prisen på produktet og oplysninger om dets vigtigste funktionalitet kan findes før købet, uden at det er nødvendigt at kontakte forhandler eller leverandør. En simpel prisforespørgsel anses ikke for at være en kontakt.
2.
Når de kompetente myndigheder træffer afgørelse vedrørende litra a i note 3, kan de tage hensyn til relevante faktorer såsom mængde, pris, nødvendige tekniske færdigheder, eksisterende salgskanaler, typiske kunder, typisk anvendelse eller eventuel ekskluderende adfærd hos leverandøren.
5A2   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
5A002
"Informationssikkerheds"-systemer, udstyr og komponenter hertil som følger:
N.B.
For så vidt angår eksportkontrol på modtageudstyr til "satellitnavigationssystemer", der indeholder eller anvender dekryptering, jf. 7A005, og for tilknyttet "software" eller "teknologi" til dekryptering, jf. 7D005 og 7E001.
a.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til at anvende 'kryptografi med henblik på datafortrolighed' med en 'beskrevet sikkerhedsalgoritme', når kryptografifunktionen kan anvendes, er blevet aktiveret eller kan aktiveres på andre måder en ved sikker "kryptografisk aktivering", som følger:
1.
Produkter med "informationssikkerhed" som primær funktion
2.
Systemer, udstyr eller komponenter til digital kommunikation eller netværk, der ikke er specificeret i 5A002.a.1.
3.
Computere, andre produkter, hvor opbevaring eller behandling af oplysninger er en primær funktion, og komponenter hertil, som ikke er specificeret i 5A002.a.1. eller 5A002.a.2.
N.B.
Med henblik på operativsystemer henvises også til 5D002.a.1. og 5D002.c.1.
4.
Produkter, der ikke er specificeret i 5A002.a.1.-5A002.a.3., hvor 'kryptografien med henblik på datafortrolighed' med en 'beskrevet sikkerhedsalgoritme', opfylder samtlige følgende krav:
a.
Den understøtter en ikkeprimær funktion ved produktet 
og
b.
Den udføres af indbygget udstyr eller "software", der som selvstændigt produkt, ville være specificeret i kategori 5, Del 2.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 5A002.a. forstås ved 'kryptografi med henblik på datafortrolighed' "kryptografi", der anvender digitale teknikker og udfører andre krypteringsfunktioner end følgende:
a.
"Autentifikation"
b.
Digital signatur
c.
Dataintegritet
d.
Uafviselighed
e.
Forvaltning af digitale rettigheder, herunder afvikling af kopibeskyttet "software"
f.
Kryptering eller dekryptering til understøttelse af underholdning, kommercielle udsendelser til offentligheden eller forvaltning af digitale rettigheder 
eller
g.
Nøgleforvaltning til understøttelse af en eller flere af de funktioner, der er beskrevet i litra a.-f. ovenfor.
2.
I 5A002.a. forstås ved 'beskrevet sikkerhedsalgoritme' følgende:
a.
En "symmetrisk algoritme" med en nøglelængde på mere end 56 bits, paritetsbits ikke omfattet
b.
En "asymmetrisk algoritme", hvor algoritmens sikkerhed er baseret på et eller flere af følgende elementer:
1.
Heltalsregning ud over 512 bits (f. eks RSA)
2.
Beregning af særskilte logaritmer i en multiplikationsgruppe bestående af et finit felt større end 512 bits (f.eks. Diffie-Hellman over Z/pZ) 
eller
3.
Særskilte logaritmer i en anden gruppe end nævnt i b.2. ud over 112 bits (f.eks. Diffie-Hellman over en elliptisk kurve) 
eller
c.
En "asymmetrisk algoritme", hvor algoritmens sikkerhed er baseret på et eller flere af følgende elementer:
1.
Problemer med korteste vektor eller nærmeste vektor i forbindelse med gitre (feks. NewHope, Frodo, NTRUEncrypt, Kyber eller Titanium)
2.
At finde isogenier mellem Supersingular elliptiske kurver (f.eks. Supersingular Isogeny Key Encapsulation) 
eller
3.
At afkode tilfældige koder (f.eks. McEliece eller Niederreiter).
Teknisk note:
En algoritme, der er beskrevet i teknisk note 2.c, kan betegnes som værende post-kvante, kvantesikker eller kvanteresistent.
Note 1:
Hvis den relevante myndighed i eksportørens land finder det nødvendigt, skal detaljerede oplysninger om produkter være tilgængelige og stilles efter anmodning til rådighed for myndigheden med henblik på at fastslå et eller flere af følgende punkter:
a.
Om produktet opfylder kriterierne i 5A002.a.1.-5A002.a.4. 
eller
b.
Om den kryptografifunktion med henblik på datafortrolighed, der er specificeret i 5A002.a., er anvendelig uden "kryptografisk aktivering".
Note 2:
5A002.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende produkter eller på specielt konstruerede "informationssikkerheds"-komponenter hertil:
a.
Chipkort og 'læse-/skriveenheder' til chipkort som følger:
1.
Et chipkort eller maskinlæsbart personligt dokument (f.eks. polet, e-pas), der opfylder en eller flere af følgende betingelser:
a.
Kryptografifunktionen opfylder samtlige følgende betingelser:
1.
Den er begrænset til brug i følgende:
a.
Udstyr eller systemer, der ikke er beskrevet i 5A002.a.1.-5A002.a.4.
b.
Udstyr eller systemer, der ikke anvender 'kryptografi med henblik på datafortrolighed' med en 'beskrevet sikkerhedsalgoritme', eller
c.
Udstyr eller systemer, der ikke er omfattet af 5A002.a., ved denne notes litra b.-f., 
og
2.
Den kan ikke omprogrammeres til andre anvendelser, eller:
b.
Med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Er specielt konstrueret og begrænset til at beskytte de lagrede 'personoplysninger'
2.
Er blevet gjort eller kan kun gøres personligt til offentlige transaktioner eller handelstransaktioner eller individuel identifikation 
og
3.
Kryptografifunktionen er ikke brugertilgængelig
Teknisk note:
'Personoplysninger' omfatter oplysninger, der er specifikke for en bestemt person eller enhed, f.eks. det lagrede pengebeløb og de oplysninger, der er nødvendige for "autentifikation".
2.
'Læse-/skriveenheder', der er specielt konstrueret eller ændret og begrænset til produkter specificeret i a.1. i denne note.
Teknisk note:
'Læse-/skriveenheder' omfatter udstyr, der kommunikerer med chipkort eller maskinlæsbare dokumenter over et netværk.
b.
Krypteringsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret og begrænset til bank- eller 'pengetransaktioner'.
Teknisk note:
'Pengetransaktioner' i 5A002.a. Note 2.b omfatter udstedelse og betaling af billetter eller kreditfunktioner.
c.
Bærbare (personlige) eller mobile radiotelefoner til civil brug (f.eks. til brug med kommercielle civile mobiltelefonisystemer), der ikke er i stand til at sende krypterede data direkte til en anden radiotelefon eller udstyr (bortset fra udstyr til Radio Access Network (RAN)), eller til at sende krypterede data gennem udstyr til RAN (f.eks. Radio Network Controller (RNC) eller Base Station Controller (BSC))
d.
Trådløst telefonudstyr, der ikke kan foretage end-to-end kryptering, hvor den maksimale effektive rækkevidde af en uforstærket trådløs operation (dvs. et enkelt hop uden relæ mellem terminal og basestation) er mindre end 400 m iflg. fabrikantens specifikationer
e.
Bærbare eller mobile radiotelefoner eller lignende trådløse klientapparater til civil brug, som kun anvender offentliggjorte eller kommercielle kryptografiske standarder (med undtagelse af antipiratkopieringsfunktioner, som ikke behøver at være offentliggjort), og som også opfylder betingelserne i punkt a.2-a.4 i kryptografinoten (note 3 i kategori 5, del 2), som er blevet tilpasset til en specifik anvendelse i den civile industri med egenskaber, som ikke påvirker disse oprindeligt ikketilpassede apparaters kryptografiske funktionalitet.
f.
Produkter, hvor "informationssikkerheds"-funktionen er begrænset til trådløst "personligt netværk"-funktionalitet, og som kun anvender offentliggjorte eller kommercielle kryptografiske standarder:
g.
Mobilt telekommunikationsudstyr til Radio Access Network (RAN) bestemt til civil brug, som også opfylder bestemmelserne i afsnit a.2-a.4 i kryptografinoten (note 3 i kategori 5, del 2), der har en RF-udgangseffekt, som er begrænset til 0,1 W (20 dBm) eller derunder, og understøtter højst 16 samtidige brugere.
h.
Routere, omkoblere, gateways eller relæer, hvor "informationssikkerheds"-funktionen er begrænset til opgaverne "drift, administration eller vedligeholdelse" ("OAM"), og som kun anvender offentliggjorte eller kommercielle kryptografiske standarder, 
eller
i.
Computerudstyr eller -servere til generelle formål, hvor "informationssikkerheds"-funktionen opfylder samtlige følgende betingelser:
1.
Anvender kun offentliggjorte eller kommercielle kryptografiske standarder 
og
2.
Er enten:
a.
Integreret i en CPU, der opfylder bestemmelserne i note 3 i kategori 5, del 2
b.
Integreret i et operativsystem, som ikke er specificeret i 5D002 
eller
c.
Begrænset til udstyrets "OAM".
j.
Genstande, der er specialdesignet til 'forbundet anvendelse i den civile industri', og som opfylder samtlige følgende betingelser:
1.
Er en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Et endepunktapparat, der kan tilsluttes et netværk, og som opfylder en eller flere af følgende betingelser:
1.
"Informationssikerheds"-funktionen er begrænset til at sikre 'ikke-arbitrære data' eller til opgaverne "drift, administration eller vedligeholdelse" ("OAM") 
eller
2.
Apparatet er begrænset til en specifik 'forbundet anvendelse i den civile industri' 
eller
b.
Netværksudstyr, der opfylder samtlige følgende betingelser:
1.
Er specialdesignet til at kommunikere med de apparater, der er anført i j.1.a ovenfor, 
og
2.
"Informationssikerheds"-funktionen er begrænset til at støtte 'tilknyttet anvendelse i den civile industri' af de apparater, der er anført i j.1.a ovenfor, eller "OAM"-opgaverne fofr dette netværksudstyr eller andre genstande, der er anført i denne notes stk. j, 
og
2.
Hvis "informationssikerheds"-funktionen kun anvender offentliggjorte eller kommercielle kryptografiske standarder, og kryptografifunktionen ikke let kan ændres af brugeren.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Forbundet anvendelse i den civile industri': Netværksforbundet anvendelse i forbrugerindustrien eller den civile industri, bortset fra "informationssikkerhed", digital kommunikation eller netværk og computere til generelle formål.
2.
'Ikke-arbitrære data': Sensor- eller måledata, der er direkte relateret til et systems stabilitet, ydeevene eller fysiske målinger (f.eks. temperatur, tryk, strømningshastighed, massefylde, rumfang, spænding, fysisk placering, mv.), som ikke kan ændres af udstyrets bruger.
b.
Er en 'kryptografisk aktiveringsnøgle'
Teknisk note:
En 'kryptografisk aktiveringsnøgle' er et produkt, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til et eller flere af følgende:
1.
Ved hjælp af "kryptografisk aktivering" at konvertere en genstand, der ikke er anført i Kategori 5, Del 2, til en genstand, der er anført i 5A002.a. eller 5D002.c.1., og som ikke er frigivet ved Noten om kryptografi (Note 3 i Kategori 5, Del 2), eller
2.
Ved hjælp af "kryptografisk aktivering" at muliggøre brug af yderligere funktioner, der er anført i 5A002.a., for en genstand, der allerede er anført i Kategori 5, Del 2.
c.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til at anvende eller foretage "kvantekryptografi"
Teknisk note:
"Kvantekryptografi" er også kendt som kvantenøgledistribution (QKD).
d.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til at bruge kryptografiske teknikker til at danne kanaliseringskoder, krypteringskoder eller netværksidentifikationskoder til systemer, der anvender teknikker med ultrabredbåndsmodulation, med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Båndbredde på over 500 MHz eller
2.
En "relativ båndbredde" på mindst 20 %
e.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til at bruge kryptografiske teknikker til at danne spredekoden til andre systemer med "spredt spektrum" end dem, der er specificeret i 5A002.d., herunder hoppekoden til "frekvenshop"-systemer
5A003
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter til ikkekryptografisk "informationssikkerhed" som følger:
a.
Kommunikationskabelsystemer, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til at bruge mekaniske, elektriske eller elektroniske midler til opdagelse af hemmelig aflytning
Note:
5A003.a. lægger kun eksportkontrol på sikkerhed for den fysiske grænseflade. Med henblik på 5A003.a omfatter den fysiske grænseflade lag 1 i referencemodellen for sammenkobling af åbne systemer (OSI) (ISO/IEC 7498-1).
b.
Specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til at reducere kompromitterende udsendelse af informationsbærende signaler, ud over hvad der er nødvendigt med henblik på overholdelse af normer for sundhed, sikkerhed eller elektromagnetisk interferens.
5A004
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter til at gennemtrænge, svække eller omgå "informationssikkerhed" som følger:
a.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til at udføre 'kryptoanalytiske funktioner'
Note:
5A004.a. omfatter systemer og udstyr, der er designet eller modificeret til at udføre 'kryptoanalytiske funktioner' ved hjælp af dekompilering.
Teknisk note:
'Kryptoanalytiske funktioner' er funktioner, der er udviklet til at sætte kryptografiske mekanismer ud af kraft med det formål at udlede konfidentielle variabler eller følsomme data, herunder klar tekst, kodeord eller krypteringsnøgler.
b.
Produkter, der ikke er specificeret i 4A005 eller 5A004.a., konstrueret til at udføre samtlige følgende:
1.
'Udtrække rådata' fra en computer- eller kommunikationsanordning 
og
2.
Omgå anordningens "autentifikation" eller adgangkontrol med henblik på at udføre de funktioner, der er beskrevet i 5A004.b.1.
Teknisk note:
'Udtrække rådata' fra en computer- eller kommunikationsanordning er at hente binære data fra et lagringsmedium (f.eks. RAM eller harddisk) i anordningen uden fortolkning af anordningens operativsystem eller filsystem.
Note 1:
5A004.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på systemer eller udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af en computer- eller kommunikationsanordning
Note 2:
5A004.b. omfatter ikke:
a.
Fejlretningsprogrammer, hypervisorer
b.
Produkter, der er begrænset til udtrækning af logiske data
c.
Dataudtrækningsprodukter, der anvender chip-off eller JTAG 
og
d.
Produkter, der er specielt konstrueret til jail-breaking eller rooting.
5B2   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
5B002
"Informationssikkerheds" prøvnings-, inspektions- og "produktion"sudstyr som følger:
a.
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A002, 5A003, 5A004 eller 5B002.b.
b.
Måleudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til vurdering og godkendelse af "informationssikkerhed"sfunktioner af udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A002, 5A003 eller 5A004, eller af "software", der er specificeret i 5D002.a. eller 5D002.c.
5C2   
Materialer
Ingen.
5D2   
Software
5D002
"Software" som følger:
a.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af følgende:
1.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A002, eller "software", der er specificeret i 5D002.c.1.
2.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A003, eller "software", der er specificeret i 5D002.c.2. 
eller
3.
Udstyr eller "software" som følger:
a.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.a, eller "software", der er specificeret i 5D002.c.3.a.
b.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.b, eller "software", der er specificeret i 5D002.c.3.b.
b.
"Software" med samme egenskaber som den 'kryptografiske aktiveringsnøgle', der er anført i 5A002.b.
c.
"Software" med egenskaber som, eller som udfører eller simulerer samme funktioner som følgende:
1.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A002.a, 5A002.c., 5A002.d. eller 5A002.e.
Note:
5D002.c.1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "software", der er begrænset til "OAM"-opgaver, og som kun anvender offentliggjorte eller kommercielle kryptografiske standarder.
2.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A003, 
og
3.
Følgende udstyr:
a.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.a.
b.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.b.
Note:
5D002.c.3.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "intrusionsoftware".
d.
Ikke anvendt.
5E2   
Teknologi
5E002
"Teknologi" som følger:
a.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A002, 5A003, 5A004 eller 5B002, eller af "software", der er specificeret i 5D002.a. eller 5D002.c.
Note:
5E002.a lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til produkter, der er specificeret i 5A004.b., 5D002.a.3.b. eller 5D002.c.3.b.
b.
"Teknologi" med samme egenskaber som den 'kryptografiske aktiveringsnøgle', der er anført i 5A002.b.
Note:
5E002 omfatter tekniske data vedrørende "informationssikkerhed", som stammer fra procedurer, der udføres for at evaluere eller fastlægge gennemførelsen af funktioner, karakteristika eller teknikker specificeret i kategori 5, del 2.
DEL VIII –
Kategori 6
KATEGORI 6 - SENSORER OG LASERE
6A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
6A001
Akustiske systemer, udstyr og komponenter som følger:
a.
Akustiske systemer til brug på havet, udstyr eller specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil som følger:
1.
Aktive (sender eller sender/modtager) systemer, udstyr og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil som følger:
Note:
6A001.a.1 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende udstyr:
a.
Ekkolodder, der virker lodret under apparatet, og hvis skannefunktion ikke er på mere end ± 20°, og som er begrænsede til at måle vanddybden, afstanden til objekter under vandoverfladen eller havbunden eller til søgning efter fisk
b.
Akustiske bøjer som følger:
1.
Akustiske nødbøjer
2.
Svaranordninger (pingere), som er specielt konstrueret til at genfinde eller vende tilbage til en undervandsposition.
a.
Akustisk udstyr til undersøgelse af havbunden som følger:
1.
Undersøgelsesudstyr til overfladefartøjer, der er konstrueret til kortlægning af havbunden, og som har følgende karakteristika:
a.
Konstrueret til at foretage målinger ved en vinkel på mere end 20° fra lodret
b.
Konstrueret til at måle havbundstopografien ved havdybder på mere end 600 m
c.
'Dybdemålingsopløsning' på mindre end 2 
og
d.
'Forbedring' af dybde-"nøjagtigheden" gennem kompensation for alle følgende:
1.
Den akustiske sensors bevægelse
2.
Spredning i vandet fra sensoren til havbunden og tilbage 
og
3.
Lydhastighed ved sensoren
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Dybdemålingsopløsning' er områdebredden (grader) divideret med det maksimale antal dybdemålinger pr. område.
2.
'Forbedring' omfatter evnen til at kompensere ved brug af eksterne midler.
2.
Udstyr til undervandsundersøgelse, der er konstrueret til kortlægning af havbunden, og som har følgende karakteristika:
Teknisk note:
Den akustiske sensors mærketryk afgør mærkedybden for udstyr, som er specificeret i 6A001.a.1.a.2.
a.
Har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til drift på dybder på mere end 300 m 
og
2.
'Dybdemålingsfrekvens', der er mere end 3 800 m/s 
eller
Teknisk note:
'Dybdemålingsfrekvens' er produktet af sensorens maksimale driftshastighed (m/s) og det maksimale antal dybdemålinger pr. område med 100 % dækning. For systemer, der foretager dybdemålinger i to retninger (3D-sonarer), bør den maksimale 'dybdemålingsfrekvens' i begge retninger anvendes.
b.
Undersøgelsesudstyr, som ikke er specificeret i 6A001.a.1.a.2.a., med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til drift på dybder på mere end 100 m
2.
Konstrueret til at foretage målinger ved en vinkel på mere end 20° fra lodret
3.
Med en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Driftsfrekvens under 350 kHz 
eller
b.
Konstrueret til at kortlægge havbunden med en rækkevidde på over 200 m fra den akustiske sensor 
og
4.
'Forbedring' af dybde-"nøjagtigheden" gennem kompensation for alle følgende:
a.
Den akustiske sensors bevægelse
b.
Spredning i vandet fra sensoren til havbunden og tilbage 
og
c.
Lydhastighed ved sensoren
3.
Sidescansonar (SSS) eller sonar med syntetisk blænde (SAS), der er konstrueret til havbundsbilleddannelse, og som har alle følgende karakteristika og specielt konstruerede akustiske sende- og modtagearrays hertil:
a.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til drift på dybder på mere end 500 m
b.
En 'områdedækningsgrad' på mere end 570 m
2
/s under drift ved den maksimale rækkevidde med en 'opløsning på langs af sporet' på mindre end 15 cm 
og
c.
En 'opløsning på tværs af sporet' på mindre end 15 cm
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Områdedækningsgrad' (m
2
/s) er to gange produktet af sonarens rækkevidde (m) og maksimale driftshastighed (m/s) ved den maksimale rækkevidde.
2.
'Opløsning på langs af sporet' (cm), kun for SSS, er produktet af azimutstrålebredden (den horisontale strålebredde)(grader) og sonarens rækkevidde (m) og 0,873.
3.
'Opløsning på tværs af sporet' (cm) er 75 divideret med signalbåndbredden (kHz).
b.
Systemer eller sende- og modtagearrays, beregnet til objektsøgning eller stedbestemmelse, med følgende egenskaber:
1.
Sendefrekvens under 10 kHz
2.
Lydtrykniveau højere end 224 dB (reference 1 mikropascal på 1 m) for udstyr med en driftsfrekvens i båndet fra 10 kHz til 24 kHz inklusive
3.
Lydtrykniveau højere end 235 dB (reference 1 mikropascal på 1 m) for udstyr med en driftsfrekvens i båndet mellem 24 kHz og 30 kHz
4.
Danner stråler på mindre end 1° på nogen akse og har en driftsfrekvens på mindre end 100 kHz
5.
Konstrueret til at arbejde med en entydig displayrækkevidde på mere end 5 120 m 
eller
6.
Konstrueret til at modstå tryk under normal drift på dybder på mere end 1 000 m og med transducere med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Dynamisk trykkompensation 
eller
b.
Andet end blyzirconattitanat som transducerelement
c.
Akustiske projektorer, herunder transducere, der omfatter piezoelektriske, magnetostriktive, elektrostriktive, elektrodynamiske eller hydrauliske elementer, der operer individuelt eller i en konstrueret kombination, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
Note 1:
Eksportkontrolstatus for akustiske projektorer, herunder transducere, specielt konstrueret til andet udstyr, som ikke er specificeret i 6A001, bestemmes af det andet udstyrs eksportkontrolstatus.
Note 2:
6A001.a.1.c lægger hverken eksportkontrol på elektroniske kilder, der kun udsender lyden i lodret retning, mekaniske lydkilder (f.eks. luftkanoner og dampstødkanoner) eller kemiske lydkilder (f.eks. eksplosivstoffer).
Note 3:
Piezoelektriske elementer som specificeret i 6A001.a.1.c omfatter elementer fremstillet af bly-magnesium-niobat/bly-titanat (Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
-PbTiO
3
, eller PMN-PT), enkeltkrystaller dyrket på fast opløsning eller bly-indium-niobat/bly-magnesium-niobat/bly-titanat (Pb(In
1/2
Nb
1/2
)O
3
–Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
–PbTiO
3
, eller PIN-PMN-PT), enkeltkrystaller dyrket på fast opløsning.
1.
Opererer ved frekvenser på under 10 kHz og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Ikke konstrueret til kontinuerlig drift ved en arbejdscyklus på 100 % og med en udstrålet 'effekt fra kilden i frit felt (SL
RMS
)' på over (10log(f) + 169,77) dB (reference 1 mikropascal på 1 m), hvor f er frekvensen i Hertz for maksimal Transmitting Voltage Response (TVR) under 10kHz 
eller
b.
Konstrueret til kontinuerlig drift ved en arbejdscyklus på 100 % og med en kontinuert udstrålet 'effekt fra kilden i frit felt (SL
RMS
)' ved en 100 % arbejdscyklus på over (10log(f) + 159,77) dB (reference 1 mikropascal på 1 m), hvor f er frekvensen i Hertz for maksimal Transmitting Voltage Response (TVR) under 10kHz 
eller
Teknisk note:
'Effekten fra kilden i frit felt (SL
RMS
)' fastsættes langs den maksimale responsakse og i den fjerne del af den akustiske projektors lydfelt. Den kan beregnes ud fra Transmitting Voltage Response ved hjælp af følgende ligning: SL
RMS
 = (TVR + 20log V
RMS
) dB (reference 1 mikropascal på 1 m), hvor SL
RMS
 er effekten fra kilden, TVR er Transmitting Voltage Response, og V
RMS
 er projektorens styrespænding.
2.
Ikke anvendt
3.
Sidesløjfeundertrykkelse på mere end 22 dB
d.
Akustiske systemer og udstyr til bestemmelse af overflade- eller undervandsfartøjers position, som har alle følgende egenskaber, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
1.
Detekteringsområde på mere end 1 000 m 
og
2.
Bestemt positioneringsfejl på mindre end 10 m effektivværdi ved måling på en afstand af 1 000 m
Note: 6A001.a.1.d. omfatter:
a.
Udstyr, der bruger kohærent "signalbehandling" mellem to eller flere bøjer og den hydrofonenhed, der findes om bord på overflade- eller undervandsfartøjet
b.
Udstyr, som er i stand til automatisk at korrigere for fejl på grund af lydens udbredelseshastighed ved beregning af et punkt.
e.
Aktive individuelle sonarer specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til at detektere, stedbestemme og automatisk klassificere svømmere eller dykkere, som har alle følgende egenskaber, og specielt konstruerede akustiske sende- og modtagearrays hertil:
1.
Detekteringsområde på mere end 530 m
2.
Bestemt positioneringsfejl på mindre end 15 m effektivværdi ved måling på en afstand af 530 m 
og
3.
Udsendt pulssignalbåndbredde på mere end 3 kHz
N.B.
For så vidt angår systemer til detektion af dykkere, der er specielt konstrueret eller ændret til militær anvendelse, se kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
Note:
For 6A001.a.1.e., hvor der er angivet flere detektionsområder i forskellige miljøer, anvendes det største detektionsområde.
2.
Passive systemer, udstyr eller specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil som følger:
Note:
6A001.a.2. lægger også eksportkontrol på modtageudstyr, uanset om det ved normal anvendelse har forbindelse med separat aktivt udstyr, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
a.
Hydrofoner med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
Note:
Eksportkontrolstatus for hydrofoner specielt konstrueret til andet udstyr afhænger af eksportkontrolstatus for andet udstyr.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Hydrofoner består af et eller flere sensorelementer, der producerer en enkelt akustisk udgangskanal. Hydrofoner bestående af flere elementer benævnes en hydrofongruppe.
2.
I forbindelse med 6A001.a.2.a regnes akustiske undervandstransducere kontrueret til at fungere som passive modtagere som hydrofoner.
1.
Med kontinuerlige, bøjelige sensorelementer
2.
Med bøjelige samlinger af diskrete sensorelementer med enten diameter eller længde på mindre end 20 mm og med adskillelse mellem elementerne på mindre end 20 mm
3.
Med en eller flere af følgende sensorelementer:
a.
Optiske fibre
b.
'Piezoelektriske polymerfilm' bortset fra polyvinylidenfluorid (PVDF) og dets copolymerer {P(VDF-TrFE) og P(VDF-TFE)}
c.
'Bøjelige piezoelektriske kompositmaterialer'
d.
Bly-magnesium-niobat/bly-titanat (dvs. Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
-PbTiO
3
 eller PMN-PT) piezoelektriske enkeltkrystaller dyrket på fast opløsning 
eller
e.
Bly-indium-niobat/bly-magnesium-niobat/bly-titanat (dvs. Pb(In
1/2
Nb
1/2
)O
3
–Pb(Mg
1/3
Nb
2/3
)O
3
–PbTiO
3
, eller PIN-PMN-PT) piezoelektriske enkeltkrystaller dyrket på fast opløsning
4.
'Hydrofonfølsomhed' bedre end -180 dB på en hvilken som helst dybde uden accelerationskompensation
5.
Konstrueret til at operere på dybder på over 35 m, med accelerationskompensation 
eller
6.
Konstrueret til at operere på dybder på mere end 1 000 m og med en 'hydrofonfølsomhed', der er bedre end -230 dB ved under 4 kHz
Tekniske noter:
1.
Sensorelementer af 'piezoelektriske polymerfilm' består af polariseret polymerfilm, som er strakt ud over og fastgjort til en støtteramme eller spole (opspændingsdorn).
2.
Sensorelementer af 'bøjelige piezoelektriske kompositmaterialer' består af piezoelektriske, keramiske partikler eller fibre kombineret med en elektrisk isolerende, akustisk transparent gummi-, polymer- eller epoxyforbindelse, hvor forbindelsen er en integrerende del af sensorelementerne.
3.
'Hydrofonfølsomhed' defineres som 20 gange 10-logaritmen af forholdet mellem udgangsspændingens effektivværdi og en reference på 1 V eff., når hydrofonsensoren, uden forforstærker, anbringes i et akustisk planbølgefelt med et effektivt tryk på 1 mikropascal. For eksempel ville en hydrofon med en følsomhed på -160 dB (reference 1 V pr. mikropascal) yde en udgangsspænding på 10
-8
 V i et sådant felt, mens en hydrofon med -180 dB følsomhed kun ville yde 10
-9
 V udgangsspænding. -160 dB er derfor bedre end -180 dB.
b.
Slæbte akustiske hydrofonsystemer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
Teknisk note:
Hydrofonsystemer består af en række hydrofoner, der frembringer flere akustiske udgangskanaler.
1.
Afstand mellem hydrofongrupperne på mindre end 12,5 m, eller som er 'i stand til at kunne modificeres' til en afstand mellem hydrofongrupperne på mindre end 12,5 m
2.
Konstrueret eller 'i stand til at kunne modificeres' til at operere på dybder på mere end 35 m
Teknisk note:
'I stand til at kunne modificeres' i betydningen i 6A001.a.2.b.1 og 2 vil sige at være forberedt til at tillade ændring af ledningsføring eller forbindelser til at forandre afstanden mellem hydrofongrupperne eller grænserne for operationsdybde. Disse modificeringsmuligheder er: Reserveledninger, der overstiger 10 % af antallet af ledninger, justeringsblokke til ændring af afstanden mellem hydrofongrupper eller interne indretninger til begrænsning af dybde, som er justerbare, eller som kontrollerer mere end én hydrofongruppe.
3.
Kurssensorer, der er specificeret i 6A001.a.2.d
4.
Systemslanger forstærket (armeret) i længderetningen
5.
Et samlet system med en diameter på mindre end 40 mm
6.
Ikke anvendt
7.
Hydrofonegenskaber, der er specificeret i 6A001.a.2.a. 
eller
8.
Accelerometerbaserede hydroakustiske sensorer er specificeret i 6A001.a.2.g
c.
Databehandlingsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til slæbte akustiske hydrofonsystemer, med "brugertilgængelig programmerbarhed" og tids- eller frekvensdomænebehandling og korrelering, herunder spektralanalyse, digital filtrering og stråleformning ved hjælp af Fast Fourier eller andre transformeringer eller processer
d.
Kurssensorer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
En "nøjagtighed", der er bedre end 0,5° 
og
2.
Konstrueret til at operere på dybder på over 35 m eller udstyret med en justerbar eller aftagelig dybdesensoranordning, således at de kan anvendes på dybder på over 35 m
N.B.
Med hensyn til inertikurssystemer henvises til 7A003.c.
e.
Dybvands- eller lavvandskabelhydrofonsystemer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Omfatter hydrofoner, der er specificeret i 6A001.a.2.a
2.
Omfatter multiplexede hydrofongruppesignalmoduler, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Konstrueret til at operere på dybder på over 35 m eller udstyret med en justerbar eller aftagelig dybdesensoranordning, således at de kan anvendes på dybder på over 35 m 
og
b.
Er operationelt udskiftelige med slæbte akustiske hydrofonsystemmoduler 
eller
3.
Omfatter accelerometerbaserede hydroakustiske sensorer, som er specificeret i 6A001.a.2.g.
f.
Databehandlingsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til dybvands- eller lavvandskabelsystemer, med "brugertilgængelig programmerbarhed" og tids- eller frekvensdomænebehandling og korrelering, herunder spektralanalyse, digital filtrering og stråleformning ved hjælp af Fast Fourier eller andre transformeringer eller processer
g.
Accelerometerbaserede hydroakustiske sensorer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Består af tre accelerometre, som er anbragt langs tre forskellige akser
2.
Har en overordnet 'accelerationsfølsomhed', som er bedre end 48 dB (reference 1 000 mV effektivværdi pr. 1 g)
3.
Konstrueret til drift på ved dybder over 35 m 
og
4.
Driftsfrekvens under 20 kHz
Note:
6A001.a.2.g lægger ikke eksportkontrol på hastighedssensorer eller geofoner.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Accelerometerbaserede hydroakustiske sensorer benævnes også vektorsensorer.
2.
'Accelerationsfølsomhed' defineres som 20 gange 10-logaritmen af forholdet mellem udgangsspændingens effektivværdi og en reference på 1 V eff., når den hydroakustiske sensor, uden forforstærker, anbringes i et akustisk planbølgefelt med en effektiv acceleration på 1 g (dvs. 9,81 m/s
2
).
b.
Sonarlogudstyr med korrelationshastighed og Dopplerhastighed konstrueret til måling af udstyrsbærerens vandrette hastighed i forhold til havbunden som følger:
1.
Sonarlogudstyr med korrelationshastighed med en af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Konstrueret til at operere over afstande mellem bæreren og havbunden på mere end 500 m 
eller
b.
Har en hastigheds"nøjagtighed", der er bedre end 1 % af hastigheden
2.
Sonarlogudstyr med Dopplerhastighed, der har en hastigheds"nøjagtighed", der er bedre end 1 % af hastigheden.
Note 1:
6A001.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på dybdemålere, der kun udfører følgende:
a.
Måling af vanddybden
b.
Måling af afstanden til objekter under vandoverfladen eller havbunden 
eller
c.
Søgning efter fisk.
Note 2:
6A001.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr specielt konstrueret til montering på overfladefartøjer.
c.
Ikke anvendt.
6A002
Optiske sensorer eller udstyr og komponenter hertil som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6A102.
a.
Optiske detektorer som følger:
1.
"Rumkvalificerede" faststofdetektorer som følger:
Note:
I forbindelse med 6A002.a.1. omfatter faststofdetektorer "billedplansystemer".
a.
"Rumkvalificerede" faststofdetektorer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 10 nm, men ikke over 300 nm 
og
2.
Respons på mindre end 0,1 % i forhold til spidsresponsen ved en bølgelængde på mere end 400 nm
b.
"Rumkvalificerede" faststofdetektorer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 900 nm, men ikke over 1 200 nm 
og
2.
Respons "tidskonstant" på 95 ns eller mindre
c.
"Rumkvalificerede" faststofdetektorer med en spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 1 200 nm, men ikke over 30 000 nm
d.
"Rumkvalificerede""billedplansystemer" med mere end 2 048 elementer pr. system og en spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet over 300 nm, men ikke over 900 nm.
2.
Billedforstærkerrør og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil som følger:
Note:
6A002.a.2. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på ikkebilleddannende fotomultiplikatorrør med en elektronsensor i tomrummet, der udelukkende begrænses til følgende:
a.
En enkelt metalanode 
eller
b.
Metalanoder med en center-til-center afstand over 500 μm.
Teknisk note:
'Ladningsmultiplicering' (charge multiplication) er en form for elektronisk billedforstærkning og defineres som generering af ladningsbærere som følge af stødioniseringsprocesser (impact ionization gain process). 'Ladningsmultiplicerings'sensorer kan have form af billedforstærkerrør, faststofdetektorer eller "billedplansystemer".
a.
Billedforstærkerrør med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 400 nm, men ikke over 1 050 nm
2.
Elektronisk billedforstærkning med anvendelse af en af følgende:
a.
En mikrokanalplade med en hulafstand (center-til-center) på 12 μm eller mindre 
eller
b.
En elektronisk sensor med en afstand mellem de ikkebundne pixel på 500 μm eller mindre, der specielt er konstrueret eller ændret med henblik på at opnå en 'ladningsmultiplicering' på anden måde end ved en mikrokanalplade 
og
3.
En eller flere af følgende fotokatoder:
a.
Multialkali fotokatoder (f.eks. S-20 og S-25), med en lysfølsomhed på over 350 μΑ/lm
b.
GaAs eller GaInAs fotokatoder 
eller
c.
Andre "III-/V-forbindelse" halvlederfotokatoder, med en "strålingsfølsomhed" på over 10 mA/W.
b.
Billedforstærkerrør med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 1 050 nm, men ikke over 1 800 nm
2.
Elektronisk billedforstærkning med anvendelse af en af følgende:
a.
En mikrokanalplade med en hulafstand (center-til-center) på 12 μm eller mindre 
eller
b.
En elektronisk sensor med en afstand mellem de ikkebundne pixel på 500 μm eller mindre, der specielt er konstrueret eller ændret med henblik på at opnå en 'ladningsmultiplicering' på anden måde end ved en mikrokanalplade 
og
3.
"III-/V-forbindelse" sammensatte halvlederfotokatoder (f.eks. GaAs eller GaInAs) og overførte elektronfotokatoder med en "strålingsfølsomhed" på over 15 mA/W.
c.
Specielt konstruerede komponenter som følger:
1.
Mikrokanalplader med en hulafstand (center-til-center) på højst 12 μm
2.
En elektronisk sensor med en afstand mellem de ikkebundne pixel på 500 μm eller mindre, der specielt er konstrueret eller ændret med henblik på at opnå en 'ladningsmultiplicering' på anden måde end ved en mikrokanalplade
3.
"III-/V-forbindelse" sammensatte halvlederfotokatoder (f.eks. GaAs eller GaInAs) og overførte elektronfotokatoder.
Note: 6A002.a.2.c.3. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på sammensatte halvlederfotokatoder konstrueret til at opnå en "strålingsfølsomhed" som følger:
a.
højst 10 mA/W ved en spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 400 nm, men ikke over 1 050 nm 
eller
b.
højst 15 mA/W ved en spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 1 050 nm, men ikke over 1 800 nm.
3.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede""billedplansystemer" som følger:
N.B.
'Mikrobolometer', ikke "rumkvalificerede"
                                                         "billedplansystemer", er kun specificeret i 6A002.a.3.f.
Teknisk note:
Lineære og todimensionale multielementdetektorsystemer betegnes "billedplansystemer"
Note 1:
6A002.a.3. omfatter fotoledende systemer og fotoelementsystemer.
Note 2:
6A002.a.3. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Multielement (højst 16 elementer) indkapslede fotoledende celler, der bruger enten blysulfid eller blyselenid
b.
Pyroelektriske detektorer, der bruger en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Triglycinsulfat og varianter
2.
Bly-lantan-zirconiumtitanat og varianter
3.
Lithiumtantalat
4.
Polyvinylidenfluorid og varianter 
eller
5.
Strontiumbariumniobat og varianter
c.
"Billedplansystemer" specielt konstrueret eller ændret for at opnå 'ladningsmultiplicering' og konstruktionsmæssigt begrænset til en maksimal "strålingsfølsomhed" på højst 10 mA/W for bølgelængder over 760 nm med begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
En responsbegrænsende mekanisme konstrueret til ikke at fjernes eller modificeres 
og
2.
En eller flere af følgende:
a.
Den responsbegrænsende mekanisme er en integrerende del af eller kombineret med detektorelementet 
eller
b.
"Billedplansystemet" fungerer kun med den installerede responsbegrænsende mekanisme.
Teknisk note:
En responsbegrænsende mekanisme, der er en integrerende del af detektorelementet, er konstrueret, så den ikke kan fjernes eller ændres uden at sætte detektoren ud af kraft.
d.
Termosøjlesystemer med mindre end 5 130 elementer.
Teknisk note:
'Ladningsmultiplicering' (charge multiplication) er en form for elektronisk billedforstærkning og defineres som generering af ladningsbærere som følge af stødioniseringsprocesser (impact ionization gain process). 'Ladningsmultiplicerings'sensorer kan have form af billedforstærkerrør, faststofdetektorer eller "billedplansystemer".
a.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede""billedplansystemer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Individuelle elementer med spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 900 nm, dog højst 1 050 nm 
og
2.
En eller flere af følgende:
a.
Respons "tidskonstant" på mindre end 0,5 ns 
eller
b.
Specielt konstrueret eller ændret for at opnå 'ladningsmultiplicering' og med en maksimal "strålingsfølsomhed" på over 10 mA/W
b.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede""billedplansystemer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Individuelle elementer med spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 1 050 nm, dog højst 1 200 nm 
og
2.
En eller flere af følgende:
a.
Respons "tidskonstant" på 95 ns eller mindre 
eller
b.
Specielt konstrueret eller ændret for at opnå 'ladningsmultiplicering' og med en maksimal "strålingsfølsomhed" på over 10 mA/W
c.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede" ikkelineære (2-dimensionale) "billedplansystemer" med individuelle elementer med spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 1 200 nm, dog højst 30 000 nm
N.B.
'Mikrobolometre', der er baseret på silicium og andre materialer, og som ikke er "rumkvalificerede"
                                                                     "billedplansystemer", er kun specificeret i 6A002.a.3.f.
d.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede" lineære (1-dimensionale) "billedplansystemer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Individuelle elementer med spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 1 200 nm, dog højst 3 000 nm 
og
2.
En eller flere af følgende:
a.
Et forhold mellem detektorelementets 'skanningsretning'sdimension og detektorelementets tvær'scanningsretning'sdimension på under 3,8 
eller
b.
Signalbehandling i detektorelementerne
Note:
6A002.a.3.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "billedplansystemer" (som ikke overstiger 32 elementer) med detektorelementer begrænset til germaniummateriale.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 6A002.a.3.d. forstås der ved 'tværskanningsretning' aksen parallelt med det lineære system af detektorelementer og ved 'scanningsretning' aksen vinkelret på det lineære system af detektorelementer.
e.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede" lineære (1-dimensionale) "billedplansystemer" med individuelle elementer med spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 3 000 nm, dog højst 30 000 nm
f.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede", ikkelineære (2-dimensionelle) infrarøde "billedplansystemer" baseret på 'mikrobolometer'materiale med individuelle elementer med en ufiltreret respons i bølgelængdeområdet på 8 000 nm eller derover, dog højst 14 000 nm
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 6A002.a.3.f. defineres 'mikrobolometer' som en termisk billeddetektor, der som et resultat af temperaturændringer i detektoren på grund af absorption af infrarød stråling anvendes til at generere et brugbart signal.
g.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede""billedplansystemer" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Individuelle detektorelementer ved en spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 400 nm, dog højst 900 nm
2.
Specielt konstrueret eller modificeret for at opnå 'ladningsmultiplicering' og med en maksimal "strålingsfølsomhed" på over 10 mA/W for bølgelængder over 760 nm 
og
3.
Flere end 32 elementer.
b.
"Monospektrale billedsensorer" og "multispektrale billedsensorer", der er konstrueret til fjernfølingsformål, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Instantaneous-Field-Of-View (IFOV) på mindre end 200 mikroradianer 
eller
2.
Specificeret til drift i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 400 nm, dog højst 30 000 nm, og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsbilleddata i digitalt format 
og
b.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Rumkvalificeret"
eller
2.
Konstrueret til brug i luftfartøjer, udstyret med andet end siliciumdetektorer og med et IFOV på mindre end 2,5 milliradianer
Note:
6A002.b.1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "monospektrale billedsensorer" med en spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 300 nm, dog højst 900 nm, som kun har en eller flere af følgende ikke "rumkvalificerede" detektorer eller ikke "rumkvalificerede"
                                             "billedplansystemer":
1.
Ladningskoblede enheder (CCD), som ikke er konstrueret eller modificeret til at opnå 'ladningsmultiplicering' 
eller
2.
Supplerende MOS-anordninger (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) (CMOS), som ikke er konstrueret eller modificeret til at opnå 'ladningsmultiplicering'.
c.
Billedudstyr til 'direkte betragtning' med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Billedforstærkerrør som er specificeret i 6A002.a.2.a; eller 6A002.a.2.b.
2.
"Billedplansystemer" som er specificeret i 6A002.a.3. 
eller
3.
Faststofdetektorer, jf. 6A002.a.1.
Teknisk note:
'Direkte betragtning' henviser til udstyr, der giver et visuelt billede for en menneskelig observatør uden at omdanne billedet til et elektronisk signal til visning på fjernsyn, og som ikke kan optage eller lagre billedet fotografisk, elektronisk eller på nogen anden måde.
Note:
6A002.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på følgende udstyr, når det omfatter andet end GaAs eller GaInAs fotokatoder:
a.
Industrielle eller civile adgangsalarmer, trafik eller industriovervågnings- eller tællesystemer
b.
Medicinsk udstyr
c.
Industrielt udstyr til brug ved inspektion, sortering eller analyse af materialeegenskaber
d.
Flammedetektorer til industriovne
e.
Udstyr specielt konstrueret til laboratoriebrug.
d.
Specielle hjælpekomponenter til optiske sensorer som følger:
1.
"Rumkvalificerede" kryokølere
2.
Ikke "rumkvalificerede" kryokølere med kølekildetemperatur lavere end 218 K (-55 °C) som følger:
a.
Lukkede kredsløb med en specificeret Mean-Time-To-Failure (MTTF), eller Mean-Time-Between-Failures (MTBF), på mere end 2 500 timer
b.
Joule-Thomson (JT) selvregulerende minikølere med en (udvendig) diameter på mindre end 8 mm
3.
Optiske følefibre, der er specielt fremstillede enten ved deres sammensætning eller struktur, eller modificeret med belægning til at være akustisk, termisk, inertimæssigt, elektromagnetisk eller nukleart strålefølsomme
Note:
6A002.d.3. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på indkapslede optiske følefibre, der er specielt konstrueret til følingsformål i forbindelse med borehuller.
e.
Ikke anvendt.
f.
'Integrerede kredsløb til udlæsning' ('ROIC'), der er specielt konstrueret til de "billedplansystemer", der er specificeret i 6A002.a.3.
Note:
6A002.f. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'integrerede kredsløb til udlæsning', der er specielt konstrueret til anvendelse i civile biler.
Teknisk note:
'Integrerede kredsløb til udlæsning' ('ROIC') er integrerede kredsløb, der er konstrueret til at danne grundlag for eller være fastgjort til et "billedplansystem" ("FPA"), og som anvendes til udlæsning (dvs. uddrag og registrering) af de signaler, der frembringes af detektorelementerne. 'ROIC' udlæser som minimum detektorelementernes ladning ved at uddrage ladningen og anvende en multiplekseringsfunktion på en måde, der bevarer oplysninger om detektorelementernes relative rumlige placering og retning i forbindelse med behandling inden i eller uden for 'ROIC'.
6A003
Kameraer, systemer eller udstyr samt komponenter hertil, som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6A203.
a.
Instrumenteringskameraer og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil, som følger:
Note:
Instrumenteringskameraer, der er specificeret i 6A003.a.3.-6A003a.5. med modulær opbygning bør vurderes efter deres maksimale ydeevne ved anvendelse af plugins, der er til rådighed i henhold til kameraproducentens specifikationer.
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Ikke anvendt
3.
Elektroniske streakkameraer med tidsopløsning bedre end 50 ns
4.
Elektroniske billedkameraer med en hastighed på mere end 1 000 000 billeder i sekundet
5.
Elektroniske kameraer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Elektronisk lukkerhastighed (gatingfunktion) på mindre end 1 mikrosekund pr. hele billede 
og
b.
Udlæsningstid, der tillader en billedhastighed på mere end 125 hele billeder i sekundet.
6.
Plugins med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Specielt konstrueret til instrumenteringskameraer med modulær opbygning, der er specificeret i 6A003.a. 
og
b.
Sætter disse kameraer i stand til at opfylde de egenskaber, der er specificeret i 6A003.a.3., 6A003.a.4. eller 6A003.a.5., i henhold til producentens specifikationer
b.
Billedkameraer som følger:
Note:
6A003.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på fjernsyns- eller videokameraer, der er specielt konstruerede til fjernsynsudsendelser.
1.
Videokameraer, der omfatter faststofsensorer med spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 10 nm, dog højst 30 000 nm og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Med en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Mere end 4 x 10
6
"aktive pixler" pr. faststofsystem for monokrome (sort-hvide) kameraer
2.
Mere end 4 x 10
6
"aktive pixler" pr. faststofsystem for farvekameraer med tre faststofsystemer 
eller
3.
Mere end 12 x 
10
6 "aktive pixler" pr. faststofsystem for farvekameraer med et faststofsystem 
og
b.
En eller flere af følgende:
1.
Optiske spejle, der er specificeret i 6A004.a.
2.
Optisk kontroludstyr, der er specificeret i 6A004.d 
eller
3.
Kan annotere internt frembragte 'kamerasporingsdata'
Tekniske noter:
1.
I dette punkt bør digitale videokameraer vurderes ud fra det maksimale antal "aktive pixler", der bruges til at fastholde bevægelige billeder.
2.
I dette punkt forstås ved 'kamerasporingsdata' de oplysninger, der er nødvendige for at kunne fastslå kameraets sigteretning i forhold til jorden. Dette omfatter: 1) kameraets horisontale vinkel i sigteretningen i forhold til retningen af jordens magnetfelt 2) kameraets vertikale vinkel i sigteretningen i forhold til jordens horisont.
2.
Skanningkameraer og skanningkamerasystemer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Spidsrespons i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 10 nm, men ikke over 30 000 nm
b.
Lineære detektorsystemer med mere end 8 192 elementer pr. system 
og
c.
Mekanisk skanning i én retning
Note:
6A003.b.2. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på skanningkameraer og skanningkamerasystemer, der er specielt konstrueret til et eller flere af følgende:
a.
Industrielle eller civile fotokopieringsmaskiner
b.
Billedskannere, der er specielt konstrueret til civile, stationære applikationer til skanning på kort afstand (f.eks. gengivelse af billeder eller tekst i dokumenter, billedmateriale eller fotografier) 
eller
c.
Medicinsk udstyr.
3.
Billedkameraer med billedforstærkerør, der er specificeret i 6A002.a.2.a. eller 6A002.a.2.b.
4.
Billedkameraer med "billedplansystemer", som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Omfatter "billedplansystemer", der er specificeret i 6A002.a.3.a-6A002.a.3.e.
b.
Omfatter "billedplansystemer", der er specificeret i 6A002.a.3.f 
eller
c.
Omfatter "billedplansystemer", der er specificeret i 6A002.a.3.g
Note 1:
Billedkameraer, der er specificeret i 6A003.b.4, omfatter "billedplansystemer" kombineret med tilstrækkelig "signalbehandlingselektronik", ud over det integrerede udlæsningskredsløb, til at der som et minimum kan opnås et analogt eller digitalt signaloutput, når strømmen tilsluttes.
Note 2:
6A003.b.4. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på billedkameraer med lineært "billedplansystem" med 12 elementer eller derunder, der ikke anvender tidsforsinkelse og integration i det enkelte element, og som er konstrueret til:
a.
Industrielle eller civile adgangsalarmer, trafik eller industriovervågnings- eller tællesystemer
b.
Industrielt udstyr til brug ved inspektion eller overvågning af varmestrømme i bygninger, udstyr eller industriprocesser
c.
Industrielt udstyr til brug ved inspektion, sortering eller analyse af materialeegenskaber
d.
Udstyr specielt konstrueret til laboratoriebrug 
eller
e.
Medicinsk udstyr.
Note 3:
6A003.b.4.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på billedkameraer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En maksimal billedhastighed på 9 Hz eller derunder
b.
Har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et mindste horisontalt eller vertikalt 'instantaneous-field-of-view (IFOV)' på mindst 2 mrad (milliradianer)
2.
En linse med fast fokallængde, der ikke er konstrueret til at kunne fjernes
3.
Uden display til 'direkte betragtning' 
og
4.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Ikke indrettet til at vise et synligt billede af det detekterede field-of-view 
eller
b.
Kameraet er konstrueret til én applikationstype og til ikke at kunne modificeres af brugeren eller
c.
Kameraet er specielt konstrueret til installation i et civilt passagerkøretøj og har alle følgende egenskaber:
1
Kameraets placering og opsætning i køretøjet har udelukkende til formål at bistå føreren med at manøvrere køretøjet sikkert
2.
Det kan kun betjenes, hvis det er installeret et af følgende steder:
a.
Det civile passagerkøretøj, som det var beregnet til, og køretøjet vejer under 4 500 kg (køretøjets bruttovægt) 
eller
b.
Et specielt konstrueret, godkendt anlæg til afprøvning af vedligeholdelse 
og
3.
Det omfatter en aktiv mekanisme, der forhindrer kameraet i at fungere, når det fjernes fra det køretøj, det var beregnet til.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Instantaneous Field of View (IFOV)', som er specificeret i 6A003.b.4. Note 3.b er den mindste værdi af den 'horisontale IFOV' eller den 'vertikale IFOV'.
'Horisontal IFOV' = horisontal field-of-view (FOV)/antallet af horisontale detektorelementer.
'Vertikal IFOV' = vertikal field-of-view (FOV)/antallet af vertikale detektorelementer.
2.
'Direkte betragtning' i 6A003.b.4. Note 3.b. henviser til et billedkamera, der opererer i det infrarøde spektrum, og som giver et visuelt billede for en menneskelig observatør, der anvender et mikro-display tæt på øjet, som omfatter en lyssikkerhedsmekanisme.
Note 4:
6A003.b.4.c. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på billedkameraer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Kameraet er specielt konstrueret til installation som en integrerende komponent i netsystemer eller -udstyr, der benyttes indendørs, og i kraft af sin konstruktion begrænset til en enkelt applikation, som følger:
a.
Overvågning af industrielle processer, kvalitetskontrol eller analyse af materialers egenskaber
b.
Laboratorieudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til videnskabelig forskning
c.
Medicinsk udstyr
d.
Udstyr til opsporing af finanssvig 
og
2.
Det kan kun betjenes, hvis det er installeret et af følgende steder:
a.
System(er) eller udstyr, som det er bestemt til, 
eller
b.
Et specielt konstrueret, autoriseret vedligeholdelsesanlæg 
og
3.
En aktiv mekanisme, der forhindrer kameraet i at fungere, når det fjernes fra det system/de systemer eller det udstyr, det var beregnet til
b.
Kameraet er specielt konstrueret til installation i et civilt passagerkøretøj eller passager- og bilfærger og har alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Kameraets placering og opsætning i køretøjet eller færgen har udelukkende til formål at bistå føreren eller operatøren med at manøvrere køretøjet eller færgen sikkert
2.
Det kan kun betjenes, hvis det er installeret et af følgende steder:
a.
Det civile passagerkøretøj, som det var beregnet til, og køretøjet vejer under 4 500 kg (køretøjets bruttovægt)
b.
Den passager- og bilfærge, som det er beregnet til, og færgen har en længde overalt på 65 m eller derover 
eller
c.
Et specielt konstrueret, godkendt anlæg til afprøvning af vedligeholdelse 
og
3.
Det omfatter en aktiv mekanisme, der forhindrer kameraet i at fungere, når det fjernes fra det køretøj, det er beregnet til.
c.
Kameraet er konstruktionsmæssigt begrænset til en maksimal "strålingsfølsomhed" på højst 10 mA/W for bølgelængder på over 760 nm med alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
En responsbegrænsende mekanisme konstrueret til ikke at fjernes eller modificeres
2.
En aktiv mekanisme, der forhindrer kameraet i at fungere, når den responsbegrænsende mekanisme fjernes, 
og
3.
Ikke er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til undervandsbrug: 
eller
d.
Har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Uden display til 'direkte betragtning' eller elektronisk billeddisplay
2.
Ikke indrettet til at vise et synligt billede af det detekterede synsfelt
3.
"Billedplansystemet" fungerer kun, når det er installeret i det kamera, det er beregnet til, 
og
4.
"Billedplansystemet" omfatter en aktiv mekanisme, der gør det definitivt ubrugeligt, når det fjernes fra det kamera, det er beregnet til
5.
Billedkameraer indeholdende faststofdetektorer som specificeret i 6A002.a.1.
6A004
Optisk udstyr og komponenter som følger:
a.
Optiske spejle (reflektorer) som følger:
Teknisk note:
I 6A004.a. måles tærsklen for laserinduceret skade (Laser Induced Damage Threshold – LIDT) i overensstemmelse med ISO 21254-1:2011.
N.B.
For optiske spejle, der er specielt beregnet til litografisk udstyr, se 3B001.
1.
'Deformerbare spejle' med en aktiv apertur på over 10 mm og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil
a.
Som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Mekanisk resonansfrekvens på 750 Hz eller derover 
og
2.
Over 200 aktuatorer 
eller
b.
En tærskel for laserinduceret skade på et af følgende niveauer:
1.
Over 1 kW/cm
2
 ved brug af "CW-laser"
eller
2.
Over 2 J/cm
2
 ved brug af "laser"impulser på 20 ns med gentagelseshastighed på 20 Hz
Teknisk note:
'Deformerbare spejle' er spejle med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Én enkelt kontinuerlig optisk reflekterende overflade, som deformeres dynamisk ved individuelle momenter eller kræfter, så der kompenseres for forvrængninger i det optiske bølgesignal, der rammer spejlet 
eller
b.
Flere optisk reflekterende elementer, som kan justeres individuelt og dynamisk ved hjælp af momenter eller kræfter, så der kompenseres for forvrængninger i det optiske bølgesignal, der rammer spejlet.
'Deformerbare spejle' benævnes tillige spejle med adaptiv optik.
2.
Lette monolitiske spejle med middel "ækvivalent massefylde" på mindre end 30 kg/m
2
 og totalvægt på mere end 10 kg
Note:
6A004.a.2. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på spejle, der er specialudformet til styring af solstråling til jordbaserede heliostatinstallationer.
3.
Lette "kompositte" eller skumspejlkonstruktioner med middel "ækvivalent massefylde" på mindre end 30 kg/m
2
 og totalvægt på mere end 2 kg
Note:
6A004.a.3. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på spejle, der er specialudformet til styring af solstråling til jordbaserede heliostatinstallationer.
4.
Spejle, som er specielt konstrueret til borde til strålestyringsspejle som specificeret i 6A004.d.2.a., med en planhed på λ/10 eller bedre (λ = 633 nm) og med en af følgende:
a.
Diameter eller storakselængde på 100 mm eller derover 
eller
b.
Har samtlige følgende egenskaber::
1.
Diameter eller storakselængde på over 50 mm, men under 100 mm 
og
2.
En tærskel for laserinduceret skade på et af følgende niveauer:
a.
Over 10 kW/cm
2
 ved brug af "CW-laser"
eller
b.
Over 20 J/cm
2
 ved brug af "laser"impulser på 20 ns med gentagelseshastighed på 20 Hz
b.
Optiske komponenter fremstillet af zinkselenid (ZnSe) eller zinksulfid (ZnS) med transmission i bølgelængdeområdet på mere end 3 000 nm, men ikke over 25 000 nm og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Over 100 cm
3
 volumen 
eller
2.
Over 80 mm i diameter eller storakse og 20 mm tykkelse (dybde)
c.
"Rumkvalificerede" komponenter til optiske systemer som følger:
1.
Komponenter, der er gjort lette til mindre end 20 % "ækvivalent massefylde" sammenlignet med en massiv blanket med samme blænde og tykkelse
2.
Ubehandlede substrater, substrater med overfladebelægninger (enkeltlag eller multilag, metalliske eller dielektriske, ledende, halvledende eller isolerende) eller med beskyttelsesfilm
3.
Segmenter eller samlinger af spejle konstrueret til samling i rummet til et optisk system med en samlet blænde svarende til eller større end en enkelt linse af 1 meter i diameter
4.
Komponenter, der er fremstillet af "kompositte" materialer med lineær termisk udvidelseskoefficient, i en hvilken som helst koordinatretning, lig med eller mindre end 5 x 10
-6
/K
d.
Optisk kontroludstyr som følger:
1.
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til at holde overfladeværdi eller orientering af "rumkvalificerede" komponenter, som er specificeret i 6A004.c.1 eller 6A004.c.3
2.
Styrings-, sporings-, stabiliserings- og resonatorindstillingsudstyr som følger:
a.
Borde til strålestyringsspejle konstrueret til at bære spejle med en diameter eller storakselængde på over 50 mm og med alle følgende egenskaber og specielt konstrueret elektronisk kontroludstyr hertil:
1.
Maksimal vinkelbevægelse på ±26 mrad eller derover
2.
Mekanisk resonansfrekvens på 500 Hz eller derover 
og
3.
Vinkel"præcision" på 10 mikroradianer eller derunder (bedre)
b.
Resonatorindstillingsudstyr med båndbredder på 100 Hz eller derover og "præcision" på 10 mikroradianer eller derunder (bedre)
3.
Kardanophæng med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Maksimal drejning på mere end 5°
b.
Båndbredde på mindst 100 Hz
c.
Vinkelsigtefejl på højst 200 mikroradianer 
og
d.
Med en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Mere end 0,15 m men ikke over 1 m i diameter eller storakselængde og i stand til vinkelaccelerationer på mere end 2 radianer/s
2
eller
2.
Mere end 1 m i diameter eller storakselængde og i stand til vinkelaccelerationer på mere end 0,5 radian/s
2
4.
Ikke anvendt
e.
'Asfæriske optiske elementer', der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Største optiske blændedimension større end 400 mm
2.
Overfladeujævnhed på mindre end 1 nm (rms) for samplinglængder, der er lig med eller større end 1 mm 
og
3.
Den lineære termiske udvidelseskoefficients absolutte størrelse mindre end 3 x 10
-6
/K ved 25 °C.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Et 'asfærisk optisk element' er et hvilket som helst element, der anvendes i et optisk system, hvis billeddannelsesoverflade eller -overflader er konstrueret til at afvige fra den ideelle sfæres form.
2.
Producenter skal ikke måle overfladeujævnheden som nævnt i 6A004.e.2., medmindre det optiske element er konstrueret eller fremstillet med sigte på at overholde eller overstige kontrolparameteren.
Note:
6A004.e lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'asfæriske optiske elementer' med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Største optiske blændedimension på mindre end 1 m og et fokalt længde/blænde-forhold, der er lig med eller større end 4,5:1
b.
Største optiske blændedimension, der er lig med eller større end 1 m og et fokalt længde/blænde-forhold, der er lig med eller større end 7:1
c.
Konstrueret som Fresnel-, flueøje-, stribe-, prisme- eller diffraktive optiske elementer
d.
Fremstillet af borsilikatglas med lineær termisk udvidelseskoefficient større end 2,5 x 10
-6
/K ved 25 °C 
eller
e.
Et optisk element til røntgen med indre spejlingskapacitet (f.eks. spejle af rørtypen).
N.B.
For så vidt angår 'asfæriske optiske elementer', der er specielt konstrueret til litografisk udstyr, jf. 3B001.
f.
Måleudstyr til dynamisk bølgefront, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Billedhastigheder' på mindst 1 kHz 
og
2.
En bølgefrontsnøjagtighed på λ/20 eller derunder (bedre) ved den tiltænkte bølgelængde.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 6A004.f. er 'billedhastighed' en hastighed, hvorved alle "aktive pixler" i "billedplansystemet" integreres med henblik på optagelse af billeder, der projiceres ved hjælp af bølgefrontssensoroptik.
6A005
Andre "lasere" end dem, der er specificeret i 0B001.g.5 eller 0B001.h.6, komponenter og optisk udstyr som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6A205.
Note 1:
Impuls-"lasere" omfatter lasere, der opererer i CW-mode med overlejrede impulser.
Note 2:
Excimer-, halvleder-, kemiske, CO-, CO
2
-, og 'ikkerepetitive pulserende' Nd:glass-"lasere" er kun specificeret i 6A005.d.
Teknisk note:
'Ikkerepetitive pulserende' henviser til "lasere", der producerer enten en enkelt udgangsimpuls eller som har et tidsinterval mellem impulserne på mere end et minut.
Note 3:
6A005 omfatter fiber-"lasere".
Note 4:
Kontrolstatussen for "lasere" med frekvenskonvertering (dvs. bølgelængdeændring) på andre måder end ved at en "laser" pumper en anden "laser", fastsættes ved at anvende kontrolparametrene for både kilde "laserens" output og det frekvenskonverterede optiske output.
Note 5:
6A005 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "lasere" som følger:
a.
Rubin med en udgangsenergi på mindre end 20 J
b.
Nitrogen
c.
Krypton
Note 6:
I forbindelse med 6A005.a. og 6A005.b. forstås ved 'enkelt transversal modus' "lasere", hvis stråleprofil har en M
2
-faktor på under 1,3, mens der ved 'multipel transversal modus' fortås "lasere", hvis stråleprofil har en M
2
-faktor på 1,3 eller derover.
Teknisk note:
I 6A005 er 'elektrisk-til-optisk virkningsgrad' defineret som forholdet mellem "laser"udgangseffekt (eller "middeludgangseffekt") og den totale elektriske indgangseffekt, der kræves for at drive "laseren", inklusive strømforsyning/konditionering og termisk konditionering/varmeveksler.
a.
Ikke "afstemmelige" kontinuerte "(CW)-lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mindre end 150 nm og udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W
2.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mindst 150 nm, men ikke mere end 510 nm, og udgangseffekt på mere end 30 W
Note:
6A005.a.2. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på Argon-"lasere" med en udgangseffekt på højst 50 W.
3.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 510 nm, men ikke mere end 540 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og udgangseffekt på mere end 50 W 
eller
b.
'Multipel transversal modus' output og udgangseffekt på mere end 150 W
4.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 540 nm, men ikke mere end 800 nm, og udgangseffekt på mere end 30 W
5.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 800 nm, men ikke mere end 975 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og udgangseffekt på mere end 50 W 
eller
b.
'Multipel transversal modus' output og udgangseffekt på mere end 80 W
6.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 975 nm, men ikke mere end 1 150 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangseffekt på mere end 1 000 W 
eller
2.
Har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangseffekt på mere end 500 W 
og
b.
Spektral båndbredde på mindre end 40 GHz 
eller
b.
'Multipel transversal modus' output med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Elektrisk-til-optisk virkningsgrad' på mere end 18 % og udgangseffekt på mere end 1 000 W 
eller
2.
Udgangseffekt på mere end 2 kW
Note 1:
6A005.a.6.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'multipel transversal modus' industrielle "lasere" med en udgangseffekt på over 2 kW og højst 6 kW, med en total masse større end 1 200 kg. I denne note omfatter total masse alle komponenter, der kræves for at drive "laseren", f.eks. "laser", strømforsyning, varmeveksler, men omfatter ikke ekstern optik til strålekonditionering og/eller-forsyning.
Note 2:
6A005.a.6.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'multipel transversal modus' industrielle "lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Udgangseffekt på over 1 kW men ikke over 1,6 kW og Beam Parameter Product (BPP) på over 1,25 mm•mrad
c.
Udgangseffekt på over 1,6 kW men ikke over 2,5 kW og Beam Parameter Product (BPP) på over 1,7 mm•mrad
d.
Udgangseffekt på over 2,5 kW men ikke over 3,3 kW og Beam Parameter Product (BPP) på over 2,5 mm•mrad
e.
Udgangseffekt på over 3,3 kW men ikke over 6 kW og Beam Parameter Product (BPP) på over 3,5 mm•mrad
f.
Ikke anvendt
g.
Ikke anvendt
h.
Udgangseffekt på over 6 kW men ikke over 8 kW og Beam Parameter Product (BPP) på over 12 mm•mrad 
eller
i.
Udgangseffekt på over 8 kW men ikke over 10 kW og Beam Parameter Product (BPP) på over 24 mm•mrad.
7.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 1 150 nm, men ikke mere end 1 555 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Enkelt transversal modus' og udgangseffekt på mere end 50 W 
eller
b.
'Multipel transversal modus' og udgangseffekt på mere end 80 W
8.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 1 555 nm, men ikke mere end 1 850 nm og udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W
9.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 1 850 nm, men ikke mere end 2 100 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Enkelt transversal modus' og udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W 
eller
b.
'Multipel transversal modus' output og udgangseffekt på mere end 120 W 
eller
10.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 2 100 nm og udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W
b.
Ikke "afstemmelige" pulserende "lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mindre end 150 nm og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 50 mJ pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 1 W 
eller
b.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 1 W
2.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mindst 150 nm, men ikke mere end 510 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 1,5 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 30 W 
eller
b.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 30 W
Note:
6A005.b.2.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på Argon-"lasere" med en "middeludgangseffekt" på højst 50 W.
3.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 510 nm, men ikke mere end 540 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 1,5 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 50 W 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 50 W 
eller
b.
'Multipel transversal modus' output med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 1,5 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 150 W 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 150 W
4.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 540 nm, men ikke mere end 800 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Impulsvarighed" på mindre end 1 ps og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 0,005 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 5 GW 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 20 W 
eller
b.
"Impulsvarighed" på mindst 1 ps og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 1,5 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 30 W 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 30 W
5.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 800 nm, men ikke mere end 975 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Impulsvarighed" på mindre end 1 ps og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 0,005 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 5 GW 
eller
2.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 20 W
b.
"Impulsvarighed" på mindst 1 ps, men ikke mere end 1 μs, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 0,5 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 50 W
2.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 20 W 
eller
3.
'Multipel transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 50 W 
eller
c.
"Impulsvarighed" på mere end 1 μs og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 2 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 50 W
2.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 50 W 
eller
3.
'Multipel transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 80 W
6.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 975 nm, men ikke mere end 1 150 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Impulsvarighed" på mindre end 1 ps og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangs"spidseffekt" på mere end 2 GW pr. impuls
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 30 W 
eller
3.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 0,002 J pr. impuls
b.
"Impulsvarighed" på mindst 1 ps, men ikke mere end 1 ns, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangs"spidseffekt" på mere end 5 GW pr. impuls
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 50 W 
eller
3.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 0,1 J pr. impuls
c.
"Impulsvarighed" på mindst 1 ns, men ikke mere end 1 μs, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Spidseffekt" på mere end 100 MW
b.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 20 W, som er konstruktionsmæssigt begrænset til en maksimal impulsrepetitionsfrekvens på højst 1 kHz
c.
'Elektrisk-til-optisk virkningsgrad' på mere end 12 % og en "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 100 W og kan fungere ved en pulsrepetitionsfrekvens, som er større end 1 kHz
d.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 150 W og kan fungere ved en pulsrepetitionsfrekvens, som er større end 1 kHz 
eller
e.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 2 J pr. impuls 
eller
2.
'Multipel transversal modus' output med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Spidseffekt" på mere end 400 MW
b.
'Elektrisk-til-optisk virkningsgrad' på mere end 18 % og en "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 500 W
c.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 2 kW 
eller
d.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 4 J pr. impuls 
eller
d.
"Impulsvarighed" på mere end 1 μs og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Spidseffekt" på mere end 500 kW
b.
'Elektrisk-til-optisk virkningsgrad' på mere end 12 % og en "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 100 W 
eller
c.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 150 W 
eller
2.
'Multipel transversal modus' output med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Spidseffekt" på mere end 1 MW
b.
'Elektrisk-til-optisk virkningsgrad' på mere end 18 % og en "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 500 W 
eller
c.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 2 kW
7.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 1 150 nm, men ikke mere end 1 555 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Impulsvarighed" på højst 1 μs og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 0,5 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 50 W
2.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 20 W 
eller
3.
'Multipel transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 50 W 
eller
b.
"Impulsvarighed" på mere end 1 μs og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 2 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 50 W
2.
'Enkelt transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 50 W 
eller
3.
'Multipel transversal modus' output og "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 80 W
8.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 1 555 nm, men ikke mere end 1 850 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 100 mJ pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 1 W 
eller
b.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 1 W
9.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 1 850, men ikke mere end 2 100 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Enkelt transversal modus' og en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 100 mJ pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 1 W 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 1 W 
eller
b.
'Multipel transversal modus' og en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 100 mJ pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 10 kW 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 120 W 
eller
10.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 2 100 nm og en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 100 mJ pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 1 W 
eller
b.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 1 W
c.
"Afstemmelige""lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mindre end 600 nm og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 50 mJ pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 1 W 
eller
b.
Middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W
Note:
6A005.c.1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på farve"lasere" eller andre flydende "lasere" med en multifunktionsudgang og en bølgelængde på mindst 150 nm, men ikke mere end 600 nm, og med alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mindre end 1,5 J pr. impuls eller "spidseffekt" på mindre end 20 W 
og
2.
Middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mindre end 20 W.
2.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mindst 600 nm, men ikke mere end 1 400 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 1 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 20 W 
eller
b.
Middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 20 W eller
3.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 1 400 nm og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 50 mJ pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 1 W 
eller
b.
Middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W
d.
Andre "lasere", som ikke er specificeret i 6A005.a., 6A005.b. eller 6A005.c., som følger:
1.
Halvleder "lasere" som følger:
Note 1:
6A005.d.1. omfatter halvleder "lasere" med optiske outputkonnektorer (f.eks. fiberoptiske forbindelsesled).
Note 2:
Eksportkontrolstatus for halvleder "lasere", der er specielt konstruerede til andet udstyr, bestemmes af dette andet udstyrs eksportkontrolstatus.
a.
Individuelle enkelt transversal modus halvleder"lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængde på mindst 1 510 nm og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 1,5 W 
eller
2.
Bølgelængde på mere end 1 510 nm, og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 500 mW
b.
Individuelle multipel transversal modus halvleder"lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængde på mindre end 1 400 nm og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 15 W
2.
Bølgelængde på mindst 1 400 nm og mindre end 1 900 nm og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 2,5 W 
eller
3.
Bølgelængde på mindst 1 900 nm og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 1 W
c.
Individuelle systemer af halvleder "laser"'stænger' med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængde på mindre end 1 400 nm og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 100 W
2.
Bølgelængde på mindst 1 400 nm og mindre end 1 900 nm og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 25 W 
eller
3.
Bølgelængde på mindst 1 900 nm og middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 10 W
d.
Halvleder "laser"'stablede arrays' (todimensionale arrays) med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængde på mindre end 1 400 nm og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mindre end 3 kW og med en middel- eller CW-udgangs'effekttæthed' på mere end 500 W/cm
2
b.
Samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mindst 3 kW men højst 5 kW og med en middel- eller CW-udgangs'effekttæthed' på mere end 350 W/cm
2
c.
Samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 5 kW
d.
Spidsimpuls'effekttæthed' på mere end 2 500 W/cm
2
eller
Note:
6A005.d.1.d.1.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på epitaksisk fremstillede monolitter.
e.
Rumligt kohærent samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 150 W
2.
Bølgelængde på mindst 1 400 nm men mindre end 1 900 nm og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mindre end 250 W og med en middel- eller CW-udgangs'effekttæthed' på mere end 150 W/cm
2
b.
Samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mindst 250 W men højst 500 W og med en middel- eller CW-udgangs'effekttæthed' på mere end 50 W/cm
2
c.
Samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 500 W
d.
Spidsimpuls'effekttæthed' på mere end 500 W/cm
2
eller
Note:
6A005.d.1.d.2.d. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på epitaksisk fremstillede monolitter.
e.
Rumligt kohærent samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 15 W
3.
Bølgelængde på mindst 1 900 nm og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Middel- eller CW-udgangs'effekttæthed' på mere end 50 W/cm
2
b.
Middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mindre end 10 W 
eller
c.
Rumligt kohærent samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 1,5 W 
eller
4.
Mindst en "laser"'stang', der er specificeret i 6A005.d.1.c.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 6A005.d.1.d. forstås ved 'effekttæthed' den samlede "laser"udgangseffekt divideret med den 'stablede arrays' emitteroverfladeareal.
e.
Halvleder "laser"'stablede arrays' ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6A005.d.1.d., med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til at blive kombineret med andre 'stablede arrays' 
og
 derved danne en større 'stablet array' og
2.
Integrerede forbindelser, der anvendes såvel til elektronik som til køling
Note 1:
'Stablede arrays', der er dannet ved at kombinere halvleder "laser"'stablede arrays', der er specificeret i 6A005.d.1.e., som ikke er konstrueret til at blive yderligere kombineret eller modificeret, er specificeret i 6A005.d.1.d.
Note 2:
'Stablede arrays', der er dannet ved at kombinere halvleder "laser"'stablede arrays', der er specificeret i 6A005.d.1.e., som er konstrueret til at blive yderligere kombineret eller modificeret, er specificeret i 6A005.d.1.e.
Note 3:
6A005.d.1.e. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på modulære samlinger af individuelle 'stænger', der er konstrueret til at blive omdannet til end-to-end stablede lineære arrays.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Halvleder"lasere" kaldes normalt "laser"dioder.
2.
En 'stang' (også benævnt halvleder"laser"'stang', "laser"diode'stang' eller diode'stang') består af et antal halvleder"lasere" i en endimensional array.
3.
En 'stablet array' består af et antal 'stænger', der udgør en todimensional array af halvleder"lasere".
2.
Carbonmonoxid (CO)-"lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 2 J pr. impuls og "spidseffekt" på mere end 5 kW 
eller
b.
Middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 5 kW
3.
Carbondioxid (CO
2
)-"lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
CW-udgangseffekt på mere end 15 kW
b.
Pulseret udgang med en "impulsvarighed" på mere end 10 μs og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 10 kW 
eller
2.
"Spidseffekt" på mere end 100 kW 
eller
c.
Pulseret udgang med en "impulsvarighed" på højst 10 μs og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Pulsenergi på mere end 5 J pr. impuls 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 2,5 kW
4.
Excimer-"lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Udgangsbølgelængde på højst 150 nm og en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 50 mJ pr. impuls eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 1 W
b.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 150 nm, men ikke mere end 190 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 1,5 J pr. impuls 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 120 W
c.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 190 nm, men ikke mere end 360 nm, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 10 J pr. impuls 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 500 W 
eller
d.
Udgangsbølgelængde på mere end 360 nm og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangsenergi på mere end 1,5 J pr. impuls 
eller
2.
"Middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 30 W
N.B.
Med hensyn til Excimer-"lasere" specielt til litografisk udstyr, jf. 3B001.
5.
"Kemiske lasere" som følger:
a.
Hydrogenfluorid (HF)-"lasere"
b.
Deuteriumfluorid (DF)-"lasere"
c.
'Transferlasere' som følger:
1.
Oxygeniod (O
2
-I) "lasere"
2.
Deuteriumfluorid-Carbondioxid (DF-CO
2
)-"lasere"
Teknisk note:
'Transferlasere' er "lasere", hvori lasermediet exciteres ved overførsel af energi gennem kollision mellem et ikkestrålende atom eller molekyle og et strålende atom eller molekyle.
6.
'Ikkerepetitive pulserende' Nd:glass-"lasere" med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Impulsvarighed" på højst 1 μs og udgangsenergi på mere end 50 J pr. impuls eller
b.
"Impulsvarighed" på over 1 μs og udgangsenergi på mere end 100 J pr. impuls
Note:
'Ikkerepetitive pulserende' henviser til "lasere", der producerer enten en enkelt udgangsimpuls eller som har et tidsinterval mellem impulserne på mere end et minut.
e.
Komponenter som følger:
1.
Spejle der køles enten ved 'aktiv køling' eller ved varmerørskøling
Teknisk note:
'Aktiv køling' er en køleteknik til optiske komponenter, der bruger strømmende væsker (flowing fluids) i den optiske komponents suboverflade (nominelt mindre end 1 mm under den optiske overflade) til at fjerne varme fra optikken.
2.
Optiske spejle eller transmissive eller delvis transmissive optiske eller elektro-optiske komponenter, bortset fra Fused Tapered Fibre Combiners og Multi-Layer Dielectric gratings (MLD), der er specielt konstrueret til brug sammen med specificerede "lasere"
Note:
Fibre combiners og MLD er specificeret i 6A005.e.3.
3.
Fiber"laser"komponenter som følger:
a.
Multimode til multimode Fused Tapered Fibre Combiners med alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indsætningstab bedre (mindre) end eller lig med 0,3 dB opretholdt ved en samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt (bortset fra udgangseffekt, der i givet fald går gennem enkeltmodekernen) på over 1 000 W 
og
2.
Antal inputfibre: 3 eller derover
b.
Enkeltmode til multimode Fused Tapered Fibre Combiners med alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indsætningstab bedre (mindre) end 0,5 dB opretholdt ved en samlet middel- eller CW-udgangseffekt på over 4 600 W
2.
Antal inputfibre: 3 eller derover 
og
3.
Med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Beam Parameter Product (BPP) målt ved udgangen på ikke over 1,5 mm mrad for et antal inputfibre på 5 eller derunder eller
b.
BPP målt ved udgangen på ikke over 2,5 mm mrad for et antal inputfibre på over 5
c.
MLD med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Konstrueret til spektral eller kohærent strålekombination af 5 eller flere fiber"lasere"
og
2.
Tærskel for CW-"laser"induceret skade på 10 kW/cm
2
 eller derover.
f.
Optisk udstyr som følger:
N.B.
For så vidt angår optiske elementer med fælles blænde, der er i stand til at fungere i "superhøjeffektlaser"-("SHPL")-systemer, se kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
"Laser"diagnostisk udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til at foretage dynamiske måling af vinkelfejl ved strålestyring i "SHPL"-systemer med en vinkelstillings"nøjagtighed" på 10 μrad (mikroradianer) eller mindre (bedre)
3.
Optisk udstyr og komponenter, der er specielt konstrueret til kohærent strålekombination i et phased array "SHPL"-system med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
En "nøjagtighed" på højst 0,1 μm for bølgelængder på over 1 μm 
eller
b.
En "nøjagtighed" på λ/10 eller mindre (bedre) for den tiltænkte bølgelængde for bølgelængder på højst 1 μm
4.
Projektionsteleskoper, specielt konstrueret til brug i forbindelse med "SHPL"-systemer.
g.
'Akustisk laser detektionsudstyr' med alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangseffekt for CW-"laser" på mindst 20 mW
2.
"Laser"frekvensstabilitet, der er lig med eller bedre (mindre) end 10 MHz
3.
"Laser"bølgelængder på mindst 1 000 nm, men ikke mere end 2 000 nm
4.
Opløsning for optisk system, der er bedre (mindre) end 1 nm 
og
5.
Forhold mellem optisk signal og støj, der er lig med eller på mere end 10
3
.
Teknisk note:
'Akustisk laser detektionsudstyr' kaldes somme tider en "laser"mikrofon eller mikrofon til partikelflowdetektion.
6A006
"Magnetometre", "magnetiske gradiometre", "intrinsisk magnetiske gradiometre", elektrisk feltsensorer til undervandsbrug, "kompensationssystemer", samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7A103.d.
Note:
6A006 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på instrumenter, der er specielt konstrueret til fiskeriapplikationer eller biomagnetiske målinger til medicinsk diagnostik.
a.
"Magnetometre" og følgende delsystemer:
1.
"Magnetometre", der anvender "superledende""teknologi"(SQUID), og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
SQUID-systemer, der er konstrueret til stationær drift, uden særligt konstruerede delsystemer til at reducere støj ved bevægelse og med en 'følsomhed', der er lig med eller lavere (bedre) end 50 fT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz ved en frekvens på 1 Hz, 
eller
b.
SQUID-systemer, der i bevægelse med magnetometer har en 'følsomhed', der er lavere (bedre) end 20 pT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz ved en frekvens på 1 Hz, og er specielt konstrueret til at reducere støj ved bevægelse
2.
"Magnetometre", der anvender optisk pumpet eller nuklear præcisions-"teknologi" (proton/Overhauser) med en 'følsomhed', der er lavere (bedre) end 20 pT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz ved en frekvens på 1 Hz
3.
"Magnetometre", der anvender fluxgate "teknologi" med en 'følsomhed', der er lig med eller lavere (bedre) end 10 pT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz ved en frekvens på 1 Hz
4.
Induktionsspole "magnetometre" med en 'følsomhed', der er lavere (bedre) end en eller flere af følgende:
a.
0,05 nT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz ved frekvenser på mindre end 1 Hz
b.
1 x 10
-3
 nT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz ved frekvenser på mindst 1 Hz, men højst 10 Hz eller
c.
1 x 10
-4
 nT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz ved frekvenser på mere end 10 Hz
5.
Fiberoptiske "magnetometre" med en 'følsomhed', der er lavere (bedre) end 1 nT (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz.
b.
Elektriske feltsensorer til undervandsbrug, der har en 'følsomhed', der er lavere (bedre) end 8 nanovolt pr. meter pr. kvadratrod Hz ved en frekvens på 1 Hz
c.
Følgende "magnetiske gradiometre":
1.
"Magnetiske gradiometre", der bruger multiple "magnetometre" som specificeret i 6A006.a.
2.
Fiberoptiske "intrinsisk magnetiske gradiometre" med en 'følsomhed' i det magnetiske gradientfelt, der er lavere (bedre) end 0,3 nT/m (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz
3.
"Intrinsisk magnetiske gradiometre", der bruger anden "teknologi" end fiberoptisk "teknologi", med en 'følsomhed' i det magnetiske gradientfelt, der er lavere (bedre) end 0,015 nT/m (eff.) pr. kvadratrod Hz.
d.
"Kompensationssystemer" til magnetiske sensorer eller elektriske feltsensorer til undervandsbrug, der resulterer i en ydelse, der er lig med eller bedre end de parametre, der er specificeret i 6A006.a., 6A006.b. eller 6A006.c.
e.
Elektromagnetiske modtagere til undervandsbrug, der indeholder magnetiske feltsensorer som specificeret i 6A006.a. eller elektriske feltsensorer som specificeret i 6A006.b.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 6A006. er 'følsomhed' (støjniveau) lig med effektivværdien af den anordningsbegrænsede basisstøj, der er det laveste målelige signal.
6A007
Gravimetre og graviationsgradiometre som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6A107.
a.
Gravimetre, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til brug på landjorden, med en statisk "nøjagtighed", der er mindre (bedre) end 10 μGal
Note:
6A007.a lægger ikke eksportkontrol på jordgravimetre af kvartselementtypen (Worden).
b.
Gravimetre, der er konstrueret til mobile platforme, med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Statisk "nøjagtighed" på mindre (bedre) end 0,7 mGal 
og
2.
Drifts"nøjagtighed" på mindre (bedre) end 0,7 mGal med en "indsvingningstid til stabil registrering" på mindre end 2 minutter under en hvilken som helst kombination af ledsagende korrektionskompensering og bevægelsesindflydelser
c.
Gravitationsgradiometre.
6A008
Radarsystemer, udstyr og enheder med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6A108.
Note:
6A008 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
—
Sekundær overvågningsradar (SSR)
Civil bilradar
Displays eller monitorer som bruges til flyvekontrol (ATC)
Meteorologisk (vejr-)radar
Præcisionsindflyvningsradarudstyr (PAR), der er i overensstemmelse med ICAO-standarder, og som anvender elektronisk styrbare lineære (1-dimensionale) arrays eller mekanisk positionerede passive antenner.
a.
Opererer ved frekvenser fra 40 GHz til 230 GHz og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Middeludgangseffekt på mere end 100 mW 
eller
2.
En lokaliserings"nøjagtighed" på 1 m eller mindre (bedre) i rækkevidde og 0,2 grader eller mindre (bedre) i azimut.
b.
Afstemmelig båndbredde på mere end ± 6,25 % af 'midtdriftsfrekvensen'
Teknisk note:
'Midtdriftsfrekvensen' er lig med halvdelen af summen af den højeste og den laveste specificerede driftsfrekvens.
c.
Er i stand til at operere samtidigt på mere end to bærefrekvenser
d.
Er i stand til at operere i radarmode med syntetisk blænde (SAR), radarmode med invers syntetisk blænde (ISAR) eller sidelooking airborne (SLAR) radarmode
e.
Omfatter elektronisk scannede retningsantenner
Teknisk note:
Elektronisk scannede retningsantenner benævnes tillige elektronisk drejelige retningsantenner.
f.
Er i stand til at finde højden på ikkemedvirkende mål
g.
Er konstrueret specielt til luftbåren (med ballon eller fly) operation og med Doppler "signalbehandling" til søgning af bevægelige mål
h.
Anvender radarsignalbehandling samt:
1.
"Radar spredt-spektrum"-teknik 
eller
2.
"Radarfrekvensagilitets"-teknik
i.
Udfører landbaseret operation med maksimal 'instrumenteret rækkevidde' på mere end 185 km
Note:
6A008.i. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
Radar til overvågning af fiskeriområder
b.
Jordradarudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til langdistanceflyvekontrol, og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Maksimal 'instrumenteret rækkevidde' på højst 500 km
2.
Konfigureret således, at radarens måldata kun kan transmitteres i én retning, nemlig fra radarens position til et eller flere civile ATC-centre
3.
Indeholder ikke udstyr til fjernstyring af radarskannehastigheden fra ATC-centre på rute 
og
4.
Installeret permanent
c.
Vejrballonsporingsradarer.
Teknisk note:
Med henblik på 6A008.i. er 'instrumenteret rækkevidde' en radars specificerede, entydige skærmrækkevidde.
j.
Er "laser"radar eller Light Detection og Ranging (LIDAR)-udstyr med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Rumkvalificeret"
2.
Anvender kohærent heterodyn eller homodyn søgeteknik og med vinkelopløsning på mindre (bedre) end 20 mikroradianer 
eller
3.
Konstrueret til at udføre batymetrisk kystopmåling fra luften i overensstemmelse med mindst Den Internationale Hydrografiske Organisation (IHO)'s Order 1a Standard (5. udgave, februar 2008) for hydrografisk opmåling og med anvendelse af et eller flere "laser"apparater med en bølgelængde på mere end 400 nm men ikke over 600 nm
Note 1:
LIDAR-udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til landmåling, er kun specificeret i 6A008.j.3.
Note 2:
6A008.j lægger ikke eksportkontrol på LIDAR-udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til meteorologisk observation.
Note 3:
Parametrene i IHO Order 1a Standard, 5. udgave, februar 2008, kan kort gengives således:
—
Plannøjagtighed (konfidensniveau 95 %) = 5 m + 5 % af dybden.
Dybdenøjagtighed ved reducerede dybder (konfidensniveau 95 %) = ±√(a
2
+(b*d)
2
), hvor:
a = 0,5 m = konstant dybdetolerance,
dvs. summen af samlet konstant dybdetolerance
b = 0,013 = dybdeafhængig tolerancefaktor
b*d = dybdeafhængig fejl,
dvs. summen af samlet konstant dybdeafhængige fejl
d = dybden
Feature detection = kubiske features > 2 m ved dybder op til 40 m; 10 % af dybder på over 40 m.
k.
Omfatter "signalbehandling"sundersystemer, der anvender "impulskompression", med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
"Impulskompressions"forhold på mere end 150 
eller
2.
Komprimeret impulsbredde på mindre end 200 ns 
eller
Note:
6A008.k.2 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på todimensionale 'søradarer' eller radarer til 'skibstrafiksystemer', som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Impulskompressions"forhold på 150 eller derunder
b.
Komprimeret impulsbredde på mere end 30 ns
c.
Enkelt- og roterende mekanisk scannede antenner
d.
Spidsudgangseffekt på 250 W eller derunder 
og
e.
Ikke i stand til "frekvenshop"
l.
Omfatter databehandlingsundersystemer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Automatisk målsøgning', der ved enhver antennerotation giver den forudberegnede målposition ud over tidspunktet for næste passage af antennestrålen, 
eller
Note:
6A008.l.1 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på konfliktalarm i ATC-systemer eller 'søradar'.
Teknisk note:
'Automatisk målsøgning' er en behandlingsteknik, som automatisk bestemmer og leverer som udgangsværdi en ekstrapoleret værdi af målets sandsynligste position i realtid.
2.
Ikke anvendt
3.
Ikke anvendt
4.
Konfigureret til at sikre overlejring og korrelering eller sammenlægning af måldata inden for seks sekunder fra to eller flere 'geografisk spredte' radarer for at opnå en samlet ydelse, der overstiger ydelsen for en enkelt radar som specificeret i 6A008.f. eller 6A008.i.
Teknisk note:
Sensorer anses for at være 'geografisk spredte', hvis de befinder sig over 1 500 m fra hinanden uanset retning. Mobile sensorer anses altid for at være 'geografisk spredte'.
N.B.
Jf. ligeledes kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål.
Note:
6A008.l.4 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på systemer, udstyr og enheder, der bruges til 'skibstrafiksystemer'.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 6A008 er 'søradar' en radar, der anvendes til sikker navigation på havet, indre vandveje eller i kystnære områder.
2.
I 6A008 er 'skibstrafiksystem' et system til kontrol og overvågning af skibstrafikken i lighed flyvekontrol for "fly".
6A102
Strålingshærdede 'detektorer', ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6A002, specielt udviklet eller modificeret med henblik på beskyttelse imod nukleare virkninger (f.eks. elektromagnetisk impuls (EMP), røntgenstråler, kombineret eksplosionstryk og varmevirkning) og anvendelige til "missiler", konstrueret eller normeret til at modstå strålingsniveauer, der svarer til eller overstiger en total strålingsdosis på 5 x 10
5
 rads (silicium).
Teknisk note:
I 6A102 forstås ved en 'detektor', en mekanisk, elektrisk, optisk eller kemisk indretning, der automatisk identificerer og lagrer eller registrerer en stimulus som for eksempel en ændring i den omgivende temperatur eller det omgivende tryk, et elektrisk eller elektromagnetisk signal eller stråling fra et radioaktivt materiale. Dette omfatter også indretninger med engangsfunktion eller som udløses ved svigt.
6A107
Gravimetre og komponenter til gravimetre og gravitationsgradiometre som følger:
a.
Gravimetre ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6A007.b., konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i luften eller på havet, med en statisk nøjagtighed eller driftsnøjagtighed på 0,7 mgal eller mindre (bedre), og med en indsvingningstid til stabil registrering på to minutter eller mindre
b.
Specielt konstruerede komponenter til gravimetre, der er specificeret i 6A007.b eller 6A107.a, og gravitationsgradiometre, der er specificeret i 6A007.c.
6A108
Følgende radarsystemer, sporingssystemer og radomer, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6A008:
a.
Radar- og laserradarsystemer, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104
Note:
6A108.a omfatter følgende:
a.
Udstyr til kortlægning af terrænkonturer
b.
Udstyr til scene mapping og korrelation (både digitalt og analogt)
c.
Dopplerudstyr til radarnavigation
d.
Passivt interferometerudstyr
e.
Billeddannende sensorudstyr (både aktivt og passivt).
b.
Følgende præcisionssporingssystemer, anvendelige i 'missiler':
1.
Sporingssystemer, som bruger en kodeoversætter i forbindelse med referencer enten på jorden eller i luften eller i forbindelse med navigationssatellitsystemer, for at skaffe tidstro målinger af position og hastighed under flyvningen
2.
Instrumentradar til afstandsmåling med tilknyttet optisk/infrarødt sporingsinstrument med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Vinkelopløsning bedre end 1,5 milliradianer
b.
Rækkevidde på mindst 30 km med en afstandsopløsning, der er bedre end 10 m eff 
og
c.
Hastighedsopløsning, der er bedre end 3 m pr. sekund.
Teknisk note:
I 6A108.b. forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
c.
Radomer, der er konstrueret til at modstå et kombineret termisk chok på mere end 4,184 x 10
6
 J/m
2
 ved et maksimalt tryk på mere end 50 kPa, og som kan anvendes i "missiler" til at beskytte mod nukleare virkninger (f.eks. elektromagnetisk impuls (EMP), røntgenstråler, kombineret eksplosionstryk og varmevirkning).
6A202
Fotomultiplikatorrør med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Fotokatodeareal på mere end 20 cm
2
og
b.
Anodeimpulsstigetid på mindre end 1 ns.
6A203
Følgende kameraer og komponenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6A003:
N.B.1
"Software", som er specielt udviklet til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i et kamera eller en billeddannende indretning, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 6A203.a., 6A203.b. eller 6A203.c, er specificeret i 6D203.
N.B.2
"Teknologi", i form af koder eller nøgler til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i et kamera eller en billeddannende indretning, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 6A203.a., 6A203.b. eller 6A203.c, er specificeret i 6D203.
Note:
6A203.a-6A203.c lægger ikke eksportkontrol på kameraer eller billeddannende indretninger, hvis de har hardware-, "software"- eller "teknologi"begrænsninger, der begrænser ydelsen til under det niveau, der er specificeret ovenfor, forudsat at de opfylder følgende:
1.
De skal returneres til den oprindelige fabrikant med henblik på at forbedre eller frigive begrænsningerne
2.
De forudsætter "software" som specificeret i 6D203 til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 6A203 
eller
3.
De forudsætter "teknologi" i form af nøgler eller koder som specificeret i 6E203 til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 6A203.
a.
Streakkameraer og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil, som følger:
1.
Streakkameraer med skrivehastighed på mere end 0,5 mm/μs
2.
Elektroniske streakkameraer i stand til tidsopløsning på højst 50 ns
3.
Streakrør til kameraer, der er specificeret i 6A203.a.2
4.
Plugins, der er specielt udviklet til brug med streakkameraer med modulær opbygning og kan leve op til ydelsesspecifikationerne i 6A203.a.1. eller 6A203.a.2
5.
Synkroniseringselektroniske enheder og rotorenheder bestående af turbiner, spejle og lejer, specielt udviklet til kameraer som specificeret i 6A203.a.1.
b.
Billedkameraer og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil, som følger:
1.
Billedkameraer med optagelseshastighed på mere end 225 000 billeder pr. sekund
2.
Billedkameraer med en belysningstid på højst 50 ns
3.
Rør til billedkameraer og faststofbilleddannende indretninger med hurtig-billed gatingtid (shutter) på højst 50 ns, som er specielt konstrueret til kameraer der er specificeret i 6A203.b.1 eller 6A203.b.2
4.
Plugins, der er specielt udviklet til brug med billedkameraer, med modulær opbygning, og kan leve op til ydelsesspecifikationerne i 6A203.b.1. eller 6A203.b.2
5.
Synkroniseringselektronikenheder og rotorenheder bestående af turbiner, spejle og lejer, specielt udviklet til kameraer som specificeret i 6A203.b.1. eller 6A203.b.2.
Teknisk note:
I 6A203.b kan highspeedenkeltbilledkameraer udelukkende anvendes til at frembringe et enkelt billede af en dynamisk begivenhed, eller flere sådanne kameraer kan kombineres i et sekventielt styret system for at frembringe flere billeder af en begivenhed.
c.
Faststofkameraer eller kameraer med elektronrør og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil, som følger:
1.
Faststofkameraer eller kameraer med elektronrør med en hurtig-billed gatingtid (shutter) på højst 50 ns
2.
Faststofbilleddannende indretninger og billedforstærkningsrør med en hurtig-billed gatingtid (shutter) på højst 50 ns, som er specielt konstrueret til kameraer som specificeret i 6A203.c.1
3.
Elektrooptiske lukkere (Kerr eller Pockels-celle) med en hurtig-billed gatingtid på højst 50 ns
4.
Plugins, der er specielt udviklet til brug med kameraer med modulær opbygning og kan leve op til ydelsesspecifikationerne i 6A203.c.1
d.
Strålingsbeskyttede tv-kameraer eller linser hertil, der er specielt konstrueret eller normeret til at modstå en samlet strålingsdosis på over 50 x 10
3
 Gy(silicium) (5 x 10
6
 rad (silicium)) uden driftsforringelse.
Teknisk note:
Udtrykket Gy (silicium) betegner den mængde energi i joule pr. kilo, der absorberes af en uafskærmet siliciumprøve, når den udsættes for ioniserende stråling.
6A205
Følgende "lasere", "laser"forstærkere og -oscillatorer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 0B001.g.5, 0B001.h.6 og 6A005:
N.B.
Vedrørende kobberdamplasere se 6A005.b.
a.
Argonion "lasere" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængder mellem 400 og 515 nm 
og
2.
En "middeludgangseffekt" på over 40 W
b.
Afstemmelige impuls-single-mode-farveoscillatorer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængder mellem 300 og 800 nm
2.
En "middeludgangseffekt" på over 1 W
3.
En gentagelseshastighed højere end 1 kHz 
og
4.
En impulsbredde mindre end 100 ns
c.
Afstemmelige impulsfarvelaserforstærkere og oscillatorer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængder mellem 300 og 800 nm
2.
En "middeludgangseffekt" på over 30 W
3.
En gentagelseshastighed højere end 1 kHz 
og
4.
En impulsbredde mindre end 100 ns
Note:
6A205.c lægger ikke eksportkontrol på singlemodeoscillatorer.
d.
Impulscarbondioxid (CO
2
)"lasere" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængder mellem 9 000 og 11 000 nm
2.
En gentagelseshastighed højere end 250 Hz
3.
En "middeludgangseffekt" på over 500 W 
og
4.
En impulsbredde mindre end 200 ns
e.
Parahydrogen Ramanskiftere beregnet til drift ved 16 μm udgangsbølgelængde og gentagelseshastighed højere end 250 Hz
f.
Neodymdoterede (andet end glas) "lasere" med udgangsbølgelængde på mellem 1 000 og 1 100 nm og med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Impulsexciterede og Q-switchede med en impulsvarighed på mindst 1 ns, og med en af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Et enkelt transversal modus output med en "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 40 W 
eller
b.
Et multipel transversal modus output med en middeludgangseffekt på mere end 50 W 
eller
2.
Med frekvensfordobling for at give en udgangsbølgelængde på mellem 500 og 550 nm med en "middeludgangseffekt" på mere end 40 W.
g.
Impuls-carbonmonoxid (CO)-"lasere" ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6A005.d.2., med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Bølgelængder mellem 5 000 og 6 000 nm
2.
En gentagelseshastighed højere end 250 Hz
3.
En "middeludgangseffekt" på over 200 W 
og
4.
En impulsbredde mindre end 200 ns.
6A225
Hastighedsinterferometre til at måle hastigheder på mere end 1 km/sek. i tidsintervaller på under 10 mikrosekunder
Note:
6A225 omfatter hastighedsinterferometre som f.eks. VISAR'er (Velocity Interferometer Systems for Any Reflector), DLI'er (Dopplerlaserinterferometre) og PDV'er (Photonic Doppler Velocimeters) også kendt som Het-V (heterodyne hastighedsmålere).
6A226
Følgende trykfølere:
a.
Shocktrykmålere, som kan måle tryk på over 10 GPa, herunder målere fremstillet af manganin, ytterbium og polyvinylidenfluorid (PVDF)/polyvinyldifluorid (PVF
2
)
b.
Kvartstryktransducere til tryk på over 10 GPa.
6B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
6B002
Masker og retikler, der er konstrueret til de optiske sensorer, der er anført i 6A002.a.1.b. eller 6A002.a.1.d.
6B004
Optisk udstyr som følger:
a.
Udstyr til måling af den absolutte refleksionskoefficient med en "nøjagtighed" pp 0,1 % eller bedre af refleksionskoefficientværdien
b.
Andet udstyr end udstyr til måling af overfladers lysspredning, som har en ikketildækket åbning på over 10 cm og er specielt konstrueret til berøringsfri optisk måling af en ikkeplan genstand med optisk overflade (kontur) med en "nøjagtighed" på 2 nm eller mindre (bedre) sammenholdt med den krævede kontur.
Note:
6B004 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på mikroskoper.
6B007
Udstyr til at fremstille, oprette og kalibrere landbaserede gravimetre med en statisk "nøjagtighed", der er bedre end 0,1 mGal.
6B008
Impulsradarsystemer til måling af tværsnit (RCS) med sendeimpulsbredde på 100 ns eller mindre, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 6B108.
6B108
Andre systemer end de i 6B008 specificerede, der er specielt konstrueret til radarmåling af tværsnit, og som er anvendelige i forbindelse med 'missiler' og deres undersystemer.
Teknisk note:
I 6B108 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
6C   
Materialer
6C002
Følgende optiske sensormaterialer:
a.
Grundstoffet tellur (Te) af en renhed, der er lig med eller højere end 99,9995 %
b.
Enkeltkrystaller herunder epitaksiale wafere af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Cadmiumzinktellurid (CdZnTe) med et zinkindhold på under 6 % ('molbrøk')
2.
Cadmiumtellurid (CdTe) af enhver renhedsgrad 
eller
3.
Kviksølvcadmiumtellurid (HgCdTe) af enhver renhedsgrad.
Teknisk note:
Ved 'molbrøk' forstås forholdet mellem krystallens indhold af ZnTe, målt i mol, og summen af dens indhold af CdTe og ZnTe, målt i mol.
6C004
Optisk materiale som følger:
a.
Zinkselenid (ZnSe) og zinksulfid (ZnS) "substratblanketter", som er fremstillet ved en kemisk dampudfældningsproces, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Større volumen end 100 cm
3
eller
2.
Større diameter end 80 mm og en tykkelse på mindst 20 mm
b.
Elektro-optiske materialer og ikke-lineære optiske materialer som følger:
1.
Kaliumtitanylarsenat (KTA) (CAS 59400-80-5)
2.
Sølvgalliumselenid (AgGaSe
2
, også kendt som AGSE) (CAS 12002-67-4)
3.
Thalliumarsenselenid (Tl
3
AsSe
3
, også kendt som TAS) (CAS 16142-89-5)
4.
Zincgermaniumphosphid (ZnGeP
2
, også kendt som ZGP, zincgermaniumbiphosphid eller zincgermaniumdiphosphid) 
eller
5.
Galliumselenid (GaSe) (CAS 12024-11-2)
c.
Ikke-lineære optiske materialer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6C004.b, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Dynamisk (også kendt som ikke-stationær) ikke-lineær susceptibilitet af tredje orden (χ
(3)
, chi 3) på 10
-6
 m
2
/V
2
 eller mere 
og
b.
Responstid på mindre end 1 ms 
eller
2.
Ikke-lineær susceptibilitet af anden orden (χ
(2)
, chi 2) på 3,3×10
-11
 m/V eller mere
d.
"Substratblanketter" af siliciumcarbid eller beryllium-beryllium (Be/Be), som er nedfældet på materialer på mere end 300 mm i diameter eller storakselængde
e.
Glas, herunder sammensmeltet siliciumdioxid, phosphatglas, fluorphosphatglas, zirconiumfluorid (ZrF
4
) (CAS 7783-64-4) og hafniumfluorid (HfF
4
) (CAS 13709-52-9) med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Hydroxylion-(OH
-
)-koncentration på mindre end 5 ppm
2.
Integrerede metalliske renhedsniveauer på mindre end 1 ppm 
og
3.
Høj homogenitet (brydningsindeksvarians) mindre end 5 x 10
-6
f.
Syntetisk fremstillet diamantmateriale med absorption på mindre end 10
-5
 cm
-1
 hvad angår bølgelængder på mere end 200 nm men ikke over 14 000 nm
6C005
"Laser"materialer som følger:
a.
Syntetiske krystallinske "laser"værtsmaterialer i uforarbejdet form som følger:
1.
Titandoteret safir
2.
Ikke anvendt.
b.
Sjælden-jordartsmetal doterede fibre med dobbelt cladding med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Nominel "laser"bølgelængde på mellem 975 nm og 1 150 nm og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Gennemsnitlig kernediameter på 25 μm eller derover 
og
b.
Kernens 'numeriske apertur' ('NA'): under 0,065 
eller
Note:
6C005.b.1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på fibre med dobbelt cladding, hvor den indre glas-claddings diameter er på over 150 μm, men ikke over 300 μm.
2.
Nominel "laser" bølgelænde på over 1 530 nm og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Gennemsnitlig kernediameter på 20 μm eller derover 
og
b.
Kernens 'numeriske apertur' ('NA'): under 0,1
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 6C005.b. måles kernens 'numeriske apertur' ('NA') ved fiberens emissionsbølgelængder.
2.
6C005.b. omfatter også fibre samlet med endehætter.
6D   
Software
6D001
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, som er specificeret i 6A004, 6A005, 6A008 eller 6B008.
6D002
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 6A002.b, 6A008 eller 6B008.
6D003
Følgende anden "software":
a.
"Software" som følger:
1.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til akustisk stråledannelse til "tidstro behandling" af akustiske data til passiv modtagelse ved hjælp af slæbte hydrofonsystemer
2.
"Kildekode" til "tidstro behandling" af akustiske data til passiv modtagelse ved hjælp af slæbte hydrofonsystemer
3.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til akustisk stråleformning til "tidstro behandling" af akustiske data til passiv modtagelse ved hjælp af dybvands- eller lavvandskabelsystemer
4.
"Kildekode" til "tidstro behandling" af akustiske data til passiv modtagelse ved hjælp af dybvands- eller lavvandskabelsystemer
5.
"Software" eller "kildekode", der er specielt konstrueret til alle af følgende:
a.
"Tidstro behandling" af akustiske data fra sonarsystemer, der er specificeret i 6A001.a.1.e. 
og
b.
Automatisk detektering, klassificering og lokalisering af dykkere eller svømmere
N.B.
For "software" eller "kildekode" til sporing af dykkere, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til militær anvendelse, SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
"Software", der er konstrueret eller modificeret til kameraer med "billedplansystem" som specificeret i 6A002.a.3.f., og konstrueret eller modificeret til at fjerne en restriktion på billedhastigheden og lade kameraet overskride den billedhastighed, der er specificeret i 6A003.b.4. Note 3.a.
d.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til at opretholde aligneringen og sammenfasningen af segmenterede spejlsystemer bestående af spejlsegmenter med en diameter eller storakselængde på 1 m eller mere
e.
Ikke anvendt
f.
"Software" som følger:
1.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til magnetiske "kompenseringssystemer" eller elektrisk felt"kompenseringssystemer" til magnetiske sensorer, der er konstrueret til drift på mobile platforme
2.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til magnetisk anomalisøgning eller elektrisk felt-anomalisøgning på mobile platforme
3.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til "tidstro behandling" af elektromagnetiske data ved brug af elektromagnetiske modtagere til undervandsbrug som specificeret i 6A006.e.
4.
"Kildekode" til "tidstro behandling" af elektromagnetiske data ved brug af elektromagnetiske modtagere til undervandsbrug som specificeret i 6A006.e.
g.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til korrektion af bevægelsens indflydelse på gravimetre eller gravitationsgradiometre
h.
"Software" som følger:
1.
Flyvekontrol (ATC)-"software""programmer", der er konstrueret til at blive indlagt på datamater til almen brug, der er installeret i flyvekontrolcentre, og som er i stand til at modtage radarmåldata fra mere end fire primære radarer
2.
"Software" til konstruktion eller "produktion" af radomer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Specielt konstruerede til at beskytte de elektronisk scannede retningsantenner, som er specificeret i 6A008.e, 
og
b.
Giver et antennestrålingsdiagram med et 'gennemsnitligt sidesløjfeniveau', der er mere end 40 dB under hovedstrålens topværdiniveau.
Teknisk note:
Det i 6D003.h.2.b nævnte 'gennemsnitlige sidesløjfeniveau' måles over hele systemet, idet dog hovedstrålens vinkelvidde og de to første sidesløjfer på begge sider af hovedstrålen ikke medregnes.
6D102
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 6A108.
6D103
"Software", der efter flyvningen behandler de lagrede data, således at fartøjets position kan bestemmes på hele strækningen, og som er specielt udviklet eller modificeret med henblik på 'missiler'.
Teknisk note:
Ved 'missiler' forstås i 6D103 komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på over 300 km.
6D203
"Software", som er specielt udviklet til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i et kamera eller en billeddannende indretning, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 6A203.a.-6A203.c.
6E   
Teknologi
6E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af udstyr, materialer eller "software", som er specificeret i 6A, 6B, 6C eller 6D.
6E002
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "produktion" af udstyr eller materialer, som er specificeret i 6A, 6B eller 6C.
6E003
Følgende anden "teknologi":
a.
"Teknologi" som følger:
1.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til belægning og behandling af optiske overflader for at opnå en 'optisk tykkelse' med en ensartethed på mindst 99,5 % for optiske belægninger med en diameter eller storakselængde på mindst 500 mm og med et totaltab (absorption og spredning) på mindre end 5 x 10
-3
N.B.
Jf. ligeledes 2E003.f.
Teknisk note:
'Optisk tykkelse' er det matematiske produkt af brydningsindekset og belægningens fysiske tykkelse.
2.
"Teknologi" til fremstilling af optik, som anvender enkeltpunktsdiamantdrejningsteknik til frembringelse af en overflade"nøjagtighed", der er bedre end 10 nm eff. på ikkeplane overflader på mere end 0,5 m
2
b.
"Teknologi" der "kræves" til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af specielt konstruerede diagnostiske instrumenter eller mål i prøveudstyr til prøvning af "SHPL" eller prøvning eller vurdering af materialer, der er bestrålet med "SHPL"-stråler.
6E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr eller "software", som er specificeret i 6A002, 6A007.b og c, 6A008, 6A102, 6A107, 6A108, 6B108, 6D102 eller 6D103.
Note:
6E101 lægger kun eksportkontrol på "teknologi" for emner, der er specificeret i 6A002, 6A007 og 6A008, hvis emnerne er konstrueret til luftbårne anvendelser og er anvendelige i "missiler".
6E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 6A003, 6A005.a.2., 6A005.b.2., 6A005.b.3., 6A005.b.4., 6A005.b.6., 6A005.c.2., 6A005.d.3.c., 6A005.d.4.c., 6A202, 6A203, 6A205, 6A225 eller 6A226.
Note 1:
6E201 lægger kun eksportkontrol på "teknologi" for kameraer, der er specificeret i 6A003, hvis kameraerne samtidig er specificeret af et eller flere af kontrolparametrene i 6A203.
Note 2:
6E201 lægger kun eksportkontrol på "teknologi" for lasere i 6A005.b.6., som er neodymdoterede og specificeret af et eller flere af kontrolparametrene i 6A205.f.
6E203
"Teknologi" i form af koder eller nøgler til at forbedre eller frigive ydelsen i et kamera eller en billeddannende indretning, således at de opfylder egenskaberne i 6A203.a.-6A203.c.
DEL IX –
Kategori 7
KATEGORI 7 - STYRING AF FLY OG SKIBE
7A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
N.B.
Med hensyn til automatpiloter til undervandsfartøjer henvises til kategori 8.
Med hensyn til radar henvises til kategori 6.
7A001
Følgende accelerometre samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7A101.
N.B.
Med hensyn til vinkel- og rotationsaccelerometre, se 7A001.b.
a.
Lineære accelerometre med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specificeret til drift ved lineære accelerationsniveauer på højst 15 g og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Bias""stabilitet" mindre (bedre) end 130 μg acceleration i forhold til en fast kalibreringsværdi over en periode på et år 
eller
b.
"Skalafaktor""stabilitet" mindre (bedre) end 130 ppm i forhold til en fast kalibreringsværdi over en periode på et år
2.
Specificeret til drift ved lineære accelerationsniveauer over 15 g, men højst eller lig med 100 g, og med alle de følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Bias""repeterbarhed" mindre (bedre) end 1 250 μ g acceleration over en periode på et år 
og
b.
"Skalafaktor""repeterbarhed" mindre (bedre) end 1 250 ppm over en periode på et år 
eller
3.
Konstrueret til brug i inertinavigations- eller styringssystemer og specificeret til drift ved lineære accelerationsniveauer over 100 g
Note:
7A001.a.1. og 7A001.a.2. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på accelerometre, der er begrænset til kun at måle vibrationer eller stød.
b.
Vinkel- eller rotationsaccelerometre specificeret til drift ved lineære accelerationsniveauer over 100 g.
7A002
Gyroer eller vinkelhastighedssensorer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7A102.
N.B.
Med hensyn til vinkel- og rotationsaccelerometre, se 7A001.b.
a.
Specificeret til drift ved lineære accelerationsniveauer på højst 100 g og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Et vinkelhastighedsområde på mindre end 500° pr. sekund og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Bias""stabilitet" på mindre (bedre) end 0,5 grader pr. time, når den måles i et 1 g miljø over en periode på 1 måned og i forhold til en fast kalibreringsværdi 
eller
b.
En "angle random walk" på mindre (bedre) end eller lig med 0,0035° pr. kvadratrod time 
eller
Note:
7A002.a.1.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "gyroer med roterende masse"
2.
Et vinkelhastighedsområde på 500° pr. sekund eller derover og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
"Bias""stabilitet" på mindre (bedre) end 4 grader pr. time, når den måles i et 1 g miljø over en periode på tre minutter og i forhold til en fast kalibreringsværdi 
eller
b.
En "angle random walk" på mindre (bedre) end eller lig med 0,1° pr. kvadratrod time 
eller
Note:
7A002.a.2.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "gyroer med roterende masse"
b.
Specificeret til drift ved lineære accelerationsniveauer over 100 g.
7A003
'Inertimåleudstyr eller -systemer' med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7A103.
Note 1:
'Inertimåleudstyr eller -systemer' omfatter accelerometre eller gyroskoper til måling af ændringer i hastighed eller retning med henblik på at bestemme eller fastholde kurs eller position uden at kræve en ekstern reference, når først udstyret er indstillet. 'Inertimåleudstyr eller -systemer' omfatter:
—
Attitude and Heading Reference Systems (AHRS'er)
Gyrokompasser
Inertimåleenheder (IMU'er)
Inertinavigationssystemer (INS'er)
Inertireferencesystemer (IRS'er)
Inertireferenceenheder (IRU'er)
Note 2:
7A003 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'inertimåleudstyr eller-systemer', som er godkendt til brug i "civile fly" af de civile luftfartsmyndigheder i en eller flere EU-medlemsstater eller stater, der deltager i Wassenaararrangementet.
Teknisk note:
'Navigationshjælpemidler' angiver position uafhængigt og omfatter:
a.
"Satellitnavigationssystem"
b.
"Databaserede referencenavigationssystemer" ("DBRN")
a.
Konstrueret til "fly", køretøjer eller skibe og angiver position uden brug af 'navigationshjælpemidler', og med en eller flere af følgende "nøjagtigheder" efter normal indstilling:
1.
0,8 sømil i timen (nm/hr) "Circular Error Probable" ("CEP") eller mindre (bedre)
2.
0,5 % distance tilbagelagt "CEP" eller mindre (bedre) eller
3.
Samlet afdrift på 1 sømil "CEP" eller mindre (bedre) inden for en periode på 24 timer
Teknisk note:
Ydelsesparametrene i 7A003.a.1., 7A003.a.2. og 7A003.a.3 finder typisk anvendelse på 'inertimåleudstyr og -systemer' konstrueret til hhv. "fly", køretøjer og skibe. Disse parametre er affødt af brugen af specialiserede ikke-navigationshjælpemidler (f.eks. højdemåler, kilometertæller, fartskriver). De specificerede ydeevneværdier kan således ikke umiddelbart konverteres mellem disse parametre. Udstyr, der er konstrueret til multiple platforme, evalueres ud fra de gældende punkter: 7A003.a.1., 7A003.a.2. eller 7A003.a.3.
b.
Konstrueret til "fly", køretøjer og skibe, med indbyggede 'navigationshjælpemidler', og kan angive positionen, når alle 'navigationshjælpemidler' er mistet, i en periode på op til 4 minutter, med en "nøjagtighed" på mindre (bedre) end 10 meter "CEP"
Teknisk note:
7A003.b. henviser til systemer, hvor 'inertimåleudstyr eller -systemer' og andre uafhængige 'navigationshjælpemidler' er integreret i én enhed (indbygget) for at opnå bedre ydeevne.
c.
Konstrueret til "fly", køretøjer og skibe til at kunne angive kurs eller fastlægge geografisk nord med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Maksimal vinkelhastighed på mindre (lavere) end 500 grader/sek. og en kurs"nøjagtighed" uden brug af 'navigationshjælpemidler' svarende til eller mindre (bedre) end 0,07 grader/sek. (breddegrader) (svarende til 6 bueminutter rms ved 45 graders bredde) 
eller
2.
Maksimal vinkelhastighed lig med eller højere (større) end 500 grader/sek. og en kurs"nøjagtighed" uden brug af 'navigationshjælpemidler' lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,2 grader/sek. (breddegrader) (svarende til 17 bueminutter rms ved 45 graders bredde) 
eller
d.
Accelerationsmålinger eller vinkelhastighedsmålinger, i mere end én dimension, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Ydeevne som specificeret i 7A001 eller 7A002 langs enhver akse, uden brug af hjælpemidler 
eller
2.
Er "rumkvalificeret" og giver vinkelhastighedsmålinger med en "angle random walk" langs enhver akse mindre (bedre) end eller lig med 0,1 grader pr. kvadratrod time.
Note:
7A003.d.2 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på 'inertimåleudstyr eller -systemer', der omfatter "gyroer med roterende masse" som den eneste type gyro.
7A004
'Star trackers' og komponenter hertil som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7A104.
a.
'Star trackers' med en specificeret azimut"nøjagtighed" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 20 buesekunder i hele udstyrets specificerede levetid
b.
Komponenter, der er specielt konstrueret til udstyr specificeret i 7A004.a., som følger:
1.
Optiske hoveder eller baffler
2.
Databehandlingsenheder.
Teknisk note:
'Star trackers' omtales også stjerneattitudefølere eller gyroastrokompasser.
7A005
"Satellitnavigationssystem"-modtageudstyr med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7A105.
N.B.
For udstyr, der er specifikt konstrueret til militær anvendelse, SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
a.
Anvender en dekrypteringsalgoritme, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til statslige organer til at opnå adgang til positions- og tidsmålingskoder 
eller
b.
Anvender 'adaptive antennesystemer'.
Note:
7A005.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "satellitnavigationssystem"-modtageudstyr, der kun indeholder komponenter, der er konstrueret til at filtrere, skifte eller kombinere signaler fra multiple retningsuafhængige antenner, der ikke implementerer adaptive antenneteknikker.
Teknisk note:
For så vidt angår 7A005.b genererer 'adaptive antennesystemer' dynamisk et eller flere rumlige nuller i et antennegruppemønster ved signalbehandling i tids- eller frekvensområdet.
7A006
Luftbårne højdemålere, der opererer ved andre frekvenser end 4,2 til 4,4 GHz, begge værdier inklusive, og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7A106.
a.
'Power management' 
eller
b.
Brug af faseforskydningsnøglemodulering.
Teknisk note:
'Power management' er ændring af højdemålersignalets transmitterede effekt, således at den modtagne effekt på "flyets" højde altid er på det minimum, der er nødvendigt for at bestemme højden.
7A008
Sonarnavigationssystemer til undervandsbrug med Dopplerhastighedslogudstyr eller logudstyr med korrelationshastighed med en indbygget kurskilde og med en positions"nøjagtighed" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 3 % af den tilbagelagte strækning "Circular Error Probable" ("CEP") og specialdesignede komponenter hertil.
Note:
7A008 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på systemer specielt beregnet til montering på overfladefartøjer eller systemer, der kræver akustiske fyr eller bøjer for at give positionsdata.
N.B.
Se 6A001.a. vedrørende akustiske systemer og 6A001.b. vedrørende sonarlogudstyr med korrelations- eller Dopplerhastighed.
Se 8A002 vedrørende andre søfartssystemer.
7A101
Lineære accelerometre ud over dem, der er specificeret i 7A001, konstrueret til brug i inertinavigationssystemer eller i styringssystemer af enhver type, der kan anvendes i 'missiler', og som har alle følgende kendetegn, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
a.
En "bias""repeterbarhed" på mindre (bedre) end 1 250 μ g acceleration 
og
b.
En "skalafaktor""repeterbarhed" på mindre (bedre) end 1 250 ppm
Note:
7A101 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på accelerometre, der er specielt konstrueret og udviklet som Measurement While Drilling (MWD)-sensorer til brug ved servicering i borehuller.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 7A101 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
2.
I 7A101 henviser målingen af "bias" og "skalafaktor" til en standardafvigelse på 1 sigma med hensyn til en bestemt kalibrering over et år.
7A102
Alle typer gyroer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 7A002, som kan anvendes i 'missiler', med en specificeret "driftshastigheds"'stabilitet' på mindre end 0,5 grader (1 sigma eller effektivværdi) i timen under 1 g betingelser, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 7A102 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
2.
I 7A102 er 'stabilitet' defineret som et mål for en specifik mekanismes eller ydeevnekoefficients evne til at forblive uforandret, når den kontinuerligt udsættes for en fast driftsbetingelse (IEEE STD 528-2001, punkt 2.247).
7A103
Følgende instrumenterings- og navigationsudstyr og -systemer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 7A003, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
a.
'Inertimåleudstyr eller -systemer', der anvender følgende accelerometre eller gyroer:
1.
Accelerometre, der er specificeret i 7A001.a.3, 7A001.b eller 7A101, eller gyroer, der er specificeret i 7A002 eller 7A102, 
eller
Note:
7A103.a.1. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, der omfatter accelerometre, som er specificeret i 7A001.a.3., og som er konstrueret til at måle vibrationer eller stød.
2.
Accelerometre, der er specificeret i 7A001.a.1 eller 7A001.a.2, som er konstrueret til anvendelse i inertinavigationssystemer eller i styringssystemer af alle typer, og som kan anvendes i 'missiler'
Note:
7A103.a.2 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr, der omfatter accelerometre, som er specificeret i 7A001.a.1 eller 7A001.a.2, såfremt de pågældende accelerometre er specielt konstrueret og udviklet som MWD-sensorer (Measurement While Drilling) til brug ved servicering i borehuller.
Teknisk note:
'Inertimåleudstyr eller -systemer', som er specificeret i 7A103.a., omfatter accelerometre eller gyroskoper til måling af ændringer i hastighed eller retning med henblik på at bestemme eller fastholde kurs eller position uden at kræve en ekstern reference, når først udstyret er indstillet.
Note:
'Inertimåleudstyr eller –systemer' i 7A103.a. omfatter:
—
Attitude and Heading Reference Systems (AHRS'er)
—
Gyrokompasser
—
Inertimåleenheder (IMU'er)
—
Inertinavigationssystemer (INS'er)
—
Inertireferencesystemer (IRS'er)
—
Inertireferenceenheder (IRU'er)
b.
Integrerede instrumentsystemer til fly, inklusive gyrostabilisatorer eller autopiloter, der er udviklet eller modificeret til brug i 'missiler'
c.
'Integrerede navigationssystemer', der er udviklet eller modificeret til brug i 'missiler', og som har en navigationspræcision på 200 m 'CEP' eller derunder.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Et 'integreret navigationssystem' omfatter typisk følgende elementer:
a.
Et inertimålingsapparat (f.eks. referencesystem for flyvestilling og styret kurs, inertireferenceenhed eller inertinavigationssystem)
b.
En eller flere eksterne sensorer, der anvendes til opdatering af position og/eller hastighed, enten periodisk eller løbende under flyvningen (f.eks. satellitnavigationsmodtager, radarhøjdemåler og/eller Dopplerradar) 
og
c.
Integreringshardware og -software.
2.
I 7A103.c. er 'CEP' (Circular Error Probable eller Circle of Equal Probability) et udtryk for nøjagtighed, der defineret som den radius af en cirkel, inden for hvilken der er 50 % sandsynlighed for, at de befinder sig.
d.
Andre treakse magnetiske kurssensorer, der er beregnet eller ændret til integrering i flyvestyrings- og navigationssystemer end dem, der er specificeret i 6A006, og som har alle de følgende egenskaber, og specialdesignede komponenter hertil:
1.
Intern tiltkompensation i hældnings- og rulningsakser (hhv. ± 90° og ± 180°) 
og
2.
Azimutnøjagtighed bedre end (under) 0,5° rms ved en breddegrad på ± 80° i forhold til lokalt magnetfelt.
Note:
Flyvestyrings- og navigationssystemer i 7A103.d. omfatter gyrostabilisatorer, automatpiloter og inertinavigationssystemer.
Teknisk note:
I 7A103 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
7A104
Gyroastrokompasser og andre instrumenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 7A004, der afleder position eller orientering ved hjælp af automatisk sporing af himmellegemer eller satellitter samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
7A105
Andet modtageudstyr til 'satellitnavigationssystemer' end det, der er specificeret i 7A005, med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
a.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004, raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104 eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, som er specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a, 
eller
b.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til luftbårne anvendelser og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Kan yde navigationsinformation ved hastigheder på over 600 m/sek.
2.
Anvender dekryptering, udformet eller modificeret til militære eller statslige organer, til at opnå adgang til sikrede signaler/data fra 'satellitnavigationssystemer' 
eller
3.
Er specielt udformet til at benytte antijamfaciliteter (f.eks. antenne med styrbart nul eller elektronisk styrbar antenne), der skal fungere i et miljø med aktive eller passive modforanstaltninger.
Note:
7A105.b.2 og 7A105.b.3 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på udstyr konstrueret til kommercielle, civile eller 'Safety of Life' (f.eks. dataintegritet, flysikkerhed) 'satellitnavigationssystem'-tjenester.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 7A105 omfatter 'satellitnavigationssystem' verdensomspændende satellitnavigationssystemer (GNSS, f.eks. GPS, GLONASS, Galileo og BeiDou) og regionale satellitnavigationssystemer (RNSS, f.eks. NavIC og QZSS).
7A106
Højdemålere ud over dem, der er specificeret i 7A006, af radar- eller laserradartypen, konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004 eller raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104.
7A115
Passive sensorer til bestemmelse af pejlinger til bestemte elektromagnetiske kilder (pejleudstyr) eller terrænegenskaber, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004 eller raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104.
Note:
Det udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A105, 7A106 og 7A115, omfatter følgende:
a.
Udstyr til kortlægning af terrænkonturer
b.
Udstyr til scene mapping og korrelation (både digitalt og analogt)
c.
Dopplerudstyr til radarnavigation
d.
Passivt interferometerudstyr
e.
Billeddannende sensorudstyr (både aktivt og passivt).
7A116
Flystyringssystemer og servoventiler som følger, konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004, raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104 eller "missiler":
a.
Pneumatiske, hydrauliske, mekaniske, elektro-optiske eller elektro-mekaniske flystyringssystemer (herunder fly-by-wire- og fly-by-light-systemer)
b.
Stillingsstyringsudstyr
c.
Servoventiler til flystyring, konstrueret eller modificeret til de systemer, der er specificeret i 7A116.a eller 7A116.b, og konstrueret eller modificeret til drift i et vibrationsmiljø på mere end 10 g rms mellem 20 Hz og 2 kHz.
Note:
I forbindelse med ombygning af bemandede luftfartøjer, så de kan fungere som "missiler", omfatter 7A116 systemer, udstyr og ventiler, der er kontrueret eller modificeret til at kunne anvendes som ubemandede luftfartøjer.
7A117
"Styreenheder", der er anvendelige i "missiler", som er i stand til at opnå en systemnøjagtighed på 3,33 % eller derunder af rækkevidden (f.eks. en 'CEP' på 10 km eller derunder på en afstand af 300 km).
Teknisk note:
I 7A117 er 'CEP' (Circular Error Probable or Circle of Equal Probability) et udtryk for nøjagtighed, der defineres som den radius af en cirkel med målet som centrum, på en bestemt afstand, i hvilken 50 % af nyttelasterne rammer.
7B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
7B001
Prøve-, kalibrerings- og indstillingsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A.
Note:
7B001 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på prøve-, kalibrerings- og indstillingsudstyr til 'Vedligeholdelsesniveau I' eller 'Vedligeholdelsesniveau II'.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Vedligeholdelsesniveau I'
Fejl i en inertinavigationsenhed opdages i "luftfartøjer" gennem indikationer fra en kontrol- og visningsenhed (CDU) eller gennem et statussignal fra det tilsvarende undersystem. Ved at følge producentens manual kan man lokalisere årsagen til fejlen på den fejlramte "line replaceable unit"'s (LRU) niveau. Operatøren udskifter LRU'en med en reserveenhed.
2.
'Vedligeholdelsesniveau II'
Den defekte LRU sendes til vedligeholdelsesværkstedet (tilhørende producenten eller den operatør, der er ansvarlig for vedligeholdelse på niveau II). I vedligeholdelsesværkstedet afprøves den fejlramte LRU på forskellige passende måder for at identificere og lokalisere det fejlramte "shop replaceable assembly" (SRA)-modul, der er skyld i fejlen. Dette SRA-modul fjernes og erstattes med et funktionsdygtigt reservemodul. Det defekte SRA (eller måske hele LRU'en) sendes derefter til producenten. 'Vedligeholdelsesniveau II' omfatter ikke demontering eller reparation af accelerometre eller gyrosensorer, der er pålagt eksportkontrol.
7B002
Udstyr, specielt konstrueret til karakterisering af spejle til ring"laser"gyroer, som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 7B102.
a.
Scatterometre med en måle"nøjagtighed" på 10 ppm eller mindre (bedre)
b.
Profilometre med en måle"nøjagtighed" på 0,5 nm (5 ångstrøm) eller mindre (bedre).
7B003
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A.
Note:
7B003 omfatter:
—
Prøvestationer til indstilling af gyroer
Stationer til dynamisk afbalancering af gyroer
Prøvestationer til indkøring/motorafprøvning af gyroer
Stationer til udpumpning og fyldning af gyroer
Centrifugeophæng til gyrolejer
Stationer til indstilling af accelerometerakser
Vindemaskiner til gyrospoler med optiske fibre.
7B102
Reflexometre, der er specielt konstrueret til at specificere spejle, til "laser"gyroer, med en målenøjagtighed på 50 ppm eller mindre (bedre).
7B103
Følgende "produktionsfaciliteter" og "produktionsudstyr":
a.
"Produktionsfaciliteter", der er specielt konstrueret til udstyr, som er specificeret i 7A117
b.
"Produktionsudstyr" og andet prøve-, kalibrerings- og indstillingsudstyr ud over det, der er specificeret i 7B001-7B003, der er udviklet eller modificeret til brug med udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A.
7C   
Materialer
Ingen.
7D   
Software
7D001
"Software", der er specielt designet eller modificeret til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A eller 7B.
7D002
"Kildekode" til drift eller vedligeholdelse af inertinavigationsudstyr, herunder også inertiudstyr, der ikke er specificeret i 7A003 eller 7A004, eller Attitude and Heading Reference Systems ('AHRS').
Note:
7D002 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "kildekoder" til "brug" af kardanophængt 'AHRS'.
Teknisk note:
'AHRS' afviger generelt fra inertinavigationssystemer (INS), derved at et 'AHRS' giver oplysning om flyvestilling og styret kurs og normalt ikke giver de oplysninger om acceleration, fart og position, der forbindes med INS.
7D003
Følgende anden "software":
a.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til at forbedre driftsydelsen eller formindske navigationsfejlen i systemer til de niveauer, der er specificeret i 7A003, 7A004 eller 7A008
b.
"Kildekode" til hybride integrerede systemer, som forbedrer driftsydelsen eller formindsker navigationsfejlen i systemer til det niveau, der er specificeret i 7A003 eller 7A008, ved kontinuerlig kombination af kursdata med en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Data vedrørende Dopplerradar- eller sonarhastighed
2.
Referencedata fra " satellitnavigationssystemer"
eller
3.
Data fra "databaserede referencenavigationssystemer" ("DBRN").
c.
Ikke anvendt
d.
Ikke anvendt
e.
Computer-Aided-Design "software" (CAD), der specielt er beregnet til "udvikling" af "aktive flyvestyresystemer", multiakse fly-by-wire- eller fly-by-light-styring til helikoptere eller "cirkulationsstyrede antimomentsystemer eller cirkulationsstyrede retningsstyringssystemer" til helikoptere, med den i 7E004.b.1., 7E004.b.3.-7E004.b.5., 7E004.b.7., 7E004.b.8., 7E004.c.1. eller 7E004.c.2. specificerede "teknologi".
7D004
"Kildekode", der omfatter "udviklings""teknologi" som specificeret i 7E004.a.2, 7E004.a.3., 7E004.a.5., 7E004.a.6. eller 7E004.b til:
a.
Digitale flyvestyresystemer til "total flyvekontrol"
b.
Integrerede fremdrifts- og flyvestyresystemer
c.
"Fly-by-wire-systemer" eller "fly-by-light-systemer"
d.
Fejltolerante eller selvrekonfigurerende "aktive flyvestyresystemer"
e.
Ikke anvendt
f.
Luftdatasystemer baseret på overfladestatiske data 
eller
g.
Tredimensionale displays.
Note:
7D004 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "kildekode" i forbindelse med almindelige computerelementer og hjælpefunktioner (f.eks. akkvisition af inputsignaler, transmission af outputsignaler, indlæsning af computerprogrammer eller -data, indbyggede test, arbejdsplanlægningsmekanismer), som ikke indeholder en specifik flyvestyresystemfunktion.
7D005
"Software", som er specielt designet til at dekryptere "satellitnavigationssystem"-målingskoder, som er beregnet til statslige organer.
7D101
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller ændret med henblik på "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A001-7A006, 7A101-7A106, 7A115, 7A116.a., 7A116.b., 7B001, 7B002, 7B003, 7B102 eller 7B103.
7D102
Følgende integrerings"software":
a.
Integrerings"software" til udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A103.b
b.
Integrerings-"software", der er specielt konstrueret til udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A003 eller 7A103.a
c.
Integrerings"software", der er konstrueret eller modificeret til udstyr som specificeret i 7A103.c.
Note:
En almindelig form for integrerings"software" benytter et Kalmanfilter.
7D103
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til modellering eller simulering af "styreenheder", der er specificeret i 7A117, eller til konstruktionsmæssig integration i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004 eller raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104.
Note:
"Software", der er specificeret i 7D103, forbliver under eksportkontrol, hvis det kombineres med specielt konstrueret hardware, der er specificeret i 4A102.
7D104
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til drift eller vedligeholdelse af "styreenheder" som specificeret i 7A117.
Note:
7D104 omfatter ″software″, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til at forbedre ″styreenheders″ ydelse for at opnå eller overstige den nøjagtighed, der er specificeret i 7A117.
7E   
Teknologi
7E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 7A, 7B, 7D001, 7D002, 7D003, 7D005 og 7D101-7D103.
Note:
7E001 omfatter nøgleforvaltnings"teknologi" udelukkende til udstyr, som er specificeret i 7A005.a.
7E002
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A eller 7B.
7E003
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til reparation, fornyelse eller eftersyn af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A001-7A004.
Note:
7E003 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til vedligeholdelse, der er direkte forbundet med kalibrering, fjernelse eller udskiftning af beskadigede eller ubrugelige LRU'er og SRA'er i "civile fly" som beskrevet i 'Vedligeholdelsesniveau I' eller 'Vedligeholdelsesniveau II'.
N.B.
Se tekniske noter til 7B001.
7E004
Følgende anden "teknologi":
a.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Luftdatasystemer baseret alene på overfladestatiske data, dvs. som gør konventionelle luftdatasonder overflødige
3.
3-dimensionelle displays til "fly"
4.
Ikke anvendt
5.
Elektriske aktuatorer (dvs. elektromekaniske, elektrohydrostatiske og integrerede aktuatorsamlinger), der specielt er konstrueret til 'primær flyvekontrol'
Teknisk note:
'Primær flyvekontrol' er "fly"-stabilitets- eller manøvreringskontrol, der anvender kraftmomentgeneratorer, dvs. aerodynamiske styreflader eller trækkraftvektorisering.
6.
'Sæt af optiske sensorer til flyvekontrol', der specielt er konstrueret til iværksættelse af "aktive flyvestyresystemer" eller
Teknisk note:
Et 'flight control optical sensor array' er net af fordelte optiske sensorer med "laser"-stråler, der skal tilvejebringe tidstro flyvekontroldata med henblik på behandling om bord.
7.
"DBRN"-systemer til undervandsejlads ved hjælp af sonar eller gravimetriske databaser, der giver en positions"nøjagtighed" lig med eller mindre (bedre) end 0,4 sømil.
b.
Følgende "udviklings""teknologi" til "aktive flyvestyresystemer" (herunder "fly-by-wire-systemer" eller "fly-by-light-systemer"):
1.
Fotonikbaseret "teknologi" til føling af i "fly"- eller flyvestyringskomponenttilstand, overførsel af flyvestyringsdata eller styring af aktuatorbevægelser, som er "krævet" til "fly-by-light-systemer""aktive flyvestyresystemer"
2.
Ikke anvendt
3.
Tidstro algoritmer til analyse af komponentføleroplysninger for at forudsige og forebyggende afhjælpe forestående forringelser og fejl i komponenter i et "aktivt flyvestyringssystem".
Note:
7E004.b.3 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på algoritmer til offline-vedligeholdelse.
4.
Tidstro algoritmer, der identificerer komponentfejl og rekonfigurerer kraft- og momentkontrol for at afhjælpe forringelser og fejl i "aktive flyvestyringssystemer"
Note:
7E004.b.4 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på algoritmer, der skal afhjælpe fejlvirkninger gennem en sammenligning af redundante datakilder, eller offline forud planlagte løsninger på forventede fejl.
5.
Integrering af digitale styringsdata for flystyring, navigation og fremdrivningsdata i et digitalt flyvemanagementsystem til "total flyvekontrol"
Note:
7E004.b.5. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på:
a.
"Teknologi" til integrering af digitale styringsdata for flystyring, navigation og fremdrivningsdata i et digitalt flyvestyresystem til 'flyvelinjeoptimering'
b.
"Teknologi" til flyveinstrumentssystemer, der alene er integreret til VOR-, DME-, ILS- eller MLS-navigation eller indflyvning.
Teknisk note:
'Flyvelinjeoptimering' er en procedure, der minimerer afvigelser fra en firdimensional (rum og tid), ønsket bane på grundlag af maksimering af ydelse eller effektivitet med henblik på missionsopgaver.
6.
Ikke anvendt
7.
"Teknologi", som er "krævet" til opnåelse af de funktionelle krav til "fly-by-wire-systemer" med alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Inner-loop'-flystabilitetskontrol, der kræver loop-afvikling på 40 Hz eller derover, 
og
Teknisk note:
'Inner-loop' vedrører funktioner i "aktive flyvestyresystemer", der automatiserer flystabilitetskontrol.
b.
En eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Retter op på et aerodynamisk ustabilt fly - målt i forhold til en hvilken som helst af flymodellens strukturelle og operationelle maksimalpræstationer (design flight envelope) - som ville komme uden for kontrol, hvis det ikke blev rettet op inden for 0,5 sekunder.
2.
Kombinerer kontrollen af to eller flere akser og kompenserer samtidigt for 'unormale ændringer i flyets tilstand'
Teknisk note:
'Unormale ændringer i flyets tilstand' omfatter bl.a. strukturelle skader, tab af motordrivkraft, deaktiveret styreflade eller destabliserende lastforskydninger under flyvningen.
3.
Udfører de funktioner, der er specificeret i 7E004.b.5., 
eller
Note:
7E004.b.7.b.3. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på autopiloter.
4.
Muliggør stabil, kontrolleret flyvning, i andre faser end ved start og landing, ved indfaldsvinkler på over 18 grader, sideslip på 15 grader, hældning eller giring på 15 grader/sek., eller rulning på 90 grader/sek.
8.
"Teknologi", som er "krævet" til opnåelse af de funktionelle krav til "fly-by-wire-systemer", for at opfylde alle følgende betingelser:
a.
Intet tab af kontrol over "flyet" i tilfælde af to på hinanden følgende enkeltsvigt i "fly-by-wire-systemet"
og
b.
Sandsynligheden for tab af kontrol over "flyet" er mindre (bedre) end 1 x 10
-9
 svigt pr. fløjet time.
Note:
7E004.b lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" i forbindelse med almindelige computerelementer og hjælpefunktioner (f.eks. akkvisition af inputsignaler, transmission af outputsignaler, indlæsning af computerprogrammer eller -data, indbyggede test, arbejdsplanlægningsmekanismer), som ikke indeholder et specifikt flyvestyresystem.
c.
Følgende "teknologi" til "udvikling" af helikoptersystemer:
1.
Multiakse fly-by-wire- eller fly-by-light-styring, som kombinerer funktionerne af mindst to af følgende til ét styrende element:
a.
Kollektiv styring
b.
Cyklisk styring
c.
Giringsstyring.
2.
"Cirkulationsstyrede antimomentsystemer eller cirkulationsstyrede retningsstyringssystemer"
3.
Rotorblade med 'planprofiler med variabel geometri' til brug i systemer, der anvender individuel styring af bladene.
Teknisk note:
'Planprofiler med variabel geometri' er brug af klapper eller tabs på bagkanten eller slats eller hængslet næsesektion på forkanten, hvis position kan styres under flyvningen.
7E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A001-7A006, 7A101-7A106, 7A115-7A117, 7B001, 7B002, 7B003, 7B102, 7B103, 7D101-7D103.
7E102
Følgende "teknologi" til beskyttelse af avioniksystemer og elektriske undersystemer mod elektromagnetiske impulser (EMP) og skadelig elektromagnetisk interferens (EMI) fra eksterne kilder:
a.
Konstruktions "teknologi" til afskærmningssystemer
b.
Konstruktions "teknologi" til konfigurering af hærdede elektriske kredsløb og undersystemer
c.
Konstruktions"teknologi" til bestemmelse af hærdningskriterier for 7E102.a. og 7E102.b.
7E104
"Teknologi" til integrering af data vedrørende styring, navigation og fremdrift i et flyve-managementsystem til optimering af et raketsystems bane.
DEL X –
Kategori 8
KATEGORI 8 - SKIBSTEKNOLOGI
8A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
8A001
Følgende undervands- eller overfladefartøjer:
N.B.
Med hensyn til eksportkontrolstatus for udstyr til undervandsfartøjer henvises til:
—
Kategori 6 om sensorer
Kategori 7 og 8 om navigationsudstyr
Kategori 8A om undervandsudstyr.
a.
Bemandede, tøjrede undervandsfartøjer beregnet til at operere på dybder over 1 000 m
b.
Bemandede, ikketøjrede undervandsfartøjer, som er:
1.
Beregnet til at 'operere autonomt' og med en løfteevne på:
a.
10 % eller mere af deres vægt i luften 
og
b.
15 kN eller mere.
2.
Beregnet til at anvendes på dybder over 1 000 m 
eller
3.
Har samtlige følgende:
a.
Beregnet til at 'operere autonomt' kontinuerligt i 10 timer eller mere 
og
b.
Med en 'aktionsradius' på 25 sømil eller mere.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 8A001.b betyder 'operere autonomt' fuldt neddykket uden snorkel med alle systemer i gang og en mindstefart, som tillader en sikker dynamisk styring af undervandsfartøjets dybde alene ved brug af dybderorene og uden bistand fra et fartøj eller en base på overfladen, på havbunden eller på land, samt udstyret med et fremdrivningssystem til brug under neddykning eller overfladesejlads.
2.
I 8A001.b betyder 'aktionsradius' halvdelen af den afstand, hvor et undervandsfartøj kan 'operere autonomt'.
c.
Ubemandede undervandsfartøjer som følger:
1.
Ubemandede undervandsfartøjer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Beregnet til at sætte en kurs i forhold til en hvilken som helst geografisk reference uden tidstro menneskelig hjælp
b.
Akustisk data- eller kommandolink 
eller
c.
Optisk data- eller kommandolink på mere end 1 000 m.
2.
Ubemandede undervandsfartøjer, der ikke er nævnt i 8A001.c.1, og som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Beregnet til at anvendes med fortøjring
b.
Beregnet til at anvendes på dybder over 1 000 m
c.
Har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Beregnet til selvdreven manøvrering ved hjælp af fremdrivningsmotorer eller trykmotorer, der er specificeret i 8A002.a.2. 
eller
2.
Fiberoptisk datalink.
d.
Ikke anvendt
e.
Bjergningssystemer til brug på havet med en løfteevne på over 5 MN til bjergning af genstande fra dybder på mere end 250 m og med enten:
1.
Dynamiske positioneringssystemer i stand til at holde en position inden for 20 m fra et givet punkt, der er fastsat af navigationssystemet, 
eller
2.
Systemer til navigation på havbunden og til navigationsintegrering på dybder på mere end 1 000 m og med en positionerings"nøjagtighed" på inden for 10 m fra et angivet punkt.
f.
Ikke anvendt
g.
Ikke anvendt
h.
Ikke anvendt
i.
Ikke anvendt.
8A002
Følgende søfartssystemer, udstyr og komponenter:
Note:
For så vidt angår undervandskommunikationssystemer, se kategori 5, del 1 (Telekommunikation).
a.
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter, specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til undervandsfartøjer og beregnet til at operere på dybder på mere end 1 000 m, som følger:
1.
Trykhuse eller trykskrog med en maksimal indvendig kammerdiameter på over 1,5 m
2.
Jævnstrømsfremdriftsmotorer eller -trykmotorer
3.
Forbindelseskabler og konnektorer til disse, der bruger optisk fiber og har syntetiske forstærkningselementer
4.
Komponenter fremstillet af materiale, som er specificeret i 8C001.
Teknisk note:
Formålet med 8A002.a.4. bør ikke undergraves ved eksport af 'syntaktisk skum', som er specificeret i 8C001, når en mellemliggende fremstillingsfase er udført, og det endnu ikke er i den endelige komponentform.
b.
Systemer, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til automatisk bevægelseskontrol af undervandsfartøjer, der er specificeret i 8A001 ved brug af navigationsdata, med servostyring med tilbagekobling, og som kan enten:
1.
Sætte et fartøj i stand til at bevæge sig til inden for 10 m fra et forud bestemt punkt i vandsøjlen
2.
Fastholde fartøjets position inden for 10 m fra et forud bestemt punkt i vandsøjlen 
eller
3.
Fastholde fartøjets position inden for 10 m, medens det følger et kabel på eller under havbunden.
c.
Skroggennemføringer med fiberoptik og tryk
d.
Undervandsfjernsynssystemer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til fjernbetjening i forbindelse med et undervandsfartøj 
og
2.
Benytter nogen af følgende teknikker til at minimere virkningerne af diffuse reflekser:
a.
Afstandsgatede lysgivere eller
b.
Afstandsgatede lasersystemer
e.
Ikke anvendt
f.
Ikke anvendt
g.
Følgende lyssystemer, specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til undervandsbrug:
1.
Stroboskopiske lyssystemer med en lyseffekt på mere end 300 J pr. udladning og med mere end 5 udladninger pr. sekund
2.
Argonbuelyssystemer specielt beregnet til brug på mere end 1 000 m dybde.
h.
"Robotter" specielt konstrueret til undervandsbrug, der styres ved hjælp af en dedikeret datamat, og med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Systemer, der styrer "robotten" ved hjælp af information fra sensorer, der måler kraft eller moment, der påføres et eksternt objekt, afstanden til et eksternt objekt, eller følesans mellem "robotten" og et eksternt objekt, 
eller
2.
Er i stand til at udøve en kraft på mindst 250 N eller et moment på mindst 250 Nm, og som bruger titanbaserede legeringer eller "kompositte""fiber- og trådmaterialer" i deres strukturelle dele.
i.
Fjernstyrede artikulerede manipulatorer, specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til brug sammen med undervandsfartøjer, og med en af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Systemer, der styrer manipulatoren ved hjælp af information fra sensorer, der måler en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Moment eller kraft, der påføres et eksternt objekt, 
eller
b.
Følesans mellem manipulatoren og et eksternt objekt 
eller
2.
Styret af proportionale master-slave-teknikker eller og med mindst 5 'frihedsgrader'
Teknisk note:
Kun funktioner med proportionalt relateret bevægelsesstyring ved hjælp af positionsfeedback medregnes ved bestemmelse af antallet af 'frihedsgrader'.
j.
Følgende luftuafhængige kraftsystemer, specielt konstrueret til undervandsbrug:
1.
Luftuafhængige kraftsystemer efter Brayton- eller Rankineprincippet med:
a.
Kemiske skrubber- eller absorbersystemer, der er specielt beregnet til at fjerne carbondioxid, carbonmonoxid og partikler fra recirkuleret motorudblæsning
b.
Systemer specielt konstrueret til at bruge monoatomisk gas
c.
Indretninger eller indkapslinger, specielt konstrueret til dæmpning af undervandsstøj ved frekvenser under 10 kHz, eller specielle montageindretninger til støddæmpning 
eller
d.
Systemer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specielt konstrueret til at sætte reaktionsprodukter under tryk eller til gendannelse af brændstof
2.
Specielt konstrueret til at lagre reaktionsprodukter 
og
3.
Specielt konstrueret til at udstøde reaktionsprodukter mod et tryk på 100 kPa eller mere.
2.
Luftuafhængige systemer til dieselmotorer med:
a.
Kemiske skrubber- eller absorbersystemer, der er specielt beregnet til at fjerne carbondioxid, carbonmonoxid og partikler fra recirkuleret motorudblæsning
b.
Systemer specielt konstrueret til at bruge monoatomisk gas
c.
Indretninger eller indkapslinger, specielt konstrueret til dæmpning af undervandsstøj ved frekvenser under 10 kHz, eller specielle montageindretninger til støddæmpning 
og
d.
Specielt konstruerede udblæsningssystemer, der ikke udstøder forbrændingsprodukterne kontinuerligt.
3.
Luftuafhængige kraftsystemer med "brændstofcelle" med en udgangseffekt på mere end 2 kW og med:
a.
Indretninger eller indkapslinger, specielt konstrueret til dæmpning af undervandsstøj ved frekvenser under 10 kHz, eller specielle montageindretninger til støddæmpning 
eller
b.
Systemer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specielt konstrueret til at sætte reaktionsprodukter under tryk eller til gendannelse af brændstof
2.
Specielt konstrueret til at lagre reaktionsprodukter 
og
3.
Specielt konstrueret til at udstøde reaktionsprodukter mod et tryk på 100 kPa eller mere.
4.
Luftuafhængige kraftsystemer efter Stirlingprincippet med:
a.
Indretninger eller indkapslinger, specielt konstrueret til dæmpning af undervandsstøj ved frekvenser under 10 kHz, eller specielle montageindretninger til støddæmpning 
og
b.
Specielt konstruerede udblæsningssystemer, der udstøder forbrændingsprodukter med et tryk på 100 kPa eller mere.
k.
Ikke anvendt
l.
Ikke anvendt
m.
Ikke anvendt
n.
Ikke anvendt
o.
Propeller, krafttransmissions-, kraftgenerator- og støjdæmpningssystemer som følger:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Følgende vandskrue-, kraftgenerator- eller transmissionssystemer til brug på skibe:
a.
Stilbare propeller og navsamlinger med mærkeydelser over 30 MW
b.
Indvendigt væskekølede elektriske fremdrivningsmotorer med en udgangseffekt på mere end 2,5 MW
c.
"Superledende" fremdrivningsmotorer eller elektriske fremdrivningsmotorer med permanente magneter, med en udgangseffekt på mere end 0,1 MW
d.
Akselsystemer til kraftoverføring, med komponenter af "komposit"materialer, og i stand til at overføre mere end 2 MW
e.
Ventilerede eller baseventilerede propelsystemer med en mærkeydelse på mere end 2,5 MW.
3.
Følgende støjdæmpningssystemer til brug i skibe på mindst 1 000 ton deplacement:
a.
Systemer, som dæmper undervandsstøj ved frekvenser under 500 Hz og består af sammensatte akustiske monteringer til akustisk isolering af dieselmotorer, dieselgeneratorer, gasturbiner, gasturbinegeneratorer, fremdrivningsmotorer eller fremdrivningsreduktionsgear, specielt konstrueret til lyd- og vibrationsisolering, og med en mellemliggende masse på mere end 30 % af det udstyr, der skal monteres
b.
'Aktiv støjdæmpning eller støjudligning' eller magnetiske lejer, specielt konstrueret til krafttransmissionssystemer
Teknisk note:
'Aktiv støjdæmpning eller støjudligning' omfatter elektroniske kontrolsystemer, der er i stand til aktivt at reducere udstyrets vibration ved at danne antistøj- eller antivibrationssignaler direkte til kilden.
p.
Pumpjetfremdrivningssystemer med alle følgende egenskaber:
1.
Udgangseffekt på mere end 2,5 MW 
og
2.
Bruger sprededyser og strømformende ledeblade til forbedring af fremdrivningseffektiviteten eller reduktion af fremdrivningsgenereret undervandsspredt støj.
q.
Udstyr til undervandssvømning og dykning som følger:
1.
Iltåndingssystemer med lukket kredsløb
2.
Iltåndingssystemer med halv lukket kredsløb.
Note:
8A002.q lægger ikke eksportkontrol på individuelt iltåndingssystemer til personlig brug, når det ledsager brugeren heraf.
N.B.
For udstyr og indretninger, der er specifikt konstrueret til militær anvendelse, SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
r.
Dykkeralarm i form af akustiske systemer, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til at afbryde forbindelsen til dykkere, og som har et lydtrykniveau på mindst 190 dB (reference 1 mikropascal på 1 m) ved frekvenser på højst 200 Hz.
Note 1:
8A002.r. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på dykkeralarmsystemer baseret på eksplosive anordninger, luftkanoner eller brændbare kilder til undervandsbrug.
Note 2:
8A002.r. omfatter dykkeralarm i form af akustiske systemer, der anvender gnistgabkilder, også kendt som plasmalydkilder.
8B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
8B001
Vandtunneler, der er konstrueret til at have en baggrundsstøj på mindre end 100 dB (reference 1 mikropascal, 1 Hz) i frekvensområdet, der er over 0 Hz, men ikke over 500 Hz, og som er konstrueret til at måle akustiske felter genereret af vandstrømmen rundt om modeller af fremdrivningssystemer.
8C   
Materialer
8C001
'Syntaktisk skum' til undervandsbrug og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
Jf. ligeledes 8A002.a.4.
a.
Konstrueret til havdybder på mere end 1 000 m 
og
b.
Med en massefylde på mindre end 561 kg/m
3
.
Teknisk note:
'Syntaktisk skum' består af hule kugler af plast eller glas, der er indlejret i en harpiks-"matrix".
8D   
Software
8D001
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af udstyr eller materialer, der er specificeret i 8A, 8B eller 8C.
8D002
Specifik "software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion", reparation, hovedreparation eller renovering (nybearbejdning) af propeller, der er specielt konstrueret til reduktion af undervandsstøj.
8E   
Teknologi
8E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr eller materialer, der er specificeret i 8A, 8B eller 8C.
8E002
Følgende anden "teknologi":
a.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling", "produktion", reparation, hovedreparation eller renovering (nybearbejdning) af propeller, der er specielt konstrueret til reduktion af undervandsstøj
b.
"Teknologi" til hovedreparation eller renovering af udstyr, der er specificeret i 8A001, 8A002.b., 8A002.j., 8A002.o. eller 8A002.p.
c.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Overfladeeffektfartøjer (med fuldt skørt) med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Maksimal konstruktionsfart, fuldt lastet, på over 30 knob ved en signifikant bølgehøjde på 1,25 m eller mere
b.
Pudetryk på over 3 830 Pa 
og
c.
Et forhold mellem ulastet og fuldt lastet deplacement på mindre end 0,70.
2.
Overfladeeffektfartøjer (typen med faste sidewalls) med maksimal konstruktionshastighed, fuldt lastet, på over 40 knob ved en signifikant bølgehøjde på 3,25 m eller mere
3.
Hydrofoilfartøjer med aktive systemer til automatisk styring af plansystemerne, med maksimal konstruktionshastighed, fuldt lastet, på 40 knob eller mere ved en signifikant bølgehøjde på 3,25 m eller mere 
eller
4.
'Fartøjer med lille vandplanareal' med:
a.
Fuldlastdeplacement på over 500 ton med maksimal konstruktionshastighed, fuldt lastet, på over 35 knob ved en signifikant bølgehøjde på 3,25 m eller mere 
eller
b.
Fuldlastdeplacement på over 1 500 ton med maksimal konstruktionshastighed, fuldt lastet, på over 25 knob ved en signifikant bølgehøjde på 4 m eller mere.
Teknisk note:
Ved 'fartøj med lille vandplanareal' forstås et fartøj, hvor vandplanarealet ved en operativ konstruktionsdybgang er mindre end 2 x (deplacementet ved denne operative konstruktionsdybgang)
2/3
.
DEL XI –
Kategori 9
KATEGORI 9 - RUMFART OG FREMDRIFT
9A   
Systemer, udstyr og komponenter
N.B.
Med hensyn til fremdrivningssystemer, der er konstrueret eller normeret til beskyttelse mod neutronstråling eller ioniserende stråling, HENVISES TIL KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
9A001
Gasturbinemotorer til fly med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A101.
a.
Omfatter en eller flere af de "teknologier", der er specificeret i 9E003.a., 9E003.h. eller 9E003.i. 
eller
Note 1:
9A001.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på gasturbinemotorer til fly, som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Godkendt af de civile luftfartsmyndigheder i en eller flere EU-medlemsstater eller stater, der deltager i Wassenaararrangementet, 
og
b.
Beregnet til at drive et ikkemilitært bemandet "fly", for hvilket der af de civile luftfartsmyndigheder i en eller flere EU-medlemsstater eller stater, der deltager i Wassenaararrangementet, er udstedt et eller flere af følgende dokumenter for "fly" med denne særlige motortype:
1.
En civil typegodkendelse 
eller
2.
Et tilsvarende dokument, der er anerkendt af Organisationen for International Civil Luftfart (ICAO).
Note 2:
9A001.a. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på gasturbinemotorer til fly, som er beregnet til hjælpemotorer (APU'er), som er godkendt af de civile luftfartsmyndigheder i en EU-medlemsstat eller stater, der deltager i Wassenaararrangementet.
b.
Konstrueret til at forsyne et "fly" med drivkraft til en marchhastighed på mindst Mach 1 i mere end 30 minutter.
9A002
'Marinegasturbinemotorer', der er konstrueret til at drives med flydende brændstof og har samtlige følgende egenskaber, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
a.
Maksimal kontinuerlig effekt ved "stationær" drift under standardreferencebetingelser, specificeret i ISO 3977-2:1997 (eller tilsvarende nationalt plan), på mindst 24 245 kW 
og
b.
'Korrigeret specifikt brændstofforbrug' på højst 0,219 kg/kWh ved 35 % af maksimal kontinuerlig effekt ved brug af flydende brændstof.
Note:
Udtrykket 'marinegasturbinemotorer' omfatter industrigasturbinemotorer og flyafledede gasturbinemotorer, som er tilpasset til elproduktion om bord på skibe eller til fremdrift af skibe.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 9A002 er 'korrigeret specifikt brændstofforbrug' maskinens specifikke brændstofforbrug korrigeret til et flydende skibsdestillat med en effektiv brændværdi (dvs. nettobrændværdi) på 42MJ/kg (ISO 3977-2:1997).
9A003
Specielt konstruerede samlinger eller komponenter, der omfatter en eller flere af de "teknologier", der er specificeret i 9E003.a, 9E003.h eller 9E003.i, til en eller flere af følgende gasturbinemotorer:
a.
Specificeret i 9A001 
eller
b.
Med oprindelse hvad angår konstruktion eller produktion enten i en ikke-EU-medlemsstat eller en stat, der ikke deltager i Wassenaararrangementet, eller som er ukendt for producenten.
9A004
Løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, "rumfartøjer", "rumfærger", "rumfartøjers nyttelast" samt "rumfartøjers" systemer eller udstyr om bord og på jorden samt affyringsramper som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A104.
a.
Løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer
b.
"Rumfartøjer"
c.
"Rumfærger"
d.
"Rumfartøjers nyttelast", der omfatter produkter, der er specificeret i 3A001.b.1.a.4., 3A002.g., 5A001.a.1., 5A001.b.3., 5A002.c., 5A002.e., 6A002.a.1., 6A002.a.2., 6A002.b., 6A002.d., 6A003.b., 6A004.c., 6A004.e., 6A008.d., 6A008.e., 6A008.k., 6A008.l. eller 9A010.c.
e.
Systemer eller udstyr om bord, der er specielt konstrueret til "rumfartøjer", med en eller flere af følgende funktioner:
1.
'Håndtering af kommando- og telemetridata'
Note:
I 9A004.e.1. omfatter 'håndtering af kommando- og telemetridata' bl.a. styring, lagring og behandling af busdata.
2.
'Håndtering af nyttelast-data' 
eller
Note:
I 9A004.e.2. omfatter 'håndtering af nyttelast-data' bl.a. styring, lagring og behandling af nyttelast-data.
3.
'Stillings- og banestyring'
Note:
I 9A004.e.3. omfatter 'stillings- og banestyring' bl.a. føler- og udløsningsfunktioner med henblik på at bestemme og styre et "rumfartøjs" position og retning.
N.B.
For udstyr, der er specifikt konstrueret til militær anvendelse, SE KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER MED MILITÆRE FORMÅL. 9A004 fortsat
f.
Landbaseret udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til "rumfartøjer", som følger:
1.
Telemetri- og fjernbetjeningsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til en eller flere af følgende databehandlingsfunktioner:
a.
Telemetridatabehandling af billedsynkronisering og fejlkorrigering for overvågning af "rumfærgens" driftsstatus (også kaldet sundheds- og sikkerhedsstatus) 
eller
b.
Kommandodatabehandling til formatering af kommandodata, der sendes til "rumfartøjet" med henblik på at kontrollere "rumfærgen".
2.
Simulatorer, der er specielt konstrueret til 'verificering af driftsprocedurer' for "rumfartøjer".
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 9A004.f.2. er 'verificering af driftsprocedurer' én af følgende:
1.
Bekræftelse af kommandosekvens
2.
Operativ uddannelse
3.
Operative øvelser 
eller
4.
Operativ analyse.
g.
"Fly", der er særligt konstrueret eller modificeret til at fungere som affyringsramper for løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer
h.
"Suborbitale fartøjer".
9A005
Raketfremdrivningssystemer med flydende brændstof, indeholdende komponenter eller systemer, der er specificeret i 9A006.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A105 OG 9A119.
9A006
Følgende systemer og komponenter, specielt konstrueret til raketfremdrivningssystemer med flydende brændstof:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A106, 9A108 OG 9A120.
a.
Kryogeniske kølere, letvægts-Dewartanke, kryogeniske varmerør eller kryogeniske systemer, der er specielt konstrueret til brug i rumfartøjer og i stand til at begrænse kryogeniske væsketab til mindre end 30 % om året
b.
Kryogeniske tanke eller kølesystemer med lukket kredsløb, der er i stand til at skabe temperaturer på 100 K (-173 °C) eller lavere til "fly", der er i stand til at gennemføre længere flyvninger ved hastigheder over Mach 3, løftefartøjer eller "rumfartøjer"
c.
Overførings- eller opbevaringssystemer til slush hydrogen
d.
Højtryksturbopumper (over 17,5 MPa), pumpekomponenter eller dertilhørende drivsystemer med gasgenerator eller ekspansionsturbine
e.
Højtrykstrykkamre (over 10,6 MPa) og dyser hertil
f.
Lagringssystemer til fremdrivningsmiddel, der anvender kapillær opbevaring eller positiv uddrivning (f.eks. med fleksible blærer)
g.
Injektorer af flydende brændstof med individuelle åbninger på 0,381 mm eller derunder i diameter (for ikkecirkulære åbninger på højst 1,14 x 10
-3
 cm
2
), og som er specielt konstrueret til raketmotorer til flydende brændstof
h.
Ud-i-ét-carbon-carbon-trykkamre eller ud-i-ét-carbon-carbon-udgangskonuser med tæthed på mere end 1,4 g/cm
3
 og brudstyrke på mere end 48 MPa.
9A007
Raketfremdrivningssystemer med fast brændstof med en eller flere af følgende:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A107 OG 9A119.
a.
Total impulseffekt over 1,1 MNs
b.
Specifik impuls på 2,4 kNs/kg eller mere, når dysestrømmen udvides til forholdene ved havoverfladen for et justeret kammertryk på 7 MPa
c.
Masseandele pr. trin over 88 % og fastbrændstoflast over 86 %
d.
Komponenter, der er specificeret i 9A008, 
eller
e.
Isolerings- eller bondingsystemer til brændstoffer, der bruger direkte bondede motorkonstruktioner for at opnå en 'stærk mekanisk samling' eller en barriere mod kemisk vandring mellem det faste brændstof og beholderens isolationsmateriale.
Teknisk note:
Ved 'stærk mekanisk samling' forstås en styrke lig med eller mere end fremdrivningsmidlets styrke.
9A008
Komponenter, der er specielt konstrueret til raketfremdrivningssystemer med fast brændstof, som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A108.
a.
Bondingsystemer til isolering og brændstoffer (Insulation and propellant bonding systems), der bruger foringer til at opnå en 'stærk mekanisk samling' eller en barriere mod kemisk vandring mellem det faste brændstof og beholderens isolationsmateriale
Teknisk note:
Ved 'stærk mekanisk samling' forstås en styrke lig med eller mere end fremdrivningsmidlets styrke.
b.
Filamentvundne "kompositte" motorhuse med en diameter på mere end 0,61 m eller med 'strukturelle effektivitetsforhold (PV/W)' på mere end 25 km
Teknisk note:
'Det strukturelle effektivitetsforhold (PV/W)' er sprængningstrykket (P) multipliceret med beholdervolumen (V) divideret med trykbeholderens totalvægt (W).
c.
Dyser med trykniveauer på mere end 45 kN eller erosionshastighed i dysehalsen på mindre end 0,075 mm/s
d.
Bevægelige dyser eller trykvektorkontrolsystemer med sekundær væskeinjektion, der er i stand til:
1.
Omniaksial bevægelse på mere end ± 5°
2.
Vinkelvektorrotation på mindst 20°/s 
eller
3.
Vinkelvektoraccelerationer på mindst 40°/s
2
.
9A009
Hybride raketfremdrivningssystemer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A109 OG 9A119.
a.
Total impulseffekt over 1,1 MNs 
eller
b.
Trykniveauer på mere end 220 kN ved afgang under vakuumbetingelser.
9A010
Følgende specielt konstruerede komponenter, systemer eller strukturer til løftefartøjer, fremdrivningssystemer til løftefartøjer eller "rumfartøjer":
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1A002 OG 9A110.
a.
Komponenter og strukturer, der hver især vejer mere end 10 kg, og som er specielt konstrueret til løftefartøjer og fremstillet ved brug af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
"Kompositte" materialer, der består af "fiber- eller trådmaterialer" som specificeret i 1C010.e. og harpikser som specificeret i 1C008 eller 1C009.b.
2.
Metal"matrix"-"kompositter", som er forstærket med en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Materialer, der er specificeret i 1C007
b.
"Fiber- og trådmaterialer", der er specificeret i 1C010, 
eller
c.
Aluminider, der er specificeret i 1C002.a. 
eller
3.
Keramisk"matrix"-"kompositter", der er specificeret i 1C007.
Note:
Vægtgrænsen gælder ikke for konusspidser.
b.
Komponenter og strukturer, der er specielt konstrueret til fremdrivningssystemer til løftefartøjer, som er specificeret i 9A005-9A009, og som er fremstillet ved brug af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
"Fiber- eller trådmaterialer" som specificeret i 1C010.e. og harpikser som specificeret i 1C008 eller 1C009.b.
2.
Metal"matrix"-"kompositter", som er forstærket med en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Materialer, der er specificeret i 1C007
b.
"Fiber- og trådmaterialer", der er specificeret i 1C010, 
eller
c.
Aluminider, der er specificeret i 1C002.a. 
eller
3.
Keramisk"matrix"-"kompositter", der er specificeret i 1C007.
c.
Strukturkomponenter og isolationssystemer, som er specielt konstrueret til aktiv kontrol af "rumfartøjs" strukturers dynamiske reaktion eller formændring
d.
Pulsmotorer til raketter med flydende brændstof, med et forhold mellem løfteevne og vægt på mere end 1 kN/kg og 'reaktionstid' på mindre end 30 ms.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse medf 9A010.d er 'reaktionstid' den tid, det tager at opnå 90 % af den samlede normerede løfteevne fra opstarttidspunktet.
9A011
Ramjet, scramjet eller 'motorer med kombineret cyklus' og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A111 OG 9A118.
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 9A011 kombinerer 'motorer med kombineret cyklus' to eller flere af følgende motortyper:
—
gasturbinemotor (turbojet, turboprop og turbofan)
ramjet eller scramjet
raketmotor (drivstof i flydende form/gelform/fast form og hybrid).
9A012
"Ubemandede luftfartøjer" ("UAV"), ubemandede "luftskibe" samt følgende udstyr og komponenter i tilknytning hertil:
N.B.1
JF. LIGELEDES 9A112.
N.B.2
For så vidt angår "UAV'er", som er "suborbitale fartøjer", henvises til 9A004.h.
a.
"UAV" eller ubemandede "luftskibe" konstrueret med henblik på kontrolleret flyvning uden for 'operatørens' direkte 'naturlige synsfelt' og med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Med samtlige følgende:
a.
Maksimal 'flyvetid' på 30 minutter eller derover, men under 1 time 
og
b.
Konstrueret til start og stabil, kontrolleret flyvning ved vindstød på 46,3 km/t. (25 knob) eller derover 
eller
2.
Maksimal 'flyvetid' på 1 time eller derover
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 9A012.a er en 'operatør' en person, der initierer eller forestår flyvningen med "UAV"'en eller det ubemandede "luftskib".
2.
I 9A012.a skal 'flyvetid' beregnes under ISA-betingelser (ISA - International Standard Atmosphere) (ISO 2533:1975) ved havoverfladeniveau og vindstille.
3.
I 9A012.a forstås ved 'naturligt synsfelt' det ustøttede menneskelige syn, med eller uden korrigerende linser.
b.
Følgende udstyr og komponenter i tilknytning hertil:
1.
Ikke anvendt
2.
Ikke anvendt
3.
Udstyr og komponenter specielt konstrueret til at omdanne et bemandet "fly" eller et bemandet "luftskib" til et "UAV" eller et ubemandet "luftskib" som specificeret i 9A012.a.
4.
Atmosfærisk stempel- eller turbineforbrændingsmotorer, som er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til fremdrift af "UAV" eller ubemandede "luftskibe" i over 15 240 meters (50 000 fods) højde.
9A101
Følgende turbojet- og turbofanmotorer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A001:
a.
Motorer, der har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Maksimalt tryk' på mere end 400 N, undtagen civilt certificerede motorer med et 'maksimalt tryk' på mere end 8 890 N
2.
Specifikt brændstofforbrug på højst 0,15 kg N
-1
 h
-1
3.
'Tørvægt' på under 750 kg 
og
4.
'Førstetrins rotordiameter' på under 1 m.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I forbindelse med 9A101.a.1. er 'maksimalt tryk' det af fabrikanten påviste maksimale tryk for motortypen uinstalleret målt statisk ved havoverfladeniveau og ICAO-standardatmosfære. Trykket for civilt certificerede motorer er lig med eller mindre end det tryk, som fabrikanten har påvist for motortypen uinstalleret.
2.
Specifikt brændstofforbrug bestemmes ved det maksimale kontinuerlige tryk for motortypen uinstalleret målt statisk ved havoverfladeniveau ved og ICAO-standardatmosfære.
3.
'Tørvægt' er maskinens vægt uden væsker (brændstof, hydraulikvæske, olie, mv.) ligesom det heller ikke omfatter gondolen (kabinettet).
4.
'Førstetrins rotordiameter' er diameteren på maskinens første roteringstrin, hvad enten det er ventilator eller kompressor, målt ved forkanten af bladspidserne.
b.
Motorer, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til brug i "missiler" eller de ubemandede luftfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a.
9A102
'Turbopropmotorsystemer', der er specielt konstrueret til de ubemandede luftfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a., og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil, med en 'maksimal effekt' på over 10 kW.
Note:
9A102 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på civilt certificerede motorer.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 9A102 forstås ved 'turbopropmotorsystemer' systemer, som indeholder samtlige følgende:
a.
Turboakselmotor 
og
b.
Effekttransmissionssystem til overførsel af effekt til en propel.
2.
I 9A102 forstås ved 'maksimal effekt' den effekt, der opnås uinstalleret ved havoverfladeniveau og ICAO-standardatmosfære.
9A104
Raketsonder med en rækkevidde på mindst 300 km.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A004.
9A105
Følgende raketmotorer med flydende drivstof eller raketmotorer med drivstof i gelform:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A119.
a.
Raketmotorer med flydende drivstof eller raketmotorer med drivstof i gelform, anvendelige i "missiler", ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A005, som er integreret eller beregnet til at kunne integreres i et fremdrivningssystem med flydende brændstof eller brændstof i gelform med en total impulskapacitet på 1,1 MNs eller derover
b.
Raketmotorer med flydende drivstof eller raketmotorer med drivstof i gelform, anvendelige i komplette raketsystemer eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, med en rækkevidde på 300 km, ud over dem, som er specificeret i 9A005 eller 9A105.a., som er integreret eller beregnet til at kunne integreres i et fremdrivningssystem med flydende brændstof eller brændstof i gelform med en total impulskapacitet på 0,841 MNs eller derover.
9A106
Følgende systemer eller komponenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A006, og specielt konstrueret til raketfremdrivningssystemer med flydende brændstof eller raketsystemer med brændstof i gelform:
a.
Ikke anvendt
b.
Ikke anvendt
c.
Undersystemer til trykvektorstyring, anvendelige i "missiler"
Teknisk note:
Eksempler på metoder til opnåelse af trykvektorstyring, som er specificeret i 9A106.c., er:
1.
Bøjelig dyse
2.
Indsprøjtning af væske eller sekundær gas
3.
Bevægelig motor eller dyse
4.
Afbøjning af udblæsningsgasstrømmen (jetfinner eller sonder) 
eller
5.
Brug af trykklapper.
d.
Kontrolsystemer til drivstoffer i flydende form eller som slurry eller gel (herunder iltningsmidler), og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil, anvendelige i "missiler", konstrueret eller modificeret til drift i vibrationsmiljøer på mere end 10 g rms mellem 20 Hz og 2 kHz.
Note:
De eneste servoventiler, pumper og gasturbiner, der er specificeret i 9A106.d, er følgende:
a.
Servoventiler, der er konstrueret til flowhastigheder på 24 l pr minut eller derover, ved et absolut tryk på 7 MPa eller derover, og som har en aktivatorresponstid på mindre end 100 ms
b.
Pumper til flydende drivstoffer med akselhastigheder lig med eller større end 8 000 o/min. ved drift med maksimal belastning eller med afgangstryk lig med eller større end 7 MPa
c.
Gasturbiner til turbopumper med flydende brændstof, med akselhastigheder lig med eller større end 8 000 o/min. ved drift med maksimal belastning.
e.
Forbrændingskamre og dyser til raketmotorer med flydende drivstof eller raketmotorer med drivstof i gelform, der er specifiret i 9A005 eller 9A105.
9A107
Raketmotorer med fast brændstof, anvendelige i komplette raketsystemer eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, med en rækkevidde på 300 km, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A007, med en total impulskapacitet på 0,841 MNs eller derover.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A119.
9A108
Følgende komponenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A008, specielt konstrueret til raketfremdrivningssystemer med fast brændstof og hybride raketfremdrivningssystemer:
a.
Raketmotorhuse og komponenter til "isolering" hertil, anvendelige i undersystemer som specificeret i 9A007, 9A009, 9A107 eller 9A109.a
b.
Raketdyser, anvendelige i undersystemer som specificeret i 9A007, 9A009, 9A107 eller 9A109.a
c.
Undersystemer til trykvektorstyring, anvendelige i "missiler".
Teknisk note:
Eksempler på metoder til opnåelse af trykvektorstyring, som er specificeret i 9A108.c., er:
1.
Bøjelig dyse
2.
Indsprøjtning af væske eller sekundær gas
3.
Bevægelig motor eller dyse
4.
Afbøjning af udblæsningsgasstrømmen (jetfinner eller sonder) 
eller
5.
Brug af trykklapper.
9A109
Hybride raketmotorer og specielt konstruerede komponenter som følger:
a.
Hybride raketmotorer, der kan anvendes i komplette raketsystemer eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, med en rækkevidde på 300 km, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A009, med en total impulskapacitet på 0,841 MNs eller derover, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil
b.
Specielt konstruerede komponenter til hybride raketmotorer som specificeret i 9A009, som kan anvendes i "missiler".
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A009 OG 9A119.
9A110
Kompositkonstruktioner, laminater og produkter heraf ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A010, specielt konstrueret til brug i 'missiler' eller undersystemerne som specificeret i 9A005, 9A007, 9A105, 9A106.c., 9A107, 9A108.c., 9A116 eller 9A119.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1A002.
Teknisk note:
I 9A110 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
9A111
Impulsjetmotorer eller detonationsmotorer, anvendelige i "missiler" eller ubemandede luftfartøjer som specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a, og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A011 OG 9A118.
Teknisk note:
De i 9A111 omhandlede detonationsmotorer anvender detonation til at frembringe en stigning i det effektive tryk på tværs af forbrændingskammeret. Detonationsmotorer omfatter eksempelvis pulsdetonationsmotorer, roterende detonationsmotorer og detonationsmotorer med kontinuerlig bølge.
9A112
"Ubemandede luftfartøjer" ("UAV'er"), ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A012, som følger:
a.
"Ubemandede luftfartøjer" ("UAV'er") med en rækkevidde på 300 km
b.
"Ubemandede luftfartøjer" ("UAV'er") med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Med en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Selvstændig flykontrol- og navigationsfunktion 
eller
b.
Funktion for kontrolleret flyvning uden for det direkte synsfelt ved hjælp af en menneskelig operatør 
og
2.
Med en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Et/en aerosol-genererende system/mekanisme med en kapacitet på over 20 l 
eller
b.
Konstrueret eller modificeret til at indbefatte et/en aerosol-genererende system/mekanisme med en kapacitet på over 20 l
Tekniske noter:
1.
En aerosol består af partikler eller væsker, som ikke er brændstofkomponenter, biprodukter eller tilsætningsstoffer, og udgør en del af den nyttelast, der skal spredes i luften. Aerosoler omfatter f.eks. sprøjtemidler til sprøjtning af afgrøder og tørre kemikalier til skypodning.
2.
Et/en aerosol-genererende system/mekanisme skal indeholde alle de anordninger (mekaniske, elektriske, hydrauliske osv.), som er nødvendige for at opbevare en aerosol og sprede den i luften. Muligheden for indsprøjtning af en aerosol i udstødningsgassen og ind i slipstrømmen fra propellen er også omfattet.
9A115
Følgende opsendelsesudstyr:
a.
Apparater og indretninger til håndtering, styring, aktivering eller opsendelse, som er konstrueret eller modificeret til løftefartøjer for rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004, raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104 eller 'missiler'
Teknisk note:
I 9A115.a. forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
b.
Medier til transport, håndtering, styring, aktivering eller opsendelse, som er konstrueret eller modificeret til løftefartøjer for rumfartøjer som specificeret i 9A004, raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104 eller "missiler".
9A116
Reentry vehicles, anvendelige i "missiler", og udstyr der er konstrueret eller modificeret hertil, som følger:
a.
Reentry vehicles
b.
Varmeskjolde og komponenter hertil, som er fremstillet af keramiske eller ablative materialer
c.
Køleflader og komponenter hertil, som er fremstillet af lette materialer med stor varmekapacitet (varmefylde)
d.
Elektronisk udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til reentry vehicles.
9A117
Rakettrinmekanismer, adskillelsesmekanismer og mellemtrin, som kan anvendes i "missiler". NB
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9A121.
9A118
Indretninger til forbrændingsregulering, anvendelige i motorer, der kan anvendes i "missiler" eller ubemandede luftfartøjer som specificeret i 9A012 eller 9A112.a., og som er specificeret i 9A011 eller 9A111.
9A119
Individuelle rakettrin, anvendelige i komplette raketsystemer eller ubemandede luftfartøjer med en rækkevidde på 300 km, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A005, 9A007, 9A009, 9A105, 9A107 og 9A109.
9A120
Tanke til flydende drivstoffer eller drivstoffer i gelform ud over tanke, der er specificeret i 9A006, som er specielt konstrueret til drivstoffer specificeret i 1C111 eller andre 'flydende drivstoffer eller drivstoffer i gelform', der anvendes i raketsystemer som kan transportere en nyttelast på mindst 500 kg over en afstand af mindst 300 km.
Note:
I 9A120 omfatter 'andre flydende drivstoffer eller drivstoffer i gelform' bl.a. men ikke udelukkende drivstoffer, der er specificeret i KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
9A121
Elektriske forbindelses- og elektriske mellemtrinskonnektorer, der er specielt udviklet til "missiler", løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, som er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, som er specificeret i 9A104.
Teknisk note:
Mellemtrinskonnektorer i 9A121 omfatter også elektriske konnektorer installeret mellem "missilet", løftefartøjet til rumfartøjer eller raketsonden og deres nyttelast.
9A350
Spray- eller tågesystemer, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til installation på fly, "fartøjer, der er lettere end luften" eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil som følger:
a.
Komplette spray- eller tågesystemer, der ud fra en flydende suspension kan producere initiale dråber 'VMD' på under 50 μm ved en flowhastighed på mere end to liter i minuttet
b.
Sprayanordninger eller kombinationer af aerosolgenererende enheder, der ud fra en flydende suspension kan producere initiale dråber med en 'VMD' på under 50 μm ved en flowhastighed på mere end to liter i minuttet
c.
Aerosolgenererende enheder, der er specielt konstrueret til installation i de systemer, der er specificeret i 9A350.a. og b.
Note:
Aerosolgenererende enheder er anordninger, der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til installation på fly, f.eks. dyser, roterende tromleforstøvere og tilsvarende anordninger.
Note:
9A350 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på spray- eller tågesystemer samt komponenter hertil, som påviseligt ikke kan sprede biologiske agenser i form af infektiøse aerosoler.
Tekniske noter:
1.
Dråbestørrelsen for sprayudstyr eller dyser, der er specielt konstrueret til brug på fly, "fartøjer, der er lettere end luften" eller ubemandede luftfartøjer måles efter en af følgende metoder:
a.
Dopplerlasermetoden
b.
Forwardlaserdiffraktionsmetoden.
2.
I 9A350 er 'VMD' volumenmediandiameter, og for vandbaserede systemer svarer dette til massemediandiameter (MMD).
9B   
Prøve-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr
9B001
Produktionsudstyr, -værktøjer eller -tilbehør som følger:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 2B226
a.
Støbeudstyr med retningsbestemt eller enkeltkrystalstørkning, der er konstrueret til "superlegeringer"
b.
Støbeværktøj, som er specielt konstrueret til produktion af gasturbinemotorblade, skovle eller "bladspidskapper", og som er fremstillet af tungtsmeltelige metaller eller keramiske materialer som følger:
1.
Kerner
2.
Kapper (forme)
3.
Kombinerede kerne- og kappe- (form-)enheder.
c.
Udstyr til fremstilling af additiver med retningsbestemt størkning eller enkeltkrystalstørkning, som er specielt konstrueret til produktion af gasturbinemotorblade, skovle eller "bladspidskapper".
9B002
Online (tidstro) styresystemer, instrumentering (inklusive sensorer) eller automatisk dataindsamlings- og behandlingsudstyr med alle følgende egenskaber:
a.
Specielt konstrueret til "udvikling" af gasturbinemotorer, samlinger eller komponenter 
og
b.
Omfatter "teknologi", der er specificeret i 9E003.h. eller 9E003.i.
9B003
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til "produktion" eller afprøvning af gasturbinebørstepakninger, der er beregnet til at operere ved tiphastigheder på over 335 m/s og temperaturer på mere end 773 K (500 °C), samt specielt konstruerede komponenter og tilbehør hertil.
9B004
Værktøj, forme og tilbehør til faststofsamling af gasturbinekomponenter af "superlegeringer", titan eller intermetalliske kombinationer af blad/skive som anført i 9E003.a.3. eller 9E003.a.6.
9B005
Online (tidstro) kontrolsystemer, instrumentering (inklusive sensorer) eller automatisk dataindsamlings- og databehandlingsudstyr, specielt konstrueret til brug i forbindelse med følgende:
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9B105.
a.
Vindtunneler konstrueret til hastigheder på mindst Mach 1,2
Note:
9B005.a lægger ikke eksportkontrol på vindtunneler, der er specielt konstrueret til undervisningsbrug og har et 'afprøvningstværsnit' (målt over siden) på mindre end 250 mm
Teknisk note:
Ved 'afprøvningstværsnit' forstås diameteren af cirklen eller siden af kvadratet eller den længste side af rektanglet, målt ved det største afprøvningstværsnit.
b.
Indretninger til simulering af strømningsforhold ved hastigheder på mere end Mach 5, inklusive hotshottunneler, plasmabuetunneler, chokroer, choktunneler, gastunneler og letgaskanoner 
eller
c.
Vindtunneler og indretninger, ud over todimensionelle sektioner, i stand til at simulere strømninger med et Reynoldstal på over 25 x 10
6
.
9B006
Akustisk vibrationsprøveudstyr, der er i stand til at generere lydtrykniveauer på mindst 160 dB (reference til 20 μΡa) med en nominel effekt på mindst 4 kW ved en prøvecelletemperatur på mere end 1 273 K (1 000 °C), og specielt konstruerede kvartsvarmere hertil.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9B106.
9B007
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til inspektion af raketmotorers integritet, og som anvender ikkedestruktiv prøvnings-(NDT)teknik ud over plan røntgenundersøgelse eller basal fysisk eller kemisk analyse.
9B008
Transducere til direkte måling af friktion på beklædningsoverfladen, der er specielt konstrueret til drift ved en samlet temperatur (ligevægtstemperatur) på mere end 833 K (560 °C).
9B009
Værktøj, der er specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af pulvermetallurgirotorkomponenter til gasturbinemotorer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Konstrueret til at operere ved spændingsniveauer på mindst 60 % af trækbrudspænding (UTS) målt ved en temperatur på 873 K (600 °C); 
og
b.
Konstrueret til at operere ved mindst 873 K (600 °C).
Note:
9B009 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på værktøj til fremstilling af pulver.
9B010
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til fremstilling af produkter som specificeret i 9A012.
9B105
'Aerodynamiske testanlæg' til hastigheder på mindst Mach 0,9, anvendelige til 'missiler' og deres undersystemer.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 9B005.
Note:
9B105 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på vindtunneler til hastigheder på Mach 3 eller derunder, hvor 'afprøvningstværsnittet' er lig med eller mindre end 250 mm.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I 9B105 omfatter 'aerodynamiske testanlæg' vindtunneler og choktunneler til undersøgelse af luftstrømme over genstande.
2.
I noten til 9B105 forstås ved 'afprøvningstværsnit' diameteren af cirklen eller siden af kvadratet eller den længste side af rektanglet, eller den største akse i ellipsen, målt ved det største 'afprøvningstværsnit'. 'Afprøvningstværsnittet' er det vinkelrette snit i forhold til flowretningen.
3.
I 9B105 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
9B106
Miljøkamre eller lyddøde rum som følger:
a.
Miljøkamre med samtlige af følgende egenskaber:
1.
I stand til at simulere en eller flere af følgende flyvebetingelser
a.
Højde på mindst 15 km 
eller
b.
Temperaturområde fra under 223 K (-50 °C) til over 398 K (125 °C) 
og
2.
Indeholder eller er 'konstrueret eller modificeret' til at indeholde en rysteenhed eller andet vibrationsprøveudstyr, som producerer vibrationsmiljøer på mindst 10 g rms, målt på 'tomt vibrationsbord', mellem 20 Hz og 2 kHz, mens der overføres kræfter på mindst 5 kN
Tekniske noter:
1.
9B106.a.2. omhandler systemer, der er i stand til at frembringe et vibrationsmiljø med en enkelt bølge (f.eks. en sinusbølge), og systemer, der er i stand til at frembringe en vilkårlig bredbåndsvibration (dvs. effektspektrum).
2.
I 9B106.a.2. forstås ved 'konstrueret eller modificeret', at miljøkammeret har passende grænseflader (f.eks. forseglingsanordninger) til at indeholde en rysteenhed eller andet vibrationsprøveudstyr, som specificeret i 2B116.
3.
I 9B106.a.2. forstås ved 'tomt vibrationsbord' et plant bord eller en plan flade uden nogen form for stativ eller beslag.
b.
Miljøkamre, der er i stand til at simulere samtlige følgende flyvebetingelser:
1.
Akustiske miljøer med et totalt lydtryksniveau på mindst 140 dB (reference til 20 μΡa) eller med en specificeret udgangseffekt på mindst 4 kW 
og
2.
Højde på mindst 15 km 
eller
3.
Temperaturområde fra under 223 K (-50 °C) til over 398 K (125 °C).
9B107
'Aerodynamiske testanlæg', der er anvendelige til 'missiler', raketfremdrivningssystemer til 'missiler' og reentry vehicles og udstyr som specificeret i 9A116, der har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Strømforsyning på mindst 5 MW 
eller
b.
Samlet gasforsyningstryk på mindst 3 MPa.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Aerodynamiske testanlæg' omfatter plasmabuejetanlæg og plasmavindtunneler til undersøgelse af de termiske og mekaniske virkninger af luftstrømme over genstande.
2.
I 9B107 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
9B115
Specielt konstrueret "produktionsudstyr" til de systemer, undersystemer og komponenter, der er specificeret i 9A005-9A009, 9A011, 9A101, 9A102, 9A105-9A109, 9A111 eller 9A116-9A120.
9B116
Specielt konstruerede "produktionsfaciliteter" til de løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller til de systemer, undersystemer og komponenter, der er specificeret i 9A005-9A009, 9A011, 9A101, 9A102, 9A104-9A109, 9A111, 9A116-9A120 eller 'missiler'.
Teknisk note:
I 9B116 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
9B117
Prøvebænke eller prøvestande til raketter eller raketmotorer med fast eller flydende drivstof med en af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Kapacitet til at håndtere et tryk på mere end 68 kN eller
b.
I stand til samtidigt at måle de tre aksiale trykkomponenter.
9C   
Materialer
9C108
Materiale til "isolering" i bulkform og "indvendig foring" ud over, hvad der er specificeret i 9A008, til raketmotorhuse, der kan anvendes i "missiler" eller er specielt konstrueret til raketmotorer med fast brændstof som specificeret i 9A007 eller 9A107.
9C110
Harpiksimprægnerede fiberprepregs og metalbelagte fiberpreforms til kompositkonstruktioner, laminater og produkter heraf, som er specificeret i 9A110, fremstillet enten med organisk matrix eller metalmatrix ved brug af fiber- eller filamentforstærkninger med en "specifik trækstyrke" på mere end 7,62 x 10
4
 m og et "specifikt modul" på mere end 3,18 x 10
6
 m.
N.B.
JF. LIGELEDES 1C010 OG 1C210.
Note:
De eneste harpiksimprægnerede fiberprepregs, der er specificeret i 9C110, er dem, der indeholder harpikser med en glasomdannelsestemperatur (T
g
) efter hærdning på mere end 418 K (145 °C), bestemt ved ASTM D 4065 eller tilsvarende.
9D   
Software
9D001
"Software", der ikke er specificeret i 9D003 eller 9D004, og som er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling" af udstyr eller "teknologi", som specificeret i 9A001-9A119, 9B eller 9E003.
9D002
"Software", der ikke er specificeret i 9D003 eller 9D004, og som er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 9A001-9A119 eller 9B.
9D003
"Software", der omfatter "teknologi" som specificeret i 9E003.h., og som anvendes i "FADEC-systemer" til systemer som specificeret i 9A eller udstyr som specificeret i 9B.
9D004
Følgende anden "software":
a.
2D eller 3D viskos "software", der er valideret ved hjælp af prøvedata fra vindtunnel eller flyvninger, der kræves til detaljeret modellering af strømningsforholdene i motorer
b.
"Software" til afprøvning af flygasturbinemotorer, samlinger eller komponenter, som har samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specielt konstrueret til afprøvning af en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Gasturbinemotorer, samlinger eller komponenter, der omfatter den "teknologi", der er specificeret i 9E003.a., 9E003.h. eller 9E003.i. eller
b.
Flertrinskompressorer til strømning ved enten omledning eller de centrale dele, som er specielt konstrueret for gasturbinemotorer, der omfatter den "teknologi", der er specificeret i 9E003.a. eller 9E003.h. og
2.
Specielt konstrueret til samtlige følgende formål:
a.
Tidstro dataindsamling og -behandling og
b.
Feedbackkontrol af afprøvningsartiklen eller prøvningsbetingelserne (f.eks. temperatur, tryk, strømningshastighed), mens afprøvningen pågår
Note:
9D004.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på software til drift af afprøvningsanlægget eller operatørens sikkerhed (f.eks. standsning ved overhastighed, branddetektion og -slukning), eller leverenceprøvning af fremstilling, reparation eller vedligehold, der er begrænset til af fastslå, om produktet er blevet korrekt samlet eller repareret.
c.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til kontrol med retningsbestemt størkning eller dyrkning af enkeltkrystalmateriale i udstyr som specificeret i 9B001.a. eller 9B001.c.
d.
Ikke anvendt
e.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til drift af produkter som specificeret i 9A012.
f.
"Software" specielt beregnet til konstruktion af de interne kølepassager i flygasturbineblade, skovle og "bladspidskapper"
g.
"Software" med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Specielt beregnet til at forudsige aerotermiske, aeromekaniske og forbrændingsmæssige forhold i gasturbinemotorer til fly 
og
2.
Teoretiske modelleringsprognoser for de aerotermiske, aeromekaniske og forbrændingsmæssige forhold, der er valideret ved faktiske ydeevnedata for gasturbinemotorer til fly (forsøg eller produktion).
9D005
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til drift af produkter som specificeret i 9A004.e. eller 9A004.f.
N.B.
For "software" til produkter, der er opført under 9A004.d., og som indgår i "rumfartøjers nyttelast", henvises til de pågældende kategorier.
9D101
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 9B105, 9B106, 9B116 eller 9B117.
9D103
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til modellering, simulering eller konstruktionsmæssig integration af de løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, de raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104, eller "missiler" eller de undersystemer, der er specificeret i 9A005, 9A007, 9A105, 9A106.c., 9A107, 9A108.c., 9A116 eller 9A119.
Note:
"Software", der er specificeret i 9D103, forbliver under eksportkontrol, når det kombineres med specielt konstrueret hardware, der er specificeret i 4A102.
9D104
"Software" som følger:
a.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 9A001, 9A005, 9A006.d., 9A006.g., 9A007.a., 9A009.a., 9A010.d., 9A011, 9A101, 9A102, 9A105, 9A106.d., 9A107, 9A109, 9A111, 9A115.a., 9A117 eller 9A118.
b.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til drift eller vedligeholdelse af undersystemer og udstyr, der er specificeret i 9A008.d., 9A106.c., 9A108.c. eller 9A116.d.
9D105
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificeret til at koordinere et eller flere undersystemers funktion, ud over det i 9D004.e specificerede, i løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, eller raketsonder, der er specificeret i 9A104, eller 'missiler'.
Note:
9D105 omfatter "software", der er specielt konstrueret til bemandede "fly", der er blevet konverteret til at fungere som "ubemandet luftfartøj ", som følger:
a.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificieret til at integrere konverteringsudstyret i "flyets" systemfunktioner og
b.
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret eller modificieret til at få "flyet" til at fungere som et "ubemandet luftfartøj".
Teknisk note:
I 9D105 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
9E   
Teknologi
Note:
"Udviklings"- eller "produktions"-"teknologi" til gasturbiner, der er specificeret i 9E001-9E003, og som er pålagt eksportkontrol, forbliver under eksportkontrol, når den anvendes til reparation eller eftersyn. Undtaget fra eksportkontrol er: tekniske data, tegninger eller dokumentation til vedligeholdelsesaktiviteter, der er direkte forbundet med kalibrering, fjernelse eller udskiftning af beskadigede eller ubrugelige "line replaceable units", inklusive udskiftning af hele motorer eller motormoduler.
9E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 9A001.b, 9A004-9A012, 9A350, 9B eller 9D.
9E002
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 9A001.b, 9A004-9A011, 9A350 eller 9B.
N.B.
For så vidt angår "teknologi" til reparation af konstruktioner, laminater eller materialer, der er pålagt eksportkontrol, henvises til 1E002.f.
9E003
Følgende anden "teknologi":
a.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af følgende gasturbinemotorkomponenter eller systemer:
1.
Gasturbineblade, skovle eller "bladspidskapper" fremstillet af retningsbestemte størknede (DS) legeringer eller enkeltkrystallegeringer, og som (i Miller Index Direction 001) har en brudspændingslevetid på over 400 timer ved 1 273 K (1 000 °C) ved en belastning på 200 MPa baseret på gennemsnitsværdierne af egenskaberne
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 9E003.a.1 foretages brudspændingslevetidsafprøvning typisk på et prøveemne.
2.
Brændkamre med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
'Termisk adskilte foringer', der er beregnet til at operere ved en 'temperatur ved afgang fra brændkammeret' på over 1 883 K (1 610 °C)
b.
Ikkemetalliske foringer
c.
Ikkemetalliske kapper eller
d.
Foringer, der er beregnet til at operere ved en 'temperatur ved afgang fra brændkammeret' på over 1 883 K (1 610 °C), og som har huller, der opfylder parametrene i 9E003.c.
Note:
Den "teknologi", der "kræves" til huller i 9E003.a.2 er begrænset til en afledning af hullernes geometri og placering.
Tekniske noter:
1.
'Termisk adskilte foringer' er foringer med mindst en støttestruktur, der er konstrueret til at bære mekaniske belastninger, og en struktur, som vender ud til forbrændningen, og som er konstrueret til at beskytte bærestrukturen mod forbrændingsvarmen. Strukturen, der vender ud mod forbrændingen, og støttestrukturen har uafhængig termisk fortrængning (mekanisk fortrængning som følge af termisk belastning) i forhold til hinanden, dvs. de er termisk adskilte.
2.
'Temperatur ved afgang fra brændkammeret' er den samlede gennemsnitlige gasstrøms samlede temperatur (stagneringstemperaturer) mellem brændkammerets afgangsareal og forkanten på turbinens indgangsstyrefinner (altså målt på motorstation T40 som defineret i SAE ARP 755A), med motoren kørende i "stationær" drift ved den certificerede maksimale kontinuerlige driftstemperatur.
N.B.
For "teknologi", som "kræves" til fremstilling af afkølingshuller, henvises til 9E003.c.
3.
Komponenter med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
a.
Fremstillet af organiske "kompositte" materialer, der er beregnet til drift over 588 K (315 °C)
b.
Fremstillet af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Metal"matrix"-"kompositter", som er forstærket med en eller flere af følgende:
a.
Materialer, der er specificeret i 1C007
b.
"Fiber- og trådmaterialer", der er specificeret i 1C010, 
eller
c.
Aluminider, der er specificeret i 1C002.a. 
eller
2.
Keramisk"matrix"-"kompositter", der er specificeret i 1C007, 
eller
c.
Statorer, skovle, blade, bladspidskapper, rotorende blings (blade rings), roterende blisks (blade disks) eller 'splitter ducts' med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Ikke specificeret i 9E003.a.3.a.
2.
Udviklet til kompressorer eller turbiner 
og
3.
Fremstillet af materialer som specificeret i 1C010.e. med harpikser som specificeret i 1C008
Teknisk note:
En 'splitter duct' foretager den første fordeling af luftmassestrømmen mellem bypasset og de centrale dele af motoren.
4.
Ikkekølede turbineblade, skovle eller "bladspidskapper", som er beregnet til drift ved en 'gasstrømstotaltemperatur' på 1 373 K (1 100 °C) eller mere
5.
Kølede turbineblade, skovle eller "bladspidskapper", ud over de i 9E003.a.1 beskrevne, som er beregnet til drift ved 'gasstrømstotaltemperaturer' på 1 693 K (1 420 °C) eller mere
Teknisk note:
'Gasstrømstotaltemperaturer' er den samlede gennemsnitlige gasstrømstemperatur (stagneringstemperatur) på forkanten på turbinekomponenten, når motoren er i "stationær" drift med den certificerede eller specificerede maksimale kontinuerlige driftstemperatur.
6.
Kombinationer af blad/skive med faststofsammenføjning
7.
Ikke anvendt
8.
Rotorkomponenter til 'beskadigelsestolerante' gasturbinemotorer, der er fremstillet af pulvermetallurgimaterialer, der er specificeret i 1C002.b. 
eller
Teknisk note:
'Beskadigelsestolerante' komponenter er konstrueret ved brug af metoder og dokumentation, der gør det muligt at forudsige og begrænse revnevækst.
9.
Ikke anvendt
10.
Ikke anvendt
11.
'Turbineblade' med samtlige af følgende egenskaber:
a.
20 % eller derover af den samlede masse er et eller flere lukkede hulrum, kun indeholdende vakuum eller luftarter, 
og
b.
Et eller flere lukkede hulrum har en volumen på mindst 5 cm
3
Teknisk note:
I forbindelse med 9E003.a.11. er et 'turbineblad' den del af bladet i roteringstrinnet/-trinnene, der giver både kompressor- og omledningsstrømning i en gasturbinemotor.
b.
"Teknologi", som "kræves" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af en eller flere af følgende:
1.
Aeromodeller til vindtunneler udstyret med ikke-intrusive sensorer, der er i stand til at overføre data fra sensorerne til dataindsamlingssystemet, 
eller
2.
"Kompositte" propelblade eller propfans, der er i stand til at optage mere end 2 000 kW ved flyvehastigheder på over Mach 0,55
c.
"Teknologi" som "kræves" til fremstilling af afkølingshuller, i gasturbinemotorkomponenter, som omfatter en af de "teknologier", som er specificeret i 9E003.a.1, 9E003.a.2 eller 9E003.a.5, og som har en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Et 'tværsnitareal' på mindre end 0,45 mm
2
b.
'Hul-form-forhold' på over 4,52 
og
c.
'Indfaldsvinkler' lig med eller mindre end 25 ° 
eller
2.
Med samtlige følgende:
a.
Et 'tværsnitareal' på mindre end 0,12 mm
2
b.
'Hul-form-forhold' på over 5,65 
og
c.
'Indfaldsvinkler' på mere end 25 °
Note:
9E003.c lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til fremstilling af cylindriske huller med konstant radius, som er straight through og går ud og ind på komponentens ydre overflader.
Tekniske noter:
1.
I forbindelse med 9E003.c forstås ved 'tværsnitsareal' hularealet det plan, der er vinkelret på hulaksen.
2.
I forbindelse med 9E003.c forstås ved 'hul-form-forhold' den nominelle længde af hullets akse divideret med kvadratroden af dets mindste 'tværsnitsareal'.
3.
I forbindelse med 9E003.c måles 'indfaldsvinkel' som den spidse vinkel mellem det plan, der er tangent til turbinebladets overflade og hulaksen i det punkt, hvor hulaksen skærer bladets overflade.
4.
Metoder til fremstilling af huller i 9E003.c omfatter brug af "laser", skæremaskine, vandstråler, ECM (elektrokemisk bearbejdning) og EDM (elektrisk udladningsmaskine).
d.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af kraftoverførselssystemer til helikoptere eller til "fly" med kipbare rotorer eller vinger
e.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af stempeldieselmotorer til fremdrivning af landkøretøjer med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
'Kassevolumen' på højst 1,2 m
3
2.
En total udgangseffekt på mere end 750 kW baseret på 80/1269/EØF, ISO 2534 eller tilsvarende nationale normer 
og
3.
Effekt/volumenforhold på mere end 700 kW/m
3
 af 'kassevolumen'
Teknisk note:
'Kassevolumen' i 9E003.e.: Produktet af tre på hinanden vinkelrette dimensioner målt som følger:
Længde:
Længden af krumtapakslen fra forreste flange til svinghjulets forside
Bredde:
Det største af et eller flere af følgende mål:
a.
Den udvendige bredde fra ventildæksel til ventildæksel
b.
Dimensionerne af de udvendige kanter af cylinderhovederne 
eller
c.
Diameteren af svinghjulshuset
Højde:
Det største af et eller flere af følgende mål:
a.
Afstanden fra krumtapakslens centerlinje til ventildækslets (eller cylinderhovedets) øverste flade plus to gange slaglængden 
eller
b.
Diameteren af svinghjulshuset.
f.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "produktion" af specielt konstruerede komponenter til højtydende dieselmotorer som følger:
1.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "produktion" af motorsystemer med samtlige følgende komponenter, der anvender keramiske materialer, der er specificeret i 1C007:
a.
Cylinderforinger
b.
Stempler
c.
Cylinderhoveder 
og
d.
En eller flere komponenter (inklusive udstødningsporte, turboladere, ventilstyr, ventilsamlinger eller isolerede brændstofindsprøjtningsenheder)
2.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "produktion" af turboladersystemer, med enkelttrinskompressorer og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Opererer ved massetrykforhold på 4:1 eller højere
b.
Massestrøm i området fra 30 til 130 kg i minuttet 
og
c.
Mulighed for variabelt strømningsareal i kompressor- eller turbinesektioner
3.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "produktion" af brændstofindsprøjtningssystemer med en specielt udviklet evne til at anvende multibrændstof (f.eks. diesel- eller jetbrændstof), der dækker et viskositetsområde fra dieselbrændstof (2,5 cSt ved 310,8 K (37,8 °C)) ned til benzin (0,5 cSt ved 310,8 K (37,8 °C)) og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
a.
Indsprøjtet mængde mere end 230 mm
3
 pr. indsprøjtning pr. cylinder 
og
b.
Elektroniske styringsegenskaber specielt udviklet til automatisk omskiftning af regulatorkarakteristik afhængigt af brændstofegenskaber for at opnå samme momentkarakteristikker ved brug af passende sensorer
g.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af 'højtydende dieselmotorer' til smøring af cylindervæggene med fast, gasformig eller flydende film (eller kombinationer heraf), og som tillader drift ved temperaturer over 723 K (450 °C) målt på cylindervæggen på det øverste punkt, der nås af stemplets øverste ring.
Teknisk note:
'Højtydende dieselmotorer' er dieselmotorer med et specificeret effektivt middelbremsetryk på 1,8 MPa eller mere ved en hastighed på 2 300 o/m, hvis den nominelle hastighed er 2 300 o/m eller mere.
h.
"Teknologi" til gasturbiner til "FADEC-systemer" som følger:
1.
"Udviklings""teknologi" til opnåelse af de funktionelle krav til de komponenter, der er nødvendige, for at "FADEC-systemet" kan regulere motordrivkraft eller akseleffekt (f.eks. sensortidskonstanter og nøjagtigheder til feedbackformål, drejningshastighed for brændstofventiler).
2.
"Udviklings-" eller "produktions-""teknologi" til kontrol og diagnosekomponenter, der er specifikke for "FADEC-systemet" og anvendes til at regulere motordrivkraft eller akseleffekt.
3.
"Udviklings""teknologi" til styringslov-algoritmer, herunder "kildekode", der er speciel for "FADEC-systemet" og anvendes til at regulere motordrivkraft eller akseleffekt.
Note:
9E003.h lægger ikke eksportkontrol på tekniske data med relation til integration mellem motorer og "luftfartøjer", som de civile luftfartsmyndigheder i en eller flere EU-medlemsstater eller stater, der deltager i Wassenaararrangementet, kræver offentliggjort til generel brug for luftfartsselskaber (f.eks. installationsmanualer, driftsinstruktioner, instruktioner vedrørende fortsat luftdygtighed) eller grænsefladefunktioner (f.eks. behandling af input og output, flyskrogs reaktionskraft eller krav til akseleffekt).
i.
"Teknologi" til justerbare strømningsvejsystemer, der er konstrueret til at opretholde motorstabilitet for gasgeneratorturbiner, fan- eller kraftturbiner eller fremdrivningsdyser som følger:
1.
"Udviklings""teknologi" til opnåelse af de funktionelle krav til de komponenter, der opretholder motorstabilitet
2.
"Udviklings-" eller "produktions""teknologi" til komponenter, der er specifikke for det justerbare strømningsvejsystem, og som opretholder motorstabilitet
3.
"Udviklings""teknologi" til styringslov-algoritmer, herunder "kildekode", der er specifikke for det justerbare strømningsvejsystem, og som opretholder motorstabilitet.
Note:
9E003.i. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på "teknologi" til følgende:
a.
Indgangsstyrefinner
b.
Turbinehjul med variabel stigning eller propfans
c.
Variable kompressorfinner
d.
Udtagsventiler til kompressorer eller
e.
Justerbar strømningsvejgeometri til reversering af trykket.
j.
"Teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling" af vingefoldesystemer til "fly" med faste vinger og gasturbinemotor.
N.B.
Jf. i forbindelse med "teknologi", der "kræves" til "udvikling" af vingefoldesystemer til "fly" med faste vinger, ligeledes KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL.
9E101
a.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af produkter, der er specificeret i 9A101, 9A102, 9A104-9A111, 9A112.a. eller 9A115-9A121.
b.
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "produktion" af 'UAV', der er specificeret i 9A012, eller produkter, der er specificeret i 9A101, 9A102, 9A104-9A111, 9A112.a. eller 9A115-9A121.
Teknisk note:
I 9E101.b er 'UAV' ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på over 300 km.
9E102
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af løftefartøjer til rumfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A004, af produkter, der er specificeret i 9A005-9A011, af 'UAV', der er specificeret i 9A012, eller af produkter, der er specificeret i 9A101, 9A102, 9A104-9A111, 9A112.a, 9A115-9A121, 9B105, 9B106, 9B115, 9B116, 9B117, 9D101 eller 9D103.
Teknisk note:
I 9E102 er 'UAV' ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på over 300 km.
(
1
)
  https://www.australiagroup.net/.
(
2
)
  http://mtcr.info/.
(
3
)
  http://www.nuclearsuppliersgroup.org/.
(
4
)
  http://www.wassenaar.org/.
(
5
)
  https://www.opcw.org/chemical-weapons-convention.
(
6
)
  Producenter, der beregner positioneringsnøjagtigheden i overensstemmelse med ISO 230-2:1997 eller 2006, bør rådføre sig med de kompetente myndigheder i den medlemsstat, hvor de har hjemsted.
(
7
)
  Numrene i parentes henviser til noterne efter dette skema.
BILAG II
GENERELLE EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSER
I nedenstående afsnit beskrives de generelle EU-eksporttilladelser for visse produkter, der eksporteres.
A.   EKSPORT TIL AUSTRALIEN, CANADA, ISLAND, JAPAN, NEW ZEALAND, NORGE, SCHWEIZ, HERUNDER LIECHTENSTEIN, DET FORENEDE KONGERIGE OG DE FORENEDE STATER
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU001
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Eksport til Australien, Canada, Island, Japan, New Zealand, Norge, Schweiz, herunder Liechtenstein, Det Forenede Kongerige og De Forenede Stater
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
Denne tilladelse omfatter alle produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er specificeret i bilag I, bortset fra produkter, der er opført i afsnit I i nærværende bilag.
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse gælder i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport til følgende bestemmelsessteder:
—
Australien
—
Canada
—
Det Forenede Kongerige (uden at dette dog berører anvendelsen af denne forordning på og i Det Forenede Kongerige for så vidt angår Nordirland i overensstemmelse med bilag 2, punkt 47, i protokollen om Irland/Nordirland ('protokollen') vedhæftet til aftalen om Det Forenede Kongerige Storbritannien og Nordirlands udtræden af Den Europæiske Union og Det Europæiske Atomenergifællesskab 
(
1
)
, der indeholder en liste over de bestemmelser i EU-retten, der er omhandlet i protokollens artikel 5, stk. 4)
—
De Forenede Stater
—
Island
—
Japan
—
New Zealand
—
Norge
—
Schweiz, herunder Liechtenstein.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelse
1.
Denne tilladelse omfatter ikke tilladelse til eksport af produkter, hvis:
a)
eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær endelig anvendelse som defineret i artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), i denne forordning, i et land, der er genstand for en våbenembargo, eller
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning
b)
eksportøren har kendskab til, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser, eller
c)
de pågældende produkter eksporteres til en frizone eller et frilager, som er beliggende på et bestemmelsessted, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse.
2.
Eksportøren erklærer, at produkterne eksporteres i henhold til den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU001 i tolderklæringen.
3.
Eksportøren, som anvender denne tilladelse, underretter den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, om den første anvendelse af denne tilladelse inden for 30 dage efter første eksportdato eller alternativt og i overensstemmelse med krav fra den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, før første anvendelse af denne tilladelse. Medlemsstaterne underretter Kommissionen om den indberetningsmekanisme, der vælges for denne tilladelse. Kommissionen offentliggør de indberettede oplysninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
De rapporteringskrav, der er knyttet til anvendelsen af denne tilladelse, og de yderligere oplysninger, som den medlemsstat, hvorfra eksporten finder sted, kan kræve om produkter, der eksporteres i henhold til denne tilladelse, fastsættes af medlemsstaterne.
En medlemsstat kan kræve, at eksportører, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i denne medlemsstat, registreres forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen. Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren med det samme og under alle omstændigheder inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen, jf. dog denne forordnings artikel 12, stk. 7.
Hvis det er relevant, skal de krav, der er omhandlet i andet og tredje afsnit, være baseret på dem, der er fastsat for anvendelsen af de generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, der udstedes af de medlemsstater, der giver sådanne tilladelser.
B.   EKSPORT AF VISSE PRODUKTER MED DOBBELT ANVENDELSE TIL VISSE BESTEMMELSESSTEDER
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU002
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Eksport af visse produkter med dobbelt anvendelse til visse bestemmelsessteder
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
Denne tilladelse omfatter følgende produkter med dobbelt anvendelse i bilag I:
—
1A001
—
1A003
—
1A004
—
1C003.b.
—
1C003.c.
—
1C004
—
1C005
—
1C006
—
1C008
—
1C009
—
2B008
—
3A001.a.3.
—
3A001.a.6.
—
3A001.a.7.
—
3A001.a.9.
—
3A001.a.10.
—
3A001.a.11.
—
3A001.a.12.
—
3A002.c.
—
3A002.d.
—
3A002.e.
—
3A002.f.
—
3C001
—
3C002
—
3C003
—
3C004
—
3C005
—
3C006.
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse gælder i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport til følgende bestemmelsessteder:
—
Argentina
—
Korea
—
Sydafrika
—
Tyrkiet.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelsen
1.
Denne tilladelse omfatter ikke tilladelse til eksport af produkter, hvis
a)
eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær endelig anvendelse som defineret i artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), i denne forordning, i et land, der er genstand for en våbenembargo, eller
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning
b)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser, eller
c)
de pågældende produkter eksporteres til en frizone eller et frilager, som er beliggende på et bestemmelsessted, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse.
2.
Eksportøren erklærer, at produkterne eksporteres i overensstemmelse med den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU002 i tolderklæringen.
3.
Eksportøren, som anvender denne tilladelse, underretter den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, om den første anvendelse af denne tilladelse inden for 30 dage efter første eksportdato eller alternativt og i overensstemmelse med krav fra den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, før første anvendelse af denne tilladelse. Medlemsstaterne underretter Kommissionen om den indberetningsmekanisme, der vælges for denne tilladelse. Kommissionen offentliggør de indberettede oplysninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
De rapporteringskrav, der er knyttet til anvendelsen af denne tilladelse, og de yderligere oplysninger, som den medlemsstat, hvorfra eksporten finder sted, kan kræve om produkter, der eksporteres i henhold til denne tilladelse, fastsættes af medlemsstaterne.
En medlemsstat kan kræve, at eksportører, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i denne medlemsstat, registreres forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen. Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren med det samme og under alle omstændigheder inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen, jf. dog denne forordnings artikel 12, stk. 7.
Hvis det er relevant, skal de krav, der er omhandlet i andet og tredje afsnit, være baseret på dem, der er fastsat for anvendelsen af de generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, der udstedes af de medlemsstater, der giver sådanne tilladelser.
C.   EKSPORT EFTER REPARATION/UDSKIFTNING
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU003
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Eksport efter reparation/udskiftning
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
1.
Denne tilladelse omfatter alle produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er specificeret i bilag I, bortset fra produkter, der er opført i dette afsnits punkt 2, hvis:
a)
produkterne blev genimporteret til Unionens toldområde med henblik på vedligeholdelse, reparation eller udskiftning og eksporteres eller geneksporteres til modtagerlandet uden nogen ændring af deres oprindelige egenskaber inden for en periode på fem år efter datoen for udstedelsen af den oprindelige eksporttilladelse eller
b)
produkterne eksporteres til modtagerlandet som led i ombytning af produkter af samme kvalitet og antal, som blev genimporteret til Unionens toldområde med henblik på vedligeholdelse, reparation eller udskiftning inden for en periode på fem år efter datoen for udstedelsen af den oprindelige eksporttilladelse.
2.
Produkter, der er undtaget:
a)
alle produkter, der er opført i afsnit I i dette bilag
b)
alle produkter, der er opført i afsnit D og E i hver kategori i bilag I
c)
følgende produkter specificeret i bilag I:
—
1A002.a.
—
1C012.a.
—
1C227
—
1C228
—
1C229
—
1C230
—
1C231
—
1C236
—
1C237
—
1C240
—
1C350
—
1C450
—
5A001.b.5.
—
5A002.c.
—
5A002.d.
—
5A002.e.
—
5A003.a.
—
5A003.b.
—
6A001.a.2.a.1.
—
6A001.a.2.a.5.
—
6A002.a.1.c.
—
8A001.b.
—
8A001.c.1.
—
9A011.
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse gælder i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport til følgende bestemmelsessteder:
—
Albanien
—
Argentina
—
Bosnien-Hercegovina
—
Brasilien
—
Chile
—
De Forenede Arabiske Emirater
—
De franske oversøiske territorier
—
Indien
—
Kasakhstan
—
Kina (herunder Hongkong og Macao)
—
Korea
—
Marokko
—
Mexico
—
Montenegro
—
Rusland
—
Nordmakedonien
—
Serbien
—
Singapore
—
Sydafrika
—
Tunesien
—
Tyrkiet
—
Ukraine.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelsen
1.
Denne tilladelse kan kun anvendes, når den oprindelige eksport er sket i henhold til en generel EU-eksporttilladelse, eller der er udstedt oprindelig eksporttilladelse af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor den oprindelige eksportør var hjemmehørende eller havde hjemsted, for at eksportere de produkter, som efterfølgende er blevet genimporteret til Unionens toldområde med henblik på vedligeholdelse, reparation eller udskiftning. Denne tilladelse er kun gyldig for eksport til den oprindelige slutbruger.
2.
Denne tilladelse omfatter ikke tilladelse til eksport af produkter, hvis
a)
eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær endelig anvendelse som defineret i artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), i denne forordning, hvis køberlandet eller bestemmelseslandet er genstand for en våbenembargo, eller
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning
b)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser
c)
de pågældende produkter eksporteres til en frizone eller et frilager, som er beliggende på et bestemmelsessted, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse
d)
den oprindelige tilladelse er blevet annulleret, suspenderet, ændret eller tilbagekaldt eller
e)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkters slutanvendelse er forskellig fra den slutanvendelse, der er anført i den oprindelige eksporttilladelse.
3.
Ved eksport af produkter i henhold til denne tilladelse skal eksportører:
a)
angive referencenummeret på den oprindelige eksporttilladelse i eksporterklæringen til toldmyndighederne sammen med navnet på den medlemsstat, der udstedte tilladelsen, og erklære, at produkterne eksporteres i overensstemmelse med den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU003 i tolderklæringen
b)
på anmodning fra toldmyndighederne forelægge dokumentation for datoen for importen af produkterne til Unionen, for eventuel vedligeholdelse, reparation eller udskiftning af produkterne, som er udført i Unionen, og for at produkterne sendes tilbage til den slutbruger og det land, hvorfra de blev importeret til Unionen.
4.
Eksportøren, som anvender denne tilladelse, underretter den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, om den første anvendelse af denne tilladelse inden for 30 dage efter første eksportdato eller alternativt og i overensstemmelse med krav fra den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, før første anvendelse af denne tilladelse. Medlemsstaterne underretter Kommissionen om den indberetningsmekanisme, der vælges for denne tilladelse. Kommissionen offentliggør de indberettede oplysninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
De rapporteringskrav, der er knyttet til anvendelsen af denne tilladelse, og de yderligere oplysninger, som den medlemsstat, hvorfra eksporten finder sted, kan kræve om produkter, der eksporteres i henhold til denne tilladelse, fastsættes af medlemsstaterne.
En medlemsstat kan kræve, at eksportører, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i denne medlemsstat, registreres forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen. Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren med det samme og under alle omstændigheder inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen, jf. dog denne forordnings artikel 12, stk. 7.
Hvis det er relevant, skal de krav, der er omhandlet i andet og tredje afsnit, være baseret på dem, der er fastsat for anvendelsen af de generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, der udstedes af de medlemsstater, der giver sådanne tilladelser.
5.
Denne tilladelse omfatter produkter til "reparation", "udskiftning" og "vedligeholdelse", herunder utilsigtede forbedringer af de oprindelige produkter, f.eks. grundet anvendelse af moderne reservedele eller af en nyere byggestandard af driftsmæssige eller sikkerhedsmæssige årsager, forudsat at dette ikke medfører nogen forbedring af produkternes funktionelle egenskaber eller forsyner dem med nye eller yderligere funktioner.
D.   MIDLERTIDIG EKSPORT I FORBINDELSE MED UDSTILLINGER ELLER MESSER
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU004
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Midlertidig eksport i forbindelse med udstillinger eller messer
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
Denne tilladelse omfatter alle produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der er specificeret i bilag I bortset fra:
a)
alle produkter, der er opført på listen i afsnit I i dette bilag
b)
alle produkter i afsnit D i hver kategori i bilag I (dette omfatter ikke software, der er nødvendig for, at demonstrationsudstyret kan fungere efter hensigten)
c)
alle produkter i afsnit E i hver kategori i bilag I
d)
følgende produkter specificeret i bilag I:
—
1A002.a.
—
1C002.b.4.
—
1C010
—
1C012.a.
—
1C227
—
1C228
—
1C229
—
1C230
—
1C231
—
1C236
—
1C237
—
1C240
—
1C350
—
1C450
—
5A001.b.5.
—
5A002.c.
—
5A002.d.
—
5A002.e.
—
5A003.a.
—
5A003.b.
—
6A001
—
6A002.a.
—
8A001.b.
—
8A001.c.1.
—
9A011.
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse gælder i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport til følgende bestemmelsessteder:
—
Albanien
—
Argentina
—
Bosnien-Hercegovina
—
Brasilien
—
Chile
—
De Forenede Arabiske Emirater
—
De franske oversøiske territorier
—
Kina (herunder Hongkong og Macao)
—
Indien
—
Kasakhstan
—
Korea
—
Marokko
—
Mexico
—
Montenegro
—
Nordmakedonien
—
Rusland
—
Serbien
—
Singapore
—
Sydafrika
—
Tunesien
—
Tyrkiet
—
Ukraine.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelsen
1.
Denne tilladelse indebærer tilladelse til eksport af produkterne anført i del 1 på betingelse af, at eksporten vedrører midlertidig eksport i forbindelse med en udstilling eller messe, jf. definitionen i denne dels, afsnit 6, og at produkterne genimporteres inden for en periode på 120 dage efter den oprindelige eksport, fuldstændige og uden ændringer, til Unionens toldområde.
2.
Den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, kan på begæring af eksportøren fravige kravet om, at produkterne genimporteres som fastsat i punkt 1. Ved fravigelse af kravet finder proceduren for individuelle tilladelser i artikel 12, stk. 2, i denne forordning tilsvarende anvendelse.
3.
Denne tilladelse omfatter ikke tilladelse til eksport af produkter, hvis
a)
eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær endelig anvendelse som defineret i artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), i denne forordning, hvis køberlandet eller bestemmelseslandet er genstand for en våbenembargo, eller
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning
b)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser
c)
de pågældende produkter eksporteres til en frizone eller et frilager, som er beliggende på et bestemmelsessted, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse
d)
eksportøren er blevet underrettet af en kompetent myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor den eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller etableret, eller på anden måde gjort bekendt med (f.eks. gennem oplysninger fra fabrikanten), at de pågældende produkter af den kompetente myndighed er klassificeret i kategorien produkter med national sikkerhedsklassificering, svarende til eller højere end "CONFIDENTIEL UE/EU CONFIDENTIAL"
e)
eksportøren ikke kan garantere, at produktet tilbagesendes i dets oprindelige tilstand, uden at nogen komponent eller noget software er blevet fjernet, kopieret eller spredt, eller hvis en overførsel af teknologi knytter sig til en fremvisning
f)
de pågældende produkter skal eksporteres i forbindelse med en privat fremvisning eller demonstration (f.eks. i interne udstillingslokaler)
g)
de pågældende produkter skal indgå i en produktionsproces
h)
de pågældende produkter skal anvendes til det tilsigtede formål, undtagen i det minimumsomfang, der er påkrævet af hensyn til en effektiv demonstration, men uden at stille specifikke testresultater til rådighed for tredjeparter
i)
eksporten skal foregå som følge af en handelstransaktion, navnlig hvad angår salg, leje eller leasing af de pågældende produkter
j)
de pågældende produkter skal opbevares på en udstilling eller messe alene med henblik på salg, leje eller leasing uden at skulle fremvises eller demonstreres, eller
k)
eksportøren indgår en aftale, som afskærer denne fra at bevare kontrollen over de pågældende produkter i hele den midlertidige eksportperiode.
4.
Eksportøren erklærer, at produkterne eksporteres i overensstemmelse med den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU004 i tolderklæringen.
5.
Eksportøren, som anvender denne tilladelse, underretter den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, om den første anvendelse af denne tilladelse inden for 30 dage efter første eksportdato eller alternativt og i overensstemmelse med krav fra den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, før første anvendelse af denne tilladelse. Medlemsstaterne underretter Kommissionen om den indberetningsmekanisme, der vælges for denne tilladelse. Kommissionen offentliggør de indberettede oplysninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
De rapporteringskrav, der er knyttet til anvendelsen af denne tilladelse, og de yderligere oplysninger, som den medlemsstat, hvorfra eksporten finder sted, kan kræve om produkter, der eksporteres i henhold til denne tilladelse, fastsættes af medlemsstaterne.
En medlemsstat kan kræve, at eksportører, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i denne medlemsstat, registreres forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen. Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren med det samme og under alle omstændigheder inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen, jf. dog denne forordnings artikel 12, stk. 7.
Hvis det er relevant, skal de krav, der er omhandlet i andet og tredje afsnit, være baseret på dem, der er fastsat for anvendelsen af de generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, der udstedes af de medlemsstater, der giver sådanne tilladelser.
6.
I denne tilladelse forstås ved 'udstilling eller messe' kommercielle arrangementer af specifik varighed, hvor et større antal udstillere demonstrerer deres produkter for besøgende handelsfolk eller offentligheden.
E.   TELEKOMMUNIKATION
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU005
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Telekommunikation
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
Denne tilladelse omfatter følgende produkter med dobbelt anvendelse i bilag I:
a)
følgende produkter i kategori 5, del 1:
i)
produkter, herunder specielt konstruerede eller udviklede komponenter og tilbehør hertil, som er specificeret i 5A001.b.2. og 5A001.c. og 5A001.d.
ii)
produkter, som er specificeret i 5B001 og 5D001 for så vidt angår prøvnings-, inspektions- og produktionsudstyr og software til de under nr. i) nævnte produkter
b)
teknologi, underlagt eksportkontrol gennem 5E001.a., såfremt den er nødvendig for installation, drift, vedligeholdelse og reparation af produkter, specificeret under litra a), og bestemt til samme slutbruger.
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse gælder i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport til følgende bestemmelsessteder:
—
Argentina
—
Indien
—
Kina (herunder Hongkong og Macao)
—
Korea
—
Sydafrika
—
Tyrkiet
—
Rusland
—
Ukraine.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelsen
1.
Denne tilladelse omfatter ikke tilladelse til eksport af produkter, hvis
a)
eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær endelig anvendelse som defineret i artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), i denne forordning, hvis køberlandet eller bestemmelseslandet er genstand for en våbenembargo
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning eller
iv)
anvendelse i forbindelse med krænkelse af menneskerettigheder, demokratiske principper eller ytringsfrihed som defineret i Den Europæiske Unions charter om grundlæggende rettigheder gennem brug af aflytningsteknologier og anordninger til digital dataoverførsel med henblik på kontrol med mobiltelefoner og sms-beskeder og målrettet overvågning af internetbrug (f.eks. gennem overvågningscentre og myndighedernes aflytningsporte (Lawful Interception Gateways)
b)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser
c)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter vil blive geneksporteret til et andet bestemmelsessted end de i del 2 i dette afsnit eller de i afsnit A, del 2, i dette bilag anførte bestemmelsessteder og medlemsstaterne
d)
de pågældende produkter eksporteres til en frizone eller et frilager, som er beliggende på et bestemmelsessted, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse.
2.
Eksportøren erklærer, at produkterne eksporteres i overensstemmelse med den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse EU005 i tolderklæringen.
3.
Eksportøren, som anvender denne tilladelse, underretter den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, om den første anvendelse af denne tilladelse inden for 30 dage efter første eksportdato eller alternativt og i overensstemmelse med krav fra den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, før første anvendelse af denne tilladelse. Medlemsstaterne underretter Kommissionen om den indberetningsmekanisme, der vælges for denne tilladelse. Kommissionen offentliggør de indberettede oplysninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
De rapporteringskrav, der er knyttet til anvendelsen af denne tilladelse, og de yderligere oplysninger, som den medlemsstat, hvorfra eksporten finder sted, kan kræve om produkter, der eksporteres i henhold til denne tilladelse, fastsættes af medlemsstaterne.
En medlemsstat kan kræve, at eksportører, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i denne medlemsstat, registreres forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen. Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren med det samme og under alle omstændigheder inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen, jf. dog denne forordnings artikel 12, stk. 7.
Hvis det er relevant, skal de krav, der er omhandlet i andet og tredje afsnit, være baseret på dem, der er fastsat for anvendelsen af de generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, der udstedes af de medlemsstater, der giver sådanne tilladelser.
F.   KEMIKALIER
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU006
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Kemikalier
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
Denne tilladelse omfatter følgende produkter med dobbelt anvendelse i bilag I:
1C350:
1.
Thiodiglycol (CAS 111-48-8)
2.
Phosphoroxychlorid (CAS 10025-87-3)
3.
Dimethyl methylphosphonat (CAS 756-79-6)
5.
Methylphosphonyldichlorid (CAS 676-97-1)
6.
Dimethylphosphit (DMP) (CAS 868-85-9)
7.
Phosphortrichlorid (CAS 7719-12-2)
8.
Trimethylphosphit (TMP) (CAS 121-45-9)
9.
Thionylchlorid (CAS 7719-09-7)
10.
3-hydroxy-1-methylpiperidin (CAS 3554-74-3)
11.
N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethylchlorid (CAS 96-79-7)
12.
N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanthiol (CAS 5842-07-9)
13.
3-quinuclidinol (CAS 1619-34-7)
14.
Kaliumfluorid (CAS 7789-23-3)
15.
2-chloroethanol (CAS 107-07-3)
16.
Dimethylamin (CAS 124-40-3)
17.
Diethylethylphosphonat (CAS 78-38-6)
18.
Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidat (CAS 2404-03-7)
19.
Diethylphosphit (CAS 762-04-9)
20.
Dimethylaminhydrochlorid (CAS 506-59-2)
21.
Ethylphosphinyldichlorid (CAS 1498-40-4)
22.
Ethylphosphonyldichlorid (CAS 1066-50-8)
24.
Hydrogenfluorid (CAS 7664-39-3)
25.
Methylbenzilat (CAS 76-89-1)
26.
Methylphosphinyldichlorid (CAS 676-83-5)
27.
N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0)
28.
Pinacolylalkohol (CAS 464-07-3)
30.
Triethylphosphit (CAS 122-52-1)
31.
Arsentrichlorid (CAS 7784-34-1)
32.
Benzilsyre (CAS 76-93-7)
33.
Diethylmethylphosphonit (CAS 15715-41-0)
34.
Dimethylethylphosphonat (CAS 6163-75-3)
35.
Ethylphosphinyldifluorid (CAS 430-78-4)
36.
Methylphosphinyldifluorid (CAS 753-59-3)
37.
3-quinuclidon (CAS 3731-38-2)
38.
Phosphorpentachlorid (CAS 10026-13-8)
39.
Pinacolon (CAS 75-97-8)
40.
Kaliumcyanid (CAS 151-50-8)
41.
Kaliumbifluorid (CAS 7789-29-9)
42.
Ammoniumhydrogenfluorid eller ammoniumbifluorid (CAS 1341-49-7)
43.
Natriumfluorid (CAS 7681-49-4)
44.
Natriumbifluorid (CAS 1333-83-1)
45.
Natriumcyanid (CAS 143-33-9)
46.
Triethanolamin (CAS 102-71-6)
47.
Phosphorpentasulfid (CAS 1314-80-3)
48.
Diisopropylamin (CAS 108-18-9)
49.
Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8)
50.
Natriumsulfid (CAS 1313-82-2)
51.
Svovlmonochlorid (CAS 10025-67-9)
52.
Svovldichlorid (CAS 10545-99-0)
53.
Triethanolaminhydrochlorid (CAS 637-39-8)
54.
N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethylchloridhydrochlorid (CAS 4261-68-1)
55.
Methylphosphonsyre (CAS 993-13-5)
56.
Diethylmethylphosphonat (CAS 683-08-9)
57.
N,N-dimethylaminophosphoryldichlorid (CAS 677-43-0)
58.
Triisopropylphosphit (CAS 116-17-6)
59.
Ethyldiethanolamin (CAS 139-87-7)
60.
O,O-diethylphosphorthioat (CAS 2465-65-8)
61.
O,O-diethylphosphordithioat (CAS 298-06-6)
62.
Natriumhexafluorosilicat (CAS 16893-85-9)
63.
Methylphosphonthiodichlorid (CAS 676-98-2)
64.
Diethylamin (CAS 109-89-7)
65.
N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiolhydrochlorid (CAS 41480-75-5).
1C450.a.:
4.
Phosgen: carbonyldichlorid (CAS 75-44-5)
5.
Cyanogenchlorid (CAS 506-77-4)
6.
Hydrogencyanid (CAS 74-90-8)
7.
Chlorpikrin: trichlornitromethan (CAS 76-06-2).
1C450.b.:
1.
Kemiske stoffer ud over dem, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål eller 1C350, indeholdende et phosphoratom, hvortil er bundet en methyl-, ethyl- eller propylgruppe (normal- eller iso-), men ikke flere carbonatomer;
2.
Andre N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-phosphor-amiddihalogenider end N,N-dimethylfosforamidodiklorid som specificeret i 1C350.57;
3.
Dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-phosphoramidater, bortset fra diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidat som specificeret i 1C350;
4.
N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-aminoethyl-2-chlorider og protoniserede salte deraf, bortset fra N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethylchlorid eller N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethylchloridhydrochlorid som specificeret i 1C350;
5.
N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-aminoethan-2-oler og protoniserede salte deraf, bortset fra N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0) og N,N-diethylamino-ethanol (CAS 100-37-8) som specificeret i 1C350;
6.
N,N-dialkyl [methyl-, ethyl- eller propyl- (normal- eller iso-)]-aminoethan-2-thioler og protoniserede salte deraf, bortset fra N,N-diisopropyl-ß-aminoethanthiol (CAS 5842-07-9) og N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiolhydrochlorid (CAS 41480-75-5) som er specificeret i 1C350;
8.
Methyldiethanolamin (CAS 105-59-9).
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse gælder i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport til følgende bestemmelsessteder:
—
Argentina
—
Sydkorea
—
Tyrkiet
—
Ukraine.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelsen
1.
Denne tilladelse omfatter ikke tilladelse til eksport af produkter, hvis
a)
eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær endelig anvendelse som defineret i artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), i denne forordning, hvis køberlandet eller bestemmelseslandet er genstand for en våbenembargo, eller
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning
b)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser
c)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter vil blive geneksporteret til et andet bestemmelsessted end de i del 2 i dette afsnit eller de i afsnit A, del 2, i dette bilag anførte bestemmelsessteder og medlemsstaterne eller
d)
de relevante produkter eksporteres til en frizone eller et frilager, som er beliggende på et bestemmelsessted, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse.
2.
Eksportøren erklærer, at produkterne eksporteres i overensstemmelse med den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU006 i tolderklæringen.
3.
Eksportøren, som anvender denne tilladelse, underretter den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, om den første anvendelse af denne tilladelse inden for 30 dage efter første eksportdato eller alternativt og i overensstemmelse med krav fra den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, før første anvendelse af denne tilladelse. Medlemsstaterne underretter Kommissionen om den indberetningsmekanisme, der vælges for denne tilladelse. Kommissionen offentliggør de indberettede oplysninger i C-udgaven af 
Den Europæiske Unions Tidende
.
De rapporteringskrav, der er knyttet til anvendelsen af denne tilladelse, og de yderligere oplysninger, som den medlemsstat, hvorfra eksporten finder sted, kan kræve om produkter, der eksporteres i henhold til denne tilladelse, fastsættes af medlemsstaterne.
En medlemsstat kan kræve, at de eksportører, der er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i denne medlemsstat, registreres forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen. Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren med det samme og under alle omstændigheder inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen, jf. dog denne forordnings artikel 12, stk. 7.
Hvis det er relevant, skal de krav, der er omhandlet i andet og tredje afsnit, være baseret på dem, der er fastsat for anvendelsen af de generelle nationale eksporttilladelser, der udstedes af de medlemsstater, der giver sådanne tilladelser.
G.   VIRSOMHEDSINTERN OVERFØRSEL AF SOFTWARE OG TEKNOLOGI
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU007
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Virksomhedsintern overførsel af software og teknologi
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
Denne tilladelse dækker al teknologi og software, der er specificeret i bilag I, bortset fra produkter, der er opført i afsnit I i dette bilag og teknologi og software i forbindelse med produkter under 4A005, 4D004, 4E001.c, 5A001.f og 5A001.j.
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse er gyldig i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport af software og teknologi til følgende bestemmelsessteder:
—
Argentina
—
Brasilien
—
Chile
—
Filippinerne
—
Indien
—
Indonesien
—
Israel
—
Jordan
—
Malaysia
—
Marokko
—
Mexico
—
Singapore
—
Sydafrika
—
Sydkorea
—
Thailand
—
Tunesien.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelsen
1.
Denne tilladelse tillader eksport af software og teknologi som opført på listen i del 1 af en eksportør, der er en juridisk person med hjemsted i en medlemsstat i Unionen, til en virksomhed, der ejes og kontrolleres fuldt ud af eksportøren (datterselskab), eller til en virksomhed, der direkte og fuldt ud ejes og kontrolleres af samme moderselskab som eksportøren (søsterselskab), forudsat at:
a)
moderselskabet, der direkte kontrollerer eksportøren og den enhed, der i sidste ende kontrollerer eksportøren, er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted i en af Unionens medlemsstater eller i et land, der er omfattet af den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU001, og
b)
moderselskabet, der direkte kontrollerer eksportøren, stiller en bindende garanti for søsterselskabets overholdelse af kravene i denne tilladelse, og
Med henblik på denne tilladelse kontrollerer et moderselskab et andet selskab, når det er i stand til at udøve afgørende indflydelse på det
c)
den eksporterede software og teknologi udelukkende anvendes til henholdsvis eksportørens og datterselskabets eller søsterselskabets kommercielle produktudviklingsaktiviteter og, for så vidt angår de ansatte, inden for rammerne af ansættelsesforholdet, og
d)
den eksporterede software og teknologi og alle derpå baserede produkter forbliver under eksportørens fulde kontrol eller, for at opfylde kravene i denne tilladelse, når eksporten er rettet mod et søsterselskab, under fuldstændig kontrol af det moderselskab, der direkte kontrollerer søsterselskabet, og ikke vil blive delt med nogen anden enhed, og
e)
den eksporterede software og teknologi returneres til eksportøren og slettes fuldstændigt af datterselskabet eller søsterselskabet, når udviklingsaktiviteten er afsluttet, eller hvis datterselskabet eller søsterselskabet erhverves af en anden enhed. Enhver udviklet teknologi, der fremkommer på grundlag heraf, overføres også til eksportøren og slettes fuldstændigt af datterselskabet eller søsterselskabet.
2.
Denne tilladelse omfatter ikke tilladelse til eksport af software og teknologi, hvis
a)
eksportøren af de kompetente myndigheder i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren har hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at den pågældende software eller teknologi helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær, paramilitær, politimæssig endelig anvendelse, endelig anvendelse til efterretnings- og overvågningsformål eller anden endelig anvendelse af en statslig sikkerhedstjeneste eller af enheder, der handler på statens vegne
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på den nationale militære liste, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning, eller
iv)
til brug i forbindelse med krænkelse af menneskerettighederne, de demokratiske principper eller ytringsfriheden som defineret i Den Europæiske Unions charter om grundlæggende rettigheder
b)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at den pågældende software eller teknologi helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser
c)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at den pågældende software eller teknologi vil blive geneksporteret til et andet bestemmelsessted end de i del 2 i dette afsnit eller de i afsnit A, del 2, i dette bilag anførte bestemmelsessteder og medlemsstaterne, eller
d)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at modtageren eller slutbrugeren af de pågældende produkter er en militær, paramilitær, politi- eller efterretningstjeneste eller en anden statslig sikkerhedstjeneste, eller at produkterne er bestemt til anvendelse af enheder, der handler på vegne af en af ovennævnte tjenester
En medlemsstat kan vedtage national lovgivning, der udvider litra b) og c), til også at omfatte omstændigheder, hvor eksportøren har begrundet mistanke om, at den pågældende software eller teknologi er beregnet til de i litra b) eller litra c) omhandlede anvendelser.
3.
Eksportøren, der agter at anvende denne tilladelse, indfører et internt program til sikring af overholdelse.
4.
Eksportøren erklærer, at produkterne eksporteres i henhold til den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU007 i tolderklæringen, når det drejer sig om materiel eksport af software eller teknologi.
5.
Eksportøren, der agter at anvende denne tilladelse, foretager registrering forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen hos den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren har hjemsted.
Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen.
6.
Eksportøren, der anvender denne tilladelse, indberetter den første anvendelse af tilladelsen til den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren har hjemsted, senest 30 dage før den første eksport.
7.
Eksportøren, der anvender denne tilladelse, foretager til den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren har hjemsted, indberetning om anvendelsen af denne tilladelse. Indberetningen om anvendelse af denne tilladelse foretages mindst en gang om året og skal som minimum indeholde følgende oplysninger:
a)
en beskrivelse af softwaren og teknologien
b)
hvor det er relevant, mængden og værdien af softwaren og teknologien
c)
datterselskaber, søsterselskaber og moderselskaber, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse.
De yderligere oplysninger, som den medlemsstat, hvorfra eksporten finder sted, kan kræve om produkter, der eksporteres i henhold til denne tilladelse, fastsættes af medlemsstaterne.
H.   KRYPTERING
GENEREL EU-EKSPORTTILLADELSE Nr. EU008
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d), i denne forordning)
Kryptering
Udstedende myndighed: Den Europæiske Union
Del 1 — Produkter
1.
Denne tilladelse omfatter følgende produkter med dobbelt anvendelse som specificeret i bilag I:
—
5A002.a.2
—
5A002.a.3
—
5A002.b., kun en "kryptografisk aktiveringsnøgle", der ved hjælp af "kryptografisk aktivering" konverterer et produkt, der ikke er anført i kategori 5, del 2, til et produkt, der er anført i 5A002.a. ovenfor eller 5D002.c.1. nedenfor, og som ikke er frigivet ved kryptografinoten (note 3 i kategori 5, del 2)
—
5D002.a.1., kun "software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "brug" af udstyr som specificeret i 5A002.a ovenfor eller "software" som specificeret i 5D002.c.1. nedenfor
—
5D002.b., "software" med samme egenskaber som en "kryptografisk aktiveringsnøgle" som specificeret i 5A002.b. ovenfor
—
5D002.c.1., kun "software" med de egenskaber, eller som udfører eller simulerer samme funktioner som det udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A002.a. ovenfor
—
5E002.b., "teknologi" med samme egenskaber som en 'kryptografisk aktiveringsnøgle' som specificeret i 5A002.b. ovenfor.
2.
Denne tilladelse er kun gyldig, hvis produkterne opfylder alle følgende krav:
a)
produkterne anvender kun offentliggjorte eller kommercielle kryptografiske standarder, der er godkendt eller vedtaget af internationalt anerkendte standardiseringsorganer
b)
produkterne anvender ikke kryptografiske standarder, der er specielt konstrueret til statslig brug (f.eks. de kryptografiske standarder, der anvendes i radiosystemer til offentlig sikkerhed, såsom TETRA, TETRAPOL og P25); og
c)
enhver kryptografisk funktionalitet, der anvendes af produktet, kan ikke let ændres af brugeren.
3.
Denne tilladelse må ikke anvendes, hvis:
a)
eksportøren er blevet underrettet af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, eller på anden måde er gjort bekendt med (f.eks. gennem oplysninger fra fabrikanten), at de pågældende produkter er blevet akkrediteret eller på anden måde formelt godkendt af den udpegede myndighed i en medlemsstat (eller er midt i en akkrediteringsproces eller en anden formel godkendelsesproces) med henblik på overførsel, behandling eller opbevaring af klassificerede oplysninger, svarende til eller højere end "RESTREINT UE/EU RESTRICTED"
b)
eksportøren er blevet underrettet af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, eller på anden måde er gjort bekendt med (f.eks. gennem oplysninger fra fabrikanten), at de pågældende produkter er blevet klassificeret af den udpegede myndighed i en medlemsstat (eller er midt i en klassificeringsproces) i kategorien produkter med national sikkerhedsklassificering, svarende til eller højere end "RESTREINT UE/EU RESTRICTED".
Del 2 — Bestemmelsessteder
Denne tilladelse er gyldig i hele Unionens toldområde for eksport til alle bestemmelsessteder, undtagen:
a)
bestemmelsessteder, der er berettiget til eksport i henhold til den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse nr. EU001
b)
Afghanistan, Armenien, Aserbajdsjan, Cambodja, Den Centralafrikanske Republik, Congo, Den Demokratiske Republik Congo, Egypten, Eritrea, De Forenede Arabiske Emirater, Georgien, Hviderusland, Iran, Irak, Israel, Kasakhstan, Kina (herunder Hongkong og Macao), Kirgisistan, Korea, Libanon, Libyen, Malaysia, Mali, Mauritius, Mongoliet, Myanmar/Burma, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Rusland, Saudi-Arabien, Somalia, Sudan, Sydsudan, Syrien, Tadsjikistan, Turkmenistan, Usbekistan, Venezuela, Yemen, Zimbabwe
c)
ethvert andet bestemmelsessted end dem, der er anført i litra b), der er omfattet af en våbenembargo eller af restriktive EU-foranstaltninger gældende for produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
Del 3 — Betingelser og krav i forbindelse med anvendelsen
1.
Denne tilladelse indebærer ikke tilladelse til eksport af produkter, hvis
a)
eksportøren af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har sit hjemsted, er blevet gjort bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvis er eller kan være bestemt til:
i)
anvendelse i forbindelse med udvikling, fremstilling, håndtering, anvendelse, vedligeholdelse, oplagring, sporing, identificering eller spredning af kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben eller andre nukleare sprænglegemer eller til udvikling, fremstilling, vedligeholdelse eller oplagring af missiler, der kan fremføre sådanne våben
ii)
militær, paramilitær, politimæssig endelig anvendelse, endelig anvendelse til efterretnings- og overvågningsformål eller anden endelig anvendelse af en statslig sikkerhedstjeneste eller af enheder, der handler på statens vegne
iii)
anvendelse som dele eller komponenter i militære produkter, der er opført på nationale militære lister, og som er blevet eksporteret fra denne pågældende medlemsstats område uden tilladelse eller under tilsidesættelse af en tilladelse foreskrevet i den pågældende medlemsstats nationale lovgivning eller
iv)
brug i forbindelse med krænkelse af menneskerettighederne, de demokratiske principper eller ytringsfriheden som defineret i Den Europæiske Unions charter om grundlæggende rettigheder
b)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter helt eller delvist er bestemt til en af de i litra a) omhandlede anvendelser
c)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at de pågældende produkter vil blive geneksporteret til et bestemmelsessted, der er undtaget fra denne tilladelse, jf. del 2, litra b) eller litra c)
d)
de pågældende produkter eksporteres til en frizone eller et frilager, som er beliggende på et bestemmelsessted, der er omfattet af denne tilladelse
e)
eksportøren er bekendt med, at modtageren eller slutbrugeren af de pågældende produkter er en militær, paramilitær, politi- eller efterretningstjeneste eller en anden statslig sikkerhedstjeneste, eller at produkterne er bestemt til anvendelse af enheder, der handler på vegne af en af ovennævnte tjenester eller
f)
eksporten kontrolleres ved et punkt i bilag I til denne forordning, som ikke er specificeret i denne generelle EU-eksporttilladelse.
2.
Hvis der kræves en tolderklæring, erklærer eksportøren, at produkterne eksporteres i overensstemmelse med den generelle EU-eksporttilladelse EU008 i tolderklæringen.
3.
Eksportøren, der agter at anvende denne tilladelse, foretager registrering forud for den første anvendelse af tilladelsen hos den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted. Registreringen foretages automatisk og anerkendes af den kompetente myndighed over for eksportøren inden for ti arbejdsdage efter modtagelsen.
4.
Den registrerede eksportør indberetter den første anvendelse af tilladelsen til den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor den registrerede eksportør er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, senest ti dage før den første eksport.
5.
Eksportøren indsender på anmodning af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, tekniske data om enhver planlagt eller gennemført eksport i henhold til denne tilladelse. Hvis der er anmodet om sådanne tekniske data vedrørende et bestemt produkt, og de tekniske data ændres, underretter eksportøren straks den kompetente myndighed herom. De tekniske data skal som minimum omfatte følgende oplysninger om produktet:
a)
fabrikant
b)
produktnavn
c)
modelnummer
d)
produktbeskrivelse – en kort generel beskrivelse af produktet, som kan være indeholdt i en produktbrochure
e)
om nødvendigt, som fastsat af den kompetente myndighed, tekniske specifikationer, som omfatter:
i)
en liste over alle relevante kryptografiske algoritmer, herunder tilknyttet nøgleforvaltning, vedrørende datafortrolighed
ii)
en liste over protokoller, som produktet er omfattet af
iii)
specifikation af for- eller efterbehandling af data såsom komprimering af almindelig tekst eller pakning af krypterede data
iv)
nærmere oplysninger om programmeringsgrænseflader, der kan anvendes til at få adgang til produktets kryptografiske funktionalitet
f)
eksportkontrolklassificering.
6.
Den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor eksportøren er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, kan af hensyn til den nationale sikkerhed forbyde eksportøren at anvende denne generelle EU-eksporttilladelse for ethvert produkt, der er nævnt i del 1. Den pågældende medlemsstat underretter Kommissionen og de øvrige medlemsstater om anvendelsen af denne bestemmelse.
7.
Den registrerede eksportør foretager på anmodning af den kompetente myndighed i den medlemsstat, hvor den registrerede eksportør er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted, indberetning om anvendelsen af denne tilladelse. Efter anmodning foretages indberetningen om anvendelse af denne tilladelse mindst en gang om året og skal som minimum indeholde følgende oplysninger:
a)
eksportkontrolklassificering af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
b)
mængden og værdien af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse
c)
modtagerens navn og adresse
d)
den endelige anvendelse samt slutbrugeren af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse, når disse forhold kendes
e)
en henvisning til den seneste indberetning af tekniske data for produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
I.   LISTE OMHANDLET I ARTIKEL 12, STK. 6, LITRA A), I DENNE FORORDNING OG I DETTE BILAGS AFSNIT A, C, D OG G
Under de enkelte punkter gives der ikke altid en fuldstændig beskrivelse af produkterne og de dertil knyttede noter i bilag I. Kun bilag I indeholder en fuldstændig beskrivelse af produkterne.
Anførelsen af et produkt i dette afsnit berører ikke anvendelsen af den generelle softwarenote (GSN) i bilag I.
—
Alle produkter, der er specificeret i bilag IV.
—
0C001 "Naturligt uran" eller "depleteret uran" eller thorium i form af metal, legering, kemisk forbindelse eller koncentrat og et hvilket som helst andet materiale, der indeholder et eller flere af de nævnte stoffer.
—
0C002 Andre "specielle, fissile materialer" end dem, der er specificeret i bilag IV.
—
0D001 "Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "…" af produkter, der er specificeret i kategori 0, når de har forbindelse med 0C001 eller med de produkter i 0C002, der er udelukket fra bilag IV.
—
0E001 "Teknologi" ifølge noten vedrørende nuklear teknologi (NTN), til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "…" af produkter, der er specificeret i kategori 0, når de har forbindelse med 0C001 eller med de produkter i 0C002, der er udelukket fra bilag IV.
—
1A102 Resaturerede pyroliserede carbon-carbon komponenter udviklet til løftefartøjer til 'rumfartøjer' som specificeret i 9A004 eller raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104.
—
1C351 Humane patogener, zoonoser og "toksiner".
—
1C353 Genetiske elementer og genetisk modificerede organismer.
—
1C354 Plantepatogener.
—
1C450.a.1. Amiton: O,O-diethyl-S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] phosphorthiolat (78-53-5) og alkylerede eller protoniserede salte deraf.
—
1C450.a.2. PFIB: 1,1,3,3,3-pentafluor-2-(trifluormethyl)-1-propen (382-21-8).
—
7E104 "Teknologi" til integrering af data vedrørende styring, navigation og fremdrift i et flyve-managementsystem til optimering af et raketsystems bane.
—
9A009.a. Hybride raketfremdrivningssystemer med total impulseffekt på mere end 1,1 MNs.
—
9A117 Rakettrinmekanismer, adskillelsesmekanismer og mellemtrin, anvendelige i "missiler".
(
1
)
  Aftale om Det Forenede Kongerige Storbritannien og Nordirlands udtræden af Den Europæiske Union og Det Europæiske Atomenergifællesskab (
EUT L 29 af 31.1.2020, s. 7
).
BILAG III
FORMULARMODELLER FOR TILLADELSER
A.   Formularmodel til individuelle eller globale eksporttilladelser
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 2 i denne forordning)
Medlemsstaterne bestræber sig ved udstedelsen af eksporttilladelser på at sikre, at det af formularen fremgår, hvilken form for tilladelse der er tale om (individuel eller global).
Denne eksporttilladelse er gyldig i alle Den Europæiske Unions medlemsstater indtil dens udløbsdato.
DEN EUROPÆISKE UNION
EKSPORT AF PRODUKTER MED DOBBELT ANVENDELSE (forordning (EU) 2021/821)
1
1.
Eksportør
Nr.
2.
Løbenummer
3.
Gyldig til (hvis relevant)
EKSPORTTILLADELSE
4.
Kontaktoplysninger
5.
Modtager
6.
Udstedende myndighed
7.
Agent/repræsentant (hvis anden end eksportør)
Nr.
8.
Land, hvorfra produktet er afsendt
Kode
9.
Slutbruger (hvis anden end modtager)
10.
I hvilken medlemsstat er eller vil produkterne blive placeret?
Kode
11.
Medlemsstat, hvor den toldmæssige eksportprocedure forventes foretaget
Kode
1
12.
Endeligt bestemmelsesland
Kode
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
 (
1
)
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Kode i det harmoniserede system eller den kombinerede nomenklatur (hvis relevant med otte cifre, CAS-nummer, hvis relevant)
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten (for opførte produkter)
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
19.
Produktets endelige anvendelse
20.
Ordre-/kontraktdato (hvis relevant)
21.
Toldeksportprocedure
22.
Supplerende oplysninger, der kræves i henhold til national lovgivning (specificeres på formularen)
Til fortrykte oplysninger
efter medlemsstaternes skøn
Udfyldes af den udstedende myndighed
Underskrift
Udstedende myndighed
Stempel
Dato
1 a
1.
Eksportør
2.
Løbenummer
EKSPORTTILLADELSE
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode (hvis relevant med otte cifre, CAS-nummer, hvis relevant)
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten (for opførte produkter)
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode (hvis relevant med otte cifre, CAS-nummer, hvis relevant)
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten (for opførte produkter)
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
13.
Produktbeskrivelse
14.
Oprindelsesland
Kode
2
15.
Produktkode
16.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten
17.
Valuta og værdi
18.
Mængde
Note: I del 1 i kolonne 24 anføres den stadig disponible mængde, og i del 2 i kolonne 24 anføres den mængde, der fratrækkes ved denne lejlighed.
23.
Nettomængde/værdi (nettomasse/anden enhed med angivelse af enhed)
26.
Tolddokument (type og nummer) eller uddrag (nr.) og dato for fratrækning
27.
Medlemsstat, navn og underskrift, den udstedende myndigheds stempel
24.
I tal
25.
Fratrukket mængde/værdi angivet med bogstaver
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
B.   Formularmodel med henblik på tilladelse til mæglervirksomhed / teknisk bistand
(jf. artikel 13, stk. 5, i denne forordning)
DEN EUROPÆISKE UNION
MÆGLERVIRKSOMHED/TEKNISK BISTAND (forordning (EU) 2021/821)
1
1.
Mægler/ leverandør af teknisk bistand / ansøger
Nr.
2.
Løbenummer
3.
Gyldig til
(hvis relevant)
EKSPORTTILLADELSE
4.
Kontaktoplysninger
5.
Eksportør i oprindelsestredjeland (hvis relevant)
6.
Udstedende myndighed
7.
Modtager
Nr.
8.
Den medlemsstat, hvor mægleren / leverandøren af teknisk bistand er hjemmehørende eller har hjemsted
Kode
 (
2
)
9.
Oprindelsestredjeland/tredjeland, hvor de produkter, der er genstand for mæglervirksomhed, er placeret
Kode
 (
2
)
10.
Slutbruger i bestemmelsestredjelandet (hvis anden end modtager)
11.
Bestemmelsestredjeland
Kode
 (
2
)
12.
Involverede tredjeparter, f.eks. agenter (hvis relevant)
1
13.
Produktbeskrivelse / Beskrivelse af teknisk bistand
14.
Kode i det harmoniserede system eller den kombinerede nomenklatur (hvis relevant)
15.
Kategorinr. i kontrollisten (hvis relevant)
16.
Valuta og værdi
17.
Mængde (hvis relevant)
18.
Produktets endelige anvendelse
19.
Supplerende oplysninger, der kræves i henhold til national lovgivning (specificeres på formularen)
Til fortrykte oplysninger
efter medlemsstaternes skøn
Udfyldes af den udstedende myndighed
Underskrift
Udstedende myndighed
Stempel
Dato
C.   Fællesoplysninger i forbindelse med offentliggørelsen af generelle nationale eksporttilladelser i nationale statstidender
(jf. artikel 12, stk. 6, litra b), i denne forordning)
1.
Overskrift på den generelle nationale eksporttilladelse
2.
Den udstedende myndigheds navn
3.
EU-gyldighed. Følgende tekst skal anvendes:
"Dette er en generel national eksporttilladelse i henhold til artikel 12, stk. 6, i forordning (EU) 2021/821. I overensstemmelse med artikel 12, stk. 6, i nævnte forordning er tilladelsen gyldig i alle Den Europæiske Unions medlemsstater."
Gyldighed: i henhold til national praksis
4.
For produkterne skal følgende indledning anvendes:
"Denne eksporttilladelse omfatter følgende produkter"
5.
For bestemmelsesstederne skal følgende indledning anvendes:
"Denne eksporttilladelse gælder for eksport til følgende bestemmelsessteder"
6.
Betingelser og krav
(
1
)
  Denne beskrivelse kan om nødvendigt anføres i et eller flere bilag til denne formular (1a). I så fald angives det nøjagtige antal bilag i denne rubrik. Beskrivelsen bør være så nøjagtig som mulig og, hvis det er relevant, omfatte CAS-nummer eller andre referencer, særlig for kemiske produkter.
(
2
)
  Jf. forordning (EF) nr. 1172/95 (
EFT L 118 af 25.5.1995, s. 10
).
BILAG IV
LISTE OVER PRODUKTER MED DOBBELT ANVENDELSE JF. DENNE FORORDNINGS ARTIKEL 11, STK. 1
Under de enkelte punkter gives der ikke altid en fuldstændig beskrivelse af produkterne og de dertil knyttede noter i bilag I
(
1
)
. 
Kun bilag I indeholder en fuldstændig beskrivelse af produkterne.
Anførelsen af et produkt i dette bilag berører ikke anvendelsen af bestemmelserne om masseforhandlede produkter i bilag I.
Udtryk, der står mellem dobbelte anførselstegn, er defineret i den globale definitionsliste i bilag I.
DEL I
(mulighed for generel national tilladelse til handel inden for Unionen)
Produkter under stealthteknologi
1C001
Materialer, der er specielt udviklet til brug for at absorbere elektromagnetiske bølger eller intrinsisk ledende polymerer.
NB JF. LIGELEDES 1C101
1C101
Materialer og indretninger til formindskede observerbare størrelser som radarreflektivitet, ultraviolet/infrarøde og akustiske signaturer ud over dem, der er specificeret i 1C001, til anvendelse i 'missiler', "missil"-undersystemer eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, der er specificeret i 9A012.
Note:
 1C101 lægger ikke eksportkontrol på materialer, hvis disse varer er formuleret udelukkende til civil anvendelse.
Teknisk note:
I 1C101 er 'missiler' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på over 300 km.
1D103
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til analyse af reducerede observerbare størrelser som radarreflektivitet, ultraviolette/infrarøde signaturer og akustiske signaturer.
1E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 1C101 eller 1D103.
1E102
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af "software", der er specificeret i 1D103.
6B008
Impulsradar-systemer til måling af tværsnit (RCS) med sendeimpulsbredde på 100 ns eller mindre og specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil.
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES 6B108
6B108
Systemer, der er specielt konstrueret til måling af radartværsnit, og som er anvendelige i forbindelse med 'missiler' og deres undersystemer.
Teknisk note:
I 6B108 forstås ved 'missil' komplette raketsystemer og ubemandede luftfartøjssystemer med en rækkevidde på mere end 300 km.
Produkter under Unionens strategiske kontrol
1A007
Følgende udstyr og anordninger, der er specielt konstrueret til ad elektrisk vej at bringe sprængladninger og anordninger, der indeholder "energimaterialer", til sprængning:
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL, 3A229 OG 3A232.
a.
Eksplosive detonatortændapparater konstrueret til at drive 
flere, styrede
 detonatorer, der er specificeret i 1A007.b. 
nedenfor
b.
Følgende elektrisk aktiverede detonatorer:
1.
Eksplosive broer (EB)
2.
Tråd til eksplosive broer (EBW)
3.
Tændere med slapper
4.
Tændere med eksplosiv folie (EFI).
Note:
 1A007.b. lægger ikke eksportkontrol på detonatorer, der kun bruger primære sprængstoffer som f.eks. blyazid.
1C239
Højeksplosive stoffer ud over dem, der er specificeret i kontrolbestemmelserne for produkter til militære formål, eller stoffer eller blandinger indeholdende mere end 2 vægtprocent deraf med en krystalmassetæthed på mere end 1,8 g/cm
3
 og en detonationshastighed på mere end 8 000  m/s.
1E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 1C239.
3A229
Følgende stærkstrømsimpulsgivere…
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL
3A232
Følgende flerpunktstændsystemer, bortset fra dem, der er specificeret i 1A007 
ovenfor
…
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES KONTROLBESTEMMELSERNE FOR PRODUKTER TIL MILITÆRE FORMÅL
3E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 3A229 eller 3A232.
6A001
Akustisk udstyr begrænset til nedenstående:
6A001.a.1.b.
Objektsøgnings- eller stedbestemmelsessystemer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Sendefrekvens 
under 5 kHz
6.
Konstrueret til at modstå …
6A001.a.2.a.2.
Hydrofoner … Med …
6A001.a.2.a.3.
Hydrofoner... Med en eller flere ...
6A001.a.2.a.6.
Hydrofoner … Konstrueret til …
6A001.a.2.b.
Slæbte akustiske hydrofonsystemer …
6A001.a.2.c.
Databehandlingsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til 
tidstro anvendelse med
 slæbte akustiske hydrofonsystemer med "brugertilgængelig programmerbarhed" og tids- eller frekvensdomænebehandling og korrelering, herunder spektralanalyse, digital filtrering og stråleformning ved hjælp af Fast Fourier eller andre transformeringer eller processer.
6A001.a.2.e.
Dybvands- eller lavvandskabelhydrofonsystemer med en eller flere af følgende egenskaber:
1.
Omfatter hydrofoner … 
eller
2.
Omfatter multiplexede hydrofongruppesignalmoduler …
6A001.a.2.f.
Databehandlingsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til 
tidstro anvendelse med
 dybvands- eller lavvandskabelsystemer med "brugertilgængelig programmerbarhed" og tids- eller frekvensdomænebehandling og korrelering, herunder spektralanalyse, digital filtrering og stråleformning ved hjælp af Fast Fourier eller andre transformeringer eller processer.
6D003.a.
"Software" til "tidstro behandling" af akustiske data.
8A002.o.3.
Følgende støjdæmpningssystemer til brug i skibe på mindst1 000  ton deplacement:
b.
'Aktiv støjdæmpning eller støjudligning', eller magnetiske lejer, specielt konstrueret til krafttransmissionssystemer, og med elektroniske kontrolsystemer, der er i stand til aktivt at reducere udstyrets vibration ved at danne antistøj- eller antivibrationssignaler direkte til kilden.
Teknisk note:
'Aktiv støjdæmpning eller støjudligning' omfatter elektroniske kontrolsystemer, der er i stand til aktivt at reducere udstyrets vibration ved at danne antistøj- eller antivibrationssignaler direkte til kilden.
8E002.a.
"Teknologi" til "udvikling", "produktion", reparation, hovedreparation eller renovering (nybearbejdning) af propeller, der er specielt konstrueret til reduktion af undervandsstøj.
Produkter under Unionens strategiske kontrol — kryptering — kategori 5, Del 2
5A004.a.
Udstyr, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til at udføre 'kryptoanalytiske funktioner'.
Note:
 5A004.a. omfatter systemer og udstyr, der er designet eller modificeret til at udføre 'kryptoanalytiske funktioner' ved hjælp af dekompilering.
Teknisk note:
'Kryptoanalytiske funktioner' er funktioner, der er designet til at modstå kryptografiske mekanismer med henblik på at udlede konfidentielle variabler eller følsomme data, herunder klar tekst, kodeord eller krypteringsnøgler.
5D002.a.
"Software", der er specielt udviklet eller modificeret til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af følgende:
3.
Følgende udstyr:
a.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.a.
b.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.b.
5D002.c.
"Software" med egenskaber som, eller som udfører eller simulerer samme funktioner som følgende:
3.
Følgende udstyr:
a.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.a.
b.
Udstyr, der er specificeret i 5A004.b.
5E002.a.
Kun "teknologi" til "udvikling", "produktion" eller "brug" af de produkter, der er specificeret i 5A004.a, 5D002.a.3. eller 5D002.c.3. 
ovenfor
.
Produkter under MTCR-teknologi
7A117
"Styreenheder"', der er anvendelige i "missiler", som er i stand til at opnå en systemnøjagtighed på 3,33% eller derunder af rækkevidden (f.eks. en 'CEP' på 10 km eller derunder på en afstand af 300 km), 
undtagen "styreenheder", der er konstrueret til missiler med en rækkevidde på mindre end 300 km eller bemandede fly
.
Teknisk note:
I 7A117 er 'CEP' (Circular Error Probable eller Circle of Equal Probability) et udtryk for nøjagtighed, der defineres som den radius af en cirkel med målet som centrum, på en bestemt afstand, i hvilken 50% af nyttelasterne rammer.
7B001
Prøve-, kalibrerings- og indstillingsudstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til udstyr, der er specificeret 
i 7A117 ovenfor
.
Note: 7B001 pålægger ikke kontrol med prøve-, kalibrerings- og indstillingsudstyr til 'Vedligeholdelsesniveau I' eller 'Vedligeholdelsesniveau II'.
7B003
Udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret 
i 7A117 ovenfor
.
7B103
"Produktionsfaciliteter", der er specielt konstrueret til udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A117 
ovenfor
.
7D101
"Software", der er specielt konstrueret til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7B003 eller 7B103 
ovenfor
.
7E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret 
i 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 eller 7D101 ovenfor
.
7E002
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret 
i 7A117, 7B003 eller 7B103 ovenfor
.
7E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 og 7D101 
ovenfor
.
9A004
Løftefartøjer til 'rumfartøjer', 
som kan transportere en nyttelast på mindst 500 kg over en afstand af mindst 300 km
.
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES 9A104.
Note 1: 9A004 pålægger ikke kontrol med nyttelast.
9A005
Raketfremdrivningssystemer med flydende brændstof, indeholdende komponenter eller systemer, der er specificeret i 9A006, 
anvendelige i løftefartøjer til 'rumfartøjer' som specificeret i 9A004 ovenfor eller raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104 nedenfor
.
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES 9A105 og 9A119.
9A007.a.
Raketfremdrivningssystemer med fast brændstof, 
anvendelige i løftefartøjer til 'rumfartøjer' som specificeret i 9A004 ovenfor eller raketsonder
 som specificeret i 9A104 nedenfor med:
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES 9A119.
a.
Total impulseffekt over 1,1 MNs.
9A008.d.
Følgende komponenter, der er specielt konstrueret til raketfremdrivningssystemer med fast brændstof:
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES 9A108.c
d.
Bevægelige dyser eller trykvektorkontrolsystemer med sekundær væskeinjektion, 
anvendelige i løftefartøjer til 'rumfartøjer' som specificeret i 9A004 ovenfor eller raketsonder som specificeret i 9A104 nedenfor
 og som er i stand til:
1.
Omniaksial bevægelse på mere end ± 5°
2.
Vinkelvektorrotation på mindst 20°/s 
eller
3.
Vinkelvektoraccelerationer på mindst 40°/s
2
.
9A104
Raketsonder, som kan 
transportere en nyttelast på mindst 500 kg med
 en rækkevidde på mindst 300 km.
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES 9A004
9A105.a.
Følgende raketmotorer med flydende drivstof:
NB
 JF. LIGELEDES 9A119
a.
Raketmotorer med flydende drivstof, anvendelige i 'missiler', ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A005, som er integreret eller beregnet til at kunne integreres i et fremdrivningssystem med flydende brændstof med en total impulskapacitet på 1,1,1MNs eller derover; 
undtagen apogæummotorer med flydende brændstof, der er konstrueret eller modificeret til satellitapplikationer med følgende egenskaber:
1.
dysehalsdiameter på 20 mm eller derunder og
2.
forbrændingskammertryk på 15 bar eller derunder.
9A106.c.
Følgende systemer eller komponenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A006, 
anvendelige i "missiler"
 og specielt konstrueret til raketfremdrivningssystemer med flydende brændstof:
c.
Undersystemer til trykvektorstyring, 
undtagen systemer, der er konstrueret til raketsystemer, som ikke kan transportere en nyttelast på mindst 500 kg med en rækkevidde på mindst 300 km
.
Teknisk note:
Eksempler på metoder til opnåelse af trykvektorstyring, som er specificeret i 9A106.c., er:
1.
Bøjelig dyse
2.
Indsprøjtning af væske eller sekundær gas
3.
Bevægelig motor eller dyse
4.
Afbøjning af udblæsningsgasstrømmen (jetfinner eller sonder) eller
5.
Brug af trykklapper.
9A108.c.
Følgende komponenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A008, 
anvendelige i 'missiler'
, og specielt konstrueret til raketfremdrivningssystemer med fast brændstof:
c.
Undersystemer til trykvektorstyring, 
undtagen systemer, der er konstrueret til raketsystemer, som ikke kan transportere en nyttelast på mindst 500 kg med en rækkevidde på mindst 300 km
.
Teknisk note:
Eksempler på metoder til opnåelse af trykvektorstyring som specificeret i 9A108.c., er:
1.
Bøjelig dyse
2.
Indsprøjtning af væske eller sekundær gas
3.
Bevægelig motor eller dyse
4.
Afbøjning af udblæsningsgasstrømmen (jetfinner eller sonder) eller
5.
Brug af trykklapper.
9A116
Reentry vehicles, anvendelige i "missiler", og udstyr der er konstrueret eller modificeret hertil, 
bortset fra reentry vehicles konstrueret til anden nyttelast end våben, som følger
:
a.
Reentry vehicles
b.
Varmeskjolde og komponenter hertil, som er fremstillet af keramiske eller ablative materialer
c.
Køleflader og komponenter hertil, som er fremstillet af lette materialer med stor varmeledningsevne
d.
Elektronisk udstyr, der er specielt konstrueret til reentry vehicles.
9A119
Individuelle rakettrin, anvendelige i komplette raketsystemer eller ubemandede luftfartøjer, der kan 
transportere en nyttelast på mindst 500 kg med
 en rækkevidde på 300 km, ud over dem, der er specificeret i 9A005 eller 9A007.a. ovenfor.
9B115
Specielt konstrueret "produktionsudstyr" til de systemer, undersystemer og komponenter, der er specificeret i 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 eller 9A119 
ovenfor
.
9B116
Specielt konstruerede "produktionsfaciliteter" til løftefartøjer til 'rumfartøjer', der er specificeret i 9A004, eller systemer, undersystemer og komponenter, der er specificeret i 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 eller 9A119 
ovenfor
.
9D101
"Software", der er specielt udviklet til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 9B116 
ovenfor
.
9E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" af udstyr eller "software", der er specificeret i 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115, 9B116 eller 9D101 
ovenfor
.
9E002
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "produktion" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115 eller 9B116 
ovenfor
.
Note:
 For så vidt angår "teknologi" til reparation af konstruktioner, laminater eller materialer, se 1E002.f.
9E101
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af produkter, der er specificeret i 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 eller 9A119 
ovenfor
.
9E102
Teknologi', iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af løftefartøjer til 'rumfartøjer', der er specificeret i 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116, 9A119, 9B115, 9B116 eller 9D101 
ovenfor
.
Undtagelser:
Bilag IV pålægger ikke kontrol med produkter under MTCR-teknologi,
1.
som overføres på grundlag af ordrer i henhold til en aftalemæssig forbindelse fra Den Europæiske Rumorganisation (ESA), eller som ESA overfører for at udføre sine officielle opgaver,
2.
som overføres på grundlag af ordrer i henhold til en aftalemæssig forbindelse fra en medlemsstats nationale rumorganisation, eller som den overfører for at udføre sine officielle opgaver,
3.
som overføres på grundlag af ordrer i henhold til en aftalemæssig forbindelse i forbindelse med et udviklings- og produktionsprogram for raketaffyring på EU-plan, der er underskrevet af en eller flere europæiske regeringer,
4.
som overføres til et statskontrolleret raketaffyringssted inden for en medlemsstats område, medmindre den pågældende medlemsstat pålægger kontrol med sådanne overførsler inden for denne forordnings bestemmelser.
DEL II
(INGEN MULIGHED FOR GENEREL NATIONAL TILLADELSE TIL HANDEL INDEN FOR UNIONEN)
Produkter under CWC (konventionen om kemiske våben)
1C351.d.4.
Ricin
1C351.d.5.
Saxi-toxin
Produkter under NSG-teknologi
Med forbehold af følgende er hele kategori 0 i bilag I medtaget i bilag IV:
0C001: er ikke medtaget i bilag IV.
—
0C002: er ikke medtaget i bilag IV, bortset fra følgende specielle, fissile materialer:
a)
udskilt plutonium
b)
"uran beriget med uran-235 eller -233" ud over 20%.
—
0C003 kun hvis brugt i "atomreaktor" (inden for 0A001.a)
—
0D001 ("software") er medtaget i bilag IV, medmindre den har forbindelse med 0C001 eller til de produkter i 0C002, der er udelukket fra bilag IV
—
0E001 ("teknologi") er medtaget i bilag IV, medmindre den har forbindelse med 0C001 eller til de produkter i 0C002, der er udelukket fra bilag IV.
1B226
Elektromagnetiske isotopseparatorer, konstrueret til eller udstyret med enkelte eller multiple ionkilder, der er i stand til at afgive en total ionstrålestrøm på mindst 50 mA.
Note: 1B226 omfatter:
a.
Separatorer, der er i stand til at berige stabile isotoper
b.
Separatorer med både ionkilder og kollektorer i magnetfeltet og de konfigurationer, hvor de er uden for feltet.
1B231
Tritiumindretninger eller -anlæg og udstyr hertil som følger:
a.
Indretninger eller anlæg til produktion, udvinding, udtrækning, koncentrering eller håndtering af tritium
b.
Udstyr til tritiumindretninger eller -anlæg som følger:
1.
Hydrogen- eller heliumkøleenheder, der er i stand til at køle til 23 K (–250 °C) eller derunder, med en varmeafgivelseseffekt på mere end 150 W
2.
Systemer til lagring eller rensning af hydrogenisotoper ved anvendelse af metalhydrider som lagrings- eller rensningsmedie.
1B233
Indretninger eller anlæg og udstyr til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper som følger:
a.
Indretninger eller anlæg til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper
b.
Udstyr til adskillelse af lithiumisotoper som følger:
1.
Fyldlegemevæskevæskebyttersøjler specielt konstrueret til lithiumamalgamer
2.
Kviksølv- eller lithiumamalgampumper
3.
Lithiumamalgamelektrolyseceller
4.
Fordampere til koncentreret lithiumhydroxidopløsning.
1C012
Materialer som følger:
Teknisk note:
Disse materialer anvendes typisk til nukleare varmekilder.
b.
"Tidligere separeret" neptunium-237 i enhver form.
Note: 1C012.b pålægger ikke kontrol med forsendelser med et indhold af neptunium-237 på højst 1 g.
1C233
Lithium beriget til lithium-6 (
6
Li) isotopen med mere end dets naturlige isotopiske indhold og produkter eller apparater indeholdende beriget lithium som følger: elementar lithium, legeringer, forbindelser eller blandinger indeholdende lithium, produkter heraf, affald og skrot af nogen af ovennævnte.
Note:
 1C233 pålægger ikke kontrol med termoluminiscente dosimetre.
Teknisk note:
Lithium-6's naturlige isotopiske indhold er ca. 6,5 vægtprocent (7,5 atomprocent).
1C235
Tritium og forbindelser og blandinger af tritium, i hvilke tritium/hydrogenatomforholdet overstiger 1 promille, og produkter eller apparater indeholdende nogle af ovennævnte.
Note:
 1C235 pålægger ikke kontrol med produkter eller apparater, som indeholder mindre end 1,48 × 10
3
 GBq (40 Ci) tritium
1E001
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "udvikling" eller "produktion" af udstyr eller materialer, der er specificeret i 1C012.b.
1E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af produkter, der er specificeret i 1B226, 1B231, 1B233, 1C233 eller 1C235.
3A228
Følgende koblingsindretninger:
a.
Koldkatoderør, også gasfyldte, som virker på samme måde som ved et gnistgab, og med samtlige følgende egenskaber:
1.
Indeholder tre eller flere elektroder
2.
Mærkeanodespidsspænding mindst 2,5 kV
3.
Mærkeanodespidsstrøm mindst 100 A og
4.
Anodeforsinkelse højst 10 μs.
Note:
 3A228 omfatter ligeledes gaskrytronrør og vakuumsprytronrør.
b.
Styrede gnistgab med begge følgende egenskaber:
1.
En anodeforsinkelse på højst 15 μs og
2.
Mærkespidsstrøm på mindst 500 A
3A231
Neutrongeneratorsystemer, herunder rør, der har begge følgende egenskaber:
a.
Er konstrueret til drift uden et eksternt vakuumsystem 
og
b.
Bruger elektrostatisk acceleration til fremkaldelse af en tritium-deuterium kernereaktion.
3E201
"Teknologi", iflg. den generelle teknologinote, til "brug" af udstyr, der er specificeret i 3A228 eller 3A231 
ovenfor
.
6A203
Følgende kameraer og komponenter ud over dem, der er specificeret i 6A003:
a.
Følgende streak-kameraer 
med mekanisk roterende spejl
 samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
1.
Streak-kameraer med skrivehastighed på mere end 0,5 mm pr. mikrosekund.
b.
Følgende billedkameraer 
med mekanisk roterende spejl
 samt specielt konstruerede komponenter hertil:
1.
Billedkameraer med optagelseshastighed på over 225 000  billeder pr. sekund
Note:
 I 6A203.a omfatter komponenter til sådanne kameraer disses synkroniseringselektronikenheder og rotorenheder bestående af turbiner, spejle og lejer
.
6A225
Hastighedsinterferometre til at måle hastigheder på mere end 1 km/s i tidsintervaller på mindre end 10 ms.
Note:
 6A225 omfatter hastighedsinterferometre som f.eks. VISAR'er og Doppler-laser-interferometre (DLI).
6A226
Følgende trykfølere:
a.
Choktrykmålere, som kan måle tryk på over 10 GPa, herunder målere fremstillet af manganin, ytterbium og polyvinylidenfluorid (PVDF)/polyvinyldifluorid (PVF
2
)
b.
Kvartstryktransducere til tryk på mere end 10 GPa.
(
1
)
  Forskelle i affattelse/anvendelsesområde mellem bilag I og bilag IV er angivet med fed skrift i kursiv.
BILAG V
OPHÆVET FORORDNING MED ÆNDRINGER
Rådets forordning (EF) nr. 428/2009 (
EUT L 134 af 29.5.2009, s. 1
)
Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) nr. 1232/2011 (
EUT L 326 af 8.12.2011, s. 26
)
Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) nr. 388/2012 (
EUT L 129 af 16.5.2012, s. 12
)
Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) nr. 599/2014 (
EUT L 173 af 12.6.2014, s. 79
)
Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) nr. 1382/2014 (
EUT L 371 af 30.12.2014, s. 1
).
Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2015/2420 (
EUT L 340 af 24.12.2015, s. 1
).
Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2016/1969 (
EUT L 307 af 15.11.2016, s. 1
)
Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2017/2268 (
EUT L 334 af 15.12.2017, s. 1
)
Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2018/1922 (
EUT L 319 af 14.12.2018, s. 1
)
Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2019/2199 (
EUT L 338 af 30.12.2019, s. 1
)
Kommissionens delegerede forordning (EU) 2020/1749 (
EUT L 421 af 14.12.2020, s. 1
)
Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) 2020/2171 (
EUT L 432 af 21.12.2020, s. 4
)
BILAG VI
SAMMENLIGNINGSTABEL
Forordning (EF) nr. 428/2009
Denne forordning
Artikel 1
Artikel 1
Artikel 2, indledningen
Artikel 2, indledningen
Artikel 2, nr. 1
Artikel 2, nr. 1
Artikel 2, nr. 2, indledning
Artikel 2, nr. 2, indledning
Artikel 2, nr. 2, nr. i) og ii)
Artikel 2, nr. 2, litra a) og b)
-
Artikel 2, nr. 2, litra c)
Artikel 2, nr. 2, nr. iii)
Artikel 2, nr. 2, litra d)
Artikel 2, nr. 3, første afsnit, indledning
Artikel 2, nr. 3, første afsnit, indledning
Artikel 2, nr. 3, første afsnit, nr. i)
Artikel 2, nr. 3, første afsnit, litra a)
Artikel 2, nr. 3, første afsnit, nr. ii)
Artikel 2, nr. 3, første afsnit, litra b)
Artikel 2, nr. 3, andet afsnit
Artikel 2, nr. 3, litra c)
-
Artikel 2, nr. 3, litra d)
Artikel 2, nr. 4
Artikel 2, nr. 4
-
Artikel 2, nr. 5
-
Artikel 2, nr. 6
Artikel 2, nr. 5, første afsnit, indledning
Artikel 2, nr. 7, første afsnit, indledning
Artikel 2, nr. 5, første afsnit, første led
Artikel 2, nr. 7
Artikel 2, nr. 5, første afsnit, andet led
Artikel 2, nr. 7
Artikel 2, nr. 5, andet afsnit
Artikel 2, nr. 7
Artikel 2, nr. 6
Artikel 2, nr. 8
-
Artikel 2, nr. 9 og 10
Artikel 2, nr. 7
Artikel 2, nr. 11
Artikel 2, nr. 8
Artikel 2, nr. 12
Artikel 2, nr. 9
Artikel 2, nr. 15
Artikel 2, nr. 10
Artikel 2, nr. 13
-
Artikel 2, nr. 14
Artikel 2, nr. 11
Artikel 2, nr. 16
Artikel 2, nr. 12
Artikel 2, nr. 17
Artikel 2, nr. 13
Artikel 2, nr. 18
-
Artikel 2, nr. 19
-
Artikel 2, nr. 20
-
Artikel 2, nr. 21 og 22
Artikel 3
Artikel 3
Artikel 4, stk. 1
Artikel 4, stk. 1, indledning og litra a)
Artikel 4, stk. 2, første punktum
Artikel 2, nr. 19, og artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b)
Artikel 4, stk. 2, andet punktum
Artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), indledning
Artikel 4, stk. 2, litra a), b) og c)
Artikel 4, stk. 1, litra b), nr. ii) og iii)
Artikel 4, stk. 3
Artikel 4, stk. 1, litra c)
Artikel 4, stk. 4
Artikel 4, stk. 2
Artikel 4, stk. 5
Artikel 4, stk. 3
Artikel 4, stk. 6
Artikel 4, stk. 4 og 5
Artikel 4, stk. 7
Artikel 4, stk. 6
-
Artikel 4, stk. 7
Artikel 4, stk. 8
Artikel 4, stk. 8
-
Artikel 5
Artikel 5, stk. 1, første punktum
Artikel 6, stk. 1
Artikel 5, stk. 1, andet punktum
Artikel 6, stk. 2
Artikel 5, stk. 2, 3 og 4
Artikel 6, stk. 3, 4 og 5
Artikel 6, stk. 1, første punktum
Artikel 7, stk. 1
Artikel 6, stk. 1, andet punktum
-
Artikel 6, stk. 2, første punktum
Artikel 7, stk. 2, første punktum
-
Artikel 7, stk. 2, andet punktum
Artikel 6, stk. 3
Artikel 7, stk. 3
Artikel 6, stk. 4
Artikel 7, stk. 4
Artikel 7
-
-
Artikel 8
Artikel 8
Artikel 9
-
Artikel 10
Artikel 9, stk. 1, første afsnit
Artikel 12, stk. 1, litra d)
Artikel 9, stk. 1, andet og tredje afsnit
Artikel 12, stk. 7
Artikel 9, stk. 1, fjerde og femte afsnit
Artikel 17 og 19
Artikel 9, stk. 2, første afsnit
Artikel 12, stk. 1, litra a-c), og artikel 12, stk. 2, første afsnit
Artikel 9, stk. 2, andet afsnit
Artikel 12, stk. 1, andet afsnit
-
Artikel 12, stk. 2, andet afsnit
-
Artikel 12, stk. 3
Artikel 9, stk. 2, tredje afsnit
Artikel 12, stk. 4, første og andet afsnit
-
Artikel 12, stk. 4, tredje afsnit
Artikel 9, stk. 3
Artikel 12, stk. 5
Artikel 9, stk. 4
Artikel 12, stk. 6
Artikel 9, stk. 5
-
Artikel 9, stk. 6
Artikel 12, stk. 6, fjerde afsnit, og artikel 23, stk. 1
Artikel 10, stk. 1, udvidet til også at omfatte teknisk bistand
Artikel 13, stk. 1, første afsnit, og artikel 13, stk. 2
-
Artikel 13, stk. 1, andet afsnit
Artikel 10, stk. 2
Artikel 13, stk. 3
Artikel 10, stk. 3
Artikel 13, stk. 4
Artikel 11
Artikel 14
Artikel 12, stk. 1
Artikel 15, stk. 1
Artikel 12, stk. 2
-
-
Artikel 15, stk. 2
Artikel 13
Artikel 16
Artikel 14, stk. 1
Artikel 12, stk. 2, tredje afsnit, og artikel 13, stk. 5, udvidet til også at omfatte teknisk bistand
Artikel 14, stk. 2
Artikel 12, stk. 4, fjerde afsnit
Artikel 15, stk. 1
Artikel 17, stk. 1, litra a)
Artikel 15, stk. 2
Artikel 20
Artikel 15, stk. 3
Artikel 17, stk. 1, indledning og litra b)
-
Artikel 17, stk. 2
Artikel 16
Artikel 21
Artikel 17
Artikel 22
Artikel 18
-
Artikel 19, stk. 1
-
Artikel 19, stk. 1, indledning
Artikel 23, stk. 2, indledning
-
Artikel 232, stk. 2, litra a)
-
Artikel 23, stk. 2, litra b)
-
Artikel 23, stk. 2, litra c)
Artikel 19, stk. 2, litra a)
Artikel 23, stk. 2, litra d)
Artikel 19, stk. 2, litra b)
Artikel 23, stk. 2, litra e)
-
Artikel 23, stk. 3
-
Artikel 23, stk. 4
Artikel 19, stk. 3
Artikel 23, stk. 5
Artikel 19, stk. 4
Artikel 23, stk. 6
Artikel 19, stk. 5
Artikel 26, stk. 1, andet punktum
Artikel 19, stk. 6
Artikel 23, stk. 7
Artikel 20, stk. 1-3
Artikel 27, stk. 1-3
Artikel 21
Artikel 28
Artikel 22, stk. 1 og 2
Artikel 11, stk. 1 og 2
Artikel 22, stk. 3 og 4
Artikel 11, stk. 3 og 4
Artikel 22, stk. 5-7
Artikel 11, stk. 5-7
Artikel 22, stk. 8
Artikel 27, stk. 4
Artikel 22, stk. 9 og 10
Artikel 11, stk. 8 og 9
Artikel 23, stk. 1 og 2
Artikel 24, stk. 1 og 2
-
Artikel 24, stk. 3
-
Artikel 24, stk. 4
Artikel 23, stk. 3
Artikel 26, stk. 2
-
Artikel 26, stk. 3
-
Artikel 26, stk. 4
Artikel 23a, stk. 1
Artikel 18, stk. 1
Artikel 23a, stk. 2 og 3
Artikel 18, stk. 2 og 3
-
Artikel 18, stk. 4
Artikel 23a, stk. 4 og 5
Artikel 18, stk. 5 og 6
Artikel 23b
Artikel 19
Artikel 24
Artikel 25, stk. 1
-
Artikel 25, stk. 2
Artikel 25, stk. 1
Artikel 23, stk. 1, første og andet afsnit
Artikel 25, stk. 2 og 3
-
Artikel 25, stk. 4
Artikel 26, stk. 2
-
Artikel 29, stk. 1
Artikel 25a
Artikel 29, stk. 2
Artikel 26
-
-
Artikel 30
Artikel 27
Artikel 31
Artikel 28
Artikel 32
Bilag I
Bilag I
-
Bilag I
Bilag IIa
Bilag II, afsnit A
Bilag IIb
Bilag II, afsnit B
Bilag IIc
Bilag II, afsnit C
Bilag IId
Bilag II, afsnit D
Bilag IIe
Bilag II, afsnit E
Bilag IIf
Bilag II, afsnit F
-
Bilag II, afsnit G
-
Bilag II, afsnit H
Bilag IIg
Bilag II, afsnit I
Bilag IIIa
Bilag III, afsnit A
Bilag IIIb
Bilag III, afsnit B
Bilag IIIc
Bilag III, afsnit C
Bilag IV
Bilag IV
Bilag V
Bilag V
Bilag VI
Bilag VI

Summary:
Kontrol med eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
RESUMÉ AF:
Rådets forordning (EU) 2021/821 om en EU-ordning for kontrol med eksport, mæglervirksomhed, teknisk bistand, transit og overførsel i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
HVAD ER FORMÅLET MED FORORDNINGEN?
 
Den fastsætter bestemmelser for hele 
Den Europæiske Union
 (EU) om kontrol med eksport, 
mæglervirksomhed
1
, teknisk bistand, transit og overførsel i forbindelse med 
produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
2
.
HOVEDPUNKTER
 
Forordningens bilag I indeholder en liste baseret på kontroller, der er vedtaget internationalt, over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, der kræver eksporttilladelse. Listen over produkter med dobbelt anvendelse ændres regelmæssigt (se den opdaterede liste i 
konsolideret version
 af forordning (EU) 2021/821.
Disse omfatter:
nukleart materiale og faciliteter samt nukleart udstyr
særlige materialer og tilhørende udstyr
materialebehandling
elektronik
computere
telekommunikation og informationssikkerhed
sensorer og lasere
styring af fly og skibe
skibsteknologi
rumfart og fremdriftssystemer.
Andre produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, herunder al dertilhørende mæglervirksomhed eller teknisk bistand, kræver eksporttilladelse, hvis de helt eller delvist er bestemt til:
kemiske, biologiske eller nukleare våben
militær anvendelse i lande, der er genstand for en våbenembargo
komponenter i militære produkter, som bliver eksporteret fra en 
EU-medlemsstat
 uden den nødvendige tilladelse.
Der kræves godkendelse for:
eksport af cyberovervågningsprodukter, der sandsynligvis vil blive anvendt til intern undertrykkelse eller alvorlige krænkelser af menneskerettigheder og den humanitære folkeret
overførsel af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som er opført i bilag IV, for eksempel stealthteknologi og produkter under strategisk kontrol, fra én medlemsstat til en anden.
Medlemsstaterne kan:
forbyde transit gennem deres område af ikke-EU-produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, hvis deres tiltænkte anvendelse ville være i strid med forordningen
forbyde eller kræve tilladelse til eksport af produkter, der ikke er opført på listen i bilag I, af hensyn til den offentlige sikkerhed, herunder terrorhandlinger eller krænkelser af menneskerettigheder
kræve en eksporttilladelse til overførsel af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse fra sit område til en anden medlemsstat under visse omstændigheder.
Forordningen omhandler fem typer eksporttilladelser, der er gyldige i hele EU’s toldområde.
Generelle EU-eksporttilladelser.
 Disse er til visse bestemmelsessteder underlagt særlige betingelser. De omfatter godkendelse til eksport til Australien, Canada, Island, Japan, Liechtenstein, New Zealand, Norge, Schweiz, Det Forenede Kongerige og De Forenede Stater.
Generelle nationale eksporttilladelser.
 Disse udstedes af medlemsstaterne, hvis de er i overensstemmelse med eksisterende generelle EU-eksporttilladelser, og de ikke omfatter eksport af software og teknologi med dobbelt anvendelse til visse lande (bilag II G).
Individuelle og globale.
 Disse udstedes af nationale myndigheder for op til to år til én 
eksportør
3
 til eksport af:
et eller flere produkter med dobbelt anvendelse til én slutbruger i et ikke-EU-land (individuel) eller
flere genstande, lande og slutbrugere (global).
Tilladelser til stort projekt.
 En individuel eksporttilladelse eller en global eksporttilladelse, der udstedes til en bestemt eksportør for en type eller kategori af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse, som kan være gyldig for eksport til en eller flere angivne slutbrugere i et eller flere angivne ikke-EU-lande for et specifikt stort projekt.
Eksportører, der ansøger om en tilladelse, skal:
give myndighederne fyldestgørende oplysninger, navnlig om
slutbrugeren
bestemmelseslandet
det eksporterede produkts slutanvendelse
føre udførlige registre vedrørende deres eksport i fem år, herunder handelsdokumenter, såsom fakturaer og ladningsmanifester, for at kunne identificere:
beskrivelserne og mængderne af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse
eksportørens og modtagerens navn og adresse
den endelige anvendelse samt slutbrugeren, når disse forhold kendes.
Tilladelser til at udøve mæglervirksomhed og teknisk bistand udstedes af nationale myndigheder og er gyldige i hele EU’s toldområde. De kræver oplysninger om:
placering, beskrivelse og mængde af produkterne med dobbelt anvendelse
tredjeparter, der er involveret
bestemmelseslandet
slutbrugeren og placeringen.
Medlemsstaterne skal, når de beslutter at imødekomme eller afvise en anmodning om tilladelse, tage følgende i betragtning:
EU’s samt nationale og internationale forpligtelser og tilsagn, særligt vedrørende ikke-spredningsregimer og eksportkontrolordninger
alle 
sanktioner
 vedtaget af EU, 
Organisationen for Sikkerhed og Samarbejde i Europa
 eller 
De Forenede Nationer
nationale udenrigs- og sikkerhedspolitiske afgørelser
den tiltænkte endelige anvendelse og faren for omdirigering til en anden slutbruger eller anden endelig anvendelse.
Medlemsstaterne skal:
underrette 
Europa-Kommissionen
 om:
de nationale myndigheder, der har tilladelse til at udstede eksporttilladelser og forbyde transit af ikke-EU-produkter med dobbelt anvendelse
de foranstaltninger, der træffes for at håndhæve forordningen
træffe hensigtsmæssige foranstaltninger sammen med Kommissionen for at etablere et direkte samarbejde og udveksling af oplysninger mellem nationale myndigheder for at sikre effektivitet og håndhævelse af eksportkontrollerne
give Kommissionen de nødvendige oplysninger til dennes årlige beretning.
Kommissionen har følgende ansvarsområder.
Den udvikler et sikkert og krypteret system for at støtte samarbejde og udveksling af oplysninger mellem nationale myndigheder og, når det er hensigtsmæssigt, Kommissionen.
Sammen med 
Rådet
 udsteder den retningslinjer og henstillinger om bedste praksis for at sikre systemets effektivitet og ensartethed.
Den forelægger 
Europa-Parlamentet
 og Rådet en årlig beretning om gennemførelsen af forordningen i samråd med Koordinationsgruppen for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse. Denne beretning omfatter antal, værdi af og bestemmelsesstedet for tilladelser og afviste anmodninger.
Den anvender en forenklet procedure (
delegerede retsakter
) til at ændre listen over produkter og bestemmelsessteder, der er underlagt særlige kontroller.
Den foretager en indledende evaluering af cyberovervågningsgodkendelser efter den 
10. september 2024
 og en fuld evaluering af forordningen mellem den 
10. september 2026
 og den 
10. september 2028
. Den forelægger begge evalueringsberetninger for Europa-Parlamentet, Rådet og 
Det Europæiske Økonomiske og Sociale Udvalg
.
Med forordningen nedsættes en Koordinationsgruppe for Produkter med Dobbelt Anvendelse med Kommissionen som formand og en repræsentant fra hver medlemsstat. Denne gruppe:
undersøger spørgsmål vedrørende lovgivningen
kan høre eksportører, mæglere, leverandører af teknisk bistand samt andre involverede personer og organer
nedsætter tekniske ekspertgrupper.
Kommissionen og medlemsstaterne bruger udveksling af oplysninger og bedste praksis, kapacitetsopbygning og opsøgende arbejde over for ikke-EU-lande til at fremme global konvergens i kontrollerne med eksport af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
Delegeret forordning (EU) 
2022/699
 ændrer forordning (EU) 2021/821 ved at slette Rusland som bestemmelsessted fra anvendelsesområdet for generelle EU-eksporttilladelser i lyset af Ruslands ulovlige angreb på Ukraines territoriale integritet, suverænitet og uafhængighed og de respektive trusler mod EU’s væsentlige sikkerhedsinteresser (se resumé om 
restriktive foranstaltninger mod Rusland
).
Ophævelse
Forordningen ophæver og 
omarbejder
 forordning (EF) 
nr. 
428/2009
 (se 
resumé
) fra den 
9. september 2021
, undtagen for ansøgninger om tilladelse før denne dato, som fastsat i artikel 31 i forordning (EU) 2021/821.
HVORNÅR GÆLDER FORORDNINGEN FRA?
 
Den trådte i kraft den 
09. september 2021
.
BAGGRUND
 
Produkter og teknologi med dobbelt anvendelse opfylder mange civile behov, men de kan også anvendes til forsvar, efterretninger og retshåndhævelse.
Forordning (EU) 2021/821 indeholder en omfattende systemopdatering for at styrke det tidligere eksportkontrolsystem og reagere på nye sikkerhedsrisici samt nye teknologier.
Den udvider samarbejdet mellem medlemsstaterne og Kommissionen, pålægger eksportører særlige forpligtelser og indfører kontroller for at forebygge, at cyberovervågningsteknologier krænker menneskerettigheder.
EU-systemet er tilpasset internationale regler og forpligtelser fra følgende:
Australiengruppen
Missilteknologikontrolregimet
Gruppen af Leverandører af Nukleart Materiale
Wassenaararrangementet for kontrol med eksport af konventionelle våben og produkter og teknologi med dobbelt anvendelse
Konventionen om forbud mod kemiske våben
.
VIGTIGE BEGREBER
Mæglervirksomhed.
 Forhandling eller tilrettelæggelse af transaktioner mellem ikke-EU-lande med henblik på salg eller køb af produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
Produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
 Produkter, herunder software og teknologi, der kan anvendes til både civile og militære formål.
Eksportør.
 Enhver fysisk eller juridisk person, herunder forskere eller partnerskaber, der fysisk sender, elektronisk overfører eller personligt medbringer produkter med dobbelt anvendelse.
HOVEDDOKUMENT
Europa-Parlamentets og Rådets forordning (EU) 
2021/821
 af 
20. maj 2021
 om en EU-ordning for kontrol med eksport, mæglervirksomhed, teknisk bistand, transit og overførsel i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse (omarbejdning) (EUT L 206 af 
11.6.2021
, 
s. 1-461
).
Efterfølgende ændringer til forordning (EU) 2021/821 er blevet indarbejdet i grundteksten. Denne 
konsoliderede udgave
 har ingen retsvirkning.
TILHØRENDE DOKUMENTER
Meddelelse fra Kommissionen til Rådet og Europa-Parlamentet — Revision af eksportkontrolpolitikken: Sikkerhed og konkurrenceevne i en verden i forandring (
COM(2014) 244 final
 af 
24.4.2014
).
Rådets forordning (EF) 
nr. 
428/2009
 af 
5. maj 2009
 om en fællesskabsordning for kontrol med udførsel, overførsel, mæglervirksomhed og transit i forbindelse med produkter med dobbelt anvendelse (omarbejdning) (EUT L 134 af 
29.5.2009
, 
s. 1-269
).
Se den 
konsoliderede udgave
.
seneste ajourføring 
17.11.2023